Professional Documents
Culture Documents
USA KROME ParamG E PDF
USA KROME ParamG E PDF
E 2
Video Manual
Thisvideoillustratesthemainfunctionalityofthe
KROME.
Symbols,
, Note, Tips
Operation Guide
Putsimply,theOperationGuideisdesignedtoanswer
thequestion,HowdoIdothis?
Itexplainsthenamesandfunctionsofeachpartofthe
KROME,basicoperation,anoverviewofeachmode,
howtoeditsounds,recordonthesequencer,andsoon.
Thisguidealsoexplainsthebasicsofeffects,the
Arpeggiator,DrumTrack,andDrumKits.
Finally,italsocontainsatroubleshootingguideaswellas
supplementalinformationsuchasalistofspecifications.
Theparametervaluesshownintheexamplescreensof
thismanualareonlyforexplanatorypurposes,andmaynot
necessarymatchthevaluesthatappearintheDisplayof
yourinstrument.
Thesesymbolsrespectivelyindicateacaution,a
MIDIrelatedexplanation,asupplementarynote,oratip.
MIDI-related explanations
CC#isanabbreviationforControlChangeNumber.
InexplanationsofMIDImessages,numbersinsquare
brackets[]alwaysindicatehexadecimalnumbers.
Parameter Guide
TheParameterGuideisdesignedtoanswerthequestion,
Whatdoesthisdo?
Organizedbymodeandpage,theParameterGuide
includesinformationoneachandeveryparameterinthe
KROME.
PDF versions
TheKROMEPDFmanualsaredesignedforeasynavigation
andsearching.TheyincludeextensivePDFcontents
information,whichgenerallyappearsonthesideofthe
windowinyourPDFreaderandletsyoujumpquicklytoa
specificsection.Allcrossreferencesarehyperlinks,sothat
clickingonthemautomaticallytakesyoutothesourceofthe
reference.
* Allotherproductandcompanynamesaretrademarks
orregisteredtrademarksoftheirrespectiveholders.
ii
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
About this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Program mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
61:OSC1AMSMix1 ........................46
62:OSC1AMSMix2............................. 51
64:OSC2AMSMix1,65:OSC2AMSMix2 ..51
69:CommonKeyTrk1
(CommonKeyboardTrack1) .................51
610:CommonKeyTrk2
(CommonKeyboardTrack2) .................52
11:ProgramBasic .......................... 12
12:NoteOn/Scale................................14
13:ControllersSetup .............................16
71:ARPSetup..............................53
72:ARPScanZone..........................55
74:DrumTrackPattern......................55
75:DrumTrackProgram......................... 56
21:OSC1Setup ............................ 17
22:OSC1Velocity .......................... 19
23:OSC1Pitch............................. 20
25:OSC2Setup ............................ 22
26:OSC2Velocity .......................... 22
27:OSC2Pitch............................. 23
210:PitchEG...................................23
81:Routing................................58
82:InsertFXSetup............................... 59
83:IFX1...................................60
84:IFX2,85:IFX3,86:IFX4,87:IFX5 ........60
Combination mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
COMBI Page Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
COMBI P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
01:ProgramT0108,02:ProgramT0916 .....70
03:MixerT0108,04:MixerT0916 ..........73
05:ARPEGGIATORA,06:ARPEGGIATORB ...... 74
07:ToneAdjust ................................. 75
Controls......................................... 76
COMBI P2: EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
21:EQTrimT0108,22:EQTrimT0916......79
23:EQGainT0108,24:EQGainT0916........... 80
iii
Table of Contents
41:KeyZoneT0108,42:KeyZoneT0916
(KeyboardZonesT0108,T0916)............. 84
43:VelZoneT0108,44:VelZoneT0916
(VelocityZonesT0108,T0916) .............. 85
45:DelayT0108,46:DelayT0916.......... 86
iv
Table of Contents
Routing...................................240
Mixer .......................................... 243
ControllingtheInsertEffectsviaMIDI............. 244
21:FootControllers....................... 202
22:MIDICC#Assign ............................202
In/Out ....................................248
Routing...................................248
Mixer.....................................248
UsingMIDItocontroltheTotalEffect .........248
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
MainOutputs ..............................248
41:ProgramMain......................... 204
42:ProgramSub .......................... 204
43:CombinationMain,44:CombinationSub .. 204
000:NoEffect..............................251
001:StereoCompressor......................251
002:RedComp .............................251
003:StereoLimiter............................... 252
004:MultibandLimiter ......................253
005:St.MasteringLimtr(StereoMasteringLimiter)... 253
006:StereoGate............................253
007:St.Parametric4EQ
(StereoParametric4BandEQ) ...............255
008:St.Graphic7EQ
(StereoGraphic7BandEQ) ..................255
009:St.Exciter/Enhncr(StereoExciter/Enhancer).. 256
010:StereoIsolator..........................256
011:St.Wah/AutoWah(StereoWah/AutoWah)..... 257
012:St.VintageWah
(StereoVintage/CustomWah) ................258
013:VOXWah .............................258
014:St.RandomFilter(StereoRandomFilter)....... 259
015:MultiModeFilter(StereoMultiModeFilter) .... 260
016:St.SubOscillator(StereoSubOscillator) ...260
017:TalkingModulator......................261
018:StereoDecimator.......................261
019:St.AnalogRecord(StereoAnalogRecord)...... 262
61:PatternSetup ...............................211
ArpeggioPatternEdit ............................213
ToolTablet .....................................214
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Effectsineachmode ....................... 235
Dynamicmodulation(Dmod)andTempo
Synchronization .................................236
CommonFXLFOs ...............................237
FXControlBuses................................238
EffectI/O.......................................239
020:OD/Hi.GainWah
(Overdrive/Hi.GainWah)....................263
021:St.GuitarCabinet(StereoGuitarCabinet) ...... 264
022:St.BassCabinet(StereoBassCabinet).......... 264
023:BassAmpModel ............................ 265
024:BassAmp+Cabinet(BassAmpModel+Cabinet) . 265
025:TrebleBST(TrebleBooster)...............266
026:TubePreAmpModel
(TubePreAmpModeling) ...................266
027:St.TubePreAmp
(StereoTubePreAmpModeling) .............266
Table of Contents
028:MicModel+PreAmp
(MicModeling+PreAmp).................. 267
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
068:L/C/RDelay........................... 289
069:Stereo/CrossDelay.......................... 289
070:St.MultitapDelay(StereoMultitapDelay)..... 290
071:St.ModDelay(StereoModulationDelay) . 290
072:St.DynamicDelay(StereoDynamicDelay)..... 291
073:St.AutoPanningDly
(StereoAutoPanningDelay)..................... 292
074:EchoPlus .................................. 293
vi
075:TapeEcho .............................293
076:AutoReverse ..........................293
077:SequenceBPMDly(SequenceBPMDelay) ......294
078:L/C/RBPMDelay............................295
079:StereoBPMDelay...................... 295
080:St.BPMMtapDelay
(StereoBPMMultitapDelay)......................296
081:St.BPMMod.Delay
(StereoBPMModulationDelay) ...................296
082:St.BPMAutoPanDly
(StereoBPMAutoPanningDelay) ............297
083:TapeEchoBPM........................297
Table of Contents
117:OD/HGCho/Flng
(Overdrive/Hi.GainChorus/Flanger) ..............312
118:OD/HGPhaser(Overdrive/Hi.GainPhaser)...312
119:OD/HGMt.Delay
(Overdrive/Hi.GainMultitapDelay)..............313
120:WahAmpSim(WahAmpSimulation) .......313
121:DecimatorAmp(DecimatorAmpSimulation)
...............................................314
122:DecimatorComp
(DecimatorCompressor) .................. 314
123:AmpSimTremolo
(AmpSimulationTremolo) ................. 314
124:Cho/FlngMt.Dly
(Chorus/FlangerMultitapDelay).................315
125:PhaserCho/Flng(PhaserChorus/Flanger)....315
126:ReverbGate ...............................316
156:Exciter//BPMDl
(Exciter//MultitapBPMDelay) ..............323
157:OD/HG//OD/HG
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//Overdrive/Hi.Gain) .......... 324
158:OD/HG//Wah
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//Wah) ..................324
159:OD/HG//Cho/Fln
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//Chorus/Flanger)........324
160:OD/HG//Phaser(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//Phaser). 324
161:OD/HG//BPMDly
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain//MultitapBPMDelay)....324
162:Wah//Wah ............................324
163:Wah//Cho/Flng(Wah//Chorus/Flanger) ...... 325
164:Wah//Phaser ..........................325
165:Wah//BPMDly
(Wah//MultitapBPMDelay) ................325
166:Cho/Fl//Cho/Fl
(Chorus/Flanger//Chorus/Flanger) ................ 325
167:Cho/Fl//Phaser
(Chorus/Flanger//Phaser) ...................325
168:Cho/Fl//BPMDly(Chorus/Flanger//Multitap
BPMDelay)................................325
169:Phaser//Phaser........................326
170:Phaser//BPMDly
(Phaser//MultitapBPMDelay) ..............326
171:BPMDl//BPMDl
(MultitapBPMDelay//MultitapBPMDelay)..326
vii
Table of Contents
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Alternate Modulation Sources (AMS) . . . . .339
AlternateModulationOverview ............. 339
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)List........... 340
AlternateModulationsettings .................... 342
viii
Program mode
PROG Page Select
YoucanselectProgrammodepagesinseveralways.
Page
Alternatively,pressthemodebuttonontheupperleftside
ofthedisplay,andthenpresstherightsideofthemenu.
PLAY
1. PressthePAGEbutton.
P0:Play
P1:Basic/
Controllers
Basicprogramsettings,suchasvoice
assignmode.(seep.12)
SW1,2,andknobsettings.(seep.16)
P2:OSC/Pitch
Oscillatorselectionandpitchsettings.(see
p.17)
P3:Filter
Filter1,2(tone)settings.(seep.26)
P4:Amp/EQ
Amp1,2(volume)settings.(seep.35)
Amp1,2driverandpansettings.(seep.40)
3bandparametricEQsettings.(seep.41)
PageSelectshowsanabbreviatednameforeachpage.
EFFECT
2. Selectthedesiredpageinthedisplay.
ARP&DRUMTRACK
EDIT
ThepagepriortopressingthePAGEbuttonisshownin
lightblue.
Main content
Selectandplayprograms.(seep.2)
OscillatorandDrumtracklevelsettings.
(seep.5)
Simpledrumtrackediting.(seep.6)
Simplearpeggiatorediting.(seep.6)
ToneAdjustsettings.(seep.8)
P5:LFO
LFOsettings.(seep.42)
P6:AMS/
Common
KeyTrack
AMSMixersettings.(seep.46)
Commonkeyboardtrackingsettings.(see
p.52)
P7:Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack
Arpeggiatorsettings.(seep.53)
Drumtracksettings.(seep.55)
P8:Routing/IFX
Oscillatoroutputbusandmastereffect
sendlevelsettings.(seep.58)
Inserteffectrouting,selection,and
settings.(seep.59)
P9:MFX/TFX/
LFO
Mastereffectrouting,selection,and
settings.(seep.62)
Totaleffectselectionandsettings.(see
p.62)
CommonFXLFOsettings(seep.63)
Program mode
Program Select
[AF: 0...127, GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d): 1...128]
SelectpatternsandprogramsfortheDrumTrack.
Hereyoucanselectaprogram.
Adjusttheoscillatoranddrumtracklevels.
To switch programs
MakesimpleeditsfortheArpeggiator.
AdjusttheRealtimeContorols.
ChooseProgramSelect,usethenumerickeys09toenter
aprogramnumber,andpresstheENTERbutton.
UsetheToneAdjustfunctiontomakesimpleeditsfor
programparameters
ChooseProgramSelect,andturntheVALUEdialoruse
theINC/DECbuttons.
AllMIDIdatainProgP0:Playistransmittedand
receivedontheglobalMIDIchannelMIDIChannel
(Global11a).
PresstheProgramSelectPopuptoviewandselectfrom
theBank/ProgramSelectmenuorganizedbybank.
PresstheCategoryPopuptoviewandselectfromthe
Category/ProgramSelectmenuorganizedbycategory.
TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrentProgramor
CombinationintoaSong,andthenputstheKROMEin
recordreadymode.
Youcanuseafootswitchtoselectprograms.(seeFoot
SwitchAssignonpage 202andListofFootSwitch
assignmentsonpage 349)
Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhileyoure
playing,youcanuseAutoSongSetuptostartrecording
immediately.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAutoSong
Setuponpage 106.
YoucanselectprogramsbytransmittingaMIDIProgram
ChangefromaconnectedexternalMIDIdevice.
01: Main
01
Menu
01a
01c
01b
01d
TheVariationbuttonisactiveifBankGMisselected;
pressingitwillswitchthebanksinthefollowingorder:
GMg(1)g(2)...g(8)g(9)GM.
3. Fromthelist,YoucantouchaProgramsnamedirectly,
orusetheINCandDECbuttons.
Usethescrollbartoviewinformationnotcurrentlyshown.
Note:Ifyouwanttofindasoundbyitsprogramname,use
theFindfunction(seep.2).
4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourchoice,orpress
theCancelbuttontoexitwithoutswitchingPrograms.
01e
ThisistheBankcontainingthecurrentProgram.
PresstheBANKAFbuttontoselectabank.
ToselecttheGMbank,usethenumerickeys.
GM:Whileholdingdown[0],press[].
g(1)g(9):Whileholdingdown[0],pressavariation
number[1][9].Ifthebankcontainsnovariation
programs,thebasicGMsoundsetwillbeselected.(An
*symbolisshownatthebeginningoftheprogram
name.)
g(d):Whileholdingdown[0],press[.].
Mode
Category Popup
Tempo
Bank
Program Select
Scroll bar
4. Toselectfromasubcategory,presstheJumptoSub
button.
Find menu
Pressoneofthelefttabstoselectasubcategory.
Note:OnlySubcategoriesthatareassignedtoProgramscan
beselectedfromthetabs.
Toconfirmyourselection,presstheOKbutton.Ifyou
decidetocancel,presstheCancelbutton.Youwillreturnto
themaincategories.
Sub
category
tab
3. PresstheTbutton,andenterthedesiredsearchtext
inthetextfield.Whenyouveenteredthetext,pressthe
OKbutton.
4. IftheIgnoreCasecheckboxisselected,thesearch
willnotdistinguishbetweenuppercaseandlowercase.
5. PresstheFindbuttontosearchforthetextthatyou
entered.
6. UsethePrev.andNextbuttonstofindthepreviousor
nextsound.
Scroll bar
5. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourchoice,orpress
theCancelbuttontoexitwithoutchangingthePro
gram.
7. PresstheOKbuttontoselectaprograminthelist.
Note:YoucanassignacategorytoaProgramintheWrite
Programdialog.
IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,theselectionwillbe
cancelled.
(Tempo)
8. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute,orpresstheCancelbut
tontocancelyourselection.
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentProgram,whichappliestothe
arpeggiator,temposyncedLFOs,andtemposyncedeffects.
Category
[00...17/00...07]
Here,youcanselectprogramsbymaincategoryandsub
category.Allprogramsareclassifiedintoeighteenmain
categories,andeachcategoryisclassifiedintoeightsub
categories.Youcanusethesemaincategoriesandsub
categoriestofindandselectprograms.Hereyoucanselecta
programbyitsmaincategoryandsubcategory.
040.00...300.00allowsyoutosetaspecifictempoinBPM,
with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousingthestandard
dataentrycontrols,youcanusetheTEMPOknobtoadjust
thebpm,orjustplayafewquarternotesontheTAPbutton.
EXTisdisplayediftheMIDIClock(Global11a)issetto
ExternalMIDIorExternalUSB.Thisisalsoshownifthe
MIDIClocksettingisAutoandMIDIclockdataisbeing
receivedfromanexternaldevice.IfthetemposourceisEXT,
thearpeggiatoretc.willsynchronizetoMIDIclockdata
fromanexternalMIDIdevice.
Mode
Thisindicatesthemodethatscurrentlyselected.
3. Selectaprogramfromthelist.YoucantouchaPro
gramsnamedirectly,orusetheINCandDECbuttons.
Whenyoupressthisbutton,themodemenuwillappear.In
themodemenu,pressthenameofthedesiredmode.Ifyou
selectthesamemodewhereyouwerepriortoaccessingthe
modemenu,thePageSelectmenuofthatmodewillappear.If
youpresstheareatotherightofthemodename,thepage
selectmenuforthecorrespondingmodewillappear.
UsethescrollbartobrowsethroughallProgramsinthe
Category.
Toclosethemenu,presstheClosebuttonortheEXIT
button.
Youcansearchforaprogrambyaportionofitsname(see
p.2).
IfyouaccessedthismenufromGlobalorMediamode,it
willincludeanitemnamedReturn.PressingReturnwill
takeyoubacktothemodeandpagewhereyouwerepriorto
selectingGlobalorMediamode.
Note:OnlyCategoriesandSubcategoriesthatareassigned
toprogramscanbeselectedfromthetabs.
Scroll bar
Program mode
TONE CONTROLS
Stop Watch
Whenyoupressthebuttonontheupperrightsideofthe
display,thescreenwillshowtheamountoftimethathas
elapsedsincethepowerwasturnedon.Youcanusethe
START/STOPbuttonandRESETbuttontomeasurea
duration.
START/STOP:Starts/stopsthestopwatch.
RESET:Resetsthestopwatchto000:00:00.
[000...127]
ThisknobscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAandB,
andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#74.
[000...127]
ThisknobscalestheresonanceofFiltersAandB,and
transmitsandreceivesMIDICC#71.
[000...127]
ThisknobscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutoff
frequenciesofFiltersAandB.Italsotransmitsandreceives
MIDICC#79.
Thefollowinginformationfortheselectedprogramis
displayed:
ThisknobscalesthereleasetimeoftheFilterandAmpEGs,
andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#72.
OSC Pictures
USER CONTROLS
Thisshowsagraphicfortheoscillator.Inthecaseofdouble
oscillatorsordoubledrums,theOctave(footageofthe
oscillatorsbasicpitch)isalsoshown.
Ifyouwanttochangetheoscillatorsgraphic,doubleclick
thegraphic,andchangethesettinginthemenu.Youcan
alsosetthisinP1ProgramBasicOSCPicture(seep.12).
SW1, SW2
ThesearethefunctionscontrolledbytheSW1,SW2
switches.
01c: Controls
ThisindicatesthesettingsoftheREALTIMECONTROLS
knobs(thenameoftheoperableparametersandtheir
currentvalue),andthe3bandEQsettings.
ThecurrentlyselectedREALTIMECONTROLSknob
functionsandtheEQsettingsareshown.UsetheSELECT
buttontoselectthefunctioncontrolledbytheknobs.
ThefunctionsoftheTONECONTROLSknobsarefixed.
YoucanassignvariousfunctionstotheUSERCONTROLS
knobs.AMIDIcontrolchangeisassignedtoeachfunction.
Whenyoumoveaknob,itsendsoutthecorresponding
MIDICC.
Unlessotherwisenoted,scalingmeansthatthe
parametersareattheirprogrammedvalueswhenthe
controllerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthecontrollerisat
0,andattheirmaximumwhenthecontrollerisat127.For
anotherlookatthis,pleaseseethediagrambelow.
CC parameter scaling
99
Parameter
Value
[000...127]
1...4
[000...127]
YoucansetRealtimeControlsUSERknobs14toawide
varietyofmodulationfunctions,usingtheP1:Basic/
ControllersControllersSetuppage.
ManyofthefunctionsscaleaparticularsetofProgram
parameters.AllofthesettingsalsocorrespondtoMIDI
messagesusuallyCCs.
ARP CONTROLS
Thefunctionsofknobs14arefixed.Theknobswillcontrol
thedurationofthearpeggiatednotes,theirvelocity,the
pitchrange,andthelengthofthearpeggiopattern.
GATE
[64...+00...+63]
Adjuststheduration(gatetime)ofthearpeggiatednotes
(SeeGateonpage 54).
VELOCITY
[64...+00...+63]
Adjuststhevelocityofthearpeggiatednotes(SeeVelocity
onpage 54).
SWING
[64...+00...+63]
Adjuststhedegreeofshuffleforthearpeggiopattern(See
Swingonpage 54).
STEP
[64...+00...+63]
Thischangesthelengthandresolutionofthearpeggio
pattern.
Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwillshortenthepatterns
length(Length)inunitsofonehalf.Turningtheknob
towardtherightwillshortentheintervalbetween
arpeggiatednotes(Resolution)inunitsofonehalf.When
theknobisinthecenter(12oclock),thenumberofsteps
andthespeedwillbeasspecifiedbytheLengthand
Resolution(SeeResolution*onpage 54).
Thisindicatesthe3bandEQsettings.Youcaneditthe
values.
00
0
64
CC Value
127
Low[18.00...+00.0...+18.0]:Adjuststhegainofthe80Hz
lowshelvingEQin0.5dBsteps.
Mid[Hz][100...10.0k]:Adjuststhecenterfrequencyofthe
midsweepableEQ.
Mid[18.00...+00.0...+18.0]:Adjuststhegainofthemid
sweepableEQin0.5dBsteps.
High[18.00...+00.0...+18.0]:Adjuststhegainofthe10kHz
highshelvingEQin0.5dBsteps.
01d: Effect
IFX 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
MFX 1, 2
[000...127]
03
Menu
01a
TFX
Hereyoucanviewtheeffectsthatareassignedtotheinsert
effects,mastereffects,andtotaleffect.
03b
03a
Forthemastereffectsyoucanadjustthesendamounts.
TheMASTERFXandTOTALFXbuttonsrespectivelyturn
mastereffects1/2andthetotaleffecton/off(seeGlobal).
ChangingtheEnableMFX1&2andEnableTFX
settingswillrespectivelytransmitthecontrolchange
messagesCC#94(effectcontrol4)orCC#95(effect
control5).Thetransmittedvaluewillbe0foroff,and
127foron.
Thismetershowsthenoteonvelocityvalue.
OSC Play/Mute:
Thisindicatesthenoteonvelocityvaluesontheglobal
MIDIchannel,producedbythekeyboard,MIDIIN,or
arpeggiator.(Ifmultiplenoteonmessagesarereceived
simultaneously,thehighestvelocitywillbedisplayed.)
OSC1 Play/Mute
ThemeterwillrespondevenifKeyZoneorVelZone
settingsaresetsothatthenotedoesnotactuallysound.
Thismeterindicatesthenoteonvelocityvalue;itdoesnot
respondtochangesintheVolumeknobsetting,norto
changesintheleveloftheaudiosignalproducedbythe
Filter,Amp,EG,LFO,EQ,oreffects.
Mute:Oscillator1willbemuted(silent).
OSC2 Play/Mute
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
[Play, Mute]
Play:Oscillator2willsound.
Mute:Oscillator2willbemuted(silent).
Note:OSC2Play/Mutecannotbesetforaprogramwhose
OscillatorModeisSingleorDrums.
[Play, Mute]
Play:Oscillator1willsound.
[Play, Mute]
Play:Thedrumtrackwillsound.
Mute:Thedrumtrackwillbemuted(silent).
OSC Solo:
OSC1 Solo
[Off, On]
SwitchestheSolostatuson/offforoscillator1.
OSC2 Solo
[Off, On]
SwitchestheSolostatuson/offforoscillator2.
[Off, On]
SwitchestheSolostatuson/offforthedrumtrack.
Note:Soloappliestooscillators1and2,thedrumtrack.
Note:OSC2Solocannotbesetforaprogramwhose
OscillatorModeisSingleorDrums.
Note:TheSoloOn/Offsettingisnotsavedwhenyouwrite
theprogram.
Exclusive Solo
[Off, On]
ThemenusExclusiveSoloparameteralsoaffectstheway
thatSoloworks.IfExclusiveSoloisoff(unchecked),
MultipleSoloswillbeactive,allowingyoutoturnSoloon/
offformorethanoneoftheitems:oscillators1and2,and
thedrumtrack.EachtimeyoupressaSolobutton,thesolo
settingwilltoggleonandoff.
IfExclusiveSoloison(checked),onlyoneoftheapplicable
itemscanbesoloed.Inthismode,pressingaSolobutton
automaticallydisablesanyprevioussolos.
Tip:YoucanalsotoggleExclusiveSolobyholdingENTER
andpressing2onthenumerickeypad.
Program mode
OSC Volume:
OSC 1 Volume
[000...127]
05: Arpeggiator
ThisslideradjuststhevolumeofOscillator1.
05
Menu
01a
OSC 2 Volume
[000...127]
ThisslideradjuststhevolumeofOscillator2.
05a
[000...127]
05b
Adjuststhevolumeofthedrumtrack.
Velocity Meter
Thismetershowsthenoteonvelocityvalueoftheglobal
MIDIchannelandthedrumtracksProgMIDICh(seep.5).
Pattern Bank
[Preset, User]
Pattern No.
[P000...605, U000...999]
ArpeggiatorparametersareeditedinP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack),butmajorparameterscanbe
editedhereaswell.WhenyouareplayinginProgP0:Play,
youcaneditthearpeggiatorinrealtime,suchaschanging
thearpeggiopatternetc.
Towrite(save)theeditedcontent,useWriteProgram.You
canalsousetheTEMPOknob,TAPbuttonandthearpeggio
control(ARP)knobsGATE,VELOCITY,SWING,andSTEP
toeditthearpeggioinrealtime.
Selectthepatternyouwanttouseinthedrumtrack.Youcan
createuserpatternsinSeqP10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEdit.
ARP CONTROLS
Selecttheprogramthatwillplaythedrumtrackpattern.
Note:OnlyprogramsoftheDrumscategorycanbeselected.
TheMIDIchannelofthedrumtrackisspecifiedbythe
GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicpageDrumTrackProg
MIDICh.MIDImessagetransmissionforapatternis
specifiedbyProgMIDIOut.Programchangesarenot
transmittedorreceived.
High Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0dB]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10 kHzHighShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Mid Frequency
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0dB]
ThiscontrolsthegainoftheMidSweepEQ,inincrementsof
0.5 dB.
Low Gain
GATE
[64...+00...+63]
VELOCITY
[64...+00...+63]
SWING
[64...+00...+63]
seep.4,p.54
STEP
[64...+00...+63]
seep.4
[100Hz...10kHz]
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ.
Mid Gain
ThisshowsthevalueofeachparameterfortheARP
assignmentsoftheREALTIMECONTROLSknobs(seep.4
andp.54).
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0dB]
05b: Arpeggiator
Pattern
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80 HzLowShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Thisshowsagraphicofthestepsoftheuserarpeggio
pattern.
Note:TheseparameterscanalsobesetfromP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack).
Resolution
Octave
[ , , , , , , , ]
[1, 2, 3, 4]
Sort
[Off, On]
0:WriteProgramseep.64
Latch
[Off, On]
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
Key Sync.
[Off, On]
Keyboard
[Off, On]
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
Makesettingsfortheprogramarpeggiator.Formore
information,pleaseseePROGP7:ARP/DT(Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack)onpage 53.
Note:TheseparameterscanalsobesetfromP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack).
99
0:WriteProgramseep.64
Parameter
Value
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyArpeggiatorseep.66
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
As Programmed
00
99
+99
07b
07c
TheToneAdjustfunctionassignsimportantprogram
parametersandeasyeditparameterstotheswitchesand
slidersinthedisplayforquickeditsofselectedparameters.
Tip:InCombinationandSequencermodes,ToneAdjustalso
letsyoueditProgramparameterswithouttheneedtosavea
differentversionoftheoriginalProgram.Formore
informationonToneAdjustinthesemodes,pleasesee0
7c:ToneAdjustonpage 75andpage 115.
AfewoftheProgramparameterscontrolledbyRelative
ToneAdjustarebipolar,meaningthattheycanbeeither
positiveornegative(insteadofjustpositive).Whenthese
Programparametersaresettonegativevalues,theTone
Adjustparametermaybehavedifferentlyfromthe
descriptionabove.
Forinstance,iftheEGIntensityissettoanegativevalue,
RelativeToneAdjustvalueswillrangefrom0to99,the
inverseofthediagramabove.EGSustainworksdifferently;
ifitssettoanegativevalue,ToneAdjustvaluesrangefrom
0downtotheprogrammedvalue,andthenupto+99,as
shownbelow.
Relative Tone Adjust parameter scaling: EG Sustain
99
Parameter
Value
00
As Programmed
99
99
+99
RelativeparameterstypicallyadjusttwoormoreProgram
parameterssimultaneously.Forinstance,F/AEGAttack
TimeaffectsatotalofsixProgramparameters.Thevalueof
theRelativeparametershowstheamountofchangetothese
underlyingProgramparameters.
MetaparametersdontaffectProgramparametersdirectly.
Instead,theyaffectthewaythatotherToneAdjust
parameterswork.Forinstance,MultisampleMin#and
Max#settheminimumandmaximumvaluesoftheTone
AdjustMultisampleparameter.
IftheRelativeparameterissetto0(thesliderinthedisplay
isatthecenterposition),thevalueofthecorresponding
programparameterwillnotchange.
Thedefinitionsofhigherandlowersettingscanvary,
dependingonthespecificparameter.Unlessnoted
otherwise,theyworkasfollows:
WhentheRelativeparameterisat+99(themaximum),the
Programparametersareallattheirmaximumaswell.
Similarly,whentheRelativeparameterisat99(the
minimum),theProgramparametersareatzero.
ToneAdjusteditsaresavedintwodifferentways,
dependingonwhethertheparameterisRelativeor
Absolute.(Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAbsolute
(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameterbelow.)
EditstoRelativeparametersaffectthesoundimmediately,
butdontchangetheunderlyingProgramparameter
settingsuntiltheProgramissaved.WhentheProgramis
saved,theKROMEcalculatesthecombinedeffectsofTone
AdjustanddedicatedCCmodulation(fromtheRealTime
knobs,forinstance),andsavestheresultsintotheProgram
parametersdirectly.Atthatpoint,alloftheRelative
parametersareresetto0.
EditstoAbsoluteparametersareimmediatelyreflectedin
thecorrespondingonscreenparameters,andviceversa.
Program mode
Note:SystemexclusivemessagesarenotToneAdjust
parameters;theyarelinkedtotheactualvalue.Forexample,
ifasliderinthedisplayisassignedtocontrolfilter
resonance,andyoumovethissliderwhilerecordingtothe
sequencer,theslidermovementwillberecorded,butthe
changeinfilterresonancewillnotberecorded.Thismeans
thatifyoulaterreassigntheToneAdjustparameterto
controlLFO1Speed,playingbackthesequencerwillcause
theLFOspeed(notthefilterresonance)tochange.
Stored Value
Thisshowstheoriginalvalueoftheparameter,beforethe
effectsofToneAdjust.ItappliesonlytoToneAdjust
parameterswhichcontrolasingleProgramparameter.
IfyouunassignaRelativeparameterfromacontrol,itwill
reverttothisvalue.
Switches 1...8
ToneAdjustswitchesinthedisplayactalittledifferently
thansliders.
WhenaswitchisassignedtoaRelativeparameter,oran
Absoluteparameterwithmorethantwostates:
SwitchOn=OnValue(seebelow)
SwitchOff=theProgramsstoredvalue
WhenaswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
parameter,suchasHold,theswitchstatusdirectlyreflects
theparametervalue:
SwitchOn=On
Assign
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
On/Off
(Tempo)
Thisareadisplaysinformationabouttheprogramselected
forediting:theprogrambank/number/name,andthe
tempousedtocontrolthearpeggiatoretc.Formore
information,pleasesee01a:ProgramSelectonpage 2.
Assignment
SwitchOff=Off
Value
Value
Assign
ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe
displayedswitch.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,
pleaseseeCommonToneAdjustParametersandTone
AdjustParametersbelow.
On Value
WhentheswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
parameter,suchasHold,thiswillalwaysbethesameasthe
SwitchStatus(seebelow).
Switch Status
Control
[SW1...8, SL1...8]
ThisisthecontrollerinthedisplaytowhichtheToneAdjust
parameterisassigned.
SW:Switch
Assignment
Thisshowsthefullnameoftheparameterassignedtothe
controller.YoucanchangethisusingtheAssignparameter,
below.
Sliders 1...8
ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe
displayedslider.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,please
seeCommonToneAdjustParametersandToneAdjust
Parametersbelow.
Assign
Value
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.Therangeof
valueswillvarydependingontheparameterassignedtothe
control.
Thisshowsthetypeofparameter,whichrelatestohowedits
totheparameterareadjustedandsaved.Formore
information,pleaseseeAbsolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Meta
parameteronpage 7.
[Off, On]
ThissimplyshowswhethertheswitchisOnorOff.
Assign
SL:Slider
Type
[Depends on parameter]
TheparameterissettothisvaluewhentheswitchisOn.
Value
PerOscillatorparametersapplytoOSC1and2individually,
andaremarkedassuch:OSC1andOSC2.
AmpEGAttackTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheAmpEGs.
Eachslidercanbeassignedtoonlyoneparameter,andeach
parametercanbeassignedtoonlyoneslider.
AmpEGDecayTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheAmpEGs.
Toswapaparameterfromoneslidertoanother,youllneed
tofirstunassignitfromtheoldslider,andthenassignitto
thenewslider.
AmpEGSustainLevel.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheAmpEGs.
Value
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.Therangeof
valueswilldependontheparameterassignedtotheslider.
AmpEGReleaseTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheAmpEGs.
PitchEGAttackTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheattacktimesofthePitchEG.
PitchEGDecayTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesofthePitchEG.
TheseparametersaffectbothOscillators1and2.
PitchEGSustainLevel(N/A).(99...+99)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsofthePitchEG.
Unlessotherwisenoted,alloftheCommonToneAdjust
parametersareRelative.
PitchEGReleaseTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesofthePitchEG.
Note:Attherightofeachparameter,the(valuerangeand
CC#)areshowninparentheses.
PitchLFO1Intensity.(99...+99,CC#77)
ThisscalestheeffectofLFO1onthePitch.
Off.ThismeansthattheToneAdjustcontrolhasnoeffect.
99removestheLFOmodulationentirely.+99means
maximummodulationinthesamedirection,positiveor
negative,astheoriginalProgram.
FilterCutoff.(99...+99,CC#74)
Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallofthefiltersatonce.It
affectsbothFiltersAandB.
FilterResonance.(99...+99,CC#71)
Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthefiltersatonce.Itaffects
bothFiltersAandB.
FilterEGIntensity.(99...+99,CC#79)
ThisscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutofffrequency.
ItaffectsFiltersAandBsimultaneously.
99meansnomodulation.+99meansmaximum.
Modulationisinthesamedirection,positiveornegative,as
theoriginalProgram.Forinstance,iftheoriginalPrograms
EGIntensitywassetto25,thensettingtheToneAdjustto
+99movestheEGIntensityto99.
AmpVelocityIntensity.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheeffectofvelocityontheAmplevel.
99removesthevelocitymodulationentirely.+99means
maximummodulationinthesamedirection,positiveor
negative,astheoriginalProgram.
F/AEGAttackTime.(99...+99,CC#73)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs,along
withotherrelatedparameters.
LFO1Speed.(99...+99,CC#76)
ThisscalesLFO1sfrequency.WhentheLFOisinMIDI/
Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.Formore
information,pleaseseeFrequencyonpage 42.
LFO1Fade.(99...+99)
ThisscalesLFO1sfadeintime.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeFadeonpage 43.
LFO1Delay.(99...+99,CC#78)
ThisscalesLFO1sdelaytimethetimebetweennoteon
andtheonsetoftheLFO.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Delayonpage 43.
ThisparameterinteractswithCC#78.
LFO1Stop.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhetherLFO1isstopped
orrunning.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeStopon
page 42.
ThePROGsettingrestorestheProgramsoriginalvalues.
Forexample,ifyousetthistoPROGwhentheoscillator1
LFOisstoppedandoscillator2isplaying,theoriginal
settingoftheparameterwillbeused.
Whenthevalueis+1ormore,thisalsoaffectstheAmpEGs
StartandAttackLevels,StartLevelAMS,andAttackTime
AMS,asdescribedbelow:
LFO2Speed.(99...+99)
ThisscalesLFO2sfrequency.WhentheLFOisinMIDI/
Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.Formore
information,pleaseseeFrequencyonpage 42.
Betweenvaluesof+1and+25,theStartLevel,StartLevel
AMS,andAttackTimeAMSwillchangefromtheir
programmedvaluesto0.Overthesamerange,theAttack
Levelwillchangefromitsprogrammedvalueto99.
LFO2Fade.(99...+99)
ThisscalesLFO2sfadeintime.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeFadeonpage 43.
F/AEGDecayTime.(99...+99,CC#75)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterandAmp
EGs.ItinteractswithCC#75.
F/AEGSustainLevel.(99...+99,CC#70)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterandAmpEGs.
F/AEGReleaseTime.(99...+99,CC#72)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs.
FilterEGAttackTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterEGs.
FilterEGDecayTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterEGs.
LFO2Delay.(99...+99)
ThisscalesLFO2sdelaytimethetimebetweennoteon
andtheonsetoftheLFO.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Delayonpage 43.
LFO2Stop.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhetherLFO2isstopped
orrunning.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeStopon
page 42.
CommonLFOSpeed.(99...+99)
ThisscalestheCommonLFOsfrequency.WhentheLFOis
inMIDI/Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.
FilterEGSustainLevel.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterEGs.
Unison.(Off/On,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparameterturnsUnisononandoff.Formore
information,pleaseseeUnisononpage 13.
FilterEGReleaseTime.(99...+99)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheFilterEGs.
NumberOfVoices.(2...6,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametersetsthenumberofUnisonvoices.
Program mode
IfUnisonisnotOn,thisparameterhasnoeffect.Formore
information,pleaseseeNumberofVoicesonpage 13.
Detune.(00...99,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametersetstheamountofdetuning
betweentheUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnotOn,this
parameterhasnoeffect.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Detuneonpage 13.
Thickness.(Off/01...09,Absolute)
ThisAbsoluteparametersetsthepatternofdetuning
betweentheUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnotOn,orifDetune
issetto0,thisparameterhasnoeffect.Formore
information,pleaseseeThicknessonpage 13.
Per-Oscillator parameters
TheseparametersaffecteachOscillatorseparately.Inthe
list,theparametersforOscillator1appearfirst,witheach
nameprefacedbyOSC1;theparametersforOscillator2
appearnext,prefacedbyOSC2.
Unlessotherwisespecified,allofthePerOscillator
parametersareAbsolute.
Note:Inthelistbelow,theitemsinparenthesesare(value,
edittype)respectively.
Tune.(1200...+1200,Relative)
ThisRelativeparameteraddstoorsubtractsfromthe
OscillatorsTunesetting,asdescribedunderTuneon
page 17.
Transpose.(60...+60,Relative)
ThisRelativeparameteraddstoorsubtractsfromthe
OscillatorsTransposesetting,asdescribedunder
Transposeonpage 17.
Note:aswithTranspose,below,thisisasimpleadditionor
subtraction,asopposedtothemorecomplexscaling
function.
MS/DKitSelect.(PROG/0...540,Absolute)
InSingleorDoublePrograms,thisletsyouselectanew
MultisamplefortheOscillator.InDrumPrograms,itlets
youselectadifferentDrumKit.
Ingeneral,itsbesttousethisinconjunctionwiththeMS
TypeandMS/DKitBankparameters,asdescribedbelow.
PROGrestorestheProgramsoriginalMultisamples(orthe
DrumKit,foraDrumProgram),includingallvelocity
rangesandReverseandStartOffsetsettings.
10
YoucanalsolimittherangeofthecontrolbyusingtheMin
#andMax#parameters,describedbelow.
modulationfromLFO1,asdescribedunderIntensitytoA
onpage 30.
FilterLFO1IntensitytoB.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterBcutoff
modulationfromLFO1,asdescribedunderIntensitytoB
onpage 31.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
FilterLFO2IntensitytoA.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterAcutoff
modulationfromLFO2,asdescribedunderIntensitytoA
onpage 30.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyToneAdjustseep.65
4:ResetToneAdjustseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
FilterLFO2IntensitytoB.(99...+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterBcutoff
modulationfromLFO2,asdescribedunderIntensitytoB
onpage 31.
PitchLFO1AMSIntensity.(12.00...+12.00,Absolute)
YoucanuseanAMSsource,suchasaftertouch,tomodulate
thedepthofpitchmodulation(vibrato)fromLFO1.This
controlstheintensityofthatAMSmodulation.Formore
information,pleaseseeIntensityonpage 21.
PitchLFO2AMSIntensity.(12.00...+12.00,Absolute)
ThisissimilartoPitchLFO1AMSIntensity,above.
Default settings
SW1
[OSC1]Transpose
SW2
[OSC2]Transpose
SW3
[OSC1]Tune
SW4
[OSC2]Tune
SW5
[OSC1]MS/DKitSelect
SW6
FilterCutoff
SW7
FilterResonance
SW8
FilterEGIntensity
Slider1
[OSC1&2]PitchStretch
Slider2
[OSC1]FilterLFO1IntA
Slider3
[OSC1]AmpLFOInt
Slider4
[OSC1]Drive
Slider5
F/AEGAttackTime
Slider6
F/AEGDecayTime
Slider7
F/AEGSustainLevel
Slider8
F/AEGReleaseTime
11
Program mode
11a
[Poly, Mono]
Selectthebasicvoiceallocationmode.Dependingonwhich
oneyouselect,variousotheroptionswillappear,suchas
PolyLegato(Polymodeonly)andUnison(Monomode
only).
11b
Poly:Theprogramwillplaypolyphonically,allowingyou
playchords.
ThispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsfortheProgram.
Amongotherthings,youcan:
SetuptheProgramtobeaSingle,aDouble,aDrumKit,
oraDoubleDrumKit.
SettheProgramtoplaypolyphonicallyor
monophonically.
OSC Picture 1, 2
[MS Names...]
Hereyoucanspecifyagraphicforoscillators1and2that
willbeshowninthemainP0Playpage.
Toopenthemenu,pressthepopupbuttonorpressthe
previewareatwiceinsuccession.
Mono:Theprogramwillplaymonophonically,producing
onlyonenoteatatime.
Poly Legato
[Off, On]
PolyLegatoisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeisset
toPoly.
Legatomeanstoplaynotesothattheyaresmoothand
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnoteis
released.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached.
On(checked):Whenyouplayalegatophrase,onlythefirst
noteofthatphrase(andwithinapproximatelythefirst
30msec)willusethenormalmultisamplestartpoint
specifiedbyStartOffset(Prog21a);allsubsequentnotes
willusethelegatostartpointspecifiedforeach
multisample.
Note:Thisisausefulwaytosimulatethepercussiveattack
ofatonewheeltypeorgan.
Off(unchecked):Noteswillalwaysusethesettingofthe
StartOffset,regardlessofwhetheryouplaylegatoor
detached.
WithsomeMultisamples,PolyLegatomaynothave
anyeffect.
Single Trigger
[Off, On]
SingleTriggerisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeis
settoPoly.
On(checked):Whenyouplaythesamenoterepeatedly,the
previousnotewillbesilencedbeforethenextnoteis
sounded,sothatthetwodonotoverlap.
Off(unchecked):Whenyouplaythesamenoterepeatedly,
thenoteswilloverlap.
Mono Legato
[Off, On]
ThisisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeissetto
Mono.
Legatomeanstoplaynotessothattheyaresmoothand
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnoteis
released.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached.
WhenMonoLegatoisOn,thefirstnoteinalegatophrase
willsoundnormally,andthensubsequentnoteswillhavea
smoothersound,formoregentletransitionsbetweenthe
notes.
TheModeparameter,below,switchesbetweentwodifferent
MonoLegatoeffects,eachofwhichachievesthis
smoothnessinadifferentway.Seethedescriptionofthat
parameterformoredetails.
Tochoosethegraphic,pressthegraphicviewatthebottom
ofthemenuortheleftorrightgraphicsintheupperpart.To
confirmyourselection,presstheOKbuttonorpressthe
uppermiddlegraphictwiceinsuccession.
12
On(checked):Whenyouplaywithlegatophrasing,the
noteswithinalegatophrasewillsoundsmoother,according
tothesettingoftheModeparameter,below.
Off(unchecked):Legatophrasingwillproducethesame
soundasdetachedplaying.
Mode
Voice
Detune
ThisparameterisavailableonlywhenMonoLegatoisOn.
12
Normal:Whenyouplaylegato,themultisample,envelopes,
andLFOswillnotbereset;onlythepitchoftheoscillator
willchange.Thissettingisparticularlyeffectiveforwind
instrumentsandanalogsynthsounds.
2
3
+12
Withthisoption,thepitchmayoccasionallybe
incorrect,dependingonwhichmultisampleyouplay,
andwhereonthekeyboardyouplay.
UseLegatoOffset:Whenyouplaylegato,thesecondand
subsequentnoteswillusethelegatostartpointspecifiedfor
eachmultisample,ratherthantheStartOffset(StartOffset
21a)setting.
Thisiseffectivewhenusedwithamultisampleforwhich
youveassignedaspecificlegatooffsetpoint.Forexample,
youmightuseittocontroltheattackofabreathy,slow
attacksaxsound.Onsomemultisamples,thiswillhaveno
effect.
EnvelopesandLFOswillstillbereset,astheyarewith
detachedplaying.
Priority
PriorityisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeissetto
Mono.
Thisparameterdetermineswhathappenswhenmorethan
onenoteisbeinghelddown.
Low:Thelowestnotewillsound.Manyvintage,
monophonicanalogsynthsworkthisway
High:Thehighestnotewillsound.
Asanotherexample,letssaythatDetuneisstillsetto24
andThicknessisstillOff,butNumberofvoicesissetto4:
Voiceonewillstillbedetuneddownby12cents,voicetwo
willbedetuneddownby4cents,voicethreewillbedetuned
upby4cents,andvoice4willbedetunedupby12cents.
Voice
Detune
12
2
3
+4
+12
Thickness
[Off, 01...09]
ThicknessisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
Thisparametercontrolsthecharacterofthedetuningforthe
unisonvoices.
Off:Unisonvoiceswillbeevenlydistributedacrossthe
Detunerange,asshownabove.
0109:Unisonvoiceswillbedetunedinanasymmetricway,
increasingthecomplexityofthedetune,andchangingthe
wayinwhichthedifferentpitchesbeatagainstoneanother.
Thiscreatesaneffectsimilartovintageanalogsynthesizers,
inwhichoscillatorswouldfrequentlydriftslightlyoutof
tune.Highernumbersincreasetheeffect.
Last:Themostrecentlyplayednotewillsound.
Unison
[On, Off]
UnisoncanbeusedinMonomode.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
On(checked):WhenUnisonison,theProgramusestwoor
morestacked,detunedvoicestocreateathicksound.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
UsetheNumberofVoicesandDetuneparameterstosetthe
numberofvoicesandamountofdetuning,andthe
Thicknessparametertocontrolthecharacterofthe
detuning.
Off(unchecked):TheProgramplaysnormally.
Number of Voices
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
[2...6]
Thiscontrolsthenumberofdetunedvoicesthatwillbe
playedforeachnotewhenusingUnison.Itappliesonly
whenUnisonisOn.
Detune
[00...99 cents]
DetuneisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
ThisparametersetsthetuningspreadfortheUnisonvoices,
incents(1/100ofasemitone).TheThicknessparameter,
below,controlshowthevoicesaredistributedacrossthe
detuneamount.WhenThicknessisOff,thevoicesare
distributedevenly,centeredaroundthebasicpitch.
Forinstance,letssaythattheNumberofvoicesparameter
issetto3,Detuneissetto24,andThicknessisOff:
Voiceonewillbedetuneddownby12cents,voicetwowill
notbedetuned,andvoicethreewillbedetunedupby12
cents.
13
Program mode
12: Note-On/Scale
12
Menu
12c
12a
Holdisalsousefulforsimulatingthetopoctavesofan
acousticpiano,inwhichnotesalwayssustainuntiltheyfade
outnaturally,regardlessofhowlongyouholdthekey.
TheHoldBottomandHoldTopparametersaredesigned
forexactlythispurpose.Theyletyoulimittheeffectofthe
Holdparametertoaspecificrangeofthekeyboard.
Hold Bottom
12b
[C1...G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction.
Hold Top
12d
[C1...G9]
ThissetsthehighestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction.
Here,youcanmakethefollowingsettings.
MakekeyboardsplitsettingsforOSC1,OSC2,andHold.
Enable/disablethehalfdamperfunction.
Ahalfdamperpedalisaspecialtypeofcontinuousfoot
pedal,suchastheKorgDS1H.Incomparisontoastandard
footswitch,halfdamperpedalsoffermoresubtlecontrolof
sustain,whichcanbeespeciallyusefulforpianosounds.
Selectthebasicscaleoftheprogram.
OSC 1 Bottom
[C1...G9]
TheKROMEwillautomaticallysensewhenahalfdamperis
connectedtotherearpanelDAMPERinput.Forproper
operation,youwillalsoneedtocalibratethepedal,using
theHalfDamperCalibrationcommandintheGlobalmenu.
Theoffandfullonpositionsofthehalfdamperworkjust
likeastandardfootswitch.InconjunctionwiththeEnable
HalfDamperparameter,below,intermediatepositions
allowagraduatedcontrolofsustain,similartothedamper
pedalofanacousticpiano.
ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichOscillator1willplay.
Enable Half-Damper
OSC 1 Top
WhenthisisOn(checked),HalfDamperpedals,normal
sustainpedals,andMIDICC#64willallmodulatetheAmp
EG,asdescribedbelow.
[C1...G9]
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichOscillator1willplay.
OSC 2 Bottom
[C1...G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichOscillator2willplay.
OSC 2 Top
[C1...G9]
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichOscillator2willplay.
Hold
[On, Off]
Holdislikepermanentlypressingdownonthesustain
pedal.Inotherwords,notescontinuetosoundasifyou
wereholdingdownthekeyevenafteryouliftyourfingers
fromthekeyboard.
UnlesstheSustainLevelissetto0inAmpEG1(andAmp
EG2inaDoubleProgram),thesoundwillplayforthe
entirelengthofthemultisample(s).
[On, Off]
WhenthisisOff(unchecked),thepedalsandMIDICC#64
willstillholdnotesasusual,butwillnotmodulatetheAmp
EG.
CC#64 Value
If Sustain = 0
If Sustain = 1 or more
On(checked):TheHoldfunctionisenabledfortherange
setbytheHoldBottomandHoldTopparameters,below.
1x
1x
32
2.1x
2.1x
Off(unchecked):Noteswillplaynormally.Thisisthe
defaultsetting.
64
3.2x
80
5.9x
96
22.3x
127
55x
Holdcanbeespeciallyusefulfordrumprograms,sinceit
letsthedrumsamplesringoutnaturally.Ingeneral,when
yousettheOscillatorModetoDrums,itsgoodtosetHold
toOn.
3.2x
OnceyouveturnedonHoldforadrumprogram,the
functioniscontrolledonanotebynotebasisaccordingto
settingswithintheselectedDrumKit.
OSC1 Delay
IfakeysEnableNoteOffReceiveparameter(Global54a)
isunchecked,thenotewillbeheld.
ThisismostusefulinDoublePrograms,fordelayingone
oscillatorinrelationtotheother.
IfthekeysEnableNoteOffReceiveparameterischecked,
itwillnotbeheld.
KeyOffisaspecialsetting.Insteadofdelayingthesoundby
aparticularamountoftime,thesoundwillplayassoonas
youreleasethekey.Youcanusethistocreatetheclick
heardwhenaharpsichordnoteisreleased,forinstance.
IfyouturnoffHoldintheProgram,nokeyswillbeheld
regardlessoftheirEnableNoteOffReceivesetting.
14
[0000ms...5000ms, KeyOff]
Thisspecifiesthetimefromwhenyoupressakeyuntil
oscillator1actuallybeginstosound.
Ingeneral,whenyouusetheKeyOffsetting,itsalsobestto
settheoscillatorsAmpEGSustainLevelto0.
WhenKeyissettoC,usetheC,D,F,GandAnotes.Other
keyswillplaythenormalequaltemperedpitches.
Mode
Pelog:ThisisanotherIndonesiangamelanscale,withseven
notesperoctave.
Normally,youplaynotessimplybypressingkeysonthe
keyboard.Inspecialcases,however,youcansetthis
parametersothatyoumustfirstbeholdingdownthe
damperpedal,andthenpressakey,inordertoplayanote.
Forinstance,thiscanbeusefulwhenmodelingthebehavior
ofapianosoundboard.
Keyisthenormalmode.
WhenKeyissettoC,usethewhitekeys.Theblackkeyswill
playtheequaltemperedpitches.
Stretch:Thistuningisusedforacousticpianos.
UserAllNotesScale:Thisisauserprogrammedscalewith
differentsettingsforall128MIDInotes.Youcansetupthis
scaleinGlobalmode(Global31b).
WhenyouselectKey+Damper,noteswillonlysoundifthe
damperpedalisbeinghelddown.Whenthedamperpedal
isreleased,allnoteswillbestoppedeveniftheyarestill
beinghelddown.
UserOctaveScale0015:Theseareuserprogrammedscales
withsettingsforeachofthe12notesinanoctave.Youcan
setthemupinGlobalmode(Global31a).
OSC2 Delay
Selectsthekeyofthespecifiedscale.
[0000ms...5000ms, KeyOff]
Mode
Thisspecifiesthetimefromwhenyoupressakeyuntil
oscillator2actuallybeginstosound.
ThissettingdoesnotapplytotheEqualTemperament,
Stretch,andUserAllNotesscales.
IfyoureusingascaleotherthanEqualTemperament,
thecombinationoftheselectedscaleandtheKey
settingmayskewthetuningofthenote.Forexample,A
abovemiddleCmightbecome442 Hz,insteadofthe
normal440 Hz.YoucanusetheGlobalModesMaster
Tune(Global01a)parametertocorrectthis,if
necessary.
SeeOSC1DelayandMode,above.
12d: Scale
Type
[Equal TemperamentUser Octave Scale15]
SelectsthebasicscalefortheProgram.
[CB]
Random
[07]
Notethatformanyofthescales,thesettingoftheKey
parameter,below,isveryimportant.
Thisparametercreatesrandomvariationsinpitchforeach
note.Atthedefaultvalueof0,pitchwillbecompletely
stable;highervaluescreatemorerandomization.
EqualTemperament:Thisisthemostwidelyusedscaleby
far,inwhicheachsemitonestepisspacedatequalpitch
intervals.
Thisparameterishandyforsimulatinginstrumentsthat
havenaturalpitchinstabilities,suchasanalogsynths,tape
mechanismorgansoracousticinstruments.
EqualTemperamentallowseasymodulation,sothatachord
progressionplayedinthekeyofCsoundsroughlythesame
asthesameprogressionplayedinF#.Sacrificed,however,is
someofthepurityofindividualintervalsofferedbythe
scalesbelow.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
PureMajor:Inthistemperament,majorchordsofthe
selectedkeywillbeperfectlyintune.
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
PureMinor:Inthistemperament,minorchordsofthe
selectedkeywillbeperfectlyintune.
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Arabic:Thisscaleincludesthequartertoneintervalsusedin
Arabicmusic.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
Pythagoras:ThisscaleisbasedonancientGreekmusic
theory,andisespeciallyeffectiveforplayingmelodies.It
producescompletelypurefifths,withoneexception,atthe
expenseofdetuningotherintervalsthirdsinparticular.
AsmuchasPythagorasmighthavelikedtodoso,itsnot
possibletomakeallthefifthspurewhilealsokeepingthe
octaveintune.Forthesakeoftheoctave,oneofthefifthsthe
intervalfromthesharpfourthdegreetothesharpfirst
degreeismadequiteflat.
Werkmeister(WerkmeisterIII):Thisscalewasoneofthe
manytemperamentsystemsdevelopedtowardstheendof
theBaroqueperiod.TheseWellTemperedtuningswere
aimedatallowingrelativelyfreetranspositionalthough
youllstillnoticethatthedifferentkeysmaintaintheirown
distinctcharacteristics,unlikeEqualTemperament.
J.S.Bachwasreferringtothesenewscalesinhistitle,The
WellTemperedClavier.Assuch,thisgroupare
particularlyappropriateforlatebaroqueorganand
harpsichordmusic.
Kirnberger(KirnbergerIII):ThisisasecondWell
Temperedtuning,datingfromtheearly18thcentury.
Slendro:ThisisanIndonesiangamelanscale,withfive
notesperoctave.
15
Program mode
18b
HereyoucanspecifytheSW1andSW2switchandfront
panel14knobsoftheprogramwhenRealtimeControls
USERisselected.
ThisassignsthefunctionofSW1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeListofSW1/2assignmentsonpage 348.
Note:Ifyouchangethefunctionsetting,thestatusisresetto
off.
Note:Theon/offstatusoftheSW1,SW2switchesis
memorizedwhenyousavetheprogram.
[Toggle, Momentary]
Thisspecifiestheon/offoperationwhenyoupresstheSW1
switch.
Toggle:ThestatewillalternatebetweenOnandOffeach
timeyoupresstheSW1switch.
Momentary:ThestatewillremainOnonlywhileyou
continueholdingdowntheSW1switch.
[Toggle, Momentary]
ThisassignsthefunctionofSW2.Thefunctionsthatcanbe
assignedtoSW2arethesameasforSW1,withthesubstitution
ofSW2Mod.(CC#81)insteadoftheSW1sSW1Mod.(CC#80).
USER [1]
USER [2]
USER [3]
USER [4]
V
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
16
21a
21b
Setthebasicpitchofthesound,includingtheoctave,fine
tuning,andsoon.
Controlpitchmodulationusingavarietyofcontrollers
suchasLFO,pitchEG,andthejoystick.
NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingleor
Drums,onlyOscillator1sfiltersareactive;thepagesfor
Oscillator2sfilterswillbegrayedout.
Velocity Split
Programssoundsarebasedonmultisamples,andthispage
letsyousetupallofthebasicmultisamplerelatedsettings.
Amongotherthings,youcan:
SelectMultisamplesfortheOscillator(inaSingleor
DoubleProgram),orselecttheDrumKitforaDrum
Program
SettheOscillatorsbasicpitch
Foreachzone,youcanspecifythethreshold(boundary
value)andcrossfade(howvelocitywillsmoothlyfade
betweenthesamplesofadjacentzones).Thisallowsyouto
createvelocityswitchedorlayeredsounds,suchasthe
followingexamples.
ThissetsthebasicpitchoftheOscillator,inoctaves.The
defaultis+0[8].Thestandardoctaveofamultisampleis+0
[8].
Velocitysplitsinwhichthezonesarecleanlyseparatedat
theirthreshold
Transpose
Velocitycrossfadesinwhichthezoneswillsmoothly
crossfadebeyondtheirthreshold.
Velocitylayersinwhichadditionalsoundsareaddedfor
avelocityregionaboveaspecifiedthreshold.
Note:IftheOscillatorModeisDrumsorDoubleDrums,the
velocityzonesettingsalreadyspecifiedforthedrumkitwill
beapplied,andwillnotbeshowninthescreen.Thevelocity
zonesforadrumkitcanbeeditedinGlobalP5DrumKit
(seep.205).PressingtheJumptoDrumKitEditbutton
showninthescreenwilltakeyoudirectlytoGlobalP5.
Octave
[12...+12]
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitones,overarangeof1
octave.
Tune
[1200...+1200]
Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1octave.A
centis1/100ofasemitone.
Frequency Offset
Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1 Hz.Frequency
OffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,whenusedtodetune
thetwooscillators,itcancreateaconstantbeatfrequency
acrosstherangeofthekeyboard.
21b: Multisamples
Usetheslideronthelefttocheckthesettingsofeachdrum
sampleshowninabbreviatedform.Dragtheslidertoview
thesettings.
1: Multisample 1
Ifyouwanttocreateasimplesetupwithonlyasingle
Multisample,justsetupMultisample1asdesired,andthen
settheThresholdVelocityto1andtheCrossfade
(CrossfadeRange)toOff.
Multisample On/Off
[Off, On]
Specifieswhetherthemultisample1willsound.
ItwillsoundifthisisOn.
17
Program mode
Bank
Dependingonthemultisample,highLevelsettings
maycausedistortionwhenplayingmanynotesata
time.Ifthisoccurs,lowertheLevel.
ThisisdisplayedifMultisampleOn/OffisOn.
Youcanchoosebetweenlookingatmonoandstereo
Multisamples.
Mono,Stereo:Conventionalmonauralorstereo
multisamples.
XL.M(eXtraLargeMono),XL.St(eXtraLargeStereo):
Highcapacitymonauralorstereomultisamples.
NotethatstereoMultisampleswillrequiretwiceasmany
voicesasmonoMultisamples.
Multisample select
[List of Multisample]
Thisspecifiesamultisample.
Somemultisampleshaveanupperlimit;notesplayed
abovethatlimitwillnotsound.
WhenyoupresstheMultisampleSelectpopupbutton,the
multisamplelistwillappear,allowingyoutoselecta
multisamplefromthelist.
Usethetabstoselectacategory,andselectamultisample
withinthecategory.
Youcansearchforamultisamplebyaportionofitsname
(seep.2).
Velocity Split
Thisshowsthevelocityzonesfortheoscillatorseight
multisamplesandforeachoscillator.
Themetertotheleftindicatesthenoteonvelocity.This
allowsyoutoverifythemultisamplesandoscillatorsthat
willsoundateachvelocity(See01e:VelocityMeteron
page 5.).
21c
PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmtheselection,ortheCancel
buttontocancel.
21d
Octave
Thisadjuststhepitchinoctaveunits.Whenusingadrum
kit,settheOctaveto8.
Rev (Reverse)
[Off, On]
Thisplaystheselectedmultisampleinreversewithout
loopingit.
Note:Ifanindividualsamplewithinthemultisampleis
alreadysettoreverse,itwillplayinreversewithoutthis
setting.
Transpose
[12...+12]
Thisadjuststhelocationoftheinstrumentsintheselected
drumkit.Unlessyouneedtochangethis,leaveitat0.
Tune
[1200...+1200]
On(checked):Themultisamplewillplayinreverse.
Thisadjuststhepitchinonecentunits.
Forvelocityzonesthatarenotselected(shownasoneline),
RevOnisindicatedas[R].
ThepitchofeachdrumkitcanbeadjustedinGlobalP5:
Drumkit.
Off(unchecked):Themultisamplewillplaynormally.
[Off, 1st...8th]
Inadditiontosimplystartingplaybackfromthebeginning,
Multisamplescanhaveupto8differentpreprogrammed
alternatestartingpoints.
TheStartOffsetspecifieswhethertousethenormalstart
point(Off),ortouseoneofthealternatestartpoints(1st
8th).
SomeMultisamplesmayhavefewerthan8pre
programmedpoints,inwhichcaseonlytheavailablepoints
canbeselected.
Level
[000...127]
Thissetsthebasicvolumelevelofthemultisample.The
Ampsectioncanmodifythisbasiclevelextensivelywith
envelopes,LFOs,keyboardtracking,andothermodulation;
formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP4:Amp/EQon
page 35.
18
Wheneditingadrumprogram,youmustsetthis
parameterto8.Withothersettings,thesoundsofthe
drumkitwillbeassignedtothewrongnotesofthe
keyboard.
Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1 Hz.Frequency
OffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,whenusedtodetune
thetwooscillators,itcancreateaconstantbeatfrequency
acrosstherangeofthekeyboard.
Drum Kit
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevalueandvelocityvalueby
holdingdowntheeditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
anoteonthekeyboard(seeOGp.10).
Thisselectsadrumkit.
Hereyoucanspecifythevelocityzoneforeachofthe
oscillatorseightmultisamples.
Threshold Velocity
PressingthisbuttonwilltakeyoudirectlytoGlobalP5:
DrumKitwhereyoucaneditthedrumkitselectedbyDrum
KitSelect.EvenifOscillatorModeissettoDoubleDrums,
youwillhearonlythekitthatwasselected.IftheGMdrum
kitwasselected,thelastselecteddrumkitwillbeselected.
Asdesired,useCopyDrumKittocopytheGMdrumkit
totheUSERbank.
ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheMultisamplewill
sound.Multisample1sThresholdVelocitycanbeequalto,
butnotlowerthan,thatofMultisample2.
[001...127]
[Off, 001...127]
ThissetstherangeofvelocitiesoverwhichMultisample1
willfadeintoMultisample2,goingupfromtheThreshold
Velocity.
Forinstance,iftheThresholdVelocityissetto64,andthe
Crossfadeissetto20,MS2willstarttofadeinatvelocities
of84andbelow.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
WhenvelocitiesarewithintheCrossfade,theOscillatorwill
usetwiceasmuchpolyphonyasitwouldnormally.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
Note:Youcanonlyfadebetweentwozonesatonce.
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Note:Youcantouchanddragtochangethisvalue(See*
EG,VelocitySplitonpage 6oftheOperationguide.).
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
Thisshowsthevelocityzone.
Select
Xfade Range = 20
Curve = Linear
23
Menu
84
Bottom Velocity = 64
23a
23b
23c
23d
Hereyoucanmakethefollowingsettings.
Velocityzoneforoscillator1
Themultisamplesvelocitysplitandcrossfadesettings
Bottom
[001...127]
Curve
Thiscontrolsthevolumecurveofthecrossfade.Linearand
Power(shortforEqualPower)letyoufinetunethewaythat
thetwoMultisamplesmixtogether;oneortheothermaybe
moreappropriateforagivenpairofMultisamples.Layer,
truetoitsname,letsyoulayerthetwoMultisamples
togetherwithoutanycrossfading.
Linearmeansthatthetwosampleswilleachbeat50%of
theirfullvolumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.Sometimes,
thismaycreateadipinthevolumelevel;ifso,tryusing
Powerinstead.
Power,shortforEqualPower,meansthatthetwosamples
willeachbeataround70%oftheirfullvolumeinthemiddle
ofthecrossfade.Sometimes,thismaycreateabumpinthe
volumelevel,inwhichcaseyoumighttryselectingLinear
instead.
LayermeansthatthetwoMultisampleswillbelayered
together,bothatfullvolume,fortheentirerangeofthe
crossfade.
ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator1will
sound.
Top
[001...127]
ThissetsthehighestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator1will
sound.
Note:TheOSC1Topvelocitymustbegreaterthanthe
OSC1Bottomvelocity.
19
Program mode
Crossfade Curves
Top
Linear
ThissetsthehighestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator1will
sound.
MS2
[001...127]
TheOSC1TopvelocitymustbegreaterthantheOSC1
Bottomvelocity.
MS1
Volume
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevalueandvelocityvalueby
holdingdowntheeditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
anoteonthekeyboard(seeOGp.10).
Xfade
Velocity
Velocity Split
Power
Thisshowsthevelocityzonefortheoscillator.
MS2
Themeterontheleftshowsthenoteonvelocityvaluesfor
theglobalMIDIchannel.Thisletsyouverifythe
multisamplesthatwillsoundateachvelocity(See01e:
VelocityMeteronpage 5.).
MS1
Volume
Xfade
SeeJumptoDrumkitEditPagebuttononpage 19.
Velocity
Layer
0:WriteProgramseep.64
MS2
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
MS1
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
Volume
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Xfade
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
Velocity
Velocity Split
Thisshowsthevelocityzonesfortheoscillatorseight
multisamplesandforeachoscillator.
23a
Themeterattheleftindicatesthenoteonvelocity.This
allowsyoutoverifythemultisamplesandoscillatorsthat
willsoundateachvelocity(See01e:VelocityMeteron
page 5.).
23b
23c
23d
21
Menu
ThispagecontainsallofthesettingsforOscillator1spitch
modulation.Forexample,youcan:
SpecifypitchbendcontrolledbythejoystickX(oran
incomingpitchbendmessage)settoindependentBend
UpandBendDown,orcontrolledbyanincoming
messageCC#16(theribboncontrolmessageetc).
UsePitchSlopetocontrolhowthepitchchangeswhen
youplayupanddownthekeyboard.
AssignAMSmodulationforpitch.
SetupinitialamountsofpitchmodulationfromthePitch
EGandLFO1/2,aswellasAMSmodulationofLFOand
EGamounts.
Velocitycanbeusedtoswitchbetweenthedrumkits
soundedbyoscillators1and2.Hereyoucanspecifythe
velocityzoneforoscillator1.Thestatusofthesettingswill
beindicatedinthegraphontherightsideofthescreen.This
letsyoueditsettingswhilecomparingthemwiththe
velocitysplitgraph.
Bottom
[001...127]
ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator1will
sound.
20
SetupPortamento.
23a: Pitch
Pitch Slope
[1.0...+2.0]
Normally,thisshouldbesettothedefaultof+1.0.
WhentheIntensityissettoanegative()value,theeffectof
theEGisreversed;positiveEGvaluesmeanlowerpitches,
andnegativeEGvaluesmeanhigherpitches.
Pitch
+1
2oct
1oct
1oct
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Intensity
1
C4 C5
Note on keyboard
Positive(+)valuescausethepitchtoriseasyouplayhigher
onthekeyboard,andnegative()valuescausethepitchto
fallasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard.
Whenthisissetto0,playingdifferentnotesonthekeyboard
wontchangethepitchatall;itwillbeasifyourealways
playingC4.Thiscanbeusefulforspecialeffectssounds,for
instance.
Ribbon
[12...+12]
SpecifyinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhenCC#16
isreceived.
Withapositive(+)setting,thepitchwillrisewhenthevalue
ofCC#16ishigherthanthecentervalueof64.Witha
negative()setting,thepitchwillfall.
JS (+X)
[60...+12]
[12.00...+12.00]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitchEGAMS
modulation.TheAMSmodulationandtheinitialIntensity
areaddedtogethertodeterminethePitchEGsfinaleffect.
Withpositive(+)values,greatermodulationwillincrease
theeffectofthePitchEG,asshowninexampleBbelow.
Withnegative()values,greatermodulationwillintroduce
theoppositeeffectofthePitchEGlikeinvertingthepolarity
oftheenvelope.Youcanusethisinseveraldifferentways:
YoucansetaninitialpositiveamountwiththeIntensity
parameter,andthenreducethisamountwithAMS.In
thiscase,thefinaleffectoftheEGissimplydiminished,
andnotactuallyinverted,asshowninexampleC.
YoucanalsosettheAMSIntensityamounttobegreater
thantheinitialIntensity.Inthiscase,theEGwillhavea
positiveeffectwithlowmodulationamounts,andan
invertedeffectathighermodulationamountsasshownin
exampleD.
Specifyinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhenthe
joystickismovedtotheright(orwhenapitchbendmessage
isreceived).Fornormalpitchbend,setthistoapositive
value.
Pitch EG AMS
Forexample,ifyousetthisto+12andmovethejoystickall
thewaytotheright,thepitchwillriseoneoctaveabovethe
originalpitch.
Change
to Pitch
JS (X)
A. Original EG
[60...+12]
C. Intensity = 3.00
Specifyinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhenthe
joystickismovedtotheleft(orwhenapitchbendmessage
isreceived).Fornormalpitchbend,setthistoanegative
value.
Change
to Pitch
Forexample,ifyousetthisto60andmovethejoystickall
thewaytotheleft,thepitchwillfallfiveoctavesbelowthe
originalpitch.Youcanusethistocreateguitarstyle
downwardswoops.
23c: Portamento
AMS (Pitch)
ThisselectsaAMSsourcetocontrolthepitch.Foralistof
AMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(AlternateModulation
Source)Listonpage 340.
Intensity
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscaletheamount
ofthePitchEG.
[12.00...+12.00]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitch
modulation,insemitones.
B. Intensity = +6.00
D. Intensity = 24.00
Portamentoletsthepitchglidesmoothlybetweennotes,
insteadofchangingabruptly.
Enable
[Off, On]
On(checked):TurnsonPortamento,sothatpitchglides
smoothlybetweennotes.
Off(unchecked):TurnsoffPortamento.Thisisthedefault
state.
Fingered
[Off, On]
ForexampleifyousetAMS(Pitch)toJS+Y:CC#01andthen
movethejoystickinthe+Ydirection,thepitchwillriseif
thisparameterissettoapositive(+)value,orfallifthis
parameterissettoanegative()value.
ThisparameterallowsyoutocontrolPortamentothrough
yourplayingstyle.Whenitsenabled,playinglegatowill
turnonPortamento,andplayingdetachedwillturnitoff
again.
23b: Pitch EG
ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnableis
turnedon.
Intensity
[12.00...+12.00]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectofthePitchEGonOscillator
1sfrequency,inhalfsteps,beforeanyAMSmodulation.
ThePitchEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to99.
WhentheIntensityissettoapositive(+)value,positive
valuesfromtheEGraisethepitch,andnegativevalues
lowerthepitch.
On(checked):TurnsonFingeredPortamento.
Off(unchecked):TurnsoffFingeredPortamento.
Mode
[Rate, Time]
RatemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystakethesame
amountoftimetoglideagivendistanceinpitchfor
instance,onesecondperoctave.Putanotherway,gliding
21
Program mode
severaloctaveswilltakemuchlongerthanglidingahalf
step.
TimemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystakethesame
amountoftimetoglidefromonenotetoanother,regardless
ofthedifferenceinpitch.Thisisespeciallyusefulwhen
playingchords,sinceitensuresthateachnoteinthechord
willenditsglideatthesametime.
Time
[000...127]
Now,ifyoumovethejoystickup,theeffectoftheLFOwill
fadeaway.Whenthejoystickisallthewayatthetopofits
range,theLFOwillbecompletelycancelledout.
AMS (LFO1)
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscaletheamount
oftheLFOappliedtopitch.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Highervaluesmean
longertimes,forslowerchangesinpitch.
Intensity
ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnableis
turnedon.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS(LFO1)
modulationforpitch.
Withasettingof0,modulationwillnotbeapplied.Witha
settingof12.00,theOSC1LFO1willapplyamaximumof
+/1octaveofpitchmodulation.
Youcanturnportamentoon/offbyusingthetwoassignable
switchesSW1andSW2.
Todoso:
1. GototheProgP1:Basic/ControllersControllersSetup
page.
2. UnderPanelSwitchAssign,seteitherSW1orSW2to
Porta.SW(CC#65).
Now,theselectedswitchwillenableanddisable
Portamento.
IfyouassignportamentotoSW1/2,MIDIportamento
controller#65willbetransmittedeachtimeyouusethe
switch.Youcanalsoturnportamentoon/offby
receivingMIDIcontroller#65.
[12.00...+12.00]
ForexampleifAMS(LFO1)issettoJS+Y:CC#01andyou
movethejoystickinthe+Ydirection,pitchmodulationfrom
OSC1LFO1willbeappliedinpositivephaseifthisisa
positive(+)value,orappliedinnegativephaseifthisisa
negative
()value.
LFO1Int.,JS+YInt.,andAMS(LFO1)settingsaresummed
todeterminethedepthanddirectionofpitchmodulation
producedbyOSC1LFO1.
LFO2:
TheparametersforLFO2areidenticaltothoseforLFO1.For
moreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptionsunderLFO1,
above.
23d: LFO1/2
V
SetaninitialamountofLFOmodulation,usingtheLFO1
Int.,LFO2Int.parameters.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
UseJS+YInt.toadjusttheamountofLFOproducedby
JS+Yoperations.
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheLFO.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
TheresultsareaddedtogethertoproducethetotalLFO
effect.
LFO1
LFO1 Int. (LFO1 Intensity)
[12.00...+12.00]
0:WriteProgramseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonthepitch,in
semitones,beforeanyJS+YInt.orAMSmodulation.
Onthispageyoucanspecifythebasicoscillatorpitchfor
oscillator2,andassignthemultisamples.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.
ItisavailablewhentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleor
DoubleDrums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,as
describedunder21:OSC1Setuponpage 17.
SpecifythedepthofpitchmodulationproducedbyOSC1
LFO1whenthejoystickismovedinthe+Y(away)direction
(orwhenCC#1isreceived).(Joystickcontrolinthe+Y
directioniscalledJS+Y.)
ThisparametersetsthemaximumamountofLFO
modulationaddedbyJS+Y,insemitones.
Asthisvalueisincreased,movingthejoystickinthe+Y
directionwillcausetheOSC1LFO1toproducedeeperpitch
modulation.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.You
canalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountoftheLFO,as
setbyLFO1Int.,above.Forexample:
1. SetLFO1Int.to+7.00.
TheLFOwillnowhaveafairlystrongeffectonthepitch,
bendingitbyaperfect5th.
2. SetJS+YInt.Intensityto7.00.
22
LFO1andLFO2canbothcontrolthepitch.Youcancontrol
thestrengthofeachLFOsmodulationinthreedifferent
ways:
210: Pitch EG
ThispagecontrolsthepitchsettingsforOscillator2.
ItisavailablewhentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleor
DoubleDrums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,as
describedunder23:OSC1Pitchonpage 20.
210
Menu
210a
210b
210c
ThePitchEG,orEnvelopeGenerator,letsyoucreate
complex,timevaryingchangestothepitchofOscillators1
and2.Theparametersonthispagecontroltheshapeofthe
EG.Forinstance,youcan:
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsandtimes
ofeachsegment.
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,forsubtle
controloverthemodulationtimeoftheEG.
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes.
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestarttheEG.
TocontrolhowmucheffecttheEGhasonthepitch,usethe
PitchEGparametersontheP2:OSC/PitchOSC1Pitchpage
andOSC2Pitchpage,asdescribedunder23b:PitchEG
onpage 21.
210a:EG Reset
AMS (EG Reset AMS)
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheEGtothestartpoint.
Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFOtotriggerthe
EGinarepeatingrhythm.Thisresetisinadditiontothe
initialnoteon,whichalwayscausestheEGtostart.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Threshold
[99...+99]
ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset.
Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjusttheexact
pointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbereset,
effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstotherrhythmic
effects.
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.Whenthe
thresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhenpassingthrough
thethresholdmovingdownwards.
23
Program mode
Note:ForseveralLFOwaveformtypes,oriftheLFOcycleis
fast,theLFOoutputmaynotalwayskeepupwithhigh
valuessuchas+99or99.
Inthiscase,settingtheThresholdtothesevaluesmaycause
inconsistentbehavior,ormaymeanthattheEGwillnot
resetatall.Ifthishappens,reducetheThresholduntilthe
EGtriggersconsistently.
Attack
[00...99]
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStartlevel
totheAttacklevel.
Forthefastestpossibleattacktime,youcansettheStart
levelto+99;inthiscase,theEGwillstartinstantaneouslyat
itsmaximumvalue.
Decay
[00...99]
ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevelto
theBreaklevel.
210b:Envelope
Pitch EG
Slope
Attack
Level
Break
Level
Sustain Level
(Always 0)
Star t
Level
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheBreak
leveltotheSustainlevel(whichforthePitchEGisalways0).
OnceitreachestheSustain,theEGwillstaythereuntilnote
off,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
Release
Level
Change to
Pitch
Time
Attack
Time
Decay
Time
Slope
Time
[00...99]
Release
Time
Release
[00...99]
ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromtheSustain
leveltotheReleaselevel.
Note:Youcantouchanddragtochangethisvalue
(See*EG,VelocitySplitonpage 6oftheOperationguide.).
Note-on or reset
Theenvelopemovestoaspecifiedleveloverthespecified
time,andthenmovestothenextspecifiedleveloverthe
specifiedtime.Itproducesamodulationsignal
correspondingtothismovement.
Theparametersbelowletyousetfourlevels,theamountof
timeittakestogofromeachofthelevelstothenext,andthe
shape(fromlineartocurved)ofeachtransition.
Curve
Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis
manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraightlines.
Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelytobemade
outofcurves.
Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchangequicklyat
first,andthenslowdownasitapproachesthenextpoint.
Thistendstosoundbetterthanstraight,linearsegments.
Level
Eachofthefourlevelscanbeeitherpositiveornegative.
Positivelevelswillmakethepitch(orotherAMS
destination)goupfromitsprogrammedvalue;negative
levelswillmakeitgodown.
Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurvedshapes
naturally.TheKROMEgoesastepfurtherthanvintage
synths,however,andletsyoucontroltheamountof
curvatureseparatelyforeachofthefourenvelopesegments.
Notethat,unliketheFilterandAmpEGs,thePitchEGs
SustainLevelisalways0.
Pitch EG Curve
Start
[99...+99]
Curve = 0 (Linear)
Thissetstheinitiallevelatnoteon.
Attack
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)
[99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime.
Break
[99...+99]
Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendofthe
Decaytime.
Release
[99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime.
Time
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow:
Curve = 0 (Linear)
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremainthe
same.However,greatercurvaturewilltendtosoundfaster,
becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyatthebeginning.
Actual Time
10
10ms
20
44ms
30
104ms
40
224ms
50
464ms
60
944ms
70
1.8seconds
80
3.8seconds
90
10.9seconds
99
87.3seconds
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare
suitableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegmentswhichgo
down.
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor
upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a
curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments,suchas
DecayandRelease.
Attack
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthetransition
fromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel.
Decay
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthetransition
fromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel.
24
Slope
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheSlopesegmentthetransition
fromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel(whichforthePitch
EGisalways0).
Release
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe
transitionfromtheSustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
AMS2
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsourceforcontrollingtheEGs
Levelparameters.TheStart,Attack,Decay,andBreaklevels
sharethissource,buteachhasitsownmodulationintensity.
TheparametersofAMS2areidenticaltothoseofAMS1,
above.
Time
ThesesettingsletyouuseanAMSsourcetocontroltheTime
parametersoftheEG.TheAttack,Decay,andSlopetimes
sharethisAMSsource,buteachhasitsownmodulation
intensity.
Pitch EG Time Modulation
ThesesettingsletyouusetwodifferentAMSsourcesto
controltheLevelparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthetwo
AMSsources,theStart,Attack,Decay,andBreaklevelseach
havetheirownmodulationintensities.
Note-on
Byusingdifferentsettingsforeachofthethreelevels,you
cancausebothsubtleanddramaticchangestotheEGshape,
asshownbelow.
Note:OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo
points,thatsegmentcannolongerbemodulated.This
includesboththetimeofthesegment,andthelevelreached
attheendofthesegment.
Note-on
Attack= +
Decay= +
Slope= +
Attack= +
Decay= +
Slope= +
Attack=
Decay=
Slope=
Forinstance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecaytime,
youcannolongermodulateeithertheDecaytimeorthe
Breaklevel.
ThisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,Attacklevel,
orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthatarealready
sounding,unlesstheEGisthenrestartedviaEGReset.
Note-on
AMS
AMS
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbeuseful
here,forinstance.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
At (Attack)
Original Shape
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheAttacktime.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityandset
Attackto+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlongerathigher
velocities.IfyouinsteadsetAttackto99,theAttacktime
willgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
AMS1
AMS1
Dc (Decay)
[List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
parameters.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
St (Start)
Forexample,ifyousettheAMS1sourcetoVelocityandset
Stto+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplayharder.If
youinsteadsetStto99,theStartlevelwilldecreaseasyou
playharder.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheAttacklevel.
Br (Break)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheDecaytime.
Sl (Slope)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheSlopetime.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheStartlevel.
At (Attack)
WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvalueforinstance,
whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8willmaketheAttack
timealmosttwiceaslong,andasettingof8willcutthe
Attacktimealmostinhalf.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheBreaklevel.
25
Program mode
When24 dB/octisselected,onlythecontrolsforFilterAare
active;thecontrolsforFilterBwillbegrayedout.
Serial and Parallel Routing
Thesepagesletyoucontrolallaspectsofthefilters.Among
otherthings,youcan:
Makebasicsettingsforeachoscillatorsfilters,including
routing,modes,cutoff,resonance,etc.
Oscillator
Setupfiltermodulation,includingkeyboardtracking,the
filterenvelope,LFOmodulation,andAMScontrol.
NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,only
Oscillator1sfiltersareactive;thepagesforOscillator2s
filterswillbegrayedout.
31: Filter1
Oscillator
Filter B (High Pass)
31a
Low Pass:
12dB/oct
31c
31b
ThispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsforOscillator1s
FilterAandFilterB.Forexample,youcan:
Setupthefilterstoproduceasingle12 dB/octfilter,dual
12 dB/octfiltersineitherserialorparallelrouting,ora
single24 dB/octfilter.
SeteachofthetwofilterstoLowPass,HighPass,Band
Pass,orBandRejectmodes.
Setthecutoff,resonance,andinputandoutputlevelsof
eachfilter,includingmodulationofresonanceandoutput
level.
26
Low Pass:
24dB/oct / 24db/oct
12db/oct
31b: Filter A
Filter Type
[Low Pass (12dB/oct), High Pass (12dB/oct),
Band Pass (6dB/oct), Band Reject (6dB/oct)]
Thefilterwillproduceverydifferentresultsdependingon
theselectedfiltertype.Theselectionswillchangeslightly
accordingtotheselectedFilterRouting,toshowthecorrect
cutoffslopeindBperoctave.
LowPass(12dB/oct).Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesound
whicharehigherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthe
mostcommontypeoffilter,andisusedtomakebright
timbressounddarker.
HighPass(12dB/oct).Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesound
whicharelowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethis
tomaketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy.
BandPass(6dB/oct).Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,
bothhighsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff
frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow
frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramaticallydependingon
thecutoffsettingandtheoscillatorsmultisample.
Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBandPassfilter
tocreatetelephoneorvintagephonographsounds.With
higherresonancesettings,itcancreatebuzzyornasal
timbres.
BandReject(6dB/oct).Thisfiltertypealsocalledanotch
filtercutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe
cutofffrequency.TrymodulatingthecutoffwithanLFOto
createphaserlikeeffects.
AMS (Resonance)
ThisselectsaAMSsourcetocontroltheResonanceamount.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Low Pass
AMS Int.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheResonance
modulation.
Forexample,ifVelocityhasbeenselected,changesin
keyboardvelocitywillaffecttheresonance.Withpositive(+)
values,theresonancewillincreaseasyouplaymore
strongly,andasyouplaymoresoftlytheresonancewill
approachthelevelspecifiedbytheResonancesetting.With
negative()values,theresonancewilldecreaseasyouplay
morestrongly,andasyouplaymoresoftlytheresonance
willapproachthelevelspecifiedbytheResonancesetting.
High Pass
TheresonancelevelisdeterminedbyaddingtheResonance
andAMSInt.values.
Band Pass
Output
[00...99]
ThiscontrolstheoutputlevelofFilterA.Youcanusethisto
balancethevolumesofFiltersAandBwhentheRoutingis
settoParallel,ortoturndownthevolumetoavoidclipping
laterinthesignalchain.
Band Reject
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheoutputlevel
ofFilterA.ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS
(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
AMS Int.
Bypass
[Off, On]
ThisletsyoubypassFilterAcompletely.
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheoutputlevel
modulation.
31c: Filter B
IfBypassisOff,FilterAfunctionsnormally.
WhenBypassisOn,FilterAwillhavenoeffect.
Frequency
[99...+99]
[00...99]
FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissettoSerial
orParallel.Otherwise,theparametersinthissectionwillbe
grayedout.
ThiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyofFilterA,inincrements
of1/10ofanoctave.Thespecificeffectofthecutoff
frequencywillchangedependingontheselectedFilter
Type.
TheparametersforFilterBareidenticaltothoseforFilterA.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptionsunder
FilterA,above.
Trim
[00...99]
Thisadjuststhevolumelevelattheinputtothefilter.Ifyou
noticethatthesoundisdistorting,especiallywithhigh
Resonancesettings,youcanturntheleveldownhere,orat
theOutput.
Resonance
[00...99]
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthecutoff
frequency.
Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,andfrequencies
beyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminishsmoothly.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
Atmediumsettings,theresonancewillalterthetimbreof
thefilter,makingitsoundmorenasal,ormoreextreme.
Atveryhighsettings,theresonancecanbeheardasa
separate,whistlingpitch.
Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,pleasesee
KeyFollowonpage 29.
Resonance
27
Program mode
32
Menu
32a
ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sfilter
keyboardtrack.Amongotherthings,youcan:
Intensity = 99 (Inverted)
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapes,andcontrol
howthetrackingaffectsfiltercutoff.
FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissettoSerial
orParallel.Otherwise,theparametersforFilterBwillbe
grayedout.
Intensity to B
Intensity to A
[99...+99]
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwillaffect
FilterAscutofffrequency.TheoveralleffectoftheKeyboard
TrackisacombinationofthisIntensityvalueandtheoverall
KeyboardTrackshape.
Withpositivevalues(+),theeffectwillbeinthedirection
specifiedbykeyboardtracking;iftherampgoesup,the
filtercutoffwillincrease.
Withnegativevalues(),theeffectwillbeintheopposite
direction;iftherampgoesup,thefiltercutoffwilldecrease.
28
Center Key
[99...+99]
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwillaffect
FilterBscutofffrequency.
Key
Key Low
[C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenoteatwhichthetwoslopedlinesinthe
lowerrangewillbeconnected.
Center
[C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointforthe
centerofkeyboardtracking.Atthiskey,thekeyboard
trackinghasnoeffectonthefiltercutoff,oronanyAMS
destinations.
Key High
[C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenoteatwhichthetwoslopedlinesinthe
upperrangewillbeconnected.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevalueandvelocityvalueby
holdingdowntheeditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
anoteonthekeyboard(seeOGp.10).
Ramp
Positiverampvaluesmeanthatthekeyboardtracking
outputincreasesasyouplayfartherfromtheCenterKey;
negativerampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases.
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegativeramp
settingswillchangedependingonwhethertherampisto
theleftorrightoftheCenterKey.
BtmLo(BottomLow)andLoCent(LowCenter):negative
rampsmakethekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyou
playloweronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
outputgohigher.
CentHi(CenterHigh)andHiTop(HighTop):negative
rampsmakethekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyou
playhigheronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
outputgoup.
Theeffectonthefiltercutoffisacombinationoftheramp
values,assetbelow,andtheIntensitytoA(B)parameters.
WhenIntensitytoA(B)issetto+99,arampof50changes
thefilterfrequencyby1octaveforeveryoctaveofthe
keyboard,andarampof+99changesthefrequencyby2
octavesforeveryoctaveofthekeyboard.
Btm Lo (Bottom-Low)
ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDInote
rangeandtheKeyLowkey.Fornormalkeytrack,use
negativevalues.
Lo Cent (Low-Center)
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyLowandCenterkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.
Cent Hi (Center-High)
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandKeyHighkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
Hi Top (High-Top)
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyHighkeyandthetopof
theMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositive
values.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
33b
33a: Filter EG
TheFilterEGmodulatestheFilterAandBcutoff
frequenciesovertime.YoucancontrolhowstronglytheEG
willaffectthefiltersinthreedifferentways:
Ramp = 50
SetaninitialamountofEGmodulation,usingthe
IntensitytoAandBparameters.
Ramp = Inf
Key Low
Center
Key High
Note:ifyousettheCentHirampto+InforInf,theHiTop
parameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,ifyousettheLo
Centrampto+InforInf,theBtmLorampwillbegrayed
out.
UsevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheEGappliedtothe
filter.
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheEG
appliedtothefilter.
Youcanuseallthreeoftheseatonce,andtheresultsare
addedtogethertoproducethetotalEGeffect.
Key Follow
TosetuptheEGitself,includingattackandreleasetimes,
levels,andsoon,pleasesee35:Filter1EGonpage 31.
TocreatetheclassicKeyFolloweffect,inwhichthefilter
frequencytracksthepitchofthekeyboard:
Velocity to A
1. SettheFilterFrequencyto30.
ThisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheFilterEG
appliedtoFilterA.
2. SettheKeyboardTrackIntensityto+99.
3. SettheBtmLoandLoCentrampsto50.
[99...+99]
4. SettheCentHiandHiToprampsto+50.
5. SettheCenterKeytoC4.
ThesettingsfortheKeyLowandKeyHighkeysdont
matterinthiscase.
A. Original EG
B. Velocity to A = +50
C. Velocity to A = 25
D. Velocity to A = 99
Original
YoucanusethefilterkeyboardtrackingasanAMSsourceto
modulateotherparameters,justliketheenvelopesand
LFOs.SimplyselectFilterKTrkintheAMSlistforthe
desiredparameter.
Original
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Withpositive(+)values,playingmorestronglywill
increasetheeffectoftheFilterEG,asshowninexampleB
above.
Withnegative()values,playingmorestronglywill
introducetheoppositeeffectoftheFilterEGlikeinverting
thepolarityoftheenvelope.Youcanusethisinseveral
differentways:
29
Program mode
YoucansetaninitialpositiveamountwiththeIntensity
toA/Bparameters,andthenreducethisamountwith
velocity.Inthiscase,thefinaleffectoftheEGissimply
diminished,andnotactuallyinverted,asshownin
exampleCabove.
YoucanalsosettheVelocitytoA/Bamountssothatthey
aregreaterthantheinitialamountsofIntensitytoA/B.In
thiscase,theEGwillhaveapositiveeffectatlow
velocities,andaninvertedeffectathighvelocitiesas
showninexampleD.
Velocity to B
[99...+99]
ThisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheFilterEG
appliedtoFilterB.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
VelocitytoAabove.
Intensity to A
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheFilterEGonFilterAs
cutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMSmodulation.
TheFilterEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to99.
Positivevaluesincreasethecutofffrequency,andnegative
valuesdecreasethecutofffrequency.Forinstance,pleasesee
thegraphicVelocitycontrolofFilterEGabove.TheEG
shapeinexampleArisesupatfirst,andthenfallsbelow0
towardstheend.
WhenIntensitytoAissettoapositive(+)value,theEGs
effectwillmatchitsshape.WhentheEGrisesabove0,the
cutofffrequencywillincrease.
Withnegative()values,theeffectwillbeintheopposite
direction;whentheEGrisesabove0,thefiltercutoffwill
decrease.
Intensity to B
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheFilterEGonFilterBs
cutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMSmodulation.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIntensitytoAabove.
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscaletheamount
oftheFilterEGappliedtoFiltersAandB.Thetwofilters
shareasingleAMSsource,withseparateintensitysettings.
Otherwise,theAMSmodulationwillworkinthesameway
astheVelocitytoAparameter,describedabove.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Thisselectsthesecondmodulationsourceforcontrolling
FilterAscutofffrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,please
seeAMS(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAMS2.
Filter B
TheparametersforFilterBareidenticaltothoseforFilterA.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptionsunder
FilterA,above.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheEGAMS
modulationforFilterA.
[99...+99]
34b
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheEGAMS
modulationforFilterB.
Filter A
AMS1 (Filter A AMS1)
ThisselectsthefirstmodulationsourceforcontrollingFilter
Ascutofffrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,pleasesee
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
30
[99...+99]
LFO1
Intensity to A
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterAscutoff
frequency,beforeanyJSYorAMSmodulation.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.You
canproduceinterestingeffectsbyusingthesameLFOto
modulatetwodifferentparameters(suchasFilterAand
FilterB),butwithonesettoapositiveintensity,andthe
othersettoanegativeintensity.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
Low setting
High setting
Intensity to B
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterBscutoff
frequency,beforeanyJSYorAMSmodulation.
JSY Intensity to A
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
[99...+99]
ThisadjuststhedepthbywhichtheLFOwillmodulatethe
cutofffrequencyoffilterAwhenyoumovethejoystickfrom
thecenterintheYdirection(towardyourself)(orwhen
CC#2isreceived).(JoystickcontrolintheYdirectionis
calledJSY.)
35: Filter1 EG
35
Menu
35a
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.You
canalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountoftheLFO,as
setbyIntensitytoA,above.Forexample:
1. SetIntensitytoAto+50.
TheLFOwillnowhaveafairlystrongeffectonthefilter
cutoff.
35b
2. SetJSYIntensitytoAto50.
Now,ifyoumovethejoystickdown,theeffectoftheLFO
willfadeaway.Whenthejoystickisallthewayatthe
bottomofitsrange,theLFOwillbecompletelycancelled
out.
[99...+99]
ThisletsyouuseJSYtoscaletheamountoftheLFOapplied
toFilterB.
AMS (LFO1)
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscaletheamount
oftheLFOappliedtoFiltersAandB.Thetwofilterssharea
singleAMSsource,butwithseparateintensitysettings.
TheFilterEG,orEnvelopeGenerator,letsyoucreate
complex,timevaryingchangestothecutofffrequenciesof
FiltersAandB.Theparametersonthispagecontrolthe
shapeoftheEG.Amongotherthings,youcan:
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsandtimes
ofeachsegment.
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,forsubtle
controloverthemodulationshapeoftheEG.
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes.
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestarttheEG.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
TocontrolhowmucheffecttheEGhasonthefilters,usethe
FilterEGparametersontheP3:FilterModulationpage,as
describedunder33a:FilterEGonpage 29.
Intensity to A (LFO1)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFO1AMS
modulationforFilterA.
Forexample,ifAMSissettoJS+Y:CC#01,positivesettings
meanthatYS+YwillincreasetheamountofLFO1appliedto
FilterA.
Intensity to B (LFO1)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFO1AMS
modulationforFilterB.
LFO 2
TheparametersforLFO2areidenticaltothoseforLFO1.For
moreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptionsunderLFO1,
above.
YoucanusetheFilterEGasanAMSsourcetomodulate
otherparameters,justlikethekeyboardtrackingandLFOs.
SimplyselecttheFilterEGintheAMSlistforthedesired
parameter.
35a: EG Reset
AMS
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheEGtothestartpoint.
Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFOtotriggerthe
EGinarepeatingrhythm.Thisresetisinadditiontothe
initialnoteon,whichalwayscausestheEGtostart.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Threshold
[99...+99]
ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset.
Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjusttheexact
pointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbereset,
effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstotherrhythmic
effects.
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.Whenthe
thresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhenpassingthrough
thethresholdmovingdownwards.
Note:WithsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFOspeeds,
theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextremevaluesof+99or
31
Program mode
99.Inthiscase,settingtheThresholdtothesevaluesmay
causeinconsistentbehavior,ormaymeanthattheEG
doesntresetatall.Ifthishappens,reducetheThreshold
untiltheEGtriggersconsistently.
Forthefastestpossibleattacktime,youcansettheStart
levelto+99;inthiscase,theEGwillstartinstantaneouslyat
itsmaximumvalue.
Decay
[00...99]
ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevelto
theBreaklevel.
35b: Envelope
Slope
Filter EG
Attack
Level
Break
Level
Star t
Level
Release
Level
Change to
Time
Attack
Time
Decay
Time
Slope
Time
Release
[00...99]
ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromtheSustain
leveltotheReleaselevel.
Release
Time
Note-on or reset
Anenvelopecreatesamodulationsignalbymovingfrom
oneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,andthenmoving
toanotherleveloveranotherperiodoftime,andsoon.
Theparametersbelowletyousetfivelevels,theamountof
timeittakestogofromeachofthelevelstothenext,andthe
shape(fromlineartocurved)ofeachtransition.
Level
Eachofthefivelevelscanbeeitherpositiveornegative.
Positivelevelswillmakethecutofffrequency(orotherAMS
destination)goupfromitsprogrammedvalue;negative
levelswillmakeitgodown.
Start
[00...99]
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheBreak
leveltotheSustainlevel.OnceitreachestheSustainlevel,
theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff(unlessitisresetvia
AMS).
Sustain
Level
[99...+99]
Note:Youcantouchanddragtochangethisvalue
(See*EG,VelocitySplitonpage 6oftheOperation
guide.).
Curve
Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis
manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraightlines.
Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelytobemade
outofcurves.
Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchangequicklyat
first,andthenslowdownasitapproachesthenextpoint.
Thistendstosoundbetterthanstraight,linearsegments.
Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurvedshapes
naturally.TheKROMEgoesastepfurtherthanvintage
synths,however,andletsyoucontroltheamountof
curvatureseparatelyforeachofthefourenvelopesegments.
ThissetstheinitialEGlevelatnoteon.
Attack
[99...+99]
Filter EG Curve
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime.
Break
Curve=0L (Linear)
[99...+99]
Curve=10E (Exp/Log)
Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendofthe
Decaytime.
Sus (Sustain)
[99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit
reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnote
off,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
Release
[99...+99]
Curve=10E (Exp/Log)
Time
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremainthe
same.However,greatercurvaturewilltendtosoundfaster,
becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyatthebeginning.
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow:
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime.
EG Value
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare
suitableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegmentswhichgo
down.
Actual Time
10
10ms
20
44ms
30
104ms
40
224ms
50
464ms
60
944ms
70
1.8seconds
80
3.8seconds
90
10.9seconds
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthetransition
fromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel.
99
87.3seconds
Decay
Attack
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor
upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a
curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments,suchas
DecayandRelease.
Attack
[00...99]
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStartlevel
totheAttacklevel.
32
Curve=0L (Linear)
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthetransition
fromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel.
Slope
At (Attack)
[99...+99]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheSlopesegmentthetransition
fromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheAttacklevel.
Release
Br (Break)
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe
transitionfromtheSustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
Time
ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsourcesto
controltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthethree
AMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,andReleasetimes
eachhavetheirownmodulationintensities.
Filter EG Time Modulation
AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value
Note-on
Note-on
Note-on
Attack=+, Decay=+,
Slope=+, Release=+
Attack=+, Decay=+,
Slope=+, Release=+
Attack=, Decay=,
Slope=, Release=
AMS1
SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbeuseful
here,forinstance.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
At (Attack)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheAttacktime.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityandset
At(Attack)to+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlongerat
highervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAt(Attack)to99,the
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
Original Shape
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheBreaklevel.
WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvalueforinstance,
whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8willmaketheAttack
timealmosttwiceaslong,andasettingof8willcutthe
Attacktimealmostinhalf.(Seepage 342)
Dc (Decay)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheDecaytime.
Sl (Slope)
Negative AMS on Start,
Attack, and Break
AMS
SelectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevelparameters.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
St (Start)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheStartlevel.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityandset
St(Start)to+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplay
harder.IfyouinsteadsetSt(Start)to99,theStartlevelwill
decreaseasyouplayharder.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheSlopetime.
Rl (Release)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheReleasetime.
33
Program mode
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
5:SyncBothEGsseep.66
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
36: Filter2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasicfilter2settings.Itis
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleor
DoubleDrums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,as
describedunder31:Filter1onpage 26.
310: Filter2 EG
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sFilterEG.Itisavailable
whentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleorDouble
Drums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,as
describedunder35:Filter1EGonpage 31.
34
AMS (Drive)
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetocontroltheDrive
amount.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Intensity
[99...+99]
SetuptheDrivercircuit,whichaddssaturationandbass
boosttothetimbre.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationforDrive.
Setthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
Low Boost
Controlamplevelandmodulation,includingkeyboard
tracking,theampenvelope,LFOmodulation,andAMS
control.
SetupthethreebandTrackEQ.
NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,only
Oscillator1samp,pan,anddriveparametersareactive;the
pagesforOscillator2willbegrayedout.
[00...99]
ThislowfrequencyEQcontrolsthebodycharacterofthe
sound.ThespecificEQfrequenciesaffectedwillchange
withtheDrivesetting.
Higheramountsincreasethebassboost,andwillalso
intensifytheeffectoftheDriveparameter.
AMS
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetocontroltheLow
Boostamount.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
41: Amp1/Driver1
41
Menu
41a
Intensity
41b
Amp Level
[000...127]
ThiscontrolsthebasicvolumelevelofOscillator1,before
keyboardtracking,velocity,andothermodulation.
41c
ThispagecontrolsthebasicsettingsfortheAmp/EQsection.
Here,youcan:
SetuptheDrivercircuit.
Settheinitialvolumelevel.
Controlthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
41a: Driver
TheDriveraddssaturationandoverdrivetothesound,for
everythingfromsubtlefatteningtodrasticdistortion.Unlike
anoverdriveeffect,theDriverprocesseseachvoice
individually,sothetimbrestaysthesameregardlessofhow
manyvoicesarebeingplayed.
Thetwomainparameters,DriveandLowBoost,work
togethertocreatetheoverallDrivereffect.Drivecontributes
edgeandbite,andLowBoostprovidesthebodyaswellas
boostingthebass.
Bypass
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationforLowBoost.
YoucancontroltheProgramsoverallvolumeviaMIDI
usingbothVolume(CC#7)andExpression(CC#11).
Whenusedoneatatime,thetwocontrollersworkin
exactlythesameway:aMIDIvalueof127isequalto
theAmpLevelsetting,andlowervaluesreducethe
volume.
IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously,the
onewiththelowervaluedeterminesthemaximum
volume,andtheonewiththehighervaluescalesdown
fromthatmaximum.
ThisiscontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
[Off, On]
On(checked):theDriveriscompletelyremovedfromthe
signalpath.
Drive
[00...99]
Thiscontrolstheamountofedgeandbiteinthetimbre.Low
settingswillproducemildsaturation,andhighersettings
createmoreobviousdistortion.
Often,itsusefultoincreasetheLowBoostalongwiththe
Drive.
Note:EvenwhentheDriveamountissetto0,theDriver
circuitstillaffectsthetimbre.Ifyourgoalisacompletely
pristinesound,usetheBypasscontrolinstead.
35
Program mode
41c: Pan
Pan
ThiscontrolsthestereopanofOscillator1.AsettingofL001
placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,andR127
tothefarright.
42
Menu
42a
WhenthisissettoRandom,thepanpositionwillbe
differentforeachnoteon.
YoucanalsocontrolpanviaMIDIPan(CC#10).
ACC#10valueof0or1placesthesoundatthefarleft,
64placesthesoundatthelocationspecifiedbythePan
parameter,and127placesthesoundatthefarright.
ThisiscontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global1
1a).
Note:RandomcannotbeselectedviaaMIDIcontrolchange.
Youllneedtoselectithere.
AMS (Pan)
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatePan.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Intensity
42b
ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sAmplevel
modulation.Amongotherthings,youcan:
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapestocontrolthe
Amplevel.
AssignAMSmodulationfortheAmplevel.
ControltheeffectoftheLFOsontheAmplevel.
Thetotaleffectofthemodulationcanincreasethevolumeto
amaximumoftwotimeslouderthantheAmpLevelsetting.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationforPan.
Forexample,ifPanissettoC064andAMSissettoNote
Number,positive(+)intensitieswillcausethesoundto
movetowardtherightasyouplayhigherthanC4,and
towardtheleftasyouplaylowerthanC4.Negative()
intensitieswillhavetheoppositeeffect.
Keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythevolumeasyouplayup
anddownthekeyboard.Usually,someamountofkey
trackingisnecessaryinordertomakethevolumeconsistent
acrosstheentirerange.
[Off, On]
ThisoptionisavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeis
settoDrumsorDoubleDrums.
UnlikestandardPrograms,DrumKitscanhaveadifferent
pansettingforeverynote.Thisparameterletsyouchoose
whethertousetheDrumKitpansettings,ortousethe
Programspansettinginstead.
On(checked):TheProgramwillusetheDrumKitspernote
pansettings;panAMSwillstillapply(Global55b).Thisis
thedefaultsetting.
Off(unchecked):TheProgramwillignoretheDrumKits
settings,andusetheProgrampaninstead.
AllkeysofthedrumkitwillusethePansetting.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
KROMEskeyboardtrackingcanbefairlycomplex,if
desired.Youcancreatedifferentratesofchangeoverupto
fourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.Forinstance,youcan:
Makethevolumeincreaseveryquicklyoverthemiddle
ofthekeyboard,andthenincreasemoreslowlyornotat
allinthehigheroctaves.
Makethevolumeincreaseasyouplayloweronthe
keyboard.
Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlikeeffects.
Key:
Key Low
[C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpoint
connectingthetwoslopedlinesinthelowregion.
Center
[C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointinthe
centerofkeyboardtracking.Atthiskey,thekeyboard
trackinghasnoeffectonthevolume,oronanyAMS
destinations.
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
Key High
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpoint
connectingthetwoslopedlinesinthehighregion.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
[C1...G9]
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevalueandvelocityvalueby
holdingdowntheeditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
anoteonthekeyboard(seeOGp.10).
Ramp:
Positiverampvaluesmeanthatthekeyboardtracking
outputincreasesasyouplayfartherfromtheCenterKey;
negativerampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases.
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegativeramp
settingswillchangedependingonwhethertherampisto
theleftorrightoftheCenterKey.
36
BtmLo(BottomLow)andLoCent(LowCenter):negative
rampsmakethekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyou
playlower,andpositiverampsmaketheoutputgohigher.
CentHi(CenterHigh)andHiTop(HighTop):negative
rampsmakethekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyou
playhigher,andpositiverampsmaketheoutputgoup.
Btm Lo (Bottom-Low)
ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDInote
rangeandtheKeyLowkey.Fornormalkeytrack,use
negativevalues.
Lo Cent (Low-Center)
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyLowandCenterkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.
Cent Hi (Center-High)
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandKeyHighkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
Hi Top (High-Top)
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyHighkeyandthetopof
theMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositive
values.
Ramp
Change in level
Inf
Silentinonehalfstep
99
Silentinonewholestep
95
Silentinoneoctave
48
Silentintwooctaves
25
Silentinfouroctaves
00
nochange
+25
x2infouroctaves
+50
x2intwooctaves
+99
x2inoneoctave
+Inf
x2inonehalfstep
Velocity Intensity
[99...+99]
Withpositive(+)values,thevolumewillincreaseasyou
playharder.
Withnegative()values,thevolumewilldecreaseasyou
playharder.
Velocity modulation of Amp level, with Amp EG
Volume
Time
Time
Low velocity
High velocity
+99
+50
+25
Ramp values:
99 97 95
48
25
Louder x2
Change to
Volume
No change
Silence
Low Break: D1
Center: G2
High Break: C4
37
Program mode
AMS
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
Amp1level.ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS
(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
43: Amp1 EG
43
Menu
43a
Intensity
[99...+99]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation.
Forexample,ifAMSissettoJS+Y:CC#01,positive(+)
valuesofthisparameterwillmakethevolumeincrease
whenmovethejoystickinthe+Ydirection.
Notethatiftheothermodulationsettingshavealready
raisedthevolumetoitsmaximumlevel(doubletheAmp
LevelandAmpEGlevelsettings),thevolumecannotbe
increasedanyfurther.
LFO 1/2
YoucanmodulatetheAmplevelwithbothLFO1andLFO2.
LFO1
43c
Theseparametersletyoucreatetimevaryingchangesinthe
volumeofoscillator1.
43a: EG Reset
AMS
Intensity (LFO1)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofLFO1seffectonthe
oscillatorsvolume.
Negative()valueswillinverttheLFOwaveform.
AMS (LFO1)
43b
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheEGtothestartpoint.
Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFOtotriggerthe
EGinarepeatingrhythm.Thisresetisinadditiontothe
initialnoteon,whichalwayscausestheEGtostart.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetoscaletheamount
oftheLFO1appliedtotheAmplevel.
Note:OncetheAmpEGisinitsReleasesegment,itcannot
bereset.(Otherwise,thesoundmightkeepplayingforever!)
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Threshold
Intensity
Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjusttheexact
pointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbereset,
effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstotherrhythmic
effects.Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggers
whenpassingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.
Whenthethresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingdownwards.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFO1AMS
modulationfortheAmplevel.
LFO2
TheparametersforLFO2areidenticaltothoseforLFO1.For
moreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptionsunderLFO1,
above.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
[99...+99]
ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset.
Note:WithsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFOspeeds,
theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextremevaluesof+99or
99.Inthiscase,settingtheThresholdtothesevaluesmay
causeinconsistentbehavior,ormaymeanthattheEG
doesntresetatall.Ifthishappens,reducetheThreshold
untiltheEGtriggersconsistently.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
43b: Envelope
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Theseparametersspecifyhowtheamp1EGwillchange
overtime.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
Amp EG
Start
Level
Attack
Level
Break
Level
Sustain
Level
Volume
Time
Attack
Time
Note-on or reset
Decay
Time
Slope
Time
Release
Time
Note-off
Level
Start
[00...99]
Thissetstheinitialvolumelevelatnoteon.
Attack
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime.
38
[00...99]
Break
[00...99]
Amp EG Curve
Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendofthe
Decaytime.
Sustain
Curve=0L (Linear)
Curve=10E (Exp/Log)
[00...99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit
reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff
(unlessitisresetviaAMS).
Time
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow.
EG Value
10
10ms
20
44ms
30
104ms
40
224ms
50
464ms
60
944ms
70
1.8seconds
80
3.8seconds
90
10.9seconds
99
87.3seconds
Attack
Curve=0L (Linear)
Actual Time
Attack
[00...99]
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStartlevel
totheAttacklevel.
Forthefastestpossibleattacktime,youcansettheStart
levelto+99;inthiscase,theEGwillstartinstantaneouslyat
itsmaximumvalue.
Decay
Curve=10E (Exp/Log)
[00...99]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthetransition
fromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel.
Decay
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthetransition
fromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel.
Slope
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheSlopesegmentthetransition
fromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel.
ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevelto
theBreaklevel.
Release
Slope
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe
transitionfromtheSustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
[00...99]
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheBreak
leveltotheSustainlevel.OnceitreachestheSustainlevel,
theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff(unlessitisresetvia
AMS).
Release
[00...99]
ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromtheSustain
leveltosilence.
Curve
Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis
manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraightlines.
Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelytobemade
outofcurves.
Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchangequicklyat
first,andthenslowdownasitapproachesthenextpoint.
Thistendstosoundbetterthanstraight,linearsegments.
Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurvedshapes
naturally.TheKROMEgoesastepfurtherthanvintage
synths,however,andletsyoucontroltheamountof
curvatureseparatelyforeachofthefourenvelopesegments.
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremainthe
same.However,greatercurvaturewilltendtosoundfaster,
becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyatthebeginning.
39
Program mode
highervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAt(Attack)to99,the
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
Volume
Time
Time
Original Shape
Volume
Time
Sl (Slope)
Time
AMS
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
parameters.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
St (Start)
Dc (Decay)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheDecaytime.
Volume
WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvalueforinstance,
whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8willmakethesegment
timealmosttwiceaslong,andasettingof8willcutthe
segmenttimealmostinhalf.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheStartlevel.
Rl (Release)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheReleasetime.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityandsetSt
(Start)to+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplayharder.
IfyouinsteadsetSt(Start)to99,theStartlevelwill
decreaseasyouplayharder.
At (Attack)
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
[99...+99]
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheSlopetime.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheAttacklevel.
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
Br (Break)
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
[99...+99]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheBreaklevel.
Time
ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsourcesto
controltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthethree
AMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,andReleasetimes
eachhavetheirownmodulationintensities.
Amp EG Time Modulation
AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value
Note-on
Note-off
Note-on
Note-off
Note-on
Note-off
Attack= +, Decay= +,
Slope= +, Release= +
Attack= +, Decay= +,
Slope= +, Release= +
Attack=, Decay=,
Slope=, Release=
AMS1
SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbeuseful
here,forinstance.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
At (Attack)
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheAttacktime.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityandset
At(Attack)to+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlongerat
40
45: Amp2/Driver2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasiclevel,pan,anddriver
settings.ItisavailablewhentheOscillatorModeissetto
DoubleorDoubleDrums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayed
out.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,as
describedunder41:Amp1/Driver1onpage 35.
47: Amp2 EG
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sampEG.Itisavailable
whentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleorDouble
Drums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,as
describedunder43:Amp1EGonpage 38.
410: EQ
410
Menu
410a
ThisthreebandEQ,withsweepablemid,issharedbyboth
oftheProgramsoscillators1,2.
InCombinationsandSequencers,eachtimbreandtrackhas
itsownindividualEQ.YoucanimporttheProgramsEQ
settingsintoTracksandTimbresbyusingtheCombination
andSequencerAutoLoadProgramEQoptions.
[On, Off]
On(checked):AlloftheEQwillbedisabled,includingthe
InputTrim.
BypassisusefulforcomparingtheresultsoftheEQwiththe
originalsignal.
Input Trim
[00...99]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.Thesetting
correspondstothevolume;50correspondsto12dB,and25
correspondsto24dB.
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrolscan
causesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.Youcan
compensateforthisbyturningdowntheinputtrim.
Low Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5dB.
Mid Frequency
[100(Hz)...10.00k(Hz)]
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ.
Mid Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
ThiscontrolsthegainoftheMidSweepEQ,inincrementsof
0.5dB.
High Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10kHzHighShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5dB.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
41
Program mode
Random3(S/H)generatesapulsewavewithrandom
timing.Itstheoppositeoftraditionalsampleandhold;the
timingvaries,butthelevelsdont.
ThetwoOscillatorsalsoshareasingleCommonLFO,
similartotheglobalLFOonsomevintageanalogsynths.
Random46(Continuous)aresmoothedversionsof
Random13,withrampsinsteadofsteps.Youcanusethem
tocreatemoregentlerandomvariations.
Thesepagesletyousetupalloftheparametersforallfive
LFOs.
Phase
[180...+180, Random]
Thiscontrolsthephaseofthewaveformatthestartofthe
note,instepsof5degrees.
IfKeySyncisOff,theStartPhasewillapplyonlytothefirst
noteofthephrase.
51
Menu
51a
Frequency
[00...99]
ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheLFO,beforeanymodulation.
Highervaluesmeanfasterspeeds,asshowninthetable
below.
ByusingAMSmodulation,youcanalsogetspeedsmuch
fasterandmuchslowerthanareavailablethroughthisbasic
setting.
51b
51c
Frequency Value
Frequency in Hz
00
0.014Hz
ThispagehasallofthecontrolsforthefirstLFOof
Oscillator1.Forinstance,youcan:
10
0.112Hz
20
0.422Hz
SelecttheLFOsbasicwaveform,andmodifyitwiththe
Shapeparameter.
30
0.979Hz
40
1.79Hz
ControltheLFOsfrequency,andassignAMScontrollers
tomodulatethefrequency.
50
2.84Hz
60
4.14Hz
UsetheKeySyncparametertochoosewhethertheLFO
runsseparatelyforeachvoice,orissynchronizedacross
allofthevoices
70
5.69Hz
80
7.49Hz
90
9.53Hz
UsetheFadeandDelayparameterstocontrolhowlong
theLFOwaitstostartafternoteon,andwhetheritstarts
abruptlyorfadesinslowly.
99
26.25Hz
99+Fine99
32Hz
SettheLFOtosynctoMIDItempo.
Stop
On(checked):InsteadoftheLFOoperatingnormally,itwill
ignoretheFrequencysetting.TheLFOwillmaintainthe
initialvalue(determinedbythecombinationofWaveform,
Phase,Shape,andOffset)untilthenoteoff.
Waveform
[Triangle...Random6 (Continuous)]
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform,asshowninthe
graphicbelow.
Mostofthewaveformsshouldbeselfexplanatory,butafew
willbenefitfrommoredetails:
Guitarisintendedforguitarvibrato,anditsshapeis
specificallytunedforthispurpose.Thewaveformis
positiveonly,sothatwhenusedforpitch,itwillonlybend
up,andnotdown.
Random1(S/H)generatestraditionalsampleandhold
waveforms,inwhichthelevelchangesrandomlyatfixed
intervalsoftime.
Random2(S/H)randomizesboththelevelsandthetiming.
[Off, On]
Sincethevaluewillchangeonlyatnoteon,usingaRandom
waveformwillproduceafixedvaluethatchangesrandomly
ateachnoteon(oratthefirstnoteon).
Off(unchecked):TheLFOwilloperatenormally.
Shape
[99...+99]
Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.Asyoucansee
inthegraphicbelow,thiscanmakethewaveformseither
moreroundedormoreextreme.Itcanalsobeusefulto
emphasizecertainvalueranges,anddeemphasizeothers.
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangleLFOto
modulatefiltercutoff.IfShapeemphasizesthehighvalue
range,thefilterwillspendmoretimeatthehigher
LFO waveform
42
Triangle
Guitar
Step Triangle-4
Random1
(S/H)
Random4
(Continuous)
Saw
Exponential
Triangle
Step Triangle-6
Random2
(S/H)
Random5
(Continuous)
Square
Exponential
Saw Down
Step Saw-4
Random3
(S/H)
Random6
(Continuous)
Sine
Exponential
Saw Up
Step Saw-6
frequencies.Ifitemphasizesthelowrange,thefilterwill
spendmoretimeatthelowerfrequencies.
SinceOffsetaffectstheoutputvaluesoftheLFO,its
importanttonotethatitaffectsthesignalaftertheShape
function,asshownbelow:
LFO Shape
How the LFO signal is affected by Shape and Offset
+99
Waveform
Shape
0
99
Fade
Shape = 99
[00...99]
Note:ShapedoesnotaffecttheSquareandRandom3
waveforms,sincetheirvaluesarealwayseither+99or99.
Whentheseareselected,Shapeisgrayedout.
TheLFOcanfadeingradually,insteadofsimplystarting
immediatelyatfullstrength.Thisparameterspecifiesthe
timefromwhentheLFObeginstoplayuntilitreachesits
maximumamplitude.
AMS (Shape)
IftheDelayparameterisbeingused,thenthefadewill
beginafterthedelayiscomplete.
ThisselectsaAMSsourceforcontrollingtheLFOsShape.
Modulatingtheshapecandramaticallyaltertheeffectofthe
LFOtryitout!
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
WhenKeySyncisOff,thefadewillapplyonlytothefirst
noteinthephrase.
LFO Fade and Delay
Delay
Fade
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS(Shape)
modulation.
Key Sync.
[Off, On]
On(checked):WhenKeySyncisOn,theLFOstartseach
timeyoupressakey,andanindependentLFOrunsforeach
note.Thisisthenormalsetting.
Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,theLFOstarts
fromthephasedeterminedbythefirstnoteinthephrase,so
thattheLFOsforallnotesbeingheldaresynchronized
together.TheFadeandDelaysettingswillonlyapplytothe
firstnotesLFO.
NotethatevenifKeySyncisOff,eachnotesLFOspeedmay
stillbedifferentifyoumodulatetheFrequencybynote
number,velocity,keyscaling,orothernotespecificAMS
sources.
Offset
[99...+99]
Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsarecentered
around0,andthenswingallthewayfrom99to+99.This
parameterletsyoushifttheLFOupanddown,sothatfor
instanceitscenteredon50,andthenswingsfrom49to
+149.
Forexample,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOforvibrato.If
theOffsetis0,thevibratowillbecenteredonthenotes
originalpitch,bendingitbothupanddown.
IftheOffsetis+99,ontheotherhand,thevibratowillonly
raisethepitchabovetheoriginalnote.
Offset settings and pitch change produced by vibrato
Pitch
TheoneexceptiontothisistheGuitarwaveform,whichis
designedtoemulatebendingastringonaguitarsothatthe
pitchonlygoesup,andnotdown.Becauseofthis,the
waveformiscenteredon50,andnoton0.Ofcourse,youcan
alwaysuseanegativeOffsettoshiftitbackdownbelow0
again!
Note-on
Delay
[00...99]
ThissetsthetimefromnoteonuntiltheLFOstarts.
WhenKeySyncisOff,thedelayappliesonlytothefirst
noteofthephrase.
AMS1 (Frequency)
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsourcefortheLFO1sfrequency.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
NotethatyoucanuseLFO2tomodulateLFO1sfrequency.
Intensity
[99...+99]
ThissetstheinitialamountofAMS1(Frequency).TheInt
ModAMSthenaddstothisinitialamount.
WhenAMSisatitsmaximumvalue(forexamplebymoving
thejoystickfullyawayfromyourself),theAMSaffectsthe
frequencyasshownbelow:
Intensity
+99
64x
+82
32x
+66
16x
+49
8x
+33
4x
+16
2x
16
1/2x
33
1/4x
49
1/8x
66
1/16x
82
1/32x
99
1/64x
Faster
Slower
43
Program mode
Intensity
Forexample,ifAMS1issettothePitchEG,andIntMod
AMSissettoJS+Y:CC#01,positivesettingsmeanthatYS+Y
willincreasetheintensityofthePitchEGmodulationof
LFOFrequency.
Intensity
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheamountofmodulationfromAMS2(Freq.
AMS2).
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sfirstLFO.Itisavailable
whentheOscillatorModeissettoDoubleorDouble
Drums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,as
describedunder51:OSC1LFO1onpage 42.
MIDI/Tempo Sync.
[Off, On]
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOn,theLFOwillsynchronizeto
thesystemtempo,assetbyeithertheTempoknoborMIDI
Clock.TheLFOspeedwillbecontrolledbytheBaseNote
andTimesparameters,below.AllsettingsforFrequency
andFrequencyModulationwillbeignored.
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOff,theFrequencyand
FrequencyModulationsettingswilldeterminethespeedof
theLFO,andthetemposettingswillhavenoeffect.
[ ... ]
ThissetsthebasicspeedoftheLFO,relativetothesystem
tempo.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoawholenote,
includingtriplets.
[01...32]
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.Forinstance,if
theBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,andTimesissetto
03,theLFOwillcycleoveradottedeighthnote.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:SwapLFO1&2seep.66
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
44
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsourcefortheLFO1s
frequency.ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS
(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
ThisisOscillator1ssecondLFO.Itsparametersareexactly
thesameasthoseforthefirstLFO,asdescribedunder51:
OSC1LFO1onpage 42exceptthatLFO1cannotmodulate
LFO2.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntModAMS.
EvenifthemainAMS1Intensityissetto0,IntModAMS
canstillcontrolthefinalamountofAMSAoverthefull+/
99range.
Shape
58a
Note:ShapedoesnotaffecttheSquareandRandom3
waveforms,sincetheirvaluesarealwayseither+99or99.
AMS (Shape)
58b
[99...+99]
Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.Formore
details,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1Shapeon
page 42.
ThisselectsaAMSsourceforcontrollingtheLFOsShape.
Modulatingtheshapecandramaticallyaltertheeffectofthe
LFOtryitout!
58c
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Thisisasingle,CommonLFO,globalforallvoicesinthe
ProgramlikethemodulationLFOsinsomevintageanalog
synths.
Reset AMS
TheCommonLFOstartsrunningassoonasyouselectthe
Program,andonlyresetswhenyoutellittodosoexplicitly
viatheResetSourcecontrol,below.Thisisdifferentfrom
LFO1/2sKeySyncparameter,whichresetswheneverall
notesarereleased.
TheCommonLFOspersistencecanbehandyifyouwantto
createaconstantrhythmwithanLFO,andthenplay
underneaththatrhythmwithoutretriggeringit.For
instance,youcanuseaMIDIcontrollerinyoursequencerto
resettheCommonLFOeveryfewbars,regardlessofwhat
notesarebeingplayed.
TheCommonLFOhasmostofthesamecontrolsasLFO1/2.
However,itdoesnotincludetheDelay,Fade,andKeySync
settings,sincetheseonlymakesenseforpervoiceLFOs.
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS(Shape)
modulation.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheLFOtotheStart
Phase.TheLFOresetswhentheAMSvaluepassesthe
halfwaymark:+50formostAMSsources,or64forMIDI
controllers.
TocreateaneffectsimilartothepervoiceLFOsKeySync.
setting,setthistoGate2+Damper.
Offset
[99...+99]
Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsarecentered
around0,andthenswingallthewayfrom99to+99.This
parameterletsyoushifttheLFOupanddown,sothatfor
instanceitscenteredon50,andthenswingsfrom49to
+149.
Foracompletedescription,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1
Offsetonpage 43.
510a:Common LFO
Waveform
[Triangle...Random6 (Continuous)]
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform.Foracompletelistof
thewaveformsandmoredetails,pleaseseetheentryunder
LFO1Waveformonpage 42.
Phase
[180...+180, Random]
TheResetAMS,describedabove,letsyouresetthe
CommonLFO.ThisisthephasefromwhichtheLFOwill
startwhenitisreset.
Frequency
[00...99]
ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheLFO,beforeanymodulation.
Highervaluesmeanfasterspeeds.Foracomplete
description,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1Frequency
onpage 42.
Stop
[Off, On]
On(checked):InsteadoftheLFOoperatingnormally,itwill
ignoretheFrequencysetting.Instead,theLFOsimply
generatesasinglevaluewhentheProgramisselected,and
thenholdsthatvalueuntilyouselectanotherProgram,or
untilyouresettheLFOviaAMS.
510b:Frequency Modulation
TheseparametersareidenticaltotheFrequencyModulation
settingsforLFO1,asdescribedunder51b:Frequency
Modulationonpage 43.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:SwapLFO1&2seep.66
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
Note:ThisisdifferentfromLFO1/2,inwhichthevalueis
resetwitheverynoteon.
YoucanusethisinconjunctionwiththeRandomwaveforms
tocreatestatic,randommodulation,withthevalue
changingonlywhenyoufirstselecttheProgram.
Off(unchecked):WhenStopisOff,theLFOwillfunction
normally.
45
Program mode
Quantizeturnssmoothtransitionsintodiscretesteps.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeQuantizeonpage 49.
ThetwoOscillatorsalsosharetwoCommonkeyboard
trackinggenerators,inadditiontothededicatedkeyboard
trackingfortheFilterandAmp.
GateControlusesathirdAMSsourcetoswitchbetween
twoAMSinputs(orafixedvalue).Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeGateControlonpage 49.
Thesepagesletyoucontrolallofthesemodulationsources.
NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,only
Oscillator1sAMSMixersareactive;thepagesforOscillator
2willbegrayedout.
A+B
AMS Mixer, Type = A+B
Amt A
AMS A
61
Menu
Output
AMS B
61a
Amt B
61b
A+BmergestwoAMSsourcesintoone.Thiscanbehandy
whenyouneedtoaddonemoremodulationsourcetoa
parameter,butyouvealreadyusedupalloftheavailable
AMSslots.
TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,or
processanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomethingnew.
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether,oruse
oneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother.Youcanalso
usethemtochangetheshapesofLFOsandEGsinvarious
ways,modifytheresponseofrealtimecontrollers,andmore.
YoucanselecttheoutputoftheAMSmixersasanAMS
sourceinthesamewayasanLFOorEQ.
Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputstothe
AMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance,ifyou
useLFO1asaninputtoanAMSMixer,youcanusethe
processedversionoftheLFOtocontroloneAMS
destination,andtheoriginalversiontocontrolanother.
Forinstance,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOtomodulate
FilterResonance,andthenyoudecidethatitwouldbe
interestingtoscalethatparameterwithanEGaswell.
ResonancehasonlyasingleAMSinput,butyoucaneasily
mergetheLFOandtheEGtogetherusingtheA+BAMS
Mixer:
1. AssigntheLFOtoAMSA.
2. AssigntheEGtoAMSB.
3. AssigntheAMSMixerastheFilterResonanceAMS
source.
AMS Mixer A+B example
AMS A: LFO
Finally,youcancascadethetwoAMSMixerstogether,by
usingAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMSMixer2.
AMS B: EG
ThiscontrolsthetypeofprocessingperformedbyAMS
Mixer1.EachoftheMixerTypesisdiscussedindetailover
thenextseveralpages.
A+B Output
A+BaddstwoAMSsourcestogether.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeA+Bonpage 46.
AMS A
AmtAxBscalestheamountofoneAMSsourcewiththe
other.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAmtAxBon
page 47.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
OffsetaddsorsubtractsaconstantvaluetoorfromanAMS
source.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOffsetonpage 47.
Smoothingspecifiesthesmoothnessofmovementbetweentwo
values.Youcanusethistosmoothsuddenchangessuchasan
abruptmovementofthejoystickorsharpangleoftheLFO.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeSmoothingonpage 48.
ShapeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.Formore
information,pleaseseeShapeonpage 48.
ThisselectsthefirstAMSinput.
AMS A Amount
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSAinput.
AMS B
ThisselectsthesecondAMSinput.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
AMS B Amount
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSBinput.
46
PROG P6: AMS/Common Key Track (AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track) 61: OSC1 AMS Mix1
Amt AxB
Offset
AMS Mixer, Type = Offset
Amt A
Output
AMS A
AMS B
Output
AMS A
Amt B
Thissimpleprocessoraddsaconstantoffsettotheinput,
andalsoallowsyoutodoublethegainofanAMSsource.
Amt A
ThisMixerTypeusesAMSBtoscaletheamountofAMSA.
Forinstance,youcancontroltheamountofLFO1withthe
FilterEG,orcontroltheamountofthePitchEGwiththe
joystick.
Forinstance,youcanusethistoconvertabipolarLFO(both
negativeandpositive)toaunipolarLFO(positiveonly).To
dothis:
1. SelecttheLFOastheAMSAinput.
2. SettheAMSAAmountto50.
ThiscutstheoverallleveloftheLFOinhalf,sothatinstead
ofswingingbetween99and+99,itonlyswingsbetween
50and+50.
AMS A: LFO
3. SettheAMSAOffsetto50.
Thisadds50totheLFOlevel,sothatitnowswingsbetween
0and+99,asshownbelow.
AMS Mixer Offset examples
AMS B: EG
AMS A: LFO
+99
0
AMS A
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsource,whichcanthenbescaled
byAMSB.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
AMS A Amount
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheinitialamountofAMSA,before
modulationfromAMSB.InputfromAMSBthenaddsto
thisinitialamount.
0
99
EvenifAmountAissetto0,AMSBcanstillcontrolthefinal
amountofAMSAoverthefull+/99range.
AMS B
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsource,toscaletheamountof
AMSA.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
AMS B Amount
[99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSB
modulationofAMSA.
Forexample,ifAMSAissettoLFO1andAMSBissetto
theFilterEG,positivesettingsmeanthattheEGwill
increasetheamountofLFO1.
0
99
Clipped
at Output
AMS A
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetobeoffset.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
AMS A Amount
[199...+199]
ThiscontrolsthebasiclevelofAMSA.
1. SetAMSAtothedesiredsource,andsettheAMSA
Amountto0.
+199doublestheoriginalsignallevel,while199doubles
theoriginalsignallevelandinvertsthephase.Thevalues
areclippedonlyattheoutput;internally,theycanbegreater
thanthenormalrangeof99to+99.
2. SetAMSBtoSW1or2,andAMSBAmountto+99.
AMS A Offset
YoucanuseAmtAxBtogateanAMSsource:
Now,SW1or2willturnAMSAonandoff.
[199...+199]
ThiscontrolstheamountofoffsetforAMSA.
SettingOffsetto+199shiftsanAMSinputof99alltheway
to+99.InconjunctionwithhighAMSAAmountvalues,
thiscanbeusefulforcreatingclippedshapes,suchasshown
inthelastoftheAMSMixerOffsetexamplesabove.
47
Program mode
Smoothing
Shape
ThisMixerTypesmoothsouttheAMSinput,creatingmore
gentletransitionsbetweenvalues.Youhaveseparatecontrol
oftheamountofsmoothingduringtheattack(whenthe
signalisincreasing)anddecay(whenitsdecreasing).
ThehighertheAttackandDecaysettings,themorethe
inputwillbesmoothed.
ThisMixerTypeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.This
appliesdeformationtotheAMSinput.Youcanusethisto
customizeacontrollercurve,suchastheexponentialcurve
ofthejoystickorthelogarithmiccurveofvelocitycontrol.It
canalsoaltertheshapeofprogrammablemodulation
sources,suchasEGsandLFOs.
Lowsettingsprovidesubtlecontrollersmoothing,creating
moregradualaftertouch,forinstance.Highersettingscreate
autofadeeffects,transformingaquickgestureintoalonger
fadeinand/orfadeoutevent.
Note:ShapeonlyaffectsAMSsignalswhichalreadyhave
someamountofslope,suchasEGs,triangleandsineLFOs,
andsoon.Itdoesnotaffectsignalswhichonlycontain
abrupttransitions,suchassquarewaves.
Smoothingcanalsobeusedtoaltertheshapeof
programmablemodsources,suchasLFOsandEGs.For
instance,youcanturnablipintoasimpleenvelopeshape,
asshownbelow.
AMS A
ThisselectstheAMSinputsourcetobeshaped.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Shape
[99...+99]
Thiscontrolstheamountofcurvature,andwhetherthe
curvesareconcaveorconvex.Asyoucanseeinthegraphic
examples,theshapewilltendtoemphasizecertainvalue
ranges,anddeemphasizeothers.
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangleLFO,
throughShape,tomodulatefiltercutoff.IfShape
emphasizesthehighvaluerange,thefilterwillspendmore
timeatthehigherfrequencies.Ifitemphasizesthelow
range,thefilterwillspendmoretimeatthelower
frequencies.
Mode
[Symmetric, Asymmetric]
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetobesmoothed.
ThisselectswhethertheShapeparameterwillproduceone
ortwocurves.ThegraphicAMSMixerShapeexamples
mayhelptovisualizehowthisworks.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
Asymmetricwillproduceasinglecurve,extendingfrom
99to+99.
AMS A Attack
Symmetricwillproducetwomatchingcurvesextending
outwardsfrom0to99and+99,respectively.
AMS A
[00...+99]
Thiscontrolstheattacktimeofthesmoother,orhowlongit
takesthesmoothertoreachanew,highervalue.
HigherAttacksettingsmeanlongertimes.
DependingonhowquicklytheAMSinputvalueis
changing,highAttacksettingsmaymeanthatthevalueis
neverquitereached,asshowninAMSMixerShape
examplesabove.
AMS A Decay
[00...+99]
Thiscontrolsthedecaytimeofthesmoother,orhowlongit
takesthesmoothertoreachanew,lowervalue.
HigherDecaysettingsmeanlongertimes.
48
PROG P6: AMS/Common Key Track (AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track) 61: OSC1 AMS Mix1
AMS A
ThisselectstheAMSinputsourcetobequantized.
Asymmetric
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)Listonpage 340.
+99
Number Of Steps
[2...32]
Thiscontrolstheseverityoftheeffect.Thelowerthenumber
ofsteps,themoresteppytheoutputwillbe.
99
Forinstance,whenthisissetto2,therewillbestepsat0,
50,and99.WithabipolarAMSinput,therewillalsobe
stepsat50and99.
Symmetric
+99
Asanotherexample,whenitissetto5,therewillbestepsat
0,20,40,60,80,and99(aswellas20,40,60,80,and99
forbipolarinputs).
0
99
Asymmetric
Symmetric
+99
Youcanusethejoysticktocreatequantizedpitchbendsthat
simulateslidingacrossthefretsofaguitar,orjumpbend
soundscausedbydifferencesinthelengthofthetubeofa
trumpet.Todoso:
1. SelecttheAMSMixerastheOscillatorPitchAMS
input.
2. SetthePitchAMSIntensitytoanyexacthalfstep
value,suchas+5.00,+7.00,etc.
99
3. SettheJS(+X),JS(X)amountto0.00.
Asymmetric
(not recommended)
Symmetric
4. IntheAMSMixer,selecttheJSXasAMSA.
5. SettheNumberOfStepstothesamenumberyouused
inStep2.
+99
Now,playingthejoystickwillcreatequantizedpitchbends.
JSXwillstillproducesmoothpitchbends,asusual,soyou
canusebothtechniquestogether.
0
99
Gate Control
Shape = +99
Shape = 99
Control
Quantize
Fixed Value
ThisMixerTypechangestheinputfromacontinuoussignal
intoaseriesofdiscretesteps.Insteadofmovingsmoothly
betweenvalues,itwillsnapimmediatelyfromonevalueto
another.
YoucanusethistochangetheshapeofLFOsorEGs,orto
forceacontrollertolandonafewspecificvalues.
AMS Mixer Quantize examples
Unipolar (e.g., JS+Y)
+99
Original
AMS A
0
99
+99
Quantize
Steps = 8
0
99
+99
Quantize
Steps = 16
0
99
Below
AMS
Fixed Value
At & Above
AMS
ThisMixerTypeletsyousetuptwodifferentAMSsources
(orfixedAMSamounts),andthenswitchbetweenthetwo
usingathirdAMSsource.
Itssimilartoanaudiogatewithasidechain,butwitheven
moreflexibilitysinceyougettochoosewhathappenswhen
thegateisclosed(belowthethreshold),aswellaswhenits
open(abovethethreshold).
Youcanalsochoosewhetherthegatewillbeabletoopen
andclosecontinuouslyinresponsetothecontrolsource,or
whetheritonlyopensorclosesatthebeginningofthenote,
andthenstaysthatwayoverthenotesentireduration.
YoucanusetheGateto:
Useafootswitch(orothercontroller)toapplypitchbend
orothereffectstosomenotes,butnottoothers
Theparameterwillbeappliedwhenthecontroller
reachesaspecificthreshold.Forexample,thevelocity
valuecouldcontrolthefilterresonanceonlyifthevelocity
valueexceeds90.
Usethejoystick,switches,orcontrollerstochange
betweentwoseparateLFOs(orotherAMSsources).
49
Program mode
Gate Control:
Source
6. OntheOSCPitchpage,assigntheAMSMixertocon
trolthepitch.
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetocontrolthegate.
[Off, On]
Whenthisisenabled(checked),thevalueoftheControl
Sourceatnoteonwillselecttheoutput(BelowThreshold
orAt&AboveThreshold).Theselectedoutputwillthen
remainactivethroughoutthedurationofthenote,
regardlessofanysubsequentchangeintheControlSources
value.
(Ifthepitchchanges,gototheOSCPitchpageandsetPitch
JS(+X)andJS(X)to+00.)
8. Turnonthefootswitch,andaddanewnotetothepre
viouschord.
9. MovethejoystickintheXdirection;pitchbendwillbe
appliedonlytothenewlyplayednote.
Notethattheoutputvalueitselfcancontinuetochange;
onlytheselectionofBeloworAt&Aboveisfixed.
Thenewnotewillbend,buttheoriginalchord(played
beforeyoupressedonthefootswitch)willnot.
Threshold
[99...+99]
ThissetsthevalueoftheControlSourceatwhichthegate
opensorcloses.
2. SetControlAtNoteOnOnlytoOn(checked).
IfthevalueoftheControlSourceislessthantheThreshold,
theGateoutputsthepresetvalueorAMSsourceselected
underBelowThreshold.
IfthevalueoftheControlSourceisgreaterthanorequalto
theThreshold,theGateoutputsthepresetvalueorAMS
sourceselectedintheAt&AboveThresholdparameter.
Below Threshold
ThisselectswhetherBelowThresholdusesapresetvalue,
ortheselectedAMSsource.
Fixed Value
[99...+99]
Thisletsyousetaspecificvaluetobeusedwhenthe
ControlSourceislessthantheThreshold.Thisonlyapplies
whenBelowThresholdissettoFixedValue.
AMS A
YoucanalsouseasingleAMSsourceasboththeControl
Sourceandavaluesource:
1. SettheControlSourcetoJSX.
Gate Output:
ThisletsyousetanAMSsourcetopassthroughtheGate
whentheControlSourceislessthantheThreshold.This
onlyapplieswhenBelowThresholdissettoAMSA.
3. SettheThresholdto00.
4. SetBelowThresholdtoAMSA:JSX.
5. SetAt&AboveThresholdtoaFixedValueof00.
6. OntheOSCPitchpage,assigntheAMSMixertocon
trolthepitch.
7. Withthejoystickinthecenter,playachord,andholdit
throughstep9.
8. Bendthejoysticktotheleft,andthenplayanewnote
abovethechord.
(Ifthepitchchanges,gototheOSCPitchpageandsetPitch
JS(+X)andJS(X)to+00.)
9. Usethejoysticktobendthepitchofthenewnote.
Thenewnotewillbend,buttheoriginalchord(played
beforeyoubentthejoystickdown)willnot.Thismethodis
particularlygoodforbendingthetopnoteofachordupto
pitch.
Sometimes,itcanbehandytohaveapresetvalueasan
AMSsource.TheGateisonewaytocreatethis.Todoso:
ThisselectswhetherAt&AboveThresholdusesapreset
value,ortheselectedAMSsource.
1. SetbothBelowThresholdandAt&AboveThreshold
toFixedValue,andenterthesamevalueintoeach.
Fixed Value
[99...+99]
Thisletsyousetaspecificvaluetobeusedwhenthe
ControlSourceisgreaterthanorequaltotheThreshold.
ThisonlyapplieswhenAt&AboveThresholdissetto
FixedValue.
AMS B
ThisletsyousetanAMSsourcetopassthroughtheGate
whentheControlSourceisgreaterthanorequaltothe
Threshold.ThisonlyapplieswhenAt&AboveThreshold
issettoAMSB.
50
7. Turnoffthefootswitch,andwhileholdingdowna
chord,movethejoystickintheXdirection.Thepitch
willnotchange.
Now,theAMSmixerwillalwaysgeneratethisstaticvalue.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
PROG P6: AMS/Common Key Track (AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track) 62: OSC1 AMS Mix2
ThispagecontrolsthetwoAMSMixersforOscillator2.
TheseareavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto
DoubleorDoubleDrums;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayed
out.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,as
describedunder61:OSC1AMSMix1onpage 46.
ThetwoOscillatorssharetwoCommonkeyboardtracking
generators,inadditiontoeachOscillatorsdedicated
keyboardtrackingfortheFilterandAmp.Youcanusethese
CommonkeytracksasAMSsourcesformodulatingmost
AMSdestinations.
TheCommonKeyboardTrackparametersaresharedbythe
entireProgram,buttheactualAMSvaluesarecalculated
individuallyforeachvoice.
Ramp:
+99
+99
+50
Ramp = +99
Ramp:
+99
99
00
50
99
Ramp = 50
99
AMS
Low Break
Center
High Break
Formoreinformation,pleasesee32:Filter1Keyboard
Trackonpage 28.
51
Program mode
Inf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgotoitsextremehighestor
lowestvalueoverthespanofasinglekey.
Key
Low Break
[C1...G9]
Ramp = +Inf
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpoint
connectingthetwoslopedlinesinthelowregion.
Center
[C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointinthe
centerofkeyboardtracking.Atthiskey,thekeyboard
trackinghasnoeffectontheAMSdestinations.
High Break
[C1...G9]
Ramp = 50
Ramp = Inf
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpoint
connectingthetwoslopedlinesinthehighregion.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevalueandvelocityvalueby
holdingdowntheeditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
anoteonthekeyboard(seeOGp.10).
Key Low
Center
Key High
Note:IfyousettheCenterHighrampto+InforInf,the
HighTopparameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,ifyouset
theLowCenterrampto+InforInf,theBottomLowramp
willbegrayedout.
Ramp
V
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegativeRamp
settingswillchangedependingonwhethertherampisto
theleftorrightoftheCenterKey.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
BottomLowandLowCenter:negativerampsmakethe
keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayloweron
thekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutputgo
higher.
4:SwapOscillatorseep.65
CenterHighandHighTop:negativerampsmakethe
keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayhigheron
thekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutputgoup.
Bottom-Low
ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDInote
rangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkeytrack,use
negativevalues.
Low-Center
ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenterkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.
Center-High
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
High-Top
ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthetop
oftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositive
values.
ThetablebelowshowshowtheRampsaffecttheAMS
output:
Ramp value
Inf
AMS change
goesto99in1halfstep
99
20peroctave
50
10peroctave
nochange
+50
+10peroctave
+99
+20peroctave
+Inf
goesto+99in1halfstep
52
Positiverampvaluesmeanthatthekeyboardtracking
outputincreasesasyouplayfartherfromtheCenterKey;
negativerampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyOscillatorseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
Selectsthearpeggiopattern.
Preset/User No
Presetarpeggiopatterns
U0000(INT)...U0899(INT)
Preloadedarpeggiopatterns
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)
Userarpeggiopatterns
Note:U0000(INT)U1027(USER)arerewritable.UseGlobal
P6:ArpeggioPatterntocreatearpeggiopatterns.
P1: DOWN
71
Menu
Contents
P0...P4
Note:Pattern,Resolution,Octave,Sort,Latch,KeySync.,
Keyboard,and (Tempo)canalsobesetfromtheP0:Play,
Arpeggiopage.
71a
[P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
DOWN
71b
P2: ALT1
ALT1
71a: Tempo
(Tempo)*
P3: ALT2
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
ALT2
Setsthetempo,expressedasbeatsperminute.
YoucanalsoadjustthisbyturningthefrontpanelTEMPO
knob.Alternatively,youcansetthetempobypressingthe
TAPbuttonatthedesiredinterval.
WhenMIDIClock(GlobalP1:11b)issettoeither
ExternalMIDIorExternalUSB,thisparameterwill
indicateEXT,andthearpeggiatorwillsynchronizeto
theMIDIClockreceivedfromanexternalMIDIdevice.
IfMIDIClockissettoAuto,thisindicationwillbe
shownonlyifMIDIclockdataisbeingreceivedfrom
anexternaldevice.WhentheEXTindicationisshown,
thearpeggiatoretc.willsynchronizetoMIDIclockdata
fromtheexternalMIDIdevice.
P4: RANDOM
RANDOM
Octave*
[1, 2, 3, 4]
Specifiesthenumberofoctavesinwhichthearpeggiowill
beplayed.
Ifauserarpeggiopatternisselected,therangeofthe
arpeggiowilldependontheOctaveMotion(GlobalP6:
61b)setting.
53
Program mode
Thiscanalsobecontrolledbythearpeggiocontrol(ARP)
SWINGknob.Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwilladjust
thetiminginthedirection,andturningittowardthe
rightwilladjustthetiminginthe+direction.
Octave: 4
UP
Sort*
[Off, On]
Thisspecifiestheorderinwhichthenotesyoupresswillbe
arpeggiated.
[ , , , , , , , ]
Resolution*
Specifiesthetimingresolutionofthearpeggio.Thenotesof
thearpeggiowillbeplayedattheintervalyouspecify: , ,
, , , , ,or .Thespeedofthearpeggiopatternis
determinedbytheArpeggiator(Tempo)andthe
Resolution.
TurningthearpeggiocontrolARPSTEPknobtowardthe
rightwillshortenthespacingofthearpeggiatednotes
(Resolution)inincrementsofhalvingthespacing.Turning
theknobtowardtheleftwillshortenthelengthofthe
pattern(Length)inincrementsofhalvingthelength.When
theknobisinthecenterposition(12oclock),thevalueswill
beasspecifiedbytheLengthandResolutionsettings
(GlobalP6:ArpeggioPatternSetuppage).
Gate
[000...100(%), Step]
On (checked):Noteswillbearpeggiatedintheorderoftheir
pitch,regardlessoftheorderinwhichyoupressedthem.
Off (unchecked):Noteswillbearpeggiatedintheorderin
whichyoupressedthem.
Sort
OFF, UP
Sort
ON, UP
Latch*
[Off, On]
Specifieswhetherornotthearpeggiowillcontinueplaying
afteryoutakeyourhandoffofthekeyboard.
Specifiesthelength(gatetime)ofeachnoteinthearpeggio.
On(checked):Thearpeggiowillcontinueplayingafteryou
removeyourhandfromthekeyboard.
000100(%):Eachnotewillbeplayedwiththespecifiedgate
time.
Off(unchecked):Thearpeggiowillstopwhenyouremove
yourhandfromthekeyboard.
Step:Thisisavailablewhenauserarpeggiopattern
U0000(INT)U1027(USER)isselectedforPattern.When
thisisselected,thegatetimespecifiedforeachstepwillbe
used.
Thegatetimecanalsobecontrolledbythearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)GATEknob.Rotatingtheknobtowardtheleftwill
shortenthegatetime,androtatingittowardtherightwill
lengthenthegatetime.Whentheknobisatthe12oclock
position,thegatetimewillbeasspecifiedhere.
Velocity
Key Sync.*
[Off, On]
Specifieswhetherthearpeggiopatternwillbeginwhenyou
pressakey,orwhetheritwillalwaysfollowthe (Tempo)
(Prog01a).
On(checked):Thearpeggiopatternwillstartplayingfrom
thebeginningwhenanoteonoccursfromacondition
wherenokeysarepressed.Thissettingissuitablewhenyou
areplayinginrealtimeandwantthearpeggiotoplayfrom
thebeginningofthemeasure.
Specifiesthevelocityofthenotesinthearpeggio.
Off(unchecked):Thearpeggiopatternwillalwaysplay
accordingtothe (Tempo).
001127:Eachnotewillsoundwiththespecifiedvelocity
value.
Keyboard*
Key:Eachnotewillsoundwiththevelocityvalueatwhichit
wasactuallyplayed.
Thisspecifieswhetherthenotesyouplayonthekeyboard
willbesoundedasusualinadditiontobeingsoundedas
partofthearpeggio.
Step:Thisisavailablewhenanuserarpeggiopattern
U0000(INT)U1027(USER)isselectedforPattern.When
thisisselected,thevelocityspecifiedforeachstepwillbe
used.
Thevelocitycanalsobecontrolledbythearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)VELOCITYknob.Rotatingtheknobtowardtheleft
willdecreasethevelocity,androtatingittowardtheright
willincreasethevelocity.Whentheknobisatthe12oclock
position,thevelocitywillbeasspecifiedhere.
Whenapreloaduserarpeggiopatternisselected,settingthe
GateorVelocitytoStepwilladdasenseofgroovetothe
arpeggiopattern.
Swing
[100...+100(%)]
Thisparametershiftsthetimingoftheoddnumberednotes
ofthearpeggio.
When Resolution =
Step 1
[Off, On]
On(checked):Thenotesyouplaywillbesoundedontheir
own,inadditiontobeingsoundedaspartofthearpeggio.
Forexampleifyousimultaneouslypresstwoormorenotes,
theywillbesoundedasusualinadditiontobeingplayedas
arpeggiatednotes.
Off(unchecked):Onlythearpeggiatednoteswillbeheard.
Note:YoucanusethemenucommandCopyArpeggiatorto
copyarpeggiatorsettingsfromanotherprogramor
combination(seepage 66).
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyArpeggiatorseep.66
50
Swing
54
25
+25
+50
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyArpeggiatorseep.66
72
Menu
72a
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
72b
72c
74
Menu
74a
74b
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee(Tempo)*onpage 53.
Hereyoucanselectadrumtrackpatternandspecifyhowit
willsound.
C1
G9
Top Key
[C1G9]
Bottom Key
[C1G9]
Theseparametersspecifytherangeofnotes(keys)forwhich
thearpeggiatorwillfunction.TopKeyistheupperlimit,
andBottomKeyisthelowerlimit.
Thearpeggiatorwilloperatewhenyouplaykeyswithinthe
specifiedrange.Keysoutsideofthisrangecanbeplayedin
thenormalmanner,andwillnotbeaffectedbythe
arpeggiatoron/off.
InProgrammode,thedrumtrackpatternsare
triggeredontheGlobalMIDIchannel.TheMIDI
transmitchannelisspecifiedbytheDrumTrackProg
MIDICh(GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasic).Usethe
DrumTrackProgMIDIOut(GlobalP1:MIDIMIDI
Basic)settingtospecifywhetherthepatternwill
transmitMIDInotedata.Thedefaultsettingischannel
10.
Thedrumtrackprogramwillnottransmitorreceive
MIDIprogramchanges.
[Preset, User]
[(Preset): P000...605, (User): U000...U999]
Thisselectsthedrumpattern.
Preset/User No.
P000
Contents
Off
P000...P605
Presetdrumpatterns
U000...U999
Foruser/preloadeddrumpatterns
ForexampleifyousetPatterntoP0:UP,checkLatch,set
TopKeytoB3,andBottomKeytoC1,playinganoteB3or
lowerwilltriggerthearpeggiator.SinceLatchison,the
arpeggiowillcontinueevenafteryoureleasethekeys.You
canusetheC4andhigherkeystoplayconventionallyalong
withthearpeggiosoundedbytheB3andlowerkeys.To
changethearpeggio,playkeysintherangeofB3andbelow.
U000U999canbewritten.Patternsyoucreatein
Sequencermodecanbeconvertedintouserdrum
patterns.(Seepage 188)
Top Velocity
[001127]
Thistransposesthedrumpatterninsemitonesteps.This
meansthattheinstrumentsofthedrumkitwillchange.
Bottom Velocity
[001127]
Shift
[24...+00...+24]
Specifiestherangeofvelocitiesforwhichthearpeggiator
willfunction.TopVelocityistheupperlimit,andBottom
Velocityisthelowerlimit.
Thearpeggiatorwilloperatewhenyouplaynoteswitha
velocity(playingstrength)thatiswithinthespecifiedrange.
Notesplayedwithavelocityoutsidethisrangewillbe
soundednormally,withoutregardtothearpeggiatoron/off.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevalueandvelocityvalueby
holdingdowntheeditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
anoteonthekeyboard(seeOGp.10).
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
55
Program mode
74b: Trigger
75a
75
Menu
75b
75c
WaitKBDTrig:WhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACKbutton
toturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillwaittostart.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,orwhenaMIDInoteonis
received,thedrumpatternwillstartaccordingtotheSync
setting.
IfyouveselectedStartImmediately,theDRUM
TRACKbuttonwillalwaysbesavedintheOFFstate.
Sync
[Off, On]
Off:Thedrumpatternwillnotsynchronizetothecurrently
runningarpeggiator,butwillstartimmediately.
On:Thedrumpatternwillsynchronizetothecurrently
runningarpeggiator.
Note:UseP71:ArpeggiatorSetupKeySynctospecify
whetherthearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothecurrently
runningdrumpattern.
Hereyoucanselectthedrumprogramthatwillbeusedby
thedrumtrack.
Note:OnlyprogramsoftheDrumcategorycanbeselected.
[Off, On]
Ifdataisloadedorasystemexclusivemessageis
receivedsothattheselectedprogramisnolongera
Drumcategoryprogram,itwillbereplacedwiththe
firstprogramoftheDrumcategory.
Thisspecifieswhetherthedrumtrackwillcontinueplaying
evenafteryoutakeyourhandoffthekeyboard.
Thedrumtrackprogramwillnottransmitorreceive
MIDIprogramchanges.
Latch
ThissettingisavailableifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBD
Trig.
Volume
Off:Thepatternwillstopwhenyoutakeyourhandoffthe
keyboard(i.e.,whenallnotesareoff).
Play/Mute
On:ThepatternwillcontinueplayinguntiltheDRUM
TRACKbuttonisturnedoff(LEDunlit),regardlessof
whetheryouareperformingviathekeyboardorviaMIDI.
[000...127]
Thisadjuststhevolumeofthedrumtrackprogram.
[Mute, Play]
Thismutesthedrumtrackprogram.Thesettingwill
alternateeachtimeyoupressthePlay/Mutebutton.
Mute:Thedrumtrackprogramwillnotbeheard(Mute).
Play:Thedrumtrackprogramwillbeheard(Play).
Zone:
Keyboard
Bottom
[C1...G9]
Top
[C1...G9]
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.
Itspecifiestherangeofkeysthatwillstartthedrumpattern.
Velocity
Bottom
[001...127]
Top
[001...127]
YoucanusetheP03:Mixer&DrumTrackpagetoeditthe
Play/Mute,SoloOn/Off,andVolumesettingsofthedrum
track.(See03a:OSC/DrumTrackMixeronpage 5.)
Detune
[1200...+1200]
Thisadjuststhepitchinonecentsteps.Onecentis1/100th
ofasemitone.
ThepitchofeachdrumkitisspecifiedinGlobalP5:Drum
Kit.
YoucancontrolthisusingRPNs.
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.
Itspecifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwillstartthedrum
pattern.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevalueandvelocityvalueby
holdingdowntheeditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
anoteonthekeyboard(seeOGp.10).
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyDrumTrackseep.65
4:EraseDrumTrackPatternseep.66
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
56
75b: EQ
Auto Load Program EQ
[Off, On]
On(checked):Whenyouswitchthedrumtrackprogram,
the3bandEQvaluesspecifiedfortheprogramwill
automaticallybeloaded.Normallyyouwillleavethis
checked.
Youarefreetoeditthe3bandEQvaluesthatare
automaticallyloaded.Youwillbemakingchangesbasedon
thesettingsoftheoriginalprogram.
Off(unchecked):The3bandEQvaluesspecifiedforthe
programwillnotbeloadedwhenyouswitchthedrumtrack
program.
Bypass
[On, Off]
WhenBypassischecked,alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
includingtheInputTrim.
Bypasscanbeconvenientforcomparingtheresultsofthe
EQwiththeoriginalsignal.
Input Trim
[00...99]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.This
settingcorrespondstothevolume;avalueof50corresponds
to6dB,andasettingof25correspondsto12 dB.
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrolscan
causesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.Youcan
compensateforthisbyturningdowntheinputtrim.
High Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10 kHzHighShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5 dB.
Mid Frequency
[100Hz...10k(Hz)]
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ.
Mid Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
ThiscontrolsthegainoftheMidSweepEQ,inincrementsof
0.5 dB.
Low Gain
[18.0...+00.0...+18.0[dB]]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80 HzLowShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5 dB.
75c: Bus
Bus Select
Thisspecifiesthebusthatwilloutputthedrumtrack
program.
Dkit:TheBus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControlBus,Send1
(toMFX1),andSend2(toMFX2)settings(Global55b)for
eachkeyofthedrumkitusedbytheselecteddrumtrack
programwillbevalid.Choosethissettingifyouwantto
applyseparateinserteffectstoeachdruminstrument.
Note:WhenmakingDkitsettings,youwillnormallyuse
IFX.Patchtospecifytheoutputdestination.
L/R:OutputtotheL/Rbus.
IFX1
IFX2
IFX3
IFX4
IFX5
Here,youcanpatchtheBus(IFX/Output)Selectsetting
specifiedforeachkeyofthedrumkit,temporarilychanging
itsconnectiondestinationfromtheoriginallyspecified
inserteffecttosomeotherdestination.Thiscanbeexecuted
onlyifthedrumtrackprogramsBus(IFX/Output)Selectis
settoDKitandtheBus(IFX/Output)Select(Global55b)
foreachkeyofthedrumkitissettoIFX15.
Asthepatchdestination,chooseaninserteffectorL/R,
IFX15,orOffastheoutputbus.
Note:Ifyouwanttoreturnthedrumkittoitspreviousstate,
changethesesettingstoIFX1IFX1,IFX2IFX2,
IFX3IFX3,IFX4IFX4,andIFX5IFX5.
Forthepreloadedkits,snaresoundsarenormallysentto
IFX1,kicksoundstoIFX2,andothersoundstoIFX3.Insuch
casesifyousetBusSelecttoDkit,thesesoundswillbesent
toIFX1,IFX2,andIFX3,butIFX1andIFX2aresetfornormal
(nondrum)programs.Insuchcases,youcanuseIFX.Patch
toroutethesedrumsoundstounusedIFX;forexample,you
mightsendthesnaresoundstoIFX3,kicksoundstoIFX4,
andothersoundstoIFX5.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
EffectGuideonpage 235.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyDrumTrackseep.65
4:EraseDrumTrackPatternseep.66
IFX1,2,3,4,5:OutputtotheIFX15bus.
Off:ThesoundwillnotbeoutputtotheL/Rbus,orIFX15
bus.UsetheOffsettingifyouhaveconnectedthedrum
trackprogramoutputinseriestoamastereffect.UseSend1
(toMFX1)orSend2(toMFX2)toadjustthesendlevel.
FX Control Bus
IFX. Patch:
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
[Off, 1, 2]
ThissendstheoutputofthedrumtrackprogramtotheFX
Controlbus(twomonochannelsFXCtrl1,2).
TheFXControlbusisusedwhenyouwanttouseanother
audiosignaltocontroltheinputofaneffect.Youcanusethe
twoFXControlbuses(twomonochannels)tofreelycontrol
theeffectsinavarietyofways.Formoreinformation,please
seeFXControlBusesonpage 238.
Send 1
[000...127]
Send 2
[000...127]
Thesespecifythesendlevelatwhichtheoutputofthedrum
trackprogramwillbesenttoeachmastereffect.
Send1:Sendthesignaltomastereffect1.
Send2:Sendthesignaltomastereffect2.
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,thesendlevelsto
themastereffectsaresetbythepostIFX15Send1and
Send2(Prog82a).
YoucanuseCC#93tocontrolSend1,andCC#91to
controlSend2.
57
Program mode
On(checked):TheBus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControl
Bus,Send1,andSend2settings(Global55b)foreachkey
oftheselecteddrumkitwillbeused.Checkthisifyouwant
toapplyanindividualinserteffecttoeachdruminstrument.
Sendtheoutputofaoscillatortoaninserteffect
Routeasoundtoaninserteffect
Tip:Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedruminstrumentshave
thesameBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingsaccordingtotheir
type,asfollows.
Makedetailedsettingsforinserteffects
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
page 235.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
81: Routing
81
Menu
81a
81c
81b
Off(unchecked):TheBus(IFX/Output)Select(Prog81b),
FXControlBus(Prog81b),OSCMFXSend(Prog81d)
settingswillbeused.Alldruminstrumentswillbesentto
thespecifiedbus.
81d
[000...127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputofoscillator
1willbesenttomastereffect1.ThisappliesonlywhenBus
(IFX/Output)Select(Prog81b)issettoL/RorOff.
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX1IFX5,thesend
levelstomastereffects1and2aresetbySend1andSend2
(Prog82a)afterpassingthroughIFX15.
OSC2:
[000...127]
[000...127]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforoscillators1and2.
L/R:TheoscillatorswillbeoutputtotheL/Rbus.Normally
youwillchooseL/R.
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputofOSC2
willbesenttomastereffects1and2.Theseparameterswill
bevalidwhenOscillatorModeissettoDoubleorDouble
DrumsandBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoL/RorOff.
IFX15:OutputtotheIFX15busses.
CC#93controlsOSC1/2sSend1level,andCC#91
controlstheSend2level.Thesearecontrolledonthe
globalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Theactualsend
levelisdeterminedbymultiplyingthesevalueswith
thesendlevelsofeachoscillator.
Off:TheoscillatorwillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,or
IFX15busses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwantthe
programoscillatoroutputofthetimbretobeconnectedin
seriestoamastereffect.UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
MFX2)tospecifythesendlevels.
FX Control Bus
[Off, 1, 2]
Sendstheoutputoftheoscillator1,2toanFXControlbus
(twochannelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
UsetheFXControlbusseswhenyouwantaseparatesound
tocontroltheaudioinputofaneffect.YoucanusetwoFX
Controlbusses(eachisatwochannelmonobus)tocontrol
effectsinvariousways.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuseson
page 238.
[Off, On]
ThisisshownifOscillatorMode(Prog11a)issettoDrums
orDoubleDrums.IfOscillatorModeissettoSingleor
Double,thissettingisignored.
58
[000...127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputofoscillator
1willbesenttomastereffect2.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeOSC1Send1(toMFX1)onpage 58.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
4:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
Youcanchaintwoormoreeffectsintothesamedown
streameffect.Forinstance,bothIFX1andIFX2canbe
chainedtoIFX5.
Effectscanalsojoinachaininthemiddle.Forinstance,you
canchainIFX3toIFX4toIFX5,andthenchainIFX2toIFX5
aswell.
ThePan:#8,Bus(BusSelect),Ctrl(FXControlBus),and
Send1/2settingsapplyonlytothelasteffectinthechain.
However,anyeffectinthechaincanbesenttotheFX
Controlbuses.
IFX1: Chain
[Off, On]
IFX2: Chain
[Off, On]
IFX3: Chain
[Off, On]
IFX4: Chain
[Off, On]
Here,youcanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1through
5,itson/offstatus,chaining,andadjustthepostIFXmixer
settings.
Thisenablesthechain,assetupbytheChaintoparameter,
above.
Forinserteffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalwaysstereoin
andout.Theinput/outputconfigurationoftheeffectsound
(Wet)dependsontheeffecttype.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1
IFX5)onpage 240.
Pan:#8:
Pan: #8 (Post IFX PanCC#8)
[L000...C064...R127]
Specifiesthepanningimmediatelyaftertheinserteffect.
YoucanuseCC#8tocontrolthis.
Bus Sel.:
Insert Effect:
IFX1...4
[000...193]
IFX5
[000...171]
Specifiesthebustowhichthesignalwillbesent
immediatelyaftertheinserteffect.
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffect.
IFX5cannotusedoublesizeeffects(172193).Ifyouusea
doublesizeeffect,thenextinserteffectwillbeunavailable.
ForexampleifyouselectadoublesizeeffectforIFX1,you
wontbeabletouseIFX2.
[Off, On]
Switchestheinserteffecton/off.
Ifthisisoff,theinputwillsimplybepassedtotheoutput.
(When000:NoEffectisselected,theresnodifference
betweenOnandOff.)
Thesettingwillalternatebetweenonandoffeachtimeyou
pressthebutton.
Separatelyfromthissetting,youcanuseMIDICC#92
(ontheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a))toturnall
inserteffectsoff.Avalueof0turnsthemoff,andvalues
of1127restoretheoriginalsetting.
Chain:
IFX1: Chain to
[IFX2...IFX5]
IFX2: Chain to
[IFX3...IFX5]
IFX3: Chain to
[IFX4...IFX5]
Youcanchainuptofiveinserteffectstogetherinseries,to
createmorecomplexeffects.Setupthechainusingthis
parameter,andthenenableitusingtheChaincheckbox,
below.
[Off, L/R]
L/R:ThesignalwillbesenttotheL/Rbus,whichpasses
throughTFXandthengoestotheAUDIOOUTPUTL/R
outputs.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Off:ThesignalwillnotbesentdirectlytotheL/Routputs.
Thissettingisusefulifyouwantto:
UseSend1or2toroutethesignalentirelythroughthe
mastereffects,withoutsendingthedrysignaltothe
outputs.
UsetheFXControlBustoroutethesignaltoaneffectsside
chain,suchasagateorvocoder,withoutbeingheard
directlyattheoutputs.
FX Ctrl:
FX Ctrl (FX Control Bus)
[Off, 1, 2]
SendsthepostIFXsignaltotheFXControlbusses.Formore
information,pleaseseeFXControlBusonpage 58.
IfyoureusingCtrl(FXControlBus)asaninputsignal
forVocoderetc.,afeedbackloopwilloccurifyou
outputtothesamebusasspecifiedhere,andoscillation
willoccur.Setthiswithcaretoavoidcreatingaloop.
Send1/2:
Send1
[000...127]
Send2
[000...127]
TheseadjustthelevelatwhichthepostIFXsignalissentto
mastereffects1and2.ThisisvalidifBus(BusSelect)isset
toL/RorOff.
YoucanuseCC#93tocontroltheSend1level,and
CC#91tocontroltheSend2level.TheglobalMIDI
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a)is
usedforthesemessages.
Effectsmustbechainedinascendingnumericorder.For
example,IFX1canbechainedtoanyofIFX2throughIFX5,
andIFX2canbechainedtoIFX3throughIFX5.
59
Program mode
selectanEffectPreset,andthensavetheProgram,theEffect
Presetsettingwillrevertto.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
1. SelectaneffectintheInsertFXSetuppage.
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
2. TheP00:InitialSetsettingswillberecalled.
3:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
P(EffectPreset)willindicate.
4:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
3. UseP(EffectPreset)toselectaneffectpreset:P00
P15orU00U15.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
Thestoredparameterswillberecalled.Notethatthiswill
overwriteallparametersoftheeffect.
4. Edittherecalledparametersasdesired.
83: IFX1
83
Menu
83a
5. Ifyouvecomeupwithsettingsyoulikeandwantto
savethemasanewpreset,usetheWriteFXPreset
menucommand.
IFX1 Parameters:
IFX1 Parameters
ThistabshowstheparametersforIFX1,asselectedonthe
InsertFXSetuppage.
Fordetailsonthespecificparametersofeacheffect,please
seeInsertEffects(IFX1IFX5)onpage 240.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheinserteffectyou
selectedintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage.
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledonthe
globalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Formore
information,pleaseseeDynamicModulationSource
Listonpage 346.
IFX1 On/Off
[Off, On]
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
4:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
5:WriteFXPresetseep.67
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
Thisturnstheinserteffectonandoff.Itislinkedwiththe
on/offsettingintheInsertFXSetuppage.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthesettings
foranindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16userpresets
foreacheffecttype,inadditionto15rewritablefactory
presets.
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program,
Combination,andSequencer).
Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
storedwiththeProgramyoudontneedtostorethemasan
EffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuseyour
favoritesettings.
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhileworkingon
aparticularProgram,andthenlaterusethesameEffect
PresetinadifferentProgram,Combination,orSong.
P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheInsertFXSetup
page.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
P01P15:Presetdataissavedinthisarea.Werecommend
thatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15.
U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyourown
settings.
:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffect,
writtenaProgram,orselectedanewProgram.Selectingthis
settingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Programssavetheeffectsparametersettings,butthey
dontsavethenumberoftheselectedEffectPreset.Ifyou
60
0turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1127restorethe
originalsetting.TheglobalMIDIchannelspecifiedby
MIDIChannel(Global11a)isusedforthismessage.
Routeasoundtoanmastereffectsandtotaleffect
MakecommonLFOsettingsforeffects
Return 1
Makedetailedsettingsformastereffectsandtotaleffect
ThisspecifiesthereturnlevelfromthemastereffecttotheL/
Rbus.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
page 235.
[000...127]
Note:TheL/RbusissenttoTFX,andthenoutputtothe
mainL/MONOandRoutputjacks.
MFX2:
91: Routing
MFX2
91
Menu
[000...171]
MFX2 On/Off
[Off, On]
Return 2
91a
[000...127]
Theseparametersspecifytheeffecttypeformastereffect2,
itson/offstatus,andthereturnlevelfrommastereffect2to
theL/Rbus.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMFX1:
above.
MFX2cannotusedoublesizeeffects(172193).
Additionally,ifyouselectadoublesizeeffectforMFX1,you
wontbeabletouseMFX2.
91b
Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofmastereffectsandtotal
effect,andturnthemon/off.
Chain:
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotaleffectis
insertedintotheL/Rbus.
Chain On/Off
91a: MFX1, 2
[Off, On]
On(checked):Chain(seriesconnection)willbeturnedon
forMFX1andMFX2.
Chain Direction
[MFX1...MFX2, MFX2...MFX1]
Themastereffectdoesnotoutputthedirectsound(Dry).
AdjusttheReturn1andReturn2returnlevelstoreturnthe
signaltotheL/RbusandmixitwiththeL/Rbussignal.
SpecifiesthedirectionoftheconnectionwhenMFX1and
MFX2arechained.
Themastereffectsarestereoin/out,butdependingonthe
selectedeffecttype,theoutputmaybemonaural.Formore
information,pleaseseeIn/Outonpage 240.
MFX2MFX1:ConnectfromMFX2toMFX1.
[000...127]
Ifyouselectadoublesizeeffect,theChainsettingswill
beignored.
[000...193]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeformastereffect1.Youcanuse
anyoftheavailableeffects,withoutlimitation.Ifyouchoose
000:NoEffect,theoutputfromthemastereffectismuted.
MFX1 On/Off
Chain Level
WhenchainisOn,thissetsthelevelatwhichthesoundis
sentfromthefirstmastereffecttothenextmastereffect.
MFX1:
MFX1
MFX1MFX2:ConnectfromMFX1toMFX2.
[Off, On]
Switchesthemastereffect1on/off.Whenoff,theoutputwill
bemuted.Thiswillalternatebetweenonandoffeachtimeit
ispressed.
Tip:Aneasywaytodisablethemastereffectsistoturnoff
thefrontpanelMASTERFXbutton.MFX1/2willbe
temporarilydisabled,andwillstayoffevenifyouswitch
programsormodes.Whenyouturntheswitchon,the
mastereffectswillbeenabled,andyouwillobtainthe
effectsspecifiedbytheprogramorcombination.
Note:TheMASTERFXbuttonislinkedwithGlobalP01
EffectGlobalSWEnableMFX1&2(seep.5).
Separatelyfromthesettingshere,youcanusecontrol
change#94toturnmastereffects1and2off.Avalueof
91b: TFX
Thesearetheparametersforthetotaleffect,whichisplaced
atthefinalstageoftheL/Rbus.Afterpassingthroughthe
totaleffect,thesoundisoutputtoAUDIOOUTPUTL/
MONOandR.
Forthetotaleffect,thedirectsound(Dry)isalwaysstereo
in/out.Theinput/outputconfigurationoftheeffectsound
(Wet)willdependontheselectedeffecttype.
Thetotaleffectisstereoinandstereoout,buttheoutput
maybemonauraldependingonthetypeofeffectyouselect.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIn/Outonpage 240.
TFX:
TFX
[000...171]
Thisselectstheeffecttypefortotaleffect.]
TFXcannotusedoublesizeeffects(172193).
61
Program mode
menu,andthenchooseaneffectwithinthatcategory.Press
theOKbuttontoexecuteyourchoice,orpresstheCancel
buttontocancel.
TFX On/Off
92: MFX1
92
Menu
[Off, On]
Thisturnstotaleffecton/off.Ifthisisoff,theinputwillbe
passeddirectlythrough.Thesettingwillalternatebetween
on/offeachtimeyoupressthis.
92a
Tip:Aneasywaytodisablethetotaleffectistoturnoffthe
frontpanelTOTALFXbutton.TFXwillbetemporarily
disabled,andwillstayoffevenifyouswitchprogramsor
modes.Whenyouturntheswitchon,thetotaleffectwillbe
enabled,andyouwillobtaintheeffectspecifiedbythe
programorcombination.
Note:TheTOTALFXbuttonislinkedwithGlobalP01
EffectGlobalSWEnableTFX(seep.5).
Alternatively,youcansendcontrolchange#95toturn
thetotaleffectoff.Avalueof0turnsthetotaleffectoff,
andvaluesof1127restoretheoriginalsetting.The
globalMIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel
(Global11a)isusedforthismessage.
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheeffectyouchoosefor
MFX1intheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledonthe
globalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Formore
information,pleaseseeDynamicModulationSource
Listonpage 346.
MFX1 On/Off
[000...127]
Thisspecifiesthefinalleveloftheaudiooutputthathas
passedthroughtotaleffect,andoutputfromAUDIO
OUTPUTL/MONOandR.
92a: MFX1
ThesettingwillalternatebetweenOnandOffeachtimeyou
pressthis.
Alternatively,youcanuseCC#94toturnMastereffects
1/2off.CC#95willturntheTotaleffectoff.Avalueof0
isOff,andavalueof1127selectstheoriginalsetting.
ThisiscontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannelspecified
byMIDIChannel(Global11a).
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyMFX/TFXseep.67
4:SwapMFX/TFXseep.67
5:WriteFXPresetseep.67
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
[Off, On]
Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Itislinkedwiththeon/off
settingintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
Thisselectstheeffectpreset.Formoreinformation,please
seeP(EffectPreset)onpage 60.
MFX1 Parameters
Here,youcanedittheparametersofthemastereffect
selectedintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Fordetailsonthemastereffects,pleaseseeMasterEffects
(MFX1,2)onpage 245.
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyMFX/TFXseep.67
4:SwapMFX/TFXseep.67
5:WriteFXPresetseep.67
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
62
BPM
Base Note
95
Menu
95a
95b
[MIDI, 40.00...300.00]
[ , 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , ]
Times
[01...32]
ThefrequencyoftheCommonFXLFOwillbethelengthof
theBaseNotenotevaluemultipliedbytheTimesvalue,
relativetothetempospecifiedbytheBPMvalue.IfBPMis
settoMIDI,thiswilloperateaccordingtothe (Tempo)
(Prog01a)setting.IfMIDIClock(Global11a)issetto
External,thiswillfollowtheMIDIclockofthemaster
device.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforCommonFXLFO1,
asdescribedunder95a:CommonFXLFO1above.
TheCommonLFOscontrolonlythefrequency,MIDI
synchronization,andresetoptions;eachindividualeffect
stillhasitsownsettingsfortheLFOwaveformandphase.
Withintheindividualeffects,youcanchoosewhethertouse
oneoftheCommonLFOs,ortousetheindividualeffects
frequency,sync,and/orresetsettingsinstead.Thisisdone
viatheeffectsLFOTypeparameter;selectIndividualtouse
theeffectssettings,orCommon1or2tousetheCommon
LFOs.
Common FX LFO
LFO Type = Common1
Common FX LFO1
Frequency[Hz]
Reset
0:WriteProgramseep.64
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyMFX/TFXseep.67
4:SwapMFX/TFXseep.67
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgram:Menu
Commandonpage 64.
Stereo Flanger
Waveforem = Triangle
Stereo Phaser
Waveforem = Sine
Dmod(DynamicModulation)iscontrolledonthe
globalMIDIchannelspecifiedinGlobalmodeP1.
[Off, On]
ThisspecifieswhethertheCommonFXLFOwillbereset.
Ifthisison,operatingtheSource(below)willresetthe
phaseoftheLFO.
IfSync(Reset)ison,thisselectstheDmodsourcethatwill
resettheCommonLFO.ForacompletelistofDmod
sources,pleaseseeDynamicModulationSourceListon
page 346.
Thiswillbeoffwhenthemodulationsourcespecified
bySourcehasavaluebelow64,andonwhenthevalue
isabove64.TheLFOwillberesetwhenthisvaluerises
fromalevelbelow64toalevelhigherthan64.
Frequency
[0.02...20.00 (Hz)]
ThisspecifiesthefrequencyoftheCommonFXLFO.Higher
valuesmaketheLFOfaster.
MIDI/Tempo Sync
[Off, On]
Off(unchecked):ThespeedoftheCommonFXLFOwillbe
determinedbytheFrequencysetting.
On(checked):ThespeedoftheCommonFXLFOwillbe
determinedbytheBPM,BaseNote,andTimessettings(see
below).
63
Program mode
1. TheupperlineofthedialogshowstheBank,number,
andProgramname.
1. HolddowntheENTERbutton.
Ifyouwishtomodifytheprogramname,pressthetextedit
buttontomovetothetexteditdialogbox,andenterthe
desiredprogramname.
2. Pressanumber(09)onthenumerickeypadtoselect
thedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0.
2. InCategoryandSubCategory,specifythecategoryof
theprogramthatyouarewriting.
Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1forthe
second,andsoon.
ThecategorycanbeusedtofindthisProgramwhen
selectingaprograminProgram,Combination,orSequencer
modes.
Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff
(suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthecommand
callsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappearonthedisplay,
andyoucanproceedjustasifyoudselectedthecommand
fromthetouchscreen.
Tip:Whilethiscommandisopen,theENTERbuttonwill
operateastheOKbuttonandtheEXITbuttonwilloperate
astheCancelbutton.
Note:YoucaneditthesecategorynamesintheGlobalP4:
Categorypage.Formoreinformation,pleasesee41:
ProgramMainand42:ProgramSubonpage 204.
3. PressToProgramtospecifythedestinationBankand
number.
YoucanalsousetheBANKAFbuttonstoselectabank.
YoucannotsavetobanksGg(d).Ifyouveeditedaprogram
frombanksGg(d)andwanttosaveit,savetheedited
programtoabankAF.
2. Makesettingsinthedialogbox.
Fordetailsonthecontentofeachdialogbox,refertothe
explanationofeachcommand.
3. Toexecute,presstheOKbutton.Tocancelwithoutexe
cuting,presstheCancelbutton.
Exclusive Solo
ThebehavioroftheSolofunctionwillalternateeachtime
youselectExclusiveSolo.
TheSolofunctioncanoperateinoneofthefollowingtwo
ways.
Write Program
MultipleSolo
ThiscommandwritesaneditedProgramintotheKROME
internalmemory.ItisavailableoneverypageinProgram
mode.
ThespecifiedOSC1,OSC2,ordrumtrackwillbesoloed.The
soloon/offsettingwillalternateeachtimeyoupresstheSolo
button.
WriteProgramletsyou:
ExclusiveSolo
Saveyouredits
OnlyonesourceOSC1,OSC2,orthedrumtrackwillbe
soloed.
RenametheProgram
AssigntheProgramtoaCategory
CopytheProgramtoadifferentBankandnumber
BesuretoWriteanyProgramthatyouwishtokeep.An
editedProgramcannotberecoveredifyoudonotwrite
itbeforeturningoffthepowerorselectinganother
Program.
Note:Youcanalsoaccessandexecutethiscommandby
pressingtheWRITEbutton.
Note:SolooperationscanbeperformedintheP03:Mixer&
DrumTrackpageofeachmode.
Note:TheSolofunctionappliestoeachmode.Allsources
arehandledasasinglegroup.InthecaseofExclusiveSolo,
allothersourceswillbeoffifevenonesourceisbeing
soloed.
1. UsethemenutoselectExclusiveSolo.
Whenyouselectthisitem,acheckmarkwillbeaddedatthe
leftofExclusiveSolointhemenu.Thecheckmarkwill
appearordisappeareachtimeyouselectthisitem.
Nocheckmark:MultipleSolo
Checkmark:ExclusiveSolo
Alternatively,youcanturnthissettingon/offbyholding
downtheENTERbuttonandpressingnumerickey1.
64
Copy Oscillator
Thiscommandautomaticallycopiesthesettingsofthe
programorcombinationtoasong,andenablestherecord
standbycondition(SeeTip:AutoSongSetuponpage 2.).
CopyOscillatorisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
OSC/Pitch,Filter,Amp/EQ,AMS/CommonKeyTrackpages.
Note:Youcanalsoaccessandexecutethiscommandby
pressingtheREC()button.
Thiscommandisusedtocopythesettingsfromone
oscillatortoanother.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselecttheoscillatorthatyouwant
tocopy.
2. UseProgramtoselectthebankandnumberofthe
copysourceprogram.
YoucanpressaBANKSELECTbuttontoselectthedesired
bank.
3. InTo,specifythecopydestinationoscillator.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcemode,
bank,andnumber.
YoucanusethefrontpanelBANKbuttonstoselectthe
desiredbank.
Swap Oscillator
SwapOscillatorisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
OSC/Pitch,Filter,Amp/EQ,AMS/CommonKeyTrackpages.
Thiscommandexchangesthesettingsofoscillators1and2.
2. IntheTimbrefield(ifyouveselectedaCombination)
orTrackfield(ifyouveselectedaSong),selectthe
TimbreorTracktocopyfrom.
Note:ThiscanbeselectedonlyifOscillatorMode(Prog1
1a)isDoubleorDoubleDrums.
3. SelecteitherAllorAssignmentsOnlytospecifythe
ToneAdjustparametersyouwanttocopy.
All:ThiscopiesboththeToneAdjustparameter
assignmentsandvalues.
CopyDrumTrackisavailableontheDrumTrkPatterntab
orDrumTrkProgramtaboftheARP/DTpage.
AssignmentsOnly:ThiscopiesonlytheToneAdjust
parameterassignments,withoutthevalues.
Thiscommandcopiessettingsfromthespecifiedprogram,
combination/timbre,orsong.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthemode,bank,andnum
berofthedesiredcopysource.YoucanpressaBANK
buttontoselectthedesiredbank.
1. UsetheTofieldtospecifyhowtheSwitches18and
Sliders18parameterswillbereset.
AllOff:AllwillberesettoOff.
DefaultSetting:Theparameterswillberesettothedefault
values.
2. IfyouexecutethiscommandinProgrammode,and
selectPrograminFrom,theadditionalfieldProgram
Settingstoowillappear.
On(checked):TheparametersettingsoftheDrumTrack
PatternpageandDrumTrackProgrampagewillbecopied.
Off(unchecked):TheparametersettingsoftheDrumTrack
Patternpagewillbecopied.
IfyouexecutethiscommandinCombinationorSequencer
mode,theparametersettingsoftheDrumTrackProgram
pagewillbecopied.However,theMIDIChannelsetting
willnotbecopied.
65
Program mode
1. UsetheFromfieldspecifythesourceofthearpeggio
settings(mode,bank,number)thatyouwishtocopy.
2. IfyouarecopyingfromCombination,orSong,specify
whetheryouwishtocopyfromAorB.
1. Selecttheuserdrumtrackpatternyouwanttoerase.
2. IfyoucheckAllDrumTrackPatterns,alluserdrum
trackpatternswillbeerased.
ThisoptionisavailablewhentheOscillatorModeissetto
DoubleorDoubleDrums.
1. SelectSyncBothEGs.
ThedisplaywillindicateSYNCBOTHEGsandthetwo
EGswillbesynchronized.
2. IfyounolongerwanttheEGstobesynchronized,
selectSyncBothEGsonceagain.
From (Mode)
Theindicationwilldisappearfromthedisplay.
ThisselectswhetheryoullcopyfromaProgram,a
Combination,oraSong.
SwapLFO1&2isavailableonalloftheLFOpages,except
fortheCommonLFOtab.
ForProgramsandCombinations,thisselectstheBankand
Numberfromwhichtocopy.Whenthisparameteris
selected,youcanalsousethefrontpanelBANKbuttonsto
selectBanks.
ThiscommandcopiesthesettingsofLFO1toLFO2,and
viceversa.
Note:IfLFO2isbeingusedtomodulateLFO1,this
commandwillerasethatmodulationrouting.
Selectwhichoftheeffectsyouwishtocopy.
Youcanalsocopyfromamastereffectandtotaleffect.
Copy Arpeggiator
All
CopyArpeggiatorisavailableontheArpAtabandArpB
tabofPlay/RECControlpageorSetuptab,ArpAtab,ArpB
tab,ScanZonetaboftheARP/DTpage.
Whenthisisenabled,thesettingsofallinserteffects(the
contentsoftheInsertFXpageandtheeffectparametersof
IFX15,butnotCtrlCh)willbecopied.
Thiscommandcanbeusedtocopyarpeggiosettingsfrom
anotherlocationtothecurrentprogram.
To
[check-box]
[IFX 15]
Thisselectstheinserteffectcopydestination.
[check-box]
Whenthisischecked,thePan,Bus(BusSelect),Ctrl(FX
ControlBus),andSends1and2settingsthatfollowthe
copysourceinserteffectwillalsobecopied.
Whenthisisnotchecked,onlytheeffecttypeandits
parameterswillbecopied.
66
Swap MFX/TFX
SwapMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX/LFO
pages.
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)settingsbetweenMFX1,
MFX2,TFX.
1. UseSource1andSource2toselectthemastereffect(s)
ortotaleffect(s)thatyouwanttoswap.
Write FX Preset
WriteFXPresetisavailableonalloftheeffectsparameter
editingpages,includingIFX15,MFX1and2,andTFX.
ThiscommandsavestheeditedeffectintotheKROMEs
internalmemory.
1. InSource1andSource2,selecteachoftheinsert
effectsthatyouwishtoswap.
Copy MFX/TFX
CopyMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX/LFO
pages.
Thiscommandletsyoucopyanydesiredeffectsettingsfrom
Program,Combination,orSong.
1. Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetexteditdialog
box,andinputanamefortheeffectpreset.
2. UsetheTofieldtoselectthewritingdestination.We
recommendthatyouuseU00U15.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcemode,
bank,andnumber.
YoucanalsousetheBANKbuttonstoselectthedesired
bank.
2. Selecttheeffectthatyouwanttocopy.
YoucancopyfromaninserteffectbyselectingIFX15.
Ifyoucopyfromaninserteffect,theresultmaynotbe
exactlythesame,duetodifferencesinroutingandlevel
settings.
IfyouselectMFX1orMFX2,theReturnlevelwillbecopied
atthesametime.
YoucancopysettingsfromatotaleffectbyselectingTFX.
IfyoucheckAllMFXs,allmastereffectsettingswillbe
copied.
IfyoucheckTFX,alltotaleffectsettingswillbecopied.
MasterVolumesettingswillnotbecopied.
3. InTo,specifythecopydestinationmastereffectsor
totaleffect.
67
Program mode
68
Combination mode
COMBI Page Select
Youcanusethefollowingwaystoselectthepagesin
Combinationmode.
Page
P0:Play
P1:Controllers
SW1,2,andknobfunctionsettings.(see
p.78)
P2:EQ
EQsettingsforeachtimbre.(seep.79)
P3:TimbreParam
Variousparametersettingsforeach
timbre(MIDIchannel,OSCselection,
Pitchsetting,etc.)(seep.81)
P4:Zone/Delay
Keysplitandlayersettings.
(Keyzoneandvelocityzone)(seep.84)
Timedelayfromnoteontobeginningof
sound.(seep.86)
P5:MIDIFilter
MIDItransmit/receivefiltersettings.(see
p.87)
P7:Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack
Arpeggiatorsettings.(seep.92)
Drumtracksettings.(seep.93)
P8:Routing/IFX
Oscillatoroutputbusandmastereffect
sendlevelsettings.(seep.95)
Inserteffectrouting,selection,and
settings.(seep.97)
P9:MFX/TFX/
LFO
Mastereffectrouting,selection,and
settings.(seep.99)
Totaleffectselectionandsettings.(see
p.100)
CommonFXLFOsettings(seep.100)
PLAY
1. PressthePAGEbuttontoaccessPageSelect.
Alternatively,pressthemodebuttonontheupperleftside
ofthedisplay,andthenpresstherightsideofthemenu.
PageSelectshowsanabbreviatednameforeachpage.
EFFECT
2. Selectthedesiredpageinthedisplay.
ARP&DRUMTRACK
EDIT
ThepageinwhichyouwerepriortopressingthePAGE
buttonisshowninlightblue.
Main content
Selectandplaycombinations.(seep.70)
Programselectionforeachtimbre.(see
p.71)
Panandvolumesettingsetc.foreach
timbre.(seep.73)
Simplearpeggiatorediting.(seep.74)
EditingfromtheToneAdjust(seep.75)
69
Combination mode
Mode
Category Popup
Bank
Selectaprogramforeachtimbre,andspecifyitsPlay/
MuteandSoloOn/Offstatus.
Combination Select Popup
EdittheArpeggiatorinsimpleways
UsetheToneAdjustfunctiontomakesimpleeditsfor
programparameters
Combination Select
Combination Select
[000...127]
HereyoucanselectthedesiredCombination.
To switch combinations
ChooseCombinationSelect,usenumerickeys09to
inputthedesiredcombinationnumber,andpressthe
ENTERbutton.
ChooseCombinationSelectandturntheVALUEdialor
usetheINC/DECbuttons.
Ifthe01a:CombinationSelectparameterisselected,
theBANKADbuttonswillswitchcombinationbanks.
PresstheCombinationSelectPopuptoviewandselect
fromtheBank/CombinationSelectmenuorganizedby
bank.
PresstheCategoryPopuptoviewandselectfromthe
Category/CombinationSelectmenuorganizedby
category.
01
Menu
01a
01b
Youcanuseafootswitchtoselectcombinations.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseetheGlobalparameter
FootSwitchAssignonpage 202.Foralistofthe
functionsthatcanbeassignedtothefootswitch,please
seeFootSwitchAssignmentsonpage 349.
YoucantransmitMIDIprogramchangesfroma
connectedexternalMIDIdevice.
2. Pressoneofthetabsatleftorrighttoselectabank.
3. Selectacombinationfromthelist.Youcandirectly
pressyourchoicewithinthelist,orusetheINC/DEC
buttons.
01(2)a:Combination Select
Bank
1. PressthepopupbuttonlocatedattheleftofCombina
tionSelecttoaccesstheBank/CombinationSelect
menu.
[A...D]
Thisindicatesthecurrentlyselectedcombinationbank.
Ifthescreencannotdisplayalloftheavailableitems,usethe
scrollbar.
PressoneoftheBANKADbuttonstoselectthedesired
bank.
Note:Ifyouwanttosearchforasoundbyitscombination
name,usetheFindfunction(seep.2).
Eachbankcontainsrewritablecombinationprogramareas
for128combinations(atotalof512).
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute,orpresstheCancelbut
tontocancelyourselection.
Bank
No.
Description
A,B,C
000127
Preloadedcombinations
000127
Usercombinations
Note:PressingoneoftheBANKAFbuttonswhilethe
ProgramSelectparameterisselectedwillchangethetimbre
programbank(ratherthanthecombinationbank).
Scroll bar
70
Category
[00...17/00...07]
Here,youcanselectthecombinationcategory.
Allprogramsareclassifiedusingeighteenmaincategories
andeightsubcategories.Youcanselectacategory,andthen
selectacombinationwithinthatcategory.Whenyoupress
thepopupbutton,theCategory/CombinationSelectmenu
willappear.
(Tempo)
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentCombination,which
appliestotemposyncedLFOsandeffects,arpeggiator,and
temposyncedeffects.
040.00300.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoinBPM,
with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousingthestandard
dataentrycontrols,youcanusetheTEMPOknobtoadjust
thebpm,orjustplayafewquarternotesontheTAPbutton.
IfMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoExternalMIDIor
ExternalUSB,EXTisshown.ThisisalsoshownifMIDI
ClockisAutoandMIDIclockdataisbeingreceivedfroman
externaldevice.IftempoisEXT,arpeggiatoretc.will
synchronizetoMIDIclockdatafromanexternalMIDI
device.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIClock(MIDI
ClockSource)onpage 199.
Timbre Number
Scroll bar
4. Toselectfromasubcategory,presstheJumptoSub
buttontoaccessSubCategory/ProgramSelect.
Thisindicatesthetimbrenumber.Beloweachtimbre
numberareshownvariousparameterswhichyoucanedit
forthattimbre.
Pressoneofthelefttabstoselectasubcategory.
Note:Subcategoriesnotassignedtoanyprogramscannot
beselectedfromthetabs.
PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection,orpressthe
Cancelbuttontocancelit.Youwillreturntothemain
categories.
Here,youcanselecttheprogramusedbyeachtimbreby
programcategoryandsubcategory.Allprogramsare
organizedintouptoeighteencategoriesandeightsub
categories.
[00...17/00...07]
PressthispopupbuttontogettheCategory/Timbere
ProgramSelectmenu,thenselectthedesiredcategoryand
subcategory,andfinallyselectthedesiredprogram.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute,orpresstheCancelbut
tontocancelyourselection.
Note:Thecategoryofeachcombinationcanbespecifiedin
theWriteCombinationdialogbox.
PressCategoryandusetheCategory/TimbreProgram
Selectmenutoselectaprogram.
Fortheprocedure,pleaseseeCategory/CombinationSelect
menu:above.
71
Combination mode
Program Select
[A...F: 000...127, GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d): 001...128]
Here,youcanselecttheprogramusedbyeachtimbre.The
lowerlinedisplayspartoftheprogramname.
Play/Mute
[Play, Mute]
Thissettingmutesatimbre.
Play:Thetimbrewillproducesound.
Mute:Thetimbrewillbemuted(silent).
Solo On/Off
[On, Off]
TurnstheSolofunctionon/offforeachtimbre.
TheSolofunctionoperatesdifferentlydependingonthe
settingoftheExclusiveSolomenucommand.
72
IfExclusiveSoloisoff,youcanturnSoloonformorethan
onetimbre.Thesettingwillalternateeachtimeyoupress
theSoloOn/Offbutton.
IfExclusiveSoloison,pressingaSolobuttonwillturnSolo
onforonlythattimbre.
Note:TheSoloOn/Offstatusisnotpreservedwhenyou
writethecombination.
Exclusive Solo
ThemenusExclusiveSoloparameteralsoaffectstheway
thatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff(unchecked),
youcansolomultipleTimbresatonce.
WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyoneTimbrecan
besoloedatatime.Inthismode,pressingaSolobutton
automaticallydisablesanyprevioussolos.
Tip:YoucanalsotoggleExclusiveSolobyholdingENTER
andpressing1onthenumerickeypad.
Velocity Meter
Thismetershowsthenoteonvelocityvalue.
ThisindicatesthenoteonvelocityvaluesontheMIDI
channelofeachtimbre,producedbythekeyboard,MIDI
IN,arpeggiator,ordrumtrack.(Ifmultiplenoteon
messagesarereceivedsimultaneously,thehighest
velocitywillbedisplayed.)
ThemeterwillrespondevenifKeyZoneorVelZone
settingsaresetsothatthenotedoesnotactuallysound.
Thismeterindicatesthenoteonvelocityvalue;itdoesnot
respondtochangesintheVolumeknobsetting,norto
changesintheleveloftheaudiosignalproducedbythe
Filter,Amp,EG,LFO,EQ,oreffects.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppagewilladjustthepanningof
thesoundaftertheinserteffect(Mixeronpage 243).
RND:Theoscillatorpanwillchangerandomlyateachnote
on.
IfStatus(Combi31(2)c)issettoINT,CC#10(pan)
messagescanbereceivedtocontrolthesetting.CC#10
valuesof0or1willplacethesoundatfarleft,64at
center,and127atfarright.(excludeRND)Pancanbe
controlledbymessagesreceivedontheMIDIChannel
(Combi31(2)c).
03
Menu
03a
03b
Volume
[000...127]
Adjuststhevolumeofeachtimbre18.
Thevolumeofeachtimbreisdeterminedby
multiplyingthisvolumevaluewiththeMIDIvolume
(CC#7)andexpression(CC#11).
Thisisthemainpageforselectingandplaying
Combinations.
IfStatus(Combi31(2)c)hasbeensettoINT,incoming
MIDICC#7orCC#11messageswillcontrolthevolume
ofatimbre.(Howeverthesemessageswillnotaffectthe
settingofthisparameter.)
Youcanalsosetthepan,andvolumeforeachoftheTimbres
18and916.Formoreinformation,pleasesee01:
ProgramT0108,02:ProgramT0916onpage 70.
IfStatusisEXTorEX2,thevalueofthisparameterwill
betransmittedasMIDICC#7whenthecombinationis
changed.Howeverthiswillnotbetransmittedbya
timbrethatissettothesameMIDIchannelastheglobal
MIDIchannel.ThismessageistransmittedontheMIDI
Channel(Combi31(2)c)specifiedforeachtimbre.
Hold Balance
[Off, On]
On(checked):Whenanyoneofthevolumeslidersis
moved,thevolumeoftheothertimbreswillchangeaswell.
Thevolumebalanceoftimbres116willbemaintained.This
isusefulwhenyouwishtoadjusttheoverallvolume.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)b:TimbreProgram
Selectonpage 71.
Hereyoucanspecifytheprogrametc.foreachTimbre2
through8.Thesearethesameasfortimbre01.Formore
information,pleaseseeTimbre01(TimbreNumber):
above.
Category
[Category Name]
Thisindicatesthecategory.
Pan
[RND, L001...C064...R127]
Thisspecifiesthepanofeachtimbre.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
L001C064R127:AsettingofL001isfarleftandR127is
farright.AsettingofC064willreproducethepansettingof
theProgrammode.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
OSC1
Left
OSC2
Center
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L001
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R127
Right
OSC1
Left
OSC2
Center
Right
Pan (CC#10)
Pan (CC#10)
C064
C064
L032
L032
L001
L001
R096
R096
Center
Right
Center
Right
OSC1
Left
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
R127
R127
Left
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L032
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R096
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
Left
Center
Right
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=C064
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=C064
OSC2
Pan (CC#10)
C064
L032
L001
R096
R127
Left
Center
Right
Ifamonoinserteffectisinuse,thesettingsyoumakehere
willbeignored.Inthiscase,thePan:#8parameterinP8:
73
Combination mode
05: ARPEGGIATOR A,
06: ARPEGGIATOR B
Arpeggiator Run A, B
05
Menu
05a
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiator(s)youchecked
herewillruniftheyareassignedtoatimbrebyArpeggiator
Assign(71(2)c).
05b
Whenthearpeggiatorison,thesecheckboxesletyouturnA
andBon/off.
05c
ThisparametercanalsobesetfromP7:Arpeggiator/Drum
TrackpageArpeggiatorRunA,B.
Timbre assign
Here,youcanmakearpeggiatorsettingsforthe
combination.Acombinationcanruntwoarpeggiators
simultaneously.
ArpeggiatorparameterscanbeeditedinP7:ARP/DT,but
certainmajorparameterscanbeeditedinthesepagesas
well.Youcanedittheseparametersinrealtime,forexample,
bychangingthearpeggiopatternwhileplayinginCombi
P0:Play.
YoucanalsousetheTEMPOknobandthearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)GATEknob,VELOCITYknob,SWINGknob,and
STEPknobtocontrolthearpeggiatorinrealtime.
ThisindicatesthearpeggiatorAandBassignmentstatusfor
eachtimbre18.ThesesettingsaremadeinArpeggiator
Assign(71(2)c).
[P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Octave
Resolution
[1, 2, 3, 4]
[ , , , , , , , ]
Sort
[Off, On]
Latch
[Off, On]
Key Sync.
[Off, On]
Keyboard
[Off, On]
Tosavetheeditsyoumake,useWriteCombination.
Thesearethebank,number,andnameofthecurrent
Combination.Here,youcanalsoselectacombination.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Combination
Selectonpage 70.
(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Setthevariousparametersofthecombinationarpeggiator.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCOMBIP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack)onpage 91.
Theseparameterscanalsobesetfrom73(4):Arpeggiator
A(B)Setup.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee(Tempo)onpage 71.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
ThisshowsthevalueofeachparameterfortheARP
assignmentsoftheREALTIMECONTROLSknobs.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
[GATE]
[64...+00...+63]
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
[VEL. (Velocity)]
[64...+00...+63]
[SWING]
[64...+00...+63]
seep.6,p.54
[STEP]
seep.6
74
[64...+00...+63]
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
4:CopyArpeggiatorseep.103
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
thedifferenttimbresasmuchasyoulike,withoutlosing
youredits.
07a
07b
07c
[Off, On]
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTimbre,thisparameter
determineswhetherornottheProgramsToneAdjust
settingswillbeloadedaswell.
Theparametersettingsassignedtotheslidersandswitches
inthedisplayandtheon/offsettingsassignedtothe
Absoluteparameterswillbeloaded.
OncetheProgramhasbeenloaded,youcanchangeanyor
alloftheToneAdjustsettingsasdesired,includingboth
assignmentsandvalues.Allsucheditsarestoredinthe
Combination,withoutaffectingtheoriginalProgram.
ToneAdjustprovidestwoimportantfeatures
simultaneously:
IfAutoLoadPRGisOn,ToneAdjustsettingswillbe
automaticallyloadedalongwiththeProgram.
YoucanusetheToneAdjustparameterstoeditthemost
importantprogramparameters.
ItletsyoumodifyProgramsforusewithinaspecific
Combinationincludingeverythingfromsubtletweaks
(likechangingLFOspeeds)todramaticchanges(suchas
selectingadifferentMultisample).Anychangesthatyou
makearestoredwiththeCombination,anddonotalter
theoriginalProgram.
EachofthesixteenTimbreshasitsownsetoftoneadjust
parameters.
IfAutoLoadPRGisOff,theToneAdjustsettingsofthe
replacementprogramwillnotbeloaded;theprogram
settingspriortoreplacementwillremain.
Assignment
Value
Formoreinformation,see:
Absolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameteron
page 7
Control
[SW18, SL18]
ToneAdjustandMIDISysExonpage 7
Thisistheswitchorsliderinthedisplaythatisassignedto
ToneAdjustparameters.
InteractionbetweenToneAdjustandMIDICCson
page 8
Assignment
Thisisthefullnameoftheparameterassignedtotheswitch
orsliderinthedisplay.Youcanchangethisusingthe
Assignparameter,below.
InProgrammode,whenyoumakeeditsviaToneAdjust
andthensavetheresults,theProgramdataischangedjust
asifyoudeditedtheinternalparametersdirectly.Formore
information,pleaseseeSavingToneAdjustEditson
page 7.
InCombinationmode,however,allToneAdjusteditsare
storedwithintheCombination;theProgramitselfisnot
changed.ThisletsyoualterthewaythataProgramsounds
inonespecificCombiwithoutaffectingthewaythatit
soundsinProgrammode,orinanyotherCombinationsor
Songs.
Value
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.Therangeof
valueswillvarydependingontheparameterassignedtothe
switchorslider.
Type
Thisshowsthetypeoftheparameter,whichrelatestohow
editstotheparameteraresaved.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeAbsolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameter
onpage 7.
Stored Value
Thisshowstheoriginalvalueoftheparameter,beforethe
effectsofToneAdjust.ItappliesonlytoToneAdjust
parameterswhichcontrolasingleProgramparameter.
Thesearethebank,number,andnameofthecurrent
Combination.Hereyoucanalsoselectacombination.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Combination
Selectonpage 70.
(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee(Tempo)onpage 71.
[116]
ThisselectsthetimbrethatwillbecontrolledviatheTone
Adjustparameters.Youcanswitchbackandforthbetween
Ifyouunassignaparameterfromacontrol,itwillrevertto
thisvalue.
Switches 1...8
ToneAdjustswitchesactalittledifferentlythanswitchesin
thedisplay.
WhenaswitchisassignedtoaRelativeparameter,oran
Absoluteparameterwithmorethantwostates:
SwitchOn=OnValue(seebelow)
SwitchOff=theProgramsstoredvalue
75
Combination mode
WhenaswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
parameter,suchasHold,theswitchstatusdirectlyreflects
theparametervalue:
Controls
REALTIMECONTROLSletsyouuseknobs[1][4]to
modifytheparametersofthecombinationortheeffects.You
canalsousetheseknobstocontrolthearpeggiators.When
youuseaknob,thedisplaywillshowthecontrollers
functionandvalue.UsetheSELECTbuttontochangethe
knobfunctions.
SwitchOn=On
SwitchOff=Off
Assign
On/Off
InTONE,thefunctionsassignedtoknobs14arefixed.
Value
InUSER,youcanassignavarietyofmodulationfunctions
toknobs14.Toassignfunctions,usetheP1:Controllers
Setuppage(page 78).
Assign
ThisassignsToneAdjustparameterstotheswitchesinthe
display.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,pleasesee
CommonToneAdjustParametersonpage 9andTone
AdjustParametersonpage 10.
On Value
[Depends on parameter]
TheparameterissettothisvaluewhentheswitchisOn.
Realtime Controls
TheRealtimeControlsTONEknobfunctions(CUTOFFEG
RELEASE)arefixed.Youcanassignavarietyoffunctionsto
RealtimeControlsUSERknobs14(USER[1]USER[4]).
MIDIcontrolchangesareassignedforeachfunction.
WhentheswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
parameter,suchasHold,thiswillalwaysbethesameasthe
SwitchStatus(seebelow).
Whenyoumoveaknob,itsendsoutthecorresponding
MIDICC.
Switch Status
Mostofthesefunctionsadjust(scale)theparametersettings
ofthetimbreprograms.Unlessotherwisenoted,scaling
meansthattheparametersareattheirprogrammedvalues
whenthecontrollerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthe
controllerisat0,andattheirmaximumwhenthecontroller
isat127.Foranotherlookatthis,pleaseseethediagram
below.
[Off, On]
ThissimplyshowswhethertheswitchisOnorOff.
Sliders 18
Assign
ThisassignsToneAdjustparameterstotheslidersinthe
display.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,pleasesee
CommonToneAdjustParametersonpage 9andTone
AdjustParametersonpage 10.
ThiswillcontroltimbresontheglobalMIDIchannel.
CC parameter scaling
99
Parameter
Value
As Programmed
00
0
Value
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.Therangeof
valueswillvarydependingontheparameterassignedtothe
slider.
64
127
CC Value
[000...127]
ThisknobscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAandB,
andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#74.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
ThisknobscalestheresonanceofFiltersAandB,and
transmitsandreceivesMIDICC#71.
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
4:CopyToneAdjustseep.102
[000...127]
5ResetToneAdjustseep.103
ThisknobscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutoff
frequenciesofFiltersAandB.Italsotransmitsandreceives
MIDICC#79.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
USER [1][4]
[000...127]
Thesearethecurrentvaluesandassignedfunctions(MIDI
CC)fortheRealtimeControlsUSERknobs.
76
IntheP1:ControllersControllersSetuppageyoucan
assignavarietyofmodulationfunctionstoRealtime
ControlsUSERknobs14.
ManyofthefunctionsscaleaparticularsetofProgram
parameters.AllofthesettingsalsocorrespondtoMIDI
messagesusuallyCCs.
Arpeggiator
Arpeggiocontrolletsyouusethefourknobstocontrolthe
twoarpeggiatorsinrealtime.
Thefunctionsofknobs14arefixed.Theknobswillcontrol
thedurationofthearpeggiatednotes,theirvelocity,the
pitchrange,andthelengthofthearpeggiopattern.
ARP [GATE]
[64...+00...+64]
Adjuststheduration(gatetime)ofthearpeggiatednotes
(SeeGateonpage 54).
ARP [VELOCITY]
[64...+00...+64]
Adjuststhevelocityofthearpeggiatednotes(SeeVelocity
onpage 54).
ARP [SWINGH]
[64...+00...+64]
Adjuststhedegreeofshuffleforthearpeggiopattern(See
Swingonpage 54).
ARP [STEP]
[64...+00...+64]
Thisaffectsthelengthandresolutionofthearpeggio
pattern.
Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwillshortenthepatterns
length(Length)inunitsofonehalf.Turningtheknob
towardtherightwillshortentheintervalbetween
arpeggiatednotes(Resolution)inunitsofonehalf.When
theknobisinthecenter(12oclock),thenumberofsteps
andthespeedwillbeasspecifiedbytheLengthand
Resolution(SeeResolution*onpage 54).
77
Combination mode
11a
11b
Thefunctionsyouassignhereareactivewhenyouusethe
SELECTbuttontoselectUSER,andoperateknobs14.
USER [1]
USER [2]
USER [3]
USER [4]
11c
Here,youcanassignthefunctionsperformedbySW1and
SW2,andbyknobs14whenRealtimeControlsUSERis
selected.
Note:ThePanelSwitchAssignsettingoftheprogram
assignedtoeachtimbrewillhavenoeffect.
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee(Tempo)onpage 71.
ThisassignsthefunctionofSW1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeListofSW1/2assignmentsonpage 348.
Note:Ifyouchangethefunctionsetting,thestatusisresetto
off.
Note:Iftheon/offstatusofthefrontpanelSW1,SW2
switchesismemorizedwhenyousavethecombination.
[Toggle, Momentary]
Thisspecifiestheon/offoperationwhenyoupresstheSW1
switch.
Toggle:ThestatewillalternatebetweenOnandOffeach
timeyoupresstheSW1switch.
Momentary:ThestatewillremainOnonlywhileyou
continueholdingdowntheSW1switch.
ThisassignsthefunctionofSW2.Thefunctionsthatcanbe
assignedtoSW2arethesameasforSW1,withthe
substitutionofSW2Mod.(CC#81)insteadoftheSW1sSW1
Mod.(CC#80).
78
Hereyoucanselectthefunctions(mainlytypesofcontrol
change)thatareassignedtoknobs14whentheSELECT
buttonhasselectedUSER(SeeRealtimeControlsKnobs1
4Assignmentsonpage 348)
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
COMBI P2: EQ
21(2)c: Trim
21a
21b
[Off, On]
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTimbre,thisparameter
determineswhetherornottheProgramsEQsettingswillbe
loadedaswell.
OncetheProgramhasbeenloaded,youcanchangeanyor
alloftheEQsettingsasdesired.Allsucheditsarestoredin
theCombination,withoutaffectingtheoriginalProgram.
21c
Regardlessofthissetting,subsequenteditstothePrograms
EQinProgrammodewillnotaffecttheCombination.
Here,youcansetthesignallevelthatenterstheEQof
timbres18and916.
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee(Tempo)onpage 71.
On(checked):Whenyouswitchthetimbresprogram,the
currentEQsettingswillbecleared,andthe3bandEQ
valuesspecifiedbytheprogramwillbeloaded
automatically.Normallyyouwillleavethischecked.The
timbresprogramcanbeswitchedbyusingProgramSelect
(Combi01(2)b)orbyreceivingaMIDIprogramchange.
Youarefreetoeditthe3bandEQsettingsthathavebeen
automaticallyloaded.Makeadjustmentsforeachtimbre
relativetothesettingsoftheprogram,andthensavethe
combination.
Off(unchecked):TheProgramsEQsettingswontbe
loaded.UsethisifyouvesetuptheEQinaspecificway,
andthenwantittostayunchangedwhileyoutryout
differentPrograms.
Bypass
[On, Off]
IfthisisOn(checked),alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
includingInputTrim.Bypassisusefulforcomparingthe
resultsoftheEQwiththeoriginalsignal.
Input Trim
[0099]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.Notethat
thisparameterusesalinearscale;50isequivalentto6 dB,
25isthesameas12 dB,andsoon.
Thisareadisplaysinformationaboutthetimbreselectedfor
editingT:timbrenumber/programbank/number/name,
Ch:MIDIchannelnumber.
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrolscan
causesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.Youcan
compensateforthisbyturningdowntheinputtrim.
Timbre Number:
Thisindicatesthetimbrenumber.Thevariousparameters
beloweachtimbrenumbermakesettingsforthe
correspondingtimbre.
Timbre Category:
ThisshowstheabbreviatedcategorynameoftheProgram
assignedtotheTimbre.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
79
Combination mode
23a
23b
23c
TheseparametersadjustthethreebandEQ(withsweepable
midrange)fortimbres18and916.
[18.0+00.0+18.0]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10 kHzHighShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5 dB.
[10010k]
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ.
[18.0+00.0+18.0]
ThiscontrolsthegainoftheMidSweepEQ,inincrementsof
0.5 dB.
[18.0+00.0+18.0]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80 HzLowShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5 dB.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
80
COMBI P3: Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters) 31: MIDI T0108, 32: MIDI T0916
[01...16, Gch]
SetstheMIDItransmit/receivechannelforeachtimbre.
Gch:Thetimbrewillusethechannelthathasbeenselected
astheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a).
31
Menu
31a
31b
31c
WhenStatusisINT,MIDImessageswillbereceivedonthe
channelyouspecifyhere.Ifthissettingisthesameasthe
globalMIDIchannel,theinternaltonegeneratorwillsound
accordingtotheinternalsettings.IfthisissettoEXTorEX2,
playingtheKROMEwilltransmitMIDImessagesonthe
MIDIchannelspecifiedhere.(Messageswillalsobe
transmittedsimultaneouslyontheglobalMIDIchannel.)
31(2)c: MIDI
Specifiesthebanknumberthatwillbetransmittedwhen
StatusissettoEX2.TheupperlineistheMSB,andthe
lowerlineistheLSB.ThissettinghasnoeffectifStatusis
otherthanEX2.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
Status
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
ThissetswhethertheTimbrecontrolstheinternalsounds,or
externalMIDIdevices.
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
WhencontrollingexternalMIDIdevices,youcanchoose
betweenusingtheinternalBankSelectnumbers(assetby
thefrontpanelbuttons),orusingcustomBankSelect
settingstomatchtheexternaldevice.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
Off:UsethistodisabletheTimbre.Withthissetting,the
TimbresProgramwillnotsound,andMIDIdatawillnotbe
transmitted.
INT:Thetimbrewillsound,andwillalsosoundinresponse
toMIDImessagesfromanexternalMIDIdevice.MIDIdata
willnotbetransmitted.
EXT:Thetimbrewillnotsoundevenifitreceivesmessages
fromacontroller,butMIDIdatawillbetransmittedto
externaldevices.
EX2:UsethistoplayanexternalMIDIdevice,withcustom
setBankSelectviatheBankSelect(WhenStatus=EX2)LSB
andMSBparameters,ontheMIDItaboftheTimbre
Parameterspage.Inallotherways,thisisthesameasEXT.
INT
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
33a
33
Menu
33b
33c
MIDI IN/
USB B
Tone
generator
EXT, EX2
MIDI OUT/
USB B
Thesesettingsspecifyhowtimbres18and916willbe
played.
81
Combination mode
33(4)c: OSC
ThisletsyouoverridetheProgramsstoredVoiceAssign
Modesettings,ifdesired.
PRG:TheProgramsstoredProgP1:Basic/Controllers
ProgramBasicVoiceAssignModesettingswillbeused.
35
Menu
35a
35b
35c
Poly:Thetimbrewillplaypolyphonically,regardlessofthe
Programssettings.
MN(Mono):Thetimbrewillplaymonophonically,
regardlessoftheProgramssettings.
LGT(Legato):Thetimbrewillsoundmonophonically,and
willplaylegatoaccordingtotheProgramsModesetting
(Prog11b).
WiththeMNorLGTsettings,theProgramsPrioritysetting
(Prog11b)willdeterminethepriorityofthenotethat
soundswhenyouplaytwoormorenotes.
OSC Select
SpecifieswhetherthetimbresprogramwillplayOSC1,
OSC2,orboth.
ForprogramswhoseOscillatorMode(Prog11a)isDouble
orDoubleDrums,thissettingletsyouspecifythatonly
OSC1orOSC2willsound.
BTH(Both):OSC1and2willsoundasspecifiedbythe
settingsoftheprogram.
OS1:OnlyOSC1willsound.
OS2:OnlyOSC2willsound.Programswillnotsoundif
OscillatorModeissettoSingleorDrums.
Portamento
Makeportamentosettingsforeachtimbre.
PRG:Portamentowillbeappliedasspecifiedbythe
programsettings.
Off:Portamentowillbeoff,eveniftheoriginalprogram
settingsspecifiedPortamentotobeon.
001127:Portamentowillbeappliedwiththeportamento
timeyouspecifyhere,evenifitisturnedoffbytheprogram
settings.
IftheStatus(Combi31(2)c)issettoINT,CC#05
(portamentotime)andCC#65(portamentoswitch)
messageswillbereceivedandwillcontrolandchange
thesesettings.(IfthesettingisPRG,CC#05,portamento
timewillnotbereceived.)Thesemessageswillbe
receivedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbre
byMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c).
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
82
Here,youcanmakepitchrelatedsettingsfortimbres18
and916.
35(6)c: Pitch
Timbre 01 (Timbre Number):
Transpose
[60+00+60]
Adjuststhepitchofeachtimbreinsemitonesteps.
12unitsequaloneoctave.
WhenStatus(Combi31(2)c)isINT,thisparameter
willaffectthepitchessoundedbytheKROME.When
StatusisEXT,thisparameterwillaffectthenote
numbersoftheMIDInotemessagesthatare
transmitted.
Forexampleifyoumakesettingsof+04and+07
respectivelyfortwotimbresthataresettoEXT,playing
theCkeywilltransmitaCnotenumberontheglobal
MIDIchannel,andatthesametimewillalsotransmitE
andGnotenumbersontheMIDIchannelsofthose
timbres.
COMBI P3: Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters) 37: Scale T0108, 38: Scale T0916
Bend Range
[PRG, 24...+00...+24]
Specifiesthemaximumamountofpitchchange(in
semitones)thatwilloccurwhenthepitchbenderis
operated.
PRG:Thepitchrangespecifiedbytheprogramwillbeused.
24+24:Thissettingwillbeusedregardlessofthesetting
intheprogram.
TheMIDIRPNPitchBendChangemessagecanbe
receivedtocontrolthisandchangethesetting.
(Howeveritwillnotbereceivedifthisparameterisset
toPRG.)ThismessageisreceivedontheMIDIchannel
foreachtimbresetbyMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c).
Off(unchecked):ThescalespecifiedbyType(Combis
Scale)(Combi37(8)c)willbeused.
Here,youcanmakesettingsforthescaleofeachtimbre28
and916.Thesettingsarethesameasfortimbre1.Formore
information,pleaseseeTimbre01(TimbreNumber):
above.
Scale:
Thisspecifiesthescalethatthecombinationwilluse.For
moreinformation,pleasesee12d:Scaleonpage 15.
Key
[CB]
Selectsthetonickeyoftheselectedscale.
Random
[07]
Asthisvalueisincreased,anincreasinglyrandomdeviation
willbeaddedtothepitchateachnoteon.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
IfStatus(Combi31(2)c)isINT,thissettingwillaffect
thepitchproducedbytheKROME.IfStatusisEXT,this
settingwillaffectthenotenumberofthenotemessages
transmittedviaMIDI.
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
4:DetuneBPMAdjustseep.103
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
37
Menu
37a
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
37b
37c
Here,youcanmakesettingsforthescaleoftimbres18and
916.
37(8)c: Scale
Timbre 01 (Timbre Number):
Use Programs Scale
[Off, On]
TimbrecanusethescalethatisspecifiedbyScale(Prog1
2b).
On(checked):Thescalespecifiedbytheprogramwillbe
used.
83
Combination mode
41a
41(2)d:Keyboard Zones
Timbre 01 (Timbre Number):
Top Key
[C1...G9]
Specifiesthetopkey(upperlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundeachtimbre.
Top Slope
41b
41c
Specifiestherangeofkeys(12isoneoctave)overwhichthe
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthetopkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthetopkey.
41d
12:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplay
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctave
belowthetopkey.
Thesesettingsspecifythekeyboardrangeinwhichtimbres
18and916willsound.
Thetop/bottomkeyparametersspecifytherangeofnotesin
whichtimbres18and916willsound,andthetop/bottom
slopeparametersspecifytherangeoverwhichtheoriginal
volumewillbereached.
KeySplit:Bysettingtimbresofdifferentsoundstoranges
thatdonotoverlap,youcanplaydifferentsoundsin
differentrangesofthekeyboard.
Layer:Bysettingtherangestooverlap,youcanplaytwoor
moresoundswithasinglenote.
PositionalCrossfade:Ifyousettheslopes(thegrayed
portion)tooverlap,thesoundswilloverlap,andthe
proportionoftheoverlapwillchangeaccordingtothe
keyboardlocation.
72:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplay
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctaves
belowthetopkey.
Bottom Slope
Specifiestherangeofkeys(12isoneoctave)overwhichthe
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthebottomkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthebottom
key.
12:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplayupward,
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctaveabovethe
bottomkey.
72:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplayupward,
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctavesabovethe
bottomkey.
Bottom Key
41(2)a:Zone Map
Thisareaindicatesthenoteandvelocityrangesinwhich
eachtimbrewillsound.
Thedisplayuseslinestoindicatetherangeofnotesand
velocitiesthatwillsound,andshowtheslopeportion.
[C1...G9]
Specifiesthebottomkey(lowerlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundeachtimbre.
How volume will change according to keyboard location
Volume
Bottom Slope
Formoreinformation,pleasesee21:EQTrimT0108,22:
EQTrimT0916onpage 79.
Top Slope
Bottom Key
Top Key
Zone Map
Key zone display
Bottom Slope
Bottom Key
Top Slope
Top Key
Top
Velocity
Top
Slope
Timbre 1
Timbre 16
84
Bottom
Slope
C1
E1
G9
16
Timbre
Bottom
Velocity
COMBI P4: Zone/Delay 43: Vel Zone T0108, 44: Vel Zone T0916 (Velocity Zones T0108, T0916)
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevaluesandvelocityvaluesby
holdingdownaneditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
akey(seeOGp.10).
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomkeyabovethetopkey
ofthesametimbre.Norisitpossibleforthetopand
bottomslopestooverlap.
Thesearethekeyzonesettingsfortimbres28and916.
Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeTimbre01(TimbreNumber):above.
Top Velocity
[001127]
Specifiesthemaximumvelocityvaluethatwillsoundeach
timbre.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
Top Slope
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Specifiesthenumberofvelocitystepsoverwhichthe
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheTop
Velocity.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthetop
velocity.
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
[000120]
120:Thevolumewilldecreaseasthevelocityapproachesthe
topvelocity.
43a
Bottom Slope
[000120]
Specifiesthenumberofvelocitystepsoverwhichthe
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheBottom
Velocity.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthebottom
velocity.
120:Thevolumewilldecreaseasthevelocityapproachesthe
bottomvelocity.
Bottom Velocity
43b
43c
[001127]
Specifiestheminimumvelocityvaluethatwillsoundeach
timbre.
43d
SetstheTop/BottomVelocityparameterstospecifythe
rangeofvelocitiesthatwillsoundforeachtimbre18and9
16,andsettheTop/BottomSlopeparameterstospecifythe
rangeoverwhichthevolumewillchange.
Velocityswitch:Ifyousetdifferentvelocityzonesfor
multipletimbressothattheydonotsoundtogether,youcan
playseparatesoundsbyvaryingplayingdynamics.
Velocity
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
Bottom Velocity
Top Velocity
Layer:Ifyousettwoormoretimbrestovelocityzonesthat
overlap,thesoundswillbeheardtogether.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevaluesandvelocityvaluesby
holdingdownaneditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
akey(seeOGp.10).
VelocityCrossfade:Ifthesloperanges(grayline)overlap,
differentsoundswillbesoundedtogether,andyourplaying
dynamicswilldeterminetheproportionofeachsound.
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomvelocitygreaterthan
thetopvelocityforthesametimbre,norcanthetop
slopeandthebottomslopeoverlap.
Thesearethevelocityzonesettingsfortimbres28and9
16.Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeTimbre01(TimbreNumber):above.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
85
Combination mode
Thesearethedelaytimesettingsfortimbres28and916.
Theyarethesameasfortimbre1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeTimbre01(TimbreNumber):above.
45
Menu
45a
45b
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
45c
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
Thisspecifiesthetime(delay)fromwhenthetimbres18
and916receiveanoteonuntilthesoundbegins.
45(6)c: Delay
Timbre 01 (Timbre Number):
Delay Time [ms]
[00005000ms, KeyOff]
Specifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetimbre
beginstoproducesound,inunitsofms(1/1000thofa
second).ThissettingisavailableifMIDI/TempoSync.isset
toOff.
KeyOff:Thenotewillbeginsoundingatnoteoff.Inthis
case,thesoundwillnotdieawayifthesustainlevelofthe
programsampEGisotherthan0.Thissettingisusedwhen
creatingharpsichordsounds.
Normallyyouwillsetthisto0000.
MIDI/Tempo Sync.
[Off, On]
Thetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetimbre
producessoundwillbespecifiedinnotelengthunits
relativetothe (Tempo).
On(checked):SpecifythedelaytimeintermsofaBase
NoteandTimesrelativetotheTempo.ForexampleifBase
Note=,Times=01,andTempo=60BPM,thedelaytime
willbeequivalentto1000ms.
Off(unchecked):ThedelaytimewillbesetbytheDelay
Timesetting.
Base Note
Times
[ , , , , , , , , , ]
[01...32]
Itspecifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthe
timbrebeginstoproducesound,intermsofanotevalue
relativetothe (Tempo)(Combi01(2)a).
UseBaseNotetospecifythedesirednotevalue,anduse
Timestoextendthatnotevaluebythespecifiedmultiple.
ForexampleifyousetBaseNotetoaquarternote( )and
Timesto02,thattimbrewillsoundwithadelayofahalf
note( ).Evenifyouchange (Tempo)(Combi01(2)a),the
delaytimewillalwaysbeahalfnote( ).Ifyouusethese
parameterstospecifyadelayofahalfnote( ).Inthiscase,a
Tempoof60.00BPMwillproducea2000msdelay,anda
Tempoof120.00BPMwillproducea1000msdelay.
86
COMBI P5: MIDI Filter 51: <1> T0108, 52: <1> T0916
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#64hold(damperpedal)
messageswillbetransmittedandreceived.
On(checked):Transmissionandreceptionorreception
(AfterTouch)ofMIDIdataisenabled.
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#65portamentoon/off
messageswillbetransmittedandreceived.
IfStatus(Combi31(2)c)isINT,theeffectsofthechecked
itemswillbeappliedtothetimbresprogramwhenthe
controllersoftheKROMEareoperatedorwhenMIDIdata
isreceived.(EffectDynamicModulationisnotaffectedby
thesesettings.)
InthecaseofEXTorEX2,operatingacontrolleronthe
KROMEwilltransmitMIDIdataonthechannelofthat
timbre.MIDItransmission/receptionsettingsfortheentire
KROMEcanbemadeinMIDIFilter(Global12b).
TheMIDIFilter<4>and<5>containMIDIfiltersfor
assignablecontrollers(whosefunctioncanbesetbythe
user),andiftheseareassignedtoMIDIcontrolchanges,the
filtersettingswillaffectthosecontrolchanges.Inthiscase,if
thesamecontrolchangehasbeenassignedinMIDIFilter
pages<1><3>,thesettingsinMIDIFilterpages<1>through
<3>willtakepriority.Also,ifthesamecontrolchangeis
assignedtotwoormorecontrollersintheMIDIFilterpages
<4>and<5>,checkinganyoneofthemwillenablethat
controlchange.
Enable Damper
Enable Portamento SW
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
Off(unchecked):TransmissionandreceptionofMIDIdata
isdisabled.
Note:MIDICC#=MIDIcontrolchangemessagenumbers.
51a
51b
51c
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIprogramchangemessages
willbetransmittedandreceived.
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIaftertouchmessageswillbe
received.
87
Combination mode
53a
53b
55b
53c
55c
55
Menu
55a
Here,youcanspecifywhethertheeffectofknobs14(when
theSELECTbuttonselectionisRealtimeControlsTONE)
willbetransmittedandreceived.TheMIDIcontrol
messagesassignedtoknobs14whenRealtimeControls
TONEisselectedarefixed.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee21:EQTrimT0108,22:
EQTrimT0916onpage 79.
Enable JS X as AMS
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIpitchbendmessages(theX
axisofthejoystick)willbereceivedtocontroltheAMS
effectassignedtoJSX.(ThisisnotafilterforMIDIpitch
bendmessagereception.)Formoreinformation,pleasesee
AlternateModulationSources(AMS)onpage 339.
Enable JS+Y
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDICC#1(the+Yaxisofthejoystick,or
aRealtimeControlsknobassignsetting)willbetransmitted
andreceived.
Enable JSY
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDICC#2(theYaxisofthejoystick,or
aRealtimeControlsknobassignsetting)willbetransmitted
andreceived.
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#16(specifiedasthe
assignmentofaRealtimeControlsknob)willbetransmitted
orreceived.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
[Off, On]
EnablesordisablestransmissionandreceptionofMIDI
CC#74(theKROMEsfiltercutofffrequency).Thisis
assignedtoknob1whenRealtimeControlsTONEis
selected.
[Off, On]
EnablesordisablestransmissionandreceptionofMIDI
CC#72(theKROMEsfilter/ampEGreleasetime).Thisis
assignedtoknob4whenRealtimeControlsTONEis
selected.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
88
COMBI P5: MIDI Filter 57: <4> T0108, 58: <4> T0916
57a
57b
59a
59
Menu
59b
59c
57c
Here,youcanenableordisabletransmissionandreception
forthefunctionsofknobs14whentheSELECTbuttonis
settoRealtimeControlsUSER.UsetheP1:Controllers
ControllersSetuppagetoassignthefunctionsthatknobs1
4willperformwhenRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee21:EQTrimT0108,22:
EQTrimT0916onpage 79.
Enable SW1
Enable SW2
ThesesettingsspecifywhetherSW1Mod(CC#80)andSW2
Mod(CC#81)willbetransmittedandreceivediftheyare
assignedtotheSW1andSW2buttons.
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
Thesesettingsenableordisabletransmissionandreception
oftheMIDImessagesassignedtoknobs14whenRealtime
ControlsUSERisselected.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
Note:IfPortamentoSW(CC#65)isassignedtoSW1orSW2,
theEnablePortamentoSWsettingontheMIDI<1>pagewill
takepriority.
Note:ThefunctionsofSW1andSW2areassignedontheP1:
ControllersSetuppage(seep.78).
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheASSIGNABLE
SWITCHwillbetransmittedandreceived.Thefunctionis
assignedinGlobalP2:ControllersFootControllerspage.
ThisfiltersettingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchangeis
assigned.
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheASSIGNABLE
PEDALwillbetransmittedandreceived.Thefunctionis
assignedinGlobalP2:ControllersFootControllerspage.
ThisfiltersettingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchangeis
assigned.
89
Combination mode
511
Menu
511b
511a
[Off, On]
ThisenablesordisablesreceptionofMIDIsystemexclusive
messagesthatfreelyswitchthemultisampleusedbyan
oscillatorwhiletheprogramissounding.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.101
2:AutoSongSetupseep.65
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
90
COMBI P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/Drum Track) 71: Setup T0108, 72: Setup T0916
Channelparameterofanytimbre116assignedto
arpeggiatorAorB.
IfLocalControl(LocalControlOn,GlobalP1:11a)is
OFF,thekeyboardwillnottriggerthearpeggiator.The
arpeggiatorwillbetriggeredviaMIDIIN.TurnLocal
ControlOFFifyouhaverecordedonlythetriggernotes
onanexternalsequencer,andwishtoplaybackthe
externalsequencertotriggertheKROMEsarpeggiator.
Thisoffersavarietyofpossibilities,suchasapplying
separatearpeggiopatternstotwosoundsthathavebeen
assignedasakeyboardsplit,orusingvelocitytoswitch
betweentwoarpeggiopatterns.
Ifyouwanttorecordthenotedatageneratedbythe
arpeggiatortoanexternalsequencer,turnLocal
ControlON,andturnofftheechobackfunctionon
yourexternalsequencer.
Youcancontrolthearpeggiatorfromanexternal
sequencer,oruseanexternalsequencertorecord
arpeggionotedata.(Seepage 367)
71
Menu
71a
Example1)
71b
SettheMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c)oftimbres1and2
toGch,andsetStatus(Combi31(2)c)toINT.Assign
arpeggiatorAtotimbre1andarpeggiatorBtotimbre2,
andcheckArpeggiatorRunA,B(Combi05(6)a).
71c
WhentheARPbuttonisoff,timbres1and2willsound
simultaneously(layered)whenyouplaythekeyboard.
Arpeggiator
Assign
Trigger
= Gch
Combination Name
Formoreinformation,pleasesee21(2)a:Combination
Name,Tempoonpage 79.
(Tempo)
WhentheARPbuttonisturnedon,timbre1willbe
playedbyarpeggiatorA,andtimbre2willbeplayedby
arpeggiatorB.
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee(Tempo)onpage 71.
[Off, A, B]
AssignsarpeggiatorAorBtoeachtimbre18and916.
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiatorspecifiedfor
eachtimbrewilloperateaccordingtoArpeggiatorRunA,B
andthesesettings.
Off:Thearpeggiatorwillnotoperate.
A:ArpeggiatorAwilloperate.Usethesettingsinthe
ArpeggiatorApagetoselectthearpeggiopatternandtoset
parameters.
B:ArpeggiatorBwilloperate.Usethesettingsinthe
ArpeggiatorBpagetoselectthearpeggiopatternandtoset
parameters.
IftheStatus(Combi31(2)c)ofthetimbreisINT,each
timbre116willbesoundedbythenotedatagenerated
bytheassignedarpeggiator,regardlessoftheMIDI
Channel(Combi31(2)c)settingofthetimbre.Ifa
timbreissettoEXTorEX2,MIDInotedatawillbe
transmittedontheMIDIChannelofthattimbre.
Trigger
= Gch
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
Pattern - A
Timbre 1
Pattern - A
Timbre 2
Pattern - B
Pattern - B
Example2)
TheMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c)oftimbres1,2,3,4,
and5aresetrespectivelytoGch,Gch,02,Gch,and03.
TheirStatus(Combi31(2)c)issetrespectivelytoINT,
Off,INT,Off,andINT.AssignarpeggiatorAtotimbres
2and3,assignarpeggiatorBtotimbres4and5,and
checkArpeggiatorRunA,B(Combi05(6)a).
WhentheARPbuttonisoff,playingthekeyboardwill
soundonlytimbre1.(Timbres2and4arereceivingthe
Gch,buttheywillnotsoundsincetheirStatusisOff.)
WhenyouturnontheARPbutton,arpeggiatorAwill
playtimbres2and3,andarpeggiatorBwill
independentlyplaytimbres4and5.(ArpeggiatorsAand
BaretriggeredbynotedatareceivedfromanyMIDI
channelofanassignedtimbre.However,inthisexample,
theyarebeingtriggeredfromtheGch.)
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,arpeggiatorAwillplay
timbres2and3,butonlytimbre3,whoseStatusisINT
willsoundfromthekeyboard.Similarly,arpeggiatorB
willplaytimbres4and5,butonlytimbre5,whoseSta
tusisINTwillsoundfromthekeyboard.
Inthisway,youcanmakesettingssothatatimbreis
silentwhenthearpeggiatorisoff,andsoundsonlywhen
thearpeggiatorison.
Thistypeofsettingisusedinpreloadedcombinations
whichsoundthedrumsonlywhenthearpeggiatorison.
Arpeggiator
Assign
Trigger
= Gch, Ch2
Trigger
= Gch, Ch3
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Off
Timbre 1
MIDI Ch=Gch
Status=INT
Timbre 2
MIDI Ch=Gch
Status=Off
Timbre 3
MIDI Ch=2ch
Status=INT
Pattern - A
Sounded by normal
keyboard playing
Timbre 4
MIDI Ch=Gch
Status=Off
Timbre 5
MIDI Ch=3ch
Status=INT
Pattern - B
Inthiscase,arpeggiatorA(orB)willbetriggered
(operated)byallMIDIchannelsspecifiedfortheMIDI
91
Combination mode
Arpeggiator Run A, B
[Off, On]
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiator(s)checkedhere
willruniftheyareassignedtoatimbrebyArpeggiator
Assign.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
73: Arpeggiator A,
74: Arpeggiator B
73
Menu
73a
73b
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.101
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
4:CopyArpeggiatorseep.103
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
[P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Octave*
[1, 2, 3, 4]
Resolution*
[ , , , , , , , ]
Gate
Velocity
[000...100%, Step]
[001...127, Key, Step]
Swing
[100...+100%]
Sort*
[Off, On]
Latch*
[Off, On]
Key Sync.*
[Off, On]
Keyboard*
[Off, On]
Theseparametersarethearpeggiatorsettingsforthe
combination.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack)onpage 53.
*
Theseparameterscanalsobesetfrom05(6)d:
ArpeggiatorA(B).
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.101
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
4:CopyArpeggiatorseep.103
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
92
Thesesettingsspecifythenoteandvelocityrangesthatwill
triggerarpeggiatorsAandB.
75
Menu
75a
77
Menu
77a
75b
77b
75c
Here,youcanselectadrumtrackpatternandspecifyhowit
willsound.
Note:InCombinationmode(unlikeProgrammode)thereis
nodedicatedtimbreforthedrumtrack.Youcanassignthe
drumtrackprogramtobeanytimbre116.Thedrumtrack
programwillbeplayedwhenthedrumtracksMIDI
channelOutputmatchesthetimbresMIDIChannel.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee(Tempo)onpage 71.
InCombinationmode,thedrumtrackpatternsaretriggered
ontheGlobalMIDIchannel.
ThisshowstheScanZoneforeacharpeggiator,AandB.
Velocity zone of
arpeggiator A
C1
Velocity zone of
arpeggiator B
G9
InCombinationmode,theDrumTrackfunctiontransmits
andreceivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels.
Receive:Ifyourecontrollingthetriggeringbyplayingthe
keyboard,thedrumtrackwillreceiveontheglobalMIDI
channel.
Transmit:ThedrumtrackwilltransmitontheMIDIchannel
specifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsettingofeach
combination.
SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofthetimbreyouve
specifiedforthedrumprogram.
A: , B:
Top Key
[C1...G9]
Bottom Key
[C1...G9]
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)thatwilltrigger
arpeggiatorA/B.TopKeyspecifiestheupperlimit,and
BottomKeyspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Top Velocity
[001...127]
Bottom Velocity
[001...127]
Specifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwilltriggerarpeggiator
A/B.TopVelocityspecifiestheupperlimit,andBottom
Velocityspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)andvelocitiesthatwill
triggerarpeggiatorA/B.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevaluesandvelocityvaluesby
holdingdownaneditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
akey(seeOGp.10).
IfthetimbresStatusisEXTorEX2,thenotedataetc.ofthe
DrumTrackpatternwillbetransmitted.
Iflocalcontrol(LocalControlOnGlobalP1:11a)ison,
playingtheKROMEskeyboardwillnotmaketheinternal
soundgeneratorproducesound,norcanthekeyboard
triggerthearpeggiatorordrumtrack.However,theycanbe
triggeredbynoteonmessagesfromMIDIIN.
Contents
P000
Off
P000...P605
Presetdrumpatterns
U000...U999
Foruser/preloadeddrumpatterns
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
U000U999canbewritten.Patternsyoucreatein
Sequencermodecanbeconvertedintouserdrum
patterns(seepage 188).
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.101
Shift
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
Thistransposesthedrumpatterninsemitonesteps.This
meansthattheinstrumentsofthedrumkitwillchange.
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
[24...+00...+24]
4:CopyArpeggiatorseep.103
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
93
Combination mode
MIDI Channel
Output
[01...16, Gch]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwilltransmittheMIDI
dataofthedrumpattern.Thedrumpatternwilltriggerthe
programofthetimbrethatissettothissameMIDIchannel.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
Gch:Thedatawillbesenttothechannelspecifiedbythe
globalMIDIchannelMIDIChannelsetting(Global11a).
3:CopyfromProgramseep.101
Whetherthepatterndatawillbeoutputtoanexternal
devicewilldependontheStatussettingofthetimbrethat
matchestheOutputMIDIchannel.
5:EraseDrumTrackPatternseep.66
77b: Trigger
Trigger Mode [Start Immediately, Wait KBD Trig]
StartImmediately:WhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACK
buttontoturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillstart
accordingtotheSyncsetting.Whenyouturnitoff(LED
dark),thedrumpatternwillstop.
WaitKBDTrig:WhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACKbutton
toturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillwaittostart.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,orwhenaMIDInoteonis
received,thedrumpatternwillstartaccordingtotheSync
setting.
IfyouveselectedStartImmediately,theDRUM
TRACKbuttonwillalwaysbesavedintheOFFstate.
Sync
[Off, On]
Off:Thedrumpatternwillnotsynchronizetothecurrently
runningarpeggiator,butwillstartimmediately.
On:Thedrumpatternwillsynchronizetothecurrently
runningarpeggiator.
Note:UseP73(4)c:ArpeggiatorA(B)SetupKeySyncto
specifywhetherthearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe
currentlyrunningdrumpattern.
Latch
[Off, On]
Thisspecifieswhetherthedrumtrackwillcontinueplaying
evenafteryoutakeyourhandoffthekeyboard.
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeisWaitKBDTrig.
Off:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(LEDblinking),the
patternwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboard(noteon).The
patternwillstopwhenyoureleasethekeyboard(noteoff).
On:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(LEDblinking),the
patternwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboard(noteon).The
patternwillcontinuewhenyoureleasethekeyboard(note
off).ThepatternwillstopwhenyouturntheDRUM
TRACKbuttonoff(LEDdark).
Zone:
Keyboard
Bottom
Top
[C1...G9]
[C1...G9]
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.
Itspecifiestherangeofkeysthatwillstartthedrumpattern.
Velocity:
Bottom
Top
[001...127]
[001...127]
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.
Itspecifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwillstartthedrum
pattern.
94
4:CopyDrumTrackseep.65
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
COMBI P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) 81: Routing1 T0108, 82: Routing1 T0916
Sendtheoutputofatimbretoaninserteffect
Routeasoundtoaninserteffect
Makedetailedsettingsforinserteffects
MakecommonLFOsettingsforeffects
FormoredetailsontheInsertEffects,pleaseseetheEffect
Guideonpage 235.
Example: Inserting a separate IFX into each timbre, and then inserting an IFX at the final stage
81a
81b
81c
DKit:Thiscanbeselectedonlyifthetimbresprogramisa
drumprogram(OscillatorModeDrumsorDoubleDrums).
81d
Specifiesthebustowhichtheprogramoscillator(s)usedby
timbres18and916willbesent.Youcanalsosetthesend
levelstothemastereffectsfromthispage.
TheBus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControlBus,Send1,and
Send2(Global55b)settingsforeachkeyoftheselected
Dkitwillbeused.Checkthissettingifyouwanttoapplyan
individualinserteffecttoeachdruminstrument.
Tip:Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedruminstrumentshave
thesameBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingsaccordingtotheir
type,asfollows.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Ifyouwanttoedittheseroutings,usetheDrumkitIFX
Patchmenucommand.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
DrumKitIFXPatchonpage 104.
81(2)d: Routing
Bus (IFX/Output) Select
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetimbresprogram
oscillator.
L/R:OutputtotheL/Rbus.
IFX15:OutputtotheIFX15buses.
Off:ThetimbrewillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,or
IFX15buses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwantthe
programoscillatoroutputofthetimbretobeconnectedin
seriestoamastereffect.UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
MFX2)tospecifythesendlevels.
Tip:Youcancreateawidevarietyofroutingsbyusingeach
timbresBus(IFX/Output)SelectandtheChaintoand
Chainsettings(Combi83b)thatfollowtheinserteffect.
95
Combination mode
Send1 (MFX1)
Send2 (MFX2)
[000...127]
[000...127]
Foreachtimbre,theseparameterssetthesendlevelto
mastereffects1and2.ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBus
(IFX/Output)SelectissettoL/RorOff.WhenIFX15are
selected,thesendlevelstomastereffects1and2aresetby
theSend1andSend2parametersoftheInsertFXSetup
page,afterthesoundhaspassedthroughIFX15.
ControlchangeCC#93canbeusedtocontroltheSend1
level,andCC#91tocontroltheSend2,andmodifytheir
respectivesettings.Thesemessageswillbereceivedon
theMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbreintheP2:
MIDIchannelpage.
Theactualsendlevelsaredeterminedbymultiplying
thisvaluewiththesendlevelSend1andSend2(Prog
81d)foreachoscillatoroftheprogramselectedforthe
timbre.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
MIDIchannel,usetheChparameterontheIFX15page
(Combi84a).
Insert Effect:
IFX1...4
IFX5
[000...193]
[000...171]
[Off, On]
Chain:
IFX1: Chain to
IFX2: Chain to
IFX3: Chain to
[IFX2...IFX5]
[IFX3...IFX5]
[IFX4...IFX5]
IFX1: Chain
IFX2: Chain
IFX3: Chain
IFX4: Chain
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
Pan:#8:
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.101
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
3:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
4:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
[L000...C064...R127]
Bus:
5:DrumKitIFXPatchseep.104
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
[Off, L/R]
[Off, 1, 2]
Send1/2:
83
Menu
83b
Send1
Send2
[000...127]
[000...127]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee82:InsertFXSetupon
page 59.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
3:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
4:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
96
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
P01P15:Presetdataissavedinthisarea.Werecommend
thatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15.
84: IFX1
81
4
Menu
81
4a
U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyourown
settings.
:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffect,
writtenacombination,orselectedanewCombination.
Selectingthissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Combissavetheeffectsparametersettings,butthey
dontsavethenumberoftheselectedEffectPreset.Ifyou
selectanEffectPreset,andthensavetheCombination,the
EffectPresetsettingwillrevertto.
Thispageletsyoueditthedetailedparametersofthefive
inserteffects.UsethetabsatlefttoselectIFX1throughIFX5.
Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheInsertFXSetup
page.Formoreinformation,pleasesee83:InsertFX
Setuponpage 96.
IFX1 Parameters:
IFX1 Parameters
Here,youcansettheeffectparametersoftheinserteffect
youchoseintheInsertFXSetuppage.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUsingEffectPresetson
page 60.
[Off, On]
Formoredetails,pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1IFX5)on
page 240.
Turnstheinserteffecton/off.Thisislinkedwiththeon/off
settingintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage.
Ch (Control Channel)
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
ThisparameterspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillbeused
tocontroleffectdynamicmodulation(Dmod),pan
followingtheinserteffect(CC#8),Send1,andSend2.
ThechannelnumberofthetimbreroutedthroughthisIFX
willbefollowedbya*displayedattherightofCh0116.
IftwoortimbreswithdifferentMIDIchannelsettingsare
routedthroughthesameIFX,thisparameterspecifieswhich
ofthesechannelswillbeusedtocontroltheeffect.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
3:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
4:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
5:WriteFXPresetseep.104
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a)willbeused
tocontroltheeffect.NormallyyouwillsetthistoGch.
AllR(AllRouted):Thechannelofanytimbrerouted
throughthiseffectcanbeusedtocontroltheeffect.
(Channelsofeachroutedtimbrewillbeindicatedby*.)
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthesettings
foranindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16userpresets
foreacheffecttype,inadditionto15rewritablefactory
presets.
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program,
Combination,Sequencer).
Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
storedwiththeCombiyoudontneedtostorethemasan
EffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuseyour
favoritesettings.
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhileworkingon
aparticularCombination,andthenlaterusethesameEffect
PresetinadifferentProgram,Combination,orSong.
P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheInsertFXSetup
page.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
97
Combination mode
89a
89b
89c
89d
Hereyoucanspecifytheprogramoscillatoroutputbus,and
effectcontrolbusfortimbres18and916.
89(10)d: Routing2
Bus (IFX/Output) Select
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetimbresprogram
oscillator.Thisisthesameparameterasinthe81:IFX
Routing1T0108andT0916pages.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBus(IFX/Output)Select
onpage 95.
FX Control Bus
[Off, 1, 2]
SendstheoutputofthetimbretoanFXControlbus(two
channelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
UsetheFXControlbuseswhenyouwantaseparatesound
tocontroltheaudioinputofaneffect.YoucanusetwoFX
Controlbuses(eachisatwochannelmonobus)tocontrol
effectsinvariousways.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuseson
page 238.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
3:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
4:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
5:DrumKitIFXPatchseep.104
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
98
91c: TFX
TFX:
TFX
TFX On/Off
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
page 235.
[000...171]
[Off, On]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP9:MFX/TFX/LFO
(Master/TotalEffect/LFO)onpage 61.
91: Routing
91
Menu
91a
[000...127]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee91c:MasterVolumeon
page 62.
91b
V
91c
91d
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofmastereffects1,2and
totaleffect,andturnthemon/off.
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotaleffect
isinsertedintotheL/Rbus.
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.For
moreinformation,pleasesee91:Routingonpage 61.
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
3:CopyMFX/TFXseep.67
4:SwapMFX/TFXseep.67
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
92: MFX1
92
Menu
92a
91b: MFX1, 2
MFX1:
MFX1
MFX1 On/Off
Return 1
[000...193]
[Off, On]
[000...127]
Here,youcanedittheparametersoftheeffectyouselected
forMFX1intheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
MFX2:
MFX2
MFX2 On/Off
Return 2
[000...171]
[Off, On]
[000...127]
92a: MFX1
MFX1 On/Off
[Off, On]
Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Thisislinkedwiththeon/
offsettingintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Chain:
Ch (Control Channel)
Chain On/Off
Chain Direction
Chain Level
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic
modulation(Dmod)forthemastereffect.
[Off, On]
[MFX1MFX2, MFX2MFX1]
[000...127]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1onpage 62.
[Ch01...16, G ch]
Ch01Ch16:ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeusedfor
control.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a)willbeused
forcontrol.NormallyyouwillusetheGchsetting.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
WithEffectPresets,youcaneasilystoreandrecallallofthe
settingsforanindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16user
presetsforeacheffecttype,inadditionto15rewritable
factorypresets.
99
Combination mode
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program,
Combination,Sequence).
Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
storedwiththeCombinationyoudontneedtostorethemas
anEffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuseyour
favoritesettings.
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhileworkingon
aparticularCombination,andthenlaterusethesameEffect
PresetinadifferentProgram,Combination,orSong.
95a
95b
P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheP9:MFX/TFX/
LFORoutingpage.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
P01P15:Presetdataissavedinthisarea.Werecommend
thatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15.
U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyourown
settings.
:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffect,
writtenaCombination,orselectedanewCombination.
Selectingthissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Note:Combinationssavetheeffectsparametersettings,but
theydontsavethenumberoftheselectedEffectPreset.If
youselectanEffectPreset,andthensavetheCombination,
theEffectPresetsettingwillrevertto.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeUsingEffectPresetson
page 60.
MFX1 Parameters
Here,youcansettheeffectparametersoftheinserteffect
youchoseintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Fordetailsonthemastereffects,pleaseseetheEffect
Guideonpage 235.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
3:CopyMFX/TFXseep.67
4:SwapMFX/TFXseep.67
5:WriteFXPresetseep.104
ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronizeLFO
basedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchasphasers,
flangers,filters,andsoon.
TheCommonLFOscontrolonlythefrequency,MIDI
synchronization,andresetoptions;eachindividualeffect
stillhasitsownsettingsfortheLFOwaveformandphase.
Withintheindividualeffects,youcanchoosewhethertouse
oneoftheCommonLFOs,ortousetheindividualeffects
frequency,sync,and/orresetsettingsinstead.Thisisdone
viatheeffectsLFOTypeparameter;selectIndividualtouse
theeffectssettings,orCommon1or2tousetheCommon
LFOs.
[Ch01...Ch16, G ch]
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic
modulation(Dmod)forCommonLFO1and2.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a)willbeused
forcontrol.Thisisthedefault.
Sync (Reset)
[Off, On]
Source (Dmod Source)
[List of Dmod Sources]
Frequency
[0.02...20.00 (Hz)]
MIDI/Tempo Sync
[Off, On]
BPM
[MIDI, 40.00...300.00]
Base Note
[ , 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , ]
Times
[01...32]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.For
moreinformation,pleasesee95:CommonFXLFOon
page 100.
ThesepagesletyouedittheparametersofMasterEffect2
andtheTotalEffect.Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usethe
P9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
TheseparametersarethesameasforCommonFXLFO1.
TheparametersforMFX2,TFXisthesameasforMFX1.For
moreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1above.
0:WriteCombinationseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:AutoSetupSongseep.101
3:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
4:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombination:Menu
Commandonpage 101.
100
IfyouuseCategory,orSubCategorytospecifyacategory
forthecombinationyouarewriting,youwillbeableto
selectthatcombinationbyitscategoryorsubcategoryin
CombiP0:Play.
ThenamesofthecombinationcategoriescanbeeditedinP4:
CategoryCombinationMainandCombinationSubpage.
Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1forthe
second,andsoon.
Exclusive Solo
Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff
(suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthecommand
callsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappearonthedisplay,
andyoucanproceedjustasifyoudselectedthecommand
fromthetouchscreen.
ThiscommandisavailableoneverypageinCombination
mode.WhenExclusiveSoloisOn,onlyoneTimbreis
soloedatatime;whenitisOff,multipleTimbrescanbe
soloedtogether.
Tip:Whilethiscommandisopen,theENTERbuttonwill
operateastheOKbuttonandtheEXITbuttonwilloperate
astheCancelbutton.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeExclusiveSoloon
page 64.
2. Makesettingsinthedialogbox.
Thiscommandautomaticallycopiesthesettingsofthe
programorcombinationtoasong,andenablestherecord
standbystatus(SeeTip:AutoSongSetuponpage 70.).
Fordetailsonthecontentofeachdialogbox,refertothe
explanationofeachcommand.
1. Selectthemenucommand.
3. Toexecute,presstheOKbutton.Tocancelwithoutexe
cuting,presstheCancelbutton.
Write Combination
ThiscommandisavailableoneverypageinCombination
mode.ItcopiesEffectssettingsfromaselectedProgramto
thecurrentCombination.ThisletstheProgramsoundthe
sameasitdidinProgrammode.
ThiscommandwritesaneditedCombinationintothe
KROMEinternalmemory.Itisavailableoneverypagein
Combinationmode.
Thisletsyou:
Saveyouredits
RenametheCombination
AssigntheCombinationtoaCategory
MarktheCombinationasaFavorite
CopytheCombinationtoadifferentBankandnumber
BesuretoWriteanyCombinationthatyouwishtokeep.If
youturnoffthepower,orselectanotherCombination
beforewritinganeditedCombination,itcannotbe
recovered.
Note:Youcanalsoaccessandexecutethiscommandby
pressingtheWRITEbutton.
1. UseProgramtoselectthecopysourceprogram.
2. SelecttheIFXsused,MFXs,andTFXoptionstospecify
which,ifany,oftheProgramseffectssettingstocopy.
IFXs:Thesettingsofallinserteffectsettings(thecontentsof
theInsertFXsetuppageandtheIFX15effectparameters)
ofthecopysourceprogramwillbecopied.
MFXs:Allmastereffectsettingsofthecopysourceprogram
willbecopied.
TFX:Alltotaleffectsettingsofthecopysourceprogramwill
becopied.
101
Combination mode
AbouttheBus(IFX/Output)Select(Combi81(2)d,83b)
setting
RegardlessoftheIFXsused,MFXs,andTFXsettings,will
besettoDKitifthecopysourceprogramsUseDKit
Settingischecked.Inconjunctionwiththis,theDrumKit
IFXPatchsettingwillberesettothedefaultsetting.
ThiscommandreplacestheToneAdjustsettingsofthe
selectedTimbre(Combinationmode)orTrack(Sequencer
mode)withthoseofanyotherProgram,Timbre,orTrack.
IfIFXsischecked,theBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingof
thecopysourceprogramwillbecopied.Ifthecopy
destinationtimbreBus(IFX/Output)Selectwassetto
IFX1IFX5,itwillautomaticallybesettoL/R.Ifyoucheck
IFXAllused,theroutingwillbeautomaticallysetto
matchthecopysourceprogram.
IfIFXsusedisunchecked,thenthecopysourceBus(IFX/
Output)Selectsettingwillbeignored.oriftheBus(IFX/
Output)Selectofthecopysourceprogramandcopy
destinationtimbreissettoIFX1IFX5,itwill
automaticallybesettoL/R.
3. IfyoucheckArp,theProgramsarpeggiatorsettings
willalsobecopied.
IfthisisOn(checked),thearpeggiatorsettingsofthecopy
sourceprogramwillbecopiedtotheArpyouspecifyin
step8,andthatarpeggiatorsArpeggiatorRunsettingwill
beturnedonandassignedtothecopydestinationtimbre
(ArpeggiatorAssign).
1. SelecttheTimbre(Combinationmode)orTrack
(Sequencermode)whoseToneAdjustsettingsyou
wanttoreplace.
Foratimbre,accesstheCombiP0:PlayToneAdjustpage,
andselecttheTimbre.
Foratrack,accesstheSeqP02:Play/RECToneAdjust
page,andselecttheTrack.
2. SelectCopyToneAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.
4. IfyoucheckwithDrumTrack,theDrumTrackPat
ternsettingsofthecopysourceprogramwillalsobe
copied.
IfthisisOn(checked),theDrumTrackPatternsettingsof
thecopysourceprogramwillbecopiedtotheDrum
Trackyouspecifyinstep9.
TheMIDIchannelspecifiedfortheDrumTrackcopy
destinationtimbrewillbeused.
5. UsetheTofieldtospecifythecopydestinationtimbre.
Theparametersforeachtimbrewillbeinitialized.Thecopy
sourceprogramwillbeassignedtoProgram(see01(2)b:
ProgramSelectonpage 72).
TheMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c)settingwillnot
changeifArpischecked.IfArpisunchecked,MIDI
ChannelwillbeautomaticallysettoGch.
TheBankSelect(WhenStatus=EX2)(Combi31(2)c)
settingwillnotchange.
TheStatus(Combi31(2)c)settingwillautomaticallybe
settoINT.
TheP1:Basic/ControllersControllersSetupsettingsof
thecopysourceprogramwillbecopied.
6. UsetheArpfieldtoselectthecopydestination
arpeggiator;eitherA,B,C,orD.
7. UsetheDrumTracktospecifythedestinationtimbre
towhichthedrumtrackprogramwillbecopied.
102
3. UsetheFromfieldtoselecttheProgram,Combination,
orSongfromwhichtocopy.
YoucanalsousethefrontpanelBANKbuttonstoselectthe
desiredbank.
4. IfyouveselectedaCombinationorSong,selectaspe
cificTimbreorTrackaswell.
5. ChooseeitherAllorAssignmentsOnlytoselectthe
ToneAdjustparametersthatyouwanttocopy.
All:ThiscopiesboththeToneAdjustparameter
assignmentsandvalues.
AssignmentsOnly:ThiscopiesonlytheToneAdjust
parameterassignments,withoutthevalues.
Copy Arpeggiator
ResetToneAdjustisavailableontheToneAdjusttabofthe
playpage.
CopyArpeggiatorisavailableontheARPSetupT0108
ScanZonetabsoftheARP/DTpage.
ThiscommandaffectsonlytheselectedTimbreorTrack,as
opposedtotheentireCombinationorSong.Itresetsthe
ToneAdjustsettingsforalloftheTrack/Timbres,Switches,
andSliderstotheirdefaultvalues.
Thiscommandcancopyarpeggiatorsettingsfromanother
locationtothecurrentCombi.
1. SelecttheTimbre(Combinationmode)orTrack
(Sequencermode)toreset.
Foratimbre,accesstheCombiP0:PlayToneAdjustpage,
andselecttheTimbre.
Foratrack,accesstheSeqP02:Play/RECToneAdjust
page,andselecttheTrack.
2. SelectResetToneAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.
1. InFrom,selectthesource(mode,bank,number)ofthe
arpeggiatoryouwishtocopy.
IfyouarecopyingfromaCombinationorSong,selecteither
AorB,ifyouwishtocopysettingsfromonlyone
arpeggiator,orselectA&Bifyouwishtocopythesettingsof
botharpeggiators.
2. IfyouarecopyingfromaProgram,orarecopying
eitherAorBfromaCombination,orSong,selecteither
AorBastheTocopydestination.
Thiscommandchangesaloopstempobychangingthe
TimbresDetuneparameter.Themultisampledataitselfis
notaltered.Sincethisaltersthepitchoftheloopalongwith
thetempo,itsgenerallyintendedforunpitchedpercussive
loops.
Note:UsingDetuneBPMAdjustwilloverwriteany
previousDetunesettings.
1. GotothePitchtaboftheTimbreParameterspage.
2. SelecttheDetuneparameterforthedesiredTimbre.
DetuneBPMAdjustisavailableonlywhentheDetune
parameterhasbeenselected.Otherwise,themenuselection
willbegrayedout.
103
Combination mode
Swap MFX/TFX
CopyInsertEffectisavailableonalloftheIFXpages.
SwapMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX/LFO
pages.
ThiscommandcopieseffectssettingsfromProgram,
Combination,orSong.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
CopyInsertEffectonpage 66.
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)inserteffectsettings.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeSwapMFX/TFXonpage 67.
Note:TheslotsMIDIcontrolchannel,asspecifiedbytheCh
parameterontheP8:Routing/IFXIFX15pages,willnotbe
copied.
Note:TheslotsMIDIcontrolchannel,asspecifiedbytheCh
parameterontheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOMFX1andTFXpage,
willnotbecopied.
Write FX Preset
SwapInsertEffectisavailableonalloftheIFXpages.
WriteFXPresetisavailableonalloftheeffectsparameter
editingpages,includingIFX15,MFX1and2,andTFX.
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)inserteffectsettings.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeSwapInsertEffecton
page 67.
Note:TheslotsMIDIcontrolchannel,asspecifiedbytheCh
parameterontheP8:Routing/IFXIFX15pages,willnotbe
swapped.
3. IntheDrumKitIFXpopup,selecttheoutputbusto
whichyouwanttopatchthesignal:aninserteffector
L/RorOff.
Note:Torestoretheconditionofthedrumkit,execute
IFX1IFX1,IFX2IFX2,IFX3IFX3,IFX4IFX4,
IFX5IFX5(seepage 95).
Copy MFX/TFX
CopyMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX/LFO
pages.
ThiscommandcopieseffectsettingsfromProgram,
Combination,orSong.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
CopyMFX/TFXonpage 67.
Note:TheslotsMIDIcontrolchannel,asspecifiedbytheCh
parameterontheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOMFX1andTFXpage,
willnotbecopied.
104
ThiscommandsavestheeditedeffectintotheKROMEs
internalmemory.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWriteFXPreseton
page 67.
Sequencer mode
An overview of Sequencer mode
SequencerModeletsyourecordandplaybackMIDIdataon
sixteenMIDItracksandonemastertrack(containingtempo
data,etc.),usingtheinternalsoundgeneratororexternal
soundmodules.
Thedualarpeggiator,drumtrackfunction,RPPRfunction;
thesophisticatedeffects,controllers,andthenumerous
otherfunctionsoftheKROMEcanbeusedtogethertogive
youawiderangeofpossibilitiesformusicproductionor
liveperformance.
Whenyouturnoffthepower,theSequencermode
settings,thesongsyouverecorded,thecuelist,andthe
userpatterndatawilldisappear.Ifyouneedtokeep
thisdata,youmustsaveittoanSDcardoradatafiler
(viaMIDIDataDump)beforepoweringoff.
Ifyouwishtosavetheprograms,trackparameters,and
effects,settingsetc.selectedforasongasatemplate
song,usethemenucommandSaveTemplateSong.
WhenyouinitiallypoweruptheKROME,itwillnot
containanycuelistandsongdata,soifyouwishto
playbackasongonthesequencer,youmustfirstload
data(SeeLoadPreload/DemoDataonpage 216.).
MIDI sequencer
Thesequencercanrecordamaximumof210,000MIDI
events,upto128songs,andasmanyas999measuresper
song.
Upto20cuelistscanbecreated.
Acuelistisanarrangementofupto99songsthatwillbe
playedasachain.Youcanspecifythenumberoftimes
thateachsongwillrepeat.Acuelistcanalsobeconverted
intoasinglesong.
Timingresolutionisamaximumof/480.
TherearesixteentracksforMIDIperformancedata,anda
mastertrackthatcontrolsthetimesignatureandtempo.
Thearpeggiatorcanbeusedduringplaybackor
recording.
YoucanperformorrecordusingtheDrumTrack
function.
TheRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/Recording)functioncan
beusedduringplaybackorrecording.
AthreebandEQisprovidedoneachMIDItrack.
Foreachsong,youcanusefivestereoinserteffects,two
stereomastereffects,andonestereototaleffect.
Sixteendifferenttemplatesongsarebuiltin,andcontain
programandeffectsettingssuitableforvariousmusical
styles.Uptosixteenoriginaltemplatesthatyoucreatecan
besavedasusertemplatesongs.
Atrackplayloopfunctionletsyouloopspecified
measuresindependentlyforeachtrack.
Presetpatternsidealfordrumsarebuiltin.Inaddition,
youcancreateupto100userpatternsforeachsong.
Thesepatternscanbeusedasmusicaldatawithinasong,
orcanbeplayedbythedrumtrackorthedrumtrack
and/orRPPRfunction.
timing,length,andvelocityofeachnotecanbespecified
inthedisplayasyouinputthepitchesfromthekeyboard.
Themusicaldataandcontroleventsthatyourecorded
canbeeditedinvariousways(includingeventediting
andmanyothereditcommands).
MIDISystemExclusive(SysEx)messagescanberecorded
andplayedback.SysExmessagesreceivedfroman
externalMIDIdeviceorparameterchangesproducedby
editingtrackparametersoreffectparameterscanbe
recordedinrealtimeonanydesiredtrack.
Parameter-related features
WhentheStatusofatrackissettoINTorBTH,an
externalsequencercanbeusedtoplaytheKROMEasa
multitimbraltonegenerator.WhentheStatusofatrack
issettoBTH,EXT,orEX2,thesequencerofKROMEcan
playexternaltonegenerators.
ToneAdjustparametersletyoumaketemporary
adjustmentstothesoundoftheprogramusedbyatrack,
whileleavingtheoriginalprogramunchanged.While
creatingasong,youcanusethiscapabilitytomake
changesinrealtimeby(forexample)softeningthetoneof
thebasssoundorsharpeningtheattackofthestrings
withouthavingtoreturntoProgrammodetoeditthe
programitself.
KROMEsAMS(AlternateModulation)capabilitylets
youusecontrolchangesforRealtimeControlsofthe
parametersoftheprogramsusedinaprogram.ItsMIDI
SyncabilitiesletyousynchronizetheLFOspeedto
changesinthetempo.
Dmod(DynamicModulation)functionalityletsyou
controleffectparametersinrealtime.Youcanalsouse
MIDISynctosynchronizetheLFOspeedordelaytimeto
changesinthetempo.
TheMIDIclockmastercanbesettoInternal,External,or
Auto,allowingsynchronizedperformancewithan
externalMIDIdevice.
105
Sequencer mode
Youcanassignnamesnotonlytothesong,butalsoto
eachpatternandtrack.
TheLOCATEbuttonletsyoumovequicklytoadesired
location.
Youcanconvertuserpatterndataforuseinthedrum
track.Theconvertedpatterncanbeusedasadrumtrack
patternineachmode.Thisdatawillremainevenafterthe
poweristurnedoff(unlikeuserpatternsinSequencer
mode).
Youcandragwithinthedisplaytospecifyarangeof
measures,ortomove,copy,ordelete.Thisletsyoueditin
amoreintuitiveway(TrackViewediting).
Inthepianorollscreen,youcannoweditdatasuchas
note,velocity,andcontrolchange.Byselectinganevent
anddraggingityoucanmodifythepitchortiming,delete
it,oraddanewevent(PianoRollediting).
YoucaneditMIDIsystemexclusivedata.
Noteonvelocityvaluesareshowninrealtimeusinga
meter.Thisisaconvenientwaytoverifythetimbreor
trackthatiscurrentlysounding.
FordetailsonControlChangemessagesandRPN,please
seeControlchangeonpage 361,andUsingRPN
(RegisteredParameterNumbers)onpage 365.
FordetailsonMIDISystemExclusivemessages,please
seeSystemExclusiveeventssupportedinSequencer
modeonpage 191.
TrackPlayLoop,LoopStartMeasure,LoopEndMeasure,
PlayIntro,EQ(Bypass,LowGain,MidFrequency,Mid
Gain,HighGain)Status,MIDIChannel,BankSelect(When
Status=EX2),ForceOSCMode,OSCSelect,Portamento*,
Transpose**,Detune**,BendRange**,UseProgramsScale,
Delay(Mode,Time,BaseNote,Times),MIDIFilter,
KeyboardZone,VelocityZone,TrackName,Bus(IFX/
Output)Select,FXControlBus,Send1(MFX1)*,
Send2(MFX2)*,DrumKitIFXPatch
TheAutoSongSetupfunctioncopiesthesettingsofa
programorcombinationtoasong,andputsyouinrecord
readymode.ThenyoucansimplypresstheSTART/STOP(
)buttontobeginrecordingimmediately.Thislets
youseamlesslymovefromplayingaprogramor
combinationtoproducingasong.Forexample,ifyouve
beenusingthedrumtrackorarpeggiatorandhavecomeup
withaphraseoranidea,thisfunctionletsyoueasilyturn
yourinspirationintoasong.
Musical data
NoteOn/Off
ProgramChange(includingBankSelect)
PitchBend
AfterTouch
ControlChange
PatternNo.
ExclusiveMessage
Master track
Setup parameters/Musical data
Timesignature*,Tempo*
2. InP0:Playpage,selectthedesiredcombinationand
edittheArpeggiatoretc.asdesired.
Note:Ifyouwanttosavetheeditedstateofthecombination,
usetheWriteCombinationmenucommands.
3. PresstheREC()button.Alternatively,selectthepage
menucommandAutoSongSetup.
TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillappear.
* Whenyouchangethesettingduringrealtimerecording,
thiswillberecordedasmusicaldata(Programchange
andControlchangemessages).Thisallowsthestarting
settingstobemodifiedduringtheplayback.
** Musicaldata(MIDIRPNdata)canbeusedtochangethe
startingsettingsduringplayback.
Otherparameters:Youcanadjustparametersduring
realtimerecordingandrecordthesechangesasMIDI
SystemExclusivemessages.Thismeansthatthesettings
atthestartofplaybackcanchangeasthesongpro
gresses.
4. ToexecutetheAutoSongSetupfunction,pressthe
REC()buttonortheOKbutton.Ifyoudecidenotto
execute,presstheCancelbutton.
YouwillautomaticallymovetoSequencermode,andthe
settingsofthecombinationwillbecopiedtothesong.
Thefirstunusedsongwillbethecopydestinationsong.
106
107
Sequencer mode
Page
PageSelectshowsanabbreviatednameforeachpage.
EDIT
Thepageshowningreyisthepageselectedjustpriorto
pressingthePAGEbutton.
PLAY
1. PresstheSEQbutton,andthenpresstheMENUbutton
toaccessPageSelect.
2. Selectthedesiredpageinthedisplay.
P0:Play/REC
P1:Controllers
SW1,2,andknobsettings.(seep.122)
P2:EQ
EQsettingsforeachtrack.(seep.141)
P3:TrackParam
Variousparametersettingsforeachtrack
(MIDIchannel,OSCselection,Pitch
setting,etc.)(seep.125)
P4:Zone/Delay
Keysplitandlayersettings.
(Keyzoneandvelocityzone)(seep.129)
Timedelayfromnoteontobeginningof
sound.(seep.131)
P5:MIDIFilter
MIDItransmit/receivefiltersettings.(see
p.133)
P6:TrackEdit
Steprecording.
Pianorolledit.
Eventrecording.
Copy,delete,andothertrackediting.(see
p.137)
P7:Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack
Arpeggiatorsettings.(seep.143)
Drumtracksettings.(seep.146)
P8:Routing/IFX
Oscillatoroutputbusandmastereffect
sendlevelsettings.(seep.148)
Inserteffectrouting,selection,and
settings.(sseep.148)
P9:MFX/TFX/
LFO
Mastereffectrouting,selection,and
settings.(seep.152)
Totaleffectselectionandsettings.(see
p.152)
CommonFXLFOsettings(seep.154)
P10:Pattern/
RPPR
Patternrecordingandediting.(seep.155
RPPRsettings.(seep.158)
Convertingapatterntoadrumtrack
pattern.(seep.188)
P11:CueList
Cuelistsettings.
Consecutiveplaybackofmultiplesongs.
Convertingtoasong.(seep.160)
PATTERN&CUE
PressingtheEXITbuttonwilltakeyoutotheP01:Play/
RECpage.IfapageotherthantheProgramT0108page
isselected,pressingtheEXITbuttonwilltakeyoutothe
ProgramT0108page.
EFFECT
Forexample,ifyouwanttoaccesstheP3:TrackParam
page,holddownthePAGEbuttonandpressnumeric
key3.
ARP&DRUMTRACK
108
Main content
Songselection,playback,andrecording.
(seep.109)
Programselectionforeachtrack.(see
p.111)
Panandvolumesettingsetc.foreach
track.(seep.113)
Simplearpeggiatorediting.(seep.114)
ToneAdjustediting.(seep.115)
Recordingmethodselection.(seep.116)
Trackplaybackloopsettings.(seep.119)
Thisisthetimesignatureatthecurrentlocationofthesong.
Thetimesignaturecanbechangedateachmeasure.
01
Menu
01a
**/**:ThiswillbedisplayedwhenyoupresstheREC( )
button.Specifythiswhenyouwishtousethetimesignature
thatisalreadyrecordedforthatmeasure,andwishtorecord
withoutchangingthetimesignature.
SetTrackSelecttoaTrackfrom0116,presstheREC(
button,andspecifythetimesignaturehere.
WhenyoupresstheSTART/STOP(
)buttontobegin
recording,thetimesignatureyouspecifywillberecorded
ontheMasterTrackandonpreviouslyrecordedtracks.
01b
Transport Popup
Here,youcanmakebasicsettingsforMIDItrackrecording
andplayback,andcanselecttheprogramthatwillbeused
byeachtrack.
)button
BeawarethatifyoupresstheSTART/STOP(
duringtheprecounttostoprecording,thetimesignature
willnotberecorded.
Normally,youwillspecifythetimesignaturewhenyou
recordthefirsttrack,andselect**/**whenrecording
subsequenttracks.
Recording from measure 2 of track 2
when Meter = **/**
[001:01.000999:16.479]
Thisdisplayshowsthecurrentpositioninthesong.
Fromtheleft,thenumbersarethemeasure(001999),beat
(0116),andclock(000479).Whenyoumodifythesevalues,
thecurrentlocationwillchange.
Duringplaybackandrecording,thenumberofremaining
measureswillbedisplayedwhenyouapproachtheendof
thesong(thelast9measuresorfewer).
Thesongpositionbarwillshowthepositionofthecurrent
measure.
WhenMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoInternal(or
Auto,ifnoMIDIclocksarebeingreceived),the
KROMEwilltransmitSongPositionPointermessages
whentheLocationischanged.
Also,iftheMIDIClockparameterissettoExternal
MIDI(orAuto,ifMIDIclocksarecurrentlybeing
received),andReceiveExt.RealtimeCommands
(Global11a)ison,theLocationwillchangein
responsetoreceivedSongPositionPointermessages.
Therangeinwhichthebeatandclockcanbemodified
willdependonthecurrentlyspecifiedtimesignature.
Location
Song
Select
Popup
Meter
Tempo
3 (4/4)
Track 1
1 (4/4)
Recording
Track 2
1 (4/4)
3 (4/4)
Track 1
1 (4/4)
2 (7/8)
3 (7/8)
4 (7/8)
3 (4/4)
Track 2
1 (4/4)
2 (7/8)
3 (7/8)
4 (7/8)
Track 1
1 (4/4)
Track 2
1 (4/4)
Track 1
1 (4/4)
2 (3/4)
Track 2
1 (4/4)
2 (3/4)
2 (3/4)
2 (3/4)
3 (4/4)
3 (4/4)
Recording
Tempo Mode
Song Select
Rest is inserted
Track Select
Song Position
Resolution RPPR
Not played
109
Sequencer mode
(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Thisspecifiesthetempoofthesong.Thistempoappliesto
songplayback,arpeggiatoranddrumtrackfunction,etc.
040.00300.00:WhentheTempoModeisManu(Manual),
thistempowillbeusedforrecordingandplayback.When
TempoModeisREC,thistempowillberecordedonthe
mastertrack.
EXT:ThiswillappearwhenMIDIClock(Global11a)isset
toeitherExternalMIDI,ExternalUSBorAuto.Thetempoof
theinternalsequencerwillsynchronizewithMIDIClock
messagesreceivedfromanexternalsequencerorotherMIDI
device.
IfMIDIClock(Global11a)issettoInternal,theabove
temposetting(040.00300.00)isused.Ifyouveselected
Auto,operationwillautomaticallyswitchfromInternalto
ExternalifMIDIClockdataisreceivedfromanexternal
MIDIdevice.Thisindicationwillappear.
Note:YoucanalsoadjustthisbyturningtheTEMPOknob.
Alternatively,youcansetthetempobypressingtheTAP
buttonatthedesiredinterval.
Note:IfTempoisselectedasanalternatemodulationsource,
=120.00willbethebasevalue.
Tempo Mode
Auto:ThetempowillfollowthetempooftheMasterTrack.
Thetempoofthemastertrackcanbespecifiedbyusingthe
EventEditmenucommand,withtheMasterTrackchosenin
TrackSelect,orbytheRECoperationdescribedbelow.
WhenAutoisselected,itwillnotbepossibletomodifythe
(Tempo)settingwhileasongisplayingorrecording(or
duringstandby).
Note:Ifyouwanttochangethelengthofasongafter
creatingit,usethemenucommandSetSongLength.When
creatinganewsong,youcanspecifythelengthtobe
somewhatlongerthannecessary,andafteryouhave
finishedrecordingandediting,useSetSongLengthto
specifythecorrectlength.
ASongSelectmessageistransmittedwhenyouswitch
songsontheKROME.Youcanswitchsongsonthe
KROMEremotely,bysendingaSongSelectmessage
fromanexternalMIDIdevice.
IfTrackMIDIOut(GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasic)isset
toforMaster,andthesongisswitched,trackswhose
trackstatus(Status31(2)a)isEXT,EX2,orBOTHwill
transmitBankSelect,ProgramChange,Volume,
Panpot,Portamento,Send1/2,PostIFXPan,andPost
IFXSend1/2messagesontheMIDIchannelofthat
track.ThesemessageswillnotbetransmittedifTrack
MIDIOutissettoforExternalSequencer.
Track Select
WhenMultiRECisoff,thisalsoselectstherecordenabled
track.
WhenMultiREC(Seq08b)ison,thePlay/Rec/Mute
buttons(Seq01(2)b)selecttherecordenabledtracks,
regardlessoftheTrackSelectsetting.
UseTrackName(Seq62)togivethetrackadescriptive
name.
IfothertracksaresettothesameMIDIchannelasthe
selectedtrack,andtheirStatusissettoINTorBTH,
theyllbecontrolledbythekeyboardaswell.
Additionally,othertrackssettothesameMIDIchannel
astheselectedtrack,andtheirStatussettoEXT,EX2,or
BTH,willtransmitMIDItoexternaldevices.For
anotherlookatthis,pleaseseethetablebelow.
MIDI Channel
Sameasthe
selectedMIDI
Track
Manu(Manual):The (Tempo)settingwillbeused.
REC:TempochangeswillberecordedontheMasterTrack.
Song Select
[000127]
Track01Track16:SelecttheMIDItrackthatyouwantto
record.Thisisalsowhereyoumakeyourselectionwhen
editingaMIDItrackinP6:TrackEdit.
Different
fromthe
selectedMIDI
Track
Keyboard
plays Internal
Sounds
Keyboard
Transmits MIDI
Out
OFF
No
No
INT
Yes
No
EXT
No
Yes
Status
EX2
No
Yes
BTH
Yes
Yes
Any
setting
No
No
Selectthesongthatyouwanttorecordorplayback.
Eitherselectthesongnamefromthepopupmenu,oruse
numerickeys09tospecifythesongnumberandthenpress
theENTERbutton.
110
IfyouveselectedMasterTrack,thesettingsofthemost
recentlyselectedMIDItrackwillbeused.
MasterTrack:Selectthemastertrackifyouwanttousethe
P6:TrackEditmenucommandstoeditthemastertrack.You
cannotperformrealtimerecordingorsteprecordingonthe
mastertrackbyitself.
BecausealltheMIDIdatabeingrecordedwillbecorrected
tothespecifiedtimingresolution,coarsesettingsofthis
parameterwillcausecontinuouscontrollerssuchaspitch
bendtoberecordedinstairstepfashion.
Thispagedisplaysinformationaboutthetrackyoure
editing.T:indicatestheMIDItracknumber/programbank/
number/name.Ch:indicatestheMIDIchannelnumber,and
RPPR(Assign):indicatesthekeynumberthatwillstartthe
RPPRassignedtothetrack.
RPPR(Assign)willnotshowalloftheassignmentsifthere
aremanyRPPRassignments.TheP10:Pattern/RPPR
PatternEditpageletsyouseealloftheassignments.
Insuchcases,useasettingofHitorecord,andthenusethe
Quantizemenucommandtocorrectonlythedesiredtypeof
data(notesetc.).Toavoidastifffeel,avoidrecordingata
lowresolutiontobeginwith.
Track Number:
RPPR
Track Category:
[Off, On]
Asexpected,thisindicatesthetracknumber.Beloweach
tracknumberareitscorrespondingtrackparameters.
ThisturnstheRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/Recording)
functionon/off.RPPRletsyouassignapatterntoeachnote
ofthekeyboard,sothatthepatternwillplayback(orbe
recorded)whenyoupresstheappropriatekey.
ThisshowstheabbreviatedcategorynameoftheProgram
assignedtothetrack.
On(checked):TheRPPRfunctionwillbeon.Ifapatternhas
beenassignedtoeachkeyintheP5:RPPRSetuppage,
pressingthatkeywillperformtheassignedpattern.For
moreinformation,pleasesee103:RPPRSetupon
page 157.
ThisshowstheMIDItracknumber.Theparametersbelow
thisletyousettheparametersforthetrack.
Transport
Thetransportpanelwillappearwhenyouslidethe<
popupbutton(locatedonthelowerrightsideofthedisplay)
towardtheleft.Thisletsyoucontroltransportoperations
suchasplaybackandrecordingfromwithinthedisplay.To
hidethetransportpanel,pressandmovethe>popup
buttontowardtheright.
[00...17/00...07]
Here,youcanselectacategoryandsubcategorytochoose
theMIDItracksprogram.Allprogramsareorganizedinto
upto18categoriesand8subcategories.Choosethedesired
categoryandsubcategorytoselecttheprogramyoudesire.
PressthispopupbuttontoaccesstheCategory/Program
Selectmenu,andchooseaprogram.
Set Location
REC
LOCATE
PAUSE
START/STOP
<<REW
FF>>
Fortheprocedure,pleaseseeCategory/ProgramSelect
menu:onpage 3.
111
Sequencer mode
Program Select
[A...F: 000...127
GM, g(1)...g(9), g(d): 001...128]
SelectstheprogramthatwillbeusedbyeachMIDItrack.
Thelowerlinedisplayspartoftheprogramname.
Theprogramyouselectherewillbeusedwhenthesongis
playedorrecordedfromthebeginning.Iftheprogramis
changedwhilerecording,theprogramchangewillbe
recordedasMIDIdata,andtheprogramwillchangeduring
playback.Youcanalsochangetheprogrammanually
duringplayback.However,theprogramwillchangeatany
pointwhereprogramchangedataisalreadyrecorded.
IftheStatus(Seq31(2)c)iseitherINTorBTH,
programscanbeselectedbyreceivingMIDIprogram
changemessages.Also,whenthesongischangedor
whenthesongreturnstothebeginning,trackswhose
StatusisEXT,EX2orBTHwilltransmitthebankand
programnumbersviaMIDI.TrackswhoseStatusis
EX2willshowBankasandwilltransmitthebank
numberthatwasselectedintheBankSelect(Seq3
1(2)c)parameter.(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQMode
TrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
Thesettingwillalternateon/offeachtimeyoupresstheSolo
button.
TheoperationwilldependontheExclusiveSolosetting.
ExclusiveSolooff:Multipletrackscanbesoloed.Thesolo
settingofeachtrackwillchangeeachtimeyoupressitsSolo
On/Offbutton.
ExclusiveSoloon:WhenyoupressaSoloOn/Offbutton,
onlythattrackwillbesoloed.
IfMIDItrackswhoseStatus(Seq31(2)c)isBTH,EXT,
orEX2aremutedbyMuteorbytheSolofunction,note
on/offmessageswillnotbetransmittedontheMIDI
channelselectedforthosetracks.
Solosettingsarenotsavedwiththesong.
Exclusive Solo
ThemenusExclusiveSoloparameteralsoaffectstheway
thatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff(unchecked),
youcansolomultipleTracksatonce.Thesolosettingofeach
trackwillchangeeachtimeyoupressitsSoloOn/Offbutton.
WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyoneTrackcanbe
soloedatatime.Inthismode,pressingaSolobutton
automaticallydisablesanyprevioussolos.
Tip:Onmostpages,youcanalsotoggleExclusiveSoloon/
offbyholdingdowntheENTERbuttonandpressing
numerickey1.
Velocity Meter
Thismetershowsthenoteonvelocityvalue.
UsetheBank/ProgramSelectmenutoviewandselect
programsbybank.
ThisindicatesthenoteonvelocityvaluesontheMIDI
channelofeachtrack,producedbythekeyboard,MIDI
IN,arpeggiator,drumtrack,orsequencer.(Ifmultiple
noteonmessagesarereceivedsimultaneously,the
highestvelocitywillbedisplayed.)
UsetheCategory/ProgramSelectmenutoviewandselect
programsbycategory.
ThemeterwillrespondevenifKeyZoneorVelZone
settingsaresetsothatthenotedoesnotactuallysound.
TransmitMIDIprogramchangemessagesfroma
connectedexternalMIDIdevice(ifthetrackStatusisINT
orBTH).
Thismeterindicatesthenoteonvelocityvalue;itdoesnot
respondtochangesintheVolumeknobsetting,norto
changesintheleveloftheaudiosignalproducedbythe
Filter,Amp,EG,LFO,EQ,oreffects.
Youcanalsousetheabovemethodstoswitchprograms
whileasongisplaying.Ifyouswitchprogramswhile
recording,theprogramchangedatawillberecorded,and
theprogramwillswitchatthatpointinthesongduring
playback.YoucanalsousethemenucommandEvent
Edittoaddprogramchangedatatoatrack.
Play/Rec/Mute
UsethistomuteaMIDItrack,ortoselecttherecording
tracksformultitrackrecording.
Duringplayback,orforsingletrackrecording(normal
recording),youcanonlyselectPlayorMutefortracks
withtheexceptionoftherecordingtrack.Formultitrack
recording,trackscanbesettoPlay,Rec,orMute.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
EachtimeyoupressthePlay/Rec/Mutebutton,itwilltoggle
betweenthosefunctions.
3:DeleteSongseep.163
Play:Thetrackwillplay.
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
Rec:Forsingletrackrecording,theselectedtrackwillbeset
toRECwhenyoupresstheREC( )button.RECcannot
bemanuallyselected.
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
Formultitrackrecording(thePreferencespageMultiREC
ison),selectRECforthetracksthatyouwishtorecord.
Solo On/Off
TurnstheSolofunctionon/offforeachtrack.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
Mute:Thetrackwillbemuted(silent).
112
OnlytrackswithSoloOnwillsound.Othertrackswillbe
muted.
[On, Off]
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
OSC1
Left
OSC2
Center
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L001
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R127
Right
03
Menu
03a
OSC1
Left
OSC2
Center
Right
Pan (CC#10)
Pan (CC#10)
C064
C064
L032
L032
L001
L001
R096
R096
R127
R127
Left
Center
Right
Center
Right
OSC1
03b
Left
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L032
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R096
Left
Center
Right
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=C064
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=C064
OSC2
Pan (CC#10)
C064
L032
Here,youcansetthepanandvolumeofeachMIDItrack.
L001
R096
R127
Left
Ifamonoinserteffectisinuse,thesettingsyoumakehere
willbeignored.Inthiscase,thePan:#8parameterinP8:
Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppagewilladjustthepanning
ofthesoundaftertheInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeMixeronpage 243..
IfStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINTorBTH,CC#10Pancanbe
receivedtocontrolthepanning.WhenreceivingCC#10,
avalueof0or1isfarleft,64iscenter,and127isfar
right.Whenyouchangethesongorreturntothe
beginningofthesong,trackswhoseStatusisEXT,EX2
orBTHwilltransmitthepanyouspecifyhereasaMIDI
message(exceptforRND).(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQ
ModeTrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
Volume
WhenStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINTorBTH,CC#7Volume
canbereceivedtocontrolthevolume.Thevolumeofa
trackisdeterminedbymultiplyingtheMIDIVolume
(CC#7)andExpression(CC#11)values.Whenyou
changethesongorreturntothebeginningofthesong,
trackswhoseStatusisEXT,EX2orBTHwilltransmit
thevolumeyouspecifyhereasaMIDIVolume
message.(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQModeTrackMIDI
Outonpage 200)
ThisareashowsinformationontheMIDItrackselectedfor
editing.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)b:TrackProgram
Selectonpage 111.
Thisindicatesthecategory.
[RND, L001...C064...R127]
Here,youcansetthepanofeachMIDItrack.
L001C064R127:AsettingofL001isfarleftandR127is
farright.AsettingofC064willreproducetheoscillatorpan
settingoftheProgrammode.
[000...127]
Here,youcansetthevolumeofeachMIDItrack.
Pan
Right
RND:Thepanpositionwillchangerandomlyateachnote
on.
Track Category
Category
Center
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
113
Sequencer mode
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiator(s)youchecked
herewillruniftheyareassignedtoatimbrebyArpeggiator
Assign(71(2)c).
Whenthearpeggiatorison,thesecheckboxesletyouturnA
andBon/off.
05: Arpeggiator A,
06: Arpeggiator B
ThisparametercanalsobesetfromP7:ARP/DTpage
ArpeggiatorRunA,B.
Here,youcanmakearpeggiatorsettingsforthesong.A
songcanruntwoarpeggiatorssimultaneously.
ArpeggiatorparameterscanbeeditedinP7:Arpeggiator/
DrumTrack,butcertainmajorparameterscanbeeditedin
thesepagesaswell.Youcanedittheseparametersin
realtime,forexamplebychangingthearpeggiopattern
whileplayinginSequencerP01:Play/REC.
YoucanalsousetheTEMPOknobandthearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)GATEknob,VELOCITYknob,SWINGknob,and
STEPknobtocontrolthearpeggiatorinrealtime.
05
Menu
05a
Track assign
ThisindicatesthearpeggiatorAandBassignmentstatusfor
eachtrack18.ThesesettingsaremadeinArpeggiator
Assign(Seq71(2)c).
05b
[P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
[1, 2, 3, 4]
[ , , , , , , , ]
Sort
[Off, On]
Latch
[Off, On]
Key Sync.
[Off, On]
Keyboard
[Off, On]
05c
05d
Here,youcanselectthetrack,specifythetempothatwill
controlthesongorarpeggiatoretc.,andturnRPPRon/off.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Location,Meter,
Tempo,TempoMode,SongSelect,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPR
onpage 109.
Setthevariousparametersofthecombinationarpeggiator.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCOMBIP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack)onpage 91.
Theseparameterscanalsobesetfrom73(4):Arpeggiator
A(B)Setup.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
[GATE]Knob 1: Gate
[64...+00...+63]
[64...+00...+63]
seep.6,p.54
[STEP]Knob 4: Octave64...+00...+63]
seep.6
114
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
12:CopyArpeggiatorseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
07
Menu
TheresultingeffectofToneAdjustsettingsthatweresaved
inProgrammodeissavedwiththeprogram,regardlessof
theAutoLoadPCGsetting.Theprogramwillsound
accordingtoitssettings,regardlessofwhetherToneAdjust
settingsweresaved.
OncetheProgramhasbeenloaded,youcanchangeanyor
alloftheToneAdjustsettingsasdesired.Allsucheditsare
storedintheSong,withoutaffectingtheoriginalProgram.
07b
IfAutoLoadPRGisOn,ToneAdjustsettingswillbe
automaticallyloadedalongwiththeProgram.
07c
IfAutoLoadPRGisOff,theToneAdjustsettingsofthe
programwillnotbeloaded;theprogramsettingspriorto
editingtheToneAdjustsettingswillremain.
ToneAdjustprovidestwoimportantfeatures:
TheToneAdjustparameterletsyouedittheprincipal
Programparameters.
ItletsyoumodifyPrograms,includingeverythingfrom
subtletweaks(likechangingLFOspeeds)todramatic
changes(suchasselectingadifferentMultisample).Any
changesthatyoumakearestoredwiththeSong,anddo
notaltertheoriginalProgram.
Eachofthesixteentrackshasitsownsetoftoneadjust
parameters.
Formoreinformation,see:
Absolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameteron
page 7
ToneAdjustandMIDISysExonpage 7
InteractionbetweenToneAdjustandMIDICCson
page 8
Assignment
Value
Control
[SW18, SL18]
Thisistheswitchorsliderinthedisplaythatisassignedto
ToneAdjustparameters.
Assignment
Thisisthefullnameoftheparameterassignedtotheswitch
orsliderinthedisplay.YoucanchangethisusingtheAssign
parameter,below.
Value
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.Therangeof
valueswillvarydependingontheparameterassignedtothe
switchorslider.
Type
Thisshowsthetypeoftheparameter,whichrelatestohow
editstotheparameteraresaved.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeAbsolute(Abs),Relative(Rel),Metaparameter
onpage 7.
Stored Value
Thisshowstheoriginalvalueoftheparameter,beforethe
effectsofToneAdjust.ItappliesonlytoToneAdjust
parameterswhichcontrolasingleProgramparameter.
Ifyouunassignaparameterfromacontrol,itwillrevertto
thisvalue.
Switches 1...8
[116]
ToneAdjustswitchesactalittledifferentlythanslidersin
thedisplay.
ThisselectsthetrackwhoseToneAdjustparametersyou
wishtoadjust.Youcanswitchbackandforthbetweenthe
differenttracksasmuchasyoulike,withoutlosingyour
edits.
WhenaswitchisassignedtoaRelativeparameter,oran
Absoluteparameterwithmorethantwostates:
SwitchOff=theProgramsstoredvalue
[Off, On]
SwitchOn=OnValue(seebelow)
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoatrack,thisparameter
determineswhetherornottheProgramsToneAdjust
settingswillbeloadedaswell.
WhenaswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
parameter,suchasHold,theswitchstatusdirectlyreflects
theparametervalue:
Thesesettingsincludetheparametersassignedtoeach
sliderandswitchinthedisplay,alongwiththeon/offstate
assignedtoAbsoluteparameters.
SwitchOn=On
SwitchOff=Off
115
Sequencer mode
08: Preferences
Assign
On/Off
08
Menu
Value
08a
Assign
ThisassignsToneAdjustparameterstotheswitchesinthe
display.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,pleasesee
CommonToneAdjustParametersonpage 9andTone
AdjustParametersonpage 10.
On Value
08c
[Depends on parameter]
TheparameterissettothisvaluewhentheswitchisOn.
WhentheswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
parameter,suchasHold,thiswillalwaysbethesameasthe
SwitchStatus(seebelow).
Switch Status
[Off, On]
ThissimplyshowswhethertheswitchisOnorOff.
Sliders 18
Assign
ThisassignsToneAdjustparameterstotheslidersinthe
display.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,pleasesee
CommonToneAdjustParametersonpage 9andTone
AdjustParametersonpage 10.
Value
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.Therangeof
valueswillvarydependingontheparameterassignedtothe
control.
08b
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
Here,youcanspecifytherealtimerecordingmethod,adjust
levelsandmakeothersettingsforaudiorecording,and
adjustthemetronomesettings.
Overwrite
Whenrecordingforthefirsttime,youwillnormallyselect
thismethod.
Ifyouusethismethodtorecordonatrackonwhichdata
hasalreadybeenrecorded,allpreviousdatawillbereplaced
fromthemeasureatwhichyoubeganrecordingthroughall
subsequentmeasures.
Withthismethod,thenewlyrecordeddataoverwrites
musicaldatapreviouslyrecordedonthattrack.
Normallyyouwillusethismethodtorecord,andthen
modifytheresultsbyusingothertypesofrealtime
recordingorMIDIeventediting.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
1. UseTrackSelecttochoosethetrackthatyouwantto
record.
2:RenameSongseep.163
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverwrite.
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
12:CopyToneAdjustseep.167
13:ResetToneAdjustseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
116
3. InLocation,specifythelocationatwhichyouwishto
beginrecording.
4. PresstheREC( )button,andthenpresstheSTART/
STOP(
)button.
IftheMetronomeSetupisstillsettothedefaultsettings,the
metronomewillsoundforatwomeasureprecount,and
thenrecordingwillbegin.
Playthekeyboardandmovethecontrollers(suchasthe
joystick)torecordyourperformance.
5. Whenyoufinishplaying,presstheSTART/STOP(
button.
Recordingwillend,andthelocationwillreturntothepoint
atwhichyoubeginrecording.
IfyoupressthePAUSE( )buttoninsteadoftheSTART/
STOP(
)button,recordingwillpause.Whenyou
pressthePAUSE( )buttononceagain,recordingwill
resume.Whenyouarefinished,presstheSTART/STOP(
)buttontostoprecording.
Overdub
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoadddatatoa
previouslyrecordedtrack.
Withthismethod,thenewlyrecordedmusicaldataisadded
totheexistingdata.
Whenyouperformoverdubrecordingonapreviously
recordedtrack,thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeaddedtothe
previouslyrecordeddata.
Itisbesttoselectthismodeifyouwillberecording
additionalcontroldata,recordingadrumpattern,or
recordingthetempointhemastertrack.Withthismode,
datacanbeaddedwithouterasingtheexistingperformance
data.
1. UseTrackSelecttochoosethetrackthatyouwantto
record.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverdub.
Auto Punch In
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoautomaticallyre
recordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecordedtrack.
Recordingwilloccuronlyoverthespecifiedarea,rewriting
itwiththenewlyrecordeddata.
Firstyoumustspecifytheareathatwillbererecorded.
Thenrecordingwillautomaticallystartandendwithinthe
specifiedarea.Withthismethod,themusicaldata
previouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewlyrecorded
data.
1. UseTrackSelecttochoosethetrackthatyouwantto
record.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoAutoPunchIn.
3. InM(AutoPunchInStartMeasure),M(AutoPunch
InEndMeasure)specifytheareathatyouwishto
record.
Forexample,ifyouspecifyM005M008,recordingwill
occuronlyfrommeasure5tomeasure8.
4. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasures
beforethepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecording.
3. Fortherestoftheprocedure,pleaseseesteps35of
Overwrite.
Manual Punch In
SelectthismethodwhenyouwishtousetheREC( )
buttonorafootswitchtorerecordselectedportionsofa
previouslyrecordedtrack.
Whilethesongisplaying,youcanpresstheREC( )
buttonoraconnectedpedalswitchatthedesiredlocationto
startorstoprecording.Withthismethod,themusicaldata
previouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewlyrecorded
data.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwantto
record.
5. PresstheREC( )button,andthenpresstheSTART/
STOP(
)button.
Playbackwillbegin.
Whenyoureachthestartinglocationyouspecifiedinstep3,
recordingwillbegin.Playthekeyboardandoperate
controllerssuchasthejoysticktorecordyourperformance.
Whenyoureachtheendinglocationyouspecifiedinstep3,
recordingwillend.(Playbackwillcontinue.)
6. PresstheSTART/STOP(
)button.
Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothelocationyou
specifiedinstep4.
[M001M999]
[M001M999]
WhenRecordingSetupissettoAutoPunchIn,specifythe
measuresatwhichrecordingwillstartandend.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoManualPunchIn.
3. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasuresear
lierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecord
ing.
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtorepeatedlyrecorda
specifiedareaofatrack,andcontinueaddingdata.Thisis
suitableforcreatingdrumpatterns,etc.
IfMultiRECischecked,thisparameterwillnotbe
available.
Playbackwillbegin.
Thismethodletsyoucontinuerecordingasyouaddmusical
data.
5. Atthepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecording,
presstheREC( )button.
Thespecifiedregioncanberecordedrepeatedly.Thisis
idealwhenrecordingdrumphrases,etc.
Recordingwillbegin.Playthekeyboardandoperate
controllerssuchasthejoysticktorecordyourperformance.
1. SettheRecordingSetuptoLoopAllTracks.
4. PresstheSTART/STOP(
)button.
6. Whenyoufinishrecording,presstheREC(
)button.
Recordingwillend(playbackwillcontinue).
UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwanttorecord.
2. IfMultiRECischecked,itwillnotbepossibletoselect
LoopAllTracks.
Note:InsteadofpressingtheREC( )buttoninsteps5
and6,youcanuseafootswitchconnectedtothe
ASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.
SettheGlobalP2:ControllerspageFootSwitchAssignto
SongPunchIn/Out.
7. PresstheSTART/STOP(
)button.
Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothelocationthat
youspecifiedinstep3.
3. InM(LoopStartMeasure),M(LoopEndMeasure)
specifytheareathatyouwishtorecord.
Forexample,ifyouspecifyM004M008,recordingwill
occurrepeatedly(asaloop)frommeasure4tomeasure8.
117
Sequencer mode
4. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasuresear
lierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecord
ing.
5. PresstheREC( )button,andthenpresstheSTART/
STOP(
)button.
Playbackwillbegin.Whenyoureachthestartinglocation
youspecifiedinstep3,recordingwillbegin.Playthe
keyboardandoperatecontrollerssuchasthejoystickto
recordyourperformance.
Whenyoureachtheendinglocationyouspecifiedinstep3,
youwillreturntothestartinglocation,andcontinue
recording.
6. Themusicaldatathatislooprecordedwillbeaddedto
thepreviouslyrecordeddata.
Youcanalsoerasespecificdatawhileyoucontinueloop
recording.Thisisusefulif,forexample,youneedtodeletea
mistakewithoutinterruptingtheflowoftherecording.
IfyoupresstheREC( )buttonduringlooprecording,all
musicaldatawillberemovedfromthecurrentlyselected
trackaslongasyoucontinuepressingtheswitch.
BycheckingtheRemoveDatacheckboxyoucaneraseonly
thespecifieddata.Duringlooprecording,pressthenote
thatyouwishtodelete,andonlythedataofthatnote
numberwillbedeletedfromthekeyboardaslongasyou
continuepressingthatnote.
Similarly,benderdatawillbedeletedaslongasyoutiltthe
joystickintheX(horizontal)direction,andaftertouchdata
willbedeletedaslongasyouapplypressuretothe
keyboard.
track,arpeggiatororRPPRfunctions,orwhenrecordingthe
outputofanexternalmultitracksequencer.
IftheMultiRECboxischecked,thePlay/Rec/Mutestatusof
thetrackyouselectinTrackSelectwillbesettoREC;press
thePlay/Rec/Mutebuttonofthetrack(s)youwanttorecord
sothattheyindicateREC.(Thebuttonindicationwill
changeintheorderofPlayRecMute.)
RegardlessoftheTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a)setting,data
willberecordedontheMIDItracksthataresettoREC.
MIDIdatawillberoutedtothetrackswithacorresponding
MIDIchannel.
Fordetailsonhowtorecordfromthearpeggiatororan
externalmultitracksequencerontomultipletracksof
differentMIDIchannels,pleaseseeSynchronizingthe
playbackoftheArpeggiator,DrumTrackfunctionor
sequenceronpage 367.
Note:Ifyourerecordingdatafromanexternalmultitrack
sequencer,setMIDIClock(Global11a)toExternalMIDI
sothattheKROMEwillsynchronizetoyourexternal
sequencer.Tempochangescannotberecorded.
Off(unchecked):Singletrackrecordingsetupwillbe
selected.RecordingwilloccuronthetrackselectedbyTrack
Select.
MultiREC.cannotbeselectedifRecordingSetupisset
toLoopAllTracks.
1. MakethedesiredRecordingSetupsettings.
YoucanrecordusingOverwrite,Overdub,ManualPunch
In,orAutoPunchIn.
2. InRecordingSetup,checkMultiREC.
Whenyouareonceagainreadytorecordmusicaldata,
unchecktheRemoveDatacheckbox.
7. PresstheSTART/STOP(
)button.
Playbackwillend,andyouwillreturntotherecordingstart
locationthatyouspecifiedinstep4.
IfLoopAllTracksisselected,normalplaybackwillbe
loopedaswell.
[M001M999]
[M001M999]
Specifiestherangeofmeasuresoverwhichrecordingwill
repeatwhenRecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks.
Remove Data
[Off, On]
UsethistodeleteunwantedMIDIdatathatyourecorded
whileusingLoopAllTracks.Thisisavailablewhen
RecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks.
On(checked):YoucandeleteunwantedMIDIdatawhile
recordingwithLoopAllTracks.Duringrecording,pressthe
key(notenumber)thatcorrespondstotheMIDInotedata
youwishtodelete.Alloccurrencesofthatnotenumberwill
bedeletedforthetimethatyoucontinueholdingdownthe
key.
Controllerdatacanalsobeerasedinasimilarway.For
examplewhileyoumoveandholdthejoystickintheX
(horizontal)direction,benderdatawillbeerased.This
appliestoJoystick+Y(CC#01)/Y(CC#02),JoystickX(Pitch
Bend),andDamper(CC#64).
Also,youcanpressandholddowntheREC( )buttonto
deleteallMIDIdataforaslongasthekeyisheld.
Multi REC
[Off, On]
On(checked):Multitrackrecordingsetupisenabled.Select
thisifyouwanttorecordtwoormoretracks
simultaneously.
UseMIDImultitrackrecordingifyouwantto
simultaneouslyrecordmultipleMIDItracksofdifferent
channels,suchaswhenrecordingtheoutputofthedrum
118
3. UseLocationtospecifythemeasureatwhichrecord
ingwillbegin.
4. PresstheREC(
)button.
5. Forthetrackyouwanttorecord,pressPlay/Rec/Muteto
makeitindicateRec.
6. PresstheSTART/STOP(
)button.
WiththedefaultsettingsforMetronomeSetup,the
metronomewillsoundforatwomeasureprecount,and
thenrecordingwillbegin.Nowyoucanperformonthe
keyboardandcontrollers,andusethearpeggiatororRPPR
functionsifdesired.
7. PresstheSTART/STOP(
)button.
Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothelocation
specifiedinstep3.
SEQ P0: Play/REC 09: Play Loop T0108, 010: Play Loop T0916
Sound
OnlyREC:Themetronomewillsoundonlyduring
recording.
09a
REC&Play:Themetronomewillsoundduringrecording
andplayback.
Off:Themetronomewillnotsoundduringplaybackor
recording.However,theprecountmetronomewillsound
beforerecordingbegins.
Level
09b
[000127]
Setsthevolumeofthemetronome.
[L/R, L, R]
Selectstheoutputdestinationofthemetronomesound.
L/R:OutputfromAUDIOOUTPUTL/MonoandR.
L:OutputfromAUDIOOUTPUTL/Mono.
R:OutputfromAUDIOOUTPUTR.
Precount [Measure]
[02]
Whenplayingorrecordingasong,youcanindependently
looptheMIDItracks.
Specifiestheprecountthatwilloccurbeforerecording
begins.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01:ProgramT0108,02:
ProgramT0916onpage 109.
Withasettingof0,recordingwillbegintheinstantyou
presstheSTART/STOP(
)button(afterfirstpressing
theREC( )button).
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
ThisdisplaysinformationaboutthecurrentlyselectedMIDI
track.Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)b:Track
ProgramSelectonpage 111.
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
Category
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
Indicatesthecategory.
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
[Category Name]
[Off, On]
SpecifiesloopingforaMIDItrack.
On(checked):ThattrackwillloopbetweenLoopStart
MeasureandLoopEndMeasure.
[001...999]
Specifiesthefirstmeasureoftheloop.
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
Specifiesthelastmeasureoftheloop.
Play Intro
[001...999]
[Off, On]
On(checked):AfterthemeasuresbeforethespecifiedLoop
StartMeasureareplayedonce,theregionofLoopStart
MeasureLoopEndMeasurewillbeplayedrepeatedly.
Forexample,youcanusethisonadrumtracktomakeit
playafillinandthenbeginlooping.
Off(unchecked):PlaybackwillbeginfromtheLoopStart
Measure,andwillbeginloopingimmediately.
ThiswillbevalidifTrackPlayLoopischeckedand
LoopStartMeasureissettootherthan001.
119
Sequencer mode
Example)
When Play Intro is checked
Controls
REALTIMECONTROLSletsyouuseknobs[1][4]to
modifytheparametersofthetracksprogramortheeffects.
Youcanalsousetheseknobstocontrolthearpeggiators.
Whenyouuseaknob,thedisplaywillshowthecontrollers
functionandvalue.UsetheSELECTbuttontochangethe
knobfunctions.
InTONE,thefunctionsassignedtoknobs14arefixed.
Track1willloopasfollows.
M001M002M003M004M003M004M003
M004
InUSER,youcanassignavarietyofmodulationfunctions
toknobs14.Toassignfunctions,usetheP1:Controllers
Setuppage(seep.122).
Realtime Controls
TheRealtimeControlsTONEknobfunctions(TONE
[CUTOFF]TONE[RELEASE])arefixed.Youcanassigna
varietyoffunctionstoRealtimeControlsUSERknobs14
(USER[1]USER[4]).MIDIcontrolchangesareassignedfor
eachfunction.
Track1willloopasfollows.
M003M004M003M004M003M004M003
M004
Inthisway,youcanuseTrackPlayLooptomakethe
realtimerecordingprocessmoreefficient.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
Whenyoumoveaknob,itsendsoutthecorresponding
MIDICC.
Whenyouoperateaknob,thecorrespondingMIDIcontrol
changemessagewillbetransmittedontheTrackSelect
MIDIchannel.
Mostofthesefunctionsadjust(scale)theparametersettings
ofthetrackprograms.Unlessotherwisenoted,scaling
meansthattheparametersareattheirprogrammedvalues
whenthecontrollerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthe
controllerisat0,andattheirmaximumwhenthecontroller
isat127.Foranotherlookatthis,pleaseseethediagram
below.
CC scaling of parameters
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
99
Parameter
Value
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
As Programmed
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
00
0
64
127
CC Value
[000127]
ThissliderscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAandB,
andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#74.
120
USER [1]...USER[4]
[000...127]
YoucansetRealtimeControlsUSERknobs14toawide
varietyofmodulationfunctions,usingtheP1:Controllers
ControllersSetuppage.
ManyofthefunctionsscaleaparticularsetofProgram
parameters.AllofthesettingsalsocorrespondtoMIDI
messagesusuallyCCs.
Arpeggiator
Arpeggiocontrolletsyouusethefourknobstocontrolthe
twoarpeggiatorsinrealtime.
Thefunctionsofknobs14arefixed.Theknobswillcontrol
thedurationofthearpeggiatednotes,theirvelocity,the
swing,andthestep.
ARP [GATE]
[64...+00...+63]
Adjuststheduration(gatetime)ofthearpeggiatednotes
(SeeGateonpage 54).
ARP [VELOCITY]
[64...+00...+63]
Adjuststhevelocityofthearpeggiatednotes(SeeVelocity
onpage 54).
ARP [SWING]
[64...+00...+63]
Adjuststhedegreeofshuffleforthearpeggiopattern(See
Swingonpage 54).
ARP [STEP]
[64...+00...+63]
Thisaffectsthelengthandresolutionofthearpeggio
pattern.
Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwillshortenthepatterns
length(Length)inunitsofonehalf.Turningtheknob
towardtherightwillshortentheintervalbetween
arpeggiatednotes(Resolution)inunitsofonehalf.When
theknobisinthecenter(12oclock),thenumberofsteps
andthespeedwillbeasspecifiedbytheLengthand
Resolution(SeeResolution*onpage 54).
121
Sequencer mode
11: Setup
11
Menu
11a
ThisassignsthefunctionofSW2.Thefunctionsthatcanbe
assignedtoSW2arethesameasforSW1,withthe
substitutionofSW2Mod.(CC#81)insteadoftheSW1sSW1
Mod.(CC#80).
11b
Here,youcanassignthefunctions(mainlytypesofcontrol
change)thatknobs14willhavewhenRealTimeControls
USER.(SeeRealtimeControlsKnobs14Assignmentson
page 348.)
Here,youcanassignthefunctionsperformedbySW1and
SW2,andbyknobs14whenRealtimeControlsUSERis
selected.
Thefunctionsyouassignhereareactivewhenyouusethe
SELECTbuttontoselectUSER,andoperateknobs14.
Whenyouoperatetheseknobsduringrecording,theMIDI
messagesassignedtothemwillberecorded.
Note:ThePanelSwitchAssignsettingoftheprogram
assignedtoeachtrackwillhavenoeffect.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
Here,youcanselectthetrack,specifythetempothatwill
controlthearpeggiatoretc.,andturnRPPRon/off.
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Location,Meter,
Tempo,TempoMode,SongSelect,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPR
onpage 109.
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
Thisareashowsdetailedinformationaboutitstrack
assignments.
9:GMInitializeseep.165
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSelectedTrackInfoon
page 111.
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
ThisassignsthefunctionofSW1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeListofSW1/2assignmentsonpage 348.
Note:Ifyouchangethefunctionsetting,thestatusisresetto
off.
Note:Iftheon/offstatusoftheSW1,SW2switchesis
memorizedwhenyousaveit.
[Toggle, Momentary]
Thisspecifiestheon/offoperationwhenyoupresstheSW1
switch.
Toggle:Thefunctionwillalternatebetweenonandoffeach
timeyoupresstheSW1switch.
Momentary:Thefunctionwillbeononlywhileyou
continueholdingdowntheSW1switch.
122
USER [1]
USER [2]
USER [3]
USER [4]
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P2: EQ
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGain(Seq23(4)a)
controlscancausesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.
Youcancompensateforthisbyturningdowntheinputtrim.
21a
21b
Here,youcansettheparametersforMIDItracks28and9
16.Theyarethesameasfortrack1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeTrack01(TrackNumber):above.
21c
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
Here,youcansetthesignallevelthatenterstheEQoftracks
18and916.
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
Track Select
(Tempo)
RPPR
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
Here,youcanselectthetrack,specifythetempothatwill
controlthearpeggiatoretc.,andturnRPPRon/off.
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Location,Meter,
Tempo,TempoMode,SongSelect,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPR
onpage 109.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
21(2)c: Trim
Track 01 (Track Number):
Auto Load Prog EQ
[Off, On]
WhenyoufirstloadaProgramintoaTrack,thisparameter
determineswhetherornottheProgramsEQsettingswillbe
loadedaswell.
OncetheProgramhasbeenloaded,youcanchangeanyor
alloftheEQsettingsasdesired.Allsucheditsarestoredin
theSong,withoutaffectingtheoriginalProgram.
Regardlessofthissetting,subsequenteditstothePrograms
EQinProgrammodewillnotaffecttheSong.
On:theProgramsEQsettingswillbeloadedautomatically
alongwiththeProgram.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Off:theProgramsEQsettingswontbeloaded.Usethisif
youvesetuptheEQinaspecificway,andthenwantitto
stayunchangedwhileyoutryoutdifferentPrograms.
Bypass
[Off, On]
IfthisisOn(checked),alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
includingInputTrim.Bypasscanbeconvenientfor
comparingtheresultsoftheEQwiththeoriginalsignal.
Input Trim
[0099]
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.Notethat
thisparameterusesalinearscale;50isequivalentto6 dB,
25isthesameas12 dB,andsoon.
123
Sequencer mode
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
23: EQ T0108,
24: EQ T0916
23
Menu
23a
23b
23c
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsforthemidsweepable
threebandEQforeachMIDItrack.
[18.0+00.0+18.0]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10 kHzHighShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5 dB.
[10010k]
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ.
[18.0+00.0+18.0]
ThiscontrolsthegainoftheMidSweepEQ,inincrementsof
0.5 dB.
[18.0+00.0+18.0]
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80 HzLowShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5 dB.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
124
SEQ P3: Track Param (Track Parameters) 31: MIDI T0108, 32: MIDI T0916
EX2:ThisenablesyoutospecifyaparticularMIDIBank
SelectmessagefortheTrack,insteadofautomaticallyusing
theBankoftheselectedKROMEProgram.Usethe
parametersbelow,labeledBankSelectMSB(WhenStatus
=EX2),tosettheBankSelectmessageasdesired.Inother
respectsthisisthesameasEXT,describedabove.
MIDIdataistransmittedandreceivedontheMIDI
channelthatisspecifiedseparatelyforeachMIDItrack
bytheMIDIChannel.
31b
31c
Status
Here,youcanmakeMIDIrelatedsettingsforeachMIDItrack.
OFF
No
No
INT
Yes
No
EXT
No
Yes(usingtheBankSelect
messageofthetracksProgram)
EX2
No
Yes(usingtheBankSelect
messagespecifiedontheMIDI
taboftheTrackParampage)
BTH
Yes
Yes
MIDI Channel
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Location,Meter,
Tempo,TempoMode,SongSelect,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPR
onpage 109.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee21:TrimT0108,22:
TrimT0916onpage 123.
31(2)c: MIDI
Track 01 (Track Number):
Status
Keyboard,
Sequencer, & MIDI In
play Internal Sounds
ThissetswhethertheTrackcontrolstheinternalsounds,
externalMIDIdevices,orboth.
WhencontrollingexternalMIDIdevices,italsoallowsyou
tochoosetheinternalBankSelectnumbers(assetbythe
frontpanelbuttons),orusecustomBankSelectsettingsto
matchtheexternaldevice.
Off:UsethistodisabletheTrack.Withthissetting,theTracks
Programwillnotsound,andMIDIdatawillnotbetransmitted.
INT:Thetrackwillsoundwhenyouplaybackthe
performancedatarecordedontheMIDItrack.Ifyouuse
TrackSelect(Seq01(2)a)toselectaMIDItrackthatissetto
INT,theKROMEssoundgeneratorwillproducesound
whenplayed.MIDIdatawillnotbetransmittedtoan
externaldevice.
BTH:BothINTandEXTareoperative.Whenthemusicaldata
recordedintheMIDItrackisplayedback,orwhenyouselecta
MIDItrackthatissettoBTHandplaythecontrollersofthe
KROME,theinternaltonegeneratoroftheKROMEwillsound,
andMIDIdatawillalsobetransmittedtoanexternaldevice.
EXT:WhenthemusicaldatarecordedintheMIDItrackis
playedback,orwhenyouselectaMIDItrackthatissetto
EXTandplaythecontrollersoftheKROME,MIDIdatawill
betransmittedtoanexternaldevice,buttheinternaltone
generatoroftheKROMEwillnotsound.
Whenyouselectanothersongorreturntothebeginningof
thesong,theprogramchange,volume,panpot,portamento,
sends1and2,postIFXpan,andpostIFXsends1and2of
eachMIDItracksettoEXTwillbetransmittedviaMIDI.
[0116]
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthattheMIDItrackwilluseto
transmitandreceivemusicaldata.TheMIDIchannelyou
specifyherewillbethereceivechannelwhenStatusisINT,
thetransmitchannelwhenitisEXTorEX2,andthereceive/
transmitchannelwhenitisBTH.TrackssettoINTwhich
havethesameMIDIchannelwillsoundandbecontrolled
identicallywhentheyreceiveMIDIdataordatafromthe
sequencertracks.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
125
Sequencer mode
Theportamentosettingyoumakeherewillbeusedwhen
thesongisplayedorrecordedfromthebeginning.Ifyou
changethesettingwhilerecording,itwillberecordedas
partofthemusicaldata.(HoweverifyousetthistoPRG,it
willnotberecorded.)Youcanchangethissettingduring
playback.HoweverifyouplaybackanyPortamentoOn/Off
dataorPortamentoTimedatathatwaspreviouslyrecorded,
thesettingswillchangeaccordingly.
WhenthetrackwhoseStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINTorBTH,
MIDIcontrolchangeCC#05(PortamentoTime)andCC#65
(PortamentoSwitch)canbereceivedtocontrolthisand
changethesetting.(IfthesettingisPRG,CC#05Portamento
Timewillnotbereceived.)
33b
33c
TheseparametersspecifyhoweachMIDItrackwillbe
sounded.
Whenyouswitchsongsorreturntothebeginningofthe
song,trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2willtransmit
thissettingviaMIDI.IfthisisOff,CC#65withavalueof0
willbetransmitted.Ifthisis001127,aCC#65of127and
CC#05of1127willbetransmitted.
IfthisissettoPRG,nothingwillbetransmitted.
ThisdataistransmittedandreceivedontheMIDIchannel
specifiedforeachtrackbyMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c).(See
GlobalP1:MIDI,SEQModeTrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
33(4)b:Track Info
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Location,Meter,
Tempo,TempoMode,SongSelect,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPR
onpage 109.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee21:TrimT0108,22:
TrimT0916onpage 123.
Here,youcanmakeOSCsettingsforMIDItracks28and9
16.Theyarethesameasfortrack1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeTrack01(TrackNumber):above.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
33(4)c: OSC
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
ThisletsyouoverridetheProgramsstoredVoiceAssign
Modesettings,ifdesired.
PRG:TheProgramsstoredProgP1:Basic/Controllers
ProgramBasicVoiceAssignModesettingswillbeused.
Poly:Thetrackwillplaypolyphonically,regardlessofthe
Programssettings.
MN(Mono):Thetrackwillplaymonophonically,regardless
oftheProgramssettings.
LGT(Legato):Thetrackprogramwillsound
monophonically,andwillplaylegatoaccordingtothe
ProgramsModesetting(Prog11b).
WiththeMNorLGTsettings,theProgramsPrioritysetting
(Prog11b)willdeterminethepriorityofthenotethat
soundswhenyouplaytwoormorenotes.
OSC Select
SpecifieswhethertheMIDItracksprogramwillplayOSC1,
OSC2,orboth.
ForprogramswhoseOscillatorMode(Prog11a)isDouble
orDoubleDrums,thissettingletsyouspecifythatonly
OSC1orOSC2willsound.
BTH(Both):OSC1and2willsoundasspecifiedbythe
settingsoftheprogram.
OS1:OnlyOSC1willsound.
OS2:OnlyOSC2willsound.PCMprogramswillnotsound
ifOscillatorModeissettoSingleorDrums.
Portamento
MakeportamentosettingsforeachMIDItrack.
126
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P3: Track Param (Track Parameters) 35: Pitch T0108, 36: Pitch T0916
AslongasthissettosomethingotherthanPRG,you
cancontroltheBendRangeusingMIDIRPNPitch
BendChangemessages.
35a
35b
35c
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
Here,youcanmakepitchrelatedsettingsforeachMIDI
track.
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Location,Meter,
Tempo,TempoMode,SongSelect,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPR
onpage 109.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee21:TrimT0108,22:
TrimT0916onpage 123.
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
12:DetuneBPMAdjustseep.103
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
35(6)c: Pitch
Track 01 (Track Number):
Transpose
[60...+00...+60]
AdjuststhepitchofeachMIDItrackinsemitonesteps.
12unitsequaloneoctave.
Bend Range
[PRG, 24...+00...+24]
Specifiestheamountofpitchchangethatwilloccurwhen
thepitchbenderisoperated,insemitoneunits.
PRG:Thepitchrangespecifiedbytheprogramwillbeused.
24+24:Thissettingwillbeusedregardlessofthesetting
intheprogram.
127
Sequencer mode
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
37
Menu
37a
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
37b
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
37c
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsforthescaleforeachMIDI
track.
37(8)c: Scale
Track 01 (Track Number):
Use Programs Scale
[Off, On]
MIDItrackcanusethescalethatisspecifiedbyScale(Prog
12b).
On(checked):Thescalespecifiedbytheprogramwillbe
used.
Off(unchecked):ThescalespecifiedbyScalewillbeused.
Scale:
Thisspecifiesthescalethatthesongwilluse.Formore
information,pleasesee12d:Scaleonpage 15.
Key
Random
[CB]
[07]
Asthisvalueisincreased,anincreasinglyrandomdeviation
willbeaddedtothepitchateachnoteon.
IfStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINT,thissettingwillaffectthe
pitchproducedbytheKROME.IfStatusisEXT,this
settingwillaffectthenotenumberofthenotemessages
transmittedviaMIDI.
128
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P4: Zones/Delay 41: Key Zone T0108, 42: Key Zone T0916 (Keyboard Zones T0108, T0916)
41a
[C1...G9]
Specifiesthetopkey(upperlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundforeachMIDItrack.
Top Slope
41b
41c
Specifiestherangeofkeys(12isoneoctave)overwhichthe
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthetopkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthetopkey.
41d
12:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplay
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctave
belowthetopkey.
Here,youcanspecifythekeyzonesinwhichMIDItracks1
8and916willsound.
Thetop/bottomkeysettingsspecifythezoneinwhichMIDI
tracks18and916willsound,andthetop/bottomslope
settingsspecifythekeyrangeoverwhichthevolumewill
changestartingfromthetop/bottomkey.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee41:KeyZoneT0108,4
2:KeyZoneT0916(KeyboardZonesT0108,T0916)on
page 129.
ThesesettingsdonotaffectMIDItransmission/
reception.Allnotedatathatisreceivedwillberecorded
intotheinternalsequencer,andallnotedatafromthe
internalsequencerorfromthekeyboardwillbe
transmitted.
72:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplay
downward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctaves
belowthetopkey.
Bottom Slope
Specifiestherangeofkeys(12isoneoctave)overwhichthe
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthebottomkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthebottom
key.
12:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplayupward,
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctaveabovethe
bottomkey.
72:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplayupward,
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctavesabovethe
bottomkey.
Bottom Key
[C1...G9]
Specifiesthebottomkey(lowerlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundforeachMIDItrack.
How volume will change according to keyboard location
Volume
Key
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
Bottom Key
Top Key
Zone Map
Key zone display
Bottom Slope
Bottom Key
Top Slope
Top Key
Top Velocity
MIDI
Track 1
Top Slope
Bottom Slope
MIDI
Track16
C1
E1
G9
Bottom Velocity
1
16
MIDI Track
129
Sequencer mode
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevaluesandvelocityvaluesby
holdingdownaneditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
akey(seeOGp.10).
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomkeyabovethetopkey
ofthesametrack.Norisitpossibleforthetopand
bottomslopestooverlap.
43a
43b
43c
43d
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
Here,youcansettheTop/BottomVelocityparametersto
specifytherangeofvelocitiesthatwillbesoundedbyMIDI
tracks18and916,andTop/BottomSlopespecifytherange
overwhichthevolumewillbeadjusted.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee43:VelZoneT0108,44:
VelZoneT0916(VelocityZonesT0108,T0916)on
page 130.
ThesesettingsdonotaffectMIDItransmission/
reception.Allnotedatathatisreceivedwillberecorded
intotheinternalsequencer,andallnotedatafromthe
internalsequencerorfromthekeyboardwillbe
transmitted.
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomvelocitygreaterthan
thetopvelocityforthesametrack.Norcanthetop
slopeandthebottomslopeoverlap.
[1127]
Specifiesthemaximumvelocityvaluethatwillsoundeach
track.
Top Slope
[0120]
Specifiesthenumberofvelocitystepsoverwhichthe
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheTop
Velocity.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthetop
velocity.
120:Thevolumewilldecreaseasthevelocityapproachesthe
topvelocity.
Bottom Slope
[0120]
Specifiesthenumberofvelocitystepsoverwhichthe
originalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheBottom
Velocity.
130
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthebottom
velocity.
120:Thevolumewilldecreaseasthevelocityapproachesthe
bottomvelocity.
Bottom Velocity
[1127]
Specifiestheminimumvelocitythatwillbesoundedbyeach
MIDItrack116.
45
Menu
45a
45b
Volume
Velocity
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
Bottom Velocity
Thisspecifiesthetime(delay)fromwhentheMIDItracks1
8and916receiveanoteonmessageuntilthesoundbegins.
Top Velocity
Note:Youcanalsosetthenotevaluesandvelocityvaluesby
holdingdownaneditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
akey(seeOGp.10).
Formoreinformation,pleasesee21:TrimT0108,22:
TrimT0916onpage 123.
ThesearethevelocityzonesettingsforMIDItracks28and
916.Theyarethesameasfortrack1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeTrack01(TrackNumber):above.
45(6)c: Delay
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
[00005000ms, KeyOff]
Specifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntiltheMIDI
trackbeginstoproducesound,inunitsofms(1/1000thofa
second).ThissettingisavailableifMIDI/TempoSync.isset
toOff.
KeyOff:Thenotewillbeginsoundingatnoteoff.Inthis
case,thesoundwillnotdieawayifthesustainlevelofthe
programsampEGisotherthan0.Thissettingisusedwhen
creatingharpsichordsounds.
Normallyyouwillsetthisto0000.
MIDI/Tempo Sync.
[Off, On]
Thetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetrackproduces
soundwillbespecifiedinnotelengthunitsrelativetothe
(Tempo).
On(checked):SpecifythedelaytimeintermsofaBase
NoteandTimesrelativetotheTempo.ForexampleifBase
Note=,Times=01,andTempo=60BPM,thedelaytime
willbeequivalentto1000ms.
Off(unchecked):ThedelaytimewillbesetbytheDelay
Timesetting.
Base Note
Times
[ , , , , , , , , , ]
[01...32]
Itspecifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetrack
beginstoproducesound,intermsofanotevaluerelativeto
the (Tempo)(Seq01(2)a).
UseBaseNotetospecifythedesirednotevalue,anduse
Timestoextendthatnotevaluebythespecifiedmultiple.
ForexampleifyousetBaseNotetoaquarternote( )and
Timesto02,thattrackwillsoundwithadelayofahalfnote
( ).Evenifyouchange (Tempo)(Seq01(2)a),thedelay
timewillalwaysbeahalfnote( ).Ifyouusethese
parameterstospecifyadelayofahalfnote( ).Inthiscase,a
Tempoof60.00BPMwillproducea2000msdelay,anda
Tempoof120.00BPMwillproducea1000msdelay.
131
Sequencer mode
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
132
SEQ P5: MIDI Filter 51: <1> T0108, 52: <1> T0916
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIaftertouchmessageswillbe
received.
Enable Damper
[Off, On]
TheseMIDIfiltersettingshavenoeffectontheMIDI
messagesthathavealreadybeenrecorded.
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#64hold(damperpedal)
messageswillbereceived.
ThesesettingsaffecttheMIDImessagesthatare
transmittedwhenyouadjustprogram,pan,volume,
portamentoandsend1/2parametersofatrackwhose
Status(Seq31(2)c)issettoBTH,EXT,orEX2.
Enable Portamento SW
On(checked):ReceptionofMIDIdataisenabled.Tracks
whoseStatus(Seq31(2)c)isINTorBTHwillreceivethese
typesofMIDImessagesontheirrespectivechannels.The
typeofeffectsthatarecheckedwillbeappliedtothe
programofeachtrackwhentheKROMEscontrollersare
operatedorwhenMIDIdataisreceived.(Theeffect
dynamicmodulationfunctionisnotaffectedbythese
settings.)
SettingsthatregulateMIDItransmission/receptionofthe
KROMEitselfaremadeinMIDIFilter(Global12b).
Iftheuserassignablecontrollersthatcanbefilteredinthe
MIDIFilter14and25pagesaresettoMIDIcontrol
changes,filteringwillbeperformedforthesecontrol
changes.Inthiscase,anycontrolchangefilteringthatis
beingperformedintheMIDIFilter11to13pageswillbe
givenpriority.Furthermore,ifthesamecontrolchangeis
assignedtomultiplecontrollersforwhichtherearefilter
settingsintheMIDIFilter14and25pages,checkingany
oneofthesewillenablethatcontrolchange.
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#65portamentoon/off
messageswillbereceived.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
Off(unchecked):ReceptionofMIDIdataisdisabled.
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
Note:MIDICC#=MIDIcontrolchangemessagenumbers.
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
51
Menu
51a
51b
51c
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIprogramchangemessages
willbereceived.
133
Sequencer mode
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
53
Menu
53a
53b
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
53c
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIpitchbendmessages(theX
axisofthejoystick)willbereceivedtocontroltheAMS
effectassignedtoJSX.(ThisisnotafilterforMIDIpitch
bendmessagereception.)Formoreinformation,pleasesee
AlternateModulationSources(AMS)onpage 339.
Enable JS+Y
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#2(theYaxisofthe
joystick,oraRealtimeControlsknobassignsetting)willbe
received.
Enable Ribbon
55
Menu
55a
55b
55c
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#1(the+Yaxisofthe
joystick,oraRealtimeControlsknobassignsetting)willbe
received.
Enable JSY
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
Enable JS X as AMS
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#16(specifiedasthe
assignmentofaRealtimeControlsknob)willbetransmitted
orreceived.
Here,youcanspecifywhethertheeffectofknobs14when
theSELECTbuttonhasselectedRealtimeControlsTONE
willbetransmittedandreceived.TheMIDIcontrol
messagesassignedtoknobs14whenRealtimeControls
TONEisselectedarefixed.
[Off, On]
EnablesordisablesreceptionofMIDICC#74(theKROMEs
filtercutofffrequency),whichisassignedtoknob1when
RealtimeControlsTONEisselected.
134
SEQ P5: MIDI Filter 57: <4> T0108, 58: <4> T0916
[Off, On]
EnablesordisablesreceptionofMIDICC#72(theKROMEs
filter/ampEGreleasetime),whichisassignedtoknob4
whenRealtimeControlsTONEisselected.
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
ThesesettingsenableordisablereceptionoftheMIDI
messagesassignedtoknobs14whenRealtimeControls
USERisselected.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
ThesearetheMIDIFilter4settingsforMIDItracks28and
916.Theyarethesameasfortrack1.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeTrack01(TrackNumber):above.
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
2:RenameSongseep.163
9:GMInitializeseep.165
3:DeleteSongseep.163
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
57
Menu
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
57b
57c
Here,youcanenableordisabletransmissionandreception
forthefunctionsofknobs14whentheSELECTbuttonis
settoRealtimeControlsUSER.UsetheP1:Controllers
ControllersSetuppagetoassignthefunctionsthatknobs1
4willperformwhenRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.
59
Menu
59b
59c
135
Sequencer mode
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
ThesesettingsspecifywhetherSW1Mod(CC#80)andSW2
Mod(CC#81)willbetransmittedandreceivediftheyare
assignedtotheSW1andSW2buttons.
5-11
Menu
5-11a
5-11b
5-11c
Note:IfPortamentoSW(CC#65)isassignedtoSW1orSW2,
theEnablePortamentoSWsettingontheMIDI<1>pagewill
takepriority.
Note:ThefunctionsofSW1andSW2areassignedontheP1:
ControllersSetuppage(seep.122).
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheASSIGNABLE
SWITCHwillbereceived.ThefunctionisassignedinGlobal
P2:ControllersFootControllerspage.
ThisfiltersettingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchangeis
assigned.
[Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheASSIGNABLE
PEDALwillbereceived.ThefunctionisassignedinGlobal
P2:ControllersFootControllerspage.
ThisfiltersettingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchangeis
assigned.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
[Off, On]
ThisenablesordisablesreceptionofMIDIsystemexclusive
messagesthatfreelyswitchthemultisampleusedbyan
oscillatorwhiletheprogramissounding.
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.167
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
136
61c
[Off, On]
Ifthischeckboxisselected,theFromMeasuresettingwill
belinkedtothecurrentlocation,andthelocationofthe
displayedtrackwillalsochange.Thelocationwillchangeto
followthisevenduringplaybackorrecording.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
Here,youcaneditMIDItracks116,andthemastertrack.
WheneditingaMIDItrack,youcanmove,insert,anddelete
individualnoteeventsorcontrolchangedata,orcopy,
move,insert,anddeletemeasuresortracks.Youcanalso
performStepRecordinginthispage.
Wheneditingthemastertrack,youcaneditthetempoand
thetimesignature.
Note:Toperformtrackediting(orstepediting),useTrack
Selecttoselectthetrackyouwanttoedit,anduseFrom
MeasureandToEndofMeasureparameterstospecifythe
regionthatyouwanttoedit.Thenchooseacommandfrom
themenu,andexecutetheedit.Fordetailsonthespecific
commands,pleaseseeSequencer:MenuCommandon
page 163.
2:StepRecordingseep.167
3:EventEditseep.169
4:PianoRollseep.171
5:SetSongLengthseep.176
6:EraseTrackseep.176
7:CopyTrackseep.176
8:BounceTrackseep.177
9:EraseMeasureseep.177
10:DeleteMeasureseep.177
11:InsertMeasureseep.178
12:RepeatMeasureseep.178
13:CopyMeasureseep.179
14:MoveMeasureseep.179
15:CreateControlDataseep.180
16:EraseControlDataseep.181
17:Quantizeseep.181
18:Shift/EraseNoteseep.182
19:ModifyVelocityseep.183
20:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
(01(2)a:Location,Meter,Tempo,TempoMode,Song
Select,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPRonpage 109)
21:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.
164
(23:EQT0108,24:EQT0916onpage 124)
22:CreateExclusiveDataseep.183
23:EraseExclusiveDataseep.184
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
From Measure
To End of Measure
[001999]
[001999]
Specifiestherangeofmeasuresthatyouwishtoedit(or
copyfrom)orsteprecord.
Locations move in synchronization
Measure no.
MIDI Track
MIDI data
Patterns used
Master Track
From Measure
To End of Measure
137
Sequencer mode
62
Menu
Thisshowseventinformationforeachtrack,suchasnote,
velocity,andcontrolchangedata.(seeillustrationbelow)
62a
Thehighlightedmeasuresarethosethatwillbeedited.The
regionisindicatedbytheFROMMEASUREandTOENDof
MEASUREfieldsintheupperpartofthescreen.
62b
62c
Youcanmove,copy,ordeletemeasuresandtracksinunits
ofonemeasure.
Note:Youcantspecifyarangeofmeasuresunlessatoolin
theboxtoolisselected.
HereyoucaneditMIDItracks116andthemastertrack.
Thispageprovidesanoverallviewofeachtracksdatasuch
asnote,velocity,andcontrolchangedata.
Inthetrackviewareayoucandragtoselecttrackand
measureregions,andmove,copy,orerasetracks.Youcan
alsoeditinmeasureunits.
Thetrackdisplayregionwillchangewhenyoutouchthe
tracknumber.
Youcanalsousevariousmenucommandstoedittheregion
youselectedbydragging.
IntheTrackViewSetupdialogboxyoucanchangetheorder
ofthetracks.
Scroll buttons
Thesescrollthetracksormeasuresshowninthetrack
viewarea.Pressthescrollbuttoninthedirectionthatyou
wanttomove.Youcanalsoscrollbypressinginsidethe
trackviewareaanddraggingtowardtheouteredgeof
thebutton.
Tool box
(23:EQT0108,24:EQT0916onpage 124)
Track Select
Hereyoucanselectthetracktoedit.ThisTrackSelect
settingwillchangewhenyoupressthetrackviewarea.
Whenthetrackchanges,thedisplaywillbrieflyturnblue.
Thehighlightedportionthatshowstheselectedregionof
thetrackviewareawillalsochangewhenyouchangethe
trackhere.
Usethistospecifythestartingmeasure(FROMMEASURE)
oftherangeofmeasuresyouwanttoedit.
Choosethistool,andthenpressameasureinatrackto
specifythestartingmeasure(andthetrack).Continue
holdingdownthestartingmeasure,dragtotheright,and
releaseattheendofthedesiredselection.Whiledragging,
youcandragacrossascrollbuttontoscrollthroughthe
measureswhilemaintainingtheselection.
Ifmorethanonemeasureisselectedeventhoughyou
actuallywantedtoselectonlyonemeasure,simplycontinue
pressingforapproximatelyonesecond;thesinglemeasure
yourepressingwillbeselected.
Location bar
Track name indication
Control message name indication
( Track View Setup)
Note events
Scroll button
Setup
Press this button to open
the Track View Setup dialog
box.
( Track View Setup)
Displays note events
in a one-octave range
( Track View Setup)
Pattern
Selected region
Velocity indication
( Track View Setup)
138
Scroll button
Track view area
Note:Whenselecting,theupperlineFROMMEASUREor
ToENDofMEASUREwillbrieflyturnblue,andwill
indicatetheselectedmeasurenumber.
Youcanscrollthemeasuredisplaybydraggingyourfinger
ontooracrossascrollbar.
Theeditregionwillbeselectedandhighlighted.
Move tool
Usethistospecifythelastmeasure(ToENDofMEASURE)
oftherangeofmeasuresthatyouwanttoedit.
Choosethistool,andthenpressameasureinatrackto
specifytheendingmeasure(andthetrack).Continue
holdingdownthestartingmeasure,dragtotheleft,and
releaseattheendofthedesiredselection.Whiledragging,
youcandragacrossascrollbuttontoscrollthroughthe
measureswhilemaintainingtheselection.
Ifmorethanonemeasureisselectedeventhoughyou
actuallywantedtoselectonlyonemeasure,simplycontinue
pressingforapproximatelyonesecond;thesinglemeasure
yourepressingwillbeselected.
Note:Whenselecting,theupperlineFROMMEASUREor
ToENDofMEASUREwillbrieflyturnblue,andwill
indicatetheselectedmeasurenumber.
Usethistomovethemeasuresoftheregionyouvespecified.
or
tooltoselecttheregionthatyouwantto
Usethe
move,andthenchoosethistool.Pressthemovedestination
measureordragtheselectedregionofmeasurestomovethem.
Ifdataexistsatthemovedestination,theDragMovedialog
boxwillappear,allowingyoutoselectwhethertooverwrite
orkeepthedataatthedestination.
Note:ThisoperationisequivalenttoexecutingtheMove
MeasuremenucommandwithModesettoStay(seep.179).
Example)
Moving the events of measures 12 to measures 56
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Dragovermeasures12tospecifytheeditregion.
1
Example)
Using the Start Point Select tool to specify a region
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Pressthedesiredstartingmeasureforthetrackin
whichyouwanttoselectaregion.
1
2
3. Pressthe
tool.
4. Pressmeasure5(themovedestinationmeasure).Alter
natively,dragtheeditregiontomeasure5.
Scroll button
3. Whilecontinuingtopress,dragtothelastmeasureof
thedesiredrange,andreleaseyourfinger.
Youcanscrollthemeasuredisplaybydraggingyourfinger
ontooracrossascrollbar.
Theeditregionwillbeselectedandhighlighted.
5. Inthisexample,aneventexistsinthemovedestination
measure,sotheDragMovedialogboxwillappear.
Overwritewilloverwritethesourcedataoverthedestination
data(replacingthedestinationdatawiththesourcedata).
Mergewillcombinethesourceanddestinationdata.
PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethemove.
Iftherearenoeventsinthemovedestinationmeasures,this
dialogboxwillnotappear;themovewilloccurimmediately.
Scroll button
Example)
Using the End Point Select tool to specify a region
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Pressthedesiredendingmeasureforthetrackinwhich
youwanttoselectaregion.
3. Whilecontinuingtopress,dragtothefirstmeasureof
thedesiredrange,andreleaseyourfinger.
139
Sequencer mode
Copy tool
Usethistocopytheeventsoftheselectedmeasures.
Usethe
or
tooltoselecttheregionthatyouwantto
copy,andthenchoosethistool.Pressthecopydestination
measureordragtheselectedregionofmeasurestothe
desiredcopydestination.Thedataatthecopydestination
willalwaysbeoverwritten.
Note:ThisoperationisequivalenttoexecutingtheCopy
Measuremenucommand(seep.179).
If you choose Merge
Example)
Copying the events of measures 12 to measures 34
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Dragovermeasures12tospecifytheeditregion.
1
Example)
Moving the data of an entire track
1. Returnthelocationtothebeginning.
2. Pressthe
tool.
3. Presstheleftsideofmeasure1inthetrackyouwantto
move.
2
3. Pressthe
tool.
4. Pressmeasure3(thecopydestinationmeasure).Alter
natively,dragtheeditregiontomeasure3.
4. Whilecontinuingtopress,dragtothemovedestina
tiontrack,andrelease.
Thecopywillbeexecuted.
Ifthemovedestinationmeasurescontainevents,theDrag
Movedialogboxwillappear.
Overwritewilloverwritethesourcedataoverthe
destinationdata(replacingthedestinationdatawiththe
sourcedata).Mergewillcombinethesourceanddestination
data.PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethemove.
Iftherearenoeventsinthemovedestinationmeasures,this
dialogboxwillnotappear;themovewilloccurimmediately.
5. Ifdesired,youcanpressanothercopydestinationto
copythedatarepeatedly.
Erase tool
Usethistoerasetheeventsfromtheselectedmeasures.
Choosethistool,andpressthemeasuresyouwanttoerase.
Theeventsofthosemeasureswillbeerased.
ThisoperationisequivalenttoexecutingtheEraseMeasure
commandwithKindsettoAll(SeeEraseMeasureon
page 177.).
140
2. Pressthefirstmeasurecontainingtheeventsyouwant
toerase,anddragtothelastmeasure.Ifdesired,you
canselectmeasuresinadjacenttracksforerasure(See
TrackNo.).Alternatively,youcanpressindividual
measuresoneatatimeanderasethem.
C4,C5,andC6(differentoctaves)willbeshownonthesame
dotline(attheCposition).
C1~...G#8~:Onlythenoteeventsoftheselectedoctavewill
beshown.Eachdotlinewillshowonenote.
Pressthe
tool,andthenpresstheleftsideofthefirst
measureofthetrackyouwanttoerase.Thedatawillbe
erased.
Auto:Ifmostofthedisplayednoteeventsarewithinone
octave,theywillbedisplayedusingonedotlinepernote.If
thenotesextendmorethanoneoctave,theywillbe
displayedusingAllNotes.
AllNotes:Onedotlinewillbeshownasoneoctave.For
example,noteeventsC4,E4,andG4(allinthesameoctave)
willbeshownonthesamedotline.
shows:
YoucanjumptoPianoRolleditingbypressingthisbutton
whenatrack116isselected.
Specifiesthetrackinformationthatisshownattheleftedge
andbottomofeachtrackviewarea.
Note:ThisoperationisequivalenttoselectingthePiano
Rollmenucommand(SeePianoRollonpage 171.).
Names
Note:IfyoupressthisbuttonorselectthePianoRollmenu
commandtoopenthePianoRoledialogboxforatrackthat
containsnoevents,atrackofthesamelengthasthesong(64
measuresbydefault)willbecreatedbeforethePianoRoll
dialogboxopens.
[Off, On]
Ifthischeckboxisselected,tracknamesandthetypeof
selectedcontroleventwillbeshownattheleftofthetrack
viewscreen.
Velocity
[Off, On]
Ifyouveselectedthemastertrack,thisbuttonwilltakeyou
toeventediting.
Ifthischeckboxisselected,thevelocityvaluesofnote
eventswillbeshown.Inthecaseofachord,thehighest
valuewillbeshown.
Scroll buttons
and
Bypressingthesebuttonsyoucanmovetotracksor
measuresthatarenotcurrentlydisplayed.Evenwithout
pressingdirectlyononeofthesebuttons,youcanscrollthe
displaybydraggingacrossascrollbuttonfrominsidethe
trackviewarea.
Thisselectstheinformation(suchascontrolchanges)that
willbeshown.Ifyoudontwantanyofthesetobeshown,
choosenone.
Thehorizontaldirectioninwhichthescrollbuttonsoperate
willdependonthePlayScrollsettingintheTrackView
Setupdialogbox.
Setup button
WhenyoupresstheSetupbutton,theTrackViewSetup
dialogboxwillappear,allowingyoutospecifyhow
informationwillbedisplayedinthetrackviewarea.
Green:ControlChange,PolyAfter,AfterTouch
Thelocationofaneventisindicatedbyasolidlineorsolid
color,andbyashadedareaforthedurationthattheeffect
continues.Theshadedareaisnotshownifthelocation
containingtheeventisnotdisplayedinthetrackviewarea.
Yellow:Pitchbend
:Systemexclusivemessage
Red:Programchange
Data exists
Time Scale
No data
[Close, Wide]
Thisspecifiesthescaleforthetimeaxisofthetrackview
area.
Close:Forexample,thescreenwillshow4or5measuresof
a4/4timesignature.
Thesettingsinthisdialogboxwillbeinitializedwhen
youturnoffthepower.
Wide:Forexample,thescreenwillshow8or9measuresof
a4/4timesignature.
Track No.
Play Scroll
Thisspecifiestheorderofthedisplayedtracks.Normally,
Track01Track16areshownfor0116.Youcanusethisto
changetheorderifthetracksyouwanttoseearefarapart.
Thisspecifieshowthetrackviewareawillscrollduring
playback.
Note Display
[oct.Layer, All Notes, C-1~...G#8~, Auto]
Thisspecifieshownoteeventswillbedisplayed.
[Sweep, Crawl]
Sweep:Whenthelocationbar(theverticalyellowline)
reachestheendofthetrackviewarea,thenextmeasureand
thelocationbarwillmovetotheleft.
Crawl:Thetrackviewareawillmovemeasurebymeasure.
Thelocationbarwillstayinafixedlocation.
octLayer:Noteeventsofalloctaveswillbedisplayed
togetherinaoneoctaveregion.Forexample,noteevents
141
Sequencer mode
Note:Thissettingalsospecifieshowmovementwilloccur
whenyoupressthedisplayscrollbuttonsintheleft/right
directionwhileediting.
[Track name]
Here,youcanrenametheMIDItracks.
Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthedialogbox,andinput
thedesiredcharacters.Youcanenterupto24characters.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEditingnameson
page 91oftheOperationguide.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:StepRecordingseep.167
3:EventEditseep.169
4:PianoRollseep.171
5:SetSongLengthseep.176
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
6:EraseTrackseep.176
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
7:CopyTrackseep.176
2:StepRecordingseep.167
8:BounceTrackseep.177
3:EventEditseep.169
9:EraseMeasureseep.177
4:PianoRollseep.171
10:DeleteMeasureseep.177
5:SetSongLengthseep.176
11:InsertMeasureseep.178
6:EraseTrackseep.176
12:RepeatMeasureseep.178
7:CopyTrackseep.176
13:CopyMeasureseep.179
8:BounceTrackseep.177
14:MoveMeasureseep.179
9:EraseMeasureseep.177
15:CreateControlDataseep.180
10:DeleteMeasureseep.177
16:EraseControlDataseep.181
11:InsertMeasureseep.178
17:Quantizeseep.181
12:RepeatMeasureseep.178
18:Shift/EraseNoteseep.182
13:CopyMeasureseep.179
19:ModifyVelocityseep.183
14:MoveMeasureseep.179
20:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
15:CreateControlDataseep.180
21:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.
164
16:EraseControlDataseep.181
22:CreateExclusiveDataseep.183
18:Shift/EraseNoteseep.182
23:EraseExclusiveDataseep.184
19:ModifyVelocityseep.183
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
20:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
17:Quantizeseep.181
21:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
22:CreateExclusiveDataseep.183
23:EraseExclusiveDataseep.184
62c
Here,youcanassignanametoeachtrack.
142
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
SEQ P7: ARP/DT (Arpeggiator/DrumTrack) 71: ARP Setup T0108, 72: ARP Setup T0916
[Off, A, B]
ThisindividuallyassignsarpeggiatorAorarpeggiatorBto
eachtrack18,916.WhentheARPbuttonisturnedon,the
arpeggiatorspecifiedforeachtrackwillrun,subjecttothe
ArpeggiatorRunA,Bsettingsandthesettingsmadehere.
Off:Neitherarpeggiatorwilloperate.
A:EnablesArpeggiatorA.UsetheArpeggiatorApageto
selectthearpeggiopatternandsettheparameters.
B:EnablesArpeggiatorB.UsetheArpeggiatorBpageto
selectthearpeggiopatternandsettheparameters.
Fortracksthatyouwishtorecordinrealtime,selecteither
arpeggiatorAorB.Ifyouspecifyanarpeggiatorfortwoor
moretracks,thearpeggiatorwillplayeachofthetracksyou
specify.
YoucansetAandBtotwodifferentMIDIchannels,and
controlonefromthekeyboardandtheotherfroman
externalMIDIdeviceconnectedtoMIDIIN.Youcanalso
usemultitrackrecording(MultiREC)tosimultaneously
recordthenotedatathatisgeneratedfromthetwo
arpeggiators.
Example 1)
Ontracks1and2,setMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c)to01and
Status(Seq31(2)c)toINT.AssignarpeggiatorAtotrack1
andarpeggiatorBtotrack2,andcheckArpeggiatorRunA,
B.InTrackSelect,chooseTrack01.
WhenthearpeggiatorKeySyncisoff,youcanturnonthe
ARPbuttonandplaythekeyboardtostartthearpeggiator
duringtheprecountbeforerealtimerecordingbegins.That
way,thearpeggiatorperformancewillberecordedfromthe
beginningofthepatternwhenrecordingstarts.
WiththeARPbuttonoff,playthekeyboardandtracks1and
2willsoundsimultaneously.
WhenMIDIClockissettoExternalMIDIorExternal
USB,clockmessagestransmittedfromanexternalMIDI
devicecanperformthesametypeofcontrol.
WhenyouturnontheARPbuttonandplaythekeyboard,
arpeggiatorAwilloperatefortrack1andarpeggiatorBwill
operatefortrack2.
Eveninthiscase,youcanstart/stopusingtheKROMEs
START/STOP(
)button.
Arpeggiator
Assign
Trigger
= Ch1
Trigger
= Ch1
71
Menu
71b
71c
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
Pattern - A
Track1
MIDI Ch=1ch
Status=INT
Pattern - A
Track2
MIDI Ch=1ch
Status=INT
Pattern - B
Pattern - B
Example 2)
Fortracks1,2and3,settheMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c)to
01,02,and03respectively,andsetStatus(Seq31(2)c)to
INT.AssignarpeggiatorAtotracks1and2,andarpeggiator
Btotrack3.ChecktheArpeggiatorRunA,Bsetting.
InTrackSelect,chooseTrack01.
PlayingthekeyboardwhentheARPbuttonisoffwill
playthesoundassignedtotrack1.
PlayingthekeyboardwhentheARPbuttonisonwill
causearpeggiatorAtooperatefortracks1and2,and
producesoundforbothtracks.
InTrackSelect,chooseTrack02.
PlayingthekeyboardwhentheARPbuttonisoffwill
playthesoundassignedtotrack2.
PlayingthekeyboardwhentheARPbuttonisonwill
causearpeggiatorAtooperatefortracks1and2,and
producesoundforbothtracks.
InTrackSelect,chooseTrack03.
PlayingthekeyboardwhentheARPbuttonisoffwill
playthesoundassignedtotrack3.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Location,Meter,
Tempo,TempoMode,SongSelect,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPR
onpage 109.
PlayingthekeyboardwhentheARPbuttonisonwill
causearpeggiatorBtooperatefortrack3,andplaythe
soundassignedtotrack3.
143
Sequencer mode
Alternatively,youcouldchooseTrack01inTrackSelect
torunarpeggiatorAfortracks1and2,andusean
externalMIDIdeviceconnectedtotheKROMEsMIDIIN
tosendnotedatatoMIDIchannel3toplayarpeggiatorB.
73: ArpeggiatorA,
74: ArpeggiatorB
Arpeggiator
Assign
Trigger
= Ch1, Ch2
Arpeggiator
A
Pattern - A
Trigger
= Ch3
Arpeggiator
B
Pattern - B
Track1
MIDI Ch=1ch
Status=INT
Pattern - A
Track2
MIDI Ch=2ch
Status=INT
Pattern - A
Track3
MIDI Ch=3ch
Status=INT
Pattern - B
73
Menu
73a
Thearpeggiatorcannotbetriggeredbythenotes
playedbythesequencer.
73b
IfthetrackStatus(Seq31(2)c)issettoINTorBTH,
tracks116towhicharpeggiatorAorBareassigned
willbesoundedbythenotedatageneratedbythe
arpeggiator,regardlessoftheMIDIChannel(Seq3
1(2)c)settingofthattrack.IfthetrackStatusissetto
BTH,EXT,orEX2,thetrackwilltransmitMIDInote
dataontheMIDIChannelofthattrack.
73c
Inthiscase,arpeggiatorAorBwillbetriggeredbythe
MIDIChannelofanytrack116towhichthe
correspondingarpeggiatorisassigned.
IftheLocalControlOn(GlobalP1:11a)isturnedOFF,
thearpeggiatorwillnotbetriggeredbynotedatafrom
thekeyboard.Itwillbetriggeredbynotedatareceived
atMIDIIN.Ifyouwishtorecordjustthetriggernotes
onanexternalsequencerandruntheKROMEs
arpeggiatorinthisway,turnLocalControlOFF.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Location,Meter,
Tempo,TempoMode,SongSelect,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPR
onpage 109.
Ifyouwantthenotedatageneratedbythearpeggiator
toberecordedontheexternalsequencer,turnLocal
ControlON,andturnofftheechobackfunctionofthe
externalsequencer.(seep.368)
Pattern*
[P0...P4, U0000(INT)...U0899(INT),
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)]
Octave*
[1, 2, 3, 4]
Arpeggiator Run A, B
[Off, On]
WhentheARPbuttonison,thearpeggiator(s)thatare
checkedherewillfunctionforthetrack(s)towhichtheyare
assignedbyArpeggiatorAssign.
Whenthearpeggiatorison,AandBcanbeturnedon/off
independently.
Resolution*
[ , , , , , , , ]
Gate
Velocity
[000...100%, Step]
[001...127, Key, Step]
Swing
V
[100...+100%]
Sort*
[Off, On]
Latch*
[Off, On]
Key Sync.*
[Off, On]
3:DeleteSongseep.163
Keyboard*
[Off, On]
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
Thesearethearpeggiatorparametersforthesong.
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP7:ARP/DT
(Arpeggiator/DrumTrack)onpage 53.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
Theseparameterscanalsobesetfrom05(6)c:
ArpeggiatorA(B).
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
11:CopyfromProgramseep.101
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
12:CopyArpeggiatorseep.66
2:RenameSongseep.163
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
144
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.101
12:CopyArpeggiatorseep.103
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
Thesesettingsspecifythenoteandvelocityrangesthatwill
operatearpeggiatorsAandB.
75
Menu
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
9:GMInitializeseep.165
75a
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
75b
11:CopyfromProgramseep.101
75c
12:CopyArpeggiatorseep.66
75d
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
11b
Formoreinformation,pleasesee01(2)a:Location,Meter,
Tempo,TempoMode,SongSelect,TrackSelect,Reso,RPPR
onpage 109.
11c
11
Menu
TheparametersfortheDrumTrackfunctionarestructured
inthesamewayasinCombinationmode.AssigntheDrum
Trackprogramtothedesiredtrack116.
However,whileacombinationtriggerstheDrumTrack
patternontheglobalMIDIchannel,asongtriggersthe
DrumTrackpatternontheMIDIchannelspecifiedbyDrum
PatternInput.NormallyyoullsetthistoTch.WiththeTch
setting,theMIDIchannelofthetrackselectedbyTrack
Selectwillautomaticallybeusedasthetriggerchannel.
[C1...G9]
Bottom Key
[C1...G9]
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)thatwilloperate
arpeggiatorA(B).TopKeyspecifiestheupperlimit,and
BottomKeyspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Top Velocity
[001...127]
Bottom Velocity
[001...127]
Specifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwilloperatearpeggiator
A(B).TopVelocityspecifiestheupperlimit,andBottom
Velocityspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)andvelocitiesthatwill
operatearpeggiatorA/B.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenoteandvelocityvaluesby
holdingdownaneditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
akey(seeOGp.10).
InSequencermodeyoucanusetheDrumTrackfunction
whilerealtimerecordingasongtrackorpattern.
Thenoteon/offdatatransmittedbytheDrumTrackpattern
canberecordedaseventsinatrackorpattern.
Youcantusenotedatafromtheinternalsequencerasa
triggertostartpatternsfortheDrumTrackfunction.
WhenyouveusedtheDrumTrackfunctionwithaprogram
orcombinationtocomeupwithanideaforasong,youcan
thenusetheAutoSongSetupfunctiontoimmediatelystart
realtimerecording(seep.106).
145
Sequencer mode
SetthistomatchtheMIDIchanneloftheMIDItrackfor
whichyouveassignedthedrumprogram.
MIDInoteononthesameMIDIchannel,thedrumpattern
willstartaccordingtotheSyncsetting.
IfyouveselectedStartImmediately,theDRUM
TRACKbuttonwillalwaysbesavedintheOFFstate.
IfthetracksStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2,notedataetc.ofthe
DrumTrackpatternwillbetransmitted.
Iflocalcontrol(LocalControlOnGlobalP1:11a)ison,
playingtheKROMEskeyboardwillnotmaketheinternal
soundgeneratorproducesound,norcanthekeyboard
triggerthearpeggiatorordrumtrack.However,theycanbe
triggeredbynoteonmessagesfromMIDIIN.
[Preset, User]
[(Preset): P000...605, (User): U000...U999]
Contents
P000
Off
P000...605
Presetdrumpatterns
U000...U999
Foruser/preloadeddrumpatterns
U000U999canbestoreuserpatterns.Patternsyoucreate
inSequencermodecanbeconvertedintouserdrum
patterns.(seep.188)
Shift
[24...+00...+24]
Thistransposesthedrumpatterninsemitonesteps.This
meansthattheinstrumentsplayedbythepatternwill
change.
MIDI Channel
Input
On:Thedrumpatternwillsynchronizetothecurrently
runningarpeggiator.
Note:UseP73(4)c:ArpeggiatorA(B)SetupKeySyncto
specifywhetherarpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe
currentlyrunningdrumpattern.
Latch
[Off, On]
Off:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(LEDblinking),the
patternwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboard(noteon).The
patternwillstopwhenyoureleasethekeyboard(noteoff).
On:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(LEDblinking),the
patternwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboard(noteon).The
patternwillcontinuewhenyoureleasethekeyboard(note
off).ThepatternwillstopwhenyouturntheDRUM
TRACKbuttonoff(LEDdark).
Zone:
Keyboard
Bottom
Top
[C1...G9]
[C1...G9]
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.
[01...16, Tch]
Itspecifiestherangeofkeysthatwillstartthedrumpattern.
Velocity:
Tch:TheMIDIchannelthattriggersthedrumpatternwill
automaticallybesettotheMIDIchannel(Seq31(2)c)ofthe
trackchoseninTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a).
Bottom
Top
IfTriggerModeisWaitKBDTrig,andyousetTrackSelect
toatrackforwhichtheMIDIchannelyouspecifyhereis
selected,thekeyboardwilltriggerthedrumpattern.MIDI
INmessagesofthematchingMIDIchannelwillalsotrigger
thedrumtrack.
[01...16, Tch]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwilltransmittheMIDI
dataofthedrumpattern.Thedrumpatternwillsound
usingtheprogramofthetrackthatisassignedtothisMIDI
channel.
Tch:TheMIDIchanneloutputwillautomaticallybesetto
matchtheMIDIchannel(Seq31(2)c)ofthetrackselected
byTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a).
Whetherthepatterndatawillbeoutputtoanexternal
devicewilldependontheStatussettingofthetrackthat
matchestheOutputMIDIchannel.
77b: Trigger
[001...127]
[001...127]
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.
Itspecifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwillstartthedrum
pattern.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenoteandvelocityvaluesby
holdingdownaneditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
akey(seeOGp.10).
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:RenameSongseep.163
3:DeleteSongseep.163
4:CopyFromSongseep.163
5:LoadTemplateSongseep.163
6:SaveTemplateSong(SaveasUserTemplateSong)
seep.164
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
StartImmediately:WhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACK
buttontoturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillstart
accordingtotheSyncsetting.WhenyoupressON/OFF
again,thedrumpatternwillstop.
9:GMInitializeseep.165
WaitKBDTrig:WhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACKbutton
toturniton(LEDlit),thedrumpatternwillwaittostart.If
yousetTrackSelecttoatrackthatmatchestheMIDI
ChannelInputsetting,andplaythekeyboard,orreceivea
146
Off:Thedrumpatternwillnotsynchronizetothecurrently
runningarpeggiator,butwillstartimmediately.
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwilltriggerthedrum
pattern.
Output
[Off, On]
ThisisvalidifTriggerModeisWaitKBDTrig.
Thisselectsthedrumpattern.
Preset/User No.
Sync
10:CopyFromCombi(CopyfromCombination)seep.166
11:CopyfromProgramseep.101
12:CopyDrumTrackseep.65
13:EraseDrumTrackPatternseep.66
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
Synchronizing the drum track with the arpeggiator function, Sequencer mode songs, patterns,
and RPPR performance
IfyouwanttheDrumTrackpatterntoplayorberecordedin
synchronizationwiththecurrentlyoperatingarpeggiator
function,currentlyplayingsong,pattern,orRPPR
performance,turnTriggerSyncon.
TriggerSyncOff:IftheTriggerModesettingisStart
Immediately,theDrumTrackpatternwillbetriggeredthe
momentyoupresstheDRUMTRACKbutton.Ifthisissetto
WaitKBDTrig,theDrumTrackpatternwillbetriggeredthe
momentyouplaythekeyboard.Itwillnotsynchronizeto
thecurrentlyoperatingarpeggiatorfunctionortothe
currentlyplayingsong,pattern,orRPPR.
TriggerSyncOn:Triggeringwillsynchronizetothe
currentlyplayingsong,patternorRPPRperformanceatthe
beginningofthenextmeasure.Triggeringwillsynchronize
tothecurrentlyoperatingarpeggiator(inSequencermodeif
thesongorpatternisstopped)onthenextbeat.
Note:Ifyouwanttosynchronizethearpeggiatortothe
currentlyrunningDrumTrackfunction,settheKeySync
parameter(Prog/Combi/SeqP7).
Note:IfyouwanttosynchronizetheRPPRpattern
performancetothecurrentlyrunningDrumTrackfunction,
settheSyncparameter(SeqP10:Pattern/RPPRRPPRSetup
page)toBeatorMeasure.
IfyouwanttheDrumTrackfunctiontostart
simultaneouslywiththebeginningofrecording,pressthe
DRUMTRACKbuttonduringtheprecountbefore
recording(iftheTriggerModeissettoStartImmediately)
orplaythekeyboard(ifTriggerModeisWaitKBDTrig).
TheDrumTrackswillnotbetriggeredimmediately,but
willbetriggeredinsynchronizationwiththesequencer
themomentrecordingstarts.
Slave operation
TheKROMEssequencercanbemadetorunin
synchronizationwiththeclockandrealtimecommands
receivedfromanexternalsequencer.ConnecttheMIDIOUT
ofyourexternalMIDIdevicetotheKROMEsMIDIIN,or
connecttheKROMEsUSBporttoyourcomputersUSB
port.
ConnecttheKROMEsMIDIINtoyourexternalMIDI
devicesMIDIOUT,orconnecttheKROMEsUSBconnector
toyourcomputersUSBport.
SetMIDIClock(Global,seep.199)toExternalMIDIor
ExternalUSB.TheKROMEwillsynchronizetoMIDIClock
andrealtimecommandmessagesitreceivesfromthe
connectedMIDIdevice.
Note:IftheKROMEissettoMIDIClock=Auto,itwillalso
synchronizetotheexternalMIDIdeviceinthesamewayif
MIDIrealtimeclockmessagesarebeingreceivedfromthe
externaldevice.
Sync settings
Key 1 on
Key 2 on
Key 1 off
Song
Patterns 1 and 2 are set to
Mode=Manual, and have
identical Sync settings
Sync: Off
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Sync: Beat
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Sync: Measure
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Master operation
TheKROMEsequencersclockdataandstart/stop
operationscanbeusedtosynchronizeandcontrolan
externalsequencer.
ConnecttheKROMEsMIDIOUTtoyourexternalMIDI
devicesMIDIIN,orconnecttheKROMEsUSBconnectorto
yourcomputersUSBport.
SetMIDIClock(Global11a)toInternal.Theconnected
externalMIDIdevicewillsynchronizetotheKROMEs
MIDIClock.
Note:ThesameappliesifMIDIClock=AutoandMIDI
Clockmessagesarebeingtransmitted.Fordetails,pleasesee
MIDIClock(MIDIClockSource)onpage 199.
147
Sequencer mode
Tip:Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedruminstrumentshave
thesameBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingsaccordingtotheir
type,asfollows.
Routeasoundtoaninserteffect
SnaresIFX1
Makedetailedsettingsforinserteffects
KicksIFX2
MakecommonLFOsettingsforeffects
OtherIFX3
FordetailsonInsertEffects,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
page 235.
Ifyouwanttoedittheseroutings,usetheDrumKitIFX
Patchmenucommand.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
DrumKitIFXPatchonpage 104.
Send1 (MFX1)
Send2 (MFX2)
81a
81b
81c
81d
Specifiesthebustowhichtheprogramoscillator(s)usedby
MIDItracks18and916willbesent.Youcanalsosetthe
sendlevelstothemastereffectsfromthispage.
Foreachtrack,theseparameterssetthesendleveltomaster
effects1and2.ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBus(IFX/
Output)SelectissettoL/RorOff.WhenIFX15are
selected,thesendlevelstomastereffects1and2aresetby
theSend1andSend2parametersoftheIFXpage,andare
appliedafterthesoundhaspassedthroughIFX15.
TheSend1and2settingyouspecifyhereareusedduring
playbackorrecordingfromthebeginningofthesong.Ifyou
modifythesesettingsduringrecording,yourchangeswill
berecordedasperformancedata;thesendamountswill
changeaccordinglyduringplayback.Youcanalsomodify
thesesettingsduringplayback.HoweverifSend1and2
datahasbeenrecorded,thesettingswillchangeaccording
totherecordeddata.
IfStatus(Seq31(2)c)iseitherINTorBTH,CC#93and
CC#91cancontrolsend1and2respectivelyandchange
theirsettings.Whenyouswitchsongsorreturntothe
beginningofasong,trackswhoseStatusisEXT,EX2or
BTHwilltransmitthesesettingsviaMIDI.Thisdatawill
betransmittedontheMIDIchannelofeachtrackasset
byMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c).Theactualsendlevelis
determinedbymultiplyingthevalueoftheseparameters
withthesendlevelsettingsoftheprogramusedbythe
track(Send1andSend2,Prog81d).(SeeGlobalP1:
MIDI,SEQModeTrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
[000...127]
[000...127]
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
81(2)d: Routing1
Bus (IFX/Output) Select
3:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetrackprograms
oscillator(s).
5:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
6:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
L/R:OutputtotheL/Rbus.
7:PutEffectSettingtoTrackseep.184
IFX1,2,3,4,5:OutputtotheIFX15buses.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
Off:ThetrackwillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,orIFX1
5buses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwanttheprograms
oscillatoroutputofthetracktobeconnectedinseriestoa
mastereffect.UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)to
specifythesendlevels.
Tip:Youcancreateawidevarietyofroutingsbyusingeach
tracksBus(IFX/Output)SelectandtheChaintoandChain
settings(Seq83b)thatfollowtheinserteffect.
DKit:Youcanselectthisonlyifthespecifiedprogramisa
drumprogram(OscillatorModeDrumsorDoubleDrums).
TheBus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControlBus,Send1,and
Send2settings(Global55b)foreachkeyoftheselected
drumkitwillbeused.Checkthissettingifyouwantto
applyanindividualinserteffecttoeachdruminstrument.
148
4:DrumKitIFXPatchseep.104
Insert Effect:
83a
IFX1...4
IFX5
[000...193]
[000...171]
[Off, On]
Chain:
83b
IFX1: Chain to
IFX2: Chain to
IFX3: Chain to
[IFX2...IFX5]
[IFX3...IFX5]
[IFX4...IFX5]
IFX1: Chain
IFX2: Chain
IFX3: Chain
IFX4: Chain
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
[Off, On]
Pan:#8:
83b: Insert Effect
Hereyoucanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1through
5,itson/offstatus,chaining,andadjustthepostIFXmixer
settings.Forinserteffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalways
stereoinandout.Theinput/outputconfigurationofthe
effectsound(Wet)dependsontheeffecttype.For
descriptionsoftheindividualeffects,pleaseseeEffect
Guide,beginningonpage 235.
ThefollowingparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee82:InsertFXSetupon
page 592.
However,unlikeinProgrammode,inserteffectdynamic
modulation(Dmod)andthepostIFXPan:#8,Send1,and
Send2arecontrolledontheMIDIchannelspecifiedbyCh
(Seq84(5)(6)(7)(8)a).Thecontrolchangesusedarethesame
asinProgrammode.
Thepan(CC#8),send1and2settingsyoumakeherewillbe
usedwhenthesongisplayedorrecordedfromthe
beginning.Ifyouchangethesettingswhilerecordinga
MIDItrack,thechangeswillberecordedaspartofthe
musicaldata,andthesettingswillchangewhenthedatais
playedback.Youcanalsochangethesesettingsduring
playback.Howeverifpan(CC#8),send1,or2datahasbeen
recorded,thesettingswillchangeaccordingly.
IfStatus(Seq31(2)c)iseitherINTorBTH,CC#8,
CC#93,andCC#91canbereceivedtocontrolthepan
followingtheinserteffect,send1,orsend2
respectively,andchangetheirsettings.Whenyou
switchsongsorreturntothebeginningofthesong,
trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2willtransmit
thesesettingsviaMIDI.Thisdatawillbetransmitted
ontheMIDIchannelsspecifiedintheIFX15pages
(Seq84(5)(6)(7)(8)a).(SeeGlobalP1:MIDI,SEQMode
TrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
[L000...C064...R127]
Bus:
Bus (Bus Select)
Ctrl (FX Control Bus)
[Off, L/R]
[Off, 1, 2]
Send1/2:
Send1
Send2
[000...127]
[000...127]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee82:InsertFXSetupon
page 59.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
3:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
4:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
5:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
6:PutEffectSettingtoTrackseep.184
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
149
Sequencer mode
84: IFX1
84
Menu
Note:Songssavetheeffectsparametersettings,butthey
dontsavethenumberoftheselectedEffectPreset.Ifyou
selectanEffectPreset,savetheSongtomedia,andthenre
loadtheSong,theEffectPresetsettingwillrevertto
.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUsingEffectPresetson
page 60.
84a
IFX1 Parameters:
IFX Parameters
Here,youcansettheeffectparametersoftheinserteffect
youchoseintheP83:InsertFXSetuppage.
Here,youcanedittheparametersoftheinserteffect1you
selectedintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1
IFX5)onpage 240.
IFX On/Off
[Off, On]
Turnstheinserteffecton/off.ThisislinkedwiththeOn/Off
settingintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage.
Ch (Control Channel)
[Ch01...16, All-R]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic
modulation(Dmod)fortheinserteffect.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
3:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
4:WriteFXPresetseep.184
5:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
Ch01...Ch16:Theinserteffectwillbecontrolledonthe
specifiedMIDIchannel.
6:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
AllR:Thechannelofanytrackroutedthroughthiseffect
canbeusedtocontroltheeffect.(Channelsofeachrouted
trackwillbeindicatedby*.)
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
7:PutEffectSettingtoTrackseep.184
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthesettings
foranindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16userpresets
foreacheffecttype,inadditionto15rewritablefactory
presets.
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program,
Combination,Sequencer).
Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
storedwiththeSongyoudontneedtostorethemasan
EffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuseyour
favoritesettings.
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhileworkingon
aparticularSong,andthenlaterusethesameEffectPreset
inadifferentProgram,Combination,orSong.
P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheInsertFXSetup
page.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
P01P15:Presetdataissavedinthisarea.Werecommend
thatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15.
U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyourown
settings.
:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffector
selectedanewSong.Selectingthissettingfromthemenu
willnothaveanyeffect.
150
89
Menu
89b
89c
89d
Here,youcanspecifythebuses,andeffectcontrolbus,for
theoutputsoftracks18and916.
SEQ P8: Routing/IFX (Insert Effect) 89: FX Control T0108, 810: FX Control T0916
89(10)d: Routing2
Bus (IFX/Output) Select
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthe
oscillator(s).Thisisthesameparameterasinthe81:IFX
Routing1T0108andT0916pages.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBus(IFX/Output)Select
onpage 148.
FX Control Bus
[Off, 1, 2]
SendstheoutputofthetracktoanFXControlbus(two
channelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
UsetheFXControlbuseswhenyouwantaseparatesound
tocontroltheaudioinputofaneffect.YoucanusetwoFX
Controlbuses(eachisatwochannelmonobus)tocontrol
effectsinvariousways.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuseson
page 238.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
3:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
4:DrumKitIFXPatchseep.104
5:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
6:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
7:PutEffectSettingtoTrackseep.184
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
151
Sequencer mode
91c: TFX
TFX:
TFX
TFX On/Off
[000...171]
[Off, On]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePROGP9:MFX/TFX/LFO
(Master/TotalEffect/LFO)onpage 61.
91: Routing
9-1a
9-1b
9-1b
Master Volume
[000...127]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee91c:MasterVolumeon
page 62.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
9-1c
9-1d
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
Here,youcanspecifythetypeofmastereffectsandtotal
effect,andturnthemOn/Off.
4:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotaleffect
isinsertedintotheL/Rbus.
5:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee91:Routingonpage 61.
91b: MFX1, 2
MFX1:
MFX1
MFX1 On/Off
Return 1
[000...193]
[Off, On]
[000...127]
MFX2:
MFX2
MFX2 On/Off
Return 2
[000...171]
[Off, On]
[000...127]
Chain:
Chain On/Off
Chain Direction
Chain Level
[Off, On]
[MFX1MFX2, MFX2MFX1]
[000...127]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1onpage 62.
152
3:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
6:PutEffectSettingtoTrackseep.184
MFX1 Parameters
92: MFX1
Here,youcansettheeffectparametersoftheeffectyou
choseintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
92
Menu
92a
92b
Fordetailsontheindividualeffects,pleaseseetheEffect
Guideonpage 235.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
3:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
Here,youcanedittheparametersoftheeffectyouselected
forMFX1intheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOMFX1page.
4:WriteFXPresetseep.184
5:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
6:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
92a: MFX1
MFX1 On/Off
7:PutEffectSettingtoTrackseep.184
[Off, On]
Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Thisislinkedwiththeon/
offsettingintheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Ch (Control Channel)
[Ch01...16, G ch]
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic
modulation(Dmod)forthemastereffect.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
Ch01Ch16:ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeusedfor
control.
ThesepagesletyouedittheparametersofMasterEffect2
andtheTotalEffect.Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usethe
P9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a)willbeused
forcontrol.NormallyyouwillusetheGchsetting.
TheparametersofMFX2,TFXarethesameasforMFX1.For
moreinformation,pleasesee92:MFX1above.
P (Effect Preset)
[P00, P01...15, U00...15, ---------------]
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthesettings
foranindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16userpresets
foreacheffecttype,inadditionto15rewritablefactory
presets.
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program,
Combination,Sequence).
Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
storedwiththeCombinationyoudontneedtostorethem
asanEffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuseyour
favoritesettings.
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhileworkingon
aparticularCombination,andthenlaterusethesameEffect
PresetinadifferentProgram,Combination,orSong.
P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheP9:MFX/TFX/
LFORoutingpage.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
P01P15:Presetdataissavedinthisarea.Werecommend
thatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15.
U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyourown
settings.
:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffector
selectedanewSong.Selectingthissettingfromthemenu
willnothaveanyeffect.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeUsingEffectPresetson
page 60.
153
Sequencer mode
82
8a
82
8b
ThetwoCommonFXLFO1,2allowyoutosynchronize
LFObasedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchasphasers,
flangers,filters,andsoon.
TheCommonLFOscontrolonlythefrequency,MIDI
synchronization,andresetoptions;eachindividualeffect
stillhasitsownsettingsfortheLFOwaveformandphase.
Withintheindividualeffects,youcanchoosewhethertouse
oneoftheCommonLFOs,ortousetheindividualeffects
frequency,sync,and/orresetsettingsinstead.Thisisdone
viatheeffectsLFOTypeparameter;selectIndividualtouse
theeffectssettings,orCommon1or2tousetheCommon
LFOs.
[Ch01...Ch16, Gch]
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamic
modulation(Dmod)forCommonLFO1and2.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a)willbeused
forcontrol.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Sync (Reset)
[Off, On]
Source (Dmod Source)
[List of Dmod Sources]
Frequency
[0.02...20.00 (Hz)]
MIDI/Tempo Sync
[Off, On]
BPM
[MIDI, 40.00...300.00]
Base Note
[ , 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , 3 , , ]
Times
[01...32]
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee95a:CommonFXLFO1
onpage 63.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:CopyInsertEffectseep.66
3:SwapInsertEffectseep.67
4:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
5:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
6:PutEffectSettingtoTrackseep.184
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
154
Song Select
Youcanusepresetpatterns,anduserpatterns.
Presetpatternsprovidepatternsthataresuitablefor
drumtracks;youcanselectthesepatternsfromanysong.
Thereareonehundreduserpatternsforeachsong;you
cancreateandstoreyourownpatternsasdesired.
Track Select
Youcancreatethedesiredperformancedataforatrack
byusingthemenucommandsPutToTrackorCopyTo
Tracktoplaceorcopypatternsintoatrack.Formore
information,pleaseseePutToTrackonpage 187.
TheRPPRfunctionletsyouassignpatternstodifferent
keysandthentriggerthesepatternsbypressingnoteson
thekeyboardandrecordtheresultontothetrackin
realtime.Formoreinformation,pleasesee103:RPPR
Setuponpage 157.
Youcancreateuserdrumtrackpatterns.
UserpatternsinSequencermodecanbeconvertedusing
themenucommandConverttoDrumTrkPattern.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeConverttoDrumTrk
Patternonpage 188.
Note:UserpatternsinSequencermodearenotsaved
internally;youmustsavethemonanSDcard,andload
themeachtimeafterpoweringon.Ifyouconvertuser
patternstouserdrumtrackpatterns,theywillbepreserved
ininternalmemoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff,
meaningthatyoucanmanagethemalongwithprograms
andcombinations.
[000...127: name]
Selectsasong.
Theuserpatternwillbecreatedinthesongyouselect.
Selectsthetrackthatwillbeusedtorecord/playthepattern
data.Thepatterndatawillberecorded/playedusingthe
settingsofthetrackyouselect.Theareaattherightdisplays
theprogrambank,number,andnamefortheselectedtrack.
SettingsoftheMasterTrackwillbeignored.Themost
recentlyselectedTrack0116willbeused.
Popup
Song Select
Track
Select
Pattern
Bank
Resolution
Tempo Metronome
Pattern Select
Remove
Data
3. UsePatternBankandPatternSelecttoselecttheUser
patternandthedesiredpatternnumber.
4. SelectthemenucommandPatternParameter,andin
thedialogbox,specifythenumberofmeasuresandthe
timesignatureofthepattern.
10-1b
5. Checkthetempoin .
10-1c
6. Ifyouwanttorecordinrealtime,setResotospecifythe
resolution,andpresstheREC( )buttonandthenthe
)buttontobeginrecording.
START/STOP(
Here,youcanrecordandeditpatterns,andassignthemto
tracksofasong.Thefollowingtypesofpatternoperations
areavailable.
Userpatternscanberecordedinrealtime(aswellas
recordedfromperformancesgeneratedbythe
arpeggiator),steprecorded,orcreatedusingtheGet
FromMIDITrackcommandorCopyPatterncommand.
Youcanalsocopyapresetpatterntoauserpatternand
editit.(Youcantdirectlyeditapresetpattern.)
Presetpatternsanduserpatternscanbeplacedinor
copiedintoatrack.
Whenyoufinishrecordingtotheendofthemeasures
specifiedbythePatternParameter,youwillreturntothe
firstmeasure,andcancontinuerecordingwhileadding
morematerial.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeLoopAll
Tracksonpage 117.
Ifyouwanttoperformsteprecording,selectthemenu
commandStepRecording(LoopType)toopenthedialog
box,andrecord.Formoreinformationonsteprecording
procedure,pleaseseeStepRecordingonpage 167and
StepRecording(LoopType)onpage 186.
7. Afterrecording,usethemenucommandsasdesiredto
editthepatternortheeventsinthepattern.
Youcanconvertuserpatternstodrumtrackpatterns.
[01...99]
Displaysthecurrentmeasurelocationoftheselected
pattern.
155
Sequencer mode
USED IN RPPR
ThisareaindicatestheRPPRinwhichtheselectedpatternis
used.Theassignedkeyandthespecifiedtrackareshown.
Reset value
Modulation1(CC#01)
00(zero)
Modulation2(CC#02)
00(zero)
Expression(CC#11)
127(max)
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
Ribboncontroller(CC#16)
64(center)
Damperswitch(CC#64)
00(zero)
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
Sostenutoswitch(CC#66)
00(zero)
Softswitch(CC#67)
00(zero)
3:EventEditseep.169
EGsustainlevel(CC#70)
64(center)
4:PianoRollseep.186
Resonancelevel(CC#71)
64(center)
5:PatternParameterseep.186
EGreleasetime(CC#72)
64(center)
6:ErasePatternseep.186
EGattacktime(CC#73)
64(center)
Lowpassfiltercutoff(CC#74)
64(center)
7:CopyPatternseep.186
EGdecaytime(CC#75)
64(center)
LFO1speed(CC#76)
64(center)
10:PutToTrackseep.187
LFO1depth(pitch)(CC#77)
64(center)
11:CopyToTrackseep.188
LFO1delay(CC#78)
64(center)
12:ConverttoDrumTrkPatternseep.188
FilterEGintensity(CC#79)
64(center)
13:LoadDrumTrackPatternseep.188
SW1modulation(CC#80)
00(zero)
SW2modulation(CC#81)
00(zero)
14:EraseDrumTrackPatternseep.189
Channelaftertouch
00(zero)
Pitchbender
00(zero)
[Preset, User]
Selectsthetypeofpattern.
IfPresetisselected,itwillnotbepossibletorecord.Youwill
beabletoselectandexecutetheCopyPattern,Bounce
Pattern,PutToTrack,andCopyToTrackmenucommands.
Pattern Select
[P000...605, U00...U99]
Selectsapattern.
UserpatternscanberenamedintheP10:Pattern/RPPR
PatternNamepage.
(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Specifiestheplaybacktempoofthepattern.Formore
information,pleasesee(Tempo)onpage 110.
Metronome
Specifieswhetherthemetronomewillsoundduring
recordingorplayback.Formoreinformation,pleasesee0
8c:MetronomeSetuponpage 119.
Remove Data
[Off, On]
On(checked):Unwantedperformancedatacanberemoved
duringpatternrecording.Theprocedureisthesameas
explainedinRemoveDataofLoopAllTracks.Formore
information,pleaseseeRemoveDataonpage 118.
156
2:StepRecording(LoopType)seep.186
8:BouncePatternseep.187
15:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
10-3
Menu
10-3a
10-3b
10-2a
[U00...U99]
Here,youcanrenamethepattern.Pressthetexteditbutton
toopenthedialogbox,andinputthename.Youcanenter
upto24characters.SeeEditingnamesonpage 117ofthe
Operationguide.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
2:StepRecording(LoopType)seep.186
3:EventEditseep.169
4:PianoRollseep.186
5:PatternParameterseep.186
6:ErasePatternseep.186
7:CopyPatternseep.186
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsfortheRPPR(Realtime
PatternPlay/Recording)function.RPPRletsyouassign
patternstoindividualkeys,andthenplaybackpatterns
simplybypressingindividualnotesonthekeyboard.This
performancecanberecordedinrealtime.
Foreachsong,youcanassigneitherapresetpatternora
userpatterntoeachofthe72keysintherangeC#2C8.For
eachkey,youcanspecifythepattern,tracknumber,and
howthepatternwillbeplayed.
KeysusedtoplaypatternsviaRPPRcannotbeusedfor
thearpeggiator.IfRPPRison,keystowhichapatternis
notassignedwillplaytheprogramofthetrackthats
selectedinTrackSelect.Inthiscase,thearpeggiator
willoperateifArpeggiatorA,orBisactive,and
assignedtothetrack.Notesgeneratedbythe
arpeggiatorwillnottriggertheRPPRfunction.
WhenLocalControlisOFF(LocalControlOnGlobal
11a),thekeyboardwillnottriggerRPPRpattern
playback,exceptvianotesreceivedattheMIDIINthat
matchthecurrentlyselectedtrackschannel.Ifyouhave
recordedonlythetriggernotesonanexternal
sequencerandwishtousetheplaybackfromthe
externalsequencertotriggerRPPRpatternson
KROME,setLocalControlOFF.
IfyouwantthenotedatageneratedbyRPPRtobe
recordedbytheexternalsequencer,setLocalControl
ON,andturnofftheechobackfunctionoftheexternal
sequencer.SeeLocalControlOnsettingsonpage 359.
IntheRPPRSetuppage,RPPRisturnedon
automatically.Thiswillbethesameresultaswhenthe
RPPRcheckbox(Seq01(2)a)ineachpageischecked.
8:BouncePatternseep.187
9:GetFromTrackseep.187
Song Select
10:PutToTrackseep.187
11:CopyToTrackseep.188
Selectsthedesiredsong.TheRPPRsettingswillbeassigned
tothesongyouselecthere.
12:ConverttoDrumTrkPatternseep.188
(Tempo)
13:LoadDrumTrackPatternseep.188
Specifiestheplaybacktempoofthepatterns.(Seq01(2)a)
14:EraseDrumTrackPatternseep.189
15:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
Track Select
[000...127: name]
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
[Track01...16, Master Track]
WhenyouplayakeythatisnotassignedtoRPPR,itwill
soundusingthesettingsofthetrackthatsselectedinTrack
Select.Usethistoselectthetrackthatyouwanttoplay
togetherwithRPPR,ortoauditionapatternbeforeyou
assignit.Theprogrambank,number,andnameofthe
selectedtrackisshownattheright.
EachRPPRpatternwillbeginplayingwhenyoupressthe
assignedkey,regardlessoftheTrackSelectsetting.Itwill
soundusingthesettingsofthetrackselectedinTrack
Name.
TheMasterTracksettingisignored.Thelastselected
Track0116willbeused.
157
Sequencer mode
SEQ:Thepatternwillsynchronizetothemeasuresofthe
sequencersong.
Sync settings
Key 1 on
Assigned keys
Key 2 on
Key 1 off
Song
Selected key
C4
Key range
Key range
Pattern 2
[C#2...C8]
SpecifiesthekeytowhichyouwanttoassignanRPPR
pattern.
Thefollowingparameterswillapplytothekeythatyou
selecthere.
Note:Youcanalsosetthenoteandvelocityvaluesby
holdingdownaneditcellortheENTERbuttonandplaying
akey(seeOGp.10).
Assign
Off(unchecked):Thatkeywillsoundthecurrentlyselected
trackatthecorrespondingpitch,justasinnormalSequencer
mode.
Mode
Specifiesthewayinwhichthepatternassignedtothe
specifiedKEYwillbeplayed.
Once:Whenyoupressthekey,thecompletepatternwill
playoncetotheendandthenstop.
Manual:Thepatternwillcontinuerepeatingaslongasyou
continueholdingthekey,andwillstopassoonasyou
releasethekey.
Endless:Thepatternwillcontinuerepeatingevenafteryou
releasethekey.Tostopthepatternplayback,pressanynote
belowC2,orpressthesamekeyonceagain.
Same key, or C2
Key-on
Key-off
START
STOP
Once
START
STOP
Endless
Shift
[12...+12]
Adjuststheplaybackpitchofthepatternforthespecified
KEYinsemitonestepsoverarangeof1octave.
Withasettingof0,thepatternwillbeplayedatitsoriginal
pitch.
Sync
Specifiesthewayinwhichthepatternplaybackwillbe
synchronizedwhenyoupressthespecifiedKEY.
Off:Thepatternwillbeginplayingatthemomentyoupress
thenote.
Beat:Thepatternwillsynchronizetothebeatoftheother
patternsthatarealreadyinplay.Thissettingissuitable
whenyouwishtoplayphrasepatternsinunison.
Measure:Thepatternwillsynchronizetothemeasuresof
thepatternthatwasstartedbythefirstkey.Thissettingis
suitableforrhythm,bassordrumpatterns.
158
Sync: Measure
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Sync: SEQ
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
WhenBeatorMeasureareselected,patternplaybackwill
beginwhenyoupressthefirstkey.Thesecondand
subsequentpatternsthataretriggeredfromthekeyboard
willsynchronizetothepatternthatwasstartedbythe
firstkey;withasettingofBeattheywillsynchronizein
stepsofabeat,andwithasettingofMeasuretheywill
synchronizeinstepsofameasure.
WhenSEQisselected,thepatternwillplaybackin
synchronizationwiththemeasuresofthesequencersong.
Thepatternwillsynchronizewiththecurrentlyplaying
song,soyoumuststartthesongbeforeyouplaynoteson
thekeyboard.
Beat,Measure,andSEQwillcausethepatterntostart
immediatelyifyouplaythekeywithinathirtysecond
noteofthetimingoftherespectivebeatormeasure,butif
youplaythekeylaterthanthis,thestartofthepattern
willbedelayedbyabeat.
SetthistoSEQifyouwantpatternplaybackbyRPPRto
besynchronizedtothecurrentlyrunningarpeggiator.
STOP
Manual
START
Pattern 2
[Off, On]
On(checked):WhenyouplaythekeyspecifiedbyKEY,the
patternselectedinPatternwillbetriggered.
Key-on
Sync: Beat
Pattern 1
Note:Ifyouwantthearpeggiatorperformanceto
synchronizetothecurrentlyrunningRPPRplayback,turn
OffthearpeggiatorsKeySync.Thearpeggiatorwill
synchronizetothebeatbasedontheRPPRplaybacktiming.
Note:Ifyouwantthedrumtrackpatternperformanceto
synchronizetothecurrentlyrunningRPPRplayback,turn
OnthedrumtrackfunctionsSync(ineachmode,theDrum
TrackpageTrigger).Thedrumtrackwillbetriggeredat
intervalsofonemeasureattheRPPRplaybacktiming.
Pattern Bank
Pattern
[Preset, User]
[P000...605, U00...99]
SelectstheRPPRpatternforthekeyselectedinKEY.Ifthe
selecteduserpatterncontainsnomusicaldata,therewillbe
nosoundwhenyoupressthatkey.
Track
[Track 01...16]
SelectsthetrackthatwillbeusedfortheRPPRpattern
selectedfortheKEY.Whenyouplaythekey,thepatternwill
beplayedaccordingtothesettingsofthetrackyouselect
here.YoucanmaketracksettingsintheP0:Play/RECP5:
MIDIFilterpages.
WhenyourecordinrealtimewiththeRPPNfunction
turnedon,thedatawillberecordedonthetrackyouselect
here.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeRecordinganRPPR
performance.
Informationshowsthebank,name,andnumberofthe
programthatsselectedforTrack.
Information
Thisareashowsthebank,name,andnumberofthe
programthatsselectedforthetrack.
Revert
Whenyoupressthisbutton,thePattern(PatternBank),
PatternSelect,andTracksettingsofthelasteditedKEYfor
whichAssignwascheckedwillbecopiedtothese
parametersofthecurrentlyselectedKEY.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
159
Sequencer mode
Tempo Mode
[Auto, Manu]
TheKROMEallowsyoutocreatetwentycuelists.Asingle
cuelistcanholdupto99songs.
Auto:Playbackwillfollowthetempospecifiedbyeachsong
inthecuelist.Itwillnotbepossibletochangethe (Tempo)
settingduringplayback.
Eachunitinacuelistiscalledastep,andyoucanspecify
asongnumberandarepeat(numberofrepetitions)foreach
step.
Manu(Manual):Tempospecifiedinthesongwillbe
ignored,andplaybackwillusethetempospecifiedabove
for (Tempo).
Forexampleyoucouldcreateeachpartofasong(intro,
melodyA,melodyB,break,solobacking,endingetc.)asan
individualsong,anduseacuelisttoplaytheintrotwice,
melodyAfourtimes,melodyBfourtimes,thebreaktwice,
melodyAfourtimes...etc.toproducetheentiresong.In
caseswhenyouwishtochangethestructureofthesong,
thisCueListfunctioncanhelpyouworkmoreefficiently.
ThemenucommandConverttoSongletsyoutransformthe
songsinacuelistintoasinglesong.
Forexample,youcanuseacuelisttocreatethebacking,
convertthecuelisttoasong,andthenaddsolophraseson
unusedtracks.
[C00...C19: name]
Selectsthecuelistthatyouwishtoplay.
Whenusingacuelisttoplaysongs,youmustfirstloadthe
necessarydataintointernalmemory,eitherfrommedia,or
byaMIDIdatadumpfromanexternalsequencer.
SelectingacuelistinthispagewillcauseaSongSelect
message(correspondingtothecuelistnumber)and
SongPositionPointermessagetobetransmitted.When
aSongSelectmessageisreceivedfromthespecified
source,thecuelistwillbeswitched.
Track Select
[Track01...Track16: name]
Selectsthetrackthatyouwishtoplaymanuallyfromthe
keyboardalongwiththeplaybackofthecuelist.
Whileacuelistisplaying,youcanplayalongusingthe
tracksettingsandmusicaldataofthesongselectedbythe
currentStep(Seq111b).
Thetrackselectedherecanbespecifiedindependentlyfor
eachsonginthecuelist.
Whenyouareplayingbackdifferentsongsinsuccession,
andwanttoplayalongusingthesameprogramonthe
keyboard,setTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a)tothesametrack
andprogramforeachstep.
11-1b
Attherightyoucanviewtheprogrambank,program
number,andnameoftheprogramselectedforTrackSelect.
11-1c
Location
[0001:01.0009999:16.191]
Thisdisplaysthecurrentlocationwithintheselectedcue
list.
STEP/
SONG/
Length Step [Measure] Song (Cue Edit-Song)
Therangeofthebeatandclockwilldependonthetime
signatureofthecorrespondingsong.
[1/4...16/16]
Thisdisplaysthetimesignatureofthecurrentlyplaying
song.
(Tempo)
[040.00...300.00]
Specifiesthetempoatwhichthesonginthecuelistwillbe
played).Formoreinformation,pleasesee(Tempo)on
page 110.
Tempo Mode
Tempo
Cue List
Select
Track
Select
Fromtheleft,thenumbersindicatethemeasure,beat,and
clock.Eachcanbesetseparately,andthiswillchangethe
currentlocationwithinthecuelist.
WhenMIDIClock(Global11a)isInternal,aSong
PositionPointermessagewillbetransmittedeachtime
youchangethelocationwithinthecuelist.IfMIDI
ClockissettoExternalMIDIorExternalUSB,Song
PositionPointermessagesfromthespecifiedsource
willcausethelocationtochange.
160
Meter
Thisshowsinformationonthecurrentlyselectedorplaying
Step.
Step
[01...99/01...99]
Theselectedstepnumberisshownattheleft,andthetotal
numberofsteps(notincludingthelaststep)isshownatthe
right.
Song
[000...127]
Thisshowsthenumberandnameofthesongforthe
currentlyselectedstep.
Length
[000...999]
Thisshowsthenumberofmeasuresinthesongforthe
currentlyselectedstep.
SEQ P11: Cue List What to do when playing back a cue list and the songs do not transition smoothly
[01...100 (M0001...M9999)]
Thisdisplaysthestepnumberanditsstartingmeasure.
Stepindicateseachstepnumber.TheStepindicatedbythe
symbolisthecurrentlyselectedorcurrentlyplayingstep.
ThiscanbedirectlyselectedbySong(Seq111b)orCurrent
Step(Seq111c).Whenstopped,pressingtheSTART/STOP
(
)buttonwillcauseplaybacktobeginfromthisstep.
Measureindicatesthestartingmeasureofeachstep.This
cannotbeedited.
Repeat
[01...64, FS]
Specifiesthenumberoftimesthatthesongofthisstepwill
berepeated.
FS:Afootswitchconnectedtotherearpanelcanbeusedto
specifythepointatwhichthesongwillstoprepeating.When
youpressthefootswitch,thecurrentrepetitionofthesongwill
finishplaying.Playbackwillthenadvancetothenextstep.Set
FootSwitchAssign(Global21a)toCueRepeatControl.
[Off, On]
Specifieswhethertheeffectsspecifiedbythesongassigned
toeachstepwillbeused.
On(checked):Theeffectsettingsofthesongspecifiedfor
thecurrentstepwillbeused.Whenplaybackmovestothe
nextstep,theeffectsettingswillalsochange.
Off(unchecked):Theeffectsettingswillnotchange.
Dependingontheeffectsettings,acertainamountof
timemayberequiredtoswitcheffects.Inthiscase,
playbackwillnotbesmoothfromsongtosong.
Ifyouwanttotransitionsmoothlyfromsongtosong
insideofacuelist,checkLoadFX?inStep01.Forthe
remainingsteps,donotcheckLoadFX?
Withthesesettings,theeffectswillbesetbefore
playbackbegins,sotherewillbenotimelagto
interruptthesmoothtransitionbetweensongs.
Althoughitisnotpossibletochangetheeffecttypesin
themiddleofacuelist,youcanusethedynamic
modulationfunctionorMIDIcontrolchanges(effect
control)toapplyreverbmoredeeplytocertainsongs,
orraisetheLFOspeedforothersongs,etc.
Whenusingacuelisttoconstructasong,we
recommendthismethod.Whenyouexecutethe
ConverttoSongmenucommand,theeffectsettingsof
theStep01songwillbespecifiedatthebeginningof
thesongthatiscreatedbytheconversion.
EvenwhenLoadFX?isnotchecked,theremaybeatime
laginthetransitionfromonesongtothenext,depending
onthemusicaldatainthesong.Theremayalsobecasesin
whichthemusicaldataatthetransitionbetweensongs
doesnotplayatthecorrecttiming.Tofixthis,youcanedit
themusicaldataofthesong,orconvertthecuelisttoa
singlesong.IfyouuseConverttoSongtoconvertthecue
listtoasong,therewillbenotimelagatthetransition,and
themusicaldatawillplayatthecorrecttiming.
Insert
WhenyoupresstheInsertbutton,thestepdatathatwas
temporarilysavedinthebufferbytheCopybuttonorCut
buttonwillbeinsertedattheCurrentStep.(Ifcopyorcut
hasnotbeenexecuted,defaultdatawillbeinserted.)
Cut
WhenyoupresstheCutbutton,theCurrentStepwillbe
cut,anditsdatawillbesavedtemporarilyinthebuffer.If
youInsertimmediatelyafteryoucut,thedatawillreturn
thestateinwhichitwasbeforeyoucut.
Copy
WhenyoupresstheCopybutton,thedataoftheCurrent
Stepwillbesavedtemporarilyinthebuffer.
PresstheInsertbuttontoinsertthecopiedstepintothe
CurrentStep.
Current Step
[01...100]
Selectsthestepthatwillbeinserted,cutorcopied.
Ifyouwishtoplaybackfromastepinthemiddleofthecue
list,selectthedesiredstephere,andpresstheSTART/STOP
(
)button.
SeeCreatingandplayingaCueListonpage 74ofthe
Operationguide.
161
Sequencer mode
convertedtoasongifsettingssuchastheMIDIchannel
donotmatch.
0:MemoryStatusseep.163
YoucanuseafootswitchtoswitchtheStep.
IfyousetRepeattoFS,afootswitchconnectedtothe
ASSIGNABLESWITCHjackwillcontrolthetimingat
whichthesongstopsrepeating.SetFootSwitchAssign
(GlobalP2:Controllerspage)toCueRepeatControl.
1:ExclusiveSoloseep.64
6:CopySongseep.190
Althoughitisnotpossibletorecordadditionalmaterial
ontotracksinacuelist,youcanconvertacuelisttoasong,
andthenrecordsolosetc.onvacanttracks.Youwillalso
needtoconvertacuelisttoasongifyouwishtosaveitto
externalmediaasSMFdata.
7:FF/REWSpeedseep.164
1. SelectthemenucommandConverttoSong.
Adialogboxwillappear.
2. InToSong,specifythedestinationsongnumberfor
theconverteddata.
Thecuelistnamewillautomaticallybeassignedasthesong
nameoftheconverteddata.(Fordetailsandcautions
regardingConverttoSong,pleaseseeConverttoSong
(ConvertCueListtoSong)onpage 189.)
Inthedialogboxthatappears,itisnotnecessarytospecify
SetLengthwhenselectinganewsongastheconversion
destination.Thenumberofmeasuresintheconvertedsong
willbeused.PresstheOKbutton,andtheConvertCueList
dialogboxwillappear.
3. PresstheOKbutton.
Thecuelistwillbeconvertedintoasong.AccesstheP01:
Play/RECpage,selectthesongnumberthatyouspecifiedas
theconversiondestination,andchecktheresults.
162
2:RenameCueListseep.189
3:DeleteCueListseep.189
4:CopyCueListseep.189
5:ConverttoSong(ConvertCueListtoSong)seep.
189
8:SetLocation(SetLocationforLocateKey)seep.164
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSequencer:Menu
Commandonpage 163.
3. Toexecute,presstheOKbutton.Toexitwithout
executing,presstheCancelbutton.
Memory Status
Thisdisplaystheremainingamountofsequencermemory.
ItisavailableoneverypageinSequencermode.
Exclusive Solo
ThisspecifieshowtheSolofunctionwilloperate.Eachtime
youselectExclusiveSolo,thesettingwillalternatebetween
multiplesoloandexclusivesolo.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeExclusiveSoloonpage 64.
ItisavailableoneverypageinSequencermode.
Rename Song
RenameSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthePlay/
REC,Play/RECControl,Controllers,EQ,TrackParam,
Zone/Delay,MIDIFilter1,MIDIFilter2,andDrumTrack
pages.
Here,youcanrenametheselectedsong.Anameofupto24
characterscanbeinput.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEditingnameson
page 91oftheOwnersmanual.
1. InFrom,specifythecopysourcesongnumber.
2. Selectthedatathatyouwishtocopy.
All:willcopyallsettingdataandmusicaldata(trackevents
andpatterns,etc.).
WithoutTrack/PatternEvents:willcopyonlythesetting
dataofsongs,exceptforPlayLoopandRPPRdata.
BeawarethatifyouexecuteAll,allsettingdataandmusical
dataofthecurrentlyselectedsongwillbeerasedand
rewrittenbythedatafromthecopysourcesong.Ifyou
executeWithoutTrack/PatternEvents,songsettingdata
(butnotPlayLoopandRPPR)willberewritten.
Delete Song
DeleteSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthePlay/
REC,Play/RECControl,Controllers,EQ,TrackParam,
Zone/Delay,MIDIFilter1,MIDIFilter2,andDrumTrack
pages.
Thiscommanddeletesthecurrentlyselectedsong.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,themusicaldata,setting
data,andpatternsetc.ofthecurrentlyselectedsongwillbe
erased,andthememoryareaallocatedtothatsongwillbe
freed.
1. InFrom,specifythetemplatesongthatyouwishto
load.
2. IfyoucheckCopyPatterntoTracktoo?,theCopyPat
ternToTrackdialogboxwillappearautomaticallyafter
LoadTemplateSonghasbeenexecuted.
Ifyouexecutewithoutcheckingthis,onlythetemplate
songyouspecifiedinstep2willbeloaded.
Whenyouexecute,songsettingsotherthanPlayLoopand
RPPRwillbecopied.
163
Sequencer mode
Ifinstep2youcheckedCopyPatterntoTracktoo?and
pressedtheOKbutton,theCopyPatternToTrackdialog
boxwillappear.
FF/REW Speed
FF/REWSpeedisavailableoneverypages,exceptforthe
Pattern/RPPRpageRPPRSetuptab.
Thisallowsyoutosetthespeedatwhichfastforwardor
rewindwilloccurwhenyoupresstheFFbuttonorREW
button.
ThisdialogboxisthesameasinthemenucommandCopy
ToTrack.
3. InToTrack,selectthecopydestinationtrack.
InMeasure,specifythebeginningmeasureofthecopy
destination.
Note:Track1ofallsixteenpresettemplatecontainsadrum
categoryprogram.(InpresettemplatesongsP02,P04,P08,
andP15drumcategoryprogramsarespecifiedformultiple
tracks.)
Thepatternnamesofthepresetpatternsindicatethe
musicalgenreandpartoftheoptimaldrumcategory
program.
Byloadingthedrumtrackforthesepresettemplatesongs
andthecorrespondingpresetpatterns,youcanefficiently
setupadrumtrackthatissuitedtoeachpresettemplate
song.
Whenyouexecute,Measurewillcountupautomatically.
Youmaythencopypatternsaswell.Toexitthecommand,
presstheExitbutton.
Fordetailsonhowtocopypresetpatternstoasongalong
withthepresettemplatesong,pleaseseeUsingtemplate
songsonpage 58oftheOperationguide.
1. InSpeed,specifythespeed(relativetotheplayback
tempo)atwhichfastforwardandrewindwilloccur.
TheSpeedsettingisinmultiplesoftheplaybacktempo.A
settingof1isthesamespeedastheplaybacktempo.
Settingsof24respectivelycorrespondtodouble,triple,or
quadruplespeedoftheplaybacktempo.
Note:Fastforwardandrewindspeedsmaybeslowerin
regionswithdenseperformancedata.Fastforwardand
rewindspeedswilldifferbetweenregionswherethe
performancedataisdenseorsparse.
2. IfIgnoreTempoischecked,theplaybacktempoand
notelengthwillbeignored,andfastforwardand
rewindoccurs.
Ifthisitemisunchecked,fastforwardandrewindwillbe
performedatthespeedyouspecifyforSpeed.
Set Location
(Set Location for Locate Key)
SetLocationisavailableoneverypages,exceptforthe
PatternRPPRpage.
WhenyoupresstheLOCATEbutton,youwillmovetothe
locationspecifiedhere.
SaveTemplateSongisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
Play/REC,Play/RECControl,Controllers,EQ,TrackParam,
Zone/Delay,MIDIFilter1,MIDIFilter2,andDrumTrack
pages.
Thiscommandsavestheprogramselections,track
parameters,andeffectsettingsetc.ofthecurrentsongasa
usertemplatesongU0015.Thesettingsyousaveherecan
alsobeloadedinSongPlaymode.
1. InLocation,specifythelocationtowhichyouwill
movewhenyoupresstheLOCATEbutton.
Fromtheleft,thevaluesareMeasure(001999),Beat(01
16),andTick(000479).
Ifyouspecify001:01.000,youwillmovetothebeginningof
thesongwhenyoupresstheLOCATEbutton.
Note:Whenthisdialogboxisnotopen,youcanholddown
theENTERbuttonandpresstheLOCATEbuttontosetthe
currentlocationastheSetLocationvalue.
1. InTo,specifytheusertemplatesong(U0015)inwhich
thedatawillbesaved.
Beawarethatwhenyouexecutethiscommand,allsettings
ofthedestinationTemplatewillbeerasedandrewritten
withthecurrentsettings.
Note:ThePlayLoopandRPPRsettingsarenotsaved.Ifyou
wanttosavethesesettingsandtheuserpatterns,execute
SaveSEQinMediamodeandsavethemtoanSDcard.
164
InSequencermode,whenaGMSystemOnmessageis
receivedfromanexternaldevice,orifaGMSystemOn
messageisrecordedinthesequencedata,theKROME
willberesettosettingsappropriateforGMjustasif
youhadexecutedthiscommand.However,inthese
cases,thevariousP9:MFX/TFX/LFOparameterswill
notbereset.
GM Initialize
GMInitializeisavailableonallofthetabsunderthePlay/
REC,Play/RECControl,Controllers,EQ,TrackParam,
Zone/Delay,MIDIFilter1,MIDIFilter2,andDrumTrack
pages.
ThiscommandtransmitsaGMSystemOnmessagetothe
Sequencermode,resettingalltrackstotheGMsettings.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeGMInitializeonpage 165.
GM Initialize List
Page
ProgramT0108,T0916
P0
MixerT0108,0916
Parameter
ProgramSelect
Play/Mute,Solo
Pan
C064
C064
Volume
100
100
AutoLoadProgEQ
On
On
InputTrim
EQGainT0108,T0916
MIDIT0108,T0916
P3
OSCT0108,T0916
PitchT0108,T0916
ScaleT0108,T0916
P5
P7
+00.0
+00.0
3.20k
3.20k
MidGain[dB]
+00.0
+00.0
Settingremainsunchanged
LowGain[dB]
+00.0
+00.0
Status
Settingremainsunchanged
MIDIChannel
Settingremainsunchanged
BankSelectMSB/LSB
000
000
ForceOSCMode
Settingremainsunchanged
OSCSelect
Settingremainsunchanged
Portamento
Off
Off
Transpose
+00
+00
Detune
+0000
+0000
BendRange
+02
+02
UseProgramsScale
C1G9(Slope=000)
C1G9
MIDITempoSync.
Time
MIDIFilter1,2
001127(Slope=000)
001127
Off
Off
0000
0000
On
On
Settingremainsunchanged
Arpeggiator
Variousparameters
Settingremainsunchanged
DrumTrack
Variousparameters
Settingremainsunchanged
Routing1T0108,T09
16
P8
Off
99
HighGain[dB]
VelZoneT0108,T0916
DelayT0108,T0916
Off
99
MidFrequency[Hz]
KeyZoneT0108,T0916
P4
Track 10
g(d)001
EQTrimT0108,T0916 Bypass
P2
InsertFXSetup
Bus(IFX/Output)Select
L/R
L/R
Send1(MFX1)
Send2(MFX2)
40
40
IFX15
Settingremainsunchanged
Pan:#8
Settingremainsunchanged
FXControlBus
Settingremainsunchanged
Send1/2
Settingremainsunchanged
Settingremainsunchanged
Otherparameter
Routing2T0108,T09
16
FXControlBus
Off
Off
CommonFXLFO
Otherparameters
Settingremainsunchanged
MFX1
StereoChorus
MFX2
ReverbSmoothHall
Chain
Off
ChainDirection
12
Level
127
Return1
127
Return2
50
Settingremainsunchanged
Routing
P9
OtherMFXparameters
TFX
Settingremainsunchanged
MasterLevel
Settingremainsunchanged
165
Sequencer mode
1. InCombination,selectthecopysourcedestination.
ArpeggiatorRunA,B,andArpeggiatorAssignsettings
2. UsetheIFXs,MFXsandTFXcheckboxestospecify
whetheryouwanttheeffectsettingsofthecombina
tiontobecopiedaswell.
IFXs:Allinserteffectsettingsofthecopysource
combination(thecontentsoftheInsertFXSetuppageand
theIFX15effectparameters)willbecopied.
MFXs:Allmastereffectsettingsofthecopysource
combinationwillbecopied.
TFX:Alltotaleffectsettingsofthecopysourcecombination
willbecopied.
3. SpecifythedesiredAutoadjustArpsettingforMulti
RECsetting.
YouhavetheoptionofcheckingtheAutoadjustArpsetting
forMultiREC.Asnecessary,thisfunctionwilladjustthe
MIDIchanneletc.ofanytracksthatneedtobechanged,
and/oraddnewtracks,inordertoensurethatwhenyou
performmultirecordingwiththearpeggiatoron,thesame
soundwillbereproducedduringrecordingasduring
playback.
SEQP3:TrackParamMIDIChT0108andT0916page
MIDIChannelsettings
Note:Thisfunctionmakesadjustmentsdependingonthe
ARPstateofthecombination.Whenyoucopya
combinationthatwaswrittenwiththearpeggiatorturned
off,itisassumedthatyouwillleavethearpeggiatoroffin
thesong.Ifyouwanttousethearpeggiatorinthesong,you
shouldwritethecombinationwiththearpeggiatorturned
on,andthencopyittothesong.
Ifthisischecked,theMIDIchannelsetc.ofthetrackswillbe
corrected.MultiREC(Seq08b)andPLAY/MUTE/REC
(Seq01(2)a)willalsobesetautomatically.
Inaddition,RecordingSetup,Overwrite(Seq08b)willbe
selected.(NotethattheautomaticallysetMultiRECand
PLAY/MUTE/RECwillberesetwhenyoureselectthe
song.)
Note:Fordetailsonthedatathatwillbeadjusted,seebelow.
Thecontentdescribedherewillbecorrectedautomatically.
Dependingonthesettingsofthecombination,itmaybe
necessarytomakeadditionalchangestothetracksettingsin
additiontothesettingshere.
166
IfArpeggiatorRunAandBarechecked,andthe
arpeggiatorisassignedtoatrack,makesurethatMIDI
Channel(GlobalP1:MIDI)issettootherthan01.
MakesurethattheglobalMIDIchannel(GlobalP1:MIDI,
MIDIChannel)issetto01.
ArpeggiatorRun
MIDIChannela
IfeitherAorB
arechecked
01only
Correctionrequired
0102,0103,etc.
Nocorrectionrequired
Correction
01only
Correctionrequired
Correctionrequiredfor
onlyone
IfbothAandB 0102,0103,etc.
arechecked
Nocorrectionrequired/
Correctionrequiredb
010203,etc.
a. IftheMIDIChannelofmultipletracksoperatedbythe
arpeggiatorissetonlyto01,refertothelinesfor01
only.IftheMIDIChannelsettingsare01andoneother
channel,suchas01and02,thenrefertothelinesfor01
02,etc.IftheMIDIChannelsettingsare01and
multipleotherMIDIchannels,suchas01and02and03,
thenrefertothelinefor010203,etc.
b. Correctionisnecessaryonlyifthetracksoperatedbya
singlearpeggiatorareusingonlyMIDIChannel01.In
somecases,correctionmayalsobenecessaryifthetwo
arpeggiatorsusethesameMIDIchannel.
Dependingonthecombinationsettings,itmayalsobe
necessarytochangethetracksettingsaswell.
Theprecedingillustrationshowstheexampleofcopyingthe
combinationB109:EchoJammwithAutoadjustArp
settingforMultiRECuncheckedinCopyFromCombi.
Selectanewsong,andexecutethecopytoseetheresult.
(Formoreaboutthearpeggiatorsettingsinthis
combination,seepage 91.)
ThisisthesamefunctionasinCombinationmode;for
details,pleaseseeCopyfromProgramonpage 101.
ThiscommandinSequencermodediffersfromitsbehavior
inCombinationmodeinthatthechannelsassignedtothe
tracksofthesongwillbepreservedregardlessofthewith
ArpsettingofthecopydestinationtracksMIDIChannel.
(Seestep4.)
Usingthesesettingsasanexample,determinewhether
correctionisnecessary,andifso,whatneedstobecorrected.
Thiscommandcopiesthedrumtracksettingsofthe
specifiedProgram,Combination,orSong.
ArpeggiatorRunAandBarechecked,andMIDIChannel
01and02areselected.Correctionisnecessaryforoneofthe
arpeggiators.Ifyouperformmultitrackrecordingwith
thesesettings,theMIDIchannelsofT01,02,and03arethe
same,sothehighregisterguitar/piano/pad(T02,T03,and
T05),thelowregisterbass(T01),andthegutarriffplayedby
arpeggiatorB(T02)willhavetheirperformancedata
combinedintoonestream,andtheperformancewillnotbe
reproducedatplayback.(T16isadummytrackusedto
triggerarpeggiatorA.)
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyDrumTrackon
page 65.
1. SothatthebassplayedbyarpeggiatorBcanbe
recordedseparately,changetheMIDIchannelofT02.
SelecttheSEQP3:TrackParamMIDIT0108page,and
changetheT02MIDIChannelto03.
2. AddsettingsfortriggeringarpeggiatorB.
DetuneBPMAdjustisavailableonthePitchtabofTrack
Prampage.
SelecttheSEQP3:TrackParamMIDIT0916page,andfor
track8(oranyunusedtrack),turnStatusOff,andsetthe
MIDIChannelto01.(T08willbeadummytrackusedto
triggerarpeggiatorA.)
3. SelecttheSEQP7:ARP/DTARPSetupT0916page.
Setthetrack8AssigntoB.
Thiswillproducethefollowingsettings.
T01
T02
T03
T04
T05
T06
T07
T08
T16
Assign
Track
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Status
Off
Off
Off
10
01
01
MIDICh.
01
03
01
02
01
01
Thiscompletesthecorrections.IntheSequencerP0:Play/
RECPreferencepage,setTrackSelecttoanytrackwhose
MIDIchannelis01.ChecktheMultiRECcheckboxand
performmultitrackrecording.
Whentheprogramselectedforatrackusesaphrase,or
rhythmloopmultisample,youcanusethiscommandto
changetheBPMofthephraseorrhythm.TheBPMcanbe
adjustedbymodifyingthepitch.Thiscommandisavailable
whentheDetunesettingofthattrackisselected.Whenyou
executethiscommand,theselectedDetunevaluewillbe
adjusted.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDetuneBPMAdjuston
page 103.
Copy Arpeggiator
CopyArpeggiatorisavailableontheArpAtabandArpB
tabofPlay/RECControlpageorSetuptab,ArpAtab,ArpB
tab,ScanZonetaboftheARP/DTpage.
Thiscommandcanbeusedtocopyarpeggiosettingsfrom
anotherlocationtothecurrentprogram.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyArpeggiatoron
page 66.
CopyfromProgramisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
Play/REC,Play/RECControl,Controllers,EQ,TrackParam,
Zone/Delay,MIDIFilter1,MIDIFilter2,andDrumTrack
pages.
Step Recording
Thiscommandcopiessettingsfromtheprogramyouspecify
tothecurrentlyselectedsong.
StepRecordingisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
167
Sequencer mode
Steprecordingallowsyoutospecifythelengthandvelocity
ofeachnotenumerically,andtoinputthepitchesfromthe
keyboard.YoucanusetheRestbuttonandTiebuttonto
inputarestortie.
Ifyouusesteprecordingtoinputdataintoatrackthat
alreadycontainssequencedata,alldatawillbeerased
fromtheFromMeasureandsubsequentmeasures.If
afterinputting,youdecidetoreverttothepriordata,
usetheComparefunction.
Toinputdatawithacontinuouslychangingvaluesuchas
pitchbend,itisbesttouseCreateControlData.Toinput
individualdataeventssuchasprogramchanges,useEvent
Edit.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackintowhichyouwish
toinputdata,anduseFromMeasure(Seq61c)tospec
ifythemeasureatwhichyouwishtobegininput.
2. SelectStepRecordingtoopenthedialogbox.
theactualvelocityatwhichyouplayedthekeywillbe
input.
7. Inputthenoteeventsdescribedbelowbyplayingnotes
onthekeyboardorbypressingthebuttonsinthelower
partofthedialogbox.
Inputting notes
Whenyoupressakeyonthekeyboard,thatnotenumber
willbeinputasanoteofthelengthspecifiedinstep4.
Whenyoupressachordonthekeyboard,thosenote
numberswillbeinputaschordsofthelengthspecifiedin
step4.Sinceeachofthenotenumbersyoupressbefore
releasingallofthekeyswillbeinputatthesamelocation,
thenoteswillbeinputasachordeveniftheyareactually
playedatdifferenttimes.
Eachtimeyoupressandreleasethekeyboard,thelocation
willadvancebythelengthspecifiedinstep4.
Inputting rests
PresstheRestbuttontoinputarestofthelengthspecified
instep4.
Time
signature
Inputting a tie
IfyoupresstheTiebuttonwithoutpressingthekeyboard,
thepreviouslyinputnotewillbetied,andlengthenedby
theamountspecifiedinstep4.
IfyoupresstheTiebuttonwhileholdingdownanote,the
noteyouareplayingwillbetied,andlengthenedbythe
amountspecifiedinstep4.
Thiswillshowthetimesignaturethathasalreadybeenset
forthemeasure.
Step Time =
Ifyouchangethetimesignaturesetting,thetimesignature
dataofthemeasuresyourecordwillchange,andalltracks
willchangetothetimesignatureyouspecified.
4. InStepTime,specifythelength(intermsofanote
value)ofthebasicintervalatwhichyouwillinput
data.
Fromthepopupmenuattheleft,selectthenotelengthina
rangeof(wholenote)through(32ndnote).
Ifyouwanttheselectednotevaluetobeadottednoteora
triplet,usethepopupmenuattherighttoselectadot
. (Dot)ortriplet3(Triplet).Tousetheunmodified
valueoftheselectednote,choose(Normal).
Thefollowingtableshowsthenumberofclocksrepresented
byeachStepTimeselection.
(0:060)
(0:120)
(0:240)
(1:000)
(2:000)
(4:000)
(0:090)
(0:180)
(0:360)
(1:240)
(3:000)
(6:000)
(0:040)
(0:080)
(0:160)
(0:320)
(1:160)
(2:320)
5. InNoteDuration,specifythelengththatthenotewill
actuallybeheld,relativetotheStepTime.
Ingeneral,100%willbetenuto,85%willbenormal,and
50%willbestaccato.
6. UseNoteVelocitytospecifythevelocityvalue(key
boardplayingstrength)ofthenotedata.
WiththePAUSE( )buttonpressed,youcanholddown
theENTERbuttonandplayanoteonthekeyboardto
specifythevelocityvalue.IfyousetNoteVelocitytoKey,
168
3. InMeter,setthetimesignature.
Youcaneveninputnotesasshowninthefollowing
diagram.
Step Time =
Step Time =
Tie
On
Press E and C
Off
Release E (continue holding C)
ON
Press G
Event Edit
EventEditisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Inserting an event
SelectthelocationBeatTickatwhichyouwishtoinsertan
event,andpresstheInsertbuttontoinsertanevent.
Here,youcaneditindividualeventsofMIDIdatathatwere
input.
Deleting an event
Selecttheeventthatyouwishtodelete,andpresstheCut
buttontodeletetheevent.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwishto
edit,anduseFromMeasure(Seq61c)fieldtospecify
themeasureatwhichyouwishtobeginediting.
Moving an event
YoucanusetheCutbuttonandInsertbuttontomovean
event(asincutandpaste).
IfyouselectedTrack0116inEventEdit,selectingthis
commandwillopentheSetEventFiltersdialogbox.
UsetheCutbuttontodeletetheeventthatyouwishto
move,thenusetheInsertbuttontoinsertitatthedesired
location.
IfyouselectedMasterTrackinTrackSelect,thisdialogbox
willnotappear.
YoucanalsomoveaneventbymodifyingitsBeatTick
value.
Copying an event
Selecttheeventthatyouwishtocopy,andpresstheCopy
button.ThenselectthecopydestinationandpresstheInsert
buttontoinserttheeventatthatlocation.
Playing back an event
WhenyoupressthePlaybutton,adialogboxwillopenand
thesongwillbeginplaying.Usethistoauditiontheedits
youvemadeinEventEdit.
IntheSetEventFiltersdialogboxyoucanselectthetypes
ofevents(musicaldata)thatwillappearandcanbeedited
intheeventeditwindow.
ForNoteyoucansetBottomandToptospecifytherangeof
notesavailableforediting.Normallyyouwillleavetheseset
atC1andG9.
ControlChangeletsyouspecifythecontrolchangenumber.
NormallyyouwillleavethissetatAll.
Youcanalsocheckvariousotherevents(PitchBend,
ProgramChange,AfterTouch,PolyAfterTouch,and
Exclusive).
2. PresstheOKbuttontoopentheEventEditdialogbox.
Playbackwillbeginfromthemeasurespecifiedby
Measure.
Playbackwilloccuraccordingtothesettingsofthesong.
(ThesongwillplaybackinthesamewayasintheP011:
Play/RECpage,etc.)
Ifyouwanttoplaybackonlythetrackyoureediting,exit
EventEditandsolothedesiredtrack.Alternatively,
mutetheothertracks.Thetrackbeingeditedisindicated
byabluerectangle.
IfyoupresstheExcl.Solobutton,theexclusivesolo
functionwillturnon.
Off:Multiplesolooperation
Thesoloon/offstatewillchangeeachtimeyoupressa
solobutton.Youcanturnsoloonformultipletracks.
On:Exclusivesolooperation
Solowillbeonforonlyoneofthesixteentracks.
ThissettingislinkedwiththeExclusiveSolomenucom
mand.
IfthemenucommandPanelSWSoloModeOnis
checked,switches18willcontrolsoloon/offifyouve
selectedControlAssignMIXERT18orT916,evenwhile
usingEventEditPlay.
3. Intheupperpartofthedialogbox,MeasureandIndex
showthemeasurethatyouareeditingandtheeventsof
theindexnumberswithinthemeasure.
IfyouveeditedtheMeter,thechangewillnotbe
reflectedintheplaybackuntilyouexitEventEdit.
Youcantouchthescrollbarlocatedattherighttomoveto
theeventthatyouwishtoedit.
WhenyoupresstheExitbutton,playbackwillstopand
youwillreturntotheEventEditdialogbox.
4. Selecttheeventthatyouwishtoedit,andusethe
VALUEcontrolleretc.tomodifyitsvalue(s).
Editingsystemexclusivemessages
BymodifyingthevalueoftheBeatTicklocationwithin
themeasure,youcanmovetheeventwithinthemeasure.
Youcanediteacheventbymodifyingitsdatavalue(s).
Whenyouselectanoteevent,itwillsound.
5. Youcanpressthebuttonslocatedatthebottomofthe
dialogboxtoediteventsasfollows.
YoucaneditKROMEparameterchangemessagesand
universalsystemexclusivemessages.
Fortheapplicableparameters,refertothetableonp.634.
*Dump/Ext*isshowninthefollowingcases.
Exclusivedumpdata
Parameterchangemessagesnotsupportedbythe
KROME,suchasmessagesfromanexternalMIDI
device
169
Sequencer mode
ParameterchangemessagesofotherthanSequencer
mode
*Unavailable*isshowninthefollowingcases.
KROMEparameterchangemessagesthatcannotbe
realtimerecordedbytheKROME,suchasMIDIChannel,
Status,orKey/VelZone.(Thiscorrespondstoparameters
notinthetableonpage 191.Suchcasesmayarisewhen
theparametercannotberealtimerecordedbyoperatinga
parameterontheKROME,butcanberecordedwhen
receivedviaMIDI.)
KROMEparameterchangemessagesforwhichthereisno
supportedparameter,duetoaninputmistakeorsome
otherreason
Note:
IFX1,2,3,4,5,MFX1,MFX2,andTFXeffectparameters
Toneadjust
Theseparameternamesanddisplayedvaluesarethe
parameternamesandvaluesforthecorrespondingeffect.
(EffectparametersconsistingofParameteranda
numeral(e.g.,Parameter71)areparametersnotusedby
thecurrentlyselectedeffect.)
Ifyourerecordingparameterchangemessagestoswitchthe
effecttype,theparameternameswillnotbethe
correspondingparameternamesfortheeffectthatis
originallyselectedatsongplayback;rather,thedisplaywill
showtheparametersforthecurrentlyselectedeffect.Be
awareofthiswhenswitchingeffects,andwhencontrolling
theirparameters.
TheBinEditbuttonwillbeavailablewhenanexclusive
messageisselected.Pressingthisbuttonwillopenthe
BinaryEditordialogbox.
Here,asystemexclusivemessagestartingwithF0canbe
editedinhexadecimalform.Usethiswhenyouwantto
enterandeditasystemexclusivemessageforanexternal
device.
fromthebeginningofthemessage.TakingthestartingF0
aszero,thisisshownas1,2,3,...etc.(adecimalvalue).
Size[D]isadecimalvalueindicatingthenumberofbytes
inthecurrentlyeditedsystemexclusive.16[D]indicates
thatthemessageissixteenbytes.
PresstheOKbuttontoapplythesettings.
Usethedataentrybuttonstoenterdataashexadecimal
values.Thevalues8,9,A,B,C,D,E,andFarevalidonly
whenenteringthelowerdigit,wherethesevaluesare
permitted.
YoucanusetheInsertbuttonandCutbuttontoinsertor
deletebytedata.
PresstheOKbuttontoapplythesettingsandreturnto
theeventeditpage.
6. Whenyouarefinishedeventediting,presstheDone
button.IfyoupresstheCOMPAREbuttonyouwill
returnthedatatotheconditioninwhichitwasbefore
youbeganeventediting.
Thefollowingtableshowsthetypesofmusicaldatathatcan
beeditedbyEventEditandtherangeoftheirvalues.
BAR (displayed only)
(Measure line)
C1...G9*2
(Notedata)
V:1...127*2
(Velocity)
PAFT
C1...G9
(Polyphonicafter
(Notenumber)
touch)
CTRL
(Controlchange)
C:0...119
(Controlchange
number)
PROG
(Program
change)
Bank:A...E
000...127,
GM,g(1)..g(9)g(d),
,
(Programbank)
AFTT
(AfterTouch)
0...127
(value)
BEND
(Pitchbend)
8192...+8191
(value)
Meter: 1/4...16/16 *1
(Time signature)
L:000.000...15984.000
(Length:beats,clocks)
0...127
(Value)
0...127
(Value)
P:0...127,
1...128(GM,
g(1)...g(d))
(Programnumber)
EXCL*3
(Exclusive)
*1:Beawarethatbecausethetimesignatureisrecorded
inthemastertrack,modifyingitwithinanytrackwill
affectalltracksatthesamemeasure,causingthemallto
playbackwiththemodifiedtimesignature.
Note:*2:Youcanalsoenterthenotedataandvelocityvalues
byholdingdowntheENTERbuttonandplayingakey.
TheKROMEssystemexclusivemessageshavethe
followingformat.
F0:Exclusivestatus
42:KorgID
3n:n=0...FGlobalMIDIchannel
00:ModelIDbyte1
01:ModelIDbytes2
15:ModelIDbytes3
ff:functionID
([41][04]:Sequencermodeparameterchange)
...
F7:Endofexclusive
WhenyoupresstheTestbutton,thecurrentlyedited
systemexclusivemessagewillbetransmittedfromthe
MIDIOUTconnector,USBMIDIconnector,andEXFW
connector(ifoptionallyinstalled).Usethiswhenyou
wanttochecktheoperationofanexternaldevice.
Index[D]intheinformationboxindicatesthepositionof
theselecteddatawithinthemessageasanumberofbytes
170
*3:YoucannotchangeExclusiveeventsintoadifferent
typeofevent(e.g.,aNoteorControlChangeevent).
Norcanyouchangeanyothertypeofeventintoan
Exclusiveevent.
Patternnumberswillbedisplayedinlocationsinwhicha
patternhasbeenput(placed).Attheendofthetrackthere
willbeanindicationofTrackEnd.
Piano Roll
ThePianoRolldialogboxprovidesadetailedgraphicview
ofeventdatasuchasnotes,velocities,andcontrolchanges.
Hereyoucanalsomodify,delete,orcreatetheseevents.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwantto
edit,anduseFromMeasure(Seq61c)tospecifythe
startingmeasurethatyouwanttoedit.Alternatively,
usetheTrackViewpage(Seq62)tospecifythetrack
andmeasuresforediting.
2. Fromthemenucommands,choosePianoRollor
choosethe
toolintheTrackViewpage;thePiano
Rollwindowwillappear.(Seeillustrationbelow.)
Theverticalaxisofthegridindicatespitch,andthe
horizontalaxisisthelocation(ofthemeasures).Thegrid
intervalforthehorizontalaxisisspecifiedbythePianoRoll
SetupGridResolutionparameter.
Fornoteevents,theverticalaxisindicatesthepitch,andthe
lengthofthebarindicatesthedurationofthenote.Theleft
edgeofthebaristhebeginningoftheevent.
Measuresinwhichapatternhasbeenputareshadedin
purple.
3. Thenoteviewareaintheupperpartofthedialogbox
andthecontrolviewareainthelowerpartwillshow
theeventsthatcanbeedited.
PressthisobjectandoperatetheVALUEcontrollers(VALUE
dial,IND/DECbuttons,etc.)changetherangeofdisplayed
pitches.Youcanalsomovethebarbydraggingitupor
down.
Theeventsareshowninoneofthefollowingways.For
details,refertotheexplanationofeachitem.
Thiswillbereleasedwhenyouselectaneventlistitemor
thecontrolviewselectsection.
Pressnoteviewareaselect,andusetheVALUE
controllerstooperateit.
Choosethe
Thisshowsvelocityorcontroldata,andallowsyoutoedit,
delete,oraddthisdata.
toolanddrag.
EnterMeasand#intheeventlist.
UsetheZoombuttonstozoomthedisplayin/out.
4. Choosethedesirededitingtoolfromthetoolbox,and
editthedata.Fordetails,refertoEditingnotesor
Editingcontroldata.
Note:Ifyoudecidetocancelaneditingoperation,pressthe
Undobutton.Thistakesyoubacktothestatepriortothe
mostrecentoperation.TheRedooperationcancelstheUndo
operation.Ifyouwanttoreturntothestatepriortoentering
thepianorolldialogbox,presstheDonebuttontostop
editing,andthenpresstheCOMPAREbutton.
5. Toplaybacktheevents,pressthePlaybutton.Adialog
boxwillopen,andthesongwillbeginplaying.Usethis
toheartheresultsofyourediting.
Thisselectsthedatashowninthecontrolviewarea.Choose
fromthefollowing.
Vel:Velocity
PAft:Polyphonicaftertouch
CC#000...119:Controlchange000119
Aft:Aftertouch
Bnd:Pitchbend
Ifyouselectanoteinthenoteviewarea,velocitywillbe
shownautomatically.
*Programchangesandexclusiveeventsarenotshown.
6. PresstheDonebuttonwhenyourefinishedediting.
Note view
area select
View area
height select
Control view select
Style
select
Zoom
Event list
171
Sequencer mode
Toolbox
Pressingthesebuttonswillchangethedisplayedsizeofthe
noteviewareaandthecontrolviewarea.
Editing notes
Note:Ifyoudecidetocancelachange,presstheDone
buttontofinishediting,andthenpresstheCOMPARE
button.Youwillreturntothestatepriortoopeningthe
PianoRolldialogbox.
Moving a note
1. Pressthe tool.
2. Pressthenoteeventthatyouwanttomove.
Ifyoupressinsidethenoteviewarea,anotewillbeadded.
TheGridResolutionsettinginPianoRollSetupspecifies
thelengthoftheinsertednote.Thenotewillbeinserted
withavelocityof100.
Thenotewilllightblue.Continuepressing,andevent
informationwillbedisplayedintheupperleft(orupper
right).
2
Ifyoupressinsidethecontrolviewarea,acontrolevent
specifiedbythecontrolviewselectCtrlsettingwillbe
created.Youcancreatecontinuousdatabydragging.
However,PAft(polyphonicaftertouchevents)cannotbe
created.
Youcantcreateeventsinameasurewhereapatternhas
alreadybeenplaced.
3. Continuingtopressthenote,dragitup/down/left/
right.
Draggingverticallywillchangethenotespitch,and
dragginghorizontallywillchangeitslocation.
3
Grab tool
Youcanmovethedisplayedregionbydraggingoverthe
noteviewareaorcontrolviewarea.
View control
Zoom
Usethesebuttonstozoomin/outthedatashowninthenote
viewareaorcontrolviewarea.
Fromtheleft,thesebuttonszoomin(magnify)thevertical
axis,zoomout(shrink)theverticalaxis,zoomin(magnify)
thehorizontalaxis,andzoomout(shrink)thehorizontal
axis.
Verticalzoomin/outwillzoomcenteredontheselected
event.
Horizontalzoomin/outwillzoombasedonthemeasure
shownatthefarleft.
Scroll
Usethesebuttonstoscrollthenoteviewarea.
172
Movinganotetoapreciselocation
3. Continuingtopressthenote,dragitleft/right.
YoucanusethePianoRollSetupSnaptoGridorMove
NoteResolutionsettingstoeasilyspecifyaprecise
location.Forexampleifyouwanttomoveanotetoa
precisetimingintervalsuchas ,useGridResolution
tospecifytheunitandturnSnaptoGridon.Whenyou
draganoteevent,itwillsnaptothegrid.(SeePiano
RollSetupdialogboxonpage 175.)
Thenotelengthwillchange.
IfthePianoRollSetupSnaptoGridsettingison,thelength
willchangeinincrementsoftheGridResolutionwhenyou
dragit.
3
Editingavalueintheeventlist
Choosethe tool,andthenpressthenoteeventthat
youwanttomove.Intheeventlistbelow,usetheVALUE
controllerstoenterthedesiredvalue.
Notedataandvelocityvaluescanalsobeenteredbyholding
downtheENTERbuttonandplayinganoteonthe
keyboard.
Entering a note
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Pressthelocationatwhichyouwanttoenterthenote.
Anotewillbeentered.Continuepressing,andevent
informationwillbedisplayedintheupperleft;youcan
dragthenotetothedesiredlocation.Thenotewillbe
enteredwithavelocityof100.
Tospecifythelengthofthenotesthatareentered,setthe
desiredGridResolutioninthePianoRollSetupdialog
box.
Changingthelengthofanote
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Pressneartherightendofthenoteeventwhoselength
youwanttochange.
Thenotewillbehighlighted.Continuepressing,andevent
informationwillbedisplayedintheupperleft(orupper
right).
2
Toalignthenotetoapreciselocation,setthedesired
GridResolutioninthePianoRollSetupdialogbox,and
turnSnaptoGridon.
2
2. Pressthenotethatyouwanttoerase.Thedatawillbe
erased.
173
Sequencer mode
4. Dragup/downtochangethevalue.
Alternatively,youcanenterthedesiredvalueintheevent
list.
tool.
2. Dragtoenclosetheregionofnotesthatyouwantto
erase.Thenotestobeerasedwillbehighlighted.
Whenyourelease,thedatawillbeerased.
2
2. Choosethedatathatwillbeshowninthecontrolview
area.Ifyouveselectednoteevents,thisareawillshow
velocitydata.
2
1
3. Pressthesquareatthetopofthedatathatyouwantto
edit.
Theindicationwillbehighlighted.Continuepressing,and
eventinformationwillbedisplayedintheupperleft.
3
174
Entering data
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Choosethedatathatwillbeshowninthecontrolview
area.
3. Dragovertheregioninwhichyouwanttoenterdata.
Thepathonwhichyoudragisshownbyaline.When
yourelease,valueswillbeenteredtofitthatline.
2
Thefollowingtableshowsthetypesofdataandthe
availablevaluesthatyoucaneditinPianoRoll:Event
Edit.
BAR(displayedonly)
(Measureline)
Meter:1/4...16/16
(Timesignature)
C1...G9*
(Notedata)
L:000.000...15984.000
(Length:beats,clocks)
V:1...127*
(Velocity)
PAFT
C1...G9
(Polyphonicafter
(Notenumber)
touch)
CTRL
(Controlchange)
C:0...119
(Controlchange
number)
AFTT
(AfterTouch)
0...127
(value)
BEND
(Pitchbend)
8192...+8191
(value)
0...127
(Value)
0...127
(Value)
*Notedataandvelocityvaluescanalsobeenteredby
holdingdowntheENTERbuttonandplayinganoteonthe
keyboard.
Setup button
PresstheSetupbuttontoaccessthePianoRollSetupdialog
box,whereyoucanmakesettingssuchastheresolution
wheneditinginthenoteviewarea.
Erasing data
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Choosethatdatathatwillbeshowninthecontrolview
area.
3. Pressonthedatathatyouwanttoerase,ordragacross
theregionthatyouwanttoerase.Whenyourelease,the
datawillbeerased.
Event list
UseMeas(Measure)and#(Index)todisplaythemeasure
thatyouwanttoeditandthedesiredindexnumberwithin
thatmeasure.
Ifyouchange#tochoosecontroldatasuchasAFTTor
CC#01inthelowerarea,thecontrolviewselectvaluewill
alsochange,andthosevalueswillbeshowninthecontrol
viewarea.
Whenyouselectaneventinthenote/controlviewarea,the
eventwillturnlightblueandthatvaluewillbeshowninthe
eventlist.Ifyouuse#toselectadifferentevent,the
selectedeventwillbeshownindarkblue,andthelightblue
eventwillturnred.
[Free, , , , , ]
Whenyoudraganoteeventhorizontally,itwillmovein
unitsoftheresolutionyouspecifyhere.Forexampleifyou
setthisto,dragginganeventatlocationBT:1.001toward
therightwillsuccessivelymoveittolocations2.01,3.001,
4.001,etc.Thisadjustmentwillnotoccurifyouchoosethe
Freesetting.
ThissettingisvalidifSnaptoGridisOff.
Snap to Grid
[Off, On]
ByeditingtheBT(BeatTick)locationwithinthemeasure,
youcanmoveaneventwithinthatmeasure.
On:Whenyoudraganoteeventhorizontally,itwillsnapto
theresolutionspecifiedbyGridResolution.Forexampleif
GridResolutionissetto,dragginganeventatlocation
BT:1.001towardtherightwillmoveittolocations2.000,
3.000,4.001,etc.Thelocationstowhichyoucanmoveanote
willbelimitedtoprecisequarternoteintervals.
Youcanediteachtypeofeventdata.Whenyouselecta
noteevent,itwillsound.
Adottedgridisdisplayedinthenote/controlviewarea
accordingtotheGridResolutionsetting.
Selecttheeventthatyouwanttoedit,andusetheVALUE
controllerstoenterthedesiredvalues.
Off:Noteswillnotsnaptothegrid.Theywillmoveatthe
resolutionspecifiedbyMoveNoteResolution.
175
Sequencer mode
Grid Resolution
[ , , , , ]
Thisspecifiestheresolutionofthegrid.IfSnaptoGridis
On,noteswillsnaptotheresolutionyouspecifyhere.
NoteeventscreatedbythePutEventtoolwillalsohavethe
resolutionandlengthspecifiedhere.
Play Scroll
[Sweep, Crawl]
Thisspecifieshowthenote/controlviewareawillscroll
duringplayback.
Sweep:Whenthelocationbarreachestheendoftheview
area,thenextmeasureandthelocationbarwillmovetothe
leftedge.
Crawl:Theviewareawillscrollmeasurebymeasure.The
locationbarwillnotmove.
Play button
WhenyoupressthePlaybutton,adialogboxwillopen,and
thesongwillbeginplayingback.
Playbackwillstartfromthebeginningofthemeasure
showninthenote/controlviewarea.
1. InLength,specifythelengthofthesong.
AlldatafollowingthemeasurespecifiedbyLengthwill
bedeleted.
Erase Track
EraseTrackisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthespecifiedtrack.
However,itisnotpossibletoerasethemastertrackbyitself.
1. InTrackSelect,selectthetrackthatyouwishtoerase.
Solo buttons
2. SelectEraseTracktoopenthedialogbox.
EachtrackwillplaybackaccordingtothePlay/Muteand
SolosettingsinP0ProgramT0108andT0916.Thesolo
track(s)canalsobeswitchedusingthesixteenSolobuttons
inthePianoRollEditPlaydialogbox.Theupperrow
controlstracks18andthelowerrowcontrolstracks916.
Thetrackbeingeditedisenclosedinaframe.
Excl.Solo button
ThisturnsExclusiveSoloon.
3. Selectthetrackwhosedatayouwanttoerase.
Off:MultipleSolooperation
IfyoudontcheckAllTracks,thedatawillbeerasedonly
fromthetracksyouspecifyinTrackSelect.
Eachtimeyoupressasolobutton,theSolosettingofthat
trackwillturnonoroff.YoucanturnSoloonformultiple
tracks.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,themusicaldataofalltrackswillbe
erased.
On:ExclusiveSolooperation
Solocanbeturnedonforonlyoneofthe16tracksatatime.
Copy Track
ThissettingislinkedwiththeExclusiveSolomenu
command.
CopyTrackisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Play button
Thiscommandcopiesmusicaldatafromthecopysource
tracktothespecifiedtrack.
WhenyoupresstheStopbutton,playbackwillstopand
PianoRollEditPlaywillclose.Thenote/controlviewarea
willshowthebeginningofthemeasureatwhichyou
stopped.
Exit button
WhenyoupresstheExitbutton,playbackwillstopand
PianoRollEditPlaywillclose.Youwillreturntothe
measureinthenote/controlviewareawhereyoustarted
playback.
Beawarethatthetrackdataofthecopydestinationwillbe
erasedwhenyouexecutetheCopyTrackoperation.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(Track0116)
thatyouwanttocopy.
2. SelectCopyTracktoopenthedialogbox.
3. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcetrack,and
Totoselectthecopydestination.
(Bydefault,thetrackyouchooseinTrackSelectwillbe
specifiedforFrom.)
176
Bounce Track
BounceTrackisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommandcombinesthemusicaldataofthesourceand
destinationtracks,andplacesthecombineddatainthe
bouncedestination.Allmusicaldatainthesourcetrackwill
beerased.
IfMIDIcontroldataexistsinboththesourcetrackand
destinationtrack,unexpectedresultsmayoccurduring
playbackafterthebouncecommandisexecuted.Toprevent
thisfromhappening,useEventEditorEraseControlData
toedittheMIDIcontroldataofthetwotracksbeforeyou
useBounceTrack.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(Track0116)
thatyouwanttobounce.
AfterTouchwillerasebothchannelpressureandpolykey
pressuredata,PitchBendwillerasepitchbenddata,
ProgramChangewilleraseprogramchangedata,and
Exclusivewilleraseexclusivedata.
5. Specifythetrack(s)onwhichyouwanttoexecutethe
command.
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,thecommand
willbeexecutedonlyonthedataofthetrackyouselectedin
TrackSelect
IfyoucheckAllTracks,thecommandwillbeexecutedon
thedataofalltracks.
Example: If measures 23 are erased, measures 23 will be blank.
Before Erase
After Erase
2. SelectBounceTracktoopenthedialogbox.
No data
Ifcontroldataextendsacrossmeasuresthatwere
erasedandmeasuresthatwerenoterased,onlythe
datawithinthespecifiedrangewillberemoved.
Howeverifnotedataextendsacrosstwoormore
measures,deletinganyoftheinterveningmeasureswill
deletethatnotedatafromthefollowingmeasuresas
well.
3. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthesourcetrack,andToto
selectthedestinationtrack.
(Bydefault,thetrackyouchooseinTrackSelectwillbe
specifiedforFrom.)
InthecaseofBounceTrack,thesourcetrackdatawillbeset
tozero.
Erase Measure
EraseMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommanderasesthespecifiedtype(s)ofmusicaldata
fromthespecifiedrangeofmeasures.
TheEraseMeasurecommandcanalsobeusedtoremove
onlyaspecifictypeofdata.UnliketheDeleteMeasure
command,executingtheEraseMeasurecommanddoesnot
causethesubsequentmeasuresofmusicaldatatobemoved
forward.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(Track0116),
mastertrackthatcontainsthemeasuresofdatayou
wanttoerase.
Note:NotedatacanalsobeerasedusingShift/EraseNote.
Usethiscommandwhenyouwishtoeraseaspecificrange
ofnotes,ortoerasenotesfromaspecificBeat.Tick.
Note:ControlChangedatacanalsobeerasedusingErase
ControlData.Usethiswhenyouwishtoeraseaspecific
typeofcontrolchange,ortoerasecontrolchangedatafrom
aspecificBeat.Tickrange.
Delete Measure
DeleteMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommanddeletesthespecifiedmeasures.
WhentheDeleteMeasurecommandisexecuted,the
musicaldatafollowingthedeletedmeasureswillbemoved
towardsthebeginningofthesequence.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(Track0116)
thatcontainsthemeasuresyouwanttodelete.
2. SelectDeleteMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
2. SelectEraseMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
3. InFromMeasure,selectthefirstmeasurethatyouwish
todelete,andinToEndofMeasure,selectthelastmea
surethatyouwishtodelete.
3. InFromMeasureselectthefirstmeasuretobeerased,
andinToEndofMeasureselectthelastmeasuretobe
erased.
(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbe
settotherangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbe
therangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. Specifythetrack(s)onwhichyouwanttoexecutethe
command.
4. IfyouareerasingMIDIdata,useKindtospecifythe
typeofdatathatwillbeerased.
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,thecommand
willbeexecutedonlyonthedataofthetrackyouselectedin
TrackSelect.
Allwillerasealltypesofdatainthattrack,Notewillerase
notedata,ControlChangewillerasecontrolchangedata,
IfyoucheckAllTracks,thecommandwillbeexecutedon
thedataofalltracks.
177
Sequencer mode
After
Delete
6. Specifythetrack(s)forwhichyouwanttoexecutethe
command.
2
Ifinstep4youuncheckAllTracksandexecutethis
operation,themeasureswillnotbedeletedfromthe
mastertrack.Timesignatureandtempodatawill
remainunchanged,andthetimesignatureandtempo
ofthemeasuresthatweremovedforwardasaresultof
theDeleteoperationwillchange.
Example:
timesignatureoftheinsertedmeasureswillchange,andthe
specifiedtimesignaturewillapplytoalltracksforthose
measures.
When measures 2 and 3 (3/4 time) of track 2 are deleted, the measures that were
at 4 and 5 are moved forward, and their time signature will change to 3/4.
Track 1
1 (4/4)
2 (3/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (4/4)
5 (4/4)
Track 2
1 (4/4)
2 (3/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (4/4)
5 (4/4)
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,themeasureswill
beinsertedintothetrackthatsselectedinTrackSelect.Be
awarethatatthistime,theplaybackdatathatfollowsthe
insertlocationwillmovetowardtheendofthesong
accordingtothenumberofinsertedmeasures,butthetime
signatureandtempowillnotmove.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,themeasureswillbeinsertedinto
alltracksincludingtheMasterTrack.Theplaybackdatain
subsequentmeasureswillplayjustasitdidbeforethis
commandwasexecuted.
Before Delete
2 (4/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
Track 2 1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
Before Insert
Track 2
1 (4/4)
2 (3/4)
3 (3/4)
Track 1
1 (4/4)
2 (3/4)
3 (3/4)
After Delete
4 (4/4)
5 (4/4)
Ifinstep4youcheckAllTracksandexecutethis
operation,thespecifiedmeasuresofmusicaldatawill
bedeletedfromalltracksincludingthemastertrack,
andthetimesignatureandtempowillalsomove
forwardbythenumberofmeasuresthatweredeleted.
Ifcontroldataextendsacrossalinebetweenmeasures
thatweredeletedandmeasuresthatwerenotdeleted,
onlythedatawithintherangebeingdeletedwillbe
erased.
2 (4/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
Track 1 1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
After Insert
Measures 4 and 5 will use the previously specified
time signature.
Time signature = 7/8
Track 1 1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
Track 2 1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (3/4)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
Before Insert
Insert Measure
InsertMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommandinsertsthespecifiednumberofmeasures
intothespecifiedtrack.
WhenyouexecutetheInsertMeasurecommand,the
musicaldatafollowingtheinsertlocationwillbemoved
backward.
Ifyouinsertmeasuresbetweennoteeventsthatare
connectedbyatie,anoteoffwillbecreatedimmediately
beforetheinsertedmeasure,andthesubsequentportion
willbedeleted.
1. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrack(Track0116)
inwhichyouwanttoinsertdata.
2. SelectInsertMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
Track 2 1 (4/4)
2 (7/8)
3 (7/8)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
Track 1 1 (4/4)
2 (7/8)
3 (7/8)
4 (5/4)
5 (2/4)
After Insert
Measures 2 and 3 will be 7/8, and measures 4 and 5
will be the previously specified time signature.
Repeat Measure
RepeatMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommandrepeatedlyinsertsthespecifiedmeasuresfor
thespecifiednumberoftimes.
WhenyouexecutetheRepeatMeasurecommand,the
measureswillbeinsertedfollowingthemeasurespecified
byToEndofMeasure,andmusicaldatafollowingthe
inserteddatawillbemovedbackward.Itisconvenientto
usethiscommandwhenyouhaveasongthatyouplayback
withTrackPlayLoop(SeqP09(10)b)turnedon,andwish
toexpanditintomusicaldata.
1. UseTrackSelecttochoosetheMIDItrack(Track0116)
thatyouwanttoinsertdatainto.
2. SelectRepeatMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
3. InAtMeasure,specifythemeasurelocationatwhich
thedatawillbeinserted.
(ThemeasureyouspecifiedinTrackEditpageFrom
Measurewillbesetasadefault.)
4. InLength,specifythenumberofmeasuresthatwillbe
inserted.
178
5. InMeter,specifythetimesignatureofthemeasures
thatwillbeinserted.
3. InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specifythe
rangeofmeasuresthatwillberepeated.
Ifyouwanttheinsertedmeasurestomatchtheexistingtime
signature,specify**/**.Withanysettingotherthan**/**,the
(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbe
settotherangeyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. InTimes,specifythenumberofrepetitions.
ForexampleifyousetFromMeasureto001,ToEndof
Measureto004,andTimesto2,themusicaldataof
measures14willbeinsertedintomeasures58.Theresult
willbethatmeasures14willbeplayedtwice.
Move Measure
Thiscommandmovesthespecifiedmeasuresof
performancedatatoanothermeasure.
1. SelectMoveMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
5. Specifythetrack(s)onwhichyouwanttoexecutethe
command.
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,theperformance
datawillbeinsertedintothetrackyouspecifiedinTrack
Select.Beawarethatinthiscase,theperformancedata
followingtheinsertpositionwillmovebackward(i.e.,
towardtheendofthesong)bythenumberofinserted
measures,butthetimesignatureandtempowillnotmove.
IfyouexecutewithAllTrackschecked,theperformance
datawillbeinsertedintoalltracks,includingthemaster
track.Theperformancedatafollowingtheinserted
measureswillplaybackinthesamewayasitdidbefore.
Copy Measure
2. InFrom:Trackselectthemovesourcetrack.
CopyMeasureisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
(Bydefault,thiswillbethetrackyouselectedinTrack
Select.)
Thiscommandcopiesthemeasuresofmusicaldata
specifiedastheFromsourcetothebeginningofthemeasure
specifiedastheTolocation.
IfAllTracksunchecked,onlydatafromtheselectedtrack
willbemoved.
WhenyouexecutetheCopyMeasurecommand,theexisting
trackdataatthecopydestinationwillberewritten.
1. Selectthecopysourcesong.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,musicaldataofalltracksincluding
themastertrackwillbemoved.
3. InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specifythe
rangeofmeasuresthatwillbemoved.
(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbe
therangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
2. SelectCopyMeasuretoopenthedialogbox.
4. InTo:Track(ifAllTracksisunchecked)tospecifythe
movedestinationtrack,andMeasuretospecifythe
measureatwhichthedatawillbeinserted.
IfyouexecutethiswithModeStay,playbackdatalocated
afterthemovesourcemeasuresandplaybackdatalocated
afterthemovedestinationmeasureswillnotmove;itwill
staywhereitis.
3. InFrom:Trackselectthecopysourcetrack.
(Bydefault,thiswillbethetrackyouselectedinTrack
Select.)
IfyouexecutethiswithModeShift,playbackdatalocated
afterthemovesourcemeasureswillmovetowardthe
beginningofthesongbythenumberofmeasuresthatwere
moved.Playbackdatalocatedafterthemovedestination
measureswillmovetowardtheendofthesongbythe
numberofmeasuresthatweremoved.
IfyoucheckAllTracks,themusicaldataofalltracks
includingthemastertrackwillbecopied.
5. SetOverlaptospecifywhatwillhappenifthereis
datainthemovedestinationmeasuresandyouve
specifiedModeStay.IfyouchooseMerge,themove
sourcedataandmovedestinationdatawillbecom
bined.IfyouchooseOverwrite,themovesourcedata
willoverwrite(replace)themovedestinationdata.
4. InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specifythe
rangeofcopysourcemeasures.
Beawarethattimesignatureandtempodatawillnotbe
moved.
(Bydefault,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbe
therangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
6. ToexecutetheMoveMeasurecommand,presstheOK
button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
IfyouexecutewithAllTracksunchecked,onlytheselected
trackwillbecopied.Notethatthetimesignatureandtempo
willnotbecopied.
5. UseTo:Songtospecifythecopydestinationsong,
Track(ifAllTracksisunchecked)tospecifythecopy
destinationtrack,andMeasuretospecifythestarting
measureatwhichthecopieddatawillbeinserted.
Example: When you copy measures 57 of track 1 to the third measure of track 2,
measures 35 of track 2 will be rewritten.
Track 1
(source)
1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (4/4)
4 (3/4)
5 (3/4)
6 (3/4)
7 (4/4)
Track 2
(destination)
1 (4/4)
2 (4/4)
3 (4/4)
4 (3/4)
5 (3/4)
6 (3/4)
7 (4/4)
179
Sequencer mode
CreateControlDataisavailableonallofthetabsofthe
TrackEditpage.
Before Move
Track 1
1 (Tr1)
2 (Tr1)
3 (Tr1)
4 (Tr1)
5 (Tr1)
Track 2
1 (Tr2)
2 (Tr2)
3 (Tr2)
4 (Tr2)
5 (Tr2)
Thiscommandcreatesthespecifiedtypeofdata(control
change,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempo)intheselected
regionofatrack.
1. InTrackSelect,selecttheMIDItrackonwhichyou
wishtoperformtheCreateControlDatacommand.
Track 2
1 (Tr1)
1 (Tr2)
2 (Tr1)
2 (Tr2)
Ifyouwishtomodifytempodata,selectMasterTrackasthe
track.Inthiscase,thestep4itemKindwillbesettoTempo.
5 (Tr1)
No data
No data
3 (Tr1+2)
4 (Tr1+2)
No data
No data
3 (Tr1)
4 (Tr1)
5 (Tr2)
2. SelectCreateCtrlDatatoopenthedialogbox.
Track 2
1 (Tr1)
1 (Tr2)
2 (Tr1)
2 (Tr2)
5 (Tr1)
5 (Tr2)
Mode: Shift
Before Move
Track 1
1 (Tr1)
2 (Tr1)
3 (Tr1)
4 (Tr1)
5 (Tr1)
Track 2
1 (Tr2)
2 (Tr2)
3 (Tr2)
4 (Tr2)
5 (Tr2)
3. Specifytherangeintowhichthecontroldatawillbe
inserted.
After Move
Track 2
1 (Tr2)
2 (Tr2)
3 (Tr1)
Track 1
1 (Tr1)
2 (Tr1)
3 (Tr1)
4 (Tr1)
5 (Tr2)
No data
No data
6 (Tr2)
7 (Tr2)
InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specifythe
measures,andinBeat.Tick,specifythebeatandclock.(By
default,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbesetto
therangeyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. SetKindtothetypeofmusicaldata(event)thatyou
wishtocreate.
Controlchange:Controlchangedatawillbeinserted.Inthis
case,use#tospecifythecontrolchangenumber.
AfterTouch:Aftertouchdatawillbeinserted.
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbeinserted.
Tempo:Tempodatawillbeinserted(ifyouveselectedthe
mastertrack).
5. InStartValue,selectthestartingvalueofthecontrol
data.InEndValue,selecttheendingvalueofthecon
troldata.
Bydefault,theStartValuewillbesettothevalueofthe
existingdataatthestartlocation.Ifyouwishtocreate
controldatathatchangessmoothlyfromthestarting
location,youcanleavetheStartValueunchanged,andset
onlytheEndValue.
Example:
After touch
End location
127
100
End Value
Previous data
Start Value
default value
Location
0
3:00
3:24
3:48
3:72
4:00
4:24
4:48
WhenyouexecuteCreateControlData,alargeamountof
sequencermemorywillbeconsumed.Forthisreasonit
maynotbepossibletoexecutethiscommandifthereisa
limitedamountofmemoryremaining.Insuchcases,first
useQuantizetoquantizethedataandremoveunnecessary
controldata.Alternatively,youcouldquantizethedata
thatwasinsertedbytheCreateControlDatacommand.
180
Quantize
EraseControlDataisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
QuantizeisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrackEdit
page.
Thiscommanderasesdatasuchascontrolchanges,after
touch,pitchbend,ortempointhespecifiedrange.
ThiscommandcorrectsthetimingofMIDIdataofthetype
youspecify(notedata,controlchange,aftertouch,pitch
bend,programchange,etc.)inthetrack.
1. InTrackSelect,selectthetrackfromwhichyouwishto
erasecontroldata.
Ifyouwishtoerasetempodata,selectMasterTrack.Inthis
case,theKinditeminstep4willbeTempo.
2. SelectEraseCtrlDatatoopenthedialogbox.
WhenyouexecutetheQuantizeoperation,themusicaldata
willbeaffectedasfollows:
WhenyouexecuteQuantizeonnotedata,thetimingof
thenoteonwillbecorrected,butthelength(durationof
thenote)willnotbeaffected.
IftheQuantizeresolutionissettoHi,thetimingwillbe
adjustedtounitsofthebaseresolution(/480),sonote
datawillnotbeaffected.However,continuouscontroller
datasuchasjoystickoraftertouchwhichoccupiesalarge
amountofmemorywillbeprocessedsothattwoormore
dataeventsofanidenticaltypeexistingatasingle
intervalofthetimingresolutionwillbecombinedintoa
singleevent,thusconservingmemory.
Similarly,twoormoreidenticaldataeventsexistingatthe
exactsametimewillbecombinedintoone,alsoconserving
memory.
1. InTrackSelect,specifythetrack.
3. Specifytherangefromwhichyouwishtoerasecontrol
data.
2. SelectQuantizetoopenthedialogbox.
InFromMeasuretoToEndofMeasurespecifythe
measures,andinBeat.Tickspecifythebeatandclock.(By
default,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbethe
rangethatwasspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. SetKindtothetypeofmusicaldata(event)thatyou
wishtoerase.
Controlchange:Controlchangedatawillbeerased.Inthis
case,use#tospecifythecontrolchangenumber.
AfterTouch:Aftertouchdatawillbeerased.
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbeerased.
Tempo:Tempodatawillbeerased.(Ifyouveselectedthe
mastertrack)
Note:Ifyouwishtoeraseallcontrolchangedatafrom
specifiedmeasures,youcanalsouseEraseMeasureandset
KindtoControlChange.However,thisEraseControlData
commandallowsyoutospecifytherangeusingBeat.Tick,
andalsotoeraseonlyspecifictypesofcontrolchangedata.
3. Specifytherangethatwillbequantized.
InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specifythe
measures.InBeat.Tickspecifythebeatandclock.(By
default,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbethe
rangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. InKind,selectthetypeofmusicaldata(events)that
youwishtoquantize.
All:QuantizationwillbeappliedtoallperformanceMIDI
data.
Note:Quantizationwillbeappliedonlytonotedata.Use
BottomandToptospecifytherangeofnotes.Bottom
specifiesthelowestnotethatwillbeaffected,andTop
specifiesthehighestnote.Youcanusethiswhenyouwant
toquantizeonlyaspecificnoteornotes(forexample,just
thesnaresoundsofadrumtrack).Ifyouwanttoquantize
allnotes,settheseparametersC1andG9respectively.
ControlChange:Quantizationwillbeappliedtocontrol
changes.Ifyouwanttoquantizeonlyaspecificcontrol
change,specifythenumber(No.).Ifyouwanttoquantizeall
controlchanges,selectAll.
AfterTouch:QuantizebothChannelPressureand
PolyphonicKeyPressuremessages.
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbequantized.
ProgramChange:Programchangedatawillbequantized.
5. InResolution,specifythetimingresolutiontowhich
thedatawillbecorrected.
181
Sequencer mode
Bysettingalowerresolutionyoucansavemorememory,
butthetimingoftheplaybackmaynotbeacceptable.
Shift/Erase Note
6. InOffset,specifythenumberofclockticksbywhich
thedatawillbemovedforwardorbackwardrelativeto
thestandardtiming.
Shift/EraseNoteisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Asettingof240willbe,and120willbe.Positive(+)
settingswilladjustthedataforward,andnegative()
settingswilladjustthedatabackward.Thisallowsyouto
simulatepushingordraggingthebeat.
7. InIntensity,specifythedegreeofsensitivitytowhich
thetimingwillbecorrected;i.e.,howclosetotheloca
tionsspecifiedbysteps5and6thedatawillbemoved.
Thiscommandshifts(moves)orerasesspecifiednote
numbersinaselectedtrackandoverarangeofmeasures.
1. InTrackSelect,choosetheMIDItrackonwhichyou
wishtoexecutetheShift/EraseNotecommand.
2. SelectShift/EraseNotetoopenthedialogbox.
Withasettingof0,nocorrectionwilltakeplace.Witha
settingof100,thedatawillbemovedallthewaytothe
timingintervalsspecifiedbysteps5and6.
8. UseSwingtoaddasenseofswingtotherhythm.For
example,thisprovidesaneasywaytogiveaslight
shufflegroovetoasquare16beatrhythm.
Settingsotherthan0%willaddasenseofswingby
adjustingthepositionofthenotesatevennumberedbeats
relativetothespecifiedResolution.Withasettingof+100%,
thesenoteswillbemovedonethirdofthewaytoward
intervalsofthespecifiedResolution.Withasettingof
+300%,notesofevennumberedbeatswillbemovedallthe
waytothenextevennumberedbeat.
*
ByvaryingtheOffsetandIntensitysettingsyoucan
createquantizeeffectssuchasthefollowing.
100%
100%
Quantize Resolution =
Offset = 0, Intensity = 100%
50%
+120
Quantize Resolution =
Offset = +120, Intensity = 75%
+120
NoteRange:Bottomspecifiesthelowerlimit,andTop
specifiestheupperlimit.Ifyouwishtoeditallnotes,set
BottomtoC1andToptoG9.
50%
100%
Quantize Resolution =
Offset = +120, Intensity = 100%
+120
+120
75%
75%
+120
+120
100%
100%
60
100%
100%
75%
Quantize Resolution =
Offset = 60, Intensity = 100%
InFromMeasureandToEndofMeasure,specifythe
measures.InBeat.Tick,specifythebeatandclock.(By
default,FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbethe
rangethatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. Specifytherangeofnotesthatyouwishtoshiftor
erase.
Original
Quantize Resolution =
Offset = 0, Intensity = 50%
3. Specifytherangeinwhichyouwishtoshiftorerase
notenumbers.
60
ByvaryingtheSwingsettingsyoucancreateeffectssuch
asthefollowing.
When Resolution =
beat 1
beat 2
beat 3
0%
Swing = 0%
Theamountofshiftissetinsemitonestepsoverarangeof
127to+127.+1willshiftthenoteasemitoneupward.
6. SelecteitherReplacetomovethenotenumbers,orCre
atetogenerateadditionalnotes.
100%
60
Shifting notes
5. InShiftNote,specifytheamountbywhichyouwishto
movethenote.
beat 4
Forexampleifyouareeditingatrackthatusesadrum
program,youcanuseReplacetoexchangethecurrentsnare
soundforadifferentsnaresoundassignedtoadifferentkey,
oruseCreatetoaddasoundeffectatadifferentnote#tothe
snaresound.Alternatively,youcanuseCreatetoaddan
octavedoublingtoanexistingguitarphrase,etc.
7. ToexecutetheShiftNotecommand,presstheOKbut
ton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
+100%
Swing = +100%
100%
Swing = 100%
+200%
Swing = +200%
Swing = +300%
+300%
182
Erasing notes
8. CheckEraseNote.
Ifyouwishtoeraseallnotedatainthespecifiedrangeof
measures,youcanalsousetheEraseMeasurecommand
andsetKindtoNote.However,thisShift/EraseNote
commandletsyouspecifytheBeat.Tickrange,andtoerase
onlyspecificrangesofnotedata.
Modify Velocity
ModifyVelocityisavailableonallofthetabsoftheTrack
Editpage.
Thiscommandcreatesuniversalsystemexclusivemessages
orKROMEparameterchangemessagesinthespecified
regionofaMIDItrack.
Thiscommandmodifiesthevelocityvaluesofnotesinthe
specifiedareasothattheywillchangeovertimeaccording
toaselectedcurve.
1. InTrackSelect,specifythetrackwhosevelocitywillbe
modified.
1. UseTrackSelecttospecifytheMIDItrackinwhichyou
wanttocreateexclusivedata.
2. ChooseCreateExclDatatoopenthedialogbox.
2. SelectModifyVelocitytoopenthedialogbox.
3. Specifytherangeinwhichnotevelocitywillbemodi
fied.
FromMeasureandToEndofMeasurespecifythemeasure,
andBeat.Tickspecifythebeatandclock.(Bydefault,From
MeasureandToEndofMeasurewillbesettotherange
thatyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. Specifytherangeofnotesthatwillbeaffectedbythe
ModifyVelocitycommand.
NoteRange:Bottomisthelowerlimit,andTopistheupper
limit.Ifyouwishtoeditallnotes,setBottomtoC1andTop
toG9.
3. Specifytheregionintowhichyouwanttoinsertuni
versalsystemexclusivemessagesorKROMEparameter
changemessages.
UseFromMeasureandToMeasuretospecifythemeasures,
andBeat.Ticktospecifythebeatandclock.(Bydefault,
FromMeasureandToMeasurewillbesettotheregionyou
specifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. UseKindtospecifythetypeofuniversalsystemexclu
sivemessageorKROMEparameterchangemessage
thatyouwanttocreate.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUniversalsystem
exclusiveonpage 365.
5. InVelocityStartValue,specifythevalueatwhichthe
velocitydatawillstart,andinEndValue,specifythe
finalvelocityvalue.
5. UseStartValuetospecifythestartingvalueoftheuni
versalsystemexclusivemessageorKROMEparameter
changemessage,andEndValuetospecifytheending
value.
6. InIntensity,specifythedegreetowhichthevelocity
datawillbeadjustedtowardthecurveyouspecifyin
step7.
6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCreateExclusive
Dataoperation.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
Withasettingof0[%],thevelocitywillnotchange.Witha
settingof100[%],thevelocitywillbeexactlyasdescribedby
thecurve.
7. Curveletsyouselectfromsixtypesofcurvetospecify
howthevelocitywillchangeovertime.
*
Example: The parameter is EQ High Gain. Starting location is 3:48, ending location is 4:24,
and end value is set to +12.0. This will cause the EQ High Gain value to begin
changing from 3:48, and reach a value of +12.0 at 4:24.
Start location
EQ High Gain
End location
+18.0
End Value
+12.0
Thesixcurvesareasfollows.
0
For a Start Velocity of 1 and End Velocity of 127
Curve 1
Previous data
Curve 2
Curve 3
127
127
127
Velocity
Velocity
Velocity
Location
-18.0
3:00
1
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Curve 4
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Curve 5
127
127
Velocity
Velocity
Velocity
Start
Measure
End
Measure
Start
Measure
3:24
3:48
3:72
4:00
4:24
4:48
End
Measure
Rndm
127
Start
Measure
Start Value
default value
End
Measure
RANDOM
Start
Measure
End
Measure
183
Sequencer mode
Copy MFX/TFX
Thiscommanderases(deletes)universalsystemexclusive
messagesorKROMEparameterchangemessagesfromthe
specifiedregion.
CopyMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX/LFO
pages.
1. UseTrackSelecttospecifytheMIDItrackfromwhich
youwanttoeraseexclusivedata.
2. ChooseEraseExclDatatoopenthedialogbox.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyMFX/TFXon
page 67.
However,theMIDIcontrolchannelspecifiedinCtrlChof
theMFX1TFXpagewillnotbecopied.
Swap MFX/TFX
SwapMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX/LFO
pages.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapMFX/TFXon
page 67.
However,theMIDIcontrolchannelspecifiedinCtrlChof
theMFX1TFXpagewillnotbeswapped.
Write FX Preset
3. Specifytheregionfromwhichyouwanttoeraseuni
versalsystemexclusivemessagesorKROMEparameter
changemessages.
Note:UseFromMeasureandToMeasuretospecifythe
measures,andBeat.Ticktospecifythebeatandclock.(By
default,FromMeasureandToMeasurewillbesettothe
regionyouspecifiedintheTrackEditpage.)
4. UseKindtospecifythetypeofuniversalsystemexclu
sivemessageorKROMEparameterchangemessage
thatyouwanttoerase.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUniversalsystem
exclusiveonpage 365.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheEraseExclusiveData
operation.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancel
button.
Ifyouwanttoerasealluniversalsystemexclusivemessages
orKROMEparameterchangemessagesfromspecified
measuresinasingleoperation,youcanuseEraseMeasure
withKindsettoExclusive;howeverinthatcase,youwont
beabletouseBeat.Tickwhenspecifyingtherangefor
erasure.
WriteFXPresetisavailableonalloftheeffectsparameter
editingpages,includingIFX15,MFX1and2,andTFX.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWriteFXPreseton
page 67.
184
2. SelectPutEffectSettingtoTracktoopenthedialog
box.(Thevaluesinthedialogboxaresettingsforthe
exampledescribedinstep1.)
5. IntheP8:Routing/IFXpage,selectthemenucommand
PutEffectSettingtoTracktoaccessthedialogbox.
6. Specifythelocationatwhichtheexclusivemessagefor
theeffectwillbeinserted.
Effect:IFX3
To:Song:000
Track:03
Measure:001
Beat.Tick:01.000
3. UseEffecttoselectthedesiredeffect.
7. PresstheOKbutton.
4. UseTo:Songtospecifythesongintowhichthesettings
willbeinserted,Tracktospecifytheinsertdestination
track,MeasuretospecifythemeasureandBeat.Tickto
specifythebeatandclockatwhichthesettingswillbe
inserted.
8. Specifytheeffectthatyouwanttouseformeasure9
andfollowing.
Theinsertedeventsareonlytheeffecttypeandeffect
parameters.Settingssuchaseffecton/offandbypass
mustberecordedinrealtime.
Note:TurnbacktheLocation,andplaythesongtoverify
thattheeffectisswitchedasyouintend.
YoucanalsousetheP6:TrackEditmenucommandEvent
EdittoverifythataparameterchangeSystemExclusive
message(Exclusive)hasbeeninserted.
Note:Ifapatternhadbeeninsertedatthesamelocation
(whereyouinsertedtheexclusivedata),thatpatternwillbe
expandedtonotedata.
GototheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXsetup,andchoose032:
StereoFlangerforIFX3.
IntheP8:Routing/IFXIFX3,settheparametersasdesired.
9. IntheP8:Routing/IFX,choosethePutEffectSettingto
Trackmenucommandtoopenthedialogbox.
10. Specifythelocationatwhichtheexclusivemessagefor
theeffectwillbeinserted.
Effect:IFX3
To:Song:000
Track:03
Measure:009
Beat.Tick:01.000
11. PresstheOKbutton.
12. Whenyouplaybackafterexecutingthesecommands,
theeffectontrack3willchangeto032:StereoFlanger
atmeasure9.
13. IfyoupresstheCOMPAREbutton(itwilllightup)and
playback,theplaybackwilloccurasitdidbeforeyou
executedPutEffectSettingtoTrack.
14. IntheP6:TrackEditTrackEditpage,setTrackSelect
toTrack03,andchoosetheEventEditmenucommand
toaccesstheeventeditscreen.(IntheSetEventFilters
dialogbox,checkExclusive.)
NoticethataMIDIparameterchangeSystemExclusive
messageisinsertedatthebeginningandatmeasure9of
track3.
4. MakesurethatyouveselectedTrack02inTrackSelect,
andrecordasdesired.
1)CreatesongS001.
185
Sequencer mode
2)UsetheCopyFromSongmenucommandtocopyfrom
S000.
Event Edit
Insong001,maketheeffectsettingsthatyouwanttouse
frommeasure9.GototheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetup,
andchoose032:StereoFlangerforIFX3.
Here,youcaneditindividualeventsofthemusicaldataina
pattern.
IntheP8:Routing/IFXIFX3,settheparametersasdesired.
4. SelectPutEffectSettingtoTracktoopenthedialog
box.
5. Inserttheeffectsettingsyoucreatedinsong001into
song000.
UsePatternandPatternSelecttospecifythepattern,and
thenselectthiscommand.
TheremainingstepsarethesameaswhenEventEditinga
track.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEventEditon
page 169.
Piano Roll
Effect:IFX3
To:Song:000
Track:03
Measure:009
Beat.Tick:01.000
Thisisthepianorolldialogboxforenteringapattern.The
PianoRolldialogboxprovidesadetailedgraphicviewof
eventdatasuchasnotes,velocities,andcontrolchanges.
Hereyoucanalsomodify,delete,orcreatetheseevents.
6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand.
7. Afterexecution,selectsong000andplayitback.The
effectfortrack3willchangeto032:StereoFlangerat
measure9.
8. Insong000,youcanpresstheCOMPAREbutton(it
willlightup)andplaybacktohearthesongasitwas
beforeyouexecutedPutEffectSettingtoTrack.
Pattern Parameter
Thiscommandspecifiesthenumberofmeasuresandthe
timesignatureoftheselectedpattern.
1. UsePatternandPatternSelecttospecifythepattern.
2. SelectPatternParametertoopenthedialogbox.
YoucanusetheCOMPAREbuttontocomparethestateof
thetrackbeforeandafterexecution.
Note:IntheP6:TrackEditTrackEditpageofsong000,set
TrackSelecttoTrack03andchoosetheEventEditmenu
commandtoaccesstheEventEditscreen.(IntheSetEvent
Filtersdialogbox,checkExclusive.)
NoticethataMIDIparameterchangeSystemExclusive
messageisinsertedatmeasure9oftrack3.
3. InLength,specifythenumberofmeasuresinthepat
tern.
4. InMeter,specifythetimesignatureofthepattern.
However,thistimesignatureisonlytemporary,andwhen
youputorcopythepatterninatrackofasong,the
patternwillplayaccordingtothetimesignatureofthat
measure.
Erase Pattern
Thiscommanderasesthedatafromtheselectedpattern.
1. UsePatternandPatternSelecttospecifythepattern.
2. SelectErasePatterntoopenthedialogbox.
Time
signature
3. IfyoucheckAllPatterns,alluserpatternsinthesong
willbeerased.
Length
(beats, clocks)
3. Theremainingstepsarethesameaswhensteprecord
ingonatrack.
Refertosteps3andfollowinginStepRecording(seeStep
Recordingonpage 167).However,steprecordingapattern
differsfromsteprecordingatrackinthatwhenyoureach
theendofthepattern,youwillreturntothebeginningand
continuerecording,inthiswaycontinuingtoaddmore
data.
186
IfAllPatternsisnotchecked,onlythepatternspecifiedin
step1willbeerased.
Copy Pattern
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsandmusicaldataofthe
selectedpatterntoanotherpattern.
Userpatternsbelongtoaparticularsong,butyoucanuse
theCopyPatterncommandtousethesamepatternin
anothersong.
Althoughpresetpatternscannotbeedited,youcancopya
presetpatterntoauserpattern.There,youcaneditandsave
itasauserpattern.Beawarethatwhenyouexecutethe
CopyPatternoperation,thepatternsettingsandmusical
dataofthecopydestinationwillbeerased.
4. InSong,selectthegetsourcesong.
5. InTrack,selectthegetsourcetrack.
1. InFrom(Song***):Pattern,specifythecopysourcepat
tern.(Bydefault,thiswillbethesongandpatternthat
wasselectedinthePatternEditpage.)
2. InTo:SongandPattern,specifythecopydestination
songandpattern.
ForPattern,onlyuserpatternsU00U99canbespecified.
Bounce Pattern
Thiscommandcombinesthemusicaldataofasource
patternandadestinationpattern,andplacesthecombined
musicaldatainthedestination.Thetimesignatureand
lengthofthepatternfollowingexecutionwillbeaccording
tothesettingsofthedestinationpattern.UnliketheTrack
Bounceoperation,themusicaldataofthebouncesourcewill
notbeerased.
IfMIDIcontroldataexistsintheselectedpatternandinthe
bouncedestinationpattern,theresultingplaybackfollowing
thebounceoperationmayproduceunexpectedresults.We
recommendthatyouuseEventEdittopreparetheMIDI
controldataofthetwopatternsbeforeexecutingtheBounce
Patterncommand.
1. PatternandPatternSelecttospecifythebouncesource
pattern.
2. SelectBouncePatterntoopenthedialogbox.
6. InMeasure,specifythefirstmeasureoftheget
source.
Put To Track
Thiscommandplacesapatternintoatrack.
UnliketheCopytoTrack,thiscommandonlyplacesthe
patternnumberinthesong,sothatwhenplaybackreaches
thatpoint,thepatternwillberecalled.Themusicaldataof
thepatternwillnotactuallyexistinthetrack.
Bycreatingpatternsthatcontainfrequentlyusedphrasesor
drumpatterns,andthenplacingthemonthetracks,youcan
conservememory.
Beawarethatwhenyoueditapattern,alllocationsinthe
songwherethatpatternhasbeenplacedwillbeaffected.
WhenyouexecutethePuttoTrackcommand,themusical
datawillbeaffectedasfollows.
Musicaldatapreviouslyexistingattheputdestination
willbeerased.
Thepatternthatyouputwillplaybackaccordingtothe
timesignaturethatisspecifiedbythemeasuresofthe
putdestination.
Controldatasuchaspitchbendetc.previouslyexistingin
thetrackwillberesetimmediatelybeforethemeasureat
whichthepatternwasput.Ifyouwishtousecontrol
datasuchaspitchbendinthemeasuresinwhicha
patternisput,youmustfirstwritethecontroldatainto
thepattern(seeControldatainpatternrecordingon
page 156).
Todeleteapatternthathasbeenplacedinatrackyoucan
useEraseMeasure,specifyingtheareainwhichthepattern
wasput,andsettingKindtoAll.
Example: Pattern 20 has been Put at measures 2, 4, and 6 of track 10. When those
measures are reached, pattern 20 is called and its data is played.
3. InFrom(Song***)Pattern,selectthebouncesourcepat
tern.(Bydefault,thesongandpatternthatareselected
inthePatternEditpagewillbechosen.)
4. InTo:SongandPattern,selectthebouncedestination
songandpattern.ForPattern,onlyuserpatternsU00
U99canbespecified.
Track 10
(Drums)
Pattern 20
1. SelectPutToTracktoopenthedialogbox.
187
Sequencer mode
4. InMeasure,specifythefirstmeasureoftheputdesti
nation.
Whenyouexecutethecommand,Measurewill
automaticallyupdate.Ifyouwishto,youcancontinue
puttingthepattern.Toexitthecommand,presstheExit
button.
Copy To Track
Thiscommandcopiesthespecifiedareaofmusicaldata
fromthespecifiedpatterntoatrackasmusicaldata.
UnlikethePutToTrackcommand,thiscommandactually
writesthemusicaldataofthepatternintothetrack,sothat
youcaneditthecopieddatainthetrack.Evenifyoulater
editthecopysourcepattern,themusicaldataofthesong
willnotbeaffected.
WhenyouexecutetheCopytoTrackcommand,themusical
datawillbeaffectedasfollows.
Musicaldatapreviouslyexistinginthecopydestination
measureswillbeerased.
Themusicaldatathatiscopiedwillplaybackaccording
tothetimesignaturespecifiedatthecopydestination
measures.
Example: Copy the musical data of pattern 41 to measure 2.
Before Copy
Pattern 41
After Copy
5. UsetheToDrumTrackPatternSelectfieldtospecify
thedestinationuserdrumtrackpatternnumber.When
youexecutethiscommand,thedatawillbeoverwritten
ontothecopydestinationnumber.
6. IfyouchecktheAllPatternsavailableinSong***item,
allpatternsinthesongthatcontainnoteeventswillbe
copied,startingatthenumberyouspecifiedinstep3.
7. IfyouexecutewithNoteOnlychecked,onlythenote
eventswillbecopied.
PresstheOKbuttonortheENTERbuttontoexecute.Ifyou
decidenottoexecute,presstheCancelbuttonortheEXIT
button.
AsdescribedinDrumTrackfunctionsettingsinProgram
modeonpage 100oftheOperationguide,settheDrum
TrackPatternBanktoUser,andsetPatternNo.totheuser
DrumTrackpatternyouconverted.ThenplaytheDrum
Trackpattern.
Program
/Combination
Song
Drum Track
TheprocedureisthesameasforthePuttoTrackcommand.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePutToTrackon
page 1879.
188
Preset
Pattern
Track/RPPR
Drum Track
100
User
Pattern
User
Drum Track
Pattern
Convert to
Drum Track Pattern
Sequencer memory
(Not saved internally;
save on SD card.)
Ifthereisinsufficientdrumpatternmemoryor
insufficientpatternlocations,anerrormessageofNot
enoughDrumTrackpatternmemoryorNotenough
DrumTrackpatternlocationsavailablewillappear,
andthecommandcannotbeexecuted.
Tip:Itsagoodideatoconvertdrumpatternsthatyouuse
frequently.UseLoadDrumTrackPatterntoloadthem.
thetrackandeffectsettingsofthesongspecifiedforStep01
willbecopiedtothebeginningoftheresultingsong,andall
trackandeffectsettingsofsubsequentsongswillusetheset
tingsofthesongforStep01.
SettingsoftheToneAdjustfunctionwillnotbe
reflectedinthisconversion.
1. Selectthecuelist(C00C19)thatyouwanttoconvertto
asong.
2. SelectConverttoSongtoopenthedialogbox.
1. UseSelectRangeFrom(DrumTrack)andTo(Drum
Track)tospecifythecopysourceuserdrumtrackpat
tern.
TheuserdrumtrackpatternsbetweenFromandTowillbe
loaded.Ifyouwanttoloadonlyonepattern,setFromand
Totothesamepatternnumber.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,thedatawillbe
overwrittenontothecopydestinationnumber.
2. UseLoadto(Song***)tospecifytheloaddestination
userpatternnumber.
3. InToSong,specifytheconversiondestinationsong
number.
Ifyouselectanewsong,aconfirmationdialogboxwill
appear.
PresstheOKbuttontocreateanewsong,intowhichthecue
listwillbeconverted.
Ifyouselectedasongthatalreadycontainssettingsand
performancedata,executingthiscommandwillerasethe
dataofthatsongandreplaceitwiththedatathatwas
convertedfromthecuelist.Usethiscommandwithcaution.
Afterexecutingthiscommand,youcanpressthe
COMPAREbuttontoreturntothestatepriortoexecution.
TheConverttoSongcommandconvertsacuelisttoasong
asdescribedbelow.
Song/TrackparametersettingsforStep01
Song/TrackparameterswillusethesettingsoftheStep
01song.
TheMIDIchannelofeachtrackwillbeassigned
accordingtothesettingsoftheStep01song.IfStep02
andfollowingsongshavedifferentsettings,itmaynot
bepossibletoachieveanacceptableplaybackresult
afterconversion.Asfaraspossible,trytokeepthe
MIDIchannelassignmentsconsistentbetweensongs
youintendtouseinaplaylistthatwillbeconverted
intoasong.
Thefollowingtrackparameterswillnotbereflectedinthe
conversion.AswiththeMIDIchannels,werecommendthat
youkeepthesesettingsconsistentbetweenallsongsinthe
cuelist.
SOLOON/OFF,Status,MIDIChannel,BankSelect(When
Status=EX2),ForceOSCMode,OSCSelect,UseProgramsScale,
MIDIFilter,KeyZone,VelocityZone,Delay,andthetrackEQ
settings
ConvertingSong/Trackparametersintotrackevents
1. InFrom,specifythecopysourcecuelist.
Whenyouexecute,thesettingdataoftheselectedcuelist
willbedeleted,andreplacedbythecopysourcedata.
Convert to Song
(Convert Cue List to Song)
Thiscommandconvertsacuelistconsistingofmultiple
songstoasinglesong.Althoughitisnotpossibletorecord
additionaltracksintoacuelist,youcanconvertthecuelist
toasong,andthenrecordsolosetc.ontoopentracks.
Youwillneedtoconvertacuelisttoasongifyouwishto
writeittoanSDcardasSMFdata.Duringtheconversion,
SecondandsubsequentrepeatsoftheStep01song,and
thesettingsofStep02andfollowingsongswillallbe
convertedintotrackevents(musicaldata).
Thefollowingdatawillbeconverted.
Track116
ProgramSelect,Pan,Volume,Portamento,
Detune,BendRange
MasterTrack
Tempo,Meter
IfPan(Seq03(4)b)isRDN,itwillbeconvertedtoC064.
IfPortamento(Seq33(4)c)isPRG,orifBendRange
(Seq35(6)c)isPRGoranegativevalue,thesewillnotbe
reflectedintheconversion.
Inthecaseofadrumprogram,Detune(35(6)c)willbe
dividedintoRPNFineTuningandCoarseTuning,and
189
Sequencer mode
convertedtotheseevents.Forexample,iftheDetune
settingof+600,FineTuningwillbe00andCoarse
Tuningwillbe6.FineTuningwillmodifytheplayback
pitch(Detune).CoarseTuningwillchangethenotes
thatareplayedback(Transpose).Incasesotherthana
drumprogram,thepitchsettingwillbeappliedby
shiftingthenotenumbersinthetrackandaddingan
RPNFineTuningevent.
PLAY/MUTE(P01(2):ProgramT0108,T0916Play/Rec/
Mute)
ThePlay/Mutetrackparameterswillbereflectedinthe
song.SoloOn/Offwillnotbereflected.
TrackPlayLoop(P09(10):PlyLoopT0108,T0916
page)
IfTrackPlayLoopison,theareafromLoopStartto
LoopEndwillbeexpandedasfarasthelastmeasurein
themastertrack.
ordertoverifytheamountofmemorythatwillbe
requiredfortheconversion.
Acuelistthatislongerthan999measurescannotbecon
vertedintoasong.
Copy Song
Thiscommandcopiesaportion(anumberofmeasures)of
thesongspecifiedbyStep,andmakesitintoasong.Thisis
convenientwhenyouwanttomodifythestructureor
developmentofthesongsinacuelist.
Forexampleifyouhaveaneightmeasuresongandwantto
repeatmeasures58,youcanusethiscommandtocreatea
fourmeasuresongoutofthatportion.Thenyoucanassign
theresultingsongtoastepinacuelist,andrepeatit.
1. InCurrentStep,orSongselectthedesiredstep.
2. SelectCopySongtoopenthedialogbox.
(Example)
IfTrackPlayLoopisM005M008,andthemastertrack
contains10measures,thedatawillbeexpandedfromthe
beginningofthetrackasM005,6,7,8,M005,6,7,8,
M005,6.
PlayIntro(P09(10):PlyLoopT0108,T0916page)
IfTrackPlayLoopison,thedatawillbedeveloped
accordingtothePlayLoopsettinguntilthelastmeasure
ofthemastertrack.
IfPlayIntroischecked,thedatafromthebeginningof
thetrackuntilLoopEndwillbedeveloped,andthenthe
datafromLoopStartuntilLoopEndwillbedeveloped
untilthelastmeasureofthemastertrack.
ForexampleifTrackPlayLoopisM005M008andthe
mastertrackendsatmeasure10,checkingPlayIntrowill
causethedatatobedevelopedfromthebeginningofthe
trackasM001,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,M005,6,7,8,M005,6.
IfPlayIntroisnotchecked,pleaseseetheexamplein
TrackPlayLoop.
Patterns
PatternsintheStep01songwillbecopiedaspatternsof
theconvertedsong.
IfthereisasecondorsubsequentrepeatforStep01,orif
thetracksofStep02andsubsequentsongscontainpat
terns,theywillbeexpandedintotrackevents(musical
data).
Transpose
IftheTranspose(Seq35(6)c)ofthetracksinStep02and
subsequentsongsdifferfromthesettingsoftheStep01
song,thenotenumbersofthenotedatawillbeshifted.
Example)
IfStep01,Transpose=+1andStep02,Transpose1,the
actualnotenumbersoftheStep02tracknotedatawillbe
shifteddownwardby2.
RepeatFS(FootSwitch)Repeat1
IfRepeatissettoFS(FootSwitch),itwillbeconverted
asRepeat1.
WhenyouexecuteConverttoSongtoconvertacuelist
toasong,therepeatsettingswithinthecuelistandthe
patternandtrackplayloopsettingsofthesongsusedby
thecuelistwillallbeconvertedintoeventssuchasnote
data.Forthisreason,theamountofdatawillincrease
significantly,andinsomecasestheremaynotbeenough
internalmemorytoperformtheconversion.Inparticular
ifthecuelistuseslongsongs,orifnumerousrepeats
havebeenspecified,orifmanypatternsareusedbythe
songs,youshouldtryexecutingtheConverttoSong
commandfromtimetotimeasyoucreatethecuelist,in
190
3. InFromMeasure,specifythefirstmeasureinthecopy
sourcesong.InToEndofMeasure,specifythelast
measure.
4. InToSong,specifythesongintowhichthedatawillbe
converted.
Ifyouselectanewsong,adialogboxwillaskyoufor
confirmation.PresstheOKbuttontocreateanewsongand
copythedatatothatsong.
Ifyouselectanexistingsongthatalreadycontainssettings
and/ormusicaldata,executingthiscommandwillerasethe
dataofthatsongandrewriteitwiththedatafromthecopy
source.Beforeyouexecute,besurethatyouwillnotbe
losingimportantdata.
5. IfyoucheckReplacetooriginalSonginCueListand
executethiscommand,theCurrentStepsongwillbe
replacedbythenewlycreatedsong.
Ifyouexecutewithoutcheckingthisbox,thenewlycreated
songcanbeselectedlaterforthedesiredstepofthecuelist.
Frontpanel
Parameter
ARP
ARPbutton,SELECTbutton,REALTIMECONTROLS14knobs(GATE,VELOCITY,SWING,
STEP)
DrumTrack
DRUMTRACKbutton
RealtimeControls
SELECTbutton,REALTIMECONTROLS14knobs(TONE[CUTOFF],[RESONANCE],
[SWING],[STEP],USER[1],[2],[3],[4])
P0:Play/REC,Arp Program,Mixer
A/B
ToneAdjust
ProgramSelect,Pan,Volume,PLAY/MUTE,SoloOn/Off*1
P1:Controllers
AllPanelSwitchAssign,RealtimeControlsknobAssignparameters
P2:EQ
P3:TrackParam
P4:Zone/Delay
P7:ARP/DT
P8:Routing/IFX
P9:MFX/TFX/
LFO
ControllersSetup
AllToneAdjustparameters
EQTrim
AutoLoadProgEQ,Bypass,InputTrim,HighGain,MidFrequency,MidGain,LowGain
OSC
ForceOSCMode,OSCSelect,Portamento
Pitch
Transpose,Detune,BendRange
Scale
UseProgramsscale,Type,key,Random
Delay
DelayTime[ms],MIDI/TempoSync.,BaseNote,Times
ARPSetup
Allparameters
ArpeggiatorA/B
Allparameters
ARPScanZone
Allparameters
DrumTrack
AllDrumTrackparameters
Routing1/2
Bus(IFX/Output)Select,Send1,Send2,FxControlBus
InsertFXSetup
IFX,IFXOn/Off,Chainto,Chain,Pan,BusSel,FXControlBus,Send1,Send2
IFX15
Alleffectparameters
CommonFXLFO
AllCommonFXLFO1,2parameters
Routing
MFX,MFXOn/Off,Chain,ChainDirection,ChainLevel,Return1,Return2,TFX,TFXOn/Off,
MasterVolume
MFX1/2
Alleffectparameters
TFX
Alleffectparameters
*1: SoloOn/Offisalwayscontrolledbyeventsinthetrack,
regardlessoftheplay/mutestatusofthattrack.
Themaximumamountofexclusivedatathatcanbe
recordedatonceisapproximately320Kbytes.Thissize
willdecreaseifothereventsexistwithinthesame
measure.
Youcannotsimultaneouslyrecordexclusivemessages
receivedfromanexternalMIDIdeviceandparameter
changesproducedbyediting.
Theeventsthatwillberecordedarecontrolledbythe
GlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicsettingsSEQMode
Param.MIDIOut.ForControlChange,onlycontrol
changemessageswillberecorded.ForSysEXParam
Change,onlyparameterchangesandexclusive
messageswillberecorded(seeParam.MIDIOuton
page 200).
Realtimerecordingwillnotrecordparametereditsthat
youperformbyexecutingmenucommandsinthe
variouspages,norchangesyoumakebyusingthe
EffectPresetfunctiontorecalleffectparameters.
191
Sequencer mode
192
Global mode
IfyouwantthesettingsyoumakeinGlobalmodetobe
backedupwhenthepoweristurnedoff,youmust
writethemintomemory.FromP5:DrumKit,youllbe
abletoselectthemenucommandWriteDrumKits.
FromP6:ArpeggioPattern,youllbeabletoselect
WriteArpeggioPatterns.Fromtheotherpagesof
Globalmode,youllbeabletoselectWriteGlobal
Setting.
Thesecommandscanalsobeselectedbypressingthe
WRITEbutton.
GLOBALPARAMETERS
Youcanalsoedituserscales,drumkits,anduserarpeggio
patternsetups.
Page
ARPPATTERN DRUMKIT
InGlobalmode,youcanmakesettingsthataffecttheentire
instrument,suchasmastertuning,MIDI,andmemory
protect.
Main content
P0:BasicSetup
Basicoverallsettings.(seep.194)
P1:MIDI
MIDIsettingsforKROME.(seep.198)
P2:Controllers
Controllersettingssuchasthepedals
connectedtotherearpanel.(seep.202)
CC#assignmentsforArpeggio
controllers.(seep.202)
P3:Scales
Scalesettingscreatedbytheuser.Youcan
specify16typesofoctavescale,andone
fullrangescale.(seep.203)
P4:Category
Editcategorynamesforprogramsand
combinations.(seep.204)
P5:DrumKit
Editdrumkits.(seep.205)
P6:Arpeggio
Pattern
CreatingArpeggiopattern.(seep.211)
PresstheGLOBALbuttontoaccessGlobalmode.
YoucanusethefollowingwaystoselectthepagesinGlobal
mode.
1. PressthePAGEbuttontoaccessPageSelect.
ThepageaccessedpriortopressingthePAGEbuttonis
showningrey.
2. Selectthedesiredpageinthedisplay.
193
Global mode
01: Basic
01
Menu
01a
Velocity Curve
01b
01c
Here,youcanmakemastertunesettings,turnalleffectson/
off,andmakeon/offsettingsforthearpeggiatoranddrum
track.
01a: Basic
Master Tune
[50cent (427.47Hz)...+50cent (452.89Hz)]
ThisadjuststheoveralltuningoftheentireKROMEinone
centunits(semitone=100cents),overarangeof50cents.
Withasettingof0,thefrequencyofA4willbe440Hz.
TheA4pitchgivenhereiswhenEqualTemperamentis
selectedasthescale.Ifadifferentscaleisselected,A4
maynotbe440Hz.
Key Transpose
[12...+00...+12]
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitonestepsovera1octave
range.
ThecurvesyoucanselectwilldependontheConvert
Position(Global11a)setting.IfthesettingisPreMIDI,the
curveisappliedimmediatelyafterthekeyboard.Ifthe
settingisPostMIDI,thecurveisappliedimmediatelybefore
thesoundgenerator.
InthecaseofPreMIDI,yourkeyboardplayingdynamicsare
modifiedasshownbytransmissioncurves19(lowerleft
diagram),andreceptionisfixedatcurve4linear(diagramat
lowerright).
InthecaseofPostMIDI,yourkeyboardplayingdynamics
aretransmittedaccordingtotransmissioncurve4linear
(lowerleftdiagram),andwillbeinterpretedaccordingto
receptioncurve19(lowerrightdiagram).
IfyoureusingtheKROMEasaMIDIsoundmodule,and
wanttoadjusttheoverallbrightnessofthesound,set
ConvertPosition(Global11a)toPostMIDIandselectthe
appropriatevelocitycurve.
For a setting of PreMIDI
127
MAX
Thissettingisappliedatthelocation(PreMIDIorPostMIDI)
specifiedbyConvertPosition(Global11a).
6
7
8
12
2484
(C1C6)
1284
(C0C6)
996
(A1C7)
0
3696
(C2C7)
2496
(C1C7)
21108
(A0C8)
+12
48108
(C3C8)
36108
(C2C8))
33120
(A1C9)
Note:IfConvertPositionissettoPreMIDI,theMIDInote
numberstransmittedfromtheKROMEwillbeaffectedby
KeyTransposesetting.
MasterTunecanbecontrolledbytheMIDIuniversal
SystemExclusivemessageMasterFineTuning(F0,7F,
nn,04,03,vv,mm,F7:nn=MIDIchannel,vv/mm=
value).
KeyTransposecanbecontrolledbytheMIDIuniversal
SystemExclusivemessageMasterCoarseTuning(F0,
7F,nn,04,04,vv,mm,F7:nn=MIDIchannel,vv/
mm=value).
ThesemessagesarereceivedontheglobalMIDI
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a).
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,MIDI
RPNmessagescanbereceivedtocontrolthetuning
andtranspositionoftheprogramortimbre
(Combinationmode)ortrack(Sequencermode).
IncomingMIDIRPNFineTunemessageswillmake
relativeadjustmentstothetuningspecifiedbythe
MasterTunesetting.
194
[19]
Thisspecifiesthewayinwhichthevolumeand/ortonewill
changeinresponsetovariationsinkeyboardplaying
dynamics(velocity).
Velocity
effect
4
3
2
5
4
1
Soft
Strong
Transmitted Table
KBD
3
2
127
Received Table
Curve 19
Curve 4
Curve 4
Curve 19
TG
MIDI
PreMIDI
PostMIDI
1,2,3:Stronglyplayednoteswillbeaffected.
4(Normal):Thenormalcurve
5,6:Producesaneffectevenifyoudonotplayverystrongly.
7:Thiscurveproducesarelativelyconsistenteffectforsoftly
playednotes.
8:Thiscurveproducesanevenmoreconsistenteffect.
Eachcurvehasitsowncharacteristics,soyoushouldselect
thecurvethatbestsuitsyourownplayingstyleandthe
resultsyouwanttoobtain.
9:Comparedwiththestandardcurve#4,thiscurvesoftens
theresponseofgentlyplayednotes.Thisallowsvelocity
controlwithbroaderdynamicsforsoundssuchasacoustic
piano.Thissettingisparticularlyrecommendedforthe
KROME88.
(effectcontrol5)willbetransmittedrespectively.The
transmitteddatawillbe0foroff,and127foron.
[18]
Thisspecifiesthewayinwhichincomingaftertouchdata
willaffectthevolumeortonewhenConvertPosition
(Global11a)issettoPostMIDI.
ThissettinghasnoeffectwhenConvertPosition
(Global11a)issettoPreMIDI.
Thiscurveisappliedimmediatelybeforethetonegenerator.
TheaftertouchCurvesettingselectsthecurvethatis
appliedtotheincomingaftertouch.
After Touch (MIDI InTG)
5
4
7
3
6
[Off, On]
On(checked):AllarpeggiatorandDrumTrackfunctions
willbeoff.ThearpeggiatorwillnotoperateeveniftheARP
buttonison.TheDrumTrackfunctionwillnotoperateeven
iftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison.
Off(unchecked):ThearpeggiatorsettingsandARPbutton
settingsinProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes
willbeused.TheDrumTrackfunctionwilloperate
accordingtothesettingsineachmodeandthestateofthe
DRUMTRACKbutton.
MAX
Aftertouch
effect
8:RANDOM
127
1,2:Thiscurveproduceschangewhenstrongaftertouch
pressureisapplied.
3(Normal):Thenormalcurve.
4,5:Thiscurveproduceschangeevenwhenlightpressureis
applied.
6,7:Thesecurvesproducechangein24or12steps.Curve
number7allowschangeovertwelvesteps,sowhenusing
aftertouchtomodifythepitch,youcansettherangeof
modificationtooneoctave,anduseaftertouchtovarythe
pitchinsemitonesteps.
8:Thisisarandomcurve.Usethiswhenyouwishtocreate
specialeffects,ortouseaftertouchtoapplyunpredictable
modulation.
Withasettingofaftertouch,thesettingyoumakehere
willbeappliedimmediatelybeforetheKROMEs
internaltonegenerator,meaningthatitwillaffectthe
datareceivedviaMIDI,butwillnotaffectthe
transmitteddata.
Program
[Off, On]
On(checked):Whenyouswitchprograms,thearpeggiator
settingsstoredinthatprogramwillbeused.Normallyyou
willusetheOnsetting.
Off(unchecked):Thearpeggiatorsettingswillnotchange
evenifyouswitchprograms.Usethissettingifyouwantto
switchProgramsoundswithoutchangingthephrasesfrom
thearpeggiator.
Combination
[Off, On]
On(checked):Whenyouswitchcombinations,the
arpeggiatorsettingsstoredinthatcombinationwillbeused.
NormallyyouwillusetheOnsetting.
Off(unchecked):Thearpeggiatorsettingswillnotchange
evenifyouswitchcombinations.Usethissettingifyouwant
onlytoswitchcombinationsoundswithoutchangingthe
phrasesfromthearpeggiator.
[Off, On]
Off(unchecked):AllinserteffectsIFX15willbeoff.
0:WriteGlobalSettingseep.216
On(checked):TheP8:InsertEffectsettingsforeachIFXOn/
OffinProgram,Combination,andSequencermodeswillbe
valid.
1:LoadPreload/DemoDataseep.216
Enable MFX1&2
[Off, On]
Off(unchecked):MasterEffect1and2(MFX1,2)willbeoff.
On(checked):TheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOsettingMFX1On/Off,
andMFX2On/Off,inProgram,Combination,and
Sequencermodeswillbevalid.
Thison/offsettingislinkedwiththefrontpanelMASTER
FXbutton.
Enable TFX
2:Changeallbankreferencesseep.216
3:DisplaySetupseep.216
4:TouchPanelCalibrationseep.217
5:HalfDamperCalibrationseep.217
6:UpdateSystemSoftwareseep.218
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
[Off, On]
Off(unchecked):Totaleffect(TFX)willbeoff.
On(checked):TheP9:MFX/TFX/LFOsettingTFXOn/Off,
inProgram,Combination,andSequencermodeswillbe
valid.
Thison/offsettingislinkedwiththefrontpanelTOTALFX
button.
Thesesettingswillalwaysbeturnedonwhenyou
powerontheKROME.
WhenEnableIFX,EnableMFX1&2,orEnableTFX
settingsareswitched,controlchangemessagesCC#92
(effectcontrol2),CC#94(effectcontrol4),andCC#95
195
Global mode
Hereyoucanspecifythetimewhenautopoweroffwill
occur.Youcanalsopreventthepowerfromturningoff.
02a
Whenthepowerturnsoff,thesettingsyouhadbeen
editingwillbelost.Youshouldsaveanysettingsthat
youwanttokeep.
30minutes,anhour,4hours:Thepowerwillautomatically
turnoffifthespecifiedtimeelapseswithoutanyuserinput
beingperformedontheKROMEskeyboardorbuttons.The
availablesettingsare30minutes,1hour,and4hours.
Ifyouvechosenoneofthesesettings,adialogboxwill
appearwhenthesystemstartsup,informingyouofthe
lengthoftimeafterwhichautopoweroffwilloccur.
02b
Here,youcanmakeoverallsettingsfortheentiresystem
suchasbankmap,andmemoryprotect.
Ifyouwanttochangetheautopoweroffsetting,pressthe
ChangeSettingbuttoninthisdialogboxandchangethe
settingasdesired.
[KORG, GM(2)]
Thisspecifiesthemappingofprogramsandcombinations
relativetoBankSelectcontrolchangemessages(CC#0upper
byteandCC#32lowerbyte).
Thebankselectmessagesshowninthetablebelowwillbe
received(R)andtransmitted(T)forProgrambanksAF,
GM,g(1)g(9),g(d)andCombinationbanksAD.
Bank
A
Map: GM(2)
63.00R/T
00.01R/T
63.01R/T
00.02R/T
63.02R/T
63.03R/T
00.03R/T
00.04R/T
63.04R/T
00.05R/T
63.05R/T
GM,
121.00R/T,56.00R
121.00R/T,56.00R,00.00R
g(1)...g(9)
121.01...09R/T
121.01...09R/T
g(d)
120.00R/T,62.00R
120.00R/T,62.00R
Power-On Mode
[Reset, Memorize]
Specifiestheconditionatpoweron.
Reset:TheKROMEwillbeinProgrammodeP0:Play,and
ProgramA000willbeselected.
Severalminutesbeforethepowerturnsoff,adialogboxwill
appearwithacountdownindicatingthetimeuntilthe
powerturnsoff.Ifyoudontwantthepowertoturnoff,
presstheKROMEsdisplayorkeyboard,oruseabuttonor
knob.Autopoweroffwillbereset,andthesamemessage
willappearonceagainifnouserinputisperformedforthe
specifiedlengthoftime.
Memorize:Thelocation(modeandpage)whichyoumost
recentlyaccessedwhenyoulastpoweredofftheKROME
willberecalled.IfyouwereinProgramorCombination
mode,theprogramorcombinationbank/numberatpower
offwillberecalled.
Beforeturningoffthepower,besuretowriteyourdata
orsaveitinMediamode.Thisfunctiondoesnot
memorizethecontentsofanyparametersthatwere
edited.
Auto Power-Off
[30 minutes, an hour, 4 hours, Disabled]
TheKROMEwillautomaticallyturnoffitsownpowera
certainlengthoftimeafteritskeyboard,display,buttons,or
knobswerelastused.(Withthefactorysettings,thepower
willturnoffinapproximatelyfourhours.)
*MovingtheVOLUMEknobisnotconsideredusagefor
thispurpose.Evenifyouusetheseknobs,thepowerwill
stillturnoffwhenthespecifiedtimehaselapsedifnoother
userinputhasbeenperformed.
Evenwhensongsordemosongsarebeingplayedback
consecutively,thepowerwillautomaticallyturnoffifthe
specifiedtimeelapseswithoutanysoundatallbeing
produced.
196
Disable:Autopoweroffwillbedisabled.Thepowerwill
notturnoffautomatically.
Changesyoumaketothissettingarealwayssaved.
ThereisnoneedtoexecuteWriteGlobalSetting.
Beep Enable
[Off, On]
On(checked):Abeepwillbeheardwhenyoupressan
objectinthedisplay.
Off(unchecked):Nobeepwillbeheard.
Animation
[Off, On]
On(checked):Enablesananimationeffectwhendisplaying
menus,pads,ordialogboxes.
Off(unchecked):Disablestheanimationeffect.
Insomecases,theanimationwillbedisabled
automaticallywhenlargeamountsofperformancedata
isbeingprocessedbythedrumtrackorsequencer.
[Off, On]
On(checked):Apopupwillappearwhenyouholddown
orpresstwiceonaneditcell,knob,orslider.
Off(unchecked):Apopupwillnotappear.
[Off, On]
On(checked):Apopupwillappearwhenyouoperatethe
frontpanelREALTIMECONTROLSknob.
[Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternaluserarpeggiopattern
memory.
On(checked):Internaluserarpeggiopatternmemorywill
beprotected,andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbe
performed.
Writingauserarpeggiopattern
Loadingpreloadarpeggiopatterndata
Loadinguserarpeggiopatterndatafrommedia
Off(unchecked):Apopupwillnotappear.
Insomecases,popupdisplaywillbedisabled
automaticallywhenlargeamountsofperformancedata
isbeingprocessedbythedrumtrackorsequencer.
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernaldrumkit
memory.
ReceivinguserarpeggiopatterndataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernaluser
arpeggiopatternmemory.
[Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalprogrammemory.
On(checked):Internalprogrammemorywillbeprotected,
andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Writingaprogram
0:WriteGlobalSettingseep.216
1:LoadPreload/DemoDataseep.216
2:Changeallbankreferencesseep.216
3:DisplaySetupseep.216
4:TouchPanelCalibrationseep.217
5:HalfDamperCalibrationseep.217
Loadingpreloadedprogramdata
6:UpdateSystemSoftwareseep.218
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
Loadingprogramdatafrommedia
ReceivingprogramdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernalprogram
memory.
Combination
[Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalcombinationmemory.
On(checked):Internalcombinationmemorywillbe
protected,andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbe
performed.
Writingacombination
Loadingpreloadedcombinationdata
Loadingcombinationdatafrommedia
ReceivingcombinationdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernal
combinationmemory.
Song
[Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalsongmemory.
However,whenthepoweristurnedoff,thesongdatain
songmemorywillbelostregardlessofthissetting.
On(checked):Internalsongmemorywillbeprotected,and
thefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Recordingtothesequencer
Loadingpreloadedsongdata
Loadingsongdatafrommedia
ReceivingsongdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off(unchecked):Datacanbewrittentointernalsong
memory.
Drum Kit
[Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternaldrumkitmemory.
On(checked):Internaldrumkitmemorywillbeprotected,
andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Writingadrumkit
Loadingpreloadeddrumkitdata
Loadingdrumkitdatafrommedia
ReceivingdrumkitdataviaMIDIdatadump
197
Global mode
11a
Thissettingspecifieswhetherevennumbered,odd
numbered,orallnotenumberswillbesoundedwhennote
dataisreceivedfromtheKROMEskeyboardorfroman
externalMIDIdevice.ByconnectingtheKROMEtoanother
KROMEandsettingoneinstrumenttoEvenandtheotherto
Odd,youcaneffectivelydoublethepolyphonybydividing
thenotesbetweenthetwoinstruments.
All:Allnotenumberswillbereceived.Normallyyouwill
leavethissettoAll.
Even:Evennumberednotes(C,D,E,F#,G#,A#)willsound.
Odd:Oddnumberednotes(C#,D#,F,G,A,B)willsound.
Here,youcanmakeMIDIrelatedsettingsthataffectthe
entireKROME.
ThissettinghasnoeffectontheMIDIdatathatis
received.
Using a KROME to play another connected KROME unit
Note:TotransmitMIDIexclusivedumpdata,youllusethe
menucommandsofthisP1:MIDIpage.
Another KROME
EVEN
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedinthefollowingcases.
Whentransmittingandreceivingperformancedatain
Programmode(ProgP0:Play).
WhenselectingcombinationsviaMIDIinCombination
mode(CombiP0:Play).
Whentriggeringthedrumtrack(withTriggerModeset
toWaitKBDTrig)inProgramorCombinationmode.
Whencontrollingtimbresoreffectsthathavebeensetto
Gchinvariousmodes
WhentransmittingandreceivingSystemExclusive
messages
MIDI received
InProgrammode(P0:Play),MIDIdataisreceivedonthe
globalMIDIchannel,butinCombinationmode(P0:Play)or
Sequencermode,MIDIdataisreceivedontheMIDIchannel
specifiedforeachtimbreortrack.
InProgrammode,thisdatawillbetransmittedontheglobal
MIDIchannel.InCombinationmode,datawillbe
transmittedsimultaneouslyontheglobalMIDIchanneland
ontheMIDIchannelsoftimbreswhoseStatus(Combi3
1(2)c)issettoEXTorEX2.
InSequencermode,musicaldatawillbetransmittedonthe
channelspecifiedforthecurrentlyselectedtrack(Seq3
1(2)c)(whoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2).
Another KROME
EVEN
Local Control On
[Off, On]
LocalControlOn(checked):TheKROMEsknobs,andthe
keyboard,joystick,SW1,andSW2willcontroltheKROMEs
soundgenerator.Leavethissettingcheckedifyoureplaying
theKROMEbyitself.
LocalControlOff(unchecked):TheKROMEsknobs,the
keyboard,joystick,SW1,andSW2willbedisconnectedfrom
theKROMEssoundgenerator.
ThismeansthatoperatingtheKROME(playingits
keyboardandusingthejoystick,orplayingbackthe
sequencer)willnotsounditsinternaltonegenerator.
TurnLocalControlOffifloopbackfromanexternal
sequencercausesduplicatenotes.
Sequencer
Local
Control
OFF
Record
ON
Arpeggiator
MIDI IN
UsetheglobalMIDIchanneltoswitchIFX15(CC#92),
MFX1&2(CC#94)andTFX(CC#95)on/off.
MIDI IN
InCombinationmode(P0:Play),programchangesreceived
ontheglobalMIDIchannelwillswitchthecombination
(Global12b:MIDIFilter).
TocontrolthepanfollowingIFX,sends1/2,MFX1/2and
TFX,usetheglobalMIDIchannelwhenintheProgram
mode;whileintheCombination,orSequencermodes,use
thechannelspecifiedseparatelybyCtrlChforIFX15,
MFX1&2,andTFX.BysettingCtrlChtoGch,youcan
controltheseparametersfromtheglobalMIDIchannel.
KROME
ODD
MIDI Patchbay
[116]
SetstheglobalMIDIchannel.
198
MIDI IN
ODD
Basic:
MIDI Channel (Global MIDI Channel)
MIDI OUT
Trigger
Local
Control
Tone
generator
OFF
ON
MIDI OUT
IfLocalControlisOff,MIDItransmission/reception
willoccurnormally.Playingthekeyboardwillcause
thecorrespondingnotedatatobetransmitted,and
receivednotedatawillplaytheKROMEsinternal
sounds.
Note:EvenifLocalControlisOn,notesplayedbackbythe
internalsequencerwillnottriggerthearpeggiator.
Convert Position
[PreMIDI, PostMIDI]
ThissettingspecifiesthelocationatwhichtheTranspose
andVelocityCurvesettingswillbeapplied.Thissettingwill
affecttheMIDIdatathatistransmittedandreceived,and
thedatathatisrecordedontheinternalsequencer.
WhenusingtheKROMEskeyboardtoplaytheinternaltone
generator,theTranspose,VelocityCurve,andaftertouch
Curvesettingswillalwaystakeeffectregardlessofthis
setting.
MIDI Clock:
PreMIDI:VelocityCurve,andTransposewillbeappliedto
thedatathatistransmittedfromtheKROMEskeyboard.
ThismeansthattheVelocityCurve,andTransposesettings
willaffectthedatathatistransmittedfromMIDIOUTwhen
theKROMEskeyboardisplayed,andthedatathatis
recordedontheinternalsequencer.
MIDIdatareceivedfromMIDIINorthedataplayedback
bytheinternalsequencerwillnotbeaffected.
UsethissettingtosynchronizetheKROMEsarpeggiator
andinternalsequencerwithanexternalMIDIdevice(e.g.,
sequencerorrhythmmachine)andcomputer.
Velocity
Curve
Velocity
Curve=4
MIDI IN
Record
Sequencer
Play
Aftertouch
Curve=3
Scale
Transpose
KROME
No
Transpose
Tone
generator
Note number
change
MIDI OUT
Transmitted Table
Received Table
PostMIDI:VelocityCurve,aftertouchCurve,andTranspose
willbeappliedtodatabeforeitentersthetonegenerator.
ThismeansthattheVelocityCurve,aftertouchCurve,and
Transposesettingswillaffectthedatathatissenttothe
internaltonegeneratorwhenyouplaytheKROMEs
keyboard,whentheinternalsequencerisplayedback,or
whendataisreceivedfromMIDIIN.
Thissettingwillnotaffectthedatathatistransmittedfrom
MIDIOUTorrecordedontheinternalsequencerwhenyou
playtheKROMEskeyboardorplaybackthesequence.
Velocity
Curve
MIDI IN
Record
Sequencer
Play
Aftertouch
Curve
Velocity
Curve=4
No
Transpose
Scale
Transpose
Pitch change
KROME
Transmitted Table
MIDI OUT
Received Table
Tone
generator
Internal:Thearpeggiatorandtheinternalsequencerwill
operateaccordingtotheinternalclock.
SelecttheInternalsettingwhenusingtheKROMEbyitself,
orwhenyouwanttheKROMEtobethemaster(controlling
device)sothatconnectedexternalMIDIdeviceswill
synchronizetotheKROMEMIDIClock.
ExternalMIDI:Thearpeggiatorandinternalsequencerwill
operateinsynchronizationtotheMIDIClockinputfroman
externalMIDIdevice.
ExternalUSB:Thearpeggiatorandinternalsequencerwill
operateinsynchronizationwiththeMIDIClockfroma
computer(forexampleasequencerorDAWapplication),
connectedtotheUSBconnector.
Auto:Normallytheoperationwillbethesameasthe
Internalsetting.IfexternalMIDIClockmessagesare
receivedfromtheMIDIINorUSBconnector,theKROME
willautomaticallyswitchtoExternalMIDIandExternal
USB.
Note:IfyouselectAutowhenanexternalMIDIsequencer
andcomputerisconnected,theKROMEwillautomatically
switchtoInternaloperationiftheexternalsequencerisnot
transmittingMIDIClockmessages,allowingthearpeggiator
tooperateandparametersforwhichMIDI/TempoSyncis
turnedontofunction.
Note:IfafterreceivingaMIDIClock,Start,orContinue
messagefromtheMIDIINorUSBconnector,nonewMIDI
Clockmessageisreceivedwithinanintervalof500ms,orif
youstarttheKROMEssequencerfromthefrontpanel
withouthavingreceivedaMIDIClock,Start,orContinue
messagefromtheMIDIINandUSBconnector,theKROME
willautomaticallyswitchtoInternaloperation.
[Off, On]
Off(unchecked):EvenifMIDIClockissettoExternal
MIDI,orifsettoAutoandtheKROMEissynchronizedto
externalMIDIClockmessages,MIDICommonmessages
andRealtimemessages(SongPositionPointer,Start,
Continue,Stop)willnotbereceived.(SongSelectmessages
willbereceived.)
Note:Usethissettingiftheabovemessagesfromanexternal
MIDIsequencerareinadvertentlyresettingtheKROMEs
songsettings.
On(checked):TheaboveCommonmessages(including
SongSelect)andRealtimemessageswillbereceived.
ThisparametercannotbesetifMIDIClockisInternal.
199
Global mode
SEQ Mode:
[Off, On]
On(checked):Thenotedataofthedrumtrackpatternwill
betransmittedonthechannelspecifiedbyProgMIDICh.
Off(unchecked):Thenotedataofthedrumtrackpattern
willnotbetransmitted.
0:WriteGlobalSettingseep.216
1:DumpProgramseep.218
2:DumpCombinationseep.218
3:DumpDrumKitseep.218
4:DumpArpeggioPatternseep.218
5:DumpGlobalSettingseep.218
6:DumpSequencerseep.218
7:DumpDrumTrackPatternseep.218
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
*Applicableparameters
ProgramSelect:CC#00bankselect(LSB),CC#32bank
select(MSB),programchange
Pan:CC#10pan
12
Menu
12a
Volume:CC#7volume
Portamento:CC#65portamentoOn/Off,CC#5portamento
time
Send1/2:CC#93send1level,CC#91send2level
12b
(PostFX)Pan:CC#8postinserteffectpan
Drum Track:
DrumtrackprogramsinProgrammodewillbetriggeredon
theglobalMIDIchannelifTriggerModeissettoWaitKBD
Trig.TheMIDItransmitchannelisspecifiedbytheDrum
TrackProgMIDICh.UsetheDrumTrackProgMIDIOut
tospecifywhethertheMIDInotedataofthepatternwillbe
transmitted.
DrumtrackprogramsdonottransmitorreceiveMIDI
programchanges.
Prog MIDI Ch
[0116]
ThisspecifiestheMIDIchannelfordrumtracktransmission
andreceptioninProgrammode.IfProgMIDIOutis
checked,drumpatternnotedatawillbetransmittedonthis
MIDIchannel.Thedefaultsettingischannel10.
200
Here,youcanmakeMIDIRoutingandMIDIFiltersettings
fortheentireKROME.
Note:TotransmitMIDIexclusivedumpdata,youllusethe
menucommandsoftheP1:MIDIpage.
[Off, On]
On(checked):Programchangeswillbetransmittedand
received.
InProgrammode(P0:Play),theprogramwillbeswitched
whenaprogramchangemessageisreceivedontheglobal
MIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a).
Whenyouswitchprograms,aprogramchangemessagewill
betransmittedontheglobalMIDIchannel.
InCombinationmode(P0:Play),thecombinationwillbe
switchedwhenaprogramchangemessageisreceivedon
theglobalMIDIchannel.However,itispossibletosetthe
EnableCombinationChangeparametersothatthe
combinationisnotswitched.Whenaprogramchangeis
receivedonthechannelspecifiedforeachtimbrebyMIDI
Channel(Combi31(2)c),theprogramofthattimbrewillbe
switched.However,theprogramchangesforeachtimbre
willbeaffectedbythesettingoftheEnableProgram
Changeparameter(Combi51(2)c).
Thissettinghasnoeffectwhenyouusetheinternal
sequencertoplaybacksequencedatathatwasrecorded
withcontrolchangedata;i.e.,thecontrolchanges
previouslyrecordedintothesequencerwillbetransmitted
viaMIDI.
Whenyouswitchcombinations,aprogramchangemessage
willbetransmittedontheglobalMIDIchannel,andalso
transmittedsimultaneouslyonthechanneloftimbreswhose
Status(Combi31(2)c)issettoEXTorEX2.
CheckthisifyouwanttoedittheKROMEfromaconnected
computer,orifyouwanttoallowbidirectionalediting.
InSequencermode,incomingprogramchangemessageson
achannelthatcorrespondstoatrackwhoseStatus(Seq3
1(2)c)issettoINTorBTHwillswitchprogramsonthat
track.
Whenyouselectasongorplaybacksequencerdata,
programchangeswillbetransmittedonthechannelsof
trackswhoseStatusissettoBTH,EXT,orEX2.
Off(unchecked):Programchangeswillnotbetransmitted
orreceived.
Bank Change
[Off, On]
On(checked):TheBankSelectcontrolchangemessagewill
betransmittedtogetherwithprogramchangemessages.
ThisisvalidwhenEnableProgramChangeischecked.
Off(unchecked):BankSelectmessageswillnotbe
transmittedorreceived.
Whenrecordingontheinternalsequencer,bankselect
messageswillberecordedregardlessofthissetting.
Howeverforplayback,thissettingwillapply.
Combination Change
Off(unchecked):Controlchangemessageswillneitherbe
transmittednorreceived.
Enable Exclusive
[Off, On]
On(checked):SystemExclusivedatawillbetransmitted
andreceived.
Off(unchecked):SystemExclusivedatawillnotbe
transmitted.Normallyyouwillleavethisunchecked.
However,SystemExclusivedatawillbetransmittedand
receivedwhilethemenucommands(Dump Program
DumpDrumTrackPattern)ofthispagearedisplayed.
0:WriteGlobalSettingseep.216
1:DumpProgramseep.218
2:DumpCombinationseep.218
3:DumpDrumKitseep.218
4:DumpArpeggioPatternseep.218
5:DumpGlobalSettingseep.218
6:DumpSequencerseep.218
7:DumpDrumTrackPatternseep.218
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
[Off, On]
On(checked):WheninCombiP0:Play,anincoming
programchangemessageontheglobalMIDIchannelsetby
MIDIChannel(Global11a)willswitchcombinations.
ThisisvalidwhenEnableProgramChangeischecked.
Anincomingprogramchangeonachannelotherthanthe
globalMIDIchannelwillswitchtheprogramofanytimbre
thatmatchesthatMIDIchannel.
Off(unchecked):Anincomingprogramchangemessageon
theglobalMIDIchannelwillswitchtheprogramofany
timbrewhoseMIDIChannel(Combi31(2)c)matchesthe
globalMIDIchannel.Thecombinationwillnotbeswitched.
Theprogramchangesforeachtimbrewillbeaffectedbythe
settingoftheEnableProgramChangeparameter(Combi5
1(2)c).
[Off, On]
On(checked):MIDIaftertouchmessageswillbetransmitted
andreceived.
Off(unchecked):MIDIaftertouchmessageswillneitherbe
transmittednorreceived.
Thissettinghasnoeffectwhenyouusetheinternal
sequencertoplaybacksequencedatathatwasrecordedwith
aftertouchdata;i.e.,aftertouchwillbetransmittedviaMIDI.
PerformingontheKROMEskeyboardwilltransmitneither
channelaftertouchnorpolyphonicaftertouch.However,
sincetheKROMEdoessupportaftertouchasanAlternate
ModulationSource(AMS),itcanreceiveaftertouchto
control.
[Off, On]
On(checked):Controlchangemessageswillbetransmitted
andreceived.
201
Global mode
22
Menu
22a
21a
ThisspecifiestheMIDImessagesthatwillbetransmitted
whenyouoperatetheARPbuttonorwhenyouoperate
knobs14withARPselectedbySELECTbutton.
Selectsthefunctionthatwillbecontrolledbyapedalswitch
(suchastheoptionalKorgPS1orPS3)connectedtothe
ASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.
Foracompletelistofpossibleassignments,pleaseseeFoot
SwitchAssignmentsonpage 349.
Selectsthefunctionthatwillbecontrolledbyafootvolume
pedal(XVP10orEXP2option[soldseparately])connected
totheASSIGNABLEPEDALjack.
Foracompletelistofpossibleassignments,pleaseseeFoot
PedalAssignmentsonpage 350.
Damper Polarity
Setthistomatchthepolarityofthedamperpedalconnected
totheDAMPERjack.Ifthepolaritydoesnotmatch,
operatingthedamperpedalwillnotproducethecorrect
result.Ifnodamperpedalisconnected,setthisto()KORG
Standard.
()KORGStandard:Usethissettingforopentype
damperpedals,suchastheoptionalKorgDS1H.
(+):Usethissettingforclosedtypepedals.
Setthistomatchthepolarityofthefootswitchconnectedto
theASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.Ifthepolaritydoesnot
match,operatingthedamperpedalwillnotproducethe
correctresult.Ifnodamperpedalisconnected,setthisto()
KORGStandard.
()KORGStandard:Usethissettingforopentype
footswitches,suchastheoptionalKorgPS1orPS3.
(+):Usethissettingforclosedtypepedals.
Here,youcanassigncontrolchangemessagestothe
arpeggiatorswitchesandknobs14whenARPisselected
bytheSELECTbutton.
Whenyouoperateaswitchorknobs14whenARPis
selectedbytheSELECTbutton,theassignedcontrolchange
messagewillbetransmittedfromtheMIDIOUTconnector.
Theassignedcontrolchangemessagescanalsobereceived
fromanexternalMIDIdeviceconnectedtotheMIDIIN
connector,andusedtocontrolthecorresponding
arpeggiator.
Thedefaultsettingsofeachparameterareasshowninthe
displayabove.
0:WriteGlobalSettingseep.216
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
[Off, 000...119]
Assignsthecontrolchangemessagesentbyknob1when
ARPisselectedbytheSELECTswtich.Thedefaultsettingis
CC#22.
[Off, 000...119]
Assignsthecontrolchangemessagesentbyknob2when
ARPisselectedbytheSELECTswtich.Thedefaultsettingis
CC#23.
[Off, 000...119]
Assignsthecontrolchangemessagesentbyknob3when
ARPisselectedbytheSELECTswtich.Thedefaultsettingis
CC#24.
[Off, 000...119]
AssignsacontrolchangemessagesentbytheARPbutton.
ThedefaultsettingisCC#14.
[Off, 000...119]
Assignsthecontrolchangemessagesentbyknob4when
ARPisselectedbytheSELECTswtich.Thedefaultsettingis
CC#25.
0:WriteGlobalSettingseep.216
1:ResetControllerMIDIAssignseep.220
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
202
31: Scales
31
Menu
Tune
[99+99]
Makesindependentpitchsettingsforeachofthe128notes.
Adjustthepitchofeachofthe128notes(C1G9)inone
centsteps.Thisadjustmentisrelativetoequaltemperament.
31a
Asettingof99lowersthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
belownormalpitch.
Asettingof+99raisesthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
abovenormalpitch.
31b
Keyboard Lock
Usethehorizontalscrollbartomovetothekeyrangethat
youwanttoset,andselectthekeythatyouwanttospecify.
Here,youcanmakesettingsforsixteendifferentUser
OctaveScalesandoneUserAllNotesScale.
ByexecutingthemenucommandCopyScale,youcancopy
settingsfromapresetscale(includingStretch)oranother
userscale.
Theuserscalesyoucreateherecanbeselectedfromthe
followingpages.
Keys Lock
ProgP1:Basic/ControllersNoteon/Scale
CombiP3:TimbreParamScaleT0108/T0916
SeqP3:TrackParamScaleT0108/T0916
Note:Toeditascale,usetheProgrammodepagelisted
abovetoselectthescalethatyouwanttoedit,andthen
movetothispage.
Note:Thekeycanalsobeselectedbyholdingdownthe
ENTERbuttonandplayinganote.Alternatively,youcan
presstheKeyboardLockbuttonandplayanotetoselectthe
key.Selectthescalethatyouwanttoedit.
[Off, On]
IfthisisOn,youcanusetheKROMEskeyboardtoselect
keysofthescale.SelectthekeyforUserOctaveScaleorUser
AllNotesScale,andthenusethekeyboardtomakeyour
selection.
0:WriteGlobalSettingseep.216
1:CopyScaleseep.220
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
Note:ByexecutingtheCopyScalemenucommand,youcan
copythesettingsofapresetscale(otherthanStretch)orof
anotheruserscale,andtheneditthesettingsofthecopied
scale.
Ifyouwishtokeepanediteduserscaleafterthepower
isturnedoff,besuretowrite(save)yoursettings.
PressthepagemenuortheWRITEbuttontoaccessthe
WriteGlobalSettingmenucommandandsaveyour
settings.
SelectstheUserOctaveScalethatyouwanttoedit.
Tune
[99+99]
Makespitchsettingsforeachnoteintheoctave.
Whenyouadjustthepitchofeachnoteintheoctave(CB)
inonecentsteps,yoursettingswillbeappliedtoalloctaves.
Thisadjustmentisrelativetoequaltemperament.
Asettingof99lowersthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
belownormalpitch.
Asettingof+99raisesthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
abovenormalpitch.
ByexecutingthemenucommandCopyScale,youcancopy
settingsfromapresetscale(otherthanStretch)orfrom
anotheruserscale.
203
Global mode
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
42a
Whenshippedfromthefactory,thereare16presetProgram
andCombinationcategories,with2moreleftopenforyour
use(initiallynamedUser16andUser17).
Onthesepages,youcan:
Changethenamesofanyofthecategoriesandsub
categories,includingboththefactoryandusercategories
Addsubcategoriestothefactorycategories(uptothe
limitof8Percategory.
YoucanassignaProgramorCombinationtoacategoryand
subcategoryduringtheWriteprocess.Formore
information,pleaseseeWriteProgramonpage 64,and
WriteCombinationonpage 101.
Tosavechangestocategorynames,youllneedtowrite
theGlobalsettings.
PressthepagemenuortheWRITEbuttontoaccessthe
WriteGlobalSettingmenucommandandsaveyour
settings.
Note:DrumtrackprogramsinProgrammodeareselected
fromprogramsassignedheretoprogrammaincategory
15(defaultsettingDrums).
[00...17]
Here,youcanselectthemaincategoryforwhichyouwill
editsubcategorynames.
00...07:
Sub Category Edit
[Text Editor]
Here,youcaneditthesubcategorynamesforprograms.
First,selectMainCategorytoaccessthecategorythat
includesthesubcategorynamethatyouwanttoedit.After
choosingthemaincategory,pressthetexteditbutton
adjacenttothesubcategorynamethatyouwanttoedit.The
texteditdialogboxwillopen,andyoucanenteraname.
Youcanenterupto24characters.(SeeOGp.117)
Youcannameeachoftheeightcategories.
0:WriteGlobalSettingseep.216
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
41a
[Text Editor]
Here,youcaneditthemaincategorynamesforprograms.
0:WriteGlobalSettingseep.216
Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetexteditdialogbox,
andenteraname.Youcanenterupto24characters.(SeeOG
p.117)
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
Youcannameeachoftheeighteencategories.
0:WriteGlobalSettingseep.216
204
Global P5: Drum Kit 43: Combination Main, 44: Combination Sub
Editingadrumkitwillaffectallprogramsthatusethe
editeddrumkit.Wheneditingapreloadeddrumkit,
itsagoodideatocopythedrumkittoanemptyareain
theuserbankbeforeeditingit.
205
Global mode
51b: Drumsample
Youcanspecifyuptoeightdrumsamples.
51
Menu
51a
Bydraggingthesliderattheleft,youcanselectthevelocity
zonetobeedited.Youcanalsomakethisselectionby
directlypressingthedesiredzone.
1: (Drumsample1)
Thesearethesettingsforthefirst(High)velocityzone.
51b
Ifyouwanttocreateasimplesetupusingonlyonedrum
sample,maketheappropriatesettingsinDrumsample1,
andthensetThresholdVelocityto1andXfdtoOff.
Velocity Split
Drumsample 1 On/Off
[Off, On]
Here,youcanselectadrumkitandspecifyDrumsample1
8asthedrumsamplesassignedtoeachkey.Here,youcan
alsoeditdrumsampleparametersforeachDrumsample.
On(checked):CheckthisifyouwanttouseDrumsample1.
Theselecteddrumsamplewillsound.
Note:Normally,youwillstartbyusingDrumsample1
(beforeusingDrumsample18).Ifyoudontwanttoswitch
drumsamplesbyvelocity,turnononlyDrumsample1.If
youreusingmultiplevelocityswitcheddrumsamples,
makesettingsasfollows.
[00(INT)...47(USER)]
Selectsthedrumkitthatyouwishtoedit.
No. (Bank)
Contents
00(INT)...31(INT)
KROMEpreloadeddrumkits
32(USER)...47(USER)
Userdrumkits
KEY
Selectsthekeytowhichthedrumsample(anditssettings)
willbeassigned.
IfyoucheckAssignforthekeyyouselecthere,the
Drumsample18,VoiceAssignMode,andMixer
parameters(seebelow)willbeused.
[Off, On]
On(checked):Thedrumsamplesyouassignedfor
Drumsample18willsound.Normallyyouwillcheckthis
parameter.
Off(unchecked):Theselecteddrumsampleswillbe
invalid,andthedrumsamplesofthekeytotherightwill
sound.Atthistime,thepitchwillbeasemitonelowerthan
thepitchofthekeytotheright.Uncheckthisparameter
whenyouwishtoplayadrumsampleatdifferingpitches.
Drum Kit, Key Select, Assign
Drum Kit
Onevelocityzone
Drumsample1:On,Drumsample28:Off
Twovelocityzones
Drumsample1,2:On,Drumsample38:Off
[C1...G9]
Assign
Off(unchecked):Drumsample1willnotbeused.Thedrum
samplewillnotsound.
KEY Assign
C4 key
KEY: The selected key is shown in blue.
You can select a key by holding down the ENTER switch and playing
the desired note.
Eightvelocityzones
Drumsample18:On
Bank
Drumsample Select
[List of installed Drumsample]
SpecifytheDrumsample1drumsamplebybankanddrum
samplenumber.
BankselectseitherMonoorStereodrumsamples.However,
stereodrumsampleswillusetwiceasmanyvoicesasmono
drumsamples.
Mono,Stereo:Conventionalmonauralorstereodrum
samples.
XL.M(eXtraLargeMono),XL.St(eXtraLargeStereo),
VM.M(VirtualMemoryMono),VM.St(VirtualMemory
Stereo):Highcapacitymonauralorstereodrumsamples.
WhenyoupresstheDrumsampleSelectpopupbuttona
drumsamplelistwillappear,allowingyoutochoosedrum
samplesfromthelist.
Usethetabstochooseacategory,andthenchooseadrum
samplefromwithinthecategory.PresstheOKbuttonto
execute,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
Itisnotpossibletoeditthecategorynamesofdrum
samples,ortoreassignthecategory.
IfyouchooseBankMono:
Monodrumsampleswillbedisplayed.TheLchannelorR
channelofthestereodrumsamplesselectableviaBank:
Stereocanalsobeselectedasmonodrumsamples.Inthese
cases,LorRisshownfollowingthedrumsampleofthe
samename.
IfyouchooseBankStereo:
Onlystereodrumsampleswillbedisplayed.
Rev (Reverse)
[Off, On]
Thisletsyouplaytheselecteddrumsamplebackwards,
withoutlooping.However,somepresetdrumsamples
cannotbereverseplayed,andconsequently,theycannotbe
selected.
206
On(checked):Thedrumsamplewillplaybackinreverse.
Thelocationatwhichreverseplaybackstartsandendsis
alreadyspecifiedforeachdrumsample.
Forunselectedvelocityzones(shownasasingleline),Rev
Onisindicatedas[R].
51a
Off(unchecked):Thedrumsamplewillplaybacknormally.
Start Offset
[Off, 1st8th]
Inadditiontosimplystartingplaybackfromthebeginning,
drumsamplescanhaveupto8differentpreprogrammed
alternatestartingpoints.However,youcantselectdrum
samplesforwhichstartandoffsetarenotspecified.
Withdrumsamples,theStartOffsetspecifieswhethertouse
thenormalstartpoint(Off),ortouseoneofthealternate
startpoints(1st8th).
Somedrumsamplesmayhavefewerthan8pre
programmedpoints,inwhichcaseonlytheavailablepoints
canbeselected.
L (Amp Level)
[99...+99]
Specifiesthevolume.
Keysforwhichavalueof+99isspecifiedwillsoundata
volumetwiceashighastheampleveloftheprogramwhich
usesthatdrumkit.Keysforwhichavalueof0isspecified
willsoundatthevolumeoftheampleveloftheprogram
whichusesthatdrumkit.Keysforwhichavalueof99is
specifiedwillnotsound.
2...8: (Drumsample2...8)
ThesearethesettingsfortheDrumsample28velocity
zones.
TheparametersforDrumsample8areexactlythesameas
thoseforDrumsample1,asdescribedabove.
TheparametersforDrumsample8arealsosimilartothose
forDrumsample1,exceptthatDrumsample8hasno
settingsforThresholdVel.(whichisalwaysfixedat1),Xfd,
orCurve.
52a
Here,youcanadjustthetranspose,tune,attack,decay,filter
cutoff,andresonancesettingsforeachdrumsample.These
areoffsetsthatareaddedtothesettingsoftheprogram.
52a: Parameters
(Drumsample Parameters)
1: (Drumsample 1)
Drumsample 1 On/Off
[Off, On]
Thisparameterislinkedwith51b:Drumsample
Drumsample1.
On(checked):CheckthisifyouwanttouseDrumsample1.
Theselecteddrumsamplewillsound.
Off(unchecked):Drumsample1willnotbeused.Thedrum
samplewillnotsound.
Transpose
[64...+63]
Adjuststhepitchinsemitonesteps.
+12isoneoctaveup,and12isoneoctavedown.
Tune
[99...+99]
Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1octave.A
centis1/100ofasemitone.
Velocity Split
Thisindicatesthevelocityzonesoftheoscillatorseight
multisamples.
Adjuststheattacktimeofthevolume(Amplifier).The
attacktimeforeachkeyisdeterminedbyaddingthisvalue
totheampEGAttackTimeoftheprogramthatusesthis
drumkit.
Themeterontheleftindicatesthenoteonvelocityvalues.
Thisletsyouverifythemultisamples(s)thatwillbesounded
byeachvelocity(See01e:VelocityMeteronpage 5.).
0:WriteDrumKitsseep.220
1:RenameDrumKitseep.220
2:CopyDrumKitseep.220
[64...+63]
[64...+63]
Adjuststhedecaytimeofthevolume(Amplifier).Thedecay
timeforeachkeyisdeterminedbyaddingthisvaluetothe
ampEGDecayTimeoftheprogramthatusesthisdrumkit.
[64...+63]
Adjustthecutofffrequencyofthefilter.Thecutoff
frequencyforeachkeyanddrumsampleisdeterminedby
addingthisvaluetothefilterFrequency(Prog31b)ofthe
programthatusesthisdrumkit.
[64...+63]
Thisadjuststhefilterresonance.Thisoffsetvalueforeach
keyanddrumsampleisappliedtothefilterResonance
(Prog31b)oftheprogramsthatusethisdrumkit.
3:CopyKeySetupseep.220
4:SwapKeySetupseep.220
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
2...8: (Drumsample2...8)
Here,youcaneditthesampleparametersforDrumsample
28.Formoreinformation,pleasesee1:(Drumsample1)
above.
0:WriteDrumKitsseep.220
207
Global mode
1:RenameDrumKitseep.220
2:CopyDrumKitseep.220
3:CopyKeySetupseep.220
0:WriteDrumKitsseep.220
4:SwapKeySetupseep.220
1:RenameDrumKitseep.220
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
2:CopyDrumKitseep.220
3:CopyKeySetupseep.220
4:SwapKeySetupseep.220
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
53: Driver/EQ
53
Menu
51a
53a
Here,youcanadjustthedriveandthegainofthethree
bandEQforeachdrumsample.Theseareoffsetsthatare
addedtothesettingsoftheprogram.
53a: Driver/EG
1: (Drumsample 1)
Drumsample 1 On/Off
[Off, On]
Thisparameterislinkedwith51b:Drumsample
Drumsample1.
On(checked):CheckthisifyouwanttouseDrumsample1.
Theselecteddrumsamplewillsound.
Off(unchecked):Drumsample1willnotbeused.Thedrum
samplewillnotsound.
Drive
[99...+99]
Thisadjuststhedrivelevel.Thisoffsetvalueforeachkey
anddrumsampleisappliedtothedriverDrive(Prog41a)
settingoftheprogramsthatusethisdrumkit.
[99...+99]
Thisadjuststhelowboostlevelofthedriver.Thislowboost
settingforeachkeyanddrumsampleisappliedtothe
driverLowBoost(Prog41a)settingoftheprogramsthat
usethisdrumkit.
[36.0...+36.0]
[36.0...+36.0]
[36.0...+36.0]
Theseparametersadjustthegainforeachbandofthethree
bandparametricEQ.Thegainsettingsforeachkeyand
drumsampleareappliedtotheLowGain,MidGain,and
HighGain(Prog48a)settingsoftheprogramsthatusethis
drumkit.
2...8: (Drumsample2...8)
Here,youcaneditthesampleparametersforDrumsample
28.Formoreinformation,pleasesee1:(Drumsample1)
above.
208
51a
55a
Linearmeansthatthetwosampleswilleachbeat50%of
theirfullvolumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.Sometimes,
thismaycreateadipinthevolumelevel;ifso,tryusing
Powerinstead.
Power,shortforEqualPower,meansthatthetwosamples
willeachbeataround70%oftheirfullvolumeinthemiddle
ofthecrossfade.Sometimes,thismaycreateabumpinthe
volumelevel,inwhichcaseyoumighttryselectingLinear
instead.
Layermeansthatthetwodrumsampleswillbelayered
together,bothatfullvolume,fortheentirerangeofthe
crossfade.
55b
Crossfade Curves
UseThresholdVel.andCrossfadetospecifythevelocity
zonessoundedbyDrumsample18.
1: (Drumsample1)
Drumsample 1 On/Off
Velocity
[Off, On]
Thisparameterislinkedwith51b:Drumsample
Drumsample1.
On(checked):CheckthisifyouwanttouseDrumsample1.
Theselecteddrumsamplewillsound.
Off(unchecked):Drumsample1willnotbeused.Thedrum
samplewillnotsound.
Volume
[1127]
Thissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichthedrumsamplewill
sound.Drumsample1sThresholdVel.canbeequalto,but
notlowerthan,thanthatofDrumsample2.
Velocity
YoucanchangetheThresholdVel.valuebytouchingthe
graphicattherightanddraggingit(See*EG,Velocity
Splitonpage 6oftheOperationguide.).
[Off, 1127]
ThisspecifiesthevelocityrangestartingatThresholdVel.
overwhichDrumsample1willfadeoutandDrumsample2
willfadein.
Forinstance,iftheThresholdVel.issetto64,andthe
Crossfadeissetto20,Drumsaple2willstarttofadeinat
velocitiesof84andbelow.
WhenvelocitiesarewithintheCrossfade,theOscillatorwill
usetwiceasmuchpolyphonyasitwouldnormally.
Note:Youcanonlyfadebetweentwozonesatonce.
Velocity
2...8: (Drumsample2...8)
Here,youcaneditthesampleparametersforDrumsample
28.Formoreinformation,pleasesee1:(Drumsample1)
above.
TheparametersforDrumsample8arealsosimilartothose
forDrumsample1,exceptthatDrumsample8hasno
settingsforTheshold(whichisalwaysfixedat1),Crossfade,
orCurve.
Select
Crossfade
/Curve
Threshold
Velocity
Volume
Xfade
Range
0:WriteDrumKitsseep.220
1:RenameDrumKitseep.220
2:CopyDrumKitseep.220
3:CopyKeySetupseep.220
4:SwapKeySetupseep.220
Thiscontrolsthevolumecurveofthecrossfade.Linearand
Power(shortforEqualPower)letyoufinetunethewaythat
thetwodrumsamplesmixtogether;oneortheothermaybe
moreappropriateforagivenpairofdrumsamples.Layer,
truetoitsname,letsyoulayerthetwodrumsamples
togetherwithoutanycrossfading.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
209
Global mode
Tip:Inmostofthepreloadeddrumkits,thefollowingtypes
ofdruminstrumenthavethesameBus(IFX/Output)Select
settings.
55: Voice/Mixer
55
Menu
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
FX Control Bus
51a
[Off, 1, 2]
Foreachkey,youcanselectwhetherthesignalwillbesent
toFXControlbus(stereotwochannel)FXCtrl1or2.
55a
Normallyyouwillleavethisoff,butyoucanusethissetting
ifyouwanttocontrolaneffectbyplayingaspecifickey.
Youcanusethiswiththefollowingeffects:
Specifythevoiceassign,pan,andeffectroutingetc.foreach
keyofthedrumkit.
Vocoders:
174:Vocoder
Compressorandgatetypeeffects:
003:StereoLimiter
[Off, On]
On(checked):Evenwhenthesamekey(note)isplayed
repeatedly,thepreviousnotewillbehaltedbeforethenew
noteisbegun,sothatthenoteswillnotoverlap.Normally
youwillleavethisunchecked.
[Off, On]
006:StereoGate
On(checked):Noteonmessageswillbereceived.Normally
youwillcheckthis,butyoucanuncheckitifyoudonot
wantspecificnotestosound.
KEY: D3
(Snare)
Bus Select
: IFX4
IFX4
084: Reverb Hall
Chain to
: IFX4
IFX5
006: Stereo Gate
Bus Select
: L/R
Envelope Source
: FX Control 1
FX Control Bus: 1
On(checked):Noteoffmessageswillbereceived.Normally
youwilluncheckthis.ThisparameterisvalidwhenHold
(Prog12a)ischecked(HoldOn).Inthecaseofadrum
program,youwillnormallyselectHoldOn.Inthiscaseif
EnableNoteOffReceiveischecked,noteoffmessageswill
bereceived,andthesoundwillstop(thereleasesegmentof
theEGwillbegin)whenthekeyisreleased.
55b: Mixer
InProgrammode,Drumkitswillsoundusingthe
settingsoftheselectedprogram.PanisvalidifUse
DKitSetting(Prog41c)ischecked.Bus(IFX/Output)
Select,FXControlBus,andSend1/2arevalidifUse
DKitSetting(Prog81c)ischecked.Beawarethat
whileeditingadrumkit,theeditedresultswillnotbe
reflectedunlessthesesettingshavebeenmade.
Pan
[Random, L001...C064...R127]
ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBus(IFX/Output)Selectisset
toL/RorOff.IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,the
sendleveltomastereffects1and2willbedeterminedby
theProgram,Combination,orSequencermodeP8:Routing/
IFXInsertFXSetuppageparametersSend1andSend2
whicharelocatedafterthesoundpassesthroughIFX15.
0:WriteDrumKitsseep.220
1:RenameDrumKitseep.220
2:CopyDrumKitseep.220
Specifiesthepanningforeachkey.
L001placesthesoundatfarleft,andR127placesthesignal
atfarright.WithasettingofRandom,thedrumsamplewill
bepannedrandomlyateachnoteon.
4:SwapKeySetupseep.220
Foreachkey,specifythebustowhichthesoundwillbesent.
Forexample,youmightsendSnaresoundstoIFX1andKick
soundstoIFX2toapplyseparateinserteffects,andsendthe
remainingsoundstoL/Rwithoutapplyinginserteffects.
[000...127]
[000...127]
Foreachkey,specifythesendlevelstomastereffects1and
2.
3:CopyKeySetupseep.220
210
[Off, On]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
61a
61b
61c
However,itisnotpossibletoturnonanarpeggiatorfor
whichtheArpeggiatorRun(CombiP0:05(6)a,P7:71(2)c)
parameterAorBisnotchecked.Additionally,the
arpeggiatorwillnotoperateifithasnotbeenassignedtoa
timbreinArpeggiatorAssign(CombiP7:71(2)c).
IfyouenteredGlobalmodefromSequencermode:Your
editingwillapplytothearpeggiopatternspecifiedforthe
selectedsong.EvenifyouenteredGlobalmodefrom
settingsinwhichthearpeggiatorwasturnedoff,youcan
usetheARPbuttontoturniton.
IftheKROMEwaspreviouslyinCombinationorSequencer
modeandyouwanttoeditanarpeggiopattern,youmust
selecteitherarpeggiatorAorBasthepatterntoedit.Your
editingwillapplyonlytotheselectedone.Bwillnotbe
displayedifthepreviousmodewasProgrammode.
However,itisnotpossibletoturnonanarpeggiatorfor
whichtheArpeggiatorRun(SeqP7:71(2)c)parameterAor
Bisnotchecked.Additionally,thearpeggiatorwillnot
operateifithasnotbeenassignedtoatrackinArpeggiator
Assign(SeqP7:71(2)c).
(Tempo)
Ineachoftheabovecases,youcanmodifythesettingsofthe
arpeggiopatternevenifthearpeggiatorisnotturnedon.
Wheneditingapattern,itisagoodideatoturnonthe
arpeggiatorandmakesurethatitisthepatternthatyou
wishtoedit.
Ifyouwanttheediteduserarpeggiopatternsettingsto
bebackedupevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff,you
mustwritethemintomemory.SelecttheWrite
ArpeggioPatternmenucommandtoaccesstheWrite
ArpeggioPatterndialogbox.Alternatively,pressthe
WRITEbuttontoaccesstheUpdateArpeggioPatterns
dialogbox.ThenpresstheOKbuttontowritethe
editeddata.
Whenyoueditauserarpeggiopattern,youreditswill
affectallprogramsandcombinationsthatusethe
editedpattern.Ifyouwanttoeditoneofthepreload
arpeggiopatterns,itsagoodideatocopythatarpeggio
patterntoanunusedareaintheuserbankbeforeyou
editit.
Fordetailsoncreatinganarpeggiopattern,seeOGp.91.
Arpeggio Select
[A, B]
[040.00...300.00, EXT]
Specifiesthetempo.
ThiscanalsobeadjustedbytheTEMPOknob.Youcanalso
usethe[TEMPO]knobtoadjustthetempo.IfMIDIClock
(Global11a)issettoAutoandMIDIclockdataisbeing
receivedfromanexternaldevice,orifExternalMIDIor
ExternalUSBisselected,thisparametersvalueisshownas
EXT,andthearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetotheincoming
MIDIclockdatafromtheexternalMIDIdevice.
Pattern
Selectsthepatternthatyouwanttoedit.
P0:UP...P4:RANDOM
Presetarpeggiopatterns
U0000(INT)...U0899(INT)
Preloadedarpeggiopatterns
U0900(USER)...U1027(USER)
Userarpeggiopatterns
Note:Ifyouwanttoeditanarpeggiopattern(suchasa
preloadedarpeggiopattern)thatisalsousedbyanother
program,itisagoodideatousethemenucommandCopy
ArpeggioPatterntocopythearpeggiopatterntoanunused
numberU0900(USER)...U1027(USER),andthentoeditthe
copy.
Note:Ifyouwanttoeditthearpeggiopatternname,execute
themenucommandRenameArpeggioPattern.
[01...48]
Specifiesthelengthofthearpeggiopattern.Thearpeggio
patternwillplaythenumberofstepsyouspecifyhereatthe
notevalueintervalspecifiedbyResolution,andwillthen
beginagain.Thisisnotvalidforpresetarpeggiopatterns
P0P4.
211
Global mode
[1, 2, 3, 4]
[ , , , , , , , ]
AsPlayed:012rest012rest0...
Sort
[Off, On]
AsPlayed(Fill):012201220...
Latch
[Off, On]
RunningUp:012001200...
Key Sync.
[Off, On]
Keyboard
[Off, On]
Formoreinformation,pleasesee71:ARPSetupon
page 53.
Pattern,(Tempo),Octave,Resolution,Sort,Latch,
KeySync.,andKeyboardareparametersthatcanbe
setinProgram,Combination,Song,andSongPlay
modes,butyoucanalsosetthemhere.
IfyoumoveherefromProgramorCombinationmode
andsettheseparameters,youmustreturntotheorigi
nalmodeandwritethem.Theseparameterscannotbe
writtenbytheWriteArpeggioPatternscommandin
thispage.
ThisselectstheTonetypeofthearpeggiopattern.
Normal:Thisistheconventionalarpeggiatortype.Each
Toneinthearpeggiowillplaybasedonthenotenumberof
thekeysthatyouarepressingonthekeyboard.
FixedNote:Thenotenumberofeachtoneisfixed.Thenote
numbersplayedonthekeyboardwillbeignored,andthe
arpeggiowillsoundusingspecifiedpitches.Notenumbers
fromthekeyboardwillonlycontrolthetriggertimingofthe
arpeggiator.FixedNotemodeisidealforarpeggiopatterns
thatyouareusingasdrumpatterns.
IntheP6:UserArpeggio,PatternEditpage,theTone
indicatorswillbewhenNormalisselectedhere,or
whenFixedNoteisselected.
Arpeggio Type
[As PlayedUp&Down]
Specifiestherelationshipbetweenthearpeggionotes
specifiedfromthekeyboardandtheToneateachstep.
AsPlayed:IftherearemoreTonesinastepthanarpeggio
notesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),thosesteps
willnotsound.
AsPlayed(Fill):IftherearemoreTonesinastepthan
arpeggionotesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),the
lastplayednote(SortisOff),orthehighestnote(SortisOn)
willsoundforthosesteps.
RunningUp:IftherearemoreTonesinastepthanarpeggio
notesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),thearpeggio
willreturntothefirstnote(ifSortisOff),orthelowestnote
(ifSortisOn)andsoundit.
Up&Down:IftherearemoreTonesinastepthanarpeggio
notesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),thearpeggio
willreturninreversedirectionfromthelastarpeggionote
backtowardthefirst.
212
Example)
IfyousetLengthto04,StepNo.01toTone0,StepNo.02
toTone1,StepNo.03toTone2,StepNo.04toTone3,and
simultaneouslyplaythreenotestoproduceanarpeggio,
thefollowingresultswillbeproduceddependingonthe
ArpeggioType.
Up&Down:012101210...
Octave Motion
SpecifiestheoperationwhenOctaveissetto24octaves.
Up:Noteswillrepeatedlyascendwithinthespecifiedrange
ofoctaves.
Down:Noteswillrepeatedlydescendwithinthespecified
numberofoctaves.
Both:Noteswillrepeatedlyascendanddescendwithinthe
specifiednumberofoctaves.
Parallel:Thenotesofthespecifiedoctaveswillsound
simultaneously.
Example)
WewilluseanArpeggioToneModeFixedNotepattern
ondrums.Tone0isassignedanotenumberthatwill
soundakick,Tone1asnare,andTone2ahihat.
WithasettingofTriggerAsPlayedandArpeggioTypeis
AsPlayed,pressingonekeywillsoundonlyTone0
(kick).PressingtwokeyswillsoundTone0(kick)and
Tone1(snare).Pressingthreekeyswillsoundallthree
Tones02(kick,snare,hihat).IftheVelocityofeach
ToneissettoKey,eachTonewillbesoundedattheveloc
itywithwhicheachkeywasplayed.
WithasettingofTriggerAllTones,playingonekeyis
sufficienttosoundallthree;Tone0(kick),Tone1(snare),
andTone2(hihat).IftheVelocityofeachToneissetto
Key,theToneswillbesoundedatthecorresponding
velocityeachtimeakeyispressed.
Parameter Panel
Theparameterpanelinthelowerpartofthisareashowsa
graphicrepresentationoftheselectedstepparameter(61j).
Youcantouchanddragtoeditthis.
Youcanselectastepbypressingthepanel.
6-1f
6-1i
6-1g
6-1k
Usethesebuttonstoselectthemodeyoullusetoenternotes
inthetonepanel.
Alternate mode
6-1j
6-1h
Toneswillbeinsertedordeleted.
Pen mode
Toneswillbeinserted.
Eraser mode
Toneswillbedeleted.
(See61a:ArpeggioSelect,,Pattern,Lengthonpage 211.)
OpenstheToolTablet,allowingyoutospecifyaregionand
delete,insert,orcopydata.
[01...48]
(SeeLength(PatternLength)onpage 213.)
Zoom Scroll
Usethesetomovethezoomedareahorizontally(Steps)or
vertically(Tones),inincrementsofhalfthearea.Tomake
approximatemovements,touchanddragtheoverview.To
makefineadjustments,usethezoomscrollbuttons.
VIEW
Tool mode
[01...48]
Usethistoselectthestepthatyouwanttoedit.
IfStepisselected,youcanalsoentertonesbypressingthe
numerickeys.[0][9]correspondtotones09,[]
correspondstotone10,and[.]correspondstotone11.The
numerickeyswillentertonesasprescribedbythetone
inputmodeyouselected.
Thisspecifiesanapproximatelimitfortheareaofthe
overviewdisplay.Ifyousetthisappropriatelyforthe
selectedLengthandResolution,itmaybeeasiertoselect
thezoomarea.
Ifthe
buttonattheleftison,thisfieldwillbe
synchronizedwiththestepofthearpeggiatorwhenitis
running.
Overview
Foreachstep,thepitchcorrespondingtotheTonecanbe
raisedorloweredinsemitonesteps.Thisletsyoumake
settingsforthesametoneineachsteptocreateamelody,or
tomakesettingsfortwoormoretonesineachsteptoplay
parallelchords.
Thearpeggiopatternisshownassymbols.Theregionthat
iszoomedinthetouchgridishighlighted.Toselectthis,use
thezoomscrollbuttonslocatedabove,ortouchanddragthe
overview.
Pitch Offset
Gate
61g: Resolution
SeeResolution*onpage 54.
[48...+48]
Off:Evenifatonehasbeenentered,itwillnotsoundatthat
step.Youcanalsousethistostopalegatotonethatwas
previouslysounding.
Legato:Thetonewillcontinuesoundinguntilthesametone
isplayedagain(includingGate:Off)orthepatternreturns
toitsbeginning.
TheLegatosettingisvalidiftheGateparameter(ProgP7:7
1b,CombiP7:73(4)c,SeqP7:73(4)c)ofeachprogram,
combination,orsongissettoStep.IfyouspecifyLegato,
makesurethattheGateofthepreviousmodeissettoStep.
Ontheleft,tonenumbersareshownifArpeggioTone
ModeisNormal,ornotenamesareshowniftheArpeggio
ToneModeisFixedNote.
213
Global mode
Velocity
[001...127, Key]
Key:TheToneofthestepwillsoundwiththevelocityat
whichthekeywasplayed.
001127:Thespecifiedvelocityvaluewillalwaysbeused.
ThissettingisvalidwhentheProgram,Combination,or
SongparameterVelocity(ProgramP7:71b,Combination
P7:73(4)c,SequencerP7:73(4)c)issettoStep.
Tool Tablet
Toopenthetooltablet,pressthetoolmodebuttoninthe
toneinputmodearea.ThistabletcontainsanAreaToolstab
andaCopyToolstab.
6-1l
Whenmakingthissetting,makesurethatVelocityissetto
Stepinthepreviousmodebeforeenteringthispage.
Flam
[99...+99]
Specifieshowthenotetimingwillbeskewedwhentwoor
moreTonesarespecifiedinthesamestep.
6-1m
00:AllToneswillsoundsimultaneously.
+01+99:Thetimingofthenoteswillbeskewedintheorder
oftheTonenumber.(WhenSortisON,fromlownoteto
highnote.WhenSortisOFF,intheorderinwhichkeys
werepressed.)
0199:Thetimingofthenoteswillbeskewedinthe
oppositedirectionas+.
Tosimulatechordsstrummedonaguitar,trysetting+
valuesforoddnumberedstepsandvaluesforeven
numberedsteps.
ThisisnotvalidforpresetpatternsP0P4.
[01...48, 00...11]
UseSelectanareatospecifytheareawhereyouwantto
executeacommand.Theparameterstotheleftandright
specifytherangeofsteps,andtheparametersaboveand
belowspecifytherangeoftones.
Youcanalsoselectanareabytouchinganddragginginthe
overview.
Undo, Redo
Thesebuttonsundoorredoacommandyouexecuted.Undo
willcanceltheresultofthecommandthatyoupreviously
executed.Redowillonceagainexecutethecommandthat
wascancelledbyUndo.Theseactionsalsoaffecttoneinput
inArpeggioPatternEdit.
Close
PresstheClosebuttontoclosethetooltablet.
Area Tools
Erase
Erasesalltonesintheselectedarea.(Thevariousstep
parametervalueswillbepreserved.)
Fill
Insertsalltonesintheselectedarea.(Thevariousstep
parametervalueswillbepreserved.)
Invert
Invertstheinserted/deletedstateofthetonesintheselected
area.(Thevariousstepparametervalueswillbepreserved.)
Unlikethecommandslistedabove,executingthefollowing
commandswillcausetonestomove.Normallyyoull
executethefollowingcommandsonaspecifiedregionof
tones0011.
Space
Insertsblankspaceintheselectedarea.Stepparameterswill
besettotheirdefaultvalues.
Whentheblankspaceisinserted,tonesfollowingthat
locationwillmovetotheright.
Ifthewithstepparametersoptionisselected,thestep
parametervalueswillalsomove.
214
Thefirsthalfwillmoveupward.
Delete
Deletestheselectedregion.
External:
Datatotherightoftheselectedregionwillmovetowardthe
lefttofillthegap.
Hereyoucancopythesettingsofadifferentuserarpeggio
pattern.
Ifthewithstepparametersoptionisselected,thestep
parametervalueswillalsomove.
<<, >>
Byusinglimitbyselected,youcancreatepatchworkedits
thataremoresophisticatedthansimplyusingCopy
ArpeggioPattern.
Cyclesthetoneswithintheselectedregion.
(Copy From)
Ifthewithstepparametersoptionisselected,thestep
parametervalueswillalsobecycled.
Selectsthecopysourcearpeggiopattern.
*Thisfunctionisnotavailableifthecopysourcearpeggio
patternisthesameasthecurrentlyeditedpattern.
limit by selected
Ifthisoptionisselected,thestepparameterswillalsobe
affectedwhenyouexecutetheSpace,Delete,<<,or>>
commands.
Ifthisoptionisselected,onlythespecifiedregionofthe
copysourcearpeggiopatternwillbecopied.
Copy Tools
Ifthisoptioniscleared,theentirepatternwillbecopiedjust
aswhenusingCopyArpeggioPattern.
Print
Insertstheselectedarpeggiopattern.
Local:
Copy
Copiestheselectedregiontothecopybuffer.
Cut
Copiestheselectedregiontothecopybuffer,andthen
deletesit.
0:WriteArpeggioPatternsseep.221
Paste
2:CopyArpeggioPatternseep.221
Thiscommandisavailableifthereisdatainthecopybuffer.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobal:MenuCommand
onpage 216.
Specifyaregion,andthenpaste(overwrite)thedatafrom
thecopybuffer.
1:RenameArpeggioPatternseep.221
Ifthew/stepparam(withstepparameter)optionis
selected,thestepparametervalueswillalsobepasted.
Thedatafromthecopybufferwillbepastedsothatthe
lowerleftpointoftheregionspecifiedwhencopyingwillbe
atthelowerleftpointoftheregionyouspecifybefore
executingthePastecommand.
limit by selected
Ifthisoptionisselected,thedatafromthecopybufferwill
bepastedonlytotheextentoftheregionyouspecifybefore
executingthePastecommand.
Ifthisoptioniscleared,allofthedatafromthecopybuffer
willbepasted.
215
Global mode
Kind
Content
All(PreloadPCG
andDemoSongs)
AllPCG(Program,Combination,Global
settings,drumkit,,arpeggiopattern),and
demosongdata
AllPreloadPCG
AllPCGdata
AllDemoSongs
Alldemosongdata
Program
Programdata
Combination
Combinationdata
1. Selectthemenucommand.
DrumKit
Drumkitdata
2. Makesettingsinthedialogbox.
ArpeggioPattern
Arpeggiopatterndata
Fordetailsonthecontentofeachdialogbox,refertothe
followingexplanationsofeachcommand.
GlobalSetting
Globalsettingdata
3. Toexecute,presstheOKbutton.Tocancelwithoutexe
cuting,presstheCancelbutton.
2. IfyouselectedProgram,Combination,DrumKit,or
ArpeggioPatternastheKind,specifytherangeofdata
thatyouwanttoload.
All:loadalldata
Bank:loadanindividualbank
Single:loadoneitemofdata
3. IfyoureloadingBankorSingle,useTotospecifythe
loadingdestination.
Note:Youcanalsoaccessandexecutethiscommandby
pressingtheWRITEbutton.
Note:Tosavethedrumkit,executetheP5menucommand.
(WriteDrumKits)
ChangeallbankreferencesisavailableontheBasicSetup
page.
Note:Tosavethearpeggiopattern,executetheP6menu
command.(WriteArpeggioPatterns)
Thiscommandchangesallprogrambanksspecifiedfor
timbresincombinationsortracksofsongs.
TheEffectGlobalSWsettingwillnotbesaved.
1. Ifyouwishtochangebankreferencesforcombina
tions,checkCombination.
Ifyouwishtochangebankreferencesforsongs,checkSong.
2. InProgramBank,specifythereplacementforeach
bank.
Ifyouchangetwoormoredifferentbankstothesame
bank,itwillnotbepossibletousethisfunctionto
changethembacktodifferentbanks.Becarefulthatthe
changedestinationbanksdonotoverlap.
Display Setup
Thisletsyouadjustthebrightnessofthedisplay.
1. UseKindtoselectthetypeofdatayouwanttoload.
1. ChooseDisplaySetuptoopenthedialogbox.
2. AdjusttheBrightnessasdesired.
Brightness:010(10isthedefault)
216
Whenyoutouchatarget,aballshapedsymbolwill
appear.
Thecloserthecenteroftheballistothecenterofthetar
get,themoreaccuratelycalibrationwasperformed.You
canpressthetargetagainasmanytimesasyoulike.
5. Ifdesired,youcanpresstheRedobuttontoreturnto
step2andperformthecalibrationagain.
6. Ifyouaresatisfiedwiththetouchresponse,pressthe
OKbutton(ortheENTERbutton)toendtheprocedure.
7. PresstheEXITbutton,andyouwillreturntothestate
priortoexecutingthecalibrationfunction.
Ifinsteps2or3youpressedascreenlocationthatwas
significantlydistantfromthecenterofthe+target,
thedetectionpointsfortheRedobuttonandOKbutton
willalsobeskewed.Ifyoureunabletopressthese
buttonssuccessfully,trypressingtheareaaroundthem.
Alternatively,presstheEXITbuttontoexitthe
procedure,andthenperformtheTouchPanel
Calibrationoperationonceagain.
Sincethehalfdamperpedalishighlysensitive,please
usetheoptionalDS1H.Otherpedalsmaynotproduce
theappropriateeffect,ormaybeimpossibletocalibrate
correctly.
1. ConnectahalfdamperpedaltotheDAMPERjack.
2. SelectHalfDamperCalibrationtoopenthedialog
box.
3. Pressthehalfdamperpedal,andthenreleaseyourfoot
fromthepedal.
4. PresstheDonebutton.
Iftheadjustmentcouldnotbeperformedcorrectly,anerror
messagewillbedisplayed.Pleaseperformtheprocedure
onceagain.
Whenyourtouchonthetargethasbeendetected,the
touchscreenwillbecalibrated,andthescreenwillask
youtoverifytheresult.
4. Touchthethreetargetstoverifythatcalibrationwas
successful.
217
Global mode
Dump:
UpdateSystemSoftwareisavailableontheBasicSetup
page.
Dump Program
Dump Combination
Dump Drum Kit
Dump Arpeggio Pattern
Dump Global Setting
Dump Sequencer
Dump Drum Track Pattern
Here,youcanupdatetheKROMEsystem.
Youcandownloadthelatestsystemfileontoyourcomputer
fromtheKorgwebsite(http://www.korg.com/).Fordetails,
pleaseseetheKorgwebsite.
Beforeyoubeginthesystemupdate,youshouldback
upyourimportantdataonanSDcard.
1. InserttheSDcardcontainingthesystemfileintothe
SDcardslotoftheKROME.
Note:FordetailsonhowtocopythesystemfiletoyourSD
card,pleaseseetheexplanationonthedownloadpageof
theKorgwebsite.
2. AccesstheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage.
3. SelectUpdateSystemSoftwaretoopenthedialog
box.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheupdate.
Adialogboxwillaskyouforconfirmation.PresstheOK
buttontobeginupdatingthesystemsoftware.
Note:IfanerrormessageofFile/pathnotfoundappears,
presstheOKbuttonandproceedagainfromstep1.
Whilethesystemisbeingupdated,donottouchthe
KROMEswitches,andneverturnoffthepower.Ifthe
powerisaccidentallyturnedoffwhilethesystemis
beingloaded,theKROMEmaybecomeinoperable.If
thisoccurs,pleasecontactyourlocalKorgdistributor.
5. Whentheupdatehasbeencompleted,adialogbox
withthefollowingmessagewillappear.
Thesystemupdatehasnowbeeninstalled.Tocompletethe
process,youmustnowrestarttheKROME.Pleaseturnthe
poweroff,andthenonagain.
6. PowerofftheKROME.Waitforseveralseconds,and
thenturnthepoweronagain.
Afteryouturnthepoweroff,waitforseveralseconds
beforeyourestarttheKROME.
Thesystemversionnumberisshowninthelowercenterof
theopeningscreen.Verifythatitmatchesthenewsystem
softwareversion.
218
ThesecommandsareavailableontheMIDIpage.
ThesecommandsallowtheKROMEinternaldatatobe
transmittedtoanotherKROME,MIDIdatafiler,or
computerintheformofMIDISystemExclusivedata.
Selectthedesiredcommand(pleaseseethefollowingtable),
andadialogboxwillappear.
Then,selectthebankortimbreetc.ofthedatatobe
dumped,andpresstheOKbutton.
DumpProgram
Programsofallbanks,programsofone
bank,oneprogram
Dump
Combination
Combinationsofallbanks,combinationsof
onebank,onecombination
DumpDrumKit
Alldrumkits,onedrumkit
DumpArpeggio
Pattern
Allarpeggiopatterns,onearpeggiopattern
DumpGlobal
setting
Globalsettings(exceptfortheDrumKits
andArpeggioPatternsofGlobalmode)
DumpSequencer
Allsongdataandcuelistdata
DumpDrumTrack
Pattern
Alldrumtrackuserpattern,onedrumtrack
userpattern
4. UsetheTofieldtoselecttheoutputconnectorthatwill
transmitthedata.
MIDIOUT:MIDIOUTconnector
USB:USBconnector
5. PresstheOKbuttontotransmitthedata.
Whilethedataisbeingtransmitted,thedisplaywillindicate
NowTransmittingMIDIData.
Thesizeofthedataandthetimerequiredfortransmission
willdependonthetypeofdata.
Thefollowingtableshowsthesizeofeachdatadump,and
thetimerequired(MIDI).
Type of data to be
dumped
ProgramAll
ProgramBank
ProgramSingle
CombinationAll
CombinationBank
CombinationSingle
DrumKitAll
DrumKitSingle
ArpeggioPatternAll
ArpeggioPatternSingle
GlobalSetting
Data size
(Bytes)
Time
required
MIDI (Sec.)
Time
required
USB-MIDI
(Sec.)*1
1307910
418.5
13.6
261582
83.7
2.7
2067
0.7
0.02
1537848
492.1
16
384462
123
3027
0.04
704122
225.3
7.3
14679
4.7
0.4
498163
159.4
508
0.2
0.005
19835
6.4
0.3
Sequencer
23409...
1966831
7.5...629.4
0.3...20.5
DrumTrackPatternAll
50060...
795060
16.0...254.4
1...9
60...740080
0.02...236.8
0.001...8.4
DrumTrackPattern
Single
*1: TheUSBMIDIdumptimeslistedhereareforwhenthe
KROMEisconnectedtoacomputerwithaUSB1.1port.
Thetimerequiredwillchangedependingonthe
computersystemyoureusing.
Note:Moretimewillberequiredifthesongdatacontains
SystemExclusiveevents,sincethesemustbeconverted.
WhenperformingadatadumpfromtheKROMEonto
aMIDIdatafiler,donottransmitmultipledatadumps
together.Ifmultipledataissavedtogether,thenwhen
thedataisretransmittedfromthedatafiler,the
KROMEwillhavelessthantherequiredtimetowrite
thedataintomemory,andwillbeunabletoreceiveall
ofthedatacorrectly.
Inthiscase,holddowntheEXITbuttontogetherwith
PAGEbutton,andturnonthepower.However,this
willinitializethecontentsofmemory.
TransmissionandreceptionofanyotherMIDIdatais
alsoimpossibleduringthistime.Whenreceiving
multipledatadumpsinsuccession,youmustallow
enoughtimebetweeneachdatadumpforthemessage
todisappearfromthescreen.(seetablebelow)
AllPrograms
Approximately1second(eachbank
received)
AllCombinations
Approximately1second(eachbank
received)
AllDrumKits
Approximately1second
AllArpeggioPattern
Approximately1second
GlobalSetting
Approximately1second
Sequencer
Approximately1second
DrumTrackPattern
Approximately1second
MIDIcannotbetransmittedorreceivedwhiledatais
beingwrittenintointernalmemory.Also,transmission
ofActiveSensing(FEh)fromtheMIDIOUTconnector
andUSBconnectorwillbehalted.
Afteradatadumpisreceived,theKROMEwillrequire
approximatelyonesecondtoprocessthedataandwrite
itintomemory.Duringthistime,thedisplaywillshow
themessage,Nowwritingintointernalmemory.
Whilethismessageisshown,youmustunderno
circumstancesturnoffthepoweroftheKROME.Ifthe
poweristurnedoffduringthistime,theKROMEmay
failtooperatecorrectlywhenthepoweristurnedon
again.
219
Global mode
Note:Youcanalsoaccessandexecutethiscommandby
pressingtheWRITEbutton.
ResetControllerMIDIAssignisavailableontheMIDICC#
AssigntaboftheControllerspage.
ThisautomaticallyassignstheMIDIcontrolchange
messagesforeachcontrolleroftheP2:ControllersMIDI
CC#Assignpage.
RenameDrumKitsisavailableontheDrumKitpage.
Thisrenamesadrumkit.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEditingnameson
page 117oftheOperationguide.
1. SettheTofieldtothedesiredresetmethod.
AllOff:AllsettingswillbeOff.
DefaultSetting:ThecontrolllerswillallbesettoOff;theX
YcontrolwillbesettoitsdefaultCCs.
CCDefault:Theparameterswillberesettothetypical
settings,includingthestandardsettingsforthecontrolllers.
IfyouwanttousethecontrollerswithanexternalMIDI
device,werecommendusingthissetting.
(YouarealsofreetoassigndifferentMIDIcontrolchange
messagestothecontrollers,ifyouwish.)
Thedefaultvaluesareshowninthetablebelow.
WhenyouexecuteCopyDrumKit,thesettingsofthe
currentlyselecteddrumkitwillbeoverwritten.
ARPControllers
Selectthecopysourcedrumkit(From).
Default Setting
CC Default
On/Off
CC#14
(CC#14)
Knob1
CC#22
(CC#22)
Knob2
CC#23
(CC#23)
Knob3
CC#24
(CC#24)
Knob4
CC#25
(CC#25)
Copy Scale
CopyScaleisavailableontheScalespage.
Thiscommandcopiesdatafromapresetscaletoauserscale
orcopiesauserscaletoanotheruserscalelocation.For
detailsonthepresetscales,pleaseseeType(Prog12d).
1. IntheFromKeyfields,selecttherangeofkeysthatyou
wishtocopy.
2. IntheToKeyfield,selectthecopydestinationkey.If
youselectedtwoormorekeysintheFromKeyfield,
theirsettingswillbecopiedtothekeysstartingatthe
ToKeyandcontinuingupward.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcescale.
IfyouselectPureMajororPureMinor,specifytheKey
(locatedattheright)aswell.
StretchcannotbeselectedifToisUserAllNotesScale.
2. InTo,selectsthecopydestinationscale.
220
UseSourceKey1andSourceKey2tospecifythekeys
whosesettingsyouwanttoswap.
SelectthecopysourcearpeggiopatternFrom.
BeawarethatwhenyouexecuteCopyArpeggio
Pattern,allsettingsofthecurrentlyselectedarpeggio
patternwillbeoverwritten.
221
Global mode
222
Media mode
Inthismode,youcansaveinternalmemorydatatoan
insertedSDcard,orloaddatafrommediaintointernal
memory.Youcanalsocopyordeletefiles,orformatmedia.
Thefollowingmediacanbeused.
SD cards
SDandSDHCmemorycardssupportingMSDOSformat
FAT16orFAT32aresupported.
SDXCmemorycardsarenotsupported.
FormoreinformationabouthandlingtheSDcard,please
seetheInserting/removingacardintheSDcardslot
sectiononpage 118oftheOperationGuide.
Type
.PCG
Programs,combinations,drumkits,globalsettings,
arpeggiopatterns,drumtrackpatterns(dedicated
KROMEformat)
.SNG
Song,cuelist(dedicatedKROMEformat)
.MID
StandardMIDIFile(SMFformat0/1)
.EXL
MIDIExclusivedata
WhenKROMEdataissaved,oneofthesefilename
extensionswillbeaddedautomatically,accordingtothe
typeofdata.Ifthesefilenameextensionsaremodifiedona
computer,thefilewillbetreatedasanundefinedfilewhen
itisreloadedbackintotheKROME,andwillbehandledasa
StandardMIDIFile.
FileshandledbytheKROMEhavetheshowninthe
structure(seenextpage).Since.PCGand.SNGfilescanbe
openedtodividetheircontents,theyaredisplayedas
directoryicons.
223
Media mode
DOS files
.PCG file
All programs
1 program
bank A...F
1 program
All combinations
1 combination
bank A...D
1 combination
1 drum kit
bank INT, USER
1 drum kit
DOS directory
All user
1 user
arpeggio patterns arpeggiopattern
bank INT, USER
1 drum track
pattern
Global settings
DOS files
.SNG file
Cue list
.MID file
1 song
(S000-127)
All track
.EXL file
1 user pattern
(U0099)
224
Media: File
01b: Current Directory
01: Load
01b
01
Menu
01c
01a
Here,youcanloadtheselectedfileordirectoryintointernal
memory.UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttonstoselectthe
desiredfileordirectory,andpresstheLoadbuttontoloadit.
YoucanalsoloaddatabyusingtheLoadselectedmenu
command.
Current Directory
Thedirectorycurrentlyselectedforprocessingisreferredto
asthecurrentdirectory.
Thedisplaywillshowthefullpathnameofthedirectory.A
slash/characterisusedasthedelimiterbetweendirectory
levels.Tochangethecurrentdirectory,usetheOpenbutton
andUpbutton(Media01a).
File
Size
Date
Type
SD Card
Theiconindicatesthetypeoffile.
Thisshowsthetypeandvolumelabeloftheinserteddevice.
Fordetailsonhowtheiconscorrespondtothedifferentfile
types,pleaseseethediagramFilesthatcanbeloadedon
page 224.
Volume label:
NoLabel:Mediathathasnovolumelabel
Unformatted:Mediathathasnotbeenformatted
NoMedia:Mediaisnotinsertedinthecardslot.
Thevolumelabeldisplaywilldependontheinsertedmedia
andthepage.
Open
WhenyoupresstheOpenbutton,thedirectorywillopen,
andthecurrentdirectorywillmoveoneleveldownward.
Thiscanbeusedwhenadirectoryhasbeenselectedinthe
directorywindow.
Up
WhenyoupresstheUpbutton,thedirectorywillmoveone
levelupward.
Load
Thiscommandloadsthefileordirectorythatwasselectedin
theDirectoryWindow(Media01c)intotheinternal
memory.
WhenyoupresstheLoadbutton,adialogboxwillappear.
Thespecificcontentsofthedialogboxwilldependonthe
fileyouareloading.ThisisthesamefunctionastheLoad
selectedmenucommand.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeLoadselectedon
page 227.
PCG Preview
Ifyouselectedjustasingleprogram,combination,ordrum
kitfromwithina.PCGfile(i.e.,fromanopenedbank),you
canlistentothesounddirectlyfromthemediawithout
havingtoloadthefile.Ifyouveselectedacombination,the
timbresinthecombinationwillusetheKROMEsinternal
programs.Inthecaseofauserdrumkit,thesound
parametersoftheprogramthatwasselectedbeforeentering
Mediamodewillbeused.
Lock
[Lock, Unlock]
Filesanddirectorieswiththissymbolarelocked,andcannot
beoverwritten,copied,ordeleted.UsetheLock/Unlock
selectedmenucommandtolockorunlockafileordirectory.
Note:Ifthewriteprotectswitchofthemediaitselfis
enabled,theLocksymbolwillbeshownforallfilesand
directories.
File
ThisisthelowlevelDOSfilename.
Size
Thisisthesizeofthefile,inbytes.
Date
Thisisthedateandtimeatwhichthefilewassaved.From
theleft,thisisshownasday,month,year,hoursandmin
utes.
HoweversincetheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcal
endarorclock,youmustuseUtilitymenucommandSet
Date/Timetosetthedateandtimebeforesavingthefile.
0:Hideunknownfilesseep.227
1:Lock/Unlockselectedseep.227
2:Sortseep.227
3:Loadselectedseep.227
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMedia:MenuCommand
onpage 227.
225
Media mode
02: Save
03: Utility
02
Menu
01b
01b
03
Menu
01c
01c
01a
01a
Here,youcansavevariousdatatypesfrominternalmemory
tomedia.
Here,youcanrename,copy,ordeletetheselectedmediaor
file,createanewdirectory,format,andsetthedateand
time.
UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttontomovetothedesired
directory(i.e.,changethecurrentdirectory),andthenselect
thedesiredmenucommand.
WhenyouexecuteaSaveoperation,thedatawillbesaved
inthesamelevelofthehierarchyasthefilesthatare
displayed.
TheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcalendaror
clock,youmustuseUtilitymenucommandSetDate/
Timetosetthedateandtimebeforesavingthefile.
Afterselectingmediaorafile,selectthedesiredmenu
command.
0:Hideunknownfilesseep.227
1:Lock/Unlockselectedseep.227
2:Sortseep.227
3:Renameseep.233
4:Copyseep.233
0:Hideunknownfilesseep.227
5:Deleteseep.234
1:Lock/Unlockselectedseep.227
6:CreateDirectoryseep.234
2:Sortseep.227
7:SetDate/Timeseep.234
3:SaveAll(PCG&SEQ)seep.231
8:Formatseep.234
4:SavePCGseep.232
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMedia:MenuCommand
onpage 227.
5:SaveSEQseep.232
6:SavetoStandardMIDIFileseep.232
7:SaveExclusiveseep.232
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMedia:MenuCommand
onpage 227.
08a
01a
TheMEDIAscreenshowsinformationaboutthemedia.
226
Type
Order
Ascent
Size
Date
Sortinascendingorderofsize
Descent
Sortindescendingorderofsize
Ascent
Sortinascendingorderofdate
Descent
Sortindescendingorderofdate
Load selected
LoadselectedisavailableontheLoadtab.
Thisloadsthefileordirectoryselectedinthedirectory
window(Media01c)intointernalmemory.
1. Inthedirectorywindow(Media01c),selectthefileor
directorythatyouwanttoload.
2. SelectLoadselected.
Adialogboxwillappear.Thedialogboxthatappearswill
dependonthefileyouareloading.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseepage 228.
Specifythevariousitemsasnecessary.
HideunknownfilesisavailableontheLoadtab,Savetab,
andUtilitytab.
Note:Youcanalsoaccessthesamedialogboxbypressing
theLoadbuttoninsteadofLoadselected.
IfyouselectHideunknownfiles,acheckmarkwillappear
attheleftofHideunknownfiles.Inthisstate,undefined
fileswillnotbeshowninthedirectorywindow.However,
thisisvalidonlyifthereareDOSfilesinthecurrent
directory.
Lock/Unlock selected
Lock/UnlockselectedisavailableontheLoadtab,Savetab,
andUtilitytab.
Thislocks/unlocksthefileordirectorythatsselectedinthe
directorywindow(Media01c).Ifyoulockthefileor
directory,thelockicon(Lock)willappear,and
overwriting,copying,ordeletingwillnotbepossible.
1. Inthedirectorywindow(Media01c),selectthefileor
directorythatyouwanttolockorunlock.
2. SelectLock/Unlockselected;theselectedfileordirec
torywillalternatelybelockedorunlocked.
Sort
SortisavailableontheLoadtab,Savetab,andUtilitytab.
Thisfunctionsortsthefilesinthecurrentdirectory.
Thisdialogboxwillappearinthefollowingcases.
Whenloadinga.PCGfilethatwassplitacrosstwoor
morevolumesofmedia,whenthefirstvolumehasbeen
loadedandthesecondmediavolumeisnowrequired.
Whenloadinga.PCGfilesimultaneouslywitha.SNG
file,iftheidenticallynamed.SNGfileisnotfoundinthe
currentdirectoryafterloadingthe.PCGfile.
Ifthisdialogboxappears,takethefollowingaction.
1. Selectthedirectorythatcontainsthefileindicatedby
Whereisa
Ifthespecifiedfileislocatedonanothermediavolume,
exchangemedia.Thenpressthedirectorywindowinthe
displaytomaketheKROMErecognizethemedia,andselect
theappropriatedirectory.
UseTypetoselecthowthefileswillbesorted,anduse
Ordertospecifythedirection.
Type
Noorder
Name
(Directory
First)
Name
2. PresstheSelectbuttontoresumeloading.
Order
Itisnotpossibletoopen.PCG,or.SNGfilesinthe
Whereisadialogbox.TheOpenbuttoncannotbe
usedfor.PCG,or.SNGfiles.
Unsorted
Ascent
Sortinalphabeticalorder,first
directoriesandthenfiles
Descent
Sortinreversealphabeticalorder,first
directoriesandthenfiles
Ascent
Sortalphabetically
Descent
Sortinreversealphabetical
LoadingwillbeabortedifyoupresstheCancelbutton.If
youwanttoaborttheloadingprocess,presstheOKbutton.
IfyoupresstheSkipbutton,theindicatedfilewillbe
skipped,andthenextfilewillbeloaded.
Exceptforspecialsituationssuchaswhenthemedia
containingtheindicatedfilehasbeendamagedorcannotbe
found,youshouldusetheSelectbuttontocontinuethe
loadingprocess.
227
Media mode
1) Load .PCG
Datainthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
Allprogramdataoftheselectedbankwillbeloadedintothe
bankyouspecify.
[Bank A...F]
1. IfaSNGfileofthesamefilenameexistsinthe.PCG,
youcanselecttheLoad********.SNGtoocheckbox.
InTo,selecttheloadingdestinationbank.
Ifthisfiledoesnotexistinthecurrentdirectory,loaditas
describedintheaboveprocedureIfafiletobeloaded
cannotbefoundonpage 227.
4) Load a Program
Datafortheselectedprogramwillbeloadedintothe
programnumberyouspecify.
2. IfLoad********.SNGtooischecked,youcanuse
Select.SNGAllocationtospecifyhowsongdata
withinthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
Append:Themultidatawillbeloadedstartingatthe
numberthatfollowsthelastsongdatainmemory.Thesong
datawithinthe.SNGfilethatisbeingloadedwillbepacked
intotheavailablelocations.(Seediagrambelow)
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoloadsongdatafrom
mediawithouterasingthesongdatathatisalreadyin
memory.Cuelistdatawillnotbeloaded.
Clear:Erasesallcuelistdataandsongdatafrominternal
memory,andloadthecuelistdatatogetherwiththestateof
thesongdataasitwaswhensaved(Seediagrambelow).
Selectthiswhenyouwanttoreproducethesavedstate
immediatelyafterpoweron,etc.
.SNG Allocation
.SNG file to load
SNG000
SNG001
Append
Internal memory of
the M50 before loading
SNG000
SNG000
SNG002
SNG003
SNG004
SNG005
SNG006
SNG007
SNG002
SNG003
SNG000
SNG001
SNG000
SNG001
SNG000
SNG003
SNG003
SNG005
SNG005
SNG003
SNG005
Clear
Internal memory of
the M50 after loading
1. Ifyouwishtoloadaprogramotherthantheone
alreadyselected,usethesourceProgram(upperfield)
toselecttheprogramthatyouwishtoload.
Note:Theselectedprogramcanbeplayedfromthe
keyboardevenbeforeyouloadit.Thisisconvenientwhen
youwanttoauditiontheprogrambeforeloading.Formore
information,pleaseseePCGPreviewonpage 225.
2. InToProgram,(lowerfield)selectthebankandpro
gramintowhichthedatawillbeloaded.Whenyou
pressthepopupbutton,theBank/ProgramSelectwin
dowwillappear.
5) Load Combinations
Allcombinationsinthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
SNG002
SNG003
[Bank A...D]
Allcombinationsintheselectedbankwillbeloadedintothe
bankyouspecify.
2) Load Programs
Allprogramdatafroma.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
InTo,selecttheloadingdestinationbank.
7) Load a Combination
ThisloadstheselectedCombinationintoaspecifiedBank
andnumberininternalmemory.
228
1. Ifyouwishtoloadacombinationotherthantheone
alreadyselected,useCombination(upperfield)to
selectthecombinationthatyouwishtoload.
Note:Theselectedcombinationcanbeplayedfromthe
keyboardevenbeforeyouloadit.Thisisconvenientwhen
youwanttoauditionthecombinationbe
foreloadingit.Formoreinformation,pleaseseePCG
Previewonpage 225.
2. InToCombination(lowerfield),selectthebankand
combinationintowhichthedatawillbeloaded.
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theBank/Combination
Selectwindowwillappear.
InTo,selecttheloadingdestinationuserarpeggiopattern
bank.
IfyouexecutethiscommandwithU09001027(USER)
specifiedastheloadingdestinationfortheselecteduser
arpeggiopatternbank00000899(INT),userarpeggio
patterns00000127willbeloaded.Ifyouselect0000
0899(INT)astheloadingdestinationforU09001027(USER),
thedatawillbeloadedintouserarpeggiopatterns0000
0127.
InTo,selecttheloadingdestinationbank.
Ifyouveselected(USER)astheloaddestinationforthe
selecteddrumkitbank(INT),000015willbeloaded.If
youveselected(INT)astheloaddestinationfor
(USER),thedatawillbeloadedinto000015.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadauserarpeggiopatternotherthan
thecurrentlyselectedone,useArpPattern(upper
field)toreselecttheuserarpeggiopatternthatyou
wishtoload.
Theselecteduserarpeggiopatterncanbeplayedfromthe
keyboardevenbeforeyouloadit.Thisisconvenientwhen
youwanttoauditiontheuserarpeggiopatternyouwishto
load.
2. InToArpPattern(lowerfield)specifytheloading
destinationuserarpeggiopattern.
Thiscommandloadsalldrumtrackuserpatternsfromthe
.PCGfile.
Note:Theselecteddrumkitcanbeplayedfromthe
keyboardevenbeforeyouloadit.Thisisconvenientwhen
youwanttoauditiondrumkitsbeforeloading.Formore
information,pleaseseePCGPreviewonpage 225.
2. InToDrumKit(lowerfield),selecttheloadingdestina
tiondrumkit.
Thiscommandloadstheselectedsingledrumtrackuser
patterndataintothedrumtrackuserpatternlocationthat
youspecifyastheloaddestination.
229
Media mode
1. Ifyouwanttoloadapatternotherthantheselectedpat
tern,usePattern(theupperfield)toreselectthepat
ternthatyouwanttoload.
2. UsetheToPatternfield(thelowerfield)tospecify
theloaddestinationpattern.
InSong,specifytheloadingdestinationsong.
1. UseSelect.SNGAllocationtospecifyhowthesong
datafromthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
Append:Thesongwillbeloadedafterthelastsongdata
thatalreadyexistsininternalmemory.Atthistime,thesong
datainthe.SNGfilebeingloadedwillbepackedforward.
(Seediagramin.SNGAllocationonpage 228)
Selectthiswhenyouwanttoaddsongdatafrommedia
withouterasingthesongdatathatcurrentlyexistsin
internalmemory.Cuelistdatawillnotbeloaded.
Clear:Allcuelistdataandsongdatacurrentlyexistingin
internalmemorywillbeerased,andthecuelistandsong
datawillbeloadedinthestateinwhichitwassaved(See
diagramin.SNGAllocationonpage 228).
Selectthiswhenyouwanttoreproducethesavedstate
immediatelyafterpoweron,etc.
2. Ifa.PCGfileofthesamefilenameexistsinthecurrent
directory,youcanselecttheLoad********.PCGtoo
checkbox.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadauserpatternotherthantheone
alreadyselected,usePattern(upperfield)toreselect
theuserpatternthatyouwishtoload.
2. InToSongandPattern(lowerfield),selectthe
loadingdestinationsonganduserpattern.
Seestep1ofthe1)Load.PCGonpage 228.
1. InSong,selecttheloadingdestinationsong.
2. IfyouturnExclusiveOff(unchecked),anySystem
ExclusivemessagesorUniversalExclusivemessages
includedintheSMFdatawillnotbeloaded.
IfthisisOn(checked),SystemExclusivemessagesand
UniversalExclusivemessagesincludedintheSMFdatawill
beloadedasSystemExclusiveevents.
TheGS/XGsoundmapsandmessagesarenot
supported.Dependingonthecontentofthedata,it
maynotplaybackcorrectly,butthedataitselfwillbe
maintainedifExclusiveischecked.
1. Ifyouwishtoloadasongotherthantheselectedsong,
useSong(upperfield)toreselectthesongtobe
loaded.
2. InToSong(lowerfield),selecttheloadingdestination
song.
230
IfyouselectanundefinedfileandchooseLoad
selected,thefilewillbeassumedtobeaStandardMIDI
File,andtheLoadStandardMIDIFiledialogboxwill
appear.Whenyouexecuteloading,thefilewillbe
loadedintothesongthatwasspecifiedastheloading
destination.Howeverifthefileformatisinappropriate,
theoperationwillbeinvalidandanerrormessagewill
bedisplayed.
Theprogrambankandprogramnumbersloadedinto
thesongwillfollowtheBankMap(Global02a)
setting.IfBankMapisKORG,bankAwillbeselected
forbankselect00.00(MSB.LSB).IfBankMapisGM(2),
bankGwillbeselected.
Ifthe.EXLfilecontainstwoormoreExclusivedataitems,
useTransmitIntervalTimetospecifythetimeintervalthat
willbeinsertedbetweeneachitemofExclusivedata.
IfyouaretransmittingthedatatoanotherKROME,the
requiredtimeintervalwilldependonthetypeofdata.After
transmittingallprogramdata,youmustallowanintervalof
approximately1second.FordetailspleaseseetheGlobal
modesectiononDumpProgramDumpDrumTrack
Pattern(seep.218).ForotherMIDIdevices,pleaseseetheir
ownersmanual.
Eitherdeleteunneededfilestocreatefreespaceonthe
mediabeforesaving,orsavethedatatoothermedia.
1. Usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinputdialog
box,andspecifythefilename.(SeeOGpage 117)
Forexample,ifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecutethesave
command,filesnamedNEWFILE.PCG,andNEWFILE.SNG
willbesavedtothemedia.
2. Selectthebank(s)thatyouwanttosave.
Programs,combinations,drumkits,anduserarpeggio
patternscanbesavedinunitsofbanks.Informationonthe
banktobesavedisdisplayedbeloweachSelectionbutton.
Banksthatarecheckedwillbesaved.
Ifyouwanttomodifytheselections,presstheSelection
buttontoopenthedialogbox,andcheckthecheckboxesfor
thedatayouwanttosave.
231
Media mode
Usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinputdialogbox,
andspecifythefilename.(SeeOGpage 117)
Forexample,ifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecutethesave
command,afilenamedNEWFILE.SNGwillbesavedtothe
media.
SavetoStandardMIDIFileisavailableontheSavetab.
Thiscommandsavestheselectedsongfrominternal
memorytostoragemediaasa.MIDfile(StandardMIDI
File).
Thiscommandisvalidonlywhenthecurrentdirectoryisa
DOSdirectory.
IfNospaceavailableonmediumdialogboxwillappear.
Eitherdeleteunneededfilestocreatefreespaceonthe
mediabeforesaving,orsavethedatatoothermedia.
Whenyousave,fileswillbecreatedinthecurrentdirectory.
Save PCG
SavePCGisavailableontheSavetab.
Thiscommandsavesallprograms,combinations,drumkits,
globalsettings,userarpeggiopattern,anddrumtrackuser
patternsfrominternalmemorytomediaasa.PCGfile.
Thiscommandisvalidonlywhenthecurrentdirectoryisa
DOSdirectory.
1. InSong,choosethesongthatyouwishtosave.
2. IfExclusiveisOn(checked),SystemExclusiveevents
andUniversalExclusiveeventsincludedinthesong
datawillbesavedasExclusivemessages.
IfthisisOff(unchecked),SystemExclusiveeventsand
UniversalExclusiveeventsincludedinthesongdatawill
notbesaved.
3. Usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinputdialog
box,andspecifythefilename.
Bydefault,thefirsteightcharacters(uppercase)ofthesong
namewillbeassignedautomatically.
4. Usetheradiobuttonstospecifytheformat.
Format0willsavesixteenchannelsofMIDIdatatogetherin
asingletrack.
Format1willsaveeachMIDIchanneltoaseparatetrack.
1. Usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinputdialog
box,andspecifythefilename.(SeeOGpage 117)
ForexampleifyouspecifyNEWFILEandexecutethesave
command,filesnamedNEWFILE.PCGandNEWFILE.SNG
willbesavedtothemedia.
2. Selectthebank(s)thatyouwanttosave.
Fortheprocedure,pleasesee02:SaveAllstep3.
Save Exclusive
SaveExclusiveisavailableontheSavetab.
Save SEQ
AccumulatesthereceivedExclusivedataininternal
memory,andthensavesthedatatomediaasan.EXLfile.
SaveSEQisavailableontheSavetab.
Thiscommandisvalidonlywhenthecurrentdirectoryisa
DOSdirectory.
Thiscommandsavesallsongsandcuelistsfrominternal
memoryasa.SNGfile.
Thiscommandisvalidonlywhenthecurrentdirectoryisa
DOSdirectory.
232
Thesongdatayousaveherecanbeplayedbackonadevice
thatsupportsStandardMIDIFiles.Howeverifyouintendto
playbackthedataontheKROME,werecommendthatyou
useSaveSEQtosavethedata,sincethiswillbemore
easilyrecreated.
1. WhenyouselectSaveExclusive,theKROMEwillwait
forExclusivedatatobereceived.Thefollowingdialog
boxwillappear.
1. Selectthefileordirectorywhosenameyouwantto
edit.
2. SelectRenametoopenthedialogbox.
Whenreceptionends,thesizeofthereceiveddataandthe
sizeoftheremainingfreeareawillberewritten.Thedisplay
willchangetoStatus=AWAITINGMIDIDATA,andyou
cancontinuetransmittingExclusivedatatotheKROME.
Duringreception,theCancelbuttonandtheOKbutton
cannotbepressed.
3. Usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinputdialog
box,andspecifythefilename.(SeeOGpage 117)
3. Pressthetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinputdialog
box,andmodifythename(SeeOGpage 117).
Copy
CopyisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thiscommandcopiestheselectedfileordirectory.
ThiscommandisvalidonlywhenaDOSfileoraDOS
directoryisselected.
1. Selectthefileordirectorythatyouwanttocopy.
2. SelectCopytoopenthedialogbox.
3. Copywillshowthenameoftheselectedfileordirec
tory.
Ifyouwishtochangethefileordirectorythatwillbe
copied,usethetexteditbuttontomovetothetextinput
dialogbox,andspecifythefilenamethatyouwishtocopy.
(SeeOGpage 117)
Using[*/?]asaWildcard:Whenyouusethetexteditbutton
toaccessthetextinputdialogboxandspecifythenameof
thefileordirectorytobecopied,youcanuse*and?
charactersaswildcards.Forexample,ifintheabove
exampleyouspecifyPRELOAD1.*(insteadof
PRELOAD1.PCG),allfilenamesofPRELOAD1.withany
filenameextensionwillbecopiedatthesametime:i.e.,
PRELOAD1.PCG,PRELOAD1.SNG,...
Example)
PRELOAD1.*:PRELOAD1.PCG,PRELOAD1.SNG,...
PRELOAD?.PCG:PRELOAD1.PCG,PRELOAD2.PCG,
PRELOAD3.PCG,...
Whenwildcardsareused,onlyfileswillbesubjectto
copying.Directorieswillnotbecopied.
4. UsetheOpenbuttonandUpbuttontoselectthecopy
destinationdirectory.
233
Media mode
5. Ifyouwishtocopythefileordirectorywithadifferent
name,usethetexteditbutton(inthelowerfield)to
accessthetextinputdialogbox,andspecifythenew
nameforthefileordirectorytobecopied.
Ifyoureusingwildcardstocopymultiplefiles
simultaneously,youwontbeabletochangefilenames.
Note:Ifyoudecidenottocopy,presstheAbortbutton.
Delete
DeleteisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thiscommanddeletestheselectedfileordirectory.
ThiscommandisvalidonlyifaDOSfileordirectoryis
selected.
1. Selectthefileordirectorythatyouwanttodelete.
2. SelectDeletetoopenthedialogbox.
Year
19802079
Month
112
Day
131
Hour
023
Minute
059
Second
059
Format
FormatisavailableontheUtilitytab.
3. Deletewillindicatethenameoftheselectedfileor
directory.
Ifyouwishtochangethefileordirectorythatistobe
deleted,usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinput
dialogbox,andspecifythenameofthefileordirectorythat
youwishtodelete.(SeeOGpage 117)
Using[*/?]asaWildcard:Whenyouusethetexteditbutton
toaccessthetextinputdialogboxandspecifythenameof
thefiletobedeleted,youcanusethe*or?charactersas
wildcards.Thisallowsyoutosimultaneouslydelete
multiplefileswithidenticalfilenamesanddifferent
extensions,orfileswhosenamesarepartiallyidentical(see
Copyonpage 233).
Thiscommandformatsthemediathatsinsertedinthe
KROME.Thevolumelabel(anamefortheentiremedia)
youspecifywillbeassignedtothemedia.Thevolumelabel
youassignherewillbedisplayedintheSDCard(Media0
1a).Thevolumelabelcanbeamaximumofeleven
characters.
Afterformatting,itisnotpossibletopressthe
COMPAREbuttontoundoformatting.
1. Makesurethatthemediayouwanttoformatis
inserted.
2. SelectFormattoopenthedialogbox.
Whenwildcardsareused,onlyfileswillbesubjectto
deletion.Directorieswillnotbedeleted.
Create Directory
CreateDirectoryisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thiscommandcreatesanewdirectorywithinthecurrent
directory.
3. InVolumeLabel,usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthe
textinputdialogbox,andspecifythevolumelabel(See
OGpage 117).
Thepreviouslyspecifiedvolumelabelwillbedisplayed.If
novolumelabelhadbeenspecifiedforthemedia,orifa
nonDOSmediawasinserted,thiswillindicateNEW
VOLUME.
4. Specifytheinitializationformat.
Usethetexteditbuttontoaccessthetextinputdialogbox,
andspecifythenameofthenewdirectory(SeeOG
page 117).
Set Date/Time
SetDate/TimeisavailableontheUtilitytab.
Thisisthedateandtimeatwhichthefilewassaved.
TheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcalendaror
clock,youmustuseUtilitymenucommandSetDate/
Timetosetthedateandtimebeforesavingthefile.
234
QuickFormat:NormallyyoushoulduseQuickFormatto
initializethemedia.
FullFormat:Allblocksinthemediawillbeerased.
NormallythereisnoneedforyoutoexecuteFullFormat.
YoushouldexecuteQuickFormatinstead.
Effect Guide
Overview
TheKROMEprovidesfiveinserteffects,twomastereffects,
andatotaleffect,togetherwithamixersectionthatcontrols
theroutingoftheseeffects.
P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheInsertFXSetup
page.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
Foreachoftheseeffectprocessors,youcanchoosefrom193
differenttypesofeffects,groupedintothefollowing
categories:
P01P15:Presetdataissavedinthisarea.
WerecommendthatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15.
U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyourown
settings.
:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffect,
writtenaProgram,orselectedanewProgram.Selectingthis
settingfromthemenuwillnothaveanyeffect.
Contents
Dynamics:
000...006
Effectswhichcontrolvolume,suchas
compressors,limiter,andgates
EQ/Filter:
007...019
Effectswhichcontrolfrequencycontent,suchas
EQ,multimodefilter,exciter,andwah
Overdrive/
Amp/Mic:
020...028
Overdriveandampmodelingeffectssuchas
guitar/bassampsandmics
Chorus/
Flanger/
Phaser:
029...048
Pitchandphasemodulationeffectssuchas
chorusandflanger
Modulation/
PitchShift:
049...067
Othermodulationeffectssuchastremoloand
rotaryspeaker,andpitchshifters
Delay:
038...083
Delays
Reverb/ER:
084...094
Reverbandearlyreflections
MonoMono
Serial:
095...126
Mono&Monochaineffectsthatinternally
connecttwomonoeffectsinseries
Mono//Mono
Parallel:
127...171
Mono&Monoparalleleffectsthatallowtwo
monoeffectstobeappliedtoLandR
independently
DoubleSize:
172...193
Doublesizeeffects
Note:Programssavetheeffectsparametersettings,butthey
dontsavethenumberoftheselectedEffectPreset.Ifyou
selectanEffectPreset,andthensavetheProgram,theEffect
Presetsettingwillrevertto.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUsingEffectPresetson
page 60.
Effect Preset
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthesettings
foranindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16userpresets
foreacheffecttype,inadditionto15rewritablefactory
presets.
InCombinationmodeyoucanmakethesesettingsforeach
combination,andinSequencermodeyoucanmakethemfor
eachsong.
Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program,
Combination,andSequencer).
InSequencermode,youcanswitchbetweeneffectsor
modifytheeffectparametersandrecordthesechanges,so
thateffectswillswitchautomaticallyoreffectparameters
willbemodifiedautomaticallyasthesongplaysback.
Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
storedwiththeProgramyoudontneedtostorethemasan
EffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuseyour
favoritesettings.
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhileworkingon
aparticularProgram,andthenlaterusethesameEffect
PresetinadifferentProgram,Combination,orSong.
Program mode
Oscillator1
Filter1
Driver1
Amplifier1
Oscillator2
Filter2
Driver2
Amplifier2
Send
EQ
Master Effect 1, 2
Return
Insert Effect 15
Total Effect
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Total Effect
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
EQ
Drum Track
Send
EQ
EQ
Insert Effect 15
Master Effect 1, 2
Return
235
Effect Guide
3. SettheBPMasdesired.
Tosynchronizetothesystemclock,setBPMtoMIDI.
Tosetthedelaystoaspecifictempo,separatefromthe
systemclock,setBPMtothedesiredtempo(between40.00
and300.00BPM).
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDynamicModulation
Sources(Dmod)onpage 346.
Ifthecombinationofthetempo,BaseNote,andTimes(x)
settingsinconjunctionwouldexceedthemaximumdelay
time,awarningsuchasTimeOver?>OVER!willappear
inthedisplay.Ifthishappens,justreducethedelaytime.
Notethatthemaximumdelaytimedependsonwhichdelay
effectyoureusing.Forinstance,themaximumdelaytime
for079:StereoBPMDelayis2,730msec,whilethemaximum
delaytimefor192:St.BPMLongDlyis5,460msec.
Tempo Synchronization
Youcansynchronizesomeeffectsparameters,suchasLFO
speedsanddelaytimes,tothesystemtempo.Thisletsyou
synctheeffectstoProgramLFOs,DrumTrack,Arpeggiator,
theinternalsequencer,oranexternalMIDIclock.
Theseeffectsparametersaremarkedwiththelogo
Asanexample,letssetupdynamicmodulationtocontrol
aneffectparameterinrealtime.
1. AsdescribedintheprocedureforProgramEffectsset
tingsonpage 79oftheOperatinguide,setIFX1to078:
L/C/RBPMDelay.Verifythatyourehearingadelay
effect.
Synchronizing LFOs
2. AccesstheProgP8:Routing/IFXIFX1page.
MosteffectswithLFOs,suchas011:StereoWah/AutoWah,
canbesynchronizedtotempo.Thisappliestotheindividual
effectsLFOs,andalsotheCommonFXLFO.
Now, we can set the Dmod to change the delay level via the
Joystick
3. SetInputLevelDmodto+100.
TosetupLFOstosynchronizetotempo:
4. SetSourcetoJS+Y:#01.
1. SetMIDISynctoOn.
Thedelaysoundwilldisappear.
2. SettheBPMasdesired.
Theinputleveltotheeffectcanbecontrolledbythejoystick.
Asyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourself,thedelay
soundwillgraduallyincrease.
Tosynchronizetothesystemclock,setBPMtoMIDI.
TosettheLFOtoaspecifictempo,separatefromthesystem
clock,setBPMtothedesiredtempo(between40.00and
300.00BPM).
3. UsetheBaseNoteandTimes(x)parameterstosetthe
rhythmicvalueoftheLFO.
Forinstance,ifyousetBaseNoteto1/8andTimes(x)to2,
eachcycleoftheLFOwilllastforaquarternote(twoeighth
notes).
BPM/MIDI Sync: LFO
LFO
2. SetRDelayBaseNoteto1/16,andTimes(x)to3
Thismeansthattheleftchannelwillbedelayedbyan
eighthnote,andtherightchannelwillbedelayedbya
dottedeighthnote(threesixteenthnotes).
BPM/MIDI Sync: Delay Time
Dry
Wet
Lch
Dry
Wet
Rch
Whenyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourselfandpress
theSW1switch,thefeedbacklevelwillincrease,andthe
236
delaysoundwillcontinueforalongertime.TheAmtsetting
specifiesthefeedbacklevelthatwillbeineffectwhenthe
SW1switchispressed.IfAmtissetto10,pressingtheSW1
switchwillreducethefeedbacklevelto0.
Common FX LFOs
Normally,LFObasedeffectssuchaschoruses,flangers,
phasers,filters,andautopaneachhavetheirown
independentLFO.TheKROMEeffectssupportthis
standardmechanism,butaddanewone:CommonFX
LFOs.
ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronize
multipleLFObasedeffectstogether.Theyreavailablein
mostLFObasedeffects,inadditiontotheindividualLFOs,
providing:
MastersourcesoffrequencyandphaseforallLFObased
effects
LFOspeedsetbyeitherfrequencyortempo
ResetfromDmodsources,foreitherrealtimeperformance
orsynchronizingtoadownbeatinasequence
WhenusingtheCommonFXLFOs,youcanstillcontrolthe
LFOphaseindividuallyforeacheffect,andoftenchangethe
waveformindividuallyaswell.
YoucanedittheCommonFXLFOparametersontheP8
CommonFXLFOpagesofProgram,Combination,
Sequencermodes.
Common FX LFO
LFO Type = Common1
Common FX LFO1
8. RotatetheTEMPOknob,andthedelaytimewill
change.
Frequency[Hz]
Reset
Stereo Flanger
Waveforem = Triangle
Phase Offset = 0 [deg]
Stereo Phaser
Whenyou(pushthejoystickawayfromyourselfand)press
theSW1switch,thefeedbacklevelwillrise,andthedelays
willbecomelonger.
9. WhenyouturnontheARPbutton,arpeggiatorwill
beginplaying.
Waveforem = Sine
Phase Offset = 0 [deg]
Selectanydesiredarpeggiator.WhenyourotatetheTEMPO
knob,thedelaytimewillchangeinsynchronizationwiththe
changingtempoofthearpeggiator.
Dependingonthespecificdelayeffect,youmayhear
someunexpectednoiseifyouchangethetempowhile
thedelayissounding.Thisisbecausethedelaysound
becomesdiscontinuous,andisnotamalfunction.
Forsomeeffects,youcansynchronizetheLFO
frequencytothetempo.SettheeffectparametersMIDI
SynctoOn,andBPMtoMIDI.Fordetails,pleasesee
TempoSynchronizationonpage 236.
237
Effect Guide
FX Control Buses
TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreateeffectssidechains.
Sidechainsletyoucontrolaneffectwithoneaudiosignal
(thesidechain),whiletheeffectprocessesacompletely
differentaudiosignal.
Thisisconvenientforusewithvocodersandlimiters,gates,
etc.Youcanuseavoicetypetimbretomodulateasynth
typeinput,oruseadrumtracketc.tocreaterhythmic
vocodereffects.Limiterorgatetypeeffectsareoftenusedto
controlaninputusingadifferentsound.
Vocodereffectsproducetheirdistinctivesoundbyusingan
audiosignal(themodulator)tomodulateadifferentaudio
signal(thecarrier).
Asshownintheillustration,usingtheoutputoftimbre1as
thecarrierandthevoicetypeoutputoftimbre2asthe
modulatorallowsyoutocreatedistinctivetalkingeffects.
Vocoder (Combination)
Timbre1
: Pad
KROMEincludestwotruestereoFXControlBuses,which
canbeusedwiththefollowingeffects:
Bus Select
: IFX1
(Carrier)
IFX1
174: Vocoder
Bus Select
: L/R
Modulator Source
: FX Control1
(Modulator)
Timbre2
: Voice
FX Control Bus
:1
Vocoder
174:Vocoder
Vocodereffectsproducetheirdistinctivesoundbyusingone
audiosignal(themodulator)tomodulateadifferentaudio
signal(thecarrier).
OSC1&2
Bus Select
: IFX1
IFX1
084: Reverb Hall
Chain to
: IFX2
IFX2
006: Stereo Gate
Bus Select
: L/R
Envelope Source
: FX Control1
FX Control Bus
: FX Ctrl1
Youcanalsouseadrumpatternorsimilarsignalasthe
modulator,producingarhythmvocodereffect.
Intheexampleshowninthediagram,adrumpattern
generatedbyArpeggiatorandDrumTrackfunctionissent
totheFXControlbusandusedasthemodulatorforthe
vocoder.
Foroscillator1(thecarrier),setBus(IFX/Output)Selectto
IFX1,sendingthesignaltoIFX1:Vocoder.Fordrumtrack
wereusingasthemodulator),setFXControlBusto1,
sendingthesignaltoFXCtrl1bus.ForIFX1:Vocoder,set
ModulatorSourcetoFXControl1sothatthedrumtrack
signalwillbethemodulatorforthevocoder.
Rhythmic Vocoder (Program)
Bus Select
OSC1
: IFX1
: Synth/
Single wave
(Carrier)
IFX1
174: Vocoder
Modulator Source
: FX Control1
(Modulator)
Compressortypeeffectsusetheleveloftheaudioinputto
controlthelevelgainoftheaudiooutput.
Fortheseeffects,theenvelopedetectionsourcecanbeeither
theaudioinputitself(theusualmethod)orFXControlBus1
or2.
Theexampleshowninthediagramisofasplitcombination
inwhichtheleveloftimbre1(Pad,playedfromthelowkey
range)isbeingcontrolledbytimbre2(Guitar,withIFX2
OD/HiGainWahinserted,playedfromthehighkeyrange).
Youcanmakesettingssothatwhenyouplaytheguitar
sound,thevolumeofthepadwilldecreaseautomatically.
SendthepostIFX2signalviaFXControlBustoFXCtrl1,
andsettheIFX1:StereoLimiterEnvelopeSourceparameter
toFXControl1.
Limiter (Combination)
IFX1
003: Stereo Limiter
Bus Select
Timbre1 : IFX1
: Pad
Program
A
Program
B
Bus Select
split
Timbre2 : IFX2
: Guitar
IFX2
020: OD/
Hi.Gain Wah
Ctrl Bus
(FX Control Bus)
:1
Bus Select
: L/R
238
Bus Select
: L/R
Envelope Source
: FX Control 1
Drum pattern/
Drum Track
Drum
Track
FX Control Bus
:1
Bus Select
: L/R
Effect I/O
Toachievethebesttonalquality,signalssenttotheeffects
shouldbeatthemaximumlevelbelowclipping.Also,use
theWet/DryparameterfortheInsertEffects,TotalEffectand
theWet/DryorReturn1,2parameterfortheMasterEffects
toadjusttheeffectoutputlevel.
Iftheinputlevelistoolow,theSNratiomaydecrease.
Ontheotherhand,iftheinputlevelistoohigh,
clippingmayoccur.
Thefollowingtableshowstheparametersrelatedtothe
levelsettings:
Program mode
OSC1/2Volume,DrumTrackVolume(P0)
OSC1/2MS1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8Level(P2)
Filter1/2Trim(P3)
Filter1/2Output(P3)
Input
Driver1/2Drive(P4)
Amp1/2AmpLevel(P4)
EQInputTrim(P4)
Send1/2(P8)
EffectTrimparameter*1(P8,P9)
EffectWet/Dryparameter(P8,P9)
Output
Return1,2(P9)
MasterVolume(P9)
Timbre/TrackEQInputTrim(P2)
Send1/2(P8)
EffectTrimparameter*1(P8,P9)
EffectWet/Dryparameter(P8,P9)
Output
Return1,2(P9)
MasterVolume(P9)
*1
Someeffectsmaynothavetheseparameters.
239
Effect Guide
In/Out
InsertEffects(IFX15)haveastereoinputandastereo
output.IfyousettheWet/DryparametertoDry(noeffect),
theinputsignalwillbepassedthrough,instereo,without
beingprocessedbytheeffect.IfyouselectWet(effect
applied),theprocessedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthe
followingways:
Wet
TheKROMEcanalsoturnIFX1IFX5offseparately
fromthesettingoftheOn/OffbuttonbyreceivingMIDI
controlchangemessageCC#92.Value0willturnthem
off,andvalue1127willturnthemon.
YoucanalsouseEffectGlobalSW(Global01b)to
turnIFX15onandoff.ThisMIDIcontrolisperformed
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
Effect
Double-size effects
Effect
Doublesizeeffects(172:St.MltbandLimiter193:Early
Reflections)usetwiceasmuchspaceasothereffects.
Effect
Effect
YoucanusedoublesizeeffectsforinserteffectsIFX1IFX4
andmastereffectMFX1.However,theeffectofthenumber
thatfollowsitwillbeunavailable.Forexampleifyouve
selectedadoublesizeeffectforIFX1,youwontbeableto
useIFX2.IfyouveselectedadoublesizeeffectforMFX1,
youwontbeabletouseMFX2.
An example of when a double-size effect is selected for IFX1 and
IFX4
Pan
Pan
Theseeffectsaretypicallystereoin/stereoout,buttheyhave
aspecialstructure.TheLchannelandRchannelofthe
stereoinputeachhavetheirownindependentmonoeffect.
Eachmonooutputcanthenbepannedtothedesired
positioninthestereofield.
Track1:Piano,Pan=L001,Bus(IFX/Output)Select=IFX1
Track2:E.Piano,Pan=R127,Bus(IFX/Output)Select=IFX1
Sothatyoudontmixthesoundofthetwotracksthatare
beinginput,settheP0:Play/RECPanparametertoL001and
R127respectively.
Routing
Youcanuseuptofivechannels(IFX15)fortheInsert
Effectsinanymode.
Program mode
UseBus(IFX/Output)Select(Prog81b)tosetthe
destinationbusoftheoscillatoroutput.
L/R:SendtheoutputtotheL/Rbus.Instead,itissentto
AUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandRaftertheTFX.
IFX15:ThesignalissenttoInsertEffectsIFX15.
Off:TheoutputwillnotbesenttotheL/Rbus,orIFX15
buses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwanttoconnectthe
oscillatoroutputtoamastereffectinseries.UseSend1(to
MFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)toadjustthesendlevel.
UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)(Prog81d)to
specifythesendlevelfortheMasterEffects.Thissettingis
effectiveifBus(IFX/Output)Select(Prog81b)issettoL/R
orOff.
Input/outputvariationsforeacheffectareshowninupper
leftoftheblockdiagramsstartingonpage 320.
Ifyouselect000:NoEffect,stereoinputsignalsareoutput
instereowithoutbeingprocessed.
PressingtheOn/OffbuttonofIFX1IFX5intheP8:Routing/
IFXInsertFXSetuppagesineachmodewilltoggle
betweenOnandOff.WhenOffisselected,theeffectwillbe
240
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,useSend1and
Send2(Prog82a)tospecifythesendlevelofthepostIFX
signal.
Send1respondstoCC#93,andSend2respondsto
CC#91.Atthistime,theactualsendlevelusesthevalue
oftheSend1and2settingsforOscillators1and2,
multipliedbytheSend1and2valuesreceivedvia
MIDI.
Intheexampleshowninthenextdiagram,Oscillators1and
2outputsbeingsenttoIFX1.
soundtoIFX2toapplyEQ,andothersoundstoAUDIO
OUTPUTL/MONOandRwithoutapplyinganyInsert
Effects.
Tip:Inmostofthepreloadeddrumkits,thefollowingtypes
ofdruminstrumenthavethesameBus(IFX/Output)Select
settings.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Ifyoudeselectthebox,alldruminstrumentoutputsare
senttothebusspecifiedbyBus(IFX/Output)Select(Prog
81b).YoumayapplyanyInsertEffectstoalldrum
instruments,regardlessoftheDrumkitsettings.
UseBus(IFX/Output)Select(Combi/Seq81(2)d)for
timbres(Combination)andtracks(Sequencer)toselectan
InsertEffecttoapplytothecorrespondingtimbresand
tracks.Youcanroutemultipletimbresandtrackstoasingle
InsertEffect.
Tip:Youcanuseeachtimbre/tracksBus(IFX/Output)
Select,postIFXChaintoandChainparameters(Combi/
Seq83b)tocreateavarietyofroutings.
Example: Inserting one IFX into two or more timbres
AswithProgrammode,selectL/R,IFX15,orOffforeach
timbreandtrack.
Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)becomeavailableif
Bus(IFX/Output)SelecthasbeensettoL/RorOff.Ifyouve
setBus(IFX/Output)SelecttoIFX15,useSend1and
Send2(Combi/Seq83b)followingtheinserteffecttoadjust
thesendlevels.
Send1respondstoCC#93,andSend2respondsto
CC#91.Atthistime,theactualsendlevelusesthevalue
oftheSend1and2settingsforOscillators1and2ofthe
Programs(selectedforthetimbresandtracks),
multipliedbytheSend1and2valuesreceivedvia
MIDI.
ThefollowingdiagramshowsanexampleofCombination
mode.TheTimbre1outputissenttoIFX1andtheTimbre2
outputissenttoIFX2accordingtotheBus(IFX/Output)
Selectsetting.OthertimbresaresenttoL/R.Theoutput
signalpassesthroughtheTFX,thengoestoAUDIO
OUTPUTL/MONOandR.
Ifyoucheckthisbox,Bus(IFX/Output)Select,FXControl
Bus,Send1,andSend2(Global55b)foreachkeyofthe
selectedDrumkitbecomeseffective.Forexample,youcan
sendasnaresoundtoIFX1toapplytheGateeffect,akick
241
Effect Guide
Ifyouwanttoreverttotheoriginalsettingsofthedrumkit,
executeDrumKitIFXPatchwiththesettingsIFX1IFX1,
IFX2IFX2,IFX3IFX3,IFX4IFX4,andIFX5IFX5.
Inthefollowingdiagram,DrumProgramisassignedto
Timbre1,andnormalProgramsareassignedtoTimbres2
and3.Bus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoDKitforTimbre1,
IFX1forTimbre2,andIFX2forTimbre3.WithTimbre1,the
Bus(IFX/Output)Select(Global55b)forDrumkitsetting
becomeseffective.
Inthenextdiagram,IFX1sChaincheckboxischeckedand
ChaintosettoIFX2,sendingtheoutputofIFX1toIFX2.
Timbre1isbeingprocessedbyIFX1:StereoCompressorand
IFX2:038:StereoFlangereffects.Timbre2isbeingprocessed
bytheIFX2:038:StereoFlangereffect.TheRoutingMap
areaofthenextdiagramshowsthesesettings.(Withthese
settings,IFX35arenotbeingused.)
242
UsetheDrumKitIFXPatchmenucommandifyouwantthe
drumprogramtouseeffectsotherthantimbres2and3.
ChooseDrumKitIFXPatchfromthepagemenu,and
temporarilysendthedrumkitIFX1toIFX3,IFX2toIFX4,
andIFX3toIFX5.Executingwiththesesettingswill
temporarilychangetheeffectstowhichthedrumkitis
beingsent(seethefollowingdiagram).
Mixer
ThisspecifiestheFXControlbusthatfollowstheinsert
effect.TheFXControlbuses(FXControl1,2)aremonotwo
channelbuses.
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,theP8
InsertFXSetuppageletsyousetthePan:CC#8(postIFX
panning),BusSel.(BusSelect),CtrlBus(FXcontrolbus),
andtheSend1andSend2levelstothemastereffects.
TheKROMEprovidestwo(monotwochannel)effect
controlbuses,givingyouawiderangeofwaystocontrol
effects.
IfyouhavecheckedtheChaintoconnecttheInsertEffects
inseries,theseparametersPan:CC#8Send2forthepost
IFX(lastInsertEffectinthechain)signalbecomeeffective.
FXControlbusescanbeusedwithvocoder,limiter,and
gatetypeeffects.
FordetailsontheeffectsthatbeusedwithFXControlbuses,
seeFXControlBusesonpage 238.
Asanexample,hereshowyoucanusetheFXControlbus
followinganinserteffect.
Pan: CC#8
ThisparameterenablesyoutosetthepanofthepostIFX
signal.
Ifyouareusingthestereoin/stereooutInsertEffects,set
thisparametertoC064toenablethePansettingsforthe
oscillators(Prog41c,45),timbres(Combi03(4)b),tracks
(Seq03(4)b).
OSC1&2
Timbre/Track
Chain to
: IFX2
FX Control Bus
:1
Ifyouareusingmonoin/stereooutormonoin/monoout
InsertEffects,thePansettingsfortheoscillators,timbres,
andtracksareignored,andtheyaresettoCenter.Usethe
Pan:CC#8parameter(Prog82a,Combi/Seq83b)tosetthe
pan.L000ishardleft,andR127ishardright.
IFX2
084: Reverb Hall
Chain to
: IFX3
IFX3
006: Stereo Gate
Envelope Source
: FX Ctrl1
Bus Select
: L/R
Send1, Send2
Theseparametersenableyoutosetthesendlevelofthe
signalsroutedtoMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2.Thesignal
issentinstereotomastereffectsMFX1andMFX2.Thisis
validwhenBus(BusSelect)isL/RorOff.
Formoreabouteffecttypessuchasstereoin/stereoout,
seeIn/Outonpage 240.
YoucancontroltheseparametersviaCC#8.
IfyouarenotusinganyInsertEffects,useSend1andSend2
oftheP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpageinProgram,
Combination,Sequencer,andSongplaymodestosetthe
MasterEffectsendlevel.
Send1respondstoCC#93andSend2respondsto
CC#91.
L/RisacommonsettingtosendsignalstotheTotalEffect
(TFX)beforetheyareroutedtotheAUDIOOUTPUTL/
MONOandRoutputs.
IfsettoOff,thesignalwillnotbesenttotheL/Rbus.
ChoosethissettingifyouwanttousetheSend1orSend2
levelstoroutethesignalthroughamastereffectinseries
(i.e.,notasasendeffect).
OSC1
OSC1
OSC2
OSC1: Amp1 Pan = L001
Left
Left
Center
Center
Right
Right
OSC2
OSC1: Amp1 Pan = L001
Center
Right
Left
Center
Right
C064
C064
C064
L032
L032
L032
L001
L001
L001
R096
R096
R096
R127
R127
R127
Left
Center
Right
Left
Center
Right
243
Effect Guide
Program mode
YoucancontroltheparametersontheglobalMIDIchannel
(Global11a).
Combination mode
TheP8:Routing/IFXIFX15pageletsyouspecifythe
controlchannelCh(ControlChannel)forIFX15.Youcan
choosefromCH0116,Gch,orAllR(AllRouted).
Ch0116:Selectthiswhenyouwanttocontroleachinsert
effectfromadifferentchannel.An*symbolwillbe
displayedattherightoftheMIDIchannelCh0116ofthe
timbrethatisroutedtoeachinserteffect.Iftherouted
timbreshavedifferentMIDIchannelsettings,thisparameter
isusedtospecifythechannelthatwillcontroltheinsert
effect.
Gch:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontroltheparameters
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).Thisisacommon
setting.
AllR:Selectthisoptiontocontroltheparametersonallthe
channels(channels116thathavea*mark)thatare
routedtothecorrespondingInsertEffects.
IfyouveselectedadrumprogramforaCombination
modetimbreoraSequencermodetrack,andsetitsBus
(IFX/Output)SelecttoDKit(81(2)d),theMIDI
channelofthattimbre/trackwillbevalidifanyoneof
IFX15issettoAllR,regardlessofthedrumkitsBus
(IFX/Output)Select(Global55b)settingorthemenu
commandDrumKitIFXPatchsetting.
Sequencer mode
UseChparametersoftheP8:Routing/IFXIFX1IFX5
pagestosetupthecontrolchannelsforIFX15.Selectan
appropriateoptionfromCh0116andAllRouted.
Ch0116:Selectthiswhenyouwanttocontroleachinsert
effectfromadifferentchannel.An*symbolwillbe
displayedattherightoftheMIDIchannelCh0116ofthe
trackthatisroutedtoeachinserteffect.Iftwoormoretracks
withdifferingMIDIchannelsCh0116arebeingsenttoa
singleinserteffect,thisparameterisusedtospecifytheone
trackthatwillcontroltheinserteffect.
AllR:Selectthisoptiontocontroltheparametersonallthe
channels(channels116thathavea*mark)thatare
routedtothecorrespondingInsertEffects.AllRisatypical
option.Ifyouwishtocontroltheparametersonasingle
channel,youmayselectitfromCh0116.
Note:SinceSequencermodeletsyourecordandplay
exclusivemessagesandedittracksthatincludeSystem
Exclusiveevents,youcanusethemtoswitcheffectsor
modifyeffectparametervaluesduringsongplayback.
244
In/Out
Double-size effects
Doublesizeeffects(172:St.MltbandLimiter193:Early
Reflections)usetwiceasmuchspaceasothereffects.
YoucanuseadoublesizeeffectformastereffectMFX1.If
youveselectedadoublesizeeffect,MFX2wontbe
availableforuse.
TheI/OsofMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2arestereoin/
stereoout.Send1andSend2determinethesendleveltothe
MasterEffects.(ForSend1and2,seeRoutingand
Mixer.)
MastereffectswillnotoutputtheDry(unprocessed)signal
specifiedinWet/Dry(P9:MFX/TFX/LFOMFX1,2page).
OnlytheWet(processed)signalwillbeoutput.Theoutput
signalsfromtheMasterEffectsareroutedtotheL/Rbus
withtheoutputlevelspecifiedbyReturn1andReturn2.
Theseoutputsignalsaremixedwiththeoutputsignalsfrom
thebusspecifiedbyBus(P8:Routing/IFXRoutingpagein
eachmode)L/R,orwiththeoutputsignalsfromthebus
specifiedbyBus(IFX/Output)Select(InsertFXSetup
pageineachmode)L/R,thenroutedtotheMasterEQ.
Selecting000:NoEffectwillmutetheoutput.The
processedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthefollowingways,
accordingtothetypeofeffects001193.
Wet
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Routing
IfyouarenotusinganyInsertEffectsinanymode,the
MasterEffectssendlevelsaredeterminedbytheSend1(to
MFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)parametersspecified
independentlyfortheoscillators(Programmode),timbres
(Combinationmode),tracks(Sequencermode).
Forexample,sinceyoucanadjustthemastereffectsend
levelsforeachtimbre/track,youcanmakesettingssothat
reverbisapplieddeeplytothepiano,lightlytothestrings,
andnotatalltothebass.
Ifyoureusinginserteffects,usethepostIFXSend1and
Send2toadjustthesendamounts.
Program mode
UsetheSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)parameters
oftheP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpage,ortheSend1and
Send2parametersoftheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetup
pageforthepostIFX15signals,tosettheMasterEffect
sendlevel.
IfyouhavesetBus(IFX/Output)SelecttoL/RorOff,Send1
(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)oftheRoutingpageare
effective.Theseparameterscanbesetforoscillators1and2
individually.
MonoMono Parallel
127: P4EQ//P4EQ171: BPM Dl//BPM Dl
Pan
Pan
Theseeffectsaretypicallystereoin/stereoout,buttheyhave
aspecialstructure.TheLchannelandRchannelofthe
stereoinputeachhavetheirownindependentmonoeffect.
Eachmonooutputcanthenbepannedtothedesired
positioninthestereofield.Normally,youwillusetheseas
inserteffects,butyoucanalsousethemasmastereffects.
Fordetails,seeMonoMonoParallelEffectsonpage 240.
Input/outputvariationsforeacheffectareshowninupper
leftoftheblockdiagramsstartingonpage 320.
PressingtheOn/OffbuttonforMFX1and2oftheP9:MFX/
TFX/LFORoutingpageineachmodewilltogglebetween
OnandOff.WhenOffisselected,theoutputsignalswillbe
muted.
IfyouhavesetBus(IFX/Output)SelecttoIFX15,Send1
andSend2oftheInsertFXpageforthepostP8:Routing/
IFXIFX15signalsareeffective.IfyouareusingtheInsert
Effectsinchain(series),theSend1andSend2parameters
forthepostIFX(lastIFX)areeffective.
Send1respondstoCC#93andSend2respondstoCC#91
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).Atthistime,
theactualsendlevelusesthevalueoftheSend1and2
settingsforOscillators1and2,multipliedbytheSend1
and2valuesreceivedviaMIDI.
IfyouhaveselectedDrumsforOscillatorMode(Prog1
1a)ofaProgram,theUseDKitSettingbox(Prog81b)
245
Effect Guide
becomesavailable.Ifyoucheckthisbox,Send1andSend2
levelsforeachkeyoftheselectedDrumkitbecomeeffective.
IfBus(IFX/Output)Select(Global55b)issettoL/RorOff
foradruminstrumentkey,Send1(toMFX1)and
Send2(toMFX2)(Global55b)becomeeffective.
(Atthistime,theactualsendlevelsusetheseSend1and2
valuesmultipliedbytheSend1and2settingsforProgram
oscillators1and2.)
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,thepostIFX15
Send1andSend2(Prog85a)becomeeffective.
Ifthisisunchecked,Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)
(Prog81d),andthepostIFX15Send1andSend2(Prog8
2a)willbevalidforalldruminstruments,inthesameway
aswhenOscillatorModeisSingleorDouble.
Send level
ForexampleifyousettheprogramsOSC1Send1(toMFX1)
to127,Send2(toMFX2)to064,OSC2Send1(toMFX1)to
064,Send2(toMFX2)to127,andthecombinationsSend1
(toMFX1)to064andSend2(toMFX2)to127,theactual
sendlevelsofthecombinationwillbeasfollows.
OSC1Send1=127(100%)*064(50%)=064(50%)
OSC1Send2=064(50%)*127(100%)=064(50%)
OSC2Send1=064(50%)*064(50%)=032(25%)
OSC2Send2=127(100%)*127(100%)=127(100%)
BusSelectDKitisvalidifyouveselectedadrumtrackfor
aTimbre(Combination)orTrack(Sequencer).
IfyouselectDKit,theBus(IFX/Output)Select(Global5
5b)settingsforeachkeybecomeeffective,andeachdrum
instrumentsoundwillberoutedtothecorrespondingbuses.
Atthistime,theactualsendlevelsusetheseSend1and2
values,multipliedbytheSend1and2settingsforeach
Drumkitkey.
IfadrumkitsBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoL/RorOff,
thelevelswillbetheseSend1and2settingsmultipliedby
thesendlevelsyouspecifyinProgP8:Routing/IFX
RoutingpageforOSC1Send1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
MFX2)(Prog81d),justasinothercases(OscillatorMode
SingleorDouble).
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,useSend1and
Send2forthepostIFXsignal.
InMediamode,effectswillusethesettingsofthemode
inwhichyoupreviouslywere.
IfIFX15isselectedforBus(IFX/Output)Select,usethe
Send1andSend2parametersforthepostIFXsignals.
Send1respondstoCC#93,andSend2respondsto
CC#91.IfSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(MFX2)foreach
timbre/trackareeffective,theparameterwillbe
controlledontheMIDIchannelssetforthe
correspondingtimbresandtracks.IftheSend1and
Send2parametersforthepostIFX15signalsare
effective,theycanbecontrolledontheMIDIchannels
assignedtoIFX15.
AnexampleforCombinationmodeisgivenbelow.Inthe
followingdiagram,Bus(IFX/Output)Selectissetsothat
Timbre1isroutedtoIFX1,Timbre2toIFX2,Timbres3and
4toIFX3,Timbres516toL/R.
Mixer
Theinputlevelstothemastereffectsaredeterminedbythe
sendlevels.IntheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpageofeach
mode,youcanspecifytheoutputlevelandchaining(series
connection)betweenthetwomastereffects.
3
4
1
1. Return1, Return2
Theseadjusttheamountofsignalthatisreturnedfromthe
mastereffectsMFX1andMFX2outputstotheL/Rbus.
Inthiscase,useSend1andSend2forthepostIFX1(001:
StereoCompressor)signaltosetthesendleveloftheTimbre
1routedtotheMasterEffect.(Inthisexampletheyaresetto
032and127.)Inthesameway,useSend1andSend2forthe
postIFX2signaltosetthesendlevelsofTimbres2,anduse
theSend1andSend2parametersforthepostIFX3signalto
setthesendlevelsofTimbres3and4.ForTimbres58,the
settingsofSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)willbe
effective(forTimbres916,usetheRouting1T0916page).
246
TheleftsidevalueoftheWet/DryparameterfortheMFX1
or2effectistheoutputlevelofthatmastereffect.(Inother
wordsifWet/Dryis25:75,theoutputlevelis75%.Itis100%
ifWet,and0%ifDry.)TheWet/Dryvaluemultipliedbythe
Return1orReturn2valueissenttotheL/Rbusandmixed
withtheP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpageBus(IFX/Output)
SelectL/RorInsertFXSetuppageBusL/Routput.
Forexample,withMFX1Wet/Drysetto50:50(50%)and
Return1setto64(50%),theresultanteffectlevelwillbe25%.
Theeffectlevelismaximum(100%)whenWet/Dryissetto
WetandReturn1issetto127.
3. Chain Direction
IfyouhavecheckedtheChainbox,youcansetthedirection
oftheconnectionhere.Youcanalsovisuallyconfirmthe
directiononthedisplay.
4. Chain Level
Thisparameterdeterminesthelevelofsignalsroutedfrom
oneMFXtotheotherMFXinachainconnection.
Program mode
EffectparametersarecontrolledontheglobalMIDI
channel(Global11a).
247
Effect Guide
In/Out
ThetotaleffectTFXisstereoinandstereoout.TheDry
(unprocessed)sideoftheWet/Dryparametersendsthe
stereoinputsounddirectlytothestereooutput.Thewayin
whichtheWet(processed)sideisoutputdependsonthe
typeofeffect,asfollows.
Wet
ThesoundfromMFX1and2isroutedthroughTFX,and
thenoutputtoAUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandR.
Mixer
Effect
Effect
Thissetsthelevelofthefinaloutputafterpassingthrough
thetotaleffect.
Effect
Effect
MonoMono Parallel
127: P4EQ // P4EQ 171: BPM Dl // BPM Dl
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMonoMonoParallel
Effectsonpage 240.
Ifyouselect000:NoEffect,thestereoinputwillbepassedto
thestereooutputwithoutanyprocessing.
Input/outputvariationsforeacheffectareshowninupper
leftoftheblockdiagramsstartingonpage 320.
Youcanswitchtheeffectson/offusingtheMFX1or2ON/
OFFbuttonsortheP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingsettingsin
eachmode.Whenoff,theeffectwillbebypassed.Thestereo
inputwillbepassedtothestereooutputwithoutany
processing,justasif000:NoEffectisselected.
SeparatelyfromthisOn/Offbutton,MIDIcontrol
changeCC#95canbereceivedtoturnTFXoff.Acontrol
changevalueof0turnsthemoff,andavalueof1127
restoresthemtothepriorsetting.Youcanalsousethe
frontpanelTFXbuttonorEffectGlobalSW(Global0
1b)toturnoffTFXinthesameway.Thisiscontrolled
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(Global11a).
Double-size effects
Doublesizeeffects(172:St.MltbandLimiter193:Early
Reflections)cantbeusedforthetotaleffect.
Routing
Program mode
EffectparametersarecontrolledontheglobalMIDI
channel(Global11a).
Outputs
ThetotaleffectTFXiaplacedimmediatelybeforethe
AUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandRoutputs.Effect(TFX)is
availableinallmodes.
Main Outputs
ThemainL/MONOandRoutputsoftheKROMEareoutput
fromtheAUDIOOUTPUTL/MONO,Rjacks,andthe
headphonejack.
IftheBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingforanoscillator
(Programmode),timbre(Combinationmode),track
(Sequencermode),orthepostinsertBus(IFX/Output)
248
Drum Track
Oscillator 2
Oscillator 1
Pan
Select from:
IFX3
L/R
IFX4
IFX1
IFX5
IFX2
Off
Bus Select
= L/R
Bus Select
= IFX1
Bus Select
mono x 2
stereo
IFX1 Bus
IFX5 Bus
IFX4 Bus
IFX3 Bus
IFX2 Bus
FX Control Bus
stereo
stereo
stereo
stereo
stereo
Chain &
Chain to
IFX5
IFX4
IFX3
IFX2
IFX1
Insert Effects
P8: Routing/IFX
Post IFX
Pan: CC#8
Select from:
L/R Off
Bus Select
= L/R
Bus Select
= Off
Post IFX
Bus Select
stereo
stereo
Chain
Post IFX
Send1 / 2
Send1 Send2
MFX2
MFX1
Master Effects
stereo
stereo
Return1 / 2
stereo
L/R Bus
P9: MFX/TFX/LFO
TFX
Total Effect
Master Level
AUDIO OUTPUT
L/Mono, R
Program mode
249
250
Bus Select
Bus Select
=L/R
Select from:
IFX3
L/R
IFX4
IFX1
IFX5
IFX2
Off
Timbre/Track 16
Bus Select
= IFX1
Bus Select
= IFX4
Bus Select
= L/R
Bus Select
= Off
Pan
Timbre/Track 4
Timbre/Track 3
Timbre/Track 2
Timbre/Track 1
mono x 2
stereo
IFX5 Bus
IFX4 Bus
IFX3 Bus
IFX2 Bus
IFX1 Bus
FX Control Bus
stereo
stereo
stereo
stereo
stereo
Chain &
Chain to
IFX5
IFX4
IFX3
IFX2
IFX1
Insert Effects
P8: Routing/IFX
Post IFX
Pan(CC#8)
Select from:
L/R Off
Bus Select
= L/R
Bus Select
= Off
Post IFX
Bus Select
stereo
stereo
Chain
Post IFX
Send1 / 2
Send1 Send2
MFX2
MFX1
Master Effects
stereo
stereo
Return1 / 2
stereo
L/R Bus
P9: MFX/TFX/LFO
TFX
Total Effect
Master Level
AUDIO OUTPUT
L/Mono, R
Effect Guide
Dynamics (Dynamic)
Compressor - Sensitivity
000: No Effect
Level
Wet
Sensitivity=100
Louder
Selectthisoptionwhenyoudonotuseanyeffects.The
InsertEffect/TotalEffectsectionoutputsunprocessed
signalsandtheMasterEffectsectionmutestheoutput.
Sensitivity=40
Dry
Time
c: Attack
Thisparametercontrolstheattacklevel.
Thiseffectcompressestheinputsignaltoregulatethelevel
andgiveapunchyeffect.Itisusefulforguitar,piano,and
drumsounds.Thisisastereocompressor.Youcanlinkleft
andrightchannels,oruseeachchannelseparately.
Compressor - Attack
Level
Attack=80
Attack=20
Wet
Dry
Left
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Time
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Envelope Select
Envelope - Control
Compressor
EQ Trim
LEQ
Output Level
HEQ
Right
Wet / Dry
L/R Mix,
L/R Individually
Envelope
Select
Sensitivity
1...100
Attack
1...100
EQ Trim
0...100
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
Whenplayingchordsonanelectricpianoorsimilar
instrument,itshelpfultouseacompressortokeepeach
notesmoothandwellbalanced.Inadditiontoadistinctive
percussiveaccent,itwillalsoprovidealongsustain.This
effectmodelsapopularcompressorwithacleansound
thatsperfectforpopandfunkmusic.
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
Compressor
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
Attack
1...100
p.251
Level
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Amt
100...+100
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Src
Amt
a: Envelope Select
Thisparameterselectswhethertheleftandrightchannels
arelinkedtocontrolbothsignalssimultaneously,orwhether
eachchanneliscontrolledindependently.
b: Sensitivity
g: Output Level (Level)
TheSensitivityparametersetsthesensitivityofthe
compressor.Ifthisparameterissettoahighervalue,lower
levelsoundswillbeboosted.WithahigherSensitivity,the
overallvolumelevelishigher.Toadjustthefinalvolume
level,usetheOutputLevelparameter.
251
WithL/Rindividually,theleftandrightchannelscontrolthe
Limiterindividually.
c: Ratio
d: Threshold [dB]
f: Gain Adjust [dB]
ThisparametersetsthesignalcompressionRatio.
Compressionisappliedonlywhenthesignallevelexceeds
theThresholdvalue.
AdjusttheoutputlevelusingtheGainAdjustparameter,
sincecompressioncausestheentireleveltobereduced.
Limiter - Threshold / Ratio
Wet / Dry
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Gain Adjust
Output Level
Limiter
Side PEQ
Envelope - Control
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Trigger Monitor
Threshold
Envelope - Control
Envelope Select
Envelope Source
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Ration=Inf : 1
Limiter
Louder
Gain Adjust
Right
Wet / Dry
FX Control BUS 1
FX Control BUS 2
Louder
Input Level
Envelope
Source
Input,
FX Control 1,
FX Control 2
FX Ctrl Trim
0...100
Envelope
Select
L/R Mix,
L Only, R
Only, L/R
Individually
Ratio
1.0 : 1
50.0 : 1,
Inf : 1
e: Attack
e: Release
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
Attack
1...100
p.252
Release
1...100
p.252
Theseparameterssettheattacktimeandreleasetime.A
higherattacktimewillcausethecompressiontobeapplied
moreslowly.
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Inf,
38...+24
p.252
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
63...+63
Side PEQ
Insert
Off, On
Trigger
Monitor
Off, On
Side PEQ
Cutoff [Hz]
20...12.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Level
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Dry
Threshold
Ratio=Inf : 1
Time
Wet
Ratio=Inf : 1
Attack=1
Release=1
Wet
Ratio=Inf : 1
Attack=100
Release=100
Release
Attack
g: Trigger Monitor
a: Envelope Source
ByselectingFXControl1orFXControl2youcanusethe
signalofFXControlBus1or2asthetriggersignal.
Forinstance,youmightuseadifferent,unprocessedsound
asthetrigger,orapplyalimitertriggeredbyadifferent
timbre(Combination)ortrack(Sequence).Formore
information,pleaseseeFXControlBusesonpage 238.
b: Envelope Select
WhenL/RMixisselectedforthisparameter,theleftand
rightchannelsarelinkedtocontroltheLimiterusingthe
mixedsignal.IfLOnly(orROnly)isselected,theleftand
rightchannelsarelinked,andtheLimiteriscontrolledvia
onlytheleft(orright)channel.
252
SettingthisparameterOnwillcausethetriggersignaltobe
output,insteadoftheeffectsound.Usethisparameterto
checkthetriggersignalwithEQapplied.Usually,setthisto
Off.
equalizerallowsyoutosettheLimitertorespondtoany
frequencyband.
ThiseffectappliestheLimitertothelowrange,midrange,
andhighrangeoftheinputsignal.Youcancontrol
dynamicsforeachrangetoadjustthesoundpressureofthe
lowrange,midrange,andhighrangeinadifferentway
fromtheEQ.
Wet / Dry
Out Ceiling
Limiter
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Out Ceiling
Left
Mid
Limiter
Envelope - Control
Low Offset
Envelope - Control
High Mid Offset
Limiter
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Ratio
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
Attack
1...100
p.252
Release
1...100
p.252
Low Offset
[dB]
40...0
Mid Offset
[dB]
40...0
High Offset
[dB]
40...0
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
63...+63
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Threshold
[dB]
30.0...0.0
Out Ceiling
[dB]
30.0...0.0
Release
[msec]
0.50...1000.0
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
High Offset
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Band-Pass Filters
Low
100...+100
p.252
p.252
Delay
Wet / Dry
Gate
Side PEQ
Envelope - Control
Envelope Select
Trigger Monitor
Envelope - Control
Delay
Gate
-mod
Gain Adjust
Right
Wet / Dry
FX Control BUS 1
FX Control BUS 2
Theseparameterssetthegainofthetriggersignal.
Forexample,ifyoudonotwanttoapplycompressiontothe
highrange,reducetheHighOffsetvaluedownbelowthe
Thresholdlevel.Inthisway,thehighrangelimiterwillnot
respond,andcompressionwillnotbeapplied.
Envelope
Source
D-mod,
Input,
FX Control 1,
FX Control 2
Fx Ctrl Trim
0...100
Envelope
Select
L/R Mix,
L Only,
R Only
Src
Off...Tempo
Threshold
0...100
Polarity
+,
d
e
Attack
1...100
p.254
Release
1...100
p.254
Delay Time
[msec]
0...100
Side PEQ
Insert
Off, On
Trigger
Monitor
Off, On
253
Side PEQ
Cutoff [Hz]
20...12.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
c: Threshold
d: Attack
d: Release
Thresholdspecifiesthelevelatwhichgatingoccurswhen
EnvelopeSelectissettoL/RMix,LOnly,orROnly.
AttackandReleasespecifytheattacktimeandreleasetime
ofthegate.
Gate - Threshold
Output Level
Louder
Threshold
Louder
Input Level
Gate - Attack / Release
Threshold
Dry
Wet
Attack=1
Release=1
Wet
Attack=100
Release=100
Attack
Release
c: Polarity
Thisinvertsthepolarityofthegateon/offoperation.With
thesetting,thegatewillclosewhentheinputsignal
exceedsthespecifiedlevel.Thedirectioninwhichthe
modulationsourceopensorclosesthegatewillalsobe
reversed.
254
+15dB
-mod
Band2 Cutoff
+6dB
+6dB
0dB
Thisisastereo4bandparametricequalizer.Youcanselect
peakingtypeorshelvingtypeforBand1and4.Thegainof
Band2canbecontrolledbydynamicmodulation.
0dB
Band2 Cutoff
9dB
D -mod
15.0
PEQ
PEQ
LEQ
PEQ
HEQ
PEQ
PEQ
PEQ
Right
Wet / Dry
Trim
0...100
Band1 Type
Peaking,
Selects the type of Band 1
Shelving-Low
p.255
Band4 Type
Peaking,
ShelvingHigh
Off...Tempo
Band2
Dynamic
Gain Src
18.0...+18.0
Amt [dB]
D -mod
a
e, f, g, h: Q
Theseparameterssetthebandwidthofeachequalizer.The
higherthevalue,thenarrowerthebandbecomes.
HEQ
LEQ
Trim
Wet / Dry
PEQ
Band1 Cutoff
20...1.00k
[Hz]
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Left
Wet / Dry
0.5...10.0
Trim
Q
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Trim
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Band4 Cutoff
500...20.00k
[Hz]
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Type
1:Wide 1,
2:Wide 2,
3:Wide 3,
4:Half Wide 1,
5:Half Wide 2,
6:Half Wide 3, Selects a combination of center
7:Low,
frequencies for each band p.255
8:Wide Low,
9:Mid,
10:Wide Mid,
11:High,
12:Wide High
Trim
0...100
Band1 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Band2 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
b: Band1 Type
c: Band4 Type
Band3 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Band4 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
SelectsafiltertypeforBand1and4.
Band5 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Band6 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Band7 [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
+Gain
3dB
Band4 Type=Shelving High
Band4 Type=Peaking
0dB
Gain
Band4 Cutoff
a: Type
Thisparameterselectsacombinationofcenterfrequencies
foreachband.Thecenterfrequencyofeachbandisshown
intherightofthescreen.
255
Youcanconfigurea21BandGraphicEQrangingfrom80
Hzto18kHzifyouroutethreeGraphic7BandEQeffectsin
series,withasettingof7:Low,9:Mid,and11:Highforeach
EQ.
Wet / Dry
LEQ
HEQ
Exciter
EQ Trim
Delay
Left
Depth
Low
Delay
EQ Trim
Wet / Dry
Mid
Exciter
Trim
Enhancer
Right
High
Isolator
Wet / Dry
Low
D -mod
Mid
Trim
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Trim
Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
Src
Off...Tempo
Mid/High
[Hz]
Amt
70...+70
Enhancer
Delay L
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Enhancer
Delay R
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Enhancer
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
EQ Trim
0...100
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
High,
Mid-High
g
Pre HEQ Fc
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Exciter Blend
Thisparametersetsthedepth(intensity)oftheExcitereffect.
Positivevaluesgiveafrequencypattern(tobeemphasized)
differentfromnegativevalues.
b: Emphasis Frequency
Thisparametersetsthefrequencytobeemphasized.Higher
valueswillemphasizelowerfrequencies.
256
High
Right
Wet / Dry
D -mod
D -mod
D -mod
0...100
2000...6000
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
72...+72
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
72...+72
High Gain
[dB]
Inf,
59...+12
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
72...+72
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) 011: St. Wah/Auto Wah (Stereo Wah/Auto Wah)
Sweep Mode=D-mod
Thisstereowaheffectallowsyoutocreatesoundsfrom
vintagewahpedalsimulationtoautowahsimulation,and
muchbroaderrangesettings.
Frequency
Top=75
Wah
Bottom=60
Wah
Woo
Top=30
Woo
Bottom=25
Higher
Frequency
Higher
D -mod
Higher
Zero
D -mod
Higher
Zero
Max
Max
Sweep Mode=Auto
Frequency
Frequency
Left
Wet / Dry
Envelope Shape
Response
D -mod
Sweep Mode
Auto
D-mod
Woo
LFO
Wah
Wah
Higher
Bottom=75
Higher
Envelope Sens
Wah
Top=75
Wah
Woo
Bottom=25
Envelope
Top=25
Woo
LFO
Wah
Envelope
Right
Time
Envelope
Time
Wet / Dry
b: Sweep Mode
a
Frequency
Bottom
0...100
Frequency
Top
0...100
Auto,
Sweep Mode D-mod,
LFO
Src
Off...Tempo
Response
0...100
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Envelope
Shape
100...+100
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Resonance
0...100
Low Pass
Filter
Off, On
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Frequency Bottom
a: Frequency Top
Thesweepwidthanddirectionofthewahfilterare
determinedbytheFrequencyTopandFrequencyBottom
settings.
Thisparameterchangesthewahcontrolmode.Setting
SweepModetoAutowillselectanautowahthatsweeps
accordingtoenvelopechangesintheinputsignallevel.
Autowahisfrequentlyusedforfunkguitarpartsandclav
sounds.
WhenSweepModeissettoDmod,youcancontrolthe
filterdirectlyviathemodulationsourceinthesamewayasa
wahpedal.
WhenSweepModeissettoLFO,theeffectusesLFOto
sweepincycle.
c: Envelope Sens
Thisparametersetsthesensitivityofautowah.Increasethe
valueiftheinputsignalistoolowtosweep.Reducethe
valueiftheinputsignalissohighthatthefilterisstopped
temporarily.
c: Envelope Shape
Thisparameterdeterminesthesweepcurveforautowah.
Envelope Shape
Level
Envelope
value = 0...+100
value = 0...100
Time
e: BPM
e: Base Note
e: Times
OnecycleofLFOsweepisobtainedbymultiplyingthe
lengthofanote()(selectedforBaseNote,inrelationto
thetempospecifiedinBPM,ortheMIDIClocktempoif
BPMissettoMIDI)bythenumberspecifiedintheTimes
parameter.
f: LFO Type
f: Common LFO Offset [deg]
IfTypeissettoCommon1orCommon2,modulationwill
beappliedusingtheCommonFXLFOratherthantheLFO
withintheeffectitself.SincethisletsyouusethesameLFO
formultipleeffects,itsusefulwhenyouwanttoapply
varioustypesofmodulationinsynchronization.
257
CommonLFOOffsetspecifiesthephasedifferencerelative
totheCommonFXLFO.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
CommonFXLFOsonpage 237.
Thiseffectsimulatesthetonalcharacterofavintagewah
pedal.Youcancustomizethetoneandrangesettings.
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Shape
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
Wah
Envelope Sens
Sweep Mode
Auto
Response
Shape / Invert
Mode
D-mod
D -mod
LFO
Preset Setting
LFO
Custom Parameters
Wah
Right
Preset,
Custom
Shape
100...+100
Invert
Off, On
Frequency
Bottom
0...100
Frequency
Top
0...100
Resonance
Bottom
0...100
0...100
Mode
a
Wet / Dry
c
Resonance
Top
Auto,
Sweep Mode D-mod,
LFO
Src
Off...Tempo
Manual
0...100
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Response
0...100
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Thisparameterspecifiesthesweepcurveofthewah.It
appliestoallcontrolviaautowah,modulationsource,and
LFO,andletsyouadjustsubtlenuancesofthewaheffect.
a: Mode
b: Frequency Bottom
b: Frequency Top
c: Resonance Bottom
c: Resonance Top
IfMode=Preset,thissimulatesavintagewahpedal.Inthis
case,internallyfixedvaluesareusedforFrequencyBottom/
TopandResonanceBottom/Top,andthesesettingswillbe
ignored.ThesettingsforFrequencyBottom/Topand
ResonanceBottom/ToparevalidifMode=Custom.
258
Wet / Dry
Wah
Auto Sensitivity
Envelope
Auto
Attack / Polarity
D-mod
Mode
Pedal(D-mod)
Right
Wet / Dry
Type
V847, V848
Open
1...100
Close
1...100
20.00...
+20.00
Mode
Pedal, Auto
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Auto Sensitivity
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Auto Attack
0...10
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
180...+180
Amt
100...+100
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
0...100
EQ and Filters (EQ/Filter) 014: St. Random Filter (Stereo Random Filter)
Thisstereobandpassfilterusesastepshapewaveformand
randomLFOformodulation.Youcancreateaspecialeffect
fromfilteroscillation.
Wet / Dry
180
90
0 [degree]
Filter
Filter
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Step-Tri/Random
LFO
Waveform
a
Step-Tri,
Random
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO Step
Frequency
[Hz]
0.05...50.00
Amt
50.00...
+50.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
(Step)
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Step Base
Note
e
p.259
Manual
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Resonance
0...100
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: LFO Waveform
b: LFO Frequency [Hz]
c: LFO Step Frequency [Hz]
WhenLFOWaveformissettoStepTri,LFOisastepshape,
trianglewaveform.TheLFOFrequencyparametersetsthe
originaltrianglewaveformspeed.ChangingtheLFOStep
Frequencyparameterenablesyoutoadjustthewidthofthe
steps.
WhenLFOWaveformissettoRandom,theLFOStep
FrequencyparameterusesarandomLFOcycle.
Random Filter LFO
LFO Frequency
Step Frequency
Step Frequency
Step-Tri
Random
d: BPM
e: Step Base Note
e: Times
ThewidthofanLFOstep,oracycleofrandomLFO,is
obtainedbymultiplyingthelengthofanote()(selected
forStepBaseNote,inrelationtothetempospecifiedin
BPM,ortheMIDIClocktempoifBPMissettoMIDI)bythe
numberspecifiedintheTimesparameter.
i: Wet/Dry
Theeffectsoundsphasewillbereversedwhenyousetthis
parameterintherangeofvaluesfromWetto1:99.
259
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet / Dry
Multimode Filter
Thiseffectaddsverylowfrequenciestotheinputsignal.Itis
veryusefulwhensimulatingaroaringdrumsoundor
emphasizingpowerfullowrange.Thiseffectisdifferent
fromtheequalizerinthatyoucanaddverylowrange
harmonics.Youcanalsoadjusttheoscillatorfrequencyto
matchaparticularnotenumber,foruseasanoctaver.
Driver
Trim
Output
LPF
HPF
Filter Type
BPF
BRF
Multimode Filter
Driver
Trim
Output
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
Left
Wet / Dry
LFO Shape
Envelope Shape
Envelope Sens
Type
Trim
0...100
Cutoff
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Resonance
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
LFO
Waveform
Phase [deg]
Depth
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
e
180...+180
0...100
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Drive SW
Off, On
Low Boost
0...100
0...100
D -mod
Note No.
Envelope Sens
Pre LPF
Fixed Frequency
Sine Oscillator
Fixed
OSC Mode
Note Interval, Fine
Pitch
Pre LPF
Envelope Shape
Right
OSC Mode
Wet / Dry
Note Fine
100...+100
Fixed
Frequency
[Hz]
10.0...80.0
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
80...+80
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Envelope
Shape
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: OSC Mode
b: Note Interval
b: Note Fine
TheOSCModeparameterselectstheoscillatoroperation
mode.WhenNote(KeyFollow)isselected,theoscillators
frequencyisdeterminedbasedonthenotenumber,
allowingyoutouseitasanoctaver.TheNoteInterval
parametersetsthepitchoffsetfromtheoriginalnote
numberbysemitonesteps.TheNoteFineparameterallows
youtofinetuneinstepsofcents.
260
ifyoudonotwanttoaddlowerharmonicstothehigher
range.
IfSweepModeissettoDmodisselectedasthemodulation
source,movingyourfingerfromtherighttoleftofwill
changethesoundfromatoi,thenu.
IfSweepModeissettoLFO,thesoundwillchange
cyclicallyfromatoi,u,i,thena.
Thiseffectaddsanunusualcharacter,likeahumanvoice,to
theinputsignal.Modulatingthetoneviadynamic
modulation,youcancreateaninterestingeffectthatsounds
asiftheguitarorsynthesizeristalking.
Voice Center
Voice Top
A
I
U
E
Wet / Dry
D -mod
Talking Modulator
A-I-U-E-O
JS X
JS +Y
JS Y
etc
Max
+ Max
Zero
+ Max
Zero
Right
D -mod
LFO
Wet / Dry
Sweep Mode
D-mod
LFO
f: Formant Shift
Voice Top: A
Voice Center: I
Voice Bottom: U
Off...Tempo
Voice Top
A, I, U, E, O
Voice Center
A, I, U, E, O
Voice Bottom A, I, U, E, O
Resonance
0...100
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
Off, On
MIDI Sync
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
BPM
Thisparameteradjuststhefrequencyleveltowhichthe
effectisapplied.Ifyouwishtoapplytheeffecttoahigher
rangesound,setthisparametertoahighervalue;toapply
theeffecttoalowerrangesound,setthistoalowervalue.
f: Resonance
Thisparametersetstheintensityofresonanceforthevoice
pattern.Alargervaluewilladdmorecharactertothesound.
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
Resolution
High Damp
Output Level
High Damp
Output Level
Decimator
D -mod
Sampling Frequency
LFO
Decimator
Pre LPF
Resolution
Right
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
Off, On
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Sampling
Frequency
[Hz]
1.00k...
48.00k
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
Src
Off...Tempo
180...+180
Amt
48.00k...
+48.00k
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Off...Tempo
0.02...20.00
Src
Amt
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
c: Voice Top
d: Voice Center
e: Voice Bottom
Theseparametersassignvowelstothetop,center,and
bottompositionofthecontroller.
E.g.:WhenVoiceTop=A,VoiceCenter=I,andVoice
Bottom=U:
261
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Resolution
4...24
p.262
p.262
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
LFO Type
e
Amt
100...+100
IfyousettheSamplingFrequencytoabout3 kHzandset
PreLPFtoOff,youcancreateasoundlikearingmodulator.
Pre EQ
EQ Trim
Pre EQ
Analog Record
Simulation
Right
Wet / Dry
Speed [RPM]
Flutter
0...100
a: Pre LPF
Ifasamplerwithaverylowsamplingfrequencyreceives
veryhighpitchedsoundthatcouldnotbeheardduring
playback,itcouldgeneratepitchnoisethatisunrelatedto
theoriginalsound.SetPreLPFtoOntopreventthisnoise
frombeinggenerated.
EQ Trim
g: Resolution
h: Output Level
IfyousetasmallervaluefortheResolutionparameter,the
soundmaybedistorted.Thevolumelevelmayalsobe
changed.UseOutputLeveltoadjustthelevel.
p.262
Noise Tone
0...100
Noise Level
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Click Level
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
EQ Trim
0...100
Pre EQ Cutoff
300...10.00k
[Hz]
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
b: Flutter
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthedepthofthe
modulationcausedbyawarpedturntable.
e: Click Level
Thisparameterenablesyoutosettheleveloftheclicknoise
thatoccursonceeveryrotationoftheturntable.This
simulationreproducesrecordnoise,andthenoisegenerated
afterthemusiconavinylrecordfinishes.
262
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD Amp Mic) 020: OD/Hi.Gain Wah (Overdrive/Hi.Gain Wah)
Whenavalueforthemodulationsourceislessthan64,
offspeedisselected,andwhenthevalueis64or
higher,onisselected.
WhenSw=Toggle,thewaheffectisswitchedbetweenon
andoffeachtimeyoupressthepedaloroperatethejoystick.
Theswitchwillbeturnedon/offeachtimethevalueof
themodulationsourceexceeds64.
Wet / Dry
Pre Low-cut
Wah
Right
Wet / Dry
D -mod
d: Pre Low-cut
Wah
Off, On
Src
Off...Tempo
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Wah Sweep
Range
10...+10
Wah Sweep
Src
Off...Tempo
Drive Mode
Drive
1...100
Pre Low-cut
0...10
p.263
p.263
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
50...+50
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Cuttingthesignalinthelowrangebeforeitisinputtothe
Distortionwillcreateasharpdistortion.
d: Drive
e: Output Level (Level)
Thedegreeofdistortionisdeterminedbythelevelofinput
signalandthesettingofDrive.RaisingtheDrivesetting
willcausetheentirevolumeleveltoincrease.Usethe
OutputLevelparametertoadjustthevolumelevel.The
OutputLevelparameterusesthesignallevelinputtothe3
BandEQ.Ifclippingoccursatthe3BandEQ,adjustthe
OutputLevelparameter.
p.263
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Mid1Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Direct Mix
0...50
Speaker
Simulation
Off, On
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Wah
TheWahparameterswitchesthewaheffecton/off.
a: Sw
Thisparametersetshowthewaheffectisswitchedonand
offviathemodulationsource.
263
Thissimulatestheacousticalcharacterofaguitaramps
speakercabinet.
Thissimulatestheacousticalcharacterofabassamps
speakercabinet.
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Cabinet Simulator
Cabinet Simulator
Trim
Trim
Trim
Trim
Cabinet Simulator
Cabinet Simulator
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Trim
0...100
Wet / Dry
Trim
0...100
TWEED 1x12
LA - 4x10
TWEED 4x10
MODERN 4x10
264
Type
10" aluminum-cone
METAL - 4x10 Four
speakers / modern cabinet
BLACK - 2x12
CLASSIC 8x10
UK - 4x12
JAZZ - 1x15
UK H30 4x12
US - 2x15
UK - 4x15
LA - 1x18
Air
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD Amp Mic) 023: Bass Amp Model
Thissimulatesabassamp.
Thissimulatesabassampandspeakercabinet.
Volume
Wet / Dry
Cabinet Simulator
Right
Wet / Dry
D -mod
Right
Wet / Dry
D -mod
c
d
Amplifier
Type
An amp distinctive for its eyeGOLD PANEL catching gold panel and clean
sound.
Amplifier
Type
SCOOPED
VALVE2
Volume
0...100
VALVE
Src
Off...Tempo
CLASSIC
Amt
100...+100
Bass
0...100
Volume
0...100
Middle
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Mid Range
0...4
Amt
100...+100
Bass
0...100
Middle
0...100
Mid Range
0...4
Treble
0...100
Presence
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
LA STUDIO,
JAZZ
COMBO,
GOLD PANEL, Selects the type of the amplifier
SCOOPED,
p.265
VALVE2,
VALVE,
CLASSIC
c
d
e
Treble
0...100
Presence
0...100
Cabinet
Simulater
Off, On
LA - 4x10,
MODERN 4x10,
METAL - 4x10,
CLASSIC 8x10,
UK - 4x12,
STUDIO Selects the cabinet type
Cabinet Type 1x15,
JAZZ - 1x15,
VOX AC100 2x15,
US - 2x15,
UK - 4x15,
LA - 1x18,
COMBI - 1x12
& 1x18
p.264
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Amplifier Type
h: Cabinet Type
Recommended Combinations of Bass Amp Models and
Cabinets:
Amplifier Type
Cabinet Type
LASTUDIO
LA4x10,LA1x18
JAZZCOMBO
JAZZ1x15
GOLDPANEL
MODERN4x10
SCOOPED
METAL4x10
VALVE2
CLASSIC8x10
VALVE
CLASSIC8x10
CLASSIC
COMBI1x12&1x18
Note:ItisconvenienttousetheEffectPresetfunctionto
presetyourfavoritepairingsofampmodelandcabinet.(see
p.60)
265
Tube2 Bias
Tube2
Output Level 48.0...+0.0
[dB]
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
b, f: Saturation [%]
Withhighersettingsofthisvalue,thewaveformwillchange
athighgainlevels,tendingtocausedistortion.Lower
settingsofthisvaluewillproducelinearresponse.
Wet / Dry
Treble Booster
Saturation = 0
Saturation = 50
Saturation = 100
Right
Wet / Dry
Drive
1...100
Level
0...100
Tone
1...100
Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
In
Bias = 0
p.263
c: Tube1 Bias
Thisexpressestheeffectthatchangesinvacuumtubebias
haveonthedistortionofthewaveform.Highersettingsof
thisvaluewillproducedistortionevenatlowgainlevels.
Sincethiswillalsochangetheovertonestructure,youcan
useittocontrolthetonalcharacter.
Mic/Pre Amp - Bias
Out
Bias = 100
Bias = 50
Bias = 0
In
Thiseffectsimulatesatwostagevacuumtubepreamp.You
canmakeindividualsettingsfortwovacuumtubes
connectedinseries.Thisletsyoucreatethewarmsound
typicalofvacuumtubes.
d: Tube1 Phase
Invert
+
Satulation = 50
WiththeWetInvertsetting,thephaseofthesignalwillbe
invertedbetweenstage1andstage2.SinceBiasisapplied
totheinvertedsignalinstage2,thiswillchangethetonal
character.
Right
Wet / Dry
c
d
266
Tube1 Low
Cut [Hz]
Thru,
21...8.00k
Tube1 Gain
[dB]
24.0...+24.0
Saturation
[%]
0...100
Tube1 Bias
0...100
Tube1 Phase
Normal,
Wet Invert
Tube2 Low
Cut [Hz]
Thru,
21...8.00k
p.266
Tube2 Gain
[dB]
24.0...+24.0
Saturation
[%]
0...100
Output Level
Invert
Tube Pre Amp1
Right
Wet / Dry
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models (OD Amp Mic) 028: Mic Model+PreAmp (Mic Modeling + PreAmp)
Mic Simulation
Right
Wet / Dry
Mic Type
Vintage
Dynamic,
Multi
Condenser,
Percussion
Condenser,
Drums Dynamic, Selects the type of mic
Vocal Dynamic,
Multi Dynamic,
Vocal
Condenser,
Vocal Tube,
Kick Dynamic
Mic Position
Tube Gain
[dB]
24.0...+24.0
Saturation
[%]
0...100
Tube Bias
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
b: Mic Position
Thisexpressestheeffectthatthemicpositionhasonthe
sound.TheClosesettingistheclosestmicposition,andthe
Farsettingisthefarthest.
267
Settingtheleftandrightdelaytimeindividuallyallowsyou
tocontrolthestereoimage.
Wet / Dry
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus
EQ Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus
EQ Trim
Right
Thismodelsafamouschorusunitthatwasbuiltintoa
guitaramp.Althoughitdoesnotprovideachorusand
vibratoselectswitch,youcanusetheWet/Drysettingto
producetheireffect.TheSpeed,Depth,andManual
parametersallowanevenwiderrangeofsoundsthanthe
originalunit.
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
LFO
Waveform
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
L Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
R Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Depth
0...100
e: Wet/Dry
d: Output Mode
Src
Off...Tempo
Forthemastereffects,Wet/Dryadjuststheoutputlevelof
theeffectsound.
Amt
100...+100
EQ Trim
0...100
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
268
Mono
Output Mode
Chorus
Right
Wet / Dry
Stereo
(L-D&R-W)
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet / Dry
LFO
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Manual
1...100
Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
WhenOutputModeisMono,LandRwilloutputthesame
vibratoeffect.Normally,youllusetheWet/Drysettingto
mixthedirectsoundandprocessedsoundsothatachorus
effectisproduced.IfyousetthistoWetsothatnoneofthe
directsoundisincluded,youllobtainavibratoeffect.
IfOutputModeisST(LD&RW),thedirectsoundwillbe
pannedtoL,andtheeffectsoundwillbepannedtoRfor
output.Normally,youllusetheWet/Drysettingtomixthe
directsoundandprocessedsound,producingachorus
effectononlytheRchannel,andcreatingaspaciousstereo
effectthatextendstotheleftandright.IfyousetthistoWet,
andpanthedirectandprocessedsoundstoleftandright,
andthenoutputthemtostereospeakers,thedirectsound
andprocessedsoundwillbemixedintheair,producinga
choruseffectwithspaciousclarity.
033: St.HarmonicChorus
(Stereo Harmonic Chorus)
Thiseffectapplieschorusonlytohigherfrequencies.This
canbeusedtoapplyachoruseffecttoabasssoundwithout
makingthesoundthinner.Youcanalsousethischorus
blockwithfeedbackasaflanger.
Wet / Dry
Mode & Intensity
Chorus
Input Gain
Chorus/Flanger
Output Mode
Low Level
Mono
Stereo
Right
High Level
High Level
Chorus/Flanger
Wet / Dry
LFO
High Damp
Feedback
High Damp
Wet / Dry
Low Level
Right
Wet / Dry
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
LFO Phase
Intensity
1...100
Mode
0, 1, 2
Select a mode
0: Chorus
1: Pitch Modulation
2: Flanger
Width
0...100
Input Gain
1...100
Output Mode 0, 1
Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
c: Mode
b: Intensity
IncreasingtheIntensityvaluewillstrengthenthe
modulationeffect.Thiscontrolstheeffect,direct,and
feedbackvalues.Thevaluesthatarecontrolledwilldepend
ontheModesetting.
032: EP Chorus
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1:9999:1,
Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100+100
Amt
Thisisinspiredbyararechorusbuiltintoanearlyversionof
afamousmodifiedtinepiano.
p.259
h
LFO
Waveform
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
High/Low
Split Point
1...100
Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Level
0...100
High Level
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
269
h: Feedback
Setsthefeedbackamountofthechorusblock.Increasingthe
feedbackwillallowyoutousetheeffectasaflanger.
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
LFO1
ThisstereochoruseffectaddstwodifferentLFOstogether.
YoucansettheFrequencyandDepthparametersforeach
LFOindividually.DependingonthesettingoftheseLFOs,
verycomplexwaveformswillcreateananalogtype,
unstablemodulatedsound.
Depth1
LFO2
Depth2
Wet / Dry
Chorus/Flanger
High Damp
Feedback
High Damp
Chorus/Flanger
Right
Wet / Dry
180 [degree]
LFO1: Tri / Sine
LFO2: Tri / Sine
LFO1
Waveform
LFO2
Waveform
Phase Sw
LFO1
Frequency
[Hz]
b
0 deg,
180 deg
Src
Off...Tempo
LFO1 Amt
30.00...
+30.00
LFO2
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...30.00
Amt
30.00...
+30.00
LFO1 Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
LFO2 Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
180...+180
Tap2 Delay
Tap4 Delay
Right
Level
Pan
Level
Pan
Level
Pan
Level
Pan
0 [degree]
180 [degree]
90 [degree]
270 [degree]
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...13.00
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Tap1 (000)
[msec]
0...1000
Depth
0...30
Level
0...30
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Tap2 (180)
[msec]
0...1000
Depth
0...30
Level
0...30
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Depth2
0...100
Tap3 (090)
[msec]
0...1000
Amt
100...+100
Depth
0...30
Level
0...30
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Tap4 (270)
[msec]
0...1000
Depth
0...30
Level
0...30
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
L Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
R Pre Delay
[msec]
0.0...50.0
High Damp
[%]
100...+100
0...100
Wet / Dry
LFO: Triangle
Depth1
Feedback
270
Tap1 Delay
Tap3 Delay
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Amt
Left
0.02...30.00
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
ThiseffecthasfourchorusblockswithadifferentLFO
phase.Youcancreateacomplexstereoimagebysetting
eachblocksdelaytime,depth,outputlevel,andpan
individually.Youcanalsofixsomeofthechorusblocksto
combinethechorusanddelayeffects.
Tap1
Feedback
g
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Polysi x
Ensemble
Right
036: Ensemble
Wet / Dry
ThisEnsembleeffecthasthreechorusblocksthatuseLFOto
createsubtleshimmering,andgivesthreedimensional
depthandspreadtothesound,becausethesignalisoutput
fromtheleft,right,andcenter.
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet / Dry
Ensemble
Right
Wet / Dry
Shimmer
LFO
Speed
a
1...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Shimmer
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
c: Shimmer
ThisparametersetstheamountofshimmeringoftheLFO
waveform.Increasingthisvalueaddsmoreshimmering,
makingthechoruseffectmorecomplexandricher.
Flanger
Feedback
High Damp
Flanger
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Ensemble LFO
Level
Shimmer
Wet / Dry
LFO Shape
Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...50.0
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Time
271
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Depth
0...100
Feedback
100...+100
LFO Type
f
High Damp
[%]
Thestereoeffectusesastepshapewaveformandrandom
LFOformodulation,creatingauniqueflangingeffect.
Left
Wet / Dry
p.272
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
i
0...100
Flanger
Feedback
High Damp
Flanger
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Step-Tri/Random
h: Feedback
i: Wet/Dry
ThepeakshapeofthepositiveandnegativeFeedbackvalue
isdifferent.Theharmonicswillbeemphasizedwhenthe
effectsoundismixedwiththedrysoundifyouseta
positivevalueforbothFeedbackandWet/Dry,andifyou
setanegativevalueforbothFeedbackandWet/Dry.
Thismodelsaclassicanalogflanger.Itishighlyeffectivefor
chordingonclavitypekeyboardsorelectricpiano.
Delay Time
[msec]
0.0...50.0
LFO
Waveform
Step-Tri,
Random
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO Step
Frequency
[Hz]
0.05...50.00
Step Amt
50.00...
+50.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Step Base
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
(Step)
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Depth
0...100
Feedback
100...+100
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Flanger
Right
LFO Sync
LFO
Reset Offset
Wet / Dry
f
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Resonance
0...100
Manual
1...100
LFO Reset
Source
Off...Tempo
Reset Offset
0...100
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Src
Amt
272
p.259
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
p.272
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser) 041: St. Env. Flanger (Stereo Envelope Flanger)
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Flanger
Resonance
Feedback
High Damp
Phaser
High Damp
Flanger
Right
Right
D-mod
-mod
EG Attack/Decay
L Delay
Bottom
[msec]
EG
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
LFO Shape
0.0...50.0
L Delay Top
[msec]
0.0...50.0
R Delay
Bottom
[msec]
0.0...50.0
R Delay Top
[msec]
0.0...50.0
Src
c
Off...Tempo
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
EG Attack
1...100
p.273
EG Decay
1...100
p.273
Base Note
...
Feedback
100...+100
p.272
Times
x1...x32
High Damp
[%]
0...100
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Src
Off...Tempo
Manual
0...100
Amt
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Resonance
100...+100
c: Sweep Mode
c: Src
Thisparameterswitchestheflangercontrolmode.WithSweep
Mode=EG,theflangerwillsweepusingtheenvelope
generator.Thisenvelopegeneratorisincludedintheenvelope
flanger,andnotrelatedtothePitchEG,FilterEG,orAmpEG.
TheSrcparameterselectsthesourcethatstartstheenvelope
generator.Ifyouselect,forexample,Gate,theenvelope
generatorwillstartwhenthenoteonmessageisreceived.
WhenSweepMode=Dmod,themodulationsourcecan
controltheflangerdirectly.Selectthemodulationsource
usingtheSrcparameter.
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthemodulationsource
specifiedfortheSrcparameterissmallerthan64,and
theeffectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.The
EnvelopeGeneratoristriggeredwhenthevalue
changesfrom63orsmallerto64orhigher.
d: EG Attack
d: EG Decay
AttackandDecayspeedaretheonlyadjustableparameterson
thisEG.
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
h: Resonance
i: Wet/Dry
ThepeakshapeofthepositiveandnegativeFeedbackvalue
isdifferent.Theharmonicswillbeemphasizedwhenthe
effectsoundismixedwiththedrysound,ifyouseta
273
positivevalueforbothResonanceandWet/Dry,andifyou
setanegativevalueforbothResonanceandWet/Dry.
Wet / Dry
Resonance
ThismodelsaclassicphaserthatwasborninNewYork
duringthe1970s.Withawarm,richtone,itisalsolovedby
manyelectricpianoplayers.
Phaser
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
Wet / Dry
Color
a
+
Phaser
Right
0.10...10.0
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet / Dry
LFO
Speed [Hz]
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Color
Off, On
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Resonance
0...100
Manual
1...100
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
b: Color
046: U-VIBE
Thisletsyouchoosebetweentwotypesofphasersound.
TurningthisOnproducesadeeperphaseshifteffectwitha
distinctivemodulation.
Thismodelsafamouschorus/vibratopedaleffect.
Simulatingarotaryspeaker,thiseffectproduceda
fascinatinglylushtone.
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
U-VIBE
Mix
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
274
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Mix
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser (Cho/Fln Phaser) 047: St. Random Phaser (Stereo Random Phaser)
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
c: Mix
d: Wet/Dry
TheMixparameterspecifiestheamountofeffectsound
relativetothedirectsound.Asettingof0producesthe
directsound,asettingofabout50produceschorus,anda
settingof100producesavibratoeffect.IfyousettheWet/
DryparametertoWet,thesoundwillbeoutputwiththe
mixbalancespecifiedbyMix.
Manual
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Depth
0...100
Resonance
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Resonance
High Damp
Phaser
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Step-Tri/Random
LFO
Waveform
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
LFO Step
Frequency
[Hz]
0.05...50.00
Amt
50.00...
+50.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Step Base
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
(Step)
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
p.259
p.257
275
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Resonance
High Damp
Phaser
Right
Wet / Dry
D-mod
D -mod
EG Attack/Decay
Sweep Mode
EG
0...100
R Manual
Bottom
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
EG Attack
1...100
L Manual
Bottom
a
p.273
Sets the EG decay speed
EG Decay
1...100
Resonance
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
276
p.273
Sets the resonance amount
p.274
Wet / Dry
Vibrato
TheFadeInRateparameterspecifiestherateoffadein.The
FadeInDelayparameterdeterminesthetimefrom
AutoFademodulationsourceOnuntilthefadeinstarts.
ThefollowingisanexampleoffadeinwheretheLFO
speedisincreasedfrom1.0Hzto4.0Hzwhenanoteon
messageisreceived.
AUTOFADESrc=Gate1,LFOFrequencyMod=AUTOFADE,
LFOFrequency[Hz]=1.0,Amt=3.0
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthedynamic
modulationsourcespecifiedfortheAUTOFADESrc
parameterissmallerthan64,andtheeffectisonwhen
thevalueis64orhigher.TheAutoFadefunctionis
triggeredwhenthevaluechangesfrom63orsmallerto
64orhigher.
Vibrato
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
AutoFade
AUTOFADE
Src
LFO Shape
Fade-In Delay
Off...Tempo
Fade-In Delay
00...2000
[msec]
LFO Frequency
Source=Gate1
LFO Freq. Mod=AUTOFADE
LFO Frequency[Hz]=1.0
Amount=+3.0
Gate1 Signal
Fade-In Rate
1...100
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100
LFO
Frequency
Mod
D-mod,
AUTOFADE
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
LFO Frequency
=1.0Hz
Wet / Dry
Delay
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Off...Tempo
Rate
LFO
Frequency
Mod
100...+100
a: AUTOFADE Src
b: Fade-In Delay [msec]
b: Fade-In Rate
d: LFO Frequency Mod
WhenLFOFrequencyModissettoAUTOFADE,youcan
usethemodulationsourceselectedinAUTOFADESrcasa
LFO Frequency
=1.0+3.0=4.0Hz
Fade-In Rate
Fade-In Dealy
AUTOFADE
x1...x32
Amt
Note On
p.277
Times
Src
AutoFade
AUTOFADE
Feedback
Delay
High Damp
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
LFO Shape
LFO Frequency
AutoFade
Wet / Dry
AUTOFADE
Src
a
Off...Tempo
Fade-In Delay
00...2000
[msec]
1...100
D-mod,
AUTOFADE
D-mod,
Wet/Dry Mod AUTOFADE
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100
277
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Mod. Depth
100...+100
Trim
0...100
Voice1: Pitch
C0...B8
Fine [cent]
50...+50
Level
0...100
Voice1:
Resonance
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Voice2: Pitch
C0...B8
Fine [cent]
50...+50
Level
0...100
Voice2:
Resonance
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
20.00...
+20.00
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
180...+180
L Delay Time
0.0...500.0
[msec]
Amt
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
LFO Type
R Delay Time
0.0...500.0
[msec]
Depth
0...200
Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
p.272
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Resonator
Trim
Level
Pan
Resonator
High Damp
Level
Pan
Right
Wet / Dry
D -mod
Invert: On/Off
Pitch, Fine [cents]
LFO
Control Mode
Manual
278
a: Control Mode
g: Voice 1: Resonance
i: Voice 2: Resonance
Thisparameterdeterminestheresonanceintensity.
WhenControlMode=LFO,theintensityofresonance
variesaccordingtotheLFO.TheLFOswaysbetween
positiveandnegativevalues,causingresonancetooccur
betweenspecifiedpitchesanoctaveapartinturn.
Manual, LFO,
D-mod
LFO/D-mod
Invert
Off, On
WhenControlMode=Dmod,theresonanceiscontrolled
bythedynamicmodulationsource.IfJSXisassignedasthe
modulationsource,thepitchanoctavehigherandlowercan
becontrolled,similartowhenLFOisselectedforControl
Mode.
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
a: LFO/D-mod Invert
D-mod Src
Off...Tempo
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Control
Mode
a
p.278
WhenControlMode=Manual,theResonanceparameter
setstheintensityofresonance.IftheResonanceparameter
hasanegativevalue,harmonicswillbechanged,and
resonancewilloccuratapitchoneoctavelower.
Resonance
Trim
p.278
p.278
WhenControlMode=LFOorDmod,thecontrolledphase
ofeitherVoice1or2willbereversed.Whentheresonance
pitchissetforVoice1(Resonancehasapositivevalue),
Voice2willresonateatapitchanoctavebelow(Resonance
hasanegativevalue).
f: Voice 1: Pitch
f: Fine [cent]
h: Voice 2: Pitch
h: Fine [cent]
ThePitchparameterspecifiesthepitchofresonancebynote
name.TheFineparameterallowsforfineadjustmentin
stepsofcents.
052: Doppler
ThiseffectsimulatestheDopplereffectofamovingsound
withachangingpitch,similartothesirenofanpassing
ambulance.Mixingtheeffectsoundwiththedrysoundwill
createauniquechoruseffect.
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Doppler
Pan Depth
WhenLFOModeissetto1Shot,theDopplereffectis
createdonlyoncewhenthemodulationsourcespecifiedin
theSrcfieldisturnedon.Atthistimeifyoudonotsetthe
Srcparameter,theDopplereffectwillnotbecreated,andno
effectsoundwillbeoutput.
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthemodulationsource
specifiedfortheSrcparameterissmallerthan64,and
theeffectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.The
Dopplereffectistriggeredwhenthevaluechanges
from63orsmallerto64orhigher.
f: Pitch Depth
Wet / Dry
LFO
Trigger
TheLFOModeparameterswitchesLFOoperationmode.
WhenLoopisselected,theDopplereffectwillbecreated
repeatedly.IfLFOSyncissettoOn,theLFOwillbereset
whenthemodulationsourcespecifiedwiththeSrc
parameteristurnedon.
Wet / Dry
Right
D -mod
a: LFO Mode
a: Src
b: LFO Sync
WiththeDopplereffect,thepitchisraisedwhenthesound
approaches,andthepitchisloweredwhenthesoundgoes
away.Thisparametersetsthispitchvariation.
g: Pan Depth
LFO Mode
Loop, 1-Shot
Src
Off...Tempo
LFO Sync
Off, On
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
Higher
Pan Depth
= () value
Pitch Depth
Original Pitch
Lower
Thisparametersetsthewidthofthestereoimageofthe
effectsound.Withlargervalues,thesoundseemstocome
andgofrommuchfurtheraway.Withpositivevalues,the
soundmovesfromlefttoright;withnegativevalues,the
soundmovesfromrighttoleft.
Center
Left
Right
Pan Depth
<
<
>
>
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Pitch Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Pan Depth
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Scratch
Source
Off...Tempo
Src
Off...Tempo
Response
0...100
Amt
100...+100
Envelope
Select
Src
Off...Tempo
Louder
Volume
Louder
053: Scratch
Thiseffectisappliedbyrecordingtheinputsignaland
movingthemodulationsource.Itsimulatesthesoundof
scratchesyoucanmakeusingaturntable.
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
Scratch
Rec Control
Direct
Mix
Scratch
Right
D-mod
Envelope Control
Input
Envelope Select
Wet / Dry
D -mod
D -mod
279
d
e
f
0...100
Response
0...100
Direct Mix
Always On,
Always Off,
Cross Fade
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Threshold
Grain Shifter
Sample Cycle
a: Scratch Source
b: Response
Right
Wet / Dry
TheScratchSourceparameterenablesyoutoselectthe
modulationsourcethatcontrolssimulation.Thevalueofthe
modulationsourcecorrespondstotheplaybackposition.
TheResponseparameterenablesyoutosetthespeedofthe
responsetothemodulationsource.
LFO
D -mod
Trigger
Duration
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Scratch Source
Start
Playback Position
End
Recorded Sound
b
Scratch Source
-mod
JS X
JS+Y
JSY
etc
Scratch!
Max
Zero
Zero
+ Max
+ Max
c: Envelope Select
c: Src
d: Threshold
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoDmod,theinputsignalwill
berecordedonlywhenthemodulationsourcevalueis64or
higher.
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoInput,theinputsignalwill
berecordedonlywhenitslevelisovertheThresholdvalue.
Themaximumrecordingtimeis2,730msec.Ifthisis
exceeded,therecordeddatawillstartbeingerasedfromthe
top.
e: Response
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthespeedoftheresponse
totheendofrecording.Setasmallervaluewhenyouare
recordingaphraseorrhythmpattern,andsetahighervalue
ifyouarerecordingonlyonenote.
f: Direct Mix
WithAlwaysOn,adrysoundisusuallyoutput.With
AlwaysOff,drysoundsarenotoutput.WithCrossFade,a
drysoundisusuallyoutput,anditismutedonlywhen
scratching.
SetWet/DrytoWettousethisparametereffectively.
LFO Sample
Cycle [Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Duration
c: LFO Sample Cycle [Hz]
Durationsetsthelengthofthesampledgrain,andtheLFO
SampleCyclecontrolshowoftenanewgrainissampled.In
betweenSampleCycles,thecurrentgrainisrepeated
continuously.
Sample Cycle / Duration
Sample Cycle
Duration
In
Out
280
paneffectinwhichthesoundispannedbetweenleftand
right.
Wet / Dry
Tremolo
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
Tremolo
Tremolo
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage/Up/Down
Tremolo
LFO Shape
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
Waveform
Triangle, Sine,
Vintage, Up, Selects the LFO Waveform p.281
Down
LFO Shape
100...+100
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Spread
LFO
Speed [Hz]
0.10...10.0
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Spread
0...100
Level Adjust
1...100
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet / Dry
Tremolo
a: LFO Waveform
ThisparametersetsthebasicshapeoftheLFO.TheVintage
waveformmodelsclassicguitaramptremolo.
Tremolo
Right
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage
+
Triangle
Sine
Vintage
Up
Envelope
Down
Wet / Dry
LFO Shape
Envelope Shape
Envelope Sens
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Envelope
Shape
100...+100
LFO
Waveform
Triangle, Sine,
Selects the LFO Waveform
Vintage
LFO Shape
100...+100
281
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Envelope
20.00...
Amount [Hz] +20.00
Envelope
Amount
0...100
100...+100
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Thegraphicbelowshowsanexampleoftremolo
modulationwithnegativemodulationofbothDepthand
Frequency.Atthestartofthenote,theinputisatmaximum
volume.ThisslowsdowntheLFOFrequencyto1.0Hz,but
alsomodulatestheDepthto0sothetremolodoesnthave
anyeffect.
Astheinputvolumediesdown,theFrequencyspeedsup;
theDepthalsoincreases,makingthetremoloeffect
increasinglyaudible.Whentheinputvolumeapproaches
silence,theDepthisatitsmaximum(100)andFrequencyis
at8Hz.
Shimmer
Level
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
p.282
Wet/Dry
Amt
0.02...20.00
p.282
Depth
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Louder
Dry Envelope
LFO Frequency[Hz]=8.0
Envelope Amount[Hz]= 7.0Hz
Depth=100
Envelope Amount= 100
Time
a: LFO Shape
YoucanchangethepanningcurvebymodifyingtheLFOs
Shape.
Thisisastereoin,stereooutautopanner.ThePhaseand
Shapeparametersletsyoucreatevariouspanningeffects,
suchasmakingtheleftandrightinputsseemtochaseeach
otheraroundthestereofield.
L-In
L-In
R-In
R-In
R-In
R-In
R-In
R-In
L-In
L-In
L-In
L-In
L-In
L-In
R-In
R-In
R-In
R-In
Left
Pan
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
282
L-In
L-In
Depth
R-In
R-In
R-In
Pan
LFO Shape
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
L-In
L-In
L-In
Left
Right
Center
Output Stereo Image
R-In
L-In
R-In
Modulation and Pitch Shift (Mod./P.Shift) 059: St. Phaser + Trml (Stereo Phaser + Tremolo)
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Tremolo
Phaser Wet / Dry
Resonance
Phaser Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Type
LFO
LFO Shape
LFO Phase
Type
Phaser Tremolo,
...
Phaser LR Tremolo LR
LFO Phase
[degree]
180...+180
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
BPM
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Type
a: LFO Phase [degree]
SelectthetypeofphaserLFOandtremoloLFOfortheType
parameter.Howtheeffectsoundmovesorrotatesdepends
onthetypeofLFO.SelectingLFOPhaseenablesyouto
offsetthetimingofthephaserpeakandcontrolasubtle
movementandrotationofthesound.
g: Phaser Wet/Dry
j: Wet/Dry
Tremolo
Phaser
Wet/Dry
PHASERWet/Drysetsthebalancebetweenthephaser
outputandthedrysound.OUTPUTWet/Drysetsthe
balancebetweenthefinalphaserandtremolooutputlevel
andthedrysound.
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
Ring Modulator
Direct Mix
Pre LPF
Ring Modulator
Right
Wet / Dry
Fixed
Fixed Frequency
Sine Oscillator
Pitch
OSC Mode
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Phaser
Manual
0...100
Resonance
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Phaser Wet/
Dry
Wet, 2 :
98...Dry... 2 :
98, Wet
Tremolo
Shape
100...+100
Tremolo
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Note No.
OSC Mode
Fixed, Note
(Key Follow)
Pre LPF
0...100
Fixed
Frequency
[Hz]
0...12.00k
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
12.00k...
+12.00k
Note Offset
48...+48
Note Fine
100...+100
Direct Mix
0...100
283
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
d
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
LFO Depth
0...100
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Src
a: OSC Mode
Thisparameterdetermineswhetherornottheoscillator
frequencyfollowsthenotenumber.
a: Pre LPF
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthedampingamountof
thehighrangesoundinputtotheringmodulator.Ifthe
inputsoundcontainslotsofharmonics,theeffectmay
sounddirty.Inthiscase,cutacertainamountofhighrange.
061: Detune
Usingthiseffect,youcanobtainadetuneeffectthatoffsets
thepitchoftheeffectsoundslightlyfromthepitchofthe
inputsignal.Comparedtothechoruseffect,amorenatural
soundthicknesswillbecreated.
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
Input Level
High Damp
Detune
Delay
Feedback
Input Level
Right
Wet / Dry
b
c
Pitch Shift
[cent]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Delay Time
[msec]
0...1000
Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Input Level
Input Level
x1.0
x1.0
ThisparametersetstheoscillatorfrequencywhenOSC
ModeissettoFixed.
TheseparametersfortheoscillatorareusedwhenOSC
ModeissettoNote(KeyFollow).TheNoteOffsetsetsthe
pitchdifferencefromtheoriginalnoteinsemitonesteps.
TheNoteFineparameterfineadjuststhepitchincentsteps.
Matchingtheoscillatorfrequencywiththenotenumber
producesaringmodulationeffectinthecorrectkey.
284
x0.5
x0.5
D -mod
Higher
Zero
Louder
c: Note Offset
c: Note Fine
Max
D -mod
Higher
Zero
Max
willberaised(orlowered)moreandmoreeachtime
feedbackisrepeated.
IfFeedbackPositionissettoPost,thefeedbacksignalwill
notpassthroughthepitchshifteragain.Evenifyouspecify
ahighervaluefortheFeedbackparameter,thepitchshifted
soundwillberepeatedatthesamepitch.
Wet / Dry
Thispitchshifterenablesyoutosetthedelaytimetomatch
thesongtempo.
Input Level
High Damp
Pitch Shifter
Delay
Pre
Post
Feedback Position
Input Level
Feedback
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level
High Damp
Mode
Slow,
Switches Pitch Shifter mode
Medium, Fast
p.285
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
24...+24
Fine [cent]
100...+100
Amt
100...+100
Delay Time
[msec]
0...2000
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post
Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
Pitch Shifter
Delay
Pre
Post
Feedback Position
Input Level
Feedback
Right
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Mode
Slow,
Switches Pitch Shifter mode
Medium, Fast
p.285
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
24...+24
Fine [cent]
100...+100
Amt
100...+100
100...+100
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Time Over?
---, OVER!
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Off...Tempo
Delay Base
Note
...
Src
x1...x32
100...+100
Times
Amt
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post
Feedback
100...+100
p.285
a: Mode
Thisparameterswitchesthepitchshifteroperatingmode.
WithSlow,tonalqualitywillnotbechangedtoomuch.With
Fast,theeffectbecomesaPitchShifterthathasaquick
response,butmaychangethetone.Mediumisinbetween
thesetwo.Ifyoudonotneedtosettoomuchpitchshift
amount,setthisparametertoSlow.Ifyouwishtochange
thepitchsignificantly,useFast.
e: Feedback Position
f: Feedback
WhenFeedbackPositionissettoPre,thepitchshifter
outputisagaininputtothepitchshifter.Therefore,ifyou
specifyahighervaluefortheFeedbackparameter,thepitch
p.285
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
d: BPM
e: Delay Base Note
e: Times
ThedelaytimeisthedurationofTimesnumberofDelay
BaseNotenotevaluesattheBPMtempo(orifBPMissetto
MIDI,thetempodeterminedbyMIDIClock).
d: Time Over?
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto5,290msec.Ifthedelaytime
exceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearson
thedisplay.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthis
messagewillnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplay
parameter.
285
g: Pan
h: Wet/Dry
Wet / Dry
ThePanparameterpanstheeffectsoundanddrysoundto
theleftandright.WithL,theeffectsoundispannedleft,and
thedrysoundispannedright.WithaWet/Dry=Wetsetting,
theeffectanddrysoundwillbeoutputinaproportionof
1:1.
Pitch Shifter
Pan
Right
Wet / Dry
Left
Wet / Dry
Pitch Shift
[cent]
100...+100
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Square
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
180...+180
Depth
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Pan
L, 1 : 99...99 :
1, R
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Vibrato/Chorus
Preset Setting
Custom Parameters
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
Amt
Higher
Pitch
LFO Waveform=Triangle
Depth (+value)
Pitch Shift (+ value)
Lower
Original Pitch
LFO Waveform=Square
Depth (value)
Mode
Right
Wet / Dry
Input Trim
0...100
Control
Mode
Preset,
Custom
Preset Type
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
5...+5
Custom Mix
Vibrato,
1:99...99:1,
Chorus
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Custom
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Custom
Speed [Hz]
0.02...20.00
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...
+20.00
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Theseparameterssettheamountofpitchshiftandamount
ofmodulationbymeansoftheLFO.
286
p.286
p.286
b: Control Mode
c: Preset Type
d: Custom Mix
e: Custom Depth
f: Custom Speed [Hz]
IfControlMode=Preset,youcanusec:PresetTypetoselect
theeffect.Inthiscase,theCustomMix/Depth/Speedsettings
areignored.IfControlMode=Custom,theCustomMix/
Depth/Speedsettingsarevalid,andthec:PresetType
settingisignored.
c: Amt
IfPresetType=V1andSrc=JS+Y,youcansetthisto+5and
moveJS+Ytocontroltheeffectintheorderof
V1C1V2C2V3C3.
Thiseffectsimulatesarotaryspeaker,andobtainsamore
realisticsoundbysimulatingtherotorinthelowrangeand
thehorninthehighrangeseparately.Theeffectalso
simulatesthestereomicrophonesettings.
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
Horn
Rotary Speaker
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Speaker Simulation
Wet / Dry
Mode Switch: Rotate/Stop
Speed Switch: Slow/Fast
Manual Speed Control
Src
Off...Tempo
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Ifyouwishtocontroltherotationspeedmanually,instead
ofswitchingbetweenSlowandFast,selectamodulation
sourceintheManualSpeedCtrlparameter.Ifyoudont
wanttousemanualcontrol,setthistoOff.
d: Horn Acceleration
e: Rotor Acceleration
Onarealrotaryspeaker,therotationspeedacceleratesor
deceleratesgraduallyafteryouswitchthespeed.TheHorn
andRotorAccelerationparameterssetthetransitiontimes
betweenfastandslowspeeds.
g: Mic Distance
g: Mic Spread
Src
Off...Tempo
Thisisasimulationofstereomicrophonesettings.
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Off...Tempo
Horn
Acceleration
0...100
Horn Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Rotor
Acceleration
0...100
Rotor Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Rotor, 1...99,
Horn
Manual
Speed Ctrl
Mic Spread
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
WhenSw=Moment,thespeedisusuallyslow.Itbecomes
fastonlywhenyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.Via
MIDI,modulationvaluesabove64setthespeedtoFast,and
valuesbelow64setittoSlow.
WhenSw=Toggle,thespeedwillswitchbetweenslowand
fasteachtimeyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.Via
MIDI,thespeedwillswitcheachtimethemodulation
amountexceeds64.
Right
Thisparametercontrolshowtherotationspeed(slowand
fast)isswitchedviathemodulationsource.
Mic Distance
Mic Spread
Rotor
D -mod
D -mod
D -mod
WhenSw=Moment,thespeakerrotatesbydefault,and
stopsonlywhenyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.
ViaMIDI,modulationvaluesabove64makethespeaker
rotate,andvaluesbelow64makeitstop.
b: Speed Switch
WhenSw=Toggle,thespeakerrotatesorstopsalternately
eachtimeyoupressthepedalormovethejoystick.Via
MIDI,rotationwillswitchbetweenstartandstopeachtime
themodulationamountexceeds64.
Microphone
Mic Distance
Microphone
Mic Distance
a: Sw
Thisparametersetshowthemodulationsourceswitches
betweenrotationandstop.
287
0100
b Treble
10.0+10.0
10.0+10.0
Volume
Bass
Src
Off...Tempo
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Vibrato
Intensity
1...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Vibrato
Speed
00.0100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Off...Tempo
100...+100
g Src
Amt
d: Sw
WhenthisissettoToggle,theVibratoSwitchwillalternate
betweenonandoff.Forinstance,ifvibratoisoff,andSrcis
assignedtoafootswitch,thefirstpresswillturnonthe
Vibrato,andthenextpresswillturnitoffagain.
Momentarymeansthatthechangehappensonlywhilethe
controllerisenabled.Continuingtheexamplefromabove,
whenthefootswitchispresseddown,theVibratowillturn
on;whenthefootswitchisreleased,theVibratowillturnoff
again.
Srcletsyouswitchtotheoppositeoftheprogrammed
setting.Forinstance,ifvibratoison,andtheSwissetto
Moment,thenpressingdownonthefootswitchwouldturn
offtheVibrato.
Ifyousetmodulationsourcetouseacontinuouscontroller,
suchastheJoystick,valuesof063areasiftheswitchwas
off,andvaluesof64127areasiftheswitchwason.
Finallynotethattheassignableswitches,SW1andSW2,
canthemselvesbesettoeithermomentortogglemodes,
andthesesettingsarereflectedbytheswitchLEDs.
Individualparametersettings,suchasthevibratoon/offand
Sw,donotaffecttheLEDs.
So,ifyoureusingSW1orSW2asthemodulationsource,its
besttosettheSwtoMoment,andthenjustlettheswitch
itselfdeterminethemomentary/togglebehavior.
288
Delay
068: L/C/R Delay
069: Stereo/CrossDelay
ThismultitapdelayoutputsthreeTapsignalstotheleft,
right,andcenterrespectively.Youcanalsoadjusttheleft
andrightspreadofthedelaysound.
Thisisastereodelay,andcanbyusedasacrossfeedback
delayeffectinwhichthedelaysoundscrossoverbetween
theleftandrightbychangingthefeedbackrouting.
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Level
C Delay
Stereo/Cross
Delay
R Delay
Level
Spread
Low Damp
Stereo/Cross
Right
Wet / Dry
L Delay Time
0...2730
[msec]
Stereo/Cross
Level
L Feedback
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt L
100...+100
R Feedback
100...+100
Amt R
100...+100
0...50
C Delay Time
0...2730
[msec]
Level
0...50
Stereo, Cross
R Delay Time
0...2730
[msec]
Level
0...50
Feedback
(C Delay)
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Src
Off...Tempo
Spread
50...+50
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Spread
0...50
High Damp
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Level
Right
Low Damp
Delay
Spread
Feedback
Input Level D-mod
Wet / Dry
High Damp
L Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Amt
p.289
g: Spread
Thisparametersetsthepanwidthoftheeffectsound.The
stereoimageiswidestwithavalueof50,andtheeffect
soundofbothchannelsisoutputfromthecenterwitha
valueof0.
289
TheleftandrightMultitapDelayshavetwotaps
respectively.Changingtheroutingoffeedbackandtap
outputallowsyoutocreatevariouspatternsofcomplex
effectsounds.
ThisstereodelayusesanLFOtosweepthedelaytime.The
pitchalsovaries,creatingadelaysoundwhichswellsand
shimmers.Youcanalsocontrolthedelaytimeusinga
modulationsource.
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Delay
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
Delay
(2)
Mode
(1)
Delay
Tap1=(1)
Tap2=(2)
Spread
Delay
Feedback
Right
Feedback
(2)
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
D
a
Mode
Normal, Cross
Feedback,
Switches the left and right delay
Cross Pan1,
routing
p.290
Cross Pan2
Tap1 Time
[msec]
0.0...1360.0
Tap2 Time
[msec]
0.0...1360.0
Tap1 Level
0...100
Feedback
(Tap2)
100...+100
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Src
Amt
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Spread
100...+100
LFO Sync
Response
LFO: Tri / Sine
L/R: +/+ +/
LFO Shape
Modulation Mode
LFO, D-mod
D-mod
Modulation
L/R:+/+,
L/R:+/
Src
Off...Tempo
Response
0...30
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100
LFO D-mod
Sync
Off, On
Src
Off...Tempo
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
p.291
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Times
x1...x32
Src
Off...Tempo
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Amt
100...+100
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
L LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
L Depth
0...200
R LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
R Depth
0...200
Mode: Normal
a: Mode
Youcanchangehowtheleftandrightdelaysignalsare
pannedbymodifyingtheroutingoftheleftandrightdelay
asshowninthefigureabove.Youneedtoinputdifferent
soundstoeachchannelinorderforthisparametertobe
effective.
d: Tap1 Level
ThisparametersetstheoutputlevelofTap1.Settinga
differentlevelfromTap2willaddauniquetouchtoa
monotonousdelayandfeedback.
290
LFO
Modulation
Mode
p.289
i
D-mod
LFO Phase
p.290
-mod
L Feedback
100...+100
R Feedback
100...+100
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
l
b: D-mod Modulation
Whenthemodulationsourceisusedforcontrol,this
parameterreversestheleftandrightmodulationdirection.
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Feedback
Delay
Right
FB
TheSrcparametersetsthemodulationsourcethatresetsthe
LFO.Forexample,youcanassignGateasamodulation
sourcesothatthesweepalwaysstartsfromthespecified
point.
LLFOPhaseandRLFOPhasesetthephaseobtainedwhen
theleftandrightLFOsarereset.Inthisway,youcancreate
changesinpitchsweepfortheleftandrightchannels
individually.
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueofthemodulationsource
specifiedintheSrcparameteris63orsmaller,andthe
effectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.TheLFOis
triggeredandresettotheLLFOPhaseandRLFO
Phasesettingswhenthevaluechangesfrom63or
smallerto64orhigher.
Spread
Wet / Dry
Out
Attack, Release
Envelope
Control Target
Threshold
Control
Target
Polarity
+,
Threshold
0...100
Offset
0...100
Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
L Delay Time
0.0...1360.0
[msec]
Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Spread
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
p.291
a: Control Target
Thisparameterselectsnolevelcontrol,delayoutputcontrol
(effectbalance),orfeedbackamountcontrol.
a: Polarity
b: Threshold
b: Offset
c: Attack
d: Release
TheOffsetparameterspecifiesthevaluefortheControl
Targetparameter(thatissettoNone),expressedastheratio
relativetotheparametervalue(theWet/Dryvaluewith
ControlTarget=OutputLevel,ortheFeedbackvaluewith
ControlTarget=Feedback).
WhenPolarityispositive,theControlTargetvalueis
obtainedbymultiplyingtheparametervaluebytheOffset
value(iftheinputlevelisbelowthethreshold),orequalsthe
parametervalueiftheinputlevelexceedsthethreshold.
WhenPolarityisnegative,ControlTargetvalueequalsthe
parametervalueiftheinputlevelisbelowthethreshold,or
isobtainedbymultiplyingtheparametervaluebythe
Offsetvalueifthelevelexceedsthethreshold.
291
TheAttackandReleaseparametersspecifyattacktimeand
releasetimeofdelaylevelcontrol.
Dynamic Delay
Level
Thisstereodelayeffectpansthedelaysoundleftandright
usingtheLFO.
Dry
Threshold
Envelope
Release
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Attack
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Pan
Delay
Wet
(Ducking Delay)
Depth
Feedback
Target=Output Level
Polarity= ()
Pan
Delay
Delay Time
Wet
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
Target=Output Level
Polarity= (+)
LFO Shape
Time
L Feedback
R Delay Time
0.0...1360.0
[msec]
R Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100
Phase
[degree]
180...+180
Panning
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Panning
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
292
100...+100
Thismodelsafamousanalogtapeechounit.Ontheoriginal
device,echowascreatedbyaplaybackhead,andthe
delaytimewasspecifiedbyadjustingthespeedofthe
motor.Thewarmthandsubtletyoftheechoesitgenerated
madethislofiunitafavoritewithmanypromusicians.
Tap2 Level
0...100
Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
Amt
100...+100
Tap3 Level
0...100
Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
Amt
100...+100
Feedback
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Wet / Dry
Input Level
D-mod
Tone
Delay
h
Feedback
Right
Wet / Dry
i
j
Time [ms]
0...2700
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Feedback
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Tone
1...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Input Level
Mod Src
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Amt
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Saturation
0...100
Input Trim
0...100
Pre Tone
Low Damp
0...100
Wow Flutter
[Hz]
0.02...1.00
Wow Flutter
depth
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
d: Feedback Amt
e: Feedback Amt
f: Feedback Amt
g: Feedback
ThefeedbackoutputfromTap1,2,and3ismixedaccording
totheFeedbackAmt,andthenthefinalamountoffeedback
isspecifiedbyFeedback.
Left
Wet / Dry
(3)
Feedback
(2)
Feedback Amt
Tape
Saturation
Trim Pre Tone
(1)
Level
Pan
Delay
Thiseffectrecordstheinputsignalandautomaticallyplays
itinreverse(theeffectissimilartoatapereversesound).
Tap2/3
Position
Right
D-mod
Wet / Dry
Delay Time
Delay (Tap1)
[msec]
0...2700
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
2700...
+2700
p.293
Tap2 Position
0...100
[%]
Wet / Dry
Tap1 Level
0...100
Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
Amt
100...+100
Auto Reverse
Direct
Mix
Rec/Reverse Play
Control
Right
D -mod
Wet / Dry
D-mod
Input
Envelope Control
Envelope Select
Rec Mode
Single, Multi
293
Envelope
Select
D-mod, Input
Src
Off...Tempo
Threshold
0...100
Response
0...100
Direct Mix
Always On,
Always Off,
Cross Fade
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet / Dry
Pan
Input Level D-mod
Delay
High Damp Low Damp
Feedback
Input Level D-mod
Right
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
a: Rec Mode
b: Reverse Time [msec]
Rythm Pattern
WhenRecModeissettoSingle,youcansetupto2,640msec
forReverseTime.Ifrecordingstartsduringthereverse
playback,theplaybackwillbeinterrupted.
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
WhenRecModeissettoMulti,youcanmakeanother
recordingduringthereverseplayback.However,the
maximumReverseTimeislimitedto1,320msec.
Rhythm
Pattern
3
...
Tap1 Pan
L, 1...99, R
Tap2 Pan
L, 1...99, R
Ifyouwishtorecordaphraseorrhythmpattern,setRec
ModetoSingle.Ifyourecordonlyonenote,setRecModeto
Multi.
Tap3 Pan
L, 1...99, R
Tap4 Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
TheReverseTimeparameterspecifiesthemaximum
durationofthereverseplayback.Thepartinexcessofthis
limitwillnotbeplayedinreverse.Ifyouwishtoaddshort
piecesofthereverseplaybackofsinglenotes,makethe
ReverseTimeshorter.
Mode/Reverse Time
Rec
Reverse Rec
Reverse
f
Input
Time
Mode = Single
Mode = Multi
a: BPM
b: Rhythm Pattern
Reverse Time
Reverse Time
c: Envelope Select
c: Src
d: Threshold
Theseparametersselectthesourcetocontrolthestartand
endofrecording.
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoDmod,theinputsignalwill
berecordedonlywhenthevalueofthemodulationsource
selectedbytheSrcparameteris64orhigher.
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoInput,theinputsignalwill
berecordedonlywhenitslevelexceedstheThresholdlevel.
Whenrecordingiscompleted,reverseplaybackstarts
immediately.
294
p.294
WiththetempospecifiedbytheBPMparameter(orthe
MIDIClocktempoifBPMissettoMIDI),thelengthofone
beatequalsthefeedbackdelaytime,andtheinterval
betweentapsbecomesequal.Selectingarhythmpatternwill
automaticallyturnthetapoutputsonandoff.WhenBPMis
settoMIDI,thelowerlimitoftheBPMis44.
TheL/C/Rdelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytimewith
thesongtempo.Youcanalsosynchronizethedelaytime
withthearpeggiatororsequencer.Ifyouprogramthetempo
beforeperformance,youcanachieveadelayeffectthat
synchronizeswiththesonginrealtime.Delaytimeissetby
notes.
Thisstereodelayenablesyoutosetthedelaytimetomatch
thesongtempo.
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Input Level D-mod
Feedback
Left
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Right
Level
Delay
L Delay
C Delay
Spread
BPM
BPM
Feedback
Input Level D-mod
Wet / Dry
Tempo
Level
R Delay
Adjust [%]
Adjust [%]
Level
Right
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
a
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
---, OVER!
Time Over?
---, OVER!
L Delay Base
Note
...
L Delay Base
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Times
x1...x32
Adjust [%]
2.50...+2.50
Level
0...50
...
C Delay Base
Note
...
R Delay Base
Note
Times
x1...x32
Times
x1...x32
Adjust [%]
2.50...+2.50
Level
0...50
L Feedback
100...+100
...
Src
Off...Tempo
Times
x1...x32
Amt L
100...+100
Level
0...50
R Feedback
100...+100
Amt R
100...+100
R Delay Base
Note
d
Feedback
(C Delay)
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Amt
100...+100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Spread
0...50
p.289
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
a: Time Over? L, R
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto2,730msec.Ifthedelaytime
exceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearsinthe
display.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthismessage
willnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplayparameter.
a: Time Over?
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto5,460msec.Ifthedelaytime
exceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearsinthe
display.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthismessage
willnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplayparameter.
295
Thisisastereomultitappeddelaythatletsyousetthedelay
timetomatchthetempoofthesong.
Thisisastereomodulationdelaythatletsyousynchronize
thedelaytimetothetempoofthesong.
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Delay
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
Delay
(2)
Mode
(1)
Delay
Tap1=(1)
Tap2=(2)
Spread
Delay
Feedback
Right
Feedback
(2)
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Tempo
Tempo
BPM
BPM
BPM
BPM
D
a
Mode
Normal, Cross
Feedback,
Switches the left and right delay
Cross Pan1,
routing
p.290
Cross Pan2
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
---, OVER!
Tap 1 Base
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Tap 2 Base
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Tap1 Level
0...100
Feedback
(Tap2)
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Spread
Src
Amt
296
-mod
LFO Sync
Response
L/R: +/+ +/
LFO Shape
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
LFO
Modulation Mode
Modulation
Mode
LFO, D-mod
D-mod
Modulation
L/R:+/+,
L/R:+/
Src
Off...Tempo
Response
0...30
LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape
100...+100
LFO D-mod
Sync
Off, On
p.291
Src
Off...Tempo
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
L LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
Depth
0...200
R LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
Depth
0...200
BPM(Delay)
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
p.290
Off...Tempo
D-mod
LFO Phase
p.289
i
---, OVER!
...
x1...x32
100...+100
...
Times
x1...x32
Feedback
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Off...Tempo
100...+100
L Delay Base
Note
k
Times
Feedback
R Delay Base
Note
Src
Amt
Shape
100...+100
LFO Phase
180...+180
Panning
Frequen0.02...20.00
cyuency [Hz]
MIDI Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Base Note
...
Times
x1...x32
LFO Type
Individual,
Common1,
Common2
Common
LFO Offset
[deg]
180...+180
Panning
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
j: Time Over? L, R
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto2,550msec.Ifthedelaytime
exceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearsinthe
display.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthismessage
willnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplayparameter.
LFO
Waveform
Thisstereoautopanningdelayenablesyoutosetthedelay
timetomatchthesongtempo.
p.257
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Pan
Delay
Depth
Feedback
Thisisatapeechothatletsyousynchronizethedelaytime
tothetempoofthesong.
Pan
Delay
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Wet / Dry
(3)
Feedback
LFO Phase
(2)
LFO Shape
(1)
Feedback Amt
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
---, OVER!
L Delay Base
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Feedback
100...+100
R Delay Base
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Tape
Saturation
Tempo
BPM
Base Note x Times
Pan
Right
Level
Delay
Delay Time
Tap2/3 Position
Wet / Dry
BPM
D -mod
BPM (Delay)
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Tap1 Dmod
Src
Off...Tempo
Tap1 Delay
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Time Over?
---, OVER!
Tap1 Dmod
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
297
Tap2 Position
0...100
[%]
j
k
l
Tap1 Level
0...100
Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
Amt
100...+100
Tap2 Level
0...100
Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
Amt
100...+100
Tap3 Level
0...100
Pan
L, 1...99, R
Feedback
Amt
100...+100
Feedback
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Saturation
0...100
Input Trim
0...100
Pre Tone
0...100
Wow Flutter
[Hz]
0.02...1.00
Wow Flutter
depth
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
b: Time Over?
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto5,400msec.Ifthedelaytime
exceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearsinthe
display.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthismessage
willnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplayparameter.
298
Level
Reverb
Louder
Thishalltypereverbsimulatesthereverberationofmidsize
concerthallsorensemblehalls.
Dry
Pre Delay
Reverb Time
Thishalltypereverbsimulatesthereverberationoflarger
hallsandstadiums,andcreatesasmoothrelease.
Thisroomtypereverbemphasizestheearlyreflectionsthat
makethesoundtighter.Changingthebalancebetweenthe
earlyreflectionsandreverbsoundallowsyoutosimulate
nuances,suchasthetypeofwallsofaroom.
Thisplatereverbsimulatesdry(light)reverberation.
Thisroomtypereverbemphasizestheearlyreflectionsthat
makethesoundbrighter.
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ
Left
Wet / Dry
HEQ
Pre Delay
ER Level
Reverb
ERs
EQ Trim
LEQ
HEQ
EQ Trim
Pre Delay
Reverb
Reverb Level
Right
Wet / Dry
ERs
EQ Trim
ER Level
Right
b
c
Wet / Dry
Reverb Time
[sec]
0.1...10.0
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
Pre Delay
Thru [%]
0...100
Reverb Time
[sec]
0.1...3.0
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
Pre Delay
Thru [%]
0...100
0...100
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
ER Level
0...100
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
Reverb Level
0...100
EQ Trim
0...100
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
EQ Trim
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
c: ER Level
d: Reverb Level
Theseparameterssettheearlyreflectionlevelandreverb
level.
299
Changingtheseparametervaluesallowsyoutosimulatethe
typeofwallsintheroom.Thatis,alargerERLevel
simulatesahardwall,andalargerReverbLevelsimulatesa
softwall.
Time
Inthesereverbs,Timeisnotexpressedinseconds,but
insteadisavaluefrom1to100.Avalueof1producesthe
shortestreverb,and100providesthelongestreverb.
ER
(Early Reflections)
Louder
Level
Thiseffectisonlytheearlyreflectionpartofareverberation
sound,andaddspresencetothesound.Youcanselectone
ofthefourdecaycurves.
Time
Pre Delay Thru
Pre Delay
Reverb Time
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ
Pre Delay
Thismodelsatypeofreverbunitthatvibratesametalplate
ratherthansprings.Thereverbtimeisrelativelyshort.
Becausethereverberationhasafastattack,itissuitablefor
percussiveplaying.
EQ Trim
Wet / Dry
Type
Sharp, Loose,
Selects the decay curve for the
Modulated,
early reflection
p.300
Reverse
ER Time
[msec]
10...800
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
EQ Trim
0...100
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
Early Reflections
Right
Left
HEQ
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Type
Thisparameterselectsthedecaycurvefortheearly
reflection.
Wet / Dry
Pre Delay
Reverb
Sharp
Right
Wet / Dry
Loose
Time [sec]
0...100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...70
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
300
Modulated
Reverse
Dry
Pre Delay
ER Time
Thiseffectcombinesamonofourbandparametricequalizer
andanexciter.
Thiseffectcombinesamonofourbandparametricequalizer
andawah.Youcanchangetheorderoftheconnection.
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wah/Auto Wah
Exciter
Wah
Trim
Trim
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope
D
P4EQ
a
[E]Trim
0...100
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
0.5...10.0
Sweep Mode
Wet / Dry
Auto
D-mod
LFO
LFO
P4EQ
0...100
Routing
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
0.5...10.0
[E]Trim
18...+18
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
0.5...10.0
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
EXCITER
f
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
-mod
Gain [dB]
d Q
Wet / Dry
Routing
Parametric 4Band EQ
Exciter
WAH
f
[W]Frequenc 0...100
y Bottom
Frequency
Top
0...100
[W]Sweep
Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
Src
Off...Tempo
[W]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Resonance
0...100
LPF
Off, On
[W]Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
301
Thiseffectcombinesamonofourbandparametricequalizer
andachorus/flanger.
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Chorus/Flanger
Phaser
Trim
Resonance
Chorus/Flanger
Trim
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
+
Feedback
Right
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
P4EQ
a
P4EQ
a
[E]Trim
0...100
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
LFO
Waveform
[P]Manual
0...100
Depth
0...100
[F]Delay Time
0.0...1350.0
[msec]
Depth
0...100
Resonance
100...+100
Feedback
100...+100
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Amt
100...+100
[P]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Amt
100...+100
p.272
i: [F]Output Mode
WhenWetInvertisselected,therightchannelphaseofthe
chorus/flangereffectsoundisinverted.Thiscreatespseudo
stereoeffectsandaddsspread.
However,ifamonoinputtypeeffectisconnectedafterthis
effect,theleftandrightsoundsmaycanceleachother,
eliminatingthechorus/flangereffects.
302
0...100
PHASER
CHORUS/FLANGER
[E]Trim
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 099: P4EQ - Mt. Delay (Parametric 4-Band EQ - Multitap Delay)
Thiseffectcombinesamonofourbandparametricequalizer
andamultitapdelay.
Wet / Dry
Routing
Compressor
Wah/Auto Wah
Left
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Multitap Delay
Comp
Wah
Wet / Dry
Output Level
Feedback
Delay
High Damp (1)
Trim
(2)
Right
Envelope - Control
Sweep Mode
Envelope
Auto
D-mod
-mod
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
Wet / Dry
LFO
P4EQ
a
20...1.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
b
50...5.00k
0.5...10.0
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
d Q
Gain [dB]
a
b
c
18...+18
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
Gain [dB]
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251
p.251
[C]EQ Trim
0...100
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
18...+18
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
[W]Frequenc
0...100
y Bottom
Frequency
Top
0...100
[w]Sweep
Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Src
Off...Tempo
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[W]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Resonance
0...100
LPF
Off, On
[W]Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Routing
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
[D]Tap1 Time
0.0...1360.0
[msec]
Tap1 Level
1...100
WAH
MULTITAP DELAY
f
[C]
Sensitivity
18...+18
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
e
COMPRESSOR
0...100
[E]Trim
0...100
Feedback
(Tap2)
100...+100
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
303
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandanamp
simulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandanoverdrive/
highgaindistortion.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Compressor
EQ Trim
LEQ
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Wet / Dry
Routing
Amp Simulation
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Compressor
3 Band PEQ
HEQ
Comp
Comp
Output Level
Driver
Output Level
Output Level
Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
COMPRESSOR
a
b
c
d
Right
COMPRESSOR
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251
[C]EQ Trim
0...100
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
a
b
c
Sets the gain of High EQ
[A]Amplifier
Type
Routing
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Amt
304
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251
OD/HI-GAIN
AMP SIM
e
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
[O]
Drive Mode
Drive
1...100
[O]Output
Level
0...50
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
50...+50
[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Routing
CompOD/
HG,
OD/HG
Comp
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 103: Comp - P4EQ (Compressor - Parametric 4-Band EQ)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandafourband
parametricequalizer.Youcanchangetheorderofthe
effects.
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandachorus/
flanger.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Routing
Parametric 4Band EQ
Compressor
EQ Trim LEQ
Chorus/Flanger
HEQ
Wet / Dry
Routing
Left
Comp
Chorus/Flanger
+
Output Level
Comp
Output Level
Trim
Feedback
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Right
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
a
b
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251
P4EQ
c
[E]Trim
0...100
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Routing
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251
[C]EQ Trim
0...100
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
CHORUS/FLANGER
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
Depth
0...100
Feedback
100...+100
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Routing
Comp
Flanger,
Flanger
Comp
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
h: [F]Output Mode
i: Routing
WhenWetInvertisselected,therightchannelphaseofthe
chorus/flangereffectsoundisinverted.Thiscreatespseudo
stereoeffectsandaddsspread.
However,ifamonoinputtypeeffectisconnectedafterthis
effect,theleftandrightsoundsmaycanceleachother,
eliminatingthechorus/flangereffects.
WhenRoutingissettoFlangerComp,[F]OutputMode
willbesettoNormal.
305
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandaphaser.You
canchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandamultitap
delay.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Left
Compressor
EQ Trim
LEQ
EQ Trim
Comp
Resonance
Wet / Dry
c
d
1...100
p.251
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251
0...100
15...+15
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
306
0...100
0...100
100...+100
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Routing
Comp
Phaser,
Phaser
Comp
Wet / Dry
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251
[C]EQ Trim
0...100
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
MULTITAP DELAY
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Resonance
[C]EQ Trim
Depth
(2)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Right
[P]Manual
f
Output Level
PHASER
Delay
High Damp (1)
COMPRESSOR
[C]
Sensitivity
[C]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
Feedback
Comp
Envelope - Control
COMPRESSOR
Multitap Delay
HEQ
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Phaser Wet / Dry
+
Right
Envelope - Control
LEQ
Phaser
Output Level
Wet / Dry
Routing
Compressor
Phaser
HEQ
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Tap1 Level
0...100
[D]Tap2 Time
0.0...1360.0
[msec]
Feedback
(Tap2)
p.290
Sets the Tap2 delay time
100...+100
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Routing
Comp
Mt.Delay,
Mt.Delay
Comp
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Mono-Mono Serial (Mono-Mono) 107: Limiter - P4EQ (Limiter - Parametric 4-Band EQ)
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Output Level
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Threshold
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandafourband
parametricequalizer.Youcanchangetheorderofthe
effects.
Louder
Ration=Inf : 1
Louder
Input Level
Wet / Dry
Routing
Limiter
Parametric 4Band EQ
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Dry
Level
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Limiter
Trim
Gain Adjust
Threshold
Right
Ratio=Inf : 1
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Time
LIMITER
b
c
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
Sets the signal compression ratio
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
[L]Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
[E]Trim
0...100
[E]B1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
0.5...10.0
p.307
P4EQ
d
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
0.5...10.0
Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Limiter
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Gain Adjust
Feedback
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[E]B3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Routing
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: [L]Ratio
a: Threshold [dB]
c: [L]Gain Adjust [dB]
Thisparametersetsthesignalcompression[L]Ratio.
Compressionisappliedonlywhenthesignallevelexceeds
theThresholdvalue.
AdjusttheoutputlevelusingtheGainAdjustparameter,
sincecompressioncausestheentireleveltobereduced.
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LIMITER
[E]B4 Cutoff
[Hz]
Wet/Dry
j
Right
Envelope - Control
Wet / Dry
Routing
Limiter
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
Sets the signal compression ratio
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
[L]Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
p.307
CHORUS/FLANGER
f
g
[F]Delay Time
0.0...1350.0
[msec]
Depth
0...100
Feedback
100...+100
[F]EQ Trim
0...100
[F]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
307
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Routing
Limiter
Flanger,
Flanger
Limiter
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet / Dry
Routing
Multitap Delay
Limiter
Feedback
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Right
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Limiter
Phaser
Phaser
Gain Adjust
Resonance
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
LIMITER
Limiter
(2)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandaphaser.Youcan
changetheorderoftheeffects.
Delay
High Damp (1)
Wet / Dry
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
Sets the signal compression ratio
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
[L]Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
MULTITAP DELAY
LIMITER
a
b
c
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
Sets the signal compression ratio
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
[L]Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
f
p.307
PHASER
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
[P]Manual
0...100
Depth
0...100
Resonance
100...+100
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
[P]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Routing
Limiter
Phaser,
Phaser
Limiter
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
308
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Tap1 Level
0...100
Feedback
100...+100
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Routing
Limiter
Mt.Delay,
Mt.Delay
Limiter
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
p.274
Wet / Dry
Routing
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Compressor
Exciter
Limiter
Exciter
Exciter
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Exciter
Comp
Output Level
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
EXCITER
EXCITER
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
[X]Trim
0...100
[X]EQ Trim
0...100
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
c
d
LIMITER
COMPRESSOR
e
f
[L]Ratio
1.0 : 1...
Sets the signal compression ratio
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
[C]
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
[L]Threshold
[dB]
40...0
[C]Attack
1...100
p.251
[L]Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
[L]Gain
Adjust [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Routing
Exciter
Limiter,
Limiter
Exciter
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Exciter
Comp,
Comp
Exciter
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Routing
p.307
309
Wet / Dry
Exciter
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ
EQ Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
Exciter
Phaser
Exciter
HEQ
Exciter
Resonance
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
Phaser
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
+
Right
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
EXCITER
EXCITER
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
[X]Trim
0...100
[X]Trim
0...100
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
PHASER
CHORUS/FLANGER
310
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
LFO
Waveform
[P]Manual
0...100
Depth
0...100
Resonance
100...+100
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
[P]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Depth
0...100
Feedback
100...+100
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
p.272
g
p.274
Wet / Dry
Multitap Delay
Exciter
EQ Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Feedback
Exciter
Delay
High Damp (1)
(2)
Left
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Right
Wet / Dry
Amp Simulation
3 Band PEQ
Wet / Dry
Driver
Output Level
EXCITER
[X]Exciter
Blend
100...+100
[X]Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
[X]Trim
0...100
[X]Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
Right
Wet / Dry
OD/HI-GAIN
a
MULTITAP DELAY
e
[D]Tap1 Time
0.0...1360.0
[msec]
Tap1 Level
0...100
Feedback
(Tap2)
100...+100
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
[O]Drive
Mode
Drive
1...100
[O]Output
Level
0...50
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
50...+50
[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
AMP SIM
h
[A]Amplifier
Type
Routing
OD/HG
Amp,
Amp
OD/HG
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
311
Wet / Dry
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wet / Dry
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Phaser
3 Band PEQ
Chorus/Flanger
Phaser
Driver
Output Level
3 Band PEQ
Chorus/Flanger
Driver
Output Level
Mode: Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Drive
Feedback
Normal
Output Mode
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Right
Resonance
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
OD/HI-GAIN
OD/HI-GAIN
a
[O]Drive
Mode
Drive
1...100
[O]Output
Level
0...50
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
50...+50
[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
312
Drive
1...100
[O]Output
Level
0...50
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
50...+50
[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
LFO
Waveform
[P]Manual
0...100
Depth
0...100
Resonance
100...+100
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
[F]Delay Time
0.0...1350.0
[msec]
Depth
0...100
Feedback
100...+100
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Amt
100...+100
[P]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
[F]Output
Mode
Normal, Wet
Invert
Routing
Routing
OD/HG
Flanger,
Flanger
OD/HG
OD/HG
Phaser,
Switches the order of the
Phaser OD/ overdrive and phaser
HG
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Amt
100...+100
PHASER
CHORUS/FLANGER
[O]Drive
Mode
p.272
j
p.305
Thiseffectcombinesamonooverdrive/highgaindistortion
andamultitapdelay.
Thiseffectcombinesamonowahandanampsimulation.
Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Wah/Auto Wah
Feedback
Delay
Driver
Wet / Dry
Routing
Multitap Delay
(2)
Amp Simulation
Wah
Wet / Dry
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Sweep Mode
Envelope
Auto
-mod D-mod
D
OD/HI-GAIN
a
Drive
1...100
0...50
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
50...+50
[O]Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k
Gain [dB]
18...+18
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
Resonance
0...100
Gain [dB]
18...+18
LPF
Off, On
[O]Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k
[W]Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
0.5...10.0
Src
Off...Tempo
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Amt
100...+100
[O]Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
f
WAH
i
j
Tap1 Level
0...100
[W]
Frequency
Bottom
0...100
Frequency
Top
0...100
[W]Sweep
Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
Src
Off...Tempo
[W]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
MULTITAP DELAY
h
LFO
LFO
[O]Drive
Mode
[O]Output
Level
b
Wet / Dry
AMP SIM
e
[A]Amplifier
Type
Routing
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
p.290
Feedback
100...+100
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
[D]Mt.Delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
313
[C]Attack
Thiseffectcombinesamonodecimatorandanamp
simulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
g
Wet / Dry
Routing
Decimator
Amp Simulation
Routing
Decimator
Comp,
Switches the order of the
Comp
decimator and compressor
Decimator
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
High Damp
Right
Wet / Dry
DECIMATOR
[D]Pre LPF
Off, On
High Damp
[%]
0...100
[D]Sampling
Frequency
[Hz]
Resolution
4...24
[D]Output
Level
0...100
Wet / Dry
Amp Simulation
[A]Amplifier
Type
Routing
Decimator
Amp,
Switches the order of the
Amp
decimator and amp simulation
Decimator
Right
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Left
Output Level
Comp
Decimator
Pre LPF
High Damp
Output Level
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
DECIMATOR
[D]Pre LPF
Off, On
High Damp
[%]
0...100
[D]Sampling
Frequency
[Hz]
Resolution
4...24
0...100
1...100
[D]Output
Level
p.262
COMPRESSOR
314
[C]
Sensitivity
Triangle, Sine,
Vintage, Up, Selects the LFO Waveform p.281
Down
LFO Shape
100...+100
[T]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
[T]Depth
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Compressor
Resolution
[T]LFO
Waveform
Wet / Dry
Routing
Decimator
[A]Amplifier
Type
TREMOLO
Wet / Dry
LFO Shape
AMP SIM
Thiseffectcombinesamonodecimatorandacompressor.
Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Tremolo
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage/Up/Down
Tremolo
p.262
AMP SIM
d
p.251
Decimator
Pre LPF
Output Level
Resolution
1...100
p.251
Thiseffectcombinesamonochorus/flangerandamultitap
delay.
Thiseffectcombinesamonophaserandachorus/flanger.
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Chorus/Flanger
Multitap Delay
Phaser
Feedback
Chorus/Flanger
EQ LEQ HEQ
Trim
Chorus/Flanger
Delay
(1)
Cho/Flng
Wet / Dry High Damp
(2)
Resonance
Mt.Dly
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Chorus/Flanger
EQ LEQ HEQ
Trim
Phaser
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng
Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
PHASER
CHORUS/FLANGER
c
d
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
[F]Delay Time
0.0...1350.0
[msec]
Depth
0...100
Feedback
100...+100
[F]EQ Trim
0...100
[F]PreLEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
PreHEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...1 : 99,
Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
p.272
c
Tap1 Level
b
c
0...100
d
Sets the effect balance of the
chorus/flanger
p.259, p.272
e
p.290
Feedback
[D]High
Damp [%]
0...100
LFO
Waveform
[P]Manual
0...100
Depth
0...100
Resonance
100...+100
[P]Phaser
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
[F]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
p.274
[F]Delay Time
0.0...1350.0
[msec]
Depth
0...100
Feedback
100...+100
[F]EQ Trim
0...100
[F]PreLEQ
Gain [dB]
15...+15
PreHEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
[F]Cho/Flng
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
[F]Output
Mode
Normal,
Wet Invert
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
0.02...20.00
CHORUS/FLANGER
MULTITAP DELAY
[D]Tap1 Time
0.0...1360.0
[msec]
[P]LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
f
g
p.272
315
Normally,set[G]InputReverbMixtoDry(thegateis
controlledonlybythedrysound).Ifyouwishtoextendthe
gatetime,setthe[G]InputReverbMixvaluehigherand
adjusttheThresholdvalue.
Wet / Dry
Reverb
EQ Trim
Pre Delay
Reverb
Gate
Reverb
Balance
LEQ HEQ
Right
Wet / Dry
Input Reverb Mix
Input
Envelope - Control
Gate+Dmpr
D-mod Envelope Select
Gate
REVERB
a
b
c
[R]Reverb
Time [sec]
0.1...10.0
High Damp
[%]
0...100
[R]Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
[R]EQ Trim
0...100
Reverb
Balance
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
[R]PreLEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
[R]PreLEQ
Gain [dB]
15.0...+15.0
GATE
[G]Envelope
Select
Src
Off...Tempo
[G]Input
Reverb Mix
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Threshold
0...100
[G]Polarity
+,
[G]Attack
1...100
p.254
Release
1...100
p.254
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
h
i
f: [G]Envelope Select
f: Src
g: [G]Input Reverb Mix
g: Threshold
The[G]EnvelopeSelectparameterenablesyoutoselect
whetherturningthegateonandoffistriggeredbytheinput
signallevelorcontrolleddirectlybythemodulationsource.
YoucanselectfromOfftoGate2+DmprfortheSrc
parametertospecifythemodulationsource.
When[G]EnvelopeSelectissettoInput,thegateis
controlledbythelevelofsignalsthatarethecombinationof
thedrysoundandthereverbsound.Whenthesignallevel
exceedsthethreshold,thegateopensandthereverbsound
isoutput.
316
Limiter
LIMITER
a
Ratio
1.0 : 1...
Sets the signal compression ratio
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Inf,
38...+24
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
L Pan (R Pan)
L000...
C064...R127
P4EQ
a
Trim
0...100
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
L Pan (R Pan)
EXCITER
a
Emphasis
Frequency
0...70
0...100
Trim
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R
Sets the stereo image
127
0D/HG (Overdrive)
OD/HI GAIN
Comp (Compressor)
COMPRESSOR
a
Sensitivity
1...100
p.251
Attack
1...100
p.251
EQ Trim
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
f
Src
Amt
100...+100
L Pan (R Pan)
p.307
Exciter
Drive Mode
Drive
1...100
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
p.263
Amt
50...+50
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Mid1 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
L Pan (R Pan)
317
Wah
WAH
a
0...100
Frequency
Top
0...100
Auto,
Sweep Mode D-mod,
LFO
Src
Off...Tempo
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
Resonance
0...100
Low Pass
Filter
Off, On
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
L Pan (R Pan)
BPM
LFO
Waveform
Depth
0...100
Feedback
100...+100
EQ Trim
0...100
c
d
e
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
L Pan (R Pan)
Phaser
PHASER
a
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO
Waveform
Manual
0...100
Depth
0...100
Resonance
100...+100
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
L Pan (R Pan)
318
Tap1 Base
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Tap2 Base
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
0...100
Feedback
(Tap2)
100...+100
High
Damp[%]
0...100
L Wet/Dry
(R Wet/Dry)
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
L Pan (R Pan)
L000...C064...R
Sets the stereo image
127
p.272
Tap1 Level
f
0.02...20.00
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Mono/Mono Parallel (Mono//Mono) 127: P4EQ // P4EQ (Parametric 4-Band EQ // Parametric 4-Band EQ)
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry
Trim
Pan
Parametric 4Band EQ
Left
Parametric 4Band EQ
Trim
Exciter
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Right
Parametric 4Band EQ
Trim
Exciter
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Parametric 4Band EQ
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)anda
compressor(p.317)inparallel.
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andanoverdrive
(p.317)inparallel.
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Pan
Left
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Output Level
Output Level
Compressor
Trim
LEQ
3 Band PEQ
Driver
HEQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Envelope - Control
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Compressor
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andalimiter
(p.317)inparallel.
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andawah
(p.318)inparallel.
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Left
Trim
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Parametric 4Band EQ
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Wah
Envelope
Envelope - Control
LFO
Sweep Mode
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Limiter
Pan
D -mod
Wah / Auto Wah
319
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andachorus/
flanger(p.318)inparallel.
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Pan
Output Level
Left
Output Level
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Compressor
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Envelope - Control
Right
Feedback
Trim
LEQ
Wet / Dry
Pan
Compressor
HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Chorus / Flanger
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andalimiter
(p.317)inparallel.
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Parametric 4Band EQ
Output Level
Wet / Dry
Pan
Gain Adjust
Left
Limiter
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Limiter
Resonance
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Phaser
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Trim
ThiseffectconnectsafourbandEQ(p.317)andamultitap
BPMdelay(p.318)inparallel.
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Output Level
Exciter
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Wet / Dry
Pan
LEQ
HEQ
Right
Left
Wet / Dry
Exciter
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
320
Wet / Dry
Pan
Pan
Thiseffectconnectsacompressor(p.317)andanoverdrive
(p.317)inparallel.
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Trim
Pan
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Left
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Resonance
Compressor
Output Level
Output Level
Phaser
3 Band PEQ
Driver
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Right
Wet / Dry
Right
Pan
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Compressor
Wet / Dry
Pan
Compressor
Left
Envelope - Control
Trim
LEQ
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
HEQ
Envelope - Control
Compressor
Trim
Output Level
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Output Level
Wah
Feedback
Envelope
LFO
Sweep Mode
Right
(2)
Delay
-mod
Wet / Dry
Pan
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
Wet / Dry
Pan
Compressor
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Pan
Pan
Left
Left
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Limiter
Compressor
Gain Adjust
Output Level
Gain Adjust
Feedback
Trim
LEQ
Limiter
HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
Envelope - Control
Right
Wet / Dry
Right
Pan
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Chorus / Flanger
321
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Exciter
Trim
LEQ
Gain Adjust
HEQ
Feedback
Right
Wet / Dry
Trim
Pan
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
Exciter
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Chorus / Flanger
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Limiter
Left
Envelope - Control
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Output Level
Limiter
Gain Adjust
3 Band PEQ
Driver
Resonance
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Right
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Pan
Phaser
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Envelope - Control
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Wah
Envelope - Control
Envelope
LFO
Sweep Mode
Limiter
Right
Gain Adjust
D -mod
Wet / Dry
Pan
Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
322
Wet / Dry
Pan
Exciter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Exciter
Exciter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Trim
Exciter
Trim
LEQ
LEQ
HEQ
Exciter
HEQ
Right
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Pan
Exciter
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Chorus / Flanger
Exciter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Trim
LEQ
Exciter
HEQ
Exciter
Trim
Output Level
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
LEQ
HEQ
3 Band PEQ
Exciter
Driver
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Resonance
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Phaser
Exciter
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Exciter
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Exciter
Wah
Envelope
LFO
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Sweep Mode
Trim
Right
D -mod
Wet / Dry
LEQ
HEQ
Exciter
Pan
Delay
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
323
Thiseffectconnectstwooverdrive(p.317)unitsinparallel.
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Left
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Output Level
Driver
Output Level
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
3 Band PEQ
3 Band PEQ
Resonance
Driver
Phaser
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Phaser
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Output Level
3 Band PEQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Wah
Output Level
Envelope
LFO
Sweep Mode
3 Band PEQ
Feedback
Right
D -mod
Wet / Dry
Pan
(2)
Delay
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
D -mod
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
LFO
Output Level
Pan
3 Band PEQ
Feedback
Wah
Envelope
HEQ
LFO
Chorus/Flanger
Sweep Mode
Right
D -mod
Chorus / Flanger
324
Wet / Dry
Sweep Mode
Wah
Driver
LEQ
Pan
Envelope
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Trim
Wet / Dry
Left
Pan
Thiseffectconnectsawah(p.318)andachorus/flanger
(p.318)inparallel.
Thiseffectconnectstwochorus/flanger(p.318)unitsin
parallel.
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Chorus / Flanger
-mod
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Left
Sweep Mode
LFO
Chorus/Flanger
Envelope
Wah
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Feedback
Feedback
Feedback
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Trim
Chorus/Flanger
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Right
Chorus / Flanger
Chorus / Flanger
D -mod
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Sweep Mode
LFO
Chorus / Flanger
Envelope
Wah
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
LFO: Tri / Sine
Chorus/Flanger
Resonance
Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Feedback
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine
Resonance
Right
Wet / Dry
Pan
Phaser
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Phaser
D -mod
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Sweep Mode
LFO
Chorus / Flanger
Envelope
Wah
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
LFO: Tri / Sine
Feedback
Chorus/Flanger
High Damp
Trim
(2)
Delay
LEQ
HEQ
Feedback
(1)
Feedback
Right
Tempo
BPM
Wet / Dry
Pan
(2)
Delay
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
325
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser
Resonance
Resonance
Phaser
LFO: Tri / Sine
Right
Phaser
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser
Resonance
Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
Wet / Dry
Pan
Wet / Dry
Pan
Left
High Damp
(1)
Delay
(2)
Feedback
Feedback
(2)
Delay
High Damp
(1)
Right
Tempo
BPM
326
Double Size
DoublesizeeffectscanbeusedonlywithinserteffectsIFX1,
2,3,4andmastereffectMFX1.
173: PianoBody/Damper
(PianoBody/Damper Simulation)
Thiseffectsimulatestheresonanceofthepianosoundboard
causedbythestringvibration,andalsosimulatesthe
resonanceofotherstringsthatarenotbeingplayedwhen
youpressthedamperpedal.Itwillcreateaveryrealistic
soundwhenappliedtoacousticpianosounds.
Thisisastereomultibandlimiter.
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Band-Pass Filters
Low
Envelope - Control
Mid
Envelope - Control
High
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Low
Envelope - Control
Mid
Right
Envelope - Control
High
Left
Wet / Dry
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Limiter
Limiter
Limiter
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Offset
D
a
Ratio
1.0 : 1...
Sets the signal compression ratio
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1 p.307
Threshold
[dB]
40...0
Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
Low Offset
[dB]
40...0
Mid Offset
[dB]
40...0
High Offset
[dB]
40...0
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
63...+63
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Piano
Body/Damper
Simulation
Gain Adjust
-mod
Damper
Damper
Depth
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Tone
1...100
Mid Shape
0...36
Tune
50...+50
Fine tuning
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
p.307
f
p.327
b: Damper Depth
b: Src
Thisparametersetstheresonanceintensityoftheother
stringscreatedwhenthedamperpedalispressed.TheSrc
parameterselectsthemodulationsourcefromwhichthe
dampereffectisapplied.Usually,selectDamper#64Pdl
(Damperpedal).
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthemodulationsource
specifiedfortheSrcparameteris63orsmaller,andthe
effectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.
c: Tone
d: Mid Shape
Theseparameterscontrolthetonalqualityoftheeffect
sound.
e: Tune
Sincethiseffectsimulatestheresonanceofthestrings,the
soundvariesdependingonthepitch.Ifyouhavechanged
tuningusingtheMasterTune(GlobalP0),adjustthis
parametervalue.
327
174: Vocoder
Thiseffectappliesthetimbralcharacterofaonesignal(the
modulator)toasecondsignal(thecarrier).
OntheKROME,anexternalsourcesuchasamiccannotbe
usedasthemodulatorsource,butyoucancreateunique
effectsbyusinganinternalsoundsourceasthemodulator.
Tryselectingvoicetypesounds,rhythms,orsoundeffects
asthemodulator.Themostsuitablechoicesforthecarrier
aresoundsthatcontainalargenumberofovertones,suchas
stringsordistortedguitar.Fordetailsonhowtomake
settings,refertoExample:Vocoder(Combination)on
page 238.
Wet / Dry
Pre Low-cut
Wah
Direct Mix
Left
Wet / Dry
Carrier Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
D -mod
Envelope
Modulator Trim
Wah
Modulator Select
Modulator Source
Right
Wet / Dry
FX Control BUS 1
Noise Level
FX Control BUS 2
Noise
Generator
Carrier Trim
0...100
Modulator
Trim
0...100
Modulator
Source
Input,
FX Control 1,
FX Control 2
Modulater
Select
L/R Mix,
L Only,
R Only
Response
0...100
Noise Level
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Modulator
High Mix
0...100
High Gain
[dB]
12...+12
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
e: Formant Shift
ByoffsettingtheCarrierfilter,youcanadjusttheheightof
thefrequencyrangetowhichthevocodereffectisapplied.
Thetonalqualitywillchangesignificantly.
g: Noise Level
Thisparameterenablesyoutomixwhitenoisewiththe
Carrier.
328
Src
Off...Tempo
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Wah Sweep
Range
10...+10
Wah Sweep
Src
Off...Tempo
Drive Mode
Overdrive,
Hyper-Gain
Drive
1...120
Pre Low-cut
0...10
Off, On
p.263
p.263
Src
Off...Tempo
p.263
Amt
50...+50
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Mid1 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Direct Mix
0...50
Speaker
Simulation
Off, On
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Double Size 176: GuitarAmp + P4EQ (Guitar Amp Model + Parametric 4-Band EQ)
a: Amplifier Type
d: Presence
IftheAmplifierTypeisVOXAC15...VOXAC30TB,thissets
theattenuationofthehighfrequencyrange.Forothertypes,
thissetstheboostofthehighfrequencyrange.
Thiscombinesaguitarampsimulation(whicheven
faithfullyreplicatesthedistortionandtonecontrolcircuitry)
withafourbandequalizer.
Byusingthisinconjunctionwith021:St.GuitarCabinet
(StereoGuitarCabinet)onp.264,youcanobtainaneven
morerealisticguitarsoundthatsimulatesaguitaramp+
speakercabinet.
ThiscorrespondstotheCutknobcontrolofampsmadeby
theVOXCorporation.
e: Post P4EQ
Bychainingthiswith19:St.GuitarCabinetyoucansimulate
thecombinationofaguitarampandspeakercabinet.Inthis
case,werecommendthatyousetPostP4EQtoThru,but
ifnecessaryyoucanturnitOnandadjustthetone.
Amplifier Type
Volume
VOXAC15
Right
Wet / Dry
d
e
-mod
Amplifier
Type
VOX AC15,
VOX AC15TB,
VOX AC30,
VOX AC30TB,
UK BLUES, UK
70'S,
UK 80'S,
UK 90'S,
UK MODERN,
US MODERN, Selects the type of the amplifier
US HIGAIN,
p.329
BOUTIQUE
OD,
BOUTIQUE
CL,
BLACK 2x12,
TWEED 1x12,
TWEED 4x10
Drive Gain
0...100
Volume
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Bass
0...100
Middle
0...100
Treble
0...100
Presence
0...100
Post P4EQ
Thru, On
VOXAC15TB
VOXAC151x12
VOXAC30
VOXAC302x12
VOXAC30TB
VOXAC302x12
UKBLUES
UKH304x12
UK70S
UKH304x12
UK80S
UKT754x12
UK90S
UKT754x12
UKMODERN
UKT754x12,USV304x12
USMODERN
USV304x12
USHIGAIN
USV304x12,UKT754x12
BOUTIQUEOD
UKH304x12
BOUTIQUECL
UKH304x12
BLACK2x12
BLACK2x12
TWEED1x12
TWEED1x12
TWEED4x10
TWEED4x10
Note:ItisconvenienttousetheEffectPresetfunctionto
presetyourfavoritepairingsofampmodelandcabinet.(see
p.60)
p.329
Band1 Cutoff
20...1.00k
[Hz]
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
0.5...10.0
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Band4 Cutoff
500...20.00k
[Hz]
0.5...10.0
Cabinet Type
VOXAC151x12
Gain [dB]
18...+18
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
329
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Volume
Volume
Cabinet Simulator
Drive
Right
Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
D -mod
a
Gain
0...100
Volume
0...100
Source
Off...Tempo
Amount
100...+100
STUDIO
COMBO
VOX AC100
UK MAJOR
Drive Gain
0...100
Volume
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Amplifier
Type
Bass
0...100
Middle
0...100
Treble
0...100
Presence
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Source
Off...Tempo
Bass
0...100
Middle
0...100
Treble
0...100
Presence
0...100
Cabinet
Simulator
Off, On
LA - 4x10,
MODERN 4x10,
METAL - 4x10,
CLASSIC -8x10,
UK - 4x12,
STUDIO - 1x15,
Selects the cabinet type
Cabinet Type JAZZ - 1x15,
p.265, p.330
VOX AC100 2x15,
US - 2x15,
UK - 4x15,
LA - 1x18,
COMBI - 1x12
& 1x18
Amount
100...+100
2x10 BLACK
2x12 BLACK
4x12 UK H30
1x12 TWEED
4x10 TWEED
1x12 TWEED
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
2x10 BLACK
2x12 BLACK
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
2x12 BLACK
4x12 UK H30
Wet/Dry
4x12 UK T75
a: Amplifier Type
i: Cabinet Type
4x12 US V30
Cabinet Type
STUDIOCOMBO
STUDIO1x15
AC100
VOXAC1002x15
UKMAJOR
UK4x15,UK4x12
Note:ItisconvenienttousetheEffectPresetfunctionto
presetyourfavoritepairingsofampmodelandcabinet.(see
p.60)
330
182: EP Cabinet/Drive
Thisfaithfullysimulatesthecharacteristicsofthepower
ampandspeakercabinetofafamousmodeloftinetype
electricpiano.Itproducesatonewithadistinctivesenseof
driveandwarmth.
Tine EP I,
Cabinet Type Tine EP II,
Reed EP
Drive Switch
Off, On
Src
Off...Tempo
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
00.0100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Drive
c
Amt
Feedback
Tap2 Delay
Tap4 Delay
Tap5 Delay
Tap6 Delay
Right
0 [degree]
180 [degree]
60 [degree]
240 [degree]
120 [degree]
300 [degree]
Wet / Dry
Panning Preset
LFO: Triangle
D -mod
Atlowersettings,theampisveryclean;asyouincreasethe
Drive,itgetsdirtierandmoredistorted.Theoutputlevelis
compensated,soincreasingDrivecausesonlyamoderate
increaseinperceivedvolume.
0.02...13.00
Tap1 (000)
[msec]
0...2000
Depth
0...30
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
Tap2 (180)
[msec]
0...2000
Depth
0...30
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff (Dm),
OffOn (Dm)
Tap3 (060)
[msec]
0...2000
Depth
0...30
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
Tap4 (240)
[msec]
0...2000
Depth
0...30
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
Tap5 (120)
[msec]
0...2000
Depth
0...30
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
Tap6 (300)
[msec]
0...2000
Depth
0...30
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
Left
Wet / Dry
Output Level
Tube Pre Amp
On/Off Control
LFO
Frequency
[Hz]
Mic Simulation
Tap3 Delay
c: Drive
Mic Simulation
Wet / Dry
Tap1 Delay
Right
Wet / Dry
331
Panning
Preset
1:L12345
6 R,
2 : L 135 246 R, Selects the stereo panning
3 : L 1 3 5 2 4 pattern for each tap
6 R,
p.332
4:L14563
2R
Tap1
Feedback
100...+100
Thisisastereopitchshifter.Thepitchshiftamountforthe
leftandrightchannelscanbereversedfromeachother.
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Off...Tempo
Src
Amt
100...+100
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Pitch Shifter
Input Level
Delay
Pre
Post
Feedback Position
Pre
Input Level
Pitch Shifter
Feedback
Spread
Post
Delay
High Damp
Right
Wet / Dry
Mode
Slow,
Switches Pitch Shifter mode
Medium, Fast
p.287
AlwaysOn:Outputisalwayson.(Nomodulation)
L/R Pitch
Normal,
Up/Down
AlwaysOff:Outputisalwaysoff.(Nomodulation)
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
24...+24
Fine [cent]
100...+100
Amt
100...+100
L Delay
[msec]
0...2000
R Delay
[msec]
0...2000
Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post
b, c, d, e, f, g: Status
TheseparameterssettheoutputstatusofeachTap.
OnOff(dm):Outputlevelisswitchedfromontooff
dependingonthemodulationsource.
OffOn(dm):Outputlevelisswitchedfromofftoon
dependingonthemodulationsource.
Combiningtheseparameters,youcanchangefrom4phase
chorustotwotapdelaybycrossfadingthemgraduallyvia
themodulationsourceduringaperformance.
h: Panning Preset
Thisparameterselectscombinationsofstereoimagesofthe
tapoutputs.
p.285
p.285
100...+100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Spread
p.289
h
a: L/R Pitch
WhenyouselectUp/Downforthisparameter,thepitchshift
amountfortherightchannelwillbereversed.Ifthepitch
shiftamountispositive,thepitchoftheleftchannelis
raised,andthepitchoftherightchannelislowered.
332
Double Size 185: St. PitchShift BPM (Stereo Pitch Shifter BPM)
Thisstereopitchshifterenablesyoutosetthedelaytimeto
matchthesongtempo.
Thisisastereorotaryspeakereffect.Ithasaninternal
speakersimulatorthatsimulatesoverdrive(recreatingthe
ampdistortion)andcharacteristicsoftherotaryspeaker,
producingaveryrealisticrotaryspeakersound.
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Pitch Shifter
Input Level
Pre
Pre
Pitch Shifter
Left
Post
Feedback Position
Input Level
Delay
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Spread
Horn
Post
Delay
High Damp
Right
Overdrive
Rotary Speaker
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Mic Distance
Mic Spread
Rotor
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Speaker Simulation
Right
Wet / Dry
Mode
Slow,
Switches Pitch Shifter mode
Medium, Fast
p.285
L/R Pitch
Normal,
Up/Down
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
24...+24
100...+100
100...+100
c
Amt
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Overdrive
Off, On
Src
Off...Tempo
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
Overdrive
Gain
0...100
Overdrive
Level
0...100
Overdrive
Tone
0...15
Speaker
Simulator
Off, On
Src
Off...Tempo
Toggle,
Moment
---, OVER!
Sw
L Delay Base
Note
...
Src
Off...Tempo
Times
x1...x32
Sw
Toggle,
Moment
R Delay Base
Note
...
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Rotor, 1...99,
Horn
Times
x1...x32
Manual
SpeedCtrl
Off...Tempo
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post
Horn
Acceleration
0...100
Spread
100...+100
Feedback
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
On/Off
D
D -mod
D -mod
D -mod
Fine [cent]
-mod
p.285
p.287
Horn Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Rotor
Acceleration
0...100
Rotor Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
p.285
Mic Spread
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
333
a: Sw
Thisparameterdetermineshowtoswitchon/offthe
overdriveviaamodulationsource.
WhenSw=Toggle,overdriveisturnedon/offeachtimethe
pedalorjoystickisoperated.
Overdrivewillbeswitchedon/offeachtimethevalue
ofthemodulationsourceexceeds64.
WhenSw=Moment,overdriveisappliedonlywhenyou
pressthepedaloroperatethejoystick.
Onlywhenthevalueforthemodulationsourceis64or
higher,theoverdriveeffectisapplied.
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Left
L Delay
C Delay
334
L Delay Time
0.0...2730.0
[msec]
L Feedback
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
R Feedback
100...+100
Amt
100...+100
Wet / Dry
L Delay Time
0...5460
[msec]
Level
0...50
Stereo, Cross
Level
C Delay Time
0...5460
[msec]
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Level
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Spread
50...+50
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
0...50
R Delay Time
0...5460
[msec]
Level
0...50
Feedback
(C Delay)
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Spread
0...50
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
p.289
Stereo/Cross
R Delay
Spread
Level
Feedback
Right
Wet / Dry
Level
Low Damp
Spread
Right
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Stereo/Cross
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Feedback
ThismultitapdelayoutputsthreeTapsignalstoleft,right
andcenterrespectively.Youcansetamaximumof
5,460msecforthedelaytime.
Low Damp
Delay
p.289
Wet / Dry
Delay
Pan
D
D -mod
REC Control
Tempo
RST Control
BPM
BPM
Auto,
1...10800
Loop BPM
Sync
Off, On
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Time Over?
---, OVER!
Loop Base
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
REC Control
Src
Off...Tempo
RST Control
Src
Off...Tempo
Manual REC
Control
REC Off,
REC On
Manual RST
Control
Off, RESET
Pan
L100...L1, C,
R1...R100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
RECControlSrcselectsthemodulationsourcethatcontrols
recording.
Amt
100...+100
Loop Time
[msec]
p.335
p.335
c: Time Over?
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto10,800msec.Ifthedelay
timeexceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appears
inthedisplay.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthis
messagewillnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplay
parameter.
3. Pushthejoystickinthe+Ydirection(forward)andplay
aphraseyouwishtohold.Whenyoupullthejoystick
toitsoriginalposition,therecordingwillbefinished
andthephraseyoujustplayedwillbeheld.
LoopTimeisautomaticallysetonlyforthefirstrecord
ingafterresetting.Ifthetimelengthexceeds10,800msec,
LoopTimewillbeautomaticallysetto10,800msec.(If
youhavesetTimesto110,800msec,thespecifiedloop
timewillbeusedregardlessofthetimetakenfrompush
ingthejoystickforwarduntilitispulledback.However,
therecordingmethodremainsthesame.Thephrase
beingplayedwhilethejoystickispushedforwardwillbe
held.)
4. Ifyoumadeamistakeduringrecording,pullthejoy
stickintheYdirection(back)toreset.Inthisway,the
recordingwillbeerased.Repeatstep3.again.
5. Therecordedphrasewillberepeatedagainandagain.
Youcanusethistocreateanaccompaniment.
6. Bypushingthejoystickinthe+Ydirection(forward),
youcanalsooverdubperformancesoverthephrasethat
isbeingheld.
Ifthismodulationison,orifManualRECControlissetto
On,youcanrecordtheinputsignal.Ifarecordinghas
alreadybeencarriedout,additionalsignalswillbe
overdubbed.
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthemodulationsource
specifiedfortheRECControlSrcparameteris63or
smaller,andtheeffectisonwhenthevalueis64or
higher.
335
TheL/C/Rdelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytimewith
thesongtempo.
Thestereodelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytimewith
thesongtempo.
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
L Delay
Input Level D-mod
Level
C Delay
Feedback
Spread
Level
Feedback
Delay
R Delay
Level
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Tempo
Tempo
BPM
BPM
BPM
BPM
Adjust [%]
Adjust [%]
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
Time Over?
---, OVER!
...
Times
x1...x32
Level
0...50
C Delay Base
Note
...
Times
Level
---, OVER!
L Delay Base
Note
...
Times
x1...x32
Adjust [%]
2.50...+2.50
x1...x32
R Delay Base
Note
...
0...50
Times
x1...x32
...
Adjust [%]
2.50...+2.50
Times
x1...x32
L Feedback
100...+100
Level
0...50
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
L Amt
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
R Feedback
100...+100
100...+100
Amt
R Amt
100...+100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
0...100
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Low Damp
[%]
Low Damp
[%]
0...100
100...+100
Input Level
D-mod [%]
100...+100
Off...Tempo
Src
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
R Delay Base
Note
d
Feedback
(C Delay)
Input Level
D-mod [%]
Src
Spread
0...50
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Time Over?
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto10,920msec.Ifthedelay
timeexceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appears
inthedisplay.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthis
messagewillnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplay
parameter.
336
L Delay Base
Note
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
BPM
a: Time Over? L, R
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto5,460msec.Ifthedelaytime
exceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearsinthe
display.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthismessage
willnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplayparameter.
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Pre Delay
Early Reflections
EQ Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
Type
ER Time
[msec]
10...1600
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
EQ Trim
0...100
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
337
338
Appendices
Alternate Modulation Sources (AMS)
AMS Mixers
Alternate Modulation
Overview
TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,or
processanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomethingnew.
AlternateModulationletsyouusecontrollers,envelopes,
LFOs,etc.tomodulateProgramparameters.Youcanuse
onecontrollertomodulatemultipleparameters
simultaneously.Youcanalsocreatecomplexmodulation
setupsinwhich(forexample)anenvelopemodulatesthe
frequencyofanLFO,andthatLFOisthenusedtomodulate
afilter.
Programsprovide48types(88destinations)foralternate
modulation.
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether,oruse
oneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother.Youcanalso
usethemtochangetheshapesofLFOsandEGsinvarious
ways,modifytheresponseofrealtimecontrollers,andmore.
TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMSsources,
justliketheLFOsandEGs.
Theoriginal,unmodifiedinputstotheAMSMixersarestill
availableaswell.Forinstance,ifyouuseLFO1asaninput
toaAMSMixer,youcanusetheprocessedversionofthe
LFOtocontroloneAMSdestination,andtheoriginal
versiontocontrolanother.
Finally,youcancascadetwoAMSMixerstogether,byusing
oneastheinputofanother.
Youcanusethesourceslistedonthefollowingpageto
controlAlternateModulation.Ifyouselecttwoormore
AlternateModulationdestinationsforcontrolbythesame
AMS,asinglesourcewillapplymodulationtoeachofthe
specifieddestinations.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee61:OSC1AMSMix1on
page 46.
FrequentlyusedassignmentssuchasusingJoystickXto
controlpitchareprovidedasspecialparameters,soitisnot
necessarytouseAlternateModulationtoaccomplishthis.
Alternate Modulation
Common LFO
Shape
Intensity Mod
Frequency Mod 1
Frequency Mod 2
Shape
Intensity Mod
Frequency Mod 1
Frequency Mod 2
LFO1
Intensity Mod to A
Intensity Mod to A
Intensity Mod to A
Intensity Mod
Intensity Mod
Intensity Mod
Intensity Mod to A
Cutoff Mod 1
Cutoff Mod 2
Resonance Mod
Output Level Mod
Time Mod 3
Reset
Pitch EG
Amp 1
Amp Mod
Drive
Low Boost
Pan Mod
Intensity Mod to B
Filter1 EG
Level Mod
Time Mod 1
Time Mod 2
Shape
Reset
Intensity Mod
Intensity Mod
Driver
Filter1 B
Cutoff Mod 1
Cutoff Mod 2
Resonance Mod
Output Level Mod
Pitch Mod
Intensity Mod
Frequency Mod
Intensity Mod to B
Intensity Mod to B
Intensity Mod to B
Filter1 A
OSC1
LFO2
Amp1 EG
Level Mod
Time Mod 1
Time Mod 2
Time Mod 3
Reset
OSC 1
OSC 2
Level Mod 1
Level Mod 2
Time Mod
Reset
339
Appendices
Basically,therearetwoseparatefactors:aphysicalknob
namedUSERknob1,andanAMSsourcenamedKnob
Mod.1:#17.Thisprovidesagreatdealofflexibilitybuts
itsalsoeasytolinkthetwotogether.Todoso:
1. GotothecurrentmodesControllerspage.
2. SetknobUSER1sRealtimeControlsKnobAssignto
KnobMod.1:#17.
Off
Thismeansthatnomodulationsourceisselected.
Formoreinformation,pleasesee13:ControllersSetup
onpage 16,andRealtimeControlsKnobs14
Assignmentsonpage 348.
Note Number
ThisisthenotesMIDInotenumber,from0(C2)to127
(G9).
Velocity
ThisisthenotesMIDInoteonvelocity.
Ontheotherhand,highvelocitiesproduceincreasingly
greatereffects,andthedifferencebetweenanytwohigher
velocityvalueswillbemorepronounced.
Poly After
Polyphonicaftertouchallowsadifferentaftertouchvaluefor
eachnote.ThiscanbereceivedfromexternalMIDIdevices
orgeneratedbytheinternalsequencer.TheKROME
keyboarditselfdoesnotgeneratepolyaftertouch,however.
After Touch
Theeffectwillbeappliedbychannelaftertouchmessages
fromtheKROMEssequencedataorreceivedfromMIDIIN.
JS X
Thisisthehorizontalmovementofthemainjoystick.Italso
receivesMIDIPitchbend.
JS+Y: CC#01
Thisistheverticalmovementofthemainjoystick,upwards
fromthecenter.ItalsoreceivesMIDICC#01(modwheel).
JSY: CC#02
Thisistheverticalmovementofthemainjoystick,
downwardsfromthecenter.ItalsoreceivesMIDICC#02
(breathcontroller).
JS +Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick +Y & After Touch/2)
Theeffectwillbecontrolledbythejoystick+Y(Vertical
upward)andbyaftertouch.Inthiscase,theeffectof
aftertouchwillbeonlyhalfofthespecifiedintensity.
JS Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick Y & After Touch/2)
TheeffectwillbecontrolledbythejoystickY(Vertical
downward)andbyaftertouch.Inthiscase,theeffectof
aftertouchwillbeonlyhalfofthespecifiedintensity.
Pedal: CC#04 (Foot Pedal: CC#04)
ThisAMSsourcereceivesMIDICC#04.Itcanalsobe
generatedbyafootpedalconnectedtotherearpanel
ASSIGNABLEPEDALinput,iftheGlobalFootPedal
AssignparameterissettoFootPedal(CC#04).Formore
information,pleaseseeFootPedalAssignmentson
page 350.
KnobMod1: #17 (Realtime Knob Modulation1: CC#17)
ThisAMSsourcealwaysrespondstoMIDICC#17.AMIDI
valueof0causesthemaximumnegativemodulation;64
(center)meansnomodulation;and127causesthemaximum
positivemodulation.(Youcaninvertthisresponse,if
desired,byusinganegativeAMSintensity.)
ItalsousuallycorrespondstoRealtimeControlsUSERknob
1ontheControllersSetuppage;butthiswilldependonthe
RealtimeControlsknobAssignsettingsofeachindividual
Program,Combination,andSong.
340
Porta.SW: #65
ThisistheMIDIportamentoswitch(CC#65),whichalso
enablesanddisablesportamento.
Sostenuto: #66
ThisistheMIDIsostenutopedal(CC#66).
Soft: CC#67
ThisistheMIDIoftpedal(CC#67).
SW 1: CC#80 (SW 1 Modulation: CC#80)
ThisisCC#80,whichisthedefaultforassignablefrontpanel
switch1(SW1).TouseSW1andSW2asAMSsources:
1. GototheControllersSetuppage.
2. UnderPanelSwitchAssign,assignSW1toSW1Mod.
(CC#80)andSW2toSW2Mod.(CC#81).
TheseassignmentsarestoredseparatelyforeachProgram,
Combination,andSong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSW1/2Assignmentson
page 348.
Gate1
Gate1+Damper
Gate1istriggeredbyanewnoteafterallnoteshavebeen
released,suchasatthebeginningofaphrase.Gate
1+Damperissimilar,exceptthatitistriggeredbyanew
noteonafterallnotesandthedamperarereleased.
YoucanusethistoresettheCommonLFO.Forinstance,to
createaneffectsimilartothepervoiceLFOandStep
SequencersKeySyncOffsetting,useGate1+Damperas
theresetsource.
Gate2
Gate2+Damper
Gate2issimilartoGate1,butittriggerswitheverynew
noteon,eveninthemiddleofalegatophrase.
Gate2+Damperincludesthedamperpedalintheequation,
asshowninthediagrambelow.
Note:WhenusedasaresetcontrollerforCommonLFO,
Gate2andGate2+Damperwillhavethesameeffect.
1
Note
Gate1,Gate1+Damper,
Gate2,Gate2+Damper
Dmpr
Damper Pedal
Gate1
On
Off
Gate1+Dmpr
Reset
Controller
Gate2
Gate2+Dmpr
Time
341
Appendices
Thetone,EG,andLFOetc.canbecontrollednotonlyby
keyvelocityorthejoystick,butalsofromabutton,knob,
orpedaletc.
WhenyouoperateanAMS(AlternateModulationSource),
themodulationdestinationwillbeaffectedasshowninthe
tablebelow.
Panningcanbecontrolledinrealtimefromacontroller,
EG,orLFOetc.
Byusingalternatemodulation,youcancreatecomplex
systemsofmodulationinwhichEG,LFO,keyboardtracks,
andcontrollersworktogether.
YoucanapplycomplexchangetoanLFOorEG,for
examplebyusingthepitch/filter/ampEGtocontrolthe
frequencyorintensityofanLFOthatmodulatesthepitch/
filter/amp,orbyusingLFO2tocontrolthefrequencyof
LFO1.
YoucanusethefilterEGtocontrolpitchorvolumeatthe
sametimethatitcontrolsthefilter.
Controllersetc.canbeusedtocontrolEGlevelsortimes.
ThisletsyoushapetheEGinrealtime.
Filter/ampkeyboardtrackingornotenumbercanbeused
tocontroltheEGorLFOaccordingtothekeyboardpitch
thatisplayed.
Pitch,tone,EGorLFOcanbecontrolledbythetempoof
thearpeggiatorand/orsequencer.
AMSoperationsandtheirresult
AMS source
& value range
Amp EG
0...+99
Common LFO
99...0...+99
Common
Key Track
1&2
99...0...+99
Note Number
C1...C4...C9
EXT(+/) *1
Max...0...+Max
EXT(+) *3
0...127
Parameter
AMS
Intensity
Pitch*4
(+12.00)
0...+1
Octave
10+1
Octaves
(FilterEGas
AMS;
dedicated
parameter
forPitchEG)
Dedicated
parameter
PitchEG
Int.
(+12.00)
Dedicated
parameter
forPitchEG
Pitch
LFO1/2Int.
(+12.00)
0...+1
Octave
1...0...+1
Octaves
Filter
Frequency
(+99)
0...+10
Octaves
100+10
Octaves
(PitchEGas
AMS;
dedicated
parameter
forFilterEG)
Filter
Resonance
(+99)
0...+99
FilterEG
Int.
(+99)
Dedicated
parameter
forFilterEG
FilterLFO1/ (+99)
2Int.
0...+99
99...0...+99
Filter
Output
LevelA/B
(+99)
0...+99
99...0...+99
0...+99
0...+99
1...0...+1
Octaves
EXT (Tempo) *2
=...60.00...120.00...240.00...
Dedicated
parameter
1...0...+1
Octaves
1...0...+1
Octaves
1...0...+1
Octaves
1...0...+1
Octaves
Dedicatedparameter
Dedicated
parameter
forFilter
KTrk
99...0...+99
100+10
Octaves
100+10
Octaves
(+99)
0...+99
99...0...+99
(+99)
0...+99
99...0...+99
Amp
(+99)
Dedicated
parameter
0...1x...8x
Dedicated
parameter
Amp
LFO1/2Int.
(+99)
0...+99
99...0...+99
Pan
(+50)
0...+63
EGLevel
(+66)
EGTime
(+49)
0...1x...8x
Dedicated
parameter
forAmp
KTrk
0...+10
Octaves
0...+99
0...+99
0...+99
0...1x...8x
1x...8x
99...0...+99
0...+99
99...0...+99
0...+99
63...0...+63
99...0...+99
99...0...+99
Drive
0...+1
Octave
0...+99
99...0...+99
LowBoost
0...+1
Octave
0...+1
Octave
99...0...+99
0...+63
1/64x...1x...64x
1x...64x
LFO1
(+99)
Frequency*4
1x...64x
1/64x...
1x...64x
(LFO2
only)
1/64x...1x...64x
1x...64x
LFO2
(+99)
Frequency*4
1x...64x
1/64x...1x...64x
1x...64x
Common
(+99)
LFO
Frequency*4
342
LFO1 & 2
99...0...+99
1/64x...1x...64x
1x...64x
LFO1
Shape
(+99)
0...+99
99...0...+99
(LFO2
only)
99...0...+99
0...+99
LFO2
Shape
(+99)
0...+99
99...0...+99
0...+99
Common
LFO
Shape
(+99)
99...0...+99
0...+99
343
Appendices
levelfalls.Withnegative()valuesofIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoB,thephaseoftheLFOwillbeinverted.
IfyouuseacontrollersuchasSW1or2astheAMS,you
canapplytheautowaheffectwhendesiredbypressing
theSW1orSW2switch.
344
EG Reset
Pitch EG (Prog 28a)
Filter EG (Prog 35a)
Amp EG (Prog 43a)
YoucanusetheEG,LFO,keyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempoetc.tocontrolEGReset.UsetheThresholdsettingto
specifytheAMSvalueatwhichresultwilloccur.
BysettingAMStoCommonLFO,youcanresetthe
envelopecyclicallyattheintervaloftheCommonLFO.
Theresultisjustasiftheshapespecifiedbytheenvelope
werebeingusedasaspecialLFO.
YoucanresettheenvelopebysettingAMStoacontroller
suchasJS+Y,andoperatingthecontrollerwhendesired,
producingaoneshotfilterenvelopesweep.
EG Level
Pitch EG (Prog 28c)
Filter EG (Prog 35c)
Amp EG (Prog 43c)
EGlevelscanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,keyboard
tracking,controllers,ortempoetc.
YoucanspecifyanIntensityvalueforeachEGsegment
(Start,Attack,Break).IfyousettheIntensityvalueto+66,
youwillbeabletocontroltherespectivelevelovera
maximumrangeof99.
SetAMStoVelocityforAmpEGLevelModulation,
IntensityStartto+00,Attackto+66,andBreakto66.
SetallAmpEGlevelsto+00.Asyouplaywithincreasing
velocity,theEGlevelswillchangemoregreatly.Atthe
maximumvelocity,theStartLevelwillstayat+00,butthe
AttackLevelwillchangeto+99andtheBreakLevelwill
changeto99.
EG Time
Pitch EG (Prog 28c)
Filter EG (Prog 35c)
Amp EG (Prog 43d)
EGtimescanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,keyboard
tracking,controllers,ortempoetc.
YoucanspecifyanIntensityvalueforeachEGsegment
(Attack,Decay,Slope,Release).EGtimesaredetermined
bytheAlternateModulationvaluewhenthepreceding
pointisreached.Forexample,theAlternateModulation
valueatthemomenttheenvelopereachestheattacklevel
willdeterminethedecaytime.
IfIntensityissettoavalueof8,17,25,33,41,or49,the
correspondingtimecanbemultipliedbyamaximumof2,4,
8,16,32,or64times(ordividedby1/2,1/4,1/8,1/16,1/32,1/
64).
SelectJS+Y:CC#01forAMS,andsetAMSIntensityto+8,
Atto+,Dcto,andSlandRlto0.Whenyoumovethe
joystickinthe+Ydirection,theAttackTimewillbe
lengthenedbyamaximumof2times.TheDecayTime
willbeshortenedbyamaximumof1/2.TheSlopeand
Releasetimeswillnotchange.
345
Appendices
Wet
Wet / Dry=60:40
Amt= 50
noteon/off(p.347)
Gate1+Dmpr
noteon+damperon/off(p.347)
Gate2
noteon/off(retrigger)(p.347)
Gate2+Dmpr
noteon+damperon/off(retrigger)(p.347)
NoteNumbr
notenumber
Velocity
velocity
ExpVelocity
exponentialvelocity(p.347)
AfterTouch
aftertouch(ChannelAfterTouch)reception
JSX
joystickX(horizontal)direction
JS+Y:#01
joystick+Y(Verticalupward)direction(CC#01)
JSY:#02
joystickY(Verticaldownward)direction
(CC#02)
Pedal:#04
assignablefootpedal(CC#04)(p.347)
FXCtrl1:#12
MIDIeffectcontrol1(CC#12)
FXCtrl2:#13
MIDIeffectcontrol2(CC#13)
Ribbon:#16
MIDIControlChange(CC#16)
ValSldr:#18
MIDIControlChange(CC#18)(p.347)
KnobM1:#17
RealtimeControlsUSERknob(knob
modulation1CC#17)(p.347)
KnobM2:#19
RealtimeControlsUSERknob(knob
modulation2CC#19)(p.347)
KnobM3:#20
RealtimeControlsUSERknob(knob
modulation3CC#20)(p.347)
KnobM4:#21
RealtimeControlsUSERknob(knob
modulation4CC#21)(p.347)
KnobM1[+]
RealtimeControlsUSERknob1[+](p.347)
KnobM2[+]
RealtimeControlsUSERknob2[+](p.347)
KnobM3[+]
RealtimeControlsUSERknob3[+](p.347)
60:40
D -mod
10:90
Dry
Zero
Higher
Max
Seetheindividualeffectsdescriptionsforexplanationsof
otherdynamicmodulationparameters.Parameterswhich
canbecontrolledthroughdynamicmodulationaremarked
bythe
symbol.
KnobM4[+]
RealtimeControlsUSERknob4[+](p.347)
Damper:#64
damperpedal(CC#64)
PrtaSW:#65
portamentoswitch(CC#65)
Sostenu:#66
sostenutopedal(CC#66)
InProgrammode,dynamicmodulationisalways
controlledviatheglobalMIDIChannel.
Soft:#67
softpedal(CC#67)
InCombinationandSequencermodes,dynamic
modulationiscontrolledviatheMIDIchannel
independentlyspecifiedbytheChforIFX15,MFX1,2,
andTFX.
SW1:#80
assignablepanelswitch1(SW1modulation
CC#80)(p.348)
SW2:#81
assignablepanelswitch2(SW2modulation
CC#81)(p.348)
FootSW:#82
assignablefootswitch(CC#82)(p.349)
MIDI:CC#83
MIDIControlChange(CC#83)
MIDI:CC#85
MIDIControlChange(CC#85)
MIDI:CC#86
MIDIControlChange(CC#86)
MIDI:CC#87
MIDIControlChange(CC#87)
MIDI:CC#88
MIDIControlChange(CC#88)
Tempo
tempo(internalclockorexternalMIDIclock
tempodata)(p.347)
346
dynamicmodulationisnotused
Gate1
Dmpr
Damper Pedal
On
Off
Gate1
Gate1+Dmpr
Time
Dmpr
Damper Pedal
Gate2
On
Off
Gate2+Dmpr
Time
Tempo
Theresultingmodulationwillbezeroat120BPM,the
maximumpositivevalueat240BPM,andthemaximum
negativevalueat60BPM.
347
Appendices
Controller Assignments
SW1/2 Assignments
Switchassignmentsaresavedseparatelywitheach
Program,Combination,andSong.
Formoreinformation,see:
Programs:13:ControllersSetuponpage 16
Combinations:11:ControllersSetuponpage 78
Sequencermode:11:Setuponpage 122
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeLockingtheJoystickon
page 25oftheOperationguide.
JS X Lock
LockstheeffectofthejoystickXaxis.
JS Y Lock
LockstheeffectofthejoystickYaxis(both+and
directions).
JS+Y Lock
Lockstheeffectofthejoystick+Ydirection.
JSY Lock
LockstheeffectofthejoystickYdirection.
ThefollowingfunctionscanbeassignedtoSW1andSW2.
Off
Thissettingdisablestheswitch.
SW1 Mod. (CC#80) (SW1 Modulation: CC#80)
SW2 Mod. (CC#81) (SW2 Modulation: CC#81)
ThisletsyouusetheswitchasanAMSorDmodsource.
NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignSW1ModorSW2Mod
tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithintheProgramor
Effect.
Eachtimetheswitchisturnedonoroff,ittransmitsthe
correspondingMIDICC(80or81);Offis0,andOnis127.
Thefollowingfunctionscanbeassignedasthefunctionof
knobs14whentheRealtimeControlsisassignedtoUSER.
KnobassignmentsaresavedseparatelywitheachProgram,
Combination,andSong.
Formoreinformation,see:
Programs:13:ControllersSetuponpage 16
Sequencermode:11:Setuponpage 122
Eachtimetheswitchisturnedonoroff,ittransmitsMIDI
CC#65;Offis0,andOnis127.
WithsinglePrograms,thissimplyenablesanddisables
Portamento,regardlessoftheoftheProgramsstored
PortamentoEnablesetting.
WithdoublePrograms,itsslightlymorecomplex.If
PortamentoiseitherenabledforbothOSC1and2,orofffor
both,thenthePortamentoSwitchcontrolsbothOSC.
IfPortamentoisenabledforonlyoneofthetwo,onlythat
elementwillbeaffectedbytheswitch;fortheotherelement,
Portamentowillalwaysbeoff.
Octave Down
Whentheswitchison(LEDlit),thepitchwillbetransposed
downbyoneoctave.
Octave Up
Whentheswitchison(LEDlit),thepitchwillbetransposed
upbyoneoctave.
Lock functions
TheLockfunctionsletyouuseSW1orSW2tolockthe
currentpositionofthejoystick.Thisleavesyourhandsfree
toplayonthekeyboard,ortouseothercontrollers.
Forinstance,letssaythatJS+Yisassignedtocreateafilter
sweep,andthatSW2isassignedtoJS+YLock.Youcanthen:
1. Movethejoysticktoopenupthefilter.
2. PressSW2toturnonJS+YLock.
3. Releasethejoystick.
SinceSW2islockingJS+Y,thefilterremainsopen,even
thoughthejoystickhasphysicallysnappedbacktoitscenter
position.
NotethatLockaffectsonlythephysicalcontrols.Evenif
LockisOn,incomingMIDImessagescanstillchangethe
joystick.
348
Combinations:11:ControllersSetuponpage 78
ThefollowingfunctionscanbeassignedtoRealtime
Controlsknobs14.
Off
Thissettingdisablestheknob.
Knob Mod. 14 (CC#s17, 19, 20, 21)
ThesesettingsletyouusetheknobasanAMSorDmod
source.Notethatyoullalsoneedtoassigntheknobto
controlthedesiredparameterwithintheProgramorEffect.
Master Volume
Thiscontrolstheoverallvolume,andtransmitsthe
UniversalSystemExclusiveMasterVolumemessage[F0H,
7FH,nn,04,01,vv,mm,F7H].Youcanusethistoadjustthe
volumesofallTracksorTimbresatthesametime,while
preservingtheirrelativebalance.
Portamento Time (CC#05)
Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Notethatadifferent
controller,CC#65,turnsPortamentoonandoff;see
Porta.SW(CC#65)(PortamentoSW:CC#65)onpage 348.
Volume (CC#07)
Controlsthevolume,andtransmitsCC#7.
Post IFX Pan (CC#08)
ControlsthepanningafterthelastInsertEffectinthechain,
andtransmitsCC#8.
Pan (CC#10)
Controlsstereopan,andtransmitsCC#10.
Expression (CC#11)
Expressionisasecondaryvolumecontrol,whichyoucan
usetoscalelevelwithoutaffectingthemainvolumesettings
orCC#7values.
Whenusedoneatatime,MIDIVolumeandExpression
affectlevelinexactlythesameway:aMIDIvalueof127is
equaltoProgramsmainLevelsetting,andlowervalues
Controller Assignments
reducethevolume.
IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously,theone
withthelowervaluedeterminesthemaximumvolume,and
theonewiththehighervaluescalesdownfromthat
maximum.
Knobs 14
RealtimeControlsknob14havepresetassignments,as
below:
349
Appendices
ARP VELOCITY
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsVelocity.
Whenyouusethiscontrol,theKROMEwillalsotransmit
thecorrespondingMIDIProgramChangeandBankSelect
messages.
(Footswitchonisequivalenttoturningtheknobtothefar
right;footswitchoffisequivalenttoturningtheknobto
thefarleft.)
Program Down
ThisdecrementsthecurrentProgramorCombination
number,forhandsfreepatchchanges.Formore
information,pleaseseeProgramUpabove.
ARP LENGTH
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsLength.
Value Inc
Operatingthefootswitchwillproducethesameoperation
aspressingtheINCbutton.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
21:MenuCommandonpage 202.
Value Dec
Operatingthefootswitchwillproducethesameoperation
aspressingtheDECbutton.
Song Start/Stop
Thefootswitchwillcontrolsequencerstart/stop.
Simultaneously,aMIDIStartorStopmessagewillbe
transmitted.
(Footswitchonisequivalenttoturningtheknobtothefar
right;footswitchoffisequivalenttoturningtheknobto
thefarleft.)
ARP STEP
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsStep.
(Footswitchonisequivalenttoturningtheknobtothefar
right;footswitchoffisequivalenttoturningtheknobto
thefarleft.)
Youcanconnectapedal(suchastheoptionalKorgXVP10
orEXP2)totherearpanelASSIGNABLEPEDALinput,
andthenuseittocontrolawidevarietyoffunctions,as
describedbelow.
ThissettingismadefortheentireKROME,ontheGlobalP2:
ControllersFootControllerspage.
Tap Tempo
ThisduplicatesthefunctionofthefrontpanelTAPbutton,
forsettingthesystemtempoinrealtime.
ARP ON/OFF
Thefootswitchwillturnthearpeggiatoron/off.
JS+Y (CC#01)
Theswitchwillcontroltheeffectproducedbyjoystick
movementinthe+Ydirection(Verticalupward).
Off
Thissettingdisablesthepedal.
JSY (CC#02)
Theswitchwillcontroltheeffectproducedbyjoystick
movementintheYdirection(Verticaldownward).
Value Slider (CC#18)
YoucanusethisgeneralpurposecontrollerasanAMSor
Dmodsource.Notethatyoullalsoneedtoassign
ValueSlider(CC#18)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithin
theProgramorEffect.
TONE [1]TONE [4]
USER [1]USER [4]
Usetheswitchtocontroltheeffectofknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlsisinUSER/TONE.
(Footswitchonisequivalenttoturningtheknobtothefar
right;footswitchoffisequivalenttoturningtheknobto
thefarleft.)
SW1, 2
Thefootswitchduplicatesthefunctionoftheselectedfront
panelswitch.
ARP GATE
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsGate.
350
(Footswitchonisequivalenttoturningtheknobtothefar
right;footswitchoffisequivalenttoturningtheknobto
thefarleft.)
Program Up
Thisletsyouusetheswitchtoincrementthecurrent
ProgramorCombinationnumber,forhandsfreepatch
changes.NotethatthisisonlyactivewhileontheProgP0:
PlayorCombiP0:Playpages,respectively.
Master Volume
Thiscontrolstheoverallvolume,andtransmitsthe
UniversalSystemExclusiveMasterVolumemessage[F0H,
7FH,nn,04,01,vv,mm,F7H].Youcanusethistoadjustthe
volumesofallTracksorTimbresatthesametime,while
preservingtheirrelativebalance.
Foot Pedal (CC#04)
YoucanusethisgeneralpurposecontrollerasanAMSor
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFoot
Pedal(CC#04)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthe
ProgramorEffect.
Portamento Time (CC#05)
Controlsthespeedatwhichportamentowillchangethe
pitch.
Volume (CC#07)
ControlthevolumeofaProgram,Combination,orofa
MIDItrackinSequencermodes.
Post IFX Pan (CC#08)
ControlthepanafterpassingthroughtheInsertEffect.
Pan (CC#10)
ControlthepanofaProgram,ofatimbreinaCombination,
orofaMIDItrackinSequencermodes.
Controller Assignments
Expression (CC#11)
Expressionisasecondaryvolumecontrol,whichyoucan
usetoscalelevelwithoutaffectingthemainvolumesettings
orCC#7values.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Expression(CC#11)onpage 348.
FX Control 1 & 2 (CC#s12 & 13)
TheseassignmentsareintendedforEffectDynamic
Modulation(Dmod).NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFX
Ctrl1or2tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithintheEffect.
MFX Send 1 & 2 (CC#s 93 & 91)
ThesecontrolthesendlevelstoMasterEffects1and2,
respectively.
CC#s93and91actuallycontrolsendlevelsintwodifferent
places:thesendsdirectlyfromtheProgramOSCandthe
sendlevelsofthelastInsertEffectinthechainwhich
matchestheCCsMIDIchannel.
JS+Y (CC#01)
ThisduplicatesthefunctionofJS+Y.WhateverJS+Yis
assignedtocontrol,thepedalwillcontrolaswell.
JSY (CC#02)
ThisduplicatesthefunctionofJSY.WhateverJSYis
assignedtocontrol,thepedalwillcontrolaswell.
Ribbon (CC#16)
YoucanusethisgeneralpurposecontrollerasanAMSor
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignRibbon
(CC#16)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthe
ProgramorEffect.
Value Slider (CC#18)
YoucanusethisgeneralpurposecontrollerasanAMSor
Dmodsource.Notethatyoullalsoneedtoassign
ValueSlider(CC#18)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithin
theProgramorEffect.
TONE [1]...TONE [4]
USER [1]...USER [4]
Usethepedaltocontroltheeffectofknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlsisinUSER/TONE.
ARP GATE
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsGate.
ARP VELOCITY
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsVelocity.
ARP SWING
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsSwing.
ARP STEP
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsStep.
351
Appendices
Event Edit
Event Edit
EQ Low Gain
*Unavailable*
Bus Select
T01:Bus Select
MaterVolume
Send1(MFX1)
T01:Send1(MFX1)
MasterBalance
Send2(MFX2)
T01:Send2(MFX2)
MasterFineTune
FX Control Bus
MasterCoarseTune
SW1:Assign
T01TA:SW1:Assign
Song Setup
Song Common
Drum Track
Track 01
Play/Mute/Solo
Parameter
352
Create/Erase
*Dump/Ext*
Tone Adjust
Controls [SELECT]
Controls [SELECT]
SW2:Assign
T01TA:SW2:Assign
SW3:Assign
T01TA:SW3:Assign
SW4:Assign
T01TA:SW4:Assign
SW5:Assign
T01TA:SW5:Assign
TA AutoLoad
Scale Type
Scale Type
SW6:Assign
T01TA:SW6:Assign
Scale Key
Scale Key
SW7:Assign
T01TA:SW7:Assign
Scale Random
Scale Random
SW8:Assign
T01TA:SW8:Assign
[SW1]
[SW1]
SW1:On/Off
T01TA:SW1:on/off
SW1:Assign
SW1:Assign
SW2:On/Off
T01TA:SW2:on/off
SW1:Mode
SW1:Mode
SW3:On/Off
T01TA:SW3:on/off
[SW2]
[SW2]
SW4:On/Off
T01TA:SW4:on/off
SW2:Assign
SW2:Assign
SW5:On/Off
T01TA:SW5:on/off
SW2:Mode
SW2:Mode
SW6:On/Off
T01TA:SW6:on/off
USER CONTROL1:
Assign
USER1:Assign
SW7:On/Off
T01TA:SW7:on/off
USER CONTROL2:
Assign
USER2:Assign
USER CONTROL3:
Assign
USER3:Assign
USER CONTROL4:
Assign
USER4:Assign
[ON/OFF]
DT:[ON/OFF]
Pattern Bank
DT:Pattern Bank
Pattern Number
DT:PatternNumber
SW8:(On)Value
T01TA:SW8:Value
Shift
DT:Shift
Slider1:Assign
T01TA:SL1:Assign
DT:In MIDI Ch
Slider2:Assign
T01TA:SL2:Assign
DT:Out MIDI Ch
Slider3:Assign
T01TA:SL3:Assign
Trigger Mode
DT:Trigger Mode
Slider4:Assign
T01TA:SL4:Assign
Trigger Sync
DT:Trigger Sync
Slider5:Assign
T01TA:SL5:Assign
Trigger Latch
DT:Trigger Latch
Slider6:Assign
T01TA:SL6:Assign
Keyboard Zone
Bottom
DT:KeyZone Btm
Slider7:Assign
T01TA:SL7:Assign
DT:KeyZone Top
Slider8:Assign
T01TA:SL8:Assign
Slider1:Value
T01TA:SL1:Value
SW8:On/Off
T01TA:SW8:on/off
SW1:(On)Value
T01TA:SW1:Value
SW2:(On)Value
T01TA:SW2:Value
SW3:(On)Value
T01TA:SW3:Value
SW4:(On)Value
T01TA:SW4:Value
SW5:(On)Value
T01TA:SW5:Value
SW6:(On)Value
T01TA:SW6:Value
SW7:(On)Value
T01TA:SW7:Value
Velocity Zone
Bottom
DT:VelZone Btm
Slider2:Value
T01TA:SL2:Value
DT:VelZone Top
Slider3:Value
T01TA:SL3:Value
Play/Mute
T01:Play/Mute
Slider4:Value
T01TA:SL4:Value
Solo
T01:Solo
Slider5:Value
T01TA:SL5:Value
Program
T01:Program
Slider6:Value
T01TA:SL6:Value
Pan
T01:Pan
Slider7:Value
T01TA:SL7:Value
Volume
T01:Volume
Slider8:Value
T01TA:SL8:Value
Play/Mute/Solo
Play/Mute
T02:Play/Mute
Tone Adjust
Slider8:Value
T16TA:SL8:Value
Arpeggio
[ON/OFF]
KAR:[ON/OFF]
T01:OSC Select
Run A
KAR:[LATCH]
Arpeggiator Assign
T01:Portamento
Run B
KAR:[MOD.CTRL]
Portamento
T01:Portamento
[GATE]
KAR:[M] SCENE
Transpose
T01:Transpose
[VELOCITY]
KAR:SceneQuantze
Detune
T01:Detune
[SWING]
KAR:LinkStartSeed
EX2 Bank
Select(MSB)
T01:EX2Bank MSB
T01:EX2Bank LSB
T01:OSC Mode
OSC Select
Bend Range
T01:Bend Range
T01:Prog's Scale
Track 02...16
Arpeggiator
Arpeggior-A, B
[STEP]
KAR:Load GE Opt
Pattern
KAR:UseRTCModel
KAR:Reset Scenes
T01:DelayTime:ms
Resolution
Delay MIDI/Tempo
Sync
T01:DelayMIDISync
Octave
KAR:DT Run 1
T01:Delay Base
Gate
KAR:DT Run 2
T01:Delay Times
Velocity
KAR:DT Run 3
Sort
KAR:DT Run 4
T01:Auto Prog EQ
Latch
KAR:DT Run 1
EQ Bypass
T01:EQ Bypass
Key Sync.
KAR:DT Run 2
EQ Input Trim
Keyboard
KAR:DT Run 3
EQ High Gain
KAR:DT Run 4
EQ Mid Freq
Keyboard Zone
Bottom
EQ Mid Gain
KAR:DT Run 1
System exclusive messages affected by Create Excl Data, Erase Excl Data, and Event Edit
Create/Erase
Insert Effect
Event Edit
Setup
IFX1:No Effect
IFX2:No Effect...
IFX5:No Effect
Common FX LFO1
Velocity Zone
Bottom
KAR:DT Run 2
KAR:DT Run 3
IFX1 SW
IFX1:SW
IFX1
IFX1
IFX1:Control Ch.
IFX1 Chain To
IFX1:Chain To
IFX1 Chain
IFX1:Chain
IFX1 Pan
IFX1:Pan
IFX1:Bus Select
IFX1:Control Bus
IFX1 Send1
IFX1:Send1
IFX1 Send2
IFX1:Send2
IFX2 SW
IFX2:SW
IFX5
IFX5:Send2
Parameter0
IFX1:Parameter0
Parameter71
IFX1:Parameter71
Parameter0
IFX2:Parameter0
Parameter71
IFX5:Parameter71
Frequency[Hz]
FX LFO1:Freq[Hz]
Sync(Reset)
FX LFO1:Sync
Sync Source
FX LFO1:Sync Src
Common FX LFO2
Master Effect
Setup
MFX1:No Effect
MFX2:No Effect
Total Effect
Setup
TFX:No Effect
MIDI/Tempo Sync
FX LFO1:MIDI Sync
FX LFO1:BPM
FX LFO1:Base Note
FX LFO1:Times
Frequency[Hz]
FX LFO1:Freq[Hz]
FX LFO2:Times
MFX1 SW
MFX1:SW
MFX1
MFX1
MFX1 Control
Channel
MFX1:Control Ch.
MFX1 Return
MFX1:Return
MFX2 SW
MFX2:SW
MFX2
MFX2
MFX2 Control
Channel
MFX2:Control Ch.
MFX2 Return
MFX2:Return
MFX Chain
MFX Chain
Chain Direction
Chain Level
Parameter0
MFX1:Parameter0
Parameter71
MFX1:Parameter71
Parameter0
MFX2:Parameter0
Parameter71
MFX2:Parameter71
TFX SW
TFX SW
TFX
TFX
TFX:Control Ch.
Master Volume
Parameter0
TFX:Parameter0
Parameter71
TFX:Parameter71
353
Appendices
correspondtoeachMIDImessage.
#indicatesafixedfunction,and*indicatesanassignable
function.
CC#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33...37
38
39...63
64
65
66
67
68...69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89...90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
114
115
116
117
118
119
354
Noteoff
Noteon(notenumber)
Noteon(velocity)
Polyaftertouch
Bankselect(MSB)
Modulation1
Modulation2
Footcontroller
Portamentotime
Dataentry(MSB)
Volume
PostInsertEffectpanpot
Panpot
Expression
Effectcontrol1
Effectcontrol2
ARPOn/Offcontrol
Controller(CC#16)
Knobmodulation5
Controller(CC#18)
Knobmodulation6
Knobmodulation7
Knobmodulation8
ARPGATEcontrol
ARPVELOCITYcontrol
ARPSWINGcontrol
ARPSTEPcontrol
Bankselect(LSB)
Dataentry(LSB)
Damper
PortamentoOn/Off
Sostenuto
Softpedal
Sustainlevel
Filterresonancelevel
Releasetime
Attacktime
Filtercutofffrequency
Decaytime
LFO1speed
LFO1depth(pitch)
LFO1delay
FilterEGintensity
SW1modulationOn/Off
SW2modulationOn/Off
FootswitchOn/Off
Controller(CC#83)
Controller(CC#85)
Controller(CC#86)
Controller(CC#87)
Controller(CC#88)
Effectdepth1(send2level)
Effectdepth2(IFX15On/Off)
Effectdepth3(send1level)
Effectdepth4(MFX1,2On/Off)
Effectdepth5(TFX1,2On/Off)
Dataincrement
Datadecrement
NRPN(LSB)
NRPN(MSB)
RPN(LSB)
0:Bendrange
1:Finetune
2:Coarsetune
RPN(MSB)0
Programchange
Channelaftertouch
PitchBend
Universalexclusive
Mastervolume
Masterbalance
Masterfinetune
Mastercoarsetune
Joystick
Realtime
Knob
TONE14
#(+Y)
#(Y)
#(Knob2)
#(Knob4)
#(Knob1)
#(Knob3)
Realtime
Knob
USER14
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
SW1,2
*(SW1)
*(SW2)
On/Off
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
[*]
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Knob1
(GATE)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
[*]
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Knob2
(VELOCITY)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
[*]
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Knob3
(SWING)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
[*]
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Knob4
(STEP)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
[*]
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Damper
Foot
Switch
*
*
Foot
Pedal
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*(1)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
+X,X
*
Available Available
forAMS forDmod
(1):WhenaarpeggiatorcontrollerisassignedtoaCC#
indicatedby[*](GlobalP2:ControllersMIDICC#
Assign)
*:Assignable
[*]:TheARPControllerscanbeassignedtoCC#00119.
CC#sindicatedby[*]willbeassignedautomatically
whenyouexecutetheGlobalP2MIDICC#Assign
menucommandResetControllerMIDIAssignwiththe
CCDefaultsetting.
TheCCDefaultsettingsaretheCC#srecommendedas
theCC#foreachofthesecontrollers.Normallyyou
shouldusethesesettingswhenassigningCC#s.
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,the
correspondingortheassignedcontrolchangewillbe
transmitted.
IfyouchooseUSER[1]USER[4],orSW1/2,itsMIDI
controlchangemessagewillbetransmittedaccordingtothe
settingsinRealtimeControlsKnobAssign,SW1/2Assign.
IfyouveselectedARPON/OFF,ARPGATE,ARP
VELOCITY,ARPSWING,ARPSTEP,thoseMIDIcontrol
changemessageswillbetransmittedaccordingtotheGlobal
P2MIDICC#Assignsettings.
transmittedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDI
Channel(Seq31(2)c).
IftheStatusisINTorBTH,operatingoneoftheKROMEs
controllerswillaffectonlythatMIDItrack.Simultaneously,
thesameeffectwillalsoapplytoanyMIDItrackwiththe
sameMIDIChannelsetting.
InthecaseofMasterVolume,theuniversalexclusive
messageMasterVolumewillbetransmitted.
YoucanmakesettingsforMIDIFilter(SeqP3)toenable
ordisablecontrolchangesandcontrollersforeach
track.Whenchecked,theoperationseffectivefora
StatusofINTorBTHwillbeenabled.Trackswhose
StatusisEXT,EX2,orBTHwilltransmitcontrol
changesregardlessofthissetting.
EffectdynamicmodulationcanbecontrolledwhentheCh
(Seq84a,92a)settingforIFX15,MFX1,2,orTFXmatches
theMIDIchannelofthetrackselectedbyTrackSelect.(In
thecaseofAllRouted,controlispossibleontheMIDI
channelofallroutedtracks.)
IfoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperatedduring
realtimerecording,thecorrespondingorassignedcontrol
changewillberecorded.
Thefollowingsectionsdescribesoperationineachmode.
Program mode
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,acontrol
changemessagewillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI
channel(MIDIChannelGlobal11a).
IftheRealtimeControlsissettoUSER,andknobs14
ortheassignablepedalareassignedtoMasterVolume,
theuniversalexclusivemessageMasterVolumewillbe
transmitted.
Combination mode
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,acontrol
changemessagewillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI
channel(MIDIChannelGlobal11a).
Simultaneously,themessagewillalsobetransmittedonthe
MIDIchannel(MIDIChannelCombi31(2)c)ofanytimbre
whoseStatus(Combi31(2)c)isEXTorEX2.
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,itseffect
willapplytoanytimbrewhoseStatusisINTandwhose
MIDIChannelsettingiseitherGchorthesameasthe
globalMIDIchannel.
InthecaseofMasterVolume,theuniversalexclusive
messageMasterVolumewillbetransmittedonlyonthe
globalMIDIchannel.
YoucanmakesettingsforMIDIFilter(CombiP5)to
enableordisablecontrolchangesandcontrollersfor
eachtimbre.Whenchecked,theaboveoperationswill
beenabled.
EffectdynamicmodulationcanbecontrolledwhentheCh
(Combi84a,92a)settingforIFX15,MFX1,2,orTFXis
eithersettoGchortothesamechannelastheglobalMIDI
channel.(InthecaseofAllRouted,controlispossibleonthe
MIDIchannelofanyroutedtimbre.)
Sequencer mode
WhenoneoftheKROMEscontrollersisoperated,itseffect
willapplytotheMIDItrack116thatiscurrentlyselected
byTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a).
IftheStatus(Seq31(2)c)ofthetrackselectedbyTrack
SelectisEXT,EX2,orBTH,acontrolchangemessagewillbe
355
Appendices
Control
Function
0127
bankselectmessageMSB
1 Modulation1
0127
correspondstojoystickmovementinthe+Ydirection(Verticalupward)
*1
2 Modulation2
0127
correspondstojoystickmovementintheYdirection(Verticaldownward)
4 Footcontroller
0127
correspondstowhentheassignablepedalfunctionissettoFoot
Pedal
5 Portamentotime
0127
portamentotime
6 Dataentry(MSB)
0127
MSBofRPNandNRPNdata
*2
7 Volume
0127
volume
*3
8 PostInsertEffectpanpot
0127
panaftertheInsertEffect
10 Panpot
0127
pan
11 Expression
0127
volume
12 Effectcontrol1
0127
correspondstoeffectdynamiccontrolsourceFXControl1(p.363)
13 Effectcontrol2
0127
correspondstoeffectdynamiccontrolsourceFXControl2(p.363)
14 ARPON/OFFcontrol
063(Off),
64127(On)
equivalenttoon/offwhenCC#14isassignedtotheARPbuttons
15
16 Controller(CC#16)
0127
forcontrollingAMSorDmod
17 Knobmodulation1
0127
correspondstowhentheRealtimeControlsknobfunctionissettoKnob
Mod.1
18 Controller(CC#18)
0127
forcontrollingAMSorDmod
19 Knobmodulation2
0127
correspondstowhentheRealtimeControlsknobfunctionissettoKnob
Mod.2
20 Knobmodulation3
0127
correspondstowhentheRealtimeControlsknobfunctionissettoKnob
Mod.3
21 Knobmodulation4
0127
correspondstowhentheRealtimeControlsknobfunctionissettoKnob
Mod.4
22 ARPGATEcontrol
0127
equivalenttowhenCC#22isassignedtoarpeggiocontrolknob1
(GATE)
*7
23 ARPVELOCITYcontrol
0127
equivalenttowhenCC#23isassignedtoarpeggiocontrolknob2
(VELOCITY)
*7
24 ARPSWINGcontrol
0127
equivalenttowhenCC#24isassignedtoarpeggiocontrolknob3
(SWING)
*7
25 ARPSTEPcontrol
0127
equivalenttowhenCC#25isassignedtoarpeggiocontrolknob4
(STEP)
*7
0127
LSBofbankselectmessage
2631
32 Bankselect(LSB)
3337
38 Dataentry(LSB)
3963
0127
LSBofRPNorNRPNdata
64 Damper
0127
dampereffect
65 PortamentoOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
turntheportamentoeffecton/off
66 SostenutoOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
turnthesostenutoeffecton/off
0127
softpedaleffect
67 Soft
6869
356
Value
0 Bankselect(MSB)
*3
*7
*8
*1
*2
70 Sustainlevel
0127
sustainlevelsofthefilterEGandampEG
*4
71 Filterresonancelevel
0127
resonancelevelofthefilter
*4
72 Releasetime
0127
cutofffrequencyofthehighpassfilter
*4
73 Attacktime
0127
releasetimesofthefilterEGandampEG
*4
74 Filtercutofffrequency
0127
cutofffrequencyofthelowpassfilter
*4
75 Decaytime
0127
decaytimes/slopetimesofthefilterEGandampEG
*4
76 LFO1speed
0127
LFO1speed
*4
CC#
Control
Value
Function
77 LFO1depth
0127
pitchLFO1intensity
*4
78 LFO1delay
0127
LFO1delay
*4
79 FilterEGintensity
0127
filterEGintensity
*4
80 SW1modulationOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
correspondstoon/offwhentheSW1functionissettoSW1Mod.
81 SW2modulationOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
correspondstoon/offwhentheSW2functionissettoSW2Mod.
82 FootswitchOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
correspondstoon/offwhenthefunctionoftheassignablefootswitchisset
toFootSW
83 Controller(CC#83)
0127
forcontrollingAMSorDmod
84
0127
forcontrollingAMSorDmod
0127
send2level
8588 Controller(CC#8588)
89,90
91 Effectdepth1(send2level)
Effectdepth2(InsertEffect15On/ 063(Off),
92
Off)
64127(On)
turnInserteffect15on/off
93 Effectdepth3(send1level)
0127
send1level
Effectdepth4(mastereffect1,2
94
On/Off)
063(Off),
64127(On)
mastereffect1,2on/off
*5
95 Effectdepth5(totaleffectOn/Off)
063(Off),
64127(On)
totaleffecton/off
*5
96 Dataincrement
97 Datadecrement
98 NRPN(LSB)
LSBofNRPN
99 NRPN(MSB)
MSBofNRPN
*5
selectsthepitchbendrange
*2
100 RPN(LSB)
controlsFineTune
*2
controlsCoarseTune
*2
101 RPN(MSB)
MSBofRPN
102...119
Youcanassignanycontrolchangenumber(CC#00119)to
theRealtimeControlsKnobsUSER14.Inthiscase,the
transmittedvalueswillallbe0127.
Youcanassignanycontrolchangenumber(CC#00119)to
theARPbutton,arpeggiocontrolknobs14.Inthiscase,
ARPbuttonswilltransmitvaluesof0(Off)or127(On),
knobs14willtransmitvaluesof0127.
*1 IntheKROMEsequencer,bankselectmessagesare
normallyspecifiedasprogramchangeevents(MIDI
EventEditSequencerP6).Howeverinsomecasesthis
willbeinsufficientwhenyouwishtochangebanksonan
externaldevice.Insuchcases,youcanuseCC#00and
CC#32tospecifythebanks.
Forinformationontherelationbetweenbankselect
numbersandthebanksofyourexternaldevice,referto
theownersmanualforyourexternaldevice.
*2 Unlikeconventionalcontrolchanges,pitchbendrange,
finetune,andcoarsetunesettingsaremadeusingRPC
(RegisteredParameterControl)messages.InProgram,
Combination,andSequencermodes,youcanuseRPC
messagestocontrolthebendrangeandtuningforeach
program,Timbre(Combination),orTrack(Sequencer).
TheprocedureistouseanRPN(RegisteredParameter
Number)messagetoselecttheparameterthatyouwish
toedit,andthenuseDataEntrytoinputavalueforthat
parameter.Toselecttheparameter,useCC#100(witha
valueof0002)andCC#101(withavalueof00).use
CC#06andCC#38toenterthedata.
Thedataentryvaluesforeachparameterandthecorre
spondingsettingsareasfollows.
00
12
00
+12
24
00
+24
127
00
+24
CC#06 CC#38
0
00
-100
64
00
127
00
+98
127
127
+99
00
-24
40
00
-24
64
00
88
00
+24
127
00
+24
Forexample,ifinSequencermodeyouwishtoseta
MIDItrackthatisreceivingchannel1toatranspose
(coarsetuning)valueof12,youwouldfirsttransmit[B0,
64,02](64H=CC#100)and[B0,65,00](65H=CC#101)to
theKROMEtoselecttheRPNcoarsetune.Thenyou
357
Appendices
Eachknobandbuttoncanbeassignedtoanydesired
MIDIcontrolchangemessageCC#00119,butnormally
youwillchoosetheGlobalP2MIDICC#Assignmenu
commandResetControllerMIDIAssignandusetheCC
Defaultsettings.
wouldsetthisto12bytransmitting[B0,06,34]
(06H=CC#6),34H=52(correspondsto12),and[B0,26,
00](26H=CC#38,00H=0).
*3 ThevolumeoftheKROMEisdeterminedbymultiplying
theVolume(CC#07)withtheExpression(CC#11).In
Sequencermodewhenyoustopthesongplaybackand
returnthelocationtothebeginningofthetrack,the
Volumewillbesettothestartingvalue,andthe
Expressionwillbesettothemaximumvalue(127).
*4 Avalueof64willcorrespondtothevaluespecifiedby
theprogramparameter.0istheminimum,and127isthe
maximum.Changingfrom631orfrom65126will
adjusttheeffectfromtheprogramparametersetting
towardtheminimumvalueormaximumvalue.
Fordetailsaboutthespecificparameterscontrolledby
theseCCs,pleaseseeParameterscontrolledbyMIDI
CCs#7079onpage 358.
*5 ControlledontheglobalMIDIchannel.
*6 IfyouassignaCC#totheARPbuttonorarpeggiocontrol
knobs14andperformtheseoperationsontheKROME,
theassignedCC#willbetransmitted,andtheKROME
itselfwillalsobecontrolledatthesametime.Ifthis
messageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameasifthe
KROMEitselfhadbeenoperated.
TheCC#settingsforeachknobandbuttonaremadein
theGlobalP2MIDICC#Assignpage.Usethesesettings
ifyouneedtoassigncontrolchangemessages,forexam
plewhenyouwanttorecordbuttonoperationsonthe
internalsequenceroranexternalMIDIsequencer,orto
controlthearpeggiatorfromanexternalMIDIdevice.
CC#
358
ThistableshowstheoperationsfortheCCDefaultset
tings.TheCCDefaultsettingsaretheCC#srecom
mendedforusewiththesecontrollers.Normally,you
willassigntheseCC#s.
70(Sustainlevel)
FilterEG1/2Sustain(seepage 32)
AmpEG1/2Sustain(seepage 39)
71(Filterresonance)
FilterA/B,1/2Resonance(seepage 27)
72(Releasetime)
FilterEG1/2Release(seepage 32)
AmpEG1/2Release(seepage 39)
73(Attacktime)
EGTimes:
FilterEG1/2Attack(seepage 32)
AmpEG1/2Attack(seepage 39)
AmpEG1/2TimeModulation:Attack(seepage 39)
EGLevels:
AmpEG1/2LevelStart(seepage 38)
AmpEG1/2LevelAttack(seepage 38)
AmpEG1/2LevelModulation:Start(seepage 40)
74(Filtercutofffrequency)
FilterA/B,1/2Frequency(seepage 27)
75(Decaytime)
FilterEG1/2Decay(seepage 32)
FilterEG1/2Slope(seepage 32)
AmpEG1/2Decay(seepage 39)
AmpEG1/2Slope(seepage 39)
76(LFO1speed)
LFO1Frequency(seepage 42)
77(LFO1Pitchintensity)
PitchLFO1Intensity(seepage 22)
78(LFO1delay)
LFO1Delay(seepage 43)
79(FilterEGintensity)
FilterEG1/2IntensitytoA(seepage 30)
FilterEG1/2IntensitytoB(seepage 30)
MIDI applications
MIDI applications
About MIDI
MIDIstandsforMusicalInstrumentDigitalInterface,andis
aworldwidestandardforexchangingvarioustypesof
musicaldatabetweenelectronicmusicalinstrumentsand
computers.WhenMIDIcablesareusedtoconnecttwoor
moreMIDIdevices,performancedatacanbeexchanged
betweenthedevices,eveniftheyweremadebydifferent
manufacturers.
IfyouveconnectedtheKROMEtoacomputerorexternal
MIDIsequencerandwanttousetheechobackfromthat
devicetoplaytheKROME,turnechobackonforyour
externalMIDIsequencerorcomputer(sothatthedatait
receivesatMIDIINwillberetransmittedfromMIDIOUT),
andturnofftheKROMEslocalcontrolsetting(sothatthe
KROMEskeyboardsectionandsoundgeneratorwillbe
internallydisconnected).
WhenyouplaythekeyboardoftheKROME,themusical
datawillbetransmittedtotheexternalMIDIsequenceror
computer,andthenechoedbacktoplaytheKROMEstone
generator.Inotherwords,byturningLocalControlOFF,
youcanpreventnotesfrombeingsoundedinduplicate,as
wouldotherwiseoccurifanoteweresoundedbythe
KROMEsownkeyboardandagainbythedatathatwas
echoedback.
Herewewillexplainthesettingsyoullmakeonthe
KROMEwhenconnectingittoanotherdevice.
Ifthearpeggiatorfunctionison,playingtheKROMEs
keyboardwillnotcausethearpeggiatortooperate,andonly
themusicaldataproducedbyplayingthekeyboardwillbe
transmitted.Thearpeggiatorwilloperateonlyinresponse
tothenotesthatareechoedbackandreceivedatMIDIIN.
Inthisway,turningoffLocalControlpreventsthe
arpeggiatorfromoperatinginduplicate.
Usethissettingwhenyouwishtorecordontheexternal
MIDIsequencerorcomputeronlythenotesthattriggerthe
arpeggiator,andtousetheechoedbacknotestooperatethe
arpeggiatorwhilemonitoringyourrecordingorduring
playback.
Note:Ifyouwantthenotedataproducedbythearpeggiator
toberecordedontheexternalsequencer/computer,setLocal
Controlon,andturnofftheEchoBacksettingoftheexternal
sequencer/computer.
ToturnoffLocalControl,presstheLocalControlOn
(Global11a)checkboxtouncheckit.
WhenusingtheKROMEbyitself,leaveLocalControl
turnedon.(IfthisisoffwhentheKROMEisusedbyitself,
playingthekeyboardwillnotproducesound.)
IncomingMIDIdatawillbehandledwithsettingsequiv
alenttoKeyTranspose0,VelocityCurve4,andAfter
TouchCurve3.
WhencontrollingtheKROMEstonegeneratorfroman
externalMIDIdevice,selectPostMIDI.Theabovelisted
settingswillaffecttheMIDIdatathatisreceived.These
settingswillalsoaffectthedatathatisplayedbackfrom
theinternalsequencer.
OutgoingMIDIdatawillbehandledwithsettingsequiv
alenttoKeyTranspose0,andVelocityCurve4.
359
Appendices
MIDI channels
MIDImessagescanbeexchangedwhenthetransmitting
andreceivingdevicesaresettothesameMIDIchannel.
MIDIusessixteenchannels,numbered116.Thewayin
whichchannelsarehandledwilldifferdependingonthe
mode.
Program mode
OtherthantransmissionfortheDrumTrackfunction,all
dataistransmittedandreceivedontheglobalMIDI
channel.
TheglobalMIDIchannelisthebasicchannelthatthe
KROMEusesforMIDItransmission/reception,andisset
byMIDIChannel(Global11a).
TheDrumTrackfunctioninProgrammodewilltransmit
andreceiveonthefollowingMIDIchannels.
Receive:GlobalMIDIchannel.
Transmit:TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbytheDrumTrack
ProgMIDIOut(Global11a)setting(default:channel
10).
Note:TransmissionisenabledifDrumTrackProgMIDI
Out(Global11a)ischecked.Bydefault,thisisoff
(unchecked).
Combination mode
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedtotransmit/receive
messagesforselectingacombinationandturningeffects
on/off,andtotransmit/receiveexclusivedata.
Eachtimbrewilltransmit/receiveMIDIdataontheMIDI
Channel(Combi31(2)c)thatisspecifiedforthattimbre.
TheDrumTrackfunctionwilltransmitandreceiveonthe
followingMIDIchannels.
Receive:GlobalMIDIchannel.TheKROMEskeyboard
willcontroltriggering.
Transmit:TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbytheDrumPat
ternOutput(Combi76a)settingofeachcombination.
SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofatimbretowhicha
drumprogramisassigned.
TheChMIDIchannelspecifiedforeacheffect(Combi8
4a,92a)isusedtocontroldynamicmodulationofthe
insert/master/totaleffect,thepanfollowingtheinsert
effect,andsend1and2.
Whenyouoperatethekeyboardorcontrollersofthe
KROME,messageswillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI
channel,andwillalsobetransmittedontheMIDIchannel
ofanytimbrewhoseStatus(Combi21a)issettoEXTor
EX2.
ChannelmessageswillbereceivediftheymatchtheMIDI
channelofatimbrewhoseStatusissettoINT(Combi3
1(2)c).
Sequencer mode
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedtotransmit/receive
exclusivedataandformessagesthatswitcheffectson/off.
MIDIdatatransmission/receptionforeachMIDItrack
willoccurontheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachMIDI
trackbyMIDIChannel(Seq31(2)c).
TheDrumTrackfunctionwilltransmitandreceiveonthe
followingMIDIchannels.
360
Receive:TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbytheDrumPat
ternInput(Seq11a)settingofeachsong.Youwillnor
mallysetthistoTchandusetheKROMEskeyboardto
controltriggering.
Transmit:TheMIDIchannelspecifiedbytheDrumPat
ternOutput(Seq11a)settingofeachsong.Setthisto
matchtheMIDIchanneloftheMIDItracktowhicha
drumpatternisassigned.
TheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeacheffectbytheCh
parameter(Seq84a,92a)isusedtocontroldynamic
modulationoftheinsert/master/totaleffect,thepan
followingtheinserteffect,andsend1and2.
Whenyouoperatethekeyboardorcontrollersofthe
KROME,messageswillbetransmittedontheMIDI
channelselectedbyTrackSelect(Seq01(2)a).However,
messageswillbetransmittedonlyiftheselectedMIDI
trackhasaStatusofBTH,EXT,orEX2.Formore
information,pleaseseeTrackSelectonpage 110.
Whenthesequencerisplayedback,musicaldataofMIDI
trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2willbe
transmittedonthespecifiedMIDIchannels.
MIDItrackswhoseStatusisINTorBTHwillreceive
channelmessagesofthematchingMIDIchannel.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeStatusonpage 125,and
MIDIChannelonpage 125.
Note on/off
Note-on [9n, kk, vv]
Note-off [8n, kk, vv]
(n:channel,kk:notenumber,vv:velocity)
WhenyouplayanoteontheKROMEskeyboard,itwill
transmitnoteon/offmessages.
Whenthearpeggiatorisrunning,noteon/offmessages
generatedbythearpeggiatoraretransmitted.IfLocalisOff,
noteon/offmessagesgeneratedbythearpeggiatorwillnot
betransmitted.(SeeLocalControlOnsettingson
page 359)
IftheDrumTrackProgMIDIOutsetting(Global11a)is
checked,thedrumtrackpatternwilltransmitnoteon/off
messageswhilethedrumtrackfunctionisoperating.
However,mostinstrumentsdonotreceiveortransmitnote
offvelocity,andneitherdoestheKROME.
MIDI applications
actuallychangewhenaProgramChangemessageis
received.
Program mode
InProgP0:Play,thesemessageswilltransmitandreceive
programchangeandbankselectoperations.Theywillnot
bereceivedinP1P9.
Note:Drumtrackprogramsdonotsupporttransmissionor
receptionofprogramchangeorbankselectmessages.
Selecting combinations
Youcanuseprogramchangeandbankselectmessagesto
selectcombinationsinthesamewaythatyouselect
programs.
Combinations000127inbanksADcorrespondto
programchanges[Cn,00][Cn,7F].
Similarlyasforprogrambanks,theinternalbanksthat
correspondtoeachbankselectnumberwilldependon
theBankMapsetting(Global02a).Formore
information,pleaseseeBankMaponpage 196.
InCombiP0:Play,programchangeandbankselect
messagesaretransmitted/receivedontheglobalMIDI
channel.TheyarenotreceivedinP1P9.
Note:AllprogramchangescanbeturnedoffinMIDIFilter
(Global12b)
Asneeded,youcanindependentlyturnallprogramchanges
on/off,specifywhetherornotincomingmessageswillbe
abletochangecombinations,andturnreception/
transmissionofbankselectmessageson/off.
IfCombinationChange(Global12b)isunchecked,the
combinationwillnotchangeevenifaprogramchangeon
theglobalMIDIchannelisreceivedinCombiP0:Play.In
thiscase,theprogramofthetimbrethatmatchesthe
MIDIchannelofthereceivedmessagewillchange.
IfBankChange(Global12b)isunchecked,bankselect
messageswillnotbetransmittedorreceived.
Aftertouch
Channel aftertouch [Dn, vv]
(n:channel,vv:value)
Whenthismessageisreceived,theaftertoucheffectwillbe
applied.Theassignedalternatemodulationordynamic
modulationeffectwillalsobeapplied.
ThekeyboardoftheKROMEitselfcannottransmit
aftertouch.Aftertouchcanbereceivedonlyfromthe
internalsequencerorfromMIDIIN.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,aftertouchcanbe
turnedon/offindependentlyforeachtimbre/track
(EnableAfterTouchCombi/Seq51(2)c).
Pitch bend
Pitch bend change [En, bb, mm]
(n:channel,bb:lowerbyteofthevalue,mm:upperbyteof
thevalue,togetherexpressingavalueof16,384stepswhere
8,192[bb,mm=00H,40H]isthecentervalue)
WhentheKROMEsjoystickismovedintheXaxis(left/
right),apitchbendeffectwillbeapplied,andpitchbender
messageswillalsobetransmitted.Whenthesemessagesare
received,apitchbendeffectwillbeapplied.
Therangeofpitchchangethatisproducedbypitchbend
messagescanalsobeadjustedviaMIDI.(SeeChangingthe
pitchbendrangeonpage 365)
Control change
[Bn, cc, vv]
Transmittedandreceivedas(n:channel,cc:controlchange
no.,vv:value)
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDItransmissionwhen
theKROMEscontrollersareoperatedonpage 354,and
KROMEandMIDICCsonpage 356.
Controlchangescanbeturnedon/offasawholein
EnableControlChange(Global12b).
InCombinationandSequencermodes,theP3:MIDI
Filter1settingsallowtransmission/receptionofcontrol
changestobeindividuallyturnedon/offforeachtimbre/
track.Fortheassignablecontrollers(SW1,SW2,Realtime
ControlsKnobUSER1USER4,andFootPedal/Switch),
MIDIfiltersettingswillapplytothecontrolchange
numbertowhicheachcontrollerisassigned.Other
ControlChangeappliestocontrolchangesthatarenot
coveredbytheitemsoftheothercheckboxes.
Note:YoucanselectMIDICC#00CC#119forknobs14
whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.
AlthoughyoucanselectMIDICC#00CC#119fortheARP
Controllers,youwillnormallyusethedefaultsettingsthat
areassignedwhenyouexecutethemenucommandReset
ControllerMIDIAssignwithDefaultSetting,ARP
ControllersSWARPON/OFFatCC#014,KNOB1ARP
GATEatCC#022,KNOB2ARPVELOCITYatCC#023,
KNOB3ARPSWINGatCC#024,KNOB4ARPSTEPat
CC#025.
Aftertouchreceptionfortheentireinstrumentcanbe
turnedon/offinEnableAfterTouch(Global12b).
361
Appendices
IfadjustingtheVolumemessagedoesnotincreasethe
volumeasyouexpect,orifthereisnosound,transmitMIDI
messagesfromanexternaldevicetoresetthevalueofthe
Expressionmessage(setvvto127).
Note:InSequencermode,thiswillberesetwhenthe
Locationofthesongismovedto001:01.000.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,transmission/
receptioncanbeturnedon/offforeachtimbre/track
(EnableJS+YCombi/Seq53(4)c).
InCombinationmode,Volumemessageswillbe
transmittedbyeachtimbrewhoseStatusisEXTorEX2
whenyoureselectthecombination.
WhenyouchangetheVolumesetting(Seq03(4)b)in
Sequencermode,orwhenyoureselectthesongorreturn
tothebeginningofthesonginSequencermode,volume
messageswillbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatus
isBTH,EXT,orEX2.SeeGlobalP1:MIDITrackMIDI
Outonpage 200.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,transmission/
receptioncanbeturnedon/offforeachtimbre/track
(EnableJSYCombi/Seq53(4)c).
Note:RegardlessoftheStatussettings,reselectingasong,
orreturningtothebeginningwillresettheinternalVolume
valuetothevaluespecifiedbyeachtrack(thestarting
settings),andwillresettheExpressionvaluetothe
maximum.
Othermanufacturersusethismessageforotherpurposes
(e.g.,breathcontroller,etc.)
Controlling portamento
Portamento time (CC#05) [Bn, 05, vv]
IfyouassigntheaboveCC#toanAssignablePedalorknobs
14whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected,rotating
thatknobwilltransmitPortamentoTimemessages,andwill
modifythespeedatwhichtheportamentopitchchanges.
Whenthismessageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameas
whenthecontrollerisoperated.
Portamento switch (CC#65) [Bn, 41, vv]
WhentheaboveCC#isassignedtoSW1,SW2orthe
AssignableSwitch,operatingthatswitchwilltransmit
vv=127[7F]forONorvv=0[00]forOFF,andtheportamento
effectwillbeswitchedon/off.Whenthismessageis
received,theresultwillbethesameaswhenthecontrolleris
operated.(vvof63[3F]orlesswillbeOFF,and64[40]or
greaterwillbeON.)(SeeSW1/2Assignmentsonpage 348)
InCombinationandSequencermodes,transmission/
receptionofthismessagecanbeturnedon/off
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnablePortamento
SWCombi51(2)c/Seq31a).
InSequencermode,portamentotime/switchmessages
willbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatusisBTH,
EXT,orEX2whenyousetPortamento(Seq33(4)c),re
selectasongorSMF,orreturntothebeginningofa
measure.Formoreinformation,pleaseseePortamento
onpage 126.
Controlling volume
Volume (CC#07) [Bn, 07, vv]
WhentheaboveCC#isassignedtotheAssignablePedalor
knobs14whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected,
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitVolumemessages,
andthevolumewillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,
theresultwillbethesameaswhenthecontrolleris
operated.
Expression (CC#11) [Bn, 0B, vv]
WhentheaboveCC#isassignedtotheAssignablePedalor
knobs14whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected,
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitExpressionmessages,
andthevolumewillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,
theresultwillbethesameaswhenthecontrolleris
operated.
362
ThevolumeoftheKROMEisdeterminedbymultiplying
thevalueoftheVolumemessagewiththevalueofthe
Expressionmessage.
Note:Thismessagecanbeusedtocontrolthevolumeof
eachMIDItrack.Normally,youwillincludeaVolume
messageintheMIDItracksettingdata(thesettingsatthe
beginningofthetrack)tosettheinitialvolume,anduse
Expressiontocreatechangesindynamicsasthesong
progresses.
ByusingtheuniversalexclusiveMasterVolumemessage,
youcanadjusttheoverallvolumewithoutchangingthe
volumebalancebetweentimbresortracks.(Aboutsystem
exclusivemessagesonpage 365)
MIDI applications
messageswillbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatus
isBTH,EXT,orEX2.Formoreinformation,pleasesee8
3b:InsertEffectonpage 149.
Controlling effects
Effect control 1 (CC#12) [Bn, 0C, vv]
Effect control 2 (CC#13) [Bn, 0D, vv]
WhentheaboveCC#isassignedtotheAssignablePedalor
knobs14whentheRealtimeControlsUSERisselected,
operatingthatcontrollerwilltransmitEffectControl1/2
messages,andthespecifieddynamicmodulationwillbe
controlled.Whenthismessageisreceived,theresultwillbe
thesameaswhenthecontrollerisoperated.
Althoughvarioustypesofcontrolchangecanbeselectedas
dynamicmodulationsources,EffectControl1(CC#12)and2
(CC#13)arededicatedfordynamicmodulation.
ThisisvalidinProgramSelect(Prog01a)and
CombinationSelect(Combi01(2)a)whentheprogramor
combinationnumber/nameisselected(highlighted).
OnthecorrespondingMIDIchannels,thiswill
simultaneouslycontrolthetimbre/tracksettingaswellas
thesettingfollowingtheInsertEffect.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,transmission/
receptionofthismessagecanbeturnedon/off
independentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableRealtime
ControlsKnobUER[1],USER[2],USER[3],USER[4]
Combi57(8)c/Seq57(8)c).
InCombination,andSequencermodes,theactualsend
levelofthetimbre/trackisdeterminedbymultiplyingthis
valuewiththesend1/2settingsforeachoscillator(Prog
81d).(SeeSend1(MFX1),Send2(MFX2)on
page 96,GlobalP1:MIDITrackMIDIOutonpage 200)
WhenyouadjustSend1(MFX1)orSend2(MFX2)
(Sequencer81b)inSequencermode,orwhenyoure
selectasongorreturntothebeginningofthemeasurein
Sequencermode,Send1/2willbetransmittedbyeach
trackwhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.(SeeSend1
(MFX1)onpage 148).
Knob modulation USER [1], USER [2], USER [3], USER [4]
(CC#17, 19, 20, 21)
[Bn, 11, vv], [Bn, 13, vv], [Bn, 14, vv], [Bn, 15, vv]
IftheaboveCC#areassignedtotheknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlsUSERmodeisselected,thesemessages
willbetransmittedwhentheknobsareoperated.
363
Appendices
OFF,andthesostenutoeffectwillbeturnedon/off.When
thismessageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameaswhen
thecontrollerisoperated(OFFforvv=63[3F]orbelow,and
ONforvv=64[40]orabove).
364
CUTOFFRELEASE,USER[1]...USER[4]Combi/Seq5
5(6/7/8)).
Note:InProgrammode,thecorrespondingprogram
parameterswillbetemporarilyeditedbythesemessages.
YoucanWritetheprogramtosavethemodifiedstate
(exceptforcertainparameters).TheWriteoperationcanalso
beperformedbyaMIDISystemExclusiveProgramWrite
Requestmessage,inadditiontotheusualmethodofusing
theKROMEsbuttons.Whenyouwritethedata,thevalues
ofthecorrespondingprogramparameterswillberewritten.
Note:Theresultsofreceivingthesemessageswilldepend
ontheinstrument.Theoperationmaybedifferentwhena
deviceotherthantheKROMEisconnected.
MIDI applications
Theprocedureisasfollows.
1. [Bn,65,00,64,00]:SelectRPNparameter00.
2. [Bn,06,mm,26,vv]:Usedataentrytosetthevalue.
Normallyonlytheupperbyteisused.
Avalueof0[mm,vv=00,00]is+00,andavalueof1536[mm,
vv=0C,00]is+12(oneoctave).Althoughitispossibletoseta
negativevalueforatimbre/track,onlypositivevaluescanbe
setusingRPNmessages.
3. Youcanusedataincrement(CC#96)[Bn,60,00]ordata
decrement(CC#97)[Bn,61,00](n:channel,valueis
fixedat00)tochangethevalueinstepsofone.
mm:ModelIDbytes2(01)
TheKROMEcanreceivethefollowingthreeRPNmessages
(tuning,transpose,andpitchbendrange).
ff:functionID(typeofmessage)
Tuning
F7:endofexclusive
Theprocedureisasfollows.
mm:ModelIDbyte1(00)
mm:ModelIDbytes3(15)
:
Note:ToobtainacopyoftheMIDIImplementationwhich
includesMIDISystemExclusiveformatinformation,please
contactyourKorgdistributor.
1. [Bn,65,00,64,01]:SelectRPNparameter01.
2. [Bn,06,mm,26,vv]:Usedataentrytosetthevalue.A
valueof8192[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,0[mm,vv=00,
00]is100cents,and16383[mm,vv=7F,7F]is+99cents.
Note:YoucanusetheuniversalexclusiveFineTune
messagetoadjusttheoveralltuningthatcorrespondstothe
MasterTune(GlobalP0:01a)parameter.(SeeAbout
systemexclusivemessagesonpage 365)
Transposing
RPN coarse tune [Bn, 65, 00, 64, 02]
ThisRPNmessagecanbeusedtoadjustthetransposition
foraprogramortimbre(inCombinationmode),orfora
track(inSequencermode).
Theprocedureisasfollows.
1. [Bn,65,00,64,02]:SelectRPNparameter02.
2. [Bn,06,mm,26,vv]:Usedataentrytosetthevalue.
Normallyonlytheupperbyteisused.
Avalueof8192[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,6656[mm,vv=34,
00]is12semitones,and9728[mm,vv=4C,00]is+12
semitones.
Note:YoucanusetheuniversalexclusiveCoarseTune
messagetoadjusttheoveralltuningthatcorrespondstothe
KeyTranspose(GlobalP0:01a)parameter.(SeeAbout
systemexclusivemessagesonpage 365)
Master balance [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 02, vv, mm, F7]
(vv:lowerbyteofthevalue,mm:upperbyteofthevalue,
togetherindicating16384steps,where8192isthedefault
365
Appendices
position,andlowervalueswillmovethesoundtowardthe
left)
Whenthisisreceived,theoverallpanningwillbeadjusted
withoutchangingtherelativepanningbetweentimbres/
tracks.
Master fine tuning [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 03, vv, mm, F7]
(Avalueof8192[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,4096[mm,vv=20,
00]is50cents,and12288[mm,vv=60,00]is+50cents.)
Whenthisisreceived,theMasterTune(GlobalP0:01a)
parameterwillbeset.
Drum kit parameter change and user arpeggio pattern parameter change
InGlobalmode,youcaneditdrumkitanduserarpeggio
pattern.
SincetheotherglobalparametersorSequencermode
musicaldatacannotbeedited,youwillusedatadumpsto
transferthisdata.
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedtotransmitandreceivethis
data.
Master coarse tuning [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 04, vv, mm, F7]
(Normallyonlytheupperbytemmisused.Avalueof8192
[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,6656[mm,vv=34,00]is12
semitones,and9728[mm,vv=4C,00]is+12semitones.)
FirstchecktheEnableExclusive(Global12b)settingto
enabletransmissionandreceptionofexclusivedata.When
youswitchmodesontheKROME,amodechangewillbe
transmitted.Whenyoueditindividualparameters,
parameterchangemessageswillbetransmitted.
Whenthisisreceived,theKeyTranspose(Global01a)
parameterwillbeset.
Whenthesemessagesarereceived,thesameediting
operationwillbeperformedasonthetransmitteddevice.
AfterMIDISystemExclusivedatahasbeenreceivedand
processed,aDataLoadCompletedmessagewillbe
transmitted.Thecontrolmasterdevicemustnottransmit
thenextmessageuntilthismessageisreceived(oruntila
sufficientintervaloftimehaselapsed).
Cautionsregardingdatadumpsandsoundediting
Dataforprograms,combinations,drumkits,userarpeggio
pattern,globalsettings,andsequencerdatacanbe
transmittedasMIDISystemExclusivemessages.The
operationofsendingthissystemexclusivedatatoan
externaldeviceiscalledadatadump.
Byperformingadatadump,youcanstoretheKROMEs
soundsandsettingsonanexternaldevice,orrewritethe
soundsandsettingsofanotherKROME.
Therearethefollowingtwotypesofdatadump.
WhenyouusetheDump(GlobalP1)menucommandto
dumpdata,varioustypesofinternalmemorydatawillbe
transmitted.IfthisdataisreceivedbytheKROME,the
datawillbewrittendirectlyintointernalmemory,andit
willnotbenecessarytoperformtheWriteoperation.(See
SendingSysExdatadumpsonReceivingSysExdata
dumpsonpage 219)
IftheEnableExclusive(Global12b)settingischecked,
datawillalsobedumpedinresponsetoaDumpRequest
message.Thisdataistransmittedandreceivedonthe
globalMIDIchannel.
WhentheKROMEreceivesthisdata,thedatawillbe
writtenintotheeditbuffer.Ifyouwanttosavethedata
intointernalmemory,youllhavetoexecutetheWrite
operation.ThiscanbedoneeitherbyexecutingtheWrite
operation(SeeWritingtointernalmemoryonpage 115
oftheOperationguide)ontheKROMEitself,orbya
MIDISystemExclusiveprogramwriterequest,combina
tionwriterequest,drumkitwriterequest,userarpeggio
patternwriterequestorglobalsettingwriterequest.
Parameter changes
InProgrammode,allparametersotherthantheprogram
namecanbeedited.
InCombinationmode,parametersotherthanthe
combinationnamecanbeedited.
InSequencermode,youcaneditthetrackparametersin
P0,1,2,3,4,and5,andtheP7:Arpeggiator/DrumTrack,
P8:InsertEffect,andP9:Master/TotalEffectparameters.
(SeeSystemExclusiveeventssupportedinSequencer
modeonpage 191)
366
Whenyouchangeuseparameterchangestoedit,the
changeswillaffectthedataintheeditbufferandwillnot
bestoredininternalmemoryunlessyouWrite,sothatthe
changeswillbelostifyoureselecttheprogramor
combination.TheWriteoperationcanbeperformedbya
MIDISystemExclusiveProgramWriteRequestor
CombinationWriteRequestmessage,inadditiontothe
usualmethodofusingtheKROMEsbuttons.Formore
information,pleaseseeWritingtointernalmemoryon
page 113oftheOperationguide.
Thereisnoneedtowriteasong,butitwillnotbebacked
upwhenyouturnoffthepower.Importantdatathatyou
wanttokeepmustbesavedtoanSDcardbeforeyouturn
offthepower.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSaving
toSDcardonpage 113oftheOperationguide.
MIDI applications
Note:MIDIClockExternalUSBwilloperateinthesame
wayasExternalMIDI.WiththeAutosetting,anexternal
MIDIclockreceivedattheMIDIINconnectorortheUSBB
connectorwillautomaticallycausetheKROMEtoswitchto
thesamemethodofoperationasExternalMIDIorExternal
USB.
arpeggiatorandthedrumtrackfunctioninCombination
orSequencermodewillbetransmittedfromtimbresor
MIDItrackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.)
Sequencer:TheKROMEwillnotbeabletocontrolthe
performancedata;itwillbecontrolledbytheexternal
MIDIdeviceconnectedtoMIDIINorthecomputercon
nectedtoUSB.Ifyouwishtoplaybacktheexternal
sequencertomaketheKROMEssequencerplaybackin
synchronizationtotheexternaltimingclock,youmust
firstsetthesametimesignatureandstartingmeasure
locationsonbothdevices.
EvenifMIDIClockissettoExternalMIDIorExternal
USBandtheKROMEisbeingcontrolledfromanexternal
device,musicaldatawillbetransmittedbytrackswhose
StatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.
367
Appendices
Setting example 1
Recordthenotemessagesgeneratedbythearpeggiatoror
RPPRfunctionontheexternalMIDIsequencer/computer.
1. TurnonthisinstrumentsarpeggiatororRPPRfunc
tion.SetthisinstrumenttoLocalControlOn.
2. TurnLocalControlOnforthisinstrument.
3. TurnEchoBackOffonyourexternalsequencer/com
puter.
Byturningechobackoff,youwillpreventthearpeggiatoror
RPPRfunctionfromperformingduplicateprocessingonthe
monitorednotesduringrecording.
4. Duringplayback,turnoffthearpeggiatorandRPPR
functionsofthisinstrument.
Setting example 2
UsetheexternalMIDIsequencer/computertorecordonly
thenotesthattriggerthearpeggiatororRPPRfunction,
andoperatethisinstrumentsarpeggiatororRPPR
functionformonitoringwhilerecording,andduring
playback.
1. TurnontheKROMEsarpeggiatororRPPRfunction.
2. SettheKROMEtoLocalControlOff.
ThenotemessagesgeneratedbythearpeggiatororRPPR
functionwillnotbeoutput.
3. OnyourexternalMIDIsequencer/computer,turnecho
backon.
Withthesesettings,thedatawillberecordedandplayed
correctly,andthearpeggiatororRPPRfunctionwillnotbe
appliedinduplicate.
Sequencer mode
InMediamodewhenyouconvertasongintoaStandard
MIDIFileandsaveit,youcanchooseeitherformat0or
format1.
IfKROMEsongdatathatwassavedasaformat1SMF
fileisloadedintoanotherdevice,thetrackconfiguration
maybedifferentthanitwasbeforebeingsaved.Thisis
becauseMIDItracksthatcontainnomusicaldataare
omitted,andtheremainingtracksaremovedintothe
unusedtracks.Thiswillnotaffecttheplaybackitself.
Ifsongdatathatwassavedbyanotherdeviceasaformat
1SMFfileisloadedintotheKROME,thetrack
configurationmaybedifferentthanitwasbeforebeing
saved.Thisisbecausetracksthatcontainnomusicaldata
areomitted,andtheremainingtracksaremovedintothe
unusedtracks.Thiswillnotaffecttheplaybackitself.
WhenexchangingsequencedatabetweentwoKROME,we
recommendthatyousavethesequencedatainthe
KROMEsnativeformat(SaveSEQ).
WhensequencedataissavedintheKROMEsnativeformat,
allofthesettingsandpatternsuniquetotheKROMEwillbe
saved,whichwillensureahigherlevelofreproducibility
thanwhenthedataissavedasaStandardMIDIFile(Save
toStdMIDIFile).
Parameterchangesandotherrecordeddataisincludedin
thesongdataasSystemExclusiveevents,soitcanbesaved
toorloadedfrommediaasusual.Exclusivemessagescan
alsobeloadedorsavedasSMF(StandardMIDIFile)data
(LoadStandardMIDIFile,SaveSongasStandardMIDI
File).ThisallowsrecordedSystemExclusiveeventstobe
savedasSMFdata,orexclusivemessagesincludedinSMF
datatobeconvertedintosongdata.
Duringplayback,thisdatacanbetransmittedtoanexternal
MIDIdevice,orusedtocontroltrackparametersoreffect
parametersofthesong.
368
Pad parameters
(Program, Combination, Song)
SincetheKROMEdoesnothavethesefunctions,the
correspondingparameterswillnotbeloaded.
KROME
RTKnob1A...4B
TONE[1][4],USER[1][4]knobs
ARPGATE,VELOCITY,
LENGTH,OCTAVE
ARPGATE,VELOCITY,SWING,STEP
KROME
RTKnob1A...4B
TONE[1][4],USER[1][4]knobs
ARPGATE,VELOCITY,
LENGTH,OCTAVE
ARPGATE,VELOCITY,SWING,STEP
XLMono
XLStereo
Drumsample
Mono
Mono
Stereo
Stereo
XLMono
XLStereo
369
370
March.15.'12
1. TRANSMITTED DATA
Consult your local Korg dealer for more information on MIDI System Exclusive implementation.
127
127
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
:
:
:
:
Combination
: Bank
A 000
:
B 000
:
C 000
:
D 000
:
:
:
:
:
-
127
127
127
127
*4 : For example, if time signature is 4/4 or 8/8, tt,ss = 00,10 means one measure.
*3 : When CC# by "CC Default" is assigned to the ARP Controllers in Global Mode.
Reset Controller MIDI Assign = CC Default
ARP ON/OFF
:CC#14
ARP Knob1 GATE
:CC#22
ARP Knob2 VELOCITY :CC#23
ARP Knob3 SWING
:CC#24
ARP Knob4 STEP
:CC#25
*2 : Program
Bank
A 000
B 000
C 000
D 000
E 000
F 000
GM 001
g(1)-(9) 001
g(d) 001
108
108
120
127
24
12
09
00
*1 : kk =
=
=
=
g :
ENA = A :
C :
P :
PB:
T :
Q :
n :
S Chg :
Transmitted when change a Song No.(Seq. mode). (Status = EXT,EX2,BTH)
C/S Chg : Transmitted when change a Combination or Song No.(Seq. mode). (Status = EXT,EX2 or BTH)
Pdl :
ASW :
Knob :
Appendices
MIDI Implementation
mm = 05
mm = 0E
mm = 17
)
)
)
)
g : Global Channel
vv : Value(LSB)
mm : Value(MSB)
mm,vv = 00,00 - 7F,7F : Min - Max
MIDI Implementation
371
372
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
Program
: Bank
A
:
B
:
C
:
D
:
E
:
F
:
GM
: g(1)-g(9)
:
g(d)
:
GM
:
g(d)
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
Program
: Bank
A
:
B
:
C
:
D
:
E
:
F
:
GM
: g(1)-g(9)
:
g(d)
:
GM
:
GM
:
g(d)
: Mute (KORG
000 000 000 000 000 000 001 001 001 001 001 001 MUTE)
127
127
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
128
128
128
127
127
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
128
128
Combination
: Bank
A 000
:
B 000
:
C 000
:
D 000
Combination
: Bank
A 000
:
B 000
:
C 000
:
D 000
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
*4 : When CC# by "CC Default" is assigned to the ARP Controllers in Global Mode.
n : When in Program/Combination mode, Global channel.
When in Sequencer mode, current selected track's channel.
For drum program, both of Fine Tune and Coarse Tune affect to Detune.
Data Entry LSB value has no effect for Pitch Bend Sensitivity and Coarse Tune.
MIDI In
[Hex]
mm,bb,pp = 3F,00,
3F,01,
3F,02,
3F,03,
3F,04,
3F,05,
79,00,
79,01-09,
78,00,
00,00,
38,00,
3E,00,
3F,7F,
MIDI In
[Hex]
mm,bb,pp = 00,00,
00,01,
00,02,
00,03,
00,04,
00,05,
79,00,
79,01-09,
78,00,
38,00,
3E,00,
000
000
000
000
000
000
001
001
001
001
001
g
x
ENA
AMS
: Alternate Modulation Source
FX Dmod Src : Effect Dynamic Modulation Source
Master Balance
[ F0,7F,0g,04,02,vv,mm,F7 ] 3rd byte g : Global Channel
6th byte vv : Value(LSB)
7th byte mm : Value(MSB)
mm,vv = 00,00:Left, 40,00:Center, 7F,7F:Right
Appendices